20240903IPC to Staff 21(c) Supplemental - Attachment 1 - RFP - T902 Construction - 3 Exhibit B OverheadManual.pdf

99'0*ORR
An IDACORP Company
20
4 1
Overhead Manual

Overhead Revised 05/07 02-00-01
Table of Contents
02- Mapping Symbols
02-01-01 General Mapping Information 02-03-01 Overhead Tagging
Types of Maps Capacitors
GIS Database 02-03-02 Fuses, Solid Blade Disconnects,
Feeder Maps Reclosers, Sectionalizers
Work Order Maps Gang-Operated Pole Top
Mobile GIS Switches
Outage Management System Regulators
(OMS) Autotransformers
Three-Phase Platform-
02-02-02 Mapping Symbols Library and Mounted Step-Down Bank
Details Single-Phase Single Pole-
Busbar-Circuit Breaker Mounted Autotransformer
02-02-02 Circuit Fuse-Connect Point 02-03-03 Oregon Pole Tagging
02-02-03 Connect Point-Enclosure Outline Customer-Owned Generation
02-02-04 Fault Indicator-Fuse Poles
02-02-05 Fuse-Open Point 02-03-04 Transformers
02-02-06 Pole-Primary Overhead Line Irrigation Pumps
02-02-07 Primary Underground Line- Apparatus Tank Labels
Recloser Transformers
02-02-08 Recloser-Secondary Meter Regulators
02-02-09 Secondary Meter-Sectionalizer 02-03-05 Reclosers
02-02-10 Switch Hydraulic
02-02-11 Switch-Transformer Electronic
02-02-12 Transformer-Underground Sectionalizers
Structure Hydraulic
02-02-13 Underground Structure-Details Electronic
02-02-14 Details continued Capacitors
02-02-15 Details continued
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
­­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-01-01
General Mapping Information
Types of Map
Idaho Power's mapping system uses a Work Order Maps contain information
Geographic Information System(GIS)database detailing new construction work to be
to store the permanent record, inventory, and the performed. Poles, guying,primary lines,
physical location of installed distribution secondary lines, service lines,phasing,location
facilities. This includes poles,primary and details, device designations, and field notes are
secondary conductors and cables, and all shown on the drawings. They are used by
overhead and underground devices; including construction crews and Mapping,as well as
transformers,pumps,and streetlights. There are other utilities and for coordination/permit
a variety of maps that are generated from the purposes. These maps are created electronically
database such as pump, streetlight, fielding, and utilizing data from the GIS database.A design
line team boundary maps;to name a few. These tool helps with the automated ordering of
maps are created upon request by the Mapping materials.
Department.
The Mobile GIS system is used by many
The GIS database is where the data for Feeder employees throughout the Delivery business unit
Maps,Work Order Maps,Mobile GIS system, to view and locate facilities across the service
and the Outage Management System originate. territory. It's also utilized as a redlining tool to
correct facility locations and related information
Feeder Maps are designed to show the electric and integrates with the Mobile Workforce
circuit schematic along with the approximate Management software.
location of lines and electrical apparatus. Feeder
maps depict a specific substation feeder or a Mobile GIS is also known by the software name,
portion thereof. Primary phase conductors and ArcFM Mobile. This title/name may change as
associated electrical devices (sectionalizing software venders change.
equipment,transformers, capacitors,regulators,
protection apparatus, etc.) are depicted along The Outage Management System(OMS)is an
with phasing and feeder tie designations. To outage tracking tool that models events taking
simplify the schematic poles,neutral and place in the field in real time. The data
secondary conductors,and devices(hand holes originates from the GIS Database.All
and pedestals)are not shown.A minimal amount distribution devices are operable in OMS to
of cadastral survey boundary and geographical model outages,display backfeeds, or show other
feature information is also provided to generally abnormal device conditions. Jumpers can be
locate the circuit elements. added to conductors to make the conductors
operable devices as well. OMS can display
which crews are assigned to events based on a
crew list stored within the application. OMS
interfaces with the Customer Information
System(CIS)to generate outage events. In case
the CIS interface is not operating,trouble calls
can be generated via a web-based Call Entry
system or through a trouble call entry option on
the environment manager toolbar. The data is
updated and maintained via nightly data extracts
and model builds.
DAHO
��POU R�
"°'° ...`°m General Mapping Information

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-01
Mapping Symbols Library
Mobile GI SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GI Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
BusBar BusBar N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
BusBar Local Service Secondary BusBar N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
BusBar Stations Inspections Bus N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
BusBar Stations Operations Bus N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Capacitor Customer Owned Capacitor T © N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
C1
H Fixed C144 C144
C 104 Capacitors are no 50 F 50 F 50144 Ca O
Capacitor Overhead Fixed Capacitor T600 ©50 N/A longer being N/A
installed T X
C113 C113 C113
C22 C28 900 SW 900 SW 900 SW
Capacitor Overhead Switched Capacitor T 1200SW © 1200SW N/A A A A N/A
DCB581
V �
T T
UC90 © C8 C8 C8
Capacitor Padmount Fixed Capacitor 1200 UC44 N/A 1200 1200 1200 N/A
®DPCAP71200
1200 T
UC2 UC42 C8 C8 C8
Capacitor Padmount Switched Capacitor 1200SW 1200SW N/A 1200 1200 1200 N/A
© © ®DPCAP11200
T
Capacitor Substation Fixed Capacitor BOIS11C015 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Capacitor Substation Switched Capacitor TUPSCO12 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker � ■ N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Circuit Breaker Power Circuit Breaker PCB N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
E'er IDiAHO
RNPOAMR. Mapping Symbols Library

02-02-02 Revised 08/21 Overhead
SIDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
Circuit Breaker Circuit Fuse Fill
Circuit Breaker Reclosef F121N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Circuit Breaker Circuit Virtual Feeder Bus Node 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
COGen CoGen Distribution SIMCOrG_1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ConduitDuct Customer Owned Conduit N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ConduitDuct Duct N/A N/A N/A
ConduitDuct Conduit Primary N/A N/A N/A
ConduitDuct Conduit Secondary Service N/A N/A N/A
N/A Conduit Stub(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A I I I N/A
Connect Point Circuit Crossing-No Connection N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Connect Point Connect Point • N/A N/A N/A • N/A N/A
Connect Point Deadend Open I I N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Connect Point FlyingTap O N/A N/A O N/A
Connect Point Splice N/A N/A N/A
Connect Point Tree N/A N/A N/A
Mapping Symbols Library '� Ra
AnIDACORPCa 11Y

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-03
SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
Connect Point V-Blade N/A ® N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A Down Guy(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A Not in GIS for N/A
extraction to AUD
N/A Double Down Guy(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A Not in GIS for � N/A
extraction to AUD
N/A Sidewalk Guy(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A E,/ Not in GIS for N/A
extraction to AUD
Push Brace Push brace N/A N/A N/A —*-O Not in GIS for �® N/A
extraction to AUD
Switch Gear M P 1 0 M P 10
N/A (Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A DVF140 ® N/A
MP11 MP11
N/A Submersible Switch Gear N/A N/A N/A DPV12T21 N/A
(Work Order only) 0J
Auto Transfer Switch DS P 12
N/A (Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A DSPA125 ❑ ® N/A
MP15
N/A Submersible Auto Transfer Switch N/A N/A N/A DSPA125 N/A
(Work Order only)
7 DSBX233
Enclosure Outline Basement Vault L ' N/A N/A ❑ ® N/A
r
EKRT42ET5 _
Installed as a Installed as a
Enclosure Outline Cabinet '�' ❑ N/A
Switch Gear or Switch Gear or
Auto Transfer Auto Transfer
Switch Switch
Enclosure Outline Man Hole ■ , /tom ❑ N/A N/A
Enclosure Outline Splice(Pull)Vault ■ N/A N/A ❑ DSBX233 ❑ ® N/A
Enclosure Outline Customer Owned Cabinet ■ N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Enclosure Outline Customer Owned Vault N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
E'er IDiAHO
�wPOWER Mapping Symbols Library

02-02-04 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Mobile GI SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Class Device Type MoW e G SA Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Fault Indicator Overhead-Non-Communicating • wA O O N/A
Fault Indicator Underground-Non-Communicating 1> wA O O ' N/A
Fault Indicator Line Monitor-Communicting Overhead wA N/A N/A N/A N/A
Fault Indicator Line Monitor-Communicting Underground N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
i
Fault Indicator AMI IPU(Inbound Pickup Unit) In-progress - N/A AMI IPU �'� AMI IPU In-progress N/A
AMI CRU/OMU *_ OAMI OAMI
/A
Fault Indicator (Control&Receiving UnitlOutbound Modulation In-progress N CRU&OMU CRU&0kJ In-progress N/A
Unit,Both devices at same location)
Fuse Fuse Customer Owned O N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F7
Fuse Encloser Fuse-Closed N/A U F25 0
Installed as a Removeded as a
Switch Gear symbol Switch Gear symbol
F24
Fuse Encloser Fuse-Open � N/A 0
Installed as a Removeded as a
Switch Gear symbol Switch Gear symbol
Fuse Gang Operated-Encloser Fuse-Closed ] N/A QUTF5207
Installed as a Removeded as a
Switch Gear symbol Switch Gear symbol
Fuse Gang Operated-Encloser Fuse-Open L•J N/A oUTF5208 .••
Installed as a Removeded as a
Switch Gear symbol Switch Gear symbol
F61 F164 F109 F109 F109
Fuse Line Fuse-Closed 40K 65K O N/A os�t a� 40K N/A
0 1 1 Y
F61 F164 F109 F109 F109
Fuse Line Fuse-Open 40K 65K N/A 40K 440K 40K N/A
OPEN
( 0 DSCS351 0 x
EN
Fuse Fuse-Substation Ps012D N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
UKN
F228 O F11 F11 F11
Fuse Term Fuse-Closed $0K N/A 51 — N/A
0 F 13 P I1 X
Mapping Symbols Library W`�R,,

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-05
Mobile GIS11 SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GIS Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
440 F N2 F11 F114 F114
Fuse Term Fuse-Open 80K 90K/OPEN N/A o C5151 2�OK 20K N/A
TFSN19 O DPPRPWG
F ✓9 >i font
M P 1 B J��l
Handhole Above Ground N/A N/A O DSBX914 - ® N/A
Handhole Below Ground - N/A N/A MP1A
N/A
O DSBX1324 ®
Handhole Customer Owned O N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Head Span Guy Head Guy }-(- N/A N/A N/A
Head Span Guy Span Guy )E N/A N/A N/A
Interconnect Point Distribution Interconnect Point ® N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Interconnect Point Border Point N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Unattached Joint Joint Use-Unattached Record N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Use
Light Streetlight-41A N/A N/A 123456 N/A
T�,�"" DLED20OT3S
Light Streetlight-41 B N/A N/A 123456 � N/A
"'TTT Dim20OT3s
Light Streetlight-OSL N/A N/A ;Q ill N/A
DNGARD
Neutral Isolator Neutral Isolator N N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Open Point Primary O I I I I I I I I N/A
Open Point Secondary(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A ' I N/A
E'er IDiAHO
EMPOAMR. Mapping Symbols Library

02-02-06 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Mobile GI SIDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GIS Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
Pole Distribution Pole N/A N/A 40-4 • ® N/A
0
Pole Foreign Pole • N/A N/A W N/A
Pole Joint Use Pole N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Pole Streetlight Pole N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Primary Meter Polemount Primary Meter * O N/A ® ® N/A
Primary Meter Padmount Primary Meter * N/A ® © ® N/A
Primary Meter Substation Primary Meter 12 Nil N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Line rimary Overhead Primary Overhead-2 Phase co N/A R N/A
Q
Primary Overhead Primary Overhead-3 Phase ro N/A R— N/A
Line
Q
V
Primary Overhead Primary Overhead-A Phase N/A R— N/A
Line Q
Line ary Overhead Primary Overhead-B Phase N/A R N/A
m
Primary Overhead Primary Overhead-C Phase N/A R N/A
Line V
Primary Overhead Primary Overhead-Abandoned Q N/A N/A N/A N/A
Line
Primary Overhead Primary Overhead-CustomerOwned V N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Line M
Q
Primary Overhead Primary Overhead-NeutralOnly —NON— N/A N/A N/A N N/A N/A
Line
Mapping Symbols Library WWMRa
AlIDACORPCa 11Y

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-07
Mobile GI SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GIS Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
Primary Primary Underground-2 Phase N/A N/A R N/A
Underground Line
Primary Primary Underground-3 Phase N/A R N/A
Underground Line
Primary Primary Underground-A Phase N/A R N/A
Underground Line
Primary PrimaryUnderground-B Phase - N/A R N/A
Underground Line
Primary Primary Underground-C Phase N/A R N/A
Underground Line
Primary Primary Underground-Abandoned N/A N/A N/A N/A
Underground Line
Primary Primary Underground-CustomerOwned --——-- N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Underground Line
Primary Primary Underground-NeutralOnly —N—N— N/A N/A N/A N N/A N/A
Underground Line
R106 R106 R106
Recloser Recloser 1 Phase overhead-Closed O R170 ® R224 N/A A ® A )KA N/A
DO
DR kNTSNOVAI5 CLOSED
R106 R106 R106
Recloser Recloser 1 Phase Overhead-Open ®R170 ® R224 N/A A ®A A N/A
DRKNTSN0v 5 OPEN
R106 R106 R106
Recloser Recloser 1 Phase Overhead w/ByPass-Closed 0 R1 70 ® R224 N/A A AA N/A
CLODRRIKNNTTSNOVAIS CLOSED
DSSB1535
R106 R106 R106
Recloser Recloser 1 Phase Overhead w/ByPass-Open @ R1 70 ® R224 N/A AEN ® A )KA N/A
DMIKNTSNOVA15 OPEN
DSS8153S
R200
' R107 R107 �/R107
Recloser Recloser 3 Phase Overhead-Closed e R HLH 170 HLH N/A ®CLO EOE AVCLOSED ap ABC N/A
R200
eR170 HLH R107 R107 R107
Recloser Recloser 3 Phase Overhead-Open SCADA N/A ® OPEN ® OPEN )K AaC N/A
DRWVE
R200/R170 'HLH R107 R107 R1 R1 07
Recloser Recloser3 Phase Overhead w/ByPass-Closed N/A ® CLOSED CLOSED N/A
SCADA
DRWVE
• DSS8153S
��IDiAHO
NNPMER. Mapping Symbols Library

02-02-08 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Mobile GIS11 SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
R200 R107OPEN h�l
PEN
Recloser Recloser 3 Phase Overhead w/ByPass-Open ®R170 SCADA N/A ®DRRVAE ® N/A
O DSS8153S
R71
Recloser Recloser Customer Owned � ® N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 Recloser Protection Package 1 Phase Overhead P41 n^ N/A P112® � P112 A P112 N/A
r I CLOSED 0.05tD
0 Recloser Protection Package 1 Phase Overhead w/ByPass ®P41 Pi N/A P112 P112 P112® N/A
CLOSED CLOSED
Recloser Protection Package 3 Phase Overhead 0 P41 © P90 N/A P112 P112 P112
® ® �A( N/A
CLOSED CLOSED A
O
Recloser Protection Package 3 Phase Overhead w/ByPass P41 © P90 N/A P112 ® P112® X P112 N/A
CLOSED CLOSED
RG30 RG21 B RG107 RG107 RG107
Regulator Regulator Overhead 1 Phase ® SOA N/A 100
A 0 100 J'lA N/A
® c,� A �'l
osrs9lsax
RG30 RG21 B RG111 RG109 RG109
Regulator Regulator Overhead 3 Phase 150A N/A '150 �RG1 X150 N/A
150
RG30
Regulator Regulator Customer Owned ® N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Regulator Regulator Substation R061 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FRG
DPRP2FG
Riser Primary Riser D NIA N/A � NIA
DPRS2
Riser Secondary Riser(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A > > }� N/A
SecondaryMeter Dairy Parlor ♦ N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
SecondaryMeter Dairy Parlor Net Meter N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
SecondaryMeter Meter Point N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Mapping Symbols Library WWMRa
AlIDACORPCa 11Y

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-09
Mobile GI SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GIS Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
SecondaryMeter Meter Point Net Meter N/A NA NA N/A N/A N/A N/A
SecondaryMeter Net Meter N/A NA NA N/A N/A N/A N/A
SecondaryMeter Pedestal O N/A NA ® O B N/A
SecondaryMeter Pedestal Net Meter N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
PunipT01RO13601 T01R013601 T01R013601
SecondaryMeter Pump to H.,.Humber 10 Horse Puowerer N/A 10 10 10 N/A
25 Horse Power 25
SecondaryMeter Pump Net Meter N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Secondary Secondary Overhead —-—- N/A N/A — — — — R N/A
Overhead Line
Secondary Service Overhead N/A N/A N/A N/A
Overhead Line
Secondary Secondary Overhead-Customer Owned N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Overhead Line
Secondary Secondary Underground - N/A N/A — — — R— N/A
Underground Line
Secondary Service Underground N/A N/A N/A N/A
Underground Line
Secondary Abandoned N/A N/A N/A N/A
Underground Line
Secondary Secondary Underground-CustomerOwned ■
Underground Line wA NA N/A N/A N/A N/A
Sectionalizer Sectionalizer ®S93 O 5142 N/A O SJ 4 /� N/A
No longer being
installed
Sectionalizer Sectionalizer-Customer Owned 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
��IDiAHO
�wPOWER Mapping Symbols Library

02-02-10 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Mobile GI SIDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GIS Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class G
Switch Switch-Enclosure-Closed �`�1 N/A �UT351 N/A N/A
UT52 UT52
Switch Switch-Enclosure-Open OPEN N/A , N/A N/A
T219 0 T111 111 T111
Switch Switch-Gang Operated-Closed T9 N/A CLOSED N/A
900 Amps
T60
T253BOMT4 T111 T111 T111
253
Switch Switch-Gang Operated-Open OPEN 900/OPEN N/A 0 DOPTTSI5HH OPEN .3K N/A
• BOMT41
X42 X56 X110 X110 X110
Switch Solid Blade-Line-Closed 300 N/A CLOSED CLOSED N/A
Amps ' DSSBS1560H '
X24 MLBA11 X110 X110 X110
Switch Solid Blade-Line-Open OPEN X13 N/A OPENS1560H OPEN N/A
DSSB
BO 3OPEN t '
BOMT42
�( X115 X115 X115
Switch Solid Blade-Term-Closed , X8 X1 N/A DSPS15G a� N/A
600 Amps >1 >i X
PRMA41
X2 X143 5 OPEN X115
Switch Solid Blade-Term-Open OPEN 300/0PEN N/A DOPEN1533S N/A
WILS13
Switch Switch-Customer Owned-Closed N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Switch Switch-Customer Owned-Open N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Switch Switch-Circuit Bereaker Disconnect Load-Closed 131 L N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
2D
Switch Switch-Circuit Bereaker Disconnect Load-Open OPEN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Switch Switch-Circuit Breaker Disconnect Source-Closed q 131 L N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Switch Switch-Circuit Breaker Disconnect Source-Open OPEN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Switch Switch-Substation Air Break-Closed 1 32 L N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Mapping Symbols Library W`POM R,,

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-11
SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
Switch Switch-Substation Air Break-Open 041 X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
OPEN
Transmission
Group- T-Structure-Single O N/A N/A O O ® N/A
Transmission
Structures
Transmission
Group- T-Structure-Multi Pole O O N/A N/A N/A
Transmission
Structures Represented by 2 Represented by 2 Represented by 2
single T-Structures single T-Structures single T-Structures
Transmission
Group- T-Structure-Tower ® N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Transmission
Structures
Transmission
Group- T-Structure-Station Structure B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Transmission
Structures
Transformer Overhead 1 Phase Transformer ,5A . 25C N/A Q 100A 1 OOA ® 100A N/A
DnooF1
• „ F2 100K
F�2 100K F2 100K X3
TX77 •19.9kV-7.2kV XX_3 X3
Transformer Overhead 1 Phase Step Transformer 167C TX32 • 10i TX1 00
sooe 100
N/A
19.9kV-7.2kV A
0.-, OA X
50A 15A 15 oT sA1 A 15 A 15 A
Transformer Overhead 2 Phase Transformer - 1OOB 15C N/A Q 15 C / 15 C ® 15 C N/A
Dn 5A1
F)
TX39
Transformer Overhead 2 Phase Step Transformer 50B ® • Represented by 2 Represented by 2 Represented by 2 N/A
37C
34.5kV-125kV single phase step single phase step single phase step
transformers transformers transformers
25A 75A 15 B 15 B 15 B
onsA1
Transformer Overhead 3 Phase Transformer 25B 75B N/A Q IT C 4 15 C ® 15 C N/A
V 25C 75C 15 A 15 A 15 A
FL2 20K F2 20K
F2 20K
TX7 X.L. 3 X3
Transformer Overhead 3 Phase Step Transformer SooA O Tx1� Tx1 50 N/A
1500E 5. 50
1500c 45-4 45-4
34.5kV-12.5kV o0p 0 0
Transformer Overhead Transformer-Customer Owned ® N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Transformer PowerTransformer N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
HY1 WF2 MP1 MP1 MP1
Transformer Padmount 1 Phase Transformer N 1 OOA *25B N/A 50E11cA z 50 A 50 A N/A
C21 UF15 MP4
Transformer Padmount 1 Phase Fused Transformer °TB g P 411LA C 6L N/A
75C oczrn 5L IZCI
� �Z�I
/��DMO
06.00 ►ER. Mapping Symbols Library

02-02-12 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Mobile GI SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Class Device Type __MoblA Body Detail Install Existing Remove Detail
I\IS11 HP5 MP5 MP5 MP5
Transformer Padmount 1 Phase Submersible Transformer 50�+ 50 C N/A 50 A 50 A 50 A N/A
l� r/ DP50E11L
• L1]�
NH1 HD MP3 MP3 MP3
Transformer Padmountl Phase Switchable Transformer 75C 50 N/A SW A SW A ®® 50 A N/A
oP5De11t ® S W
H
LS31 MP2 MP2 MP2
Transformer Padmount 3 Phase Transformer A 300ABC ®PI-1 N/A 150 150 150 N/A
DP150V21-
m
® O 19.NV-7.AV LXVI MP6 MP6 6X1�1 MP6
Transformer Padmountl Phase Step Transformer TX215 19.9kv-72kv TDX215 500 A 500 500 N/A
SODA UTX63 DP5750022 E]
19.9kV-7.2kV sooA .�'❑
© �.s"-,z.skv M P 7 M P 7 M P 7
UTX100 34.5kV-125kV UTX100 1500
Transformer Padmount 3 Phase Step Transformer 1500ABC UTX44 oonec ©DPsnsoosz ©1500 N/A
34.SkV-12.5kV 1500ABC ©zs
CH23 EN1 WOB1 WOB1
Transformer Padmount1 Phase Transclosure ❑ 100B 250A N/A N/A 050CA 50CA N/A
TT1 LE1 WOB2 WOB2
Transformer Padmount 2 Phase Transclosure 10A 5A N/A N/A 833 833 N/A
10B 15B 833aB ®❑83.-,B
3750A , 3750A WOB3 WOB3
Transformer Padmount 3 Phase Transclosure 3750B 3750B N/A N/A 833 833 N/A
3750C 3750C 0 83� ❑® 833A
AMI MODULATION AMI MODULATION I MODU LA70N
Transformer AMI Transformer-Overhead (�})AM� AM N/A ®TRANSFORMATION ®UNIT SFORMATONTRANSFORMATION N/A
UNIT AMI MODULATION AMI MODULATION
IT
AMI MODULATION ®TRANSFORMATION
Transformer AMI Transformer- Padmount *AMI N/A N/A ®TRANSFORMAToN ®TRANSFORMATION UNIT N/A
NIT UNIT
Transformer Underground Transformer-Customer Owned N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Underground Conduit Route Marker N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Marker
Underground Marker Conduit Stub Marker I N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
�
Underground Marker Electronic Marker • N/A N/A N/A
Underground LBC(Load Break Connecter inside of a Vault) L4 • N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Structure
Mapping Symbols Library '� Ra
AnIDACORPDO—

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-13
Mobile GI SIDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GIS Body Detail Ins Existing Remove Detail
Class
MP9
MP9
Underground Secter N/A USEt 36 N/A
Structure S El EJ U1111
Underground Secter-CustomerOwned S N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Structure FS
Joint Use Joint Use Boundary N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Boundary
Special
Boundaries- Facilities Charge Area N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Facilities Charge EJ
Area
Special
Boundaries-Dairy Dairy Circle O N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Circle
Special
Boundaries- Vested Interest Area C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Vested Interest
Areas
Special
Boundaries-Work )
Order Status-In- Work Order Status-In-Service zl �stossa N/A N/A N/A N/A
Serive
Special
Boundaries-Work
Order Status- Work Order Status-PreBuilt N/A N/A N/A N/A
PreBuilt —�
Speciall
Boundaries- Project Management Boundary N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Project Boundaries
Landbase
Database:GIS Nard Alert N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Facilities-Nard
Alert
Landbase
Database:GIS Substation Boundary N. N. N/A N/A
Facilities-
Substation
Landbase
Database:GIS Nesting Platform N/A N/A N/A !� N/A
Facilities-Nesting 13
13
Platforms 000
N/A Location Cloud(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A Project Boundary(Work Order only) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Joint Use Attachers Block _
Details (Work Order only)
N/A
��IDiAHO
�wPOWERfi. Mapping Symbols Library

02-02-14 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Mobile GIES SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Device Type Mobile GIS Body Det ' Install Existing Remove Detail
Class
?0
00000
Details 1 Phase 3 Position Secter Detail o a a a o
(Work Order only) "
N/A
?0
p0000o
Details 1 Phase 4 Position Secter Detail o
(Work Order only)
N/A
?0
p0000Bp
1 Phase 5 Position Secter Detail
Details (Work Order only)
mz
N/A
PI DO 00
p 000pp 000pp000p
Details 3 Phase 3 Position Secter Detail o o
(Work Order only) $
z??a
N/A
N B0 co
0000000ee000000000
Details 3 Phase 4 Position Secter Detail o §o 0
(Work Order only)
zz??
N/A
N B0 C0
p00000 p00000 00000V
Details
3 Phase 5 Position Secter Detail o r�
o 0o a aoo
(Work Order only)
mrrr
N/A
Details 4 Way Switch Gear Detail LH
Details 5 Way Switch Gear Detail
Details 6 Way Switch Gear Detail J:
Details 4 Way Switch Gear Tie Detail // o`f
Jt -
Details 6 Way Switch Gear Tie Detail(Work Order only)
00
HIDetails 1 Phase 3 Position Vault Detail(Work Order only) oo
N/A
Mapping Symbols Library '� Ra
AnIDACORPC0n aIY

Overhead Revised 08/21 02-02-15
SDS Feeder AUD
GIS Feature Body Detail Ins xisting Remove Detail
Class
?0
uaoo
Details 1 Phase 4 Position Vault Detail(Work Order only)
000000
??—??
N/A
�0�d o�
Details 3 Phase 3 Position Vault Detail(Work Order only) `"��@ 0 ota
5mD ore a u erna p.
N/A »-2x
�ssa'
i^
Details 3 Phase 4 Position Vault Detail(Work Order only) FE
E en aro s
O B sauE
sruD OFF O 0 Sr D OFF
N/A n_n
Details CoGen Block(Work Order only)
N/A
Details Oregon Pole Number Block(Work Order only)
N/A
��IDiAHO
�wPOWER Mapping Symbols Library

Overhead Revised 04/21 02-03-01
Overhead Tagging
Proper operation and maintenance of the NEW Scheme
distribution system dictates that apparatus be
labeled. These labels correspond to the Pole Tag
information provided on the Feeder Maps. Feeder Map
Poles supporting various devices are tagged
using adhesive backed numbers on aluminum Feedeation �2
plates nailed to the pole. The plates are mounted Apparatus INumber c13 L
approximately 9'above ground and should face Township TZN E
a direction which allows the operations and Seci on spa
2nd Bank in Section 2
maintenance personnel to readily identify the (Note:6C6!s eliminated
apparatus. Some information is labeled directly
on the apparatus tank.
The labeling must be large enough to be easily Engineering should check to see that the new
discernible from the ground. Details will be capacitor bank is assigned a unique apparatus
discussed in the Apparatus Tank Labels number on the feeder, and that this number is
section. circled on the apparatus number stamp if used.
Existing capacitor banks need not be
Capacitors renumbered immediately. This can be done
along with regular maintenance or as the feeder
The old scheme for tagging capacitor poles was is fielded or renumbered for some reason, such
as follows: as load transfer. Original numbers for
sectionalizing devices should be preserved if
OLD Scheme possible, since the outage reporting system
references the apparatus number.
Pole Tag
Feeder Map See Section 24, Operation& Safety,for
detailed labeling information
Township 12N
Range R1
Section S14
2nd Bank in Section C2
This system causes confusion in dispatching
since the pole labeling does not match the
apparatus number in the arrow bracket on the
Feeder Map.The new scheme for labeling
capacitor poles is as follows:
"`ppR� Overhead Tagging

02-03-02 Revised 04/21 Overhead
Fuses, Solid Blade Disconnects, Regulators
Reclosers, Sectionalizers
Pole Tag
Pole Tag Feeder Map
Substation ESU P I I
Feeder N umber 019 10171041
Device Number FF�23 � I �
Fuse Size 40K F-r.da rJ sn ter F oil
Fr,;.t r•�sr.t.s I I
trr� JrL
Fused With Disconnect
Cutout Backup
CL Fuse
NOTE: For all devices, it is acceptable to
provide all the information on one plate,
JB
provided that there is enough room.
Substation
Feeder N umber Example:
Device Number R6
Substation 0lL
Recloser Sectionalizer Feeder �$
Device Numbe F24
Size 65k
Feeder Map Autotransformers
Three-Phase Platform-Mounted Step-Down
Bank
Single-Phase Single Pole-Mounted
Autotransformer
Gang-Operated Pole Top Switches
Pole Tag
Feeder Map
Substation
NN
Feeder INumbar �[O1;3]Device Numberl
Overhead Tagging '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 04/21 02-03-03
Oregon Pole Tagging A company-owned secondary protection
package which switches customer-owned
Idaho Power has initiated a pole numbering generation will be located near the generator;
system in Oregon to comply with OPUC therefore,the control cabinet should be labeled
documentation requirements.All primary, with the same unique number that is assigned to
secondary, and joint-use poles(excluding the customer-owned generator installation.
service poles)will be numbered. This system
locates poles down to a grid square(528'or 1/10 r'wntorcoltml
mile on each side), and numbers each pole (GWIAM
within the grid square.The scheme utilizes an
8 X 3-inch metal plate (stock number 688-0010)
with embossed and snap-on lettering(stock WE
number 688-0011).Aunique, 11-digit location OL)
number will appear on each plate as depicted in G3
the figure.
Attach the plate with galvanized nails to each
pole at the position shown below. The Idaho Fad&r%PNOUI;01
Power grid-numbering scheme within each
section is shown also. In case the numbering A
program is expanded to other states in the future, W
we have included a map showing quadrant
designations on the next page.
Customer-Owned Generation To determine ownership of cogeneration and
small power production facilities,two types of
A company-owned protection package which signs are provided.Most power lines are utility
switches customer-owned generation should be owned and,therefore,only privately owned
assigned a unique device number on the feeder facilities will be marked in most cases. The
and labeled accordingly on the control cabinet. Idaho Power owned signs should be used only
Where the generator is remote from the where it would be otherwise difficult to
protective package, it also should be labeled to determine ownership.
indicate its assigned number. Proper tagging is
illustrated below. These signs should be placed as indicated below:
Poles Mount the 6" X 6" adhesive-backed sign
on a 8" X 12" aluminum plate.
Pri. y-P rotes ti- Gewer�orC:owt rd
Pa6:awe Lab a Gb:wa Lab A
24iOR� �•iOR.�
p1n �1�
P.va�y tkho
aw �
owned
Fade r Map Notai:o w
V "3
f
"`ppRR Overhead Tagging

02-03-04 Revised 04/21 Overhead
Transformers. Mount the 6" X 6" adhesive- Apparatus Tank Labels
backed sign on the transformer tank.
Transformers. The kVA size should be labeled
in large letters on all transformers.Also,the
transformer should be labeled with the
secondary voltage(120/240, 120/208Y,240/480,
277/480Y, etc.).
7 Y
Some transformers are equipped with a dual
voltage primary winding and an external switch.
Me so DEW If this is the case,the transformer should be
labeled"Dual Voltage"in large enough letters to
be read from the ground.
Nvatdy P' Transformers containing more than a certain
owned
level of PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyls)
contamination must be labeled in accord with
governmental regulations.Non-PCB
transformers also are labeled as such, either by
the manufacturer or when tested by the
company. (See Section 24, Operation &
Irrigation Pumps Safety.)
The pump number which identifies the
installation on the Feeder Map or Pump Map
should appear in a conspicuous location, such as i
on the meter base or control panel. Older
installations may have aluminum numbers nailed 1000
to the pole. 'm
DA,a=
Example: Pump number on meter base EM
Regulators. Regulator ampere rating should be
labeled in large letters on the front of the control
box.Where regulators are installed in a 3-0
bank, each regulator and its respective control
should also be labeled to indicate the phase
connected to that regulator, as illustrated above.
Overhead Tagging '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 04/21 02-03-05
Reclosers Sectionalizers
Hydraulic. The continuous current rating and Hydraulic. The continuous current rating and
the tripping sequence should appear on the the number of shots to open should appear on
recloser tank. the sectionalizer tank.
50 t- Continuous Rating
50 �-- Continuous Rating 2 S 00T �-- shots to Cpen
Q 1� me-- Tripping SE qu EncE
Electronic. The sectionalizer type(GN3E, GV,
GW, etc.) should appear on the tank.
Electronic. The recloser type (RVE,WE,etc.)
should appear on the recloser tank.
G
RVE �--- T7p E
"`pp�R, Overhead Tagging

Overhead Revised 08/21 03-00-01
Table of Contents
03- Clearances
03-01-01 Introduction 03-07-01 Clearance to Signs,Chimneys,
03-02-01 Structures from Objects Billboards,Radio& TV Antennas,
Fire Hydrants Tanks,& Other Installations Not
Streets,Roads, and Highways Classified as Buildings or Bridges
Railroad Tracks 03-07-02 Example Sign Clearance
Bureau of Reclamation Canals Calculations
03-02-02 Canyon or River Crossings 03-08-01 Swimming Pools, Spas and
03-03-01 Clearance Above Ground and Swimming Areas
Water Example Swimming Clearance
Clearance Above Ground Calculations
03-03-02 Clearance Above Water 03-09-01 Wire Crossing Clearances
03-03-03 Example Calculation For Ground Example Wire Crossing Clearance
Clearance Calculations
03-04-01 Additional Clearances 03-10-01 Wires On the Same Supporting
High Voltage Adders Structure
High Temperature Sag Adders Horizontal Clearance Between
Wind Displacement Adders Line Conductors
Point of Crossing Multiplying 03-10-02 Vertical Clearance Between Line
Factors Conductors
Table 1. High Voltage Adders 03-10-03 Clearance In Any Direction From
Table 2. Point of Crossing Line Conductors to Supports,
Multiplying Factors for Tables and To Vertical or Lateral
3-6 Conductors,or Guy Wires
Derivation of Tables 1 —6 Attached to the Same Support
03-04-02 Table 3. High Temperature Sag 03-10-04 Clearance of Vertical or Lateral
Adder(Aluminum/ACSR Conductors to Guy Wires,
Multiplex Conductor) Messengers,or Support
Table 4. High Temperature Sag 03-11-01 Climbing Space
Adder
(Copper/Copperweld/3SS 03-12-01 Clearance to Trees
Conductor) 03-12-02 Example of Clearances to Trees
03-04-03 Table 5.Wind Displacement Calculations
Adder(Aluminum/ACSR 03-13-01 Work Activity Clearances
Conductor) Regulations for Unauthorized
Table 6. Wind Displacement Persons
Adder Regulations for Authorized
(Copper/Copperweld/3SS Persons
Conductor)
03-05-01 Other Supporting Structure 03-14-01 Aviation
Clearances Clearances and Permits
03-05-02 Example Other Supporting Runway Clearances
03-14-03 Warnings
Structure Clearance
Calculations Poles
Marker Balls
03-06-01 Building Clearances 03-14-04 Lights
03-06-02 Example Building Clearance Dual LED
Calculations
"`ppRR Table of Contents

Overhead Revised 01115—Reviewed 07/15 03-01-01
Introduction
This clearances section has been written for the The clearances in this section list Idaho Power
purpose of assisting construction crews, design recommendations,which are equal to or
troublemen, and service personnel in handling greater than National Electrical Safety Code
common clearance problems that arise in the field (NESC)requirements. Construction,
Engineers and designers should refer to the reconstruction, and maintenance should be done
Advisory Manual in planning for construction, according to these design recommendations,
reconstruction,and maintenance,in checking where practical. Where it is not practical to
existing clearances for compliance,or in answering implement these recommendations,the
clearance questions for other departments. installation must at least meet the minimum
requirements of the applicable edition of the
NESC.
"`�R� Introduction
M--.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 08/11 —Reviewed 07/15 03-02-01
Structures From Objects
Fire Hydrants
Don't block access to fire hydrants. Maintain the
clearances as shown in the figure
Streets, Roads, and Highways
Where practical,utilize private right-of-way.
Otherwise,place poles and other structures 1'
from the property line to allow room for fencing, Clearance From Fire Hydrants
etc. If required clearances to buildings, etc
prohibit this,place the pole at least 6"behind the
sidewalk if practical to allow room for forms.
The NESC minimum clearance is 6"behind the
curb face.No equipment must overhang the
traveled portion of the roadway unless it is at NOTE Don't construct new facilities on state
least 17.5'above the roadway, or 6" or more highway right-of--way without a permit.
behind the curb face as shown below.
1. Preferred location 2 Alternate location if closely
1'from P/L when Abutting improvements
private ROW prevent#1 —_ 6
cannot be Min.
obtained
Property
line 3. Alternate location if Zone
neither#1 nor#2 is clear of
practical over-
hanging 17'6"
Equip.
6" Leave room
1' 1' Min. for forms.
a
U
�J9 Sidewalk Street
Curb
Clearance From Streets, Roads, and Highways
Railroad Tracks Bureau of Reclamation Canals
Don't construct new facilities(including Don't construct new facilities on Bureau of
overhanging facilities)on railroad right-of-way Reclamation right-of-way(including
(including spur tracks)without a permit. overhanging facilities)without a permit.
"`ppRR Structures From Objects

03-02-02 Revised 08/11 —Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Canyon or River Crossings Airports, Heliports, and Navigation
Anything over 200'above ground or low water Aids
level requires applying for a permit See the Aviation Section 03-14.
Be sure to schedule sufficient time for the approval.
For detailed procedure see Distribution Manual
Section 03.01-08.
Structures From Objects '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 01/17 03-03-01
Clearance Above Ground Water
Distribution primary AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
to 34.5GrdY/19.92kV page 03-04-01 for adders.
22.0'+ 35 L:+
Open-wire secondary
&services 0-750V
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders,
19.0'+ 32.5'+
Multiplex secondary
&services 0-750V
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
Neutral,grounded guy, 18.5'+ 32'0+
communications cable
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
18.0'+ X
31.64
C&W
Foods
o Iff
0 0 000
1.Land and Roads in General -See 2. Railroad Tracks
exceptions below for services only
where attachment points limits height.
SEE NEXT PAGE FOR SAILBOATS.
FAA PERMIT REQUIRED IF OVER
200'ABOVE GRADE.
Multiplex service. See page 03-04-01 for SAG adders(+).
Wire or
Note:These clearances are for SERVICES ONLY Drip loop(insulated)
OVER RESIDENTIAL DRIVES,OR WITH
PEDESTRIANS OR RESTRICTED TRAFFIC ONLY.For
land and roads in general,see above.Lesser clearance
are allowed for some situations.Contact engineering. Mx Residential 120/240 ...10'+
1201208 ...10'+
Mx 16'+ 480 ...12'+
Bare Wire 19'+ Mx Commercial 120-480 ...12'+
C&W Bare Wire ...19'+
Moving
0=0 000 (�
3.SERVICES ONLY OVER RESIDENTIAL DRIVES 4.SERVICES ONLY with pedestrians or
(See above For land,roads in general ) sestricted traffic only-no trucks or RV
rigs,units over 8',trampolines.
Clearance Above Ground
`p" ORM
pR. Clearance Above Ground Water
M­­.m 'Y

03-03-02 Revised 10/07—Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Distribution primary AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
to 34.5GrdY/19.92kV page 03-04-01 for adders.
22.0'+ 35.0'+
Open wire secondary
&services 0-750V
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
19.a+ 35.0'+
Multiplex secondary
&services 0-750V
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
Neutral, grounded guy, 18.5'+ 35.0'+
communications cable
® AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
18.0'+ 35.0'+
Contact Engineering. A
permit may be required.
1. Water with no sailboats 2. Bureau of Reclamation canals
(With no sailboats)
FOR OVER 200'ABOVE GROUND OR LOW WATER LEVEL
AN FAA FILING WILL BE REQUIRED.
See page 03-08 01
For sailboating areas,
contact engineering.
3. Water with sailboats includes some rivers, 4. Swimming areas and pools
streams, canals, ponds, lakes, reservoirs along (with no sailboats). See page
with access waterways, and rigging, launching, 03-08-01.
landing & beaching sites on adjacent land areas
Clearance Above Water
Clearance Above Ground Water '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 10/07—Reviewed 07/15 03-03-03
Example Calculation for d.Total clearance measurement.The
Ground Clearance clearances that we should measure to the wire
at its 60°F initial sag position from the top of
Let's assume that a developer has constructed a the berm,then are:
berm(landscaping mound)beneath a new 3-0
4ACSR line extension over otherwise level Neutral clearance= 18'+4.5'=22.5'
ground as depicted in the illustration below. Just
after stringing in the conductor we measure 20' Phase clearance=22'+4.5'=26.5'
to the neutral and 27'to the phase. Do we have
clearance? We have phase clearance,but neutral clearance
is lacking by: 22.5' -20'=2.5'
a. Basic clearance.From the illustration on These additional clearance adders may be
page 03-03-01,the required clearances are 18'
to the neutral and 22'to the phase. However, conservative for some situations. Contact
these clearances are for the wires at the Methods&Materials to see if any reduction can
maximum sag position. be allowed.
b.High temperature adder.FromTable 3, We could just raise the neutral,but we have to
page 03-04-02,the high temperature sag adder be careful that we don't lose the required phase-
for a 400' span of 4ACSR is 5.9 . to-neutral clearance.Note that the tables starting
on page 11-02-06 list the maximum spans that
c. Point of crossing multiplying factor.Note can be constructed for various phase-to-neutral
below that we are only 100' into the span from spacings, along with other clearance restraints,
a pole.This is only(100-400)x 100=25% assuming level ground.
of the span. We can multiply the sag adder 5.9'
by the point of crossing multiplying factor
(0.75 for 25%of span distance)in Table 2,
page 03-04-01.The adder at the berm,then,
will be: 0.75 x 5.9'=4.5'.
­4 4/4ARP-SN
Landscaping Berm
20' to neutral wire
100' 27' to phase wire
400'
Checking Ground Clearance
SQNPO�R. Clearance Above Ground Water
M­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 10/07—Reviewed 07/15 03-04-01
Additional Clearances
High Voltage Adders Wind Displacement Adders
For transmission voltages, add the values in Some clearance tables and figures list
Table 1 to the basic clearances to ground, clearances for the wire at the wind-displaced
water,buildings, signs, other supporting position.Adders listed in Tables 5 and 6
structures, etc. These values take into account for a 6-pounds per square foot wind
account both voltage and altitude factors. displacement. For conductors not listed, and
for transmission conductors, contact the
High Temperature Sag Adders Methods&Materials Department.
WARNING—Slack wire will blow out
Add the values listed in Table 3 or 4 to the farther!
basic clearances to account for the
difference between 60°F initial sag Point of Crossing Multiplying
(assumed condition when clearance is Factors
measured)and 212°F final sag for the
various design ruling spans. For other For points not at midspan,multiply the
conditions,refer to the sag tables in Section adders in Tables 3 through 6 by the factors
10—Conductor Data&Stringing Charts, or given in Table 2. DO NOT apply these
Section 25—Reference Data. For multipliers to the values in Table 1 (high
transmission conductor sag adders, contact voltage adders)or to basic clearance values.
Methods &Materials.
Table 1. High Voltage Adders
46-kV 69-kV 138-kV 161-kV 230-kV 345-kV 500-kV
0.2' 0.6' 2.5' 3.0' 4.6' 7.4' 11.6'
Table 2. Point of Crossing Multiplying Factors for Tables 3 — 6
% of span distance 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Multiplying factor 0.19 0.36 0.51 0.64 0.75 0.84 0.91 0.96 0.99 1.00
Derivation of Tables 1-6
A detailed explanation on how the various Note that these design values are
adders and multipliers appearing in these conservative.Actual code minimums may be
tables were derived may be found beginning less, as explained in the above-referenced
on page 03-08-21 of the Advisory Manual. manual.
"`ppMR� Additional Clearances
M­­.m 'Y

03-04-02 Revised 10/07-Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Table 3. High Temperature Sag Adder
(Aluminum/ACSR/Muhiplex Conductor)
Aluminum(300' Ruling Span)&ACSR Conductor(350'Ruling Span)
Span Ft 50 100 175 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 350 360 380 400 420
336 AL 0.2' 0.7' 1.9' 2.5' 3.0' 3.6' 4.2' 4.8' 5.5' ; 6.3' 7.5' 8.0'
795 AL 0.2' 0.6' 1.8' 2.3' 2.8' IT 3.9' 4.5' ; 5.2' ; 5.9' 7.1' 7.5'
#4 ACSR 0.1' 0.4' 1.2' 1.5' 1.8' 2.1' 2.5' 2.9' a 3.3' 3.8' 4.5' 4.8' 5.3' 5.9' 6.5'
2/0 AC SR 0.1' 0.4' 1.2' 1.5' 1.8' 2.1' 2.5' 2.9' 3.3' 3.7' :-4.5'-: 4.7' 5.3' 5.8' 6.4'
Multiplex Conductor(100'Ruling Span)
Span Ft 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
All Sizes 0.1' 0.2' 0.3' 0.4' 0.5' 0.7' 0.9' 1 0'- 1.3' 1.5'
*For other spans not listed in the table,calculate: Sag Adder=[(Sag Adder for Ruling Span)x (Other Span/Ruling Span)]
The ruling span sag adders are indicated in the table by the idottedboxes-
Table 4. High Temperature Sag Adder
(Copper/Copperweld/3SS Conductor)*
Copper, Copperweld, and 3-Strand Steel Conductor
Span Ft 50 100 175 200 220 240 260 275 300 320 350 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520
(175' Ruling Span)
r---i
#6 Cu 0.3' 0.9' 2.7' 3.6' 4.3'
#4 Cu 0.3' 0.9' 2.6' :3.4' 4.1'
#2 C u 0.3' 0.9' -2.5'-:3.3' 4.0'
(275' Ruling Span)
#6 Cu 0.2' 0.6' 1.7' 2.2' 2.6' 3.1' IT 4.1 1 5.5' 15.5' 6.2'
#4 Cu 0.2' 0.6' 1.7' 2.2' 2.6' 3.1' IT 4.1' 4.8' :5.5' 6.2'
#2 Cu 0.2' 0.6' 1.7' 2.2' 2.6' 3.1' 3.7' 4.1' 4.8'-:5.5' 6.2'
(500' Ruling Span)
NA CW 0.1' 0.3' 0.9' 1.2' 1.4' 1.7' 2.0' 2.2' 2.6' 3.0' 3.4' 3.8' 4.2' 4.7' 5.1' 5.6' 6.1' 6.71 : 7.2' ;7.8'
#6A CW 0.1' 0.3' 0.8' 1.1' 1.3' 1.5' 1.7' 1.9' 2.3' 2.6' 2.9' IT IT 4.1' 4.5' 4.9' 5.4' 5.8' : 6.3' ;6.8'
#4A CW 0.1' 0.3' 0.7' 0.9' 1.1' 1.3' 1.6' 1.7' 2.0' 2.3' 2.6' 2.9' 3.3' 3.6' 4.0' 4.3' 4.7' 5.2 : 5.6' ;6.1'
#6-3SS 0.1' 0.2' 0.6' 0.8' 0.9' 1.1' 1.2' 1.4' 1.6' 1.8' 2.1' 2.3' 2.6' 2.9' 3.1' 3.4' 3.8' 4.1':44'4.8'
*For other spans not listed in the table,calculate: Sag Adder=[(Sag Adder for Ruling Span)x(Other Span/Ruling Span)2]
The ruling span sag adders are indicated in the table by the:dottedboxes.
Additional Clearances W.-POWER,

Overhead Revised 10/07-Reviewed 07/15 03-04-03
Table 5. Wind Displacement Adder
(Aluminum/ACSR Conductor)
Aluminum&ACSR Conductor
Span Ft 50 100 175 200 220 240 260 275 300 320 350 360 380 400 420
(300'❑ Ruling Span)
336 AL 0.2' 0.5' 1.4' 1.8' 2.2' 2.6' 3.0' 3.4' 4.0' .- 4.6' 5.5' 5.8'
795 AL 0.1' 0.4' 1.1' 1.4' 1.7' 2.0' 2.3' 2.6' �_ 3.1' , 3.5' 4.2' 4.4'
(350' Ruling Span)
r----i
#4 AC SR 0.2' 0.5' 1.3' 1.7' 2.1' 2.5' 2.9' 3.2' 3.8' 4.4 1 5.2' 5.5' 6.1' 6.8' 7.5'
2/0 ACSR 0.1' 0.4' 1.0' 1.3' 1.6' 1.9' 2.2' 2.4' 2.9' 3.3' _3 9'_; 4.1' 4.6, 5.1' 5.6'
*For other spans not listed in the table,calculate: Wind Adder=[(Wind Adder for Ruling Span)x (Other Span/Ruling Span)2]
The ruling span sag adders are indicated in the table by the idotted boxes;
Table 6. Wind Displacement Adder
(Copper/Copperweld/3SS Conductor)
Copper, Copperweld, and 3-Strand Steel Conductor
Span Ft50 100 175 200 220 240 260 275 300 320 350 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520
(175' Ruling Span)
#6 Cu 0.2' 0.7' '2.2' 2.8' 3.4'
#4 Cu 0.2' 0.6' ; 1.7' ;2.3' 2.7'
#2 Cu 0.2' 0.5' ; 1.6' :2.0' 2.4'
(275' Ruling Span)
#6 Cu 0.2' 0.6' 1.7' 2.2' 2.7' 3.2' 3.8' 4.2 ; 5.0' 5.7' 6.4'
#4 Cu 0.1' 0.4' 1.1' 1.5' 1.8' 2.1' 2.4'; 2.7' ; 3.2' IT 4.1'
#2 Cu 0.1' 0.4' 1.0' 1.3' 1.5' 1.8' 2.1';_2_.3_'_;2.8' 3.2' 3.6'
(500' Ruling Span)
NA CW 0.1' 0.4' 1.1' 1.4' 1.7' 2.0' 2.4' 2.7' 3.2' 3.6' 4.0' 4.5' 5.0' 5.6' 6.2' 6.7' 7.4' 8.0,1 8.7' 9.4'
#6A CW 0.1' 0.3' 0.9' 1.2' 1.4' 1.7' 2.0' 2.2' 2.6' 3.0' 3.3' IT 4.2' 4.6' 5.1' 5.6' 6.1' 6.6' ; 7.2' 7.8'
#4A CW 0.1' 0.3' 0.7' 0.9' 1.1' 1.3' 1.6' 1.8' 2.1' 2.4' 2.6' 3.0' 3.3' 3.6' 4.0' 4.4' 4.8' 5.2' : 5.7' :6.1'
#6-3SS 0.1' 0.3' 0.8' 1.0' 1.2' 1.5' 1.7' 1.9' 2.2' 2.5' 2.9' 3.2' 3.6' 3.9' 4.3' 4.8' 5.2' 5.7'; 6.1' : 6.6'
*For other spans not listed in the table,calculate: Sag Adder=[(Sag Adder for Ruling Span)x(Other Span/Ruling Span)2]
The ruling span sag adders are indicated in the table by the:dotted boxes
�pOMR,: Additional Clearances

Overhead Revised 12/07—Reviewed 07/15 03-05-01
Other Supporting Structure Clearances
Wires passing near (not attached to) a light pole, Lesser clearances are sometimes allowed.
traffic signal pole, or other power pole, etc, Contact Methods &Materials.
should have the clearances shown below.
Wire position at the time NOTE: Vertical clearances are to be
clearance is measured. - applied with the wire at MAXIMUM
SAG. The wire will probably not be
at maximum sag when clearances
are measured. See page 03-04-01
Wire position at high tem- for appropriate adders.
perature or ice loading. -
FOR FLAGPOLES, PRIVATELY-OWNED
LIGHTS,AND OTHER STRUCTURES
MAINTAINED BY PRIVATE PARTIES,
SEE PAGE 03-07-01.
V
Diagonal clearance is V for V greater V
than the horizontal clearance (Hw or Hr).
If the horizontal clearance (Hw or Hr) is V
greater than V, then use that value as
the diagonal clearance.
Hr-clearance at rest HW—
Hw-clearance with wind Hr
Wire at rest must be outside the envelope formed by
Hr and V. Wire at the wind displaced position must
be outside the envelope formed by Hw and V. See
page 03-04-01 for wind displacement adders.
Clearance Type: Hr Hw V
Guys,neutrals multiplex 3' N/A 2'
Open-wire 0-750 V 6' 4.5'+ 5.5'+
Primary to 34.5 kV 6' 5.51+ 5.5'+
*You may subtract 2'from these vertical clearances only if the facilities belong to
Idaho Power
Wire Clearances From Other Supporting Structures
R Other Supporting Structure Clearances
M,o�o�amPa,

03-05-02 Revised 12/07—Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Example Other Supporting Structure 2. Light Off to the Side of the Line.Now,
Clearance Calculation let's suppose that the light is located 8'
horizontally from the phase wire at rest. Do we
Let's suppose that you have just built a primary have proper horizontal clearance?
line extension near a light pole maintained by
the city as shown below. We will consider two a. Horizontal clearance at rest.From the
cases: one with the light directly under the line table,previous page,the required horizontal
conductors; and another with the light off to the clearance at rest(Hr) is 6'. We meet this
side of the line. requirement. However,we must also check
to see if we have the required horizontal
1. Light Directly Under the Line. First, let's clearance to the wire at the wind-displaced
assume that the light is right under the line and position.
we have 8' of vertical clearance right after
stringing. Is this enough? b. Horizontal clearance wind displaced.From
the table on the previous page,the horizontal
a. Basic clearance.From the table on the clearance to the conductor with wind
previous page,the required vertical displacement(Hw)is 5.5'. From Table 5,
clearance to the wire at maximum sag is page 03-04-03,the wind displacement adder
5.5'. However, our wire is at 60°F initial sag, is 4.2'. Since the light is only at 43%of the
approximately. span distance,we can reduce this by the
factor in Table 2,page 03-04-01: 4.2'x 0.99
b. High temperature adder.From Table 3, =4.2'. This doesn't help much. We are too
page 03-04-02,the high temperature adder close to midspan. The required horizontal
for a 350' span of 795A1 is 7.1'. clearance with allowance for wind
c. Point of crossing multiplying factor.Note displacement is 5.5'+4.2'=97.We are 9.6'- 8'= 1.7'shy.
in the figure that our light pole is 150'into
the 350' span. This represents These clearances and adders may be
(150=350)x 100=43%of the span distance conservative for some situations. Contact
from the nearest pole. We can multiply the engineering for reductions.Note that if the light
sag adder 7.l'by the point of crossing is maintained by a private party, "sign
multiplying factor(0.99 for 45%of span clearances"rather than"other supporting
distance)in Table 2,page 03-04-01. structure clearances"would be appropriate. See
Unfortunately,we are too close to midspan page 03-07-01.
for the point of crossing multiplying factor
to help much.
d. Total clearance measurement.Required
clearance to the 60°F initial sag position is:
V=5.5'+ 7.F= 12.6'. We only have 8'.
1-4/795ALP-N Do
Foreign light pole with:
150' ► 1. Light directly under the line
2. Light off to the side of the line
350'
Checking Clearance to a Foreign Light Pole
Other Supporting Structure Clearances '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/07—Reviewed 07/15 03-06-01
Building Clearances
Where practical, maintain the horizontal Where practical, DON'T BUILD OVER THE TOP
clearances below to a line extending EXCEPT WITH MULTIPLEX. The clearances in
vertically upward from the nearest part the box below are for MULTIPLEX ONLY AT MAX
of the building or its attachments. SAG. SEE PAGE 03-04-01 FOR SAG ADDERS.
A
® V=8'+for most roofs,
® But if the roof is readily accessible:
See page 03-04-0 V= 11'+for 120/240V 1-Ph & 120/208V 3-Ph
for WINDADDERS 12'+for 120/240 3-Ph &277/480V 3-Ph
Primary l�Hw= 10'+ 15'+for 240/480V 3-Ph
to 34.5kV 18'+for roofs with truck traffic
Hr= 13'
Open wire
secondary rd Hw=8'+ so V
&services
V
� Hr= 10' NO V
V
Multiplex
secondary Note: Where clearances at left Hw
&services Hr=5' cannot be met, wires still must Hr
not violate the envelope shown
above. Contact engineering for
Hr-clearance at rest vertical clearances over roofs for
Neutrals, ��Hw-clearance with wind primary and open-wire
Gn guys secondary.
� Hr=4.5'
CONTACT ENGINEERING FOR LINES
WITHIN 100'FROM GRAIN BINS
Attachments, X=wire length
either multiplex H= horizontal Dist.
or open wire. from roof edge
h /
/ For 300V L-L or less
V=36"for slope 4/12 or more
/ V= 18"for eave only, and
/ if H=4'and X=6'or less. V
C For 480V and for lesser slopes
V=8 (10'for 480V open-wire)
4
12�
C=3'(NESC-we recommend 5'for multi-
plex, 5.5'for open-wire)in any direction to Note:if this roof is readily accessible
windows that open, doors, porches,fire then see the figure at the top right.
escapes and similar locations.
Clearances to Buildings
`p" AHO
pR. Building Clearances
M­­.m 'Y

03-06-02 Revised 12/07- Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Example Building Clearance Calculation
Let's assume that someone has built a building What clearance do we need for the multiplex
15' away horizontally from the closest phase secondary over the roof?Assuming that the roof
wire of a 3-0 4 ACSR distribution primary line is not readily accessible(most roofs—no
as shown below. Do we have recommended permanent access through windows, doors,
clearance? ramps, stairways, or permanently-mounted
ladders with bottom rung less than 8'high),we
From the illustration on the previous page, we need 8'plus the high temperature adder. The
have the recommended clearance to the adder for a 100' span of multiplex is 1 foot
conductor at rest (HT= 13'). However, we (Table 3,page 03-04-02). Total clearance for the
must check to see if proper clearance is multiplex at 60°F initial sag would be:
maintained with the conductor displaced by 8'+ 1'=91
.
wind (Hw= 10'). From Table 5, page
03-04-03, the wind adder for a 400' span of 4 These clearances and adders may be
ACSR is 6.8'. The building (including all conservative for some situations. Contact
attachments) extends to 150' into the span, or engineering to see if any reduction is allowed.
(150/400)x100 =37.5%. From Table 2, page
03-04-01, we can reduce the wind adder to
6.8'x0.96 = 6.6'. The total clearance to the
conductor at rest with wind consideration is:
10' + 6.6'= 16.6', and we are a bit shy with
our 15'.
Roof not readily accessible—no windows,doors,
ramps,stairways,or permanently-mounted lad-
2Tx-100' ders with bottom rung less than 8'above a per-
manently-installed, readily-accessible surface
Building
L-4/4ARP-SN
15'to closest phase wire
150'
400'
Building Clearance Example
Building Clearances '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 10/07—Reviewed 07/15 03-07-01
Clearance to Signs, Chimneys, Billboards, Radio & TV
Antennas, Tanks, & Other Installations
Not Classified as Buildings or Bridges
ALL WIRESAT MAX. SAG. See page 03-04-01 for adders.
We would rather not build over the Primary to 34.5kV
top of these with anything except
multiplex. However, where we must, Open-wire 0-750V
use the vertical clearances at right.
If people will be walking on top of
the installation for maintenance,
etc, use the clearances for build- Multiplex 0-750V
ings. Contact engineering.
Neutral, Gird. guy
Wire at rest must be outside the 3.0'+ 3.6+ 8'+ 10'+
envelope formed by Hr and V. Wire
at the wind displaced position must See page 03-04-01 for adders
be outside the envelope formed by V
Hw and V. See page 03-04-01 for V
wind displacement adders.
Hw
Hr
Sign, chimney, billboard, radio or
Primary TV antenna, tank, or other instal-
to 34.5kV Hw= 10'+ lation not classified as a building
� Hr= 13' or a bridge. If this is a flagpole,
Open wire don't forget to consider the flag
secondary blowout. Consider the flag fully
&services Ham'= 8'+ extended with the conductor at
° rest. If signs, etc. move, then
Hr= 10' don't forget to consider the
Multiplex range of movement
secondary
&services Hr= 3.5'
Neutrals, FOR BRIDGES,AND WITHIN
Grd. guys 100' OF GRAIN BINS, CONTACT
Hr= 3.0' ENGINEERING.
Hw= clearance with wind
Hr= clearance at rest
Clearance to Signs, Etc.
��POI1N R. Clearance to Signs, Chimneys,... & Other Installations

03-07-02 Revised 10/07—Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Example Sign Clearance Calculation Total clearances to the wires at their 60°F initial
sag position are:
Let's suppose that someone is erecting a sign
under our primary distribution line as shown 3.0'+ 1.4'= 4.4'to the neutral wire
below. OSHA and State rules require a crane 10.0'+ 1.4'= 11.4'to the phase wire.
operator to keep 10'(plus 0.4"per kV over
50-kV L-G)of clearance between the crane or What if the line was 138-kV?The crane operator
any part of the load and the power line. This would have to stay 10'+0.4"(138/3'/2-50)/12=
clearance may be reduced if the line is de- 11.0'away from the conductors. (See tale,page
energized and grounded at the work location, or 03-13-01.)Our required clearance after the sign
guards are applied on the wires. See page is in place would be 11.4' (for distribution-
03-13-01.Note that sign maintenance workers assuming the same approximate sag adder for
must also maintain the 10'clearance, and OSHA the transmission conductor)plus the high
is presently interpreting that this clearance must voltage adder, Table 1,page 03-04-01:
be maintained to the neutral as well. The sign
owner is responsible for making the 11.4'+ 2.5'= 13.9'to 138-kV conductors
arrangements if he desires to have working
clearances that meet OSHA requirements. What These clearances may be conservative for some
vertical clearance do we need to meet NESC to situations. Contact Methods&Materials to see
the sign after it has been installed? if any reductions are allowed.
From the previous page,we need 3'to the NOTE. If people will be walking on top
neutral and 10'to the phase wire at maximum of the sign or other installation for
sag. From page 03-04-02,the adder for 336 for a maintenance, etc, contact Methods&
250' span is 3.9'. However,the sign is only 25', Materials for the proper clearances.
or(25/250)x100= 10%of the span away from
the nearest pole, so we can apply the multiplying
factor in Table 2,page 03-04-01:
3.9'x0.36= 1.4'.
New sign
L-4/336P-SN
25'
250'
Sign Clearance Example
Clearance to Signs, Chimneys,... & Other Installations '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 07/21 03-08-01
Swimming Pools, Spas, and Swimming Areas
Private Swimming Pools and Spas When horizontal distances cannot be
maintained, confirm clearance in all directions
Installation over a permanent private pool or spa based on the table on the next page, 03-08-02.
is not recommended and is not allowed in some These clearances start at highest point a person
jurisdictions. Permanent installations include can stand,include the wind and sag adder.
above ground pools that are not intended to be
moved regularly and have structures built
around them.
Maintain the horizontal distances from the
installation to the water edge and structures as
shown below.
• 25'+wind adder—open wire primary and
secondary
• 10' neutrals,guy attachment and
insulators,multiplex,and
communications lines
25'+for open wire
primary&secondary
i 10'for neutrals,
guys,and multiplex
SEEPAGE 03-04-01 FOR ADDERS
B B
A A
V A V
Swimming Area Clearances
"` R� Swimming Areas & Pools

03-08-02 Revised 07/21 Overhead
Public Swimming Pools Swimming Areas
Installations over public pools and Installation over swimming areas is not
swimming areas is not allowed per Idaho recommended. However,when it's necessary to
State Rules for Public Pools. Furthermore, span the area and rescue poles are used, see
maintain a horizontal clearance of 20'to the clearances for private swimming pools.When
pool enclosure, see illustration below. rescue poles are not used, see Overhead Manual
03-03.
NOTE. Contact Methods&Materials for
sailboat area clearances.
SEE PAGE 03-04-01 FOR ADDERS
20'+to pool enclosure
required for all wiring
Clearance Description Grounded Multiplex Open wire Primary to
guys,neutrals to 750V to 750V 34.5-kV
AClearance in any direction from the
water level, edge of pool, or base of 22.0'+ 22.5'+ 26.5'+ 28.5'+
diving platform
B—Clearance in any direction to the
observation stand, diving platform, 14.0'+ 14.5'+ 17.0'+ 18.01+
or tower
V—Vertical clearance over adjacent
land
*See Ground Clearance,page 03-03-01.
Include the wind and sag adder
Swimming Areas & Pools '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 10/07-Reviewed 07/15 03-09-01
Wire Crossing Clearances
The table below lists design clearances for wire Lesser clearances are allowed for some
crossings where the wires are supported on situations. Contact Methods&Materials.
different structures.
Vertical Clearance Between Wires Carried On Different Supporting Structures (feet)
These clearances are for the upper wire at maximum sag and the lower wire at 40°F initial sag'. SEE
PAGE 03-04-01 FOR DISTRIBUTION CONDUCTOR SAG ADDERS. High voltage adders have
already been applied in this table. For transmission conductor sag adders, contact Methods&Materials.
Up
per Guys, Open Wire Primary
Lower neutral Comm. Multiplex 0-750V to 34.5-kV 46-kV 69-kV 138-W 230-kV 345-kV 500-kV
Guys, neutrals 2.0+ 2.0+2 2.5+ 3.0+ 4.0+ 4.2+ 4.6+ 6.5+ 8.6+ 11.4+ 15.6+
Communication 2.0+ 2.0+ 2.5+ 4.0+ 6.0+ 6.2+ 6.6+ 8.5+ 10.6+ 13.4+ 17.6+
Multiplex 2.5+ 2.5+2 2.5+ 3.0+ 4.0+ 4.2+ 4.6+ 6.5+ 8.6+ 11.4+ 15.6+
Open-wire,0-750V3.0+ 4.0+2 4.0+ 3.0+ 4.0+ 4.2+ 4.6+ 6.5+ 8.6+ 11.4+ 15.6+
750V to 34.5kV 4.0+ 6.0+2 4.0+ 4.0+ 4.0+ 4.2+ 4.6+ 6.5+ 8.6+ 11.4+ 15.6+
1. Where ice loading is worse than high temperature sag,use the ice loaded condition forthetop wire and the 0
degree initial condition for the lower conductor.
2. In general,do not install communications above power.Contact engineering.
V See the table above for vertical clearances.
Note that additional clearances will be
required according to footnote 1.
Contact Methods&Materials.
Contact Methods&Materials
for adjacent line clearances.
H
Example Wire Crossing Clearance Calculations
For examples of how to apply additional clearances, see pages 03-06-02 and 03-07-02.
R Wire Crossing Clearances

Overhead Revised 10/07—Reviewed 07/15 03-10-01
Wires On the Same Supporting Structure
Horizontal Clearance Between Line See page 07-02-01. If more spacing is needed to
Conductors meet code where more than two conductors are
to be mounted on the arm,re-drill the pin holes,
The following formulas and tables specify the or provide phase spacers.
minimum code clearances(C) as a function of
conductor sag(S). Our normal light and medium
crossarm pinhole spacings provide clearances of
approximately 26" and 30", respectively,
between conductors.
A. For line conductors smaller than AWG#2: C=0.3"per kV+4.04(S-24)l/2
Table 1
Horizontal Clearances Between Line Conductors Smaller Than AWG No.2 at Supports
(rounded up to nearest inch)
Voltage (kV) Sag (inches,60°F final)
Between But Not
Conductors 36 48 72 96 120 180 240 Less Than
2.4 15 21 29 36 41 52 61 12
4.16 16 22 30 36 41 52 61 12
7.2 17 22 31 37 42 53 62 12
12.47 18 24 32 39 44 55 64 14
14.4 19 25 33 39 44 55 64 15
19.92 20 26 34 41 46 57 66 17
24.94 22 28 36 42 48 58 67 19
34.5 25 31 39 45 50 61 70 23
46 28 34 42 49 54 65 74 27
B. For line conductors of#2 AWG&larger: C=0.3" per kV+8(S/12)'/2.
Table 2
Horizontal Clearances Between Line Conductors AWG #2 and Larger at Supports
(rounded up to nearest inch)
Voltage (kV) Sag (inches,60°F final)
Between But Not
Conductors 36 48 72 96 120 180 240 Less Than
2.4 15 17 21 24 27 32 37 12
4.16 16 18 21 24 27 33 38 12
7.2 17 19 22 25 28 34 38 12
12.47 18 20 24 27 30 35 40 14
14.4 19 21 24 27 30 36 41 15
19.92 20 22 26 29 32 37 42 17
24.94 22 24 28 31 33 39 44 19
34.5 25 25 30 33 36 42 47 23
46 28 30 34 37 40 45 50 27
NOTE. Where practical,do not place circuits of different voltages onthesame arm.
Contact Methods&Materials.
pR Wires On the Same Supporting Structure

03-10-02 Revised 10/07—Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Vertical Clearance Between Line Underbuild Circuits and Buck Arms. See
Conductors Overhead Section 11-20 for framing dimensions.
And Overhead Section 11-21 for underbuild
Refer to the Overhead or Transmission Manual circuits.
sections suggested on this page for the particular
clearance you are looking for. For special Transmission Underbuild. See Transmission
Section s for distribution underbuild on
situations, contact Methods&Materials.
transmission poles.
Phase-to-Neutral Clearance.See Overhead
Section 11-02 for tables showing the maximum Clearance to Communications. See Overhead
spans that can be constructed for various phase- Section 04 for Joint Use and Special Circuits.
to-neutral spacings, along with other clearance
restraints. Conductor Spacing on Vertical Racks.For
secondary only,use the spacings shown below.
g
12"
8"
8" 12"
Spans 250'or less Spans 250'-300'
Multiple-spool racks provide Single spool racks are
adequate spacing. necessary-12"spacing.
Conductor Spacing on Vertical Racks
Wires On the Same Supporting Structure '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 10/07-Reviewed 07/15 03-1 U-03
Clearance In Any Direction From Line Conductors to Supports, and To Vertical or
Lateral Conductors, or Guy Wires Attached to the Same Support
To Vertical or Lateral Conductors
Of the Same Circuit (Cl in inches)
kV 0-4.16 12.47 24.9 34.5 46* C1
C 1 3.0 3.95 7.06 9.45 12.33
* No value specified for voltages over50-kV L-L
Of Other Circuits (C2 in inches)
Vertical or Line conductor voltage (kV) C2
lateral-
conductor
kV 750V 4.16 12.47 24.94 34.5
750V 3 6 6 8.5 10.7
4.16 6 6 6.4 9.3 11.5
12.47 6 6.4 8.3 11.2 13.4
24.94 8.5 9.3 11.2 14.1 16.3
34.5 10.7 11.5 13.4 16.3 18.5
To Guy Wires or Messengers
See page 06-04-05 for special requirements
when guys pass within 12" of both power and
communications wires.
When parallel to Line(Ca, Cai in inches)
Circuit phase-to-phase kV Ca Cai
Clearan ce Commo 0-8.7 12.47 24.94 34.5
Ca inches 6 12 13.6 18.5 22.4 to anchor)
Cai (75%) 4.5 9 10.2 13.9 16.8 Span or head guy lnot
Anchor Guys(Cb, Cbi in inches)
Circuit phase-to-phase kV
Clearan ce Commo 0-8.7 12.47 24.94 34.5
Cb inches 6 6 7.0 10.1 12.5 Cb
Cbi (75%) 4.5 4.5 5.3 7.6 9.4 Cbi
All Other(Cc,Cci in inches)
Circuit phase-to-phase kV
Clearan ce Commo 0-8.7 12.47 24.94 34.5 0
Cc inches 6 6 7.6 12.5 16.4 Cc Cci
Cci (75%) 4.5 4.5 5.7 9.4 12.3 /
"`pR Wires On the Same Supporting Structure

03-10-04 Revised 01/16 Overhead
To Surface of Support Arms
Effectively grounded neutrals and messengers
may attach directly.
Circuit phase-to-phase kV Cd
Clearan ce 0-750V to 8.7 12.47 24.94 34.5
Cd inches 1 3 3 4.2 5.3
To Surface of Structures Ce
Effectively grounded neutrals and messengers may
attach directly to the structure. o IM
Circuit phase-to-phase kV
Clearan ce 0-750V to 8.7 12.47 24.94 34.5
Ce inches 1 5 5 6.2 7.3
NOTE. These clearances are for line conductors.
For jumpers see below.
Clearance of Vertical or Lateral Conductors to Guy Wires, Messengers, or Support
C1 - Clearance from vertical or lateral con-
ductor to support surface.
C2 C2 - Clearance from vertical or lateral con-
or ductor to anchor guy.
C3
C3 - Clearance from vertical or lateral con-
ductor to other guys, messengers.
Measure to the
C1 nearest energized - A 25%reduction is allowed to a guy
part,also. strain insulator or insulated section
with full clearance to end fittings.
Circuitphaseto phasevoltage
Clearance 0-750 to 8.7 12.47 24.9 34.5
C1 inches 1* 3 3.0 4.2 5.3
C2 inches 6 6 7.0 10.1 12.5
C3 inches 6 6 7.6 12.5 16.4
Neutrals may attach directly
Note:These clearances do not provide for the working distances required by Table 2-1, Minimum Approach
Distance,of the Idaho Power Safety Manual for climbing past the jumper. DO NOT CLIMB PAST THE JUMPER
UNTIL IT IS DE-ENERGIZED AND GROUNDED,OR RELOCATED OR GUARDED.Also, maintain working
distances to ungrounded parts,such as pole top pins,steel pins for insulators,etc.
Wires On the Same Supporting Structure 9 R„

Overhead Revised 01/16 03-1 1-01
Climbing Space
Caution. If these requirements are not Also, carefully observe the working distances to
met, do not climb the pole above the level ungrounded or energized wires and parts specified
where climbing space is obstructed. in Table 2-1,MinimumApproach Distance,of the
Idaho Power Safety Manual.
Climb space X dimension
Climbing space Climbing space 0-750V 30" X" by X"
on a side on a corner 12.5kV 36"
24.9kV 42"
34.5kV 46"
Shift is allowed if Box must
Climbing space of dimensions X by X Y=60" or more extend Y"
must be provided on a side or corner Y
above &
below any
conductors.
Y=40" (60"
where shift
is required)
\V Y.
Limiting
conductors
Y„ or parts
Climb space
36"- 12.5kV
42"- 24.9kV
46"- 34.5kV
The climbing space may be shifted to another
Requirements are met. You may apply rub- pole side or comer if there is a 60"vertical
ber and climb through to the top insulator. clearance between limiting conductors or parts.
Extension Bracket
Pole Dia
28" +5" Min.
Configuration at left
meets code, but we
O recommend at right. o
The NESC requires
30" that we rubber sec. & 30" by 30"
services where minimum
climbing space at for 0-750V
38" Min. right is not provided.
Requirements not met-don't
climb through with it hot or
ungrounded, even with rubber.
"`P RR Climbing Space

Overhead Revised 12/07—Reviewed 07/15 03-12-01
Clearance to Trees
NOTE. This is not a tree trimming standard. Are there limbs within 8'or so from the ground
The amount of cut-back will depend upon such that are sturdy enough to aid climbing?Is the
factors as expected length of time before the trunk small enough to shin up?Are the limbs
next trimming operation, and the expected rate above sturdy enough and spaced such as to
of growth of the species. For transmission, see attract young climbing enthusiasts, clubhouse
Transmission Manual Section 12-100. builders,kite and frizbee retrievers, swing and
dive artists, etc.?In some areas, even though the
We have divided trees into three categories for trunk is large, slick, or barren of limbs. the kids
clearance purposes. may borrow Dad's ladder, or nail up their own
stepping system if the limb system above, or the
1. Trees That Children Will Not Be Climbing location is such that it provides an adventurous
attraction. For these trees,maintain the
Where we would not expect young children or clearances in the following illustration to the
teens to be climbing trees and the tree is not climbable parts of the tree. Oregon State
readily climbable,we merely wish to avoid requires 5'clearance to these trees,with
contact. The clearance should allow for reduction to 6" for new growth.
movement of the conductor and the tree without
conflict. The high temperature sag adders on 3. Orchard Trees, Trees Decorated for
page 03-04-02,(Tables 3 &4), and the wind Holidays,etc.
displacement adders on page 03-04-03 (Table 5
&6) should aid in making this determination. Where you expect ladders, ladder trucks, etc.,to
Also,trees should not interfere with the be used for picking fruit, decorating the tree for
climbing space on structures. See section 03-It. Christmas, etc.,then as a minimum,maintain
Note that Oregon State requires 3'clearance to sign clearances,page 03-07-01, to ALLparts of
these trees,with reduction to 6" for new growth. the tree. Don't forget the decor on the very tip-
top.
2.Easily Climbable Trees in Areas Where
Children and Teens Frequent Please note that these clearances are not
sufficient to allow unauthorized persons to
There are no definite rules to identify these trees. work on the tree without special precautions.
However,you were a boy or girl once, and you See the work activity regulations on page
can use reasonable judgment. Here are some 03-13-01.
points to consider.Are children using the tree for
climbing?Is the tree covered with thorns?
�PAHO
OR. Clearance to Trees
M­­.m 'Y

03-12-02 Revised 12/07- Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Clearance envelope around climbable portion of tree Wire at
V=vertical clearance to maximum sag position MAX.SAG
Hr=horizontal clearance to conductor rest position
Hw=horizontal clearance to wind-displaced position
SEEPAGE 03-04-02 FOR SAG,WIND ADDERS.
For non-climbable portions,avoid contact(6"Min). V
NOTE: Where abrasion of multiplex is V
occurring,we recommend that you apply
tree guard, Cat Id's 4702 to-05. Secure /
the tree guard with a nylon tie wrap where V Climbable
It is likely to travel down the cable.
Hw Portion
Hr
Clearance to Climbable Portion
Wire Type Hr Hw V
Open Wire 0-750V 5.5 3.5+ 6.0+
Primary to 34.5kV 7.5 4.5+ 8.0+
NOTE: These clearances are the same as the NESC
minimums for signs. They allow for a 3'horizontal,or a
3.5'vertical reach beyond the climbable portion.
Clearance to Trees
Clearance to Trees '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 01/10—Reviewed 07/15 03-13-01
Work Activity Clearances
Regulations for Unauthorized Persons Regulations for Authorized Persons
OSHA(29 CFR 1910.331 to 1910.333)and Persons authorized to work closer than indicated
State regulations(ORS 757.800 to 757.805 in above must still maintain the proper clearances
Oregon, 55-2401 to 55-2405 in Idaho)prohibit according to OSHA and the safety regulations of
unauthorized persons from performing any their own organization.Authorized persons may
activity within 10'(plus 0.4"per kV for voltages include:Idaho Power employees and contractors;
over 50-kV line to line)of a high voltage power employees of communications utilities with joint
line, as illustrated below. The OSHA regulation use agreements and their contractors; and agents
includes bare secondary. For vehicular or of government, including fire,police, or other
mechanical equipment in transit, OSHA allows a emergency service workers engaged in
reduction to 4'plus the high voltage adder. The emergency operations. For proper authorization,
person wishing to perform work within these the person must be working within the scope of
distances (including tools,materials, or his or her employment(Idaho code), and,
mechanical equipment or loads)must first according to OSHA rules(29 CFR 1910.332),
contact Idaho Power. The Company may choose must have received the proper training.
to provide insulating barriers, de-energize and
ground the line, or temporarily relocate the
facilities at the customer's expense.
10,
Conductor movement
® envelope as position
changes with conductor
temperature,wind
10' Clearance Table
50-kV&below 10.0'
r50-kV
OTE. For over 69-kV 10.7'
L-L,add 0.4" 138-kV 13.0'
er kV.See the 230 kV 16.0'
table at the right. 345-kV 19.9'
Clearance envelope�— 500-kV 25.0'
for other than authorized 10,
persons,including tools, NOTE. OSHA allows a 6'
materials,or mechanical reduction from these
equipment or loads,from 10, clearances for vehicular
bare primary or secondary or mechanical equipment
in transit with it's structure
lowered.
Work Activity Clearances for Unauthorized Persons
009ORM
PONM Work Activity Clearances
M--.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 11/16 03-14-01
Aviation
Clearances and Permits For public or military facilities,file directly to the
FAA at http://oeaaa.faa.gov/.You will also need to
Don't set new poles,replace shorter poles with send a copy of the FAA filing to the particular state
taller poles or erect temporary construction aeronautics department:
equipment within the following distances, For Idaho call(208)334-8895.
corresponding to the slopes shown in the
illustration below,from airport runways and For Oregon call(800) 874-0102.
heliports(any direction from end or side)without
airspace consideration.If the ground at the site of For private runways or helipads,contact the owner.
the construction is higher than the runway Data for private airstrips which have filings with
elevation,or if the pole length is more than 60', FAA maybe found at
greater distance will be required. http://www.gcrl.com/SOIOWEB/.
Be sure to schedule sufficient time for the approval. If any construction will be closer than the indicated
For detailed procedure see Distribution Manual distances from FAA navigation aids or air traffic
Section 03.01-08. control facilities,notification and permit application
may also be necessary.See FAAAdvisory Circular
AC 150/5300-13 Ch 6.
Note: Contact engineering for construction in a
precision approach path, including the area up to 0
5 miles southeast of the Boise Municipal Airport
----Slope: 1:100&within 20,000'for longest runway over 3200'
1:50&within 10,000'for longest runway under 3200'
1:25&within 5,000'for heliport
Facilities outside this
Triangle will require a
permit application to FAA. End OR SIDE of runway
Clearances From End or Side of Runways
NOTE. If any aircraft makes contact with IPCO facilities, inform the FAA immediately by emailing:
7-ANM-BOI-FSDOk AA.gov
"`�R� Aviation
M--.m 'Y

03-14-02 Revised 08/11 —Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
A. Large Airports(runway length greater F. Outer Marker or Other Electronic
than 3200')-Within 1 mile for a 60'pole Navigation Facility-Within 100'. This is
NOTE. If the construction is within a precision usually a small antenna array located up to
approach path, greater distance will apply. The several miles beyond the end of and in line
area up to approximately 5 miles southeast of with the runway. It may be security-fenced or
the Boise Municipal Airport is in a precision pole-mounted.
approach path.
B. Small Airports(runway length 3200'or --
less) -Within 1/2 mile for a 60'pole.
See the illustration on page 01. '
C. Heliports-Within 1/4 mile for a 60'pole.
See the illustration on page 01.
D. River or Canyon Crossing,Etc. Over 200'
above ground or low water level. '
E. VOR(very high frequency omnirange
antenna)-Any construction within 1 mile.
This is a white cone-shaped building
surrounded by a fence with FAA signs on it. G. Airport Surveillance Radar-Within
Overhead lines can cause signal interference. 1500'.This is a rotating antenna used to
control air traffic. Overhead lines in
proximity can cause signal reflections.
Usually,the antenna will be elevated so that
this is less of a problem.
I
Aviation '`per Rm.

Overhead Revised 08/11 —Reviewed 07/15 03-14-03
Warnings Marker Balls. Use 20"international orange
balls to mark poles and short spans. Use 36"
When the FAA permit is obtained they will balls for long spans across rivers, and canyons.
indicate the proper clearances and if any power For less than four use the international orange
poles located within an airport or heliport color for all. If more than four are needed,
require to be lighted and/or marked. Idaho alternate international orange,yellow, and white
Power M&M interprets this to mean both;the balls.
lighting is for night and the marking(painted
pole or marker balls)is for daytime identifying. For transmission,mount the balls on the shield
wire or separate messenger.
Poles. Power poles located near approach
paths of an airport or heliport need to be For mounting on conductor that is over 150-kV,
identified so a pilot will be able to spot them EHV coated balls are required.
easily even in inclement weather.
If painting a pole is not an option, an
international orange 20"marker ball located near
the top of the pole will be adequate.
Paint the pole with good quality international
orange and white that is locally purchased.
Prime the area to be painted if possible. Each All marker balls are ordered by specific ball
pole is to be painted in a minimum of three(3) diameter, color, and wire size(for the ties
alternating sections. Each section should be 1/7 needed). See Material Manual page 06-501-01.
the pole height beginning with the orange on the
top of the pole.
1/7 Pole Height
J
"`�R. Aviation
M--.m 'Y

03-14-04 Revised 08/11 —Reviewed 07/15 Overhead
Warning Lights. Aircraft warning lights are Dual LED warning lights(Cat.ID 24558) are
strategically placed to identify power poles that available to top specified poles.
may be located within flight paths near airports
and heliports. Lighting the pole top and/or If the center phase conductor is located on the
marking the pole will meet FAA and state pole, arrange to have it transferred to the arm or
requirements. a BK-18 bracket.Add any avian protection if
necessary. See Avian Sections 11-30 through 35.
Cat. ID Description CU Code
24558 LED WARNING LIGHT DUAL DWNLED
This CU code includes everything to install on an
existing pole as shown above with the exception to
the supplywi re,the anti-split bolt,the paint and/or the
marker ball if needed.
To order this light, see Material Manual page
17-001-01.
To install this light:
• Supply 120V power from nearby.
Light fixture
Pipe Nipple
a� Condulet Cover and seal with Airseal Compound
Wirenuts Connect#14 green wire to white
and black wire to black
Pipe Nipple *Will be Drilled and tapped for 1" pipe-thread
Pole Top Bracket* by M&E Shop and will be sent with Light fixture
i from BOC Stores
4"
� Ground Pole Top Bracket
8" n
8'Molding Supplied to be mounted through the hot work area
Attach with Straps&Screws
DWNLED
Aviation '`per Rm.

Overhead Revised 02/21 04-00-01
Table of Contents
04 Joint Use and Special Circuits
04-01-01 Introduction—Joint Use& Special 04-03-10 Extension Bracket Clearance
Circuits 04-03-11 All Dielectric Fiber Optic Cables
Joint Use of Structures 04-03-12 Small Cell Clearances
General Conditions for
Attachment 04-04-01 Communication Risers
Vegetation Management Means of Attachment
Bonding
04-02-01 General Joint Use Practices 04-04-02 Riser Illustrations
Attachment of Communication 04-04-04 Preservation of Climbing Space
Cables to Poles
Wood Pole Attachments 04-05-01 Special Circuits and Equipment
Steel Pole Attachments Floating Neutral
Protruding Bolts Delta Circuits and Others with No
04-02-02 Multiple Attachments Neutral
04-02-03 Grounding and Bonding Neutral Isolator
Communication Equipment 04-05-02 Harmonic Suppression Reactor
04-02-04 Climbing Space 04-05-03 Communication Power Supply
Multiple Attachments
04-02-05 Communication Anchors 04-06-01 Fiber Optics
04-02-06 Communication Slack Spans General Information
Identification of Facilities Safety
04-02-07 Coordination of Reconstruction Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cables
Work Optical Ground Wire(OPGW)
All-Dielectric(ADSS)
04-02-07 Small Cell Antennas&Equipment Non-Armored Loose Tube
Purpose (AD)
Location Selection 04-06-02 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable
Incident Energy Levels CU Codes and Manufacturer
04-02-08 Meter Vs.Non-Metered Table
Grounding Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable
Break/Disconnect Enclosure Properties Table
Labeling 04-06-03 Splices and Closures
Amplifiers&Battery Backups Pole-Mounted Splice Closure
Pole Risers 04-06-04 Underground Splice Closure
Aesthetics Splice Closure CU Parts List
Clearances 04-06-05 Conduit and Risers
Armored Conduit
04-03-01 Joint Use Clearances PVC Conduit with Innerduct
Ground Clearance for Risers
Communications Handholes
04-03-02 Crossing on the Same Structure 04-06-06 Fiber Optic Cable Installation
04-03-03 Crossing in the Span Overhead Installations
04-03-04 Parallel Lines on Separate Underground Installations
Structures Identification Devices
04-03-05 Parallel Lines on the Same 04-06-07 Testing Fiber Optic Cable
Structure Pre-Installation
04-03-07 Clearance at Service Drops Post-Installation
04-03-08 Clearance at Drip Loops After Splicing
Clearance to Street Lights
04-03-09 Clearance from Power Equipment Continued on next page
"`ppRR Table of Contents

04-00-02 Revised 02/21 Overhead
04-06-21 All-Dielectric Self-Supporting 04-06-31 Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic
Fiber Optic Cable(ADSS) Cable(OPGW)
General Information General Information
Precautions Precautions
Sag and Tension Methods Sag and Tension Methods
Maximum Span Length Attachment Hardware
Tensioning Grips 04-06-32 Cable Support Hardware
04-06-22 Attachment Hardware 04-06-33 Vibration Dampers
04-06-23 Anchors and Down Guys Selection Damping
Splice Points Mid-Span damping
04-06-24 Spare Cable 04-06-34 Splice Points
Vibration Dampers Grounding
04-06-25 Cable Installation 04-06-35 Cable Installation
04-06-26 ADSS Fiber Optic Hardware for First and Last Structures
Wood Poles CU Parts List Tangent and Angle Structures
OPGW Stringing Method
04-06-36 OPGW Fiber Optic Cable
Hardware and Catalog IDs
Material List
Table of Contents '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-01-01
Introduction-Joint Use & Special Circuits
Joint Use of Structures touching vegetation on a periodic basis as
experience has shown necessary.
Rule 222 of the 2017 edition of the National
Electrical Safety Code(NESC) encourages joint Multiple companies or owners can be affected
use of structures along highways,roads, streets, by vegetation touching lines. If one piece of
and alleys. In harmony with the national vegetation touches multiple lines with different
standard, Idaho Power allows communication owners,all companies are in violation until the
utilities to under build on lines where this can be vegetation is trimmed. Companies that share a
done safely.This Joint Use and Special Circuits facility can agree to have one vegetation
Section outlines the specific requirements for manager who trims for the entire space.
safe construction, operation and maintenance of
joint use lines. NOTE.Use only Vegetation Management
Companies that are approved to work in
General Conditions for Attachment proximity to overhead power lines.
♦ The Joint User must establish a Pole
Attachment Agreement with Idaho Power
prior to making attachments.After the
Agreement has been established,the utility
must contact Idaho Power prior to making
attachments pursuant to the Agreement, see
Distribution Manual 10.
♦ The Joint User must meet the requirements
of the particular NESC edition that applies.
♦ Communication utilities must meet proper
clearances and the protection requirements
of NESC Rule 223.Methods of protection
must be adequate to withstand possible
voltages.
NOTE.The NESC code requires Grade B
construction for communication cables
over railroad tracks,limited access
highways, and navigable waters requiring
waterway crossing permits, see 2017
NESC,Table 242-1.
Vegetation Management
Per NESC 218A, Vegetation management
should be performed around supply and
communication lines.... To comply with this
rule,all vegetation that is touching
communication lines will be trimmed by the
owner of that line. Lines should be inspected for
IDAW
"WQNPOVIIERR Introduction - Joint Use & Special Circuits

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-02-01
General Joint Use Practices
Communication Cable Attachment Steel Pole Attachments
On Idaho Power(IP)poles,the communication Contact Transmission&Distribution(T&D)
cable attachment is located below all power Design Department for approval before
conductors and will comply with NESC and attaching to steel poles. Brackets and crossarms
Idaho Power clearance requirements, as are allowed on steel poles only with approval
illustrated in Overhead Manual 04-03. from T&D. Idaho Power does not allow steel
When installing wire/cable attachments,the bands, drilled holes, or welds other than the
Joint User and installation contractors will use mounting provisions originally supplied by the
the standards set forth in this manual. manufacturer and those installed by an IP
welder.
For construction standards not specifically Drilled holes may be allowed on light duty steel
covered in this manual,the Joint User will poles,but not on foundation structures.
follow the latest edition of the Telcordia Blue
Book,IEEE 524 Standard, and best construction See Overhead 04-02-03 for information on
industry practice for stringing wires. grounding on steel poles.
Wood Pole Attachments Protruding Bolts
Idaho Power requires that communication cables Protruding bolt ends are a safety hazard to
attach directly to wood poles,unless there are workers on the structure. Therefore,bolt ends
multiple communication attachments; see next should not protrude more than 2-inches from the
page. pole surface and sharp edges must be filed off.
Communication cables are attached to the same
side of the pole as the power neutral or
secondary conductors as shown below.
%woo)
Attach communication cables No bands or drilling on steel poles
on same side as primary neutral. except as stated above
Attachment of Communication Cables to Poles
"`�R. General Joint Use Practices

04-02-02 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Multiple Attachments NOTE.The use of brackets does not
reduce the vertical clearance requirement
Idaho Power may allow brackets and/or to power conductors.Vertical and
crossarms where multiple communication circuit horizontal clearances must be met
attachments are needed. regardless of the method of attachment,
see Overhead Manual 04-03-10.
Idaho Power approved two multiple attachment
configurations, see illustration below. Install heavier communication cables on the
inner position on the crossarm or bracket.
♦ 18-inch fiberglass extension bracket
♦ 5-or 8-foot wood crossarm Mount brackets,communication cables, and the
primary neutral on the same side of the pole to
Only IP or approved contractors install this preserve climbing space as shown in the figure
equipment.Any other arrangement must be below, also see climbing space requirements in
submitted to the Joint Use Team for engineering this section, 04-02-04.
approval.
Keep brackets on
the same side of the
pole to preserve 40"min
climbing space.
28"
min
i o a o
5'or 8'crossarm
18" communication
bracket
Multiple Attachment of Communication Cables to Poles
General Joint Use Practices '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 06/22 04-02-03
Grounding and Bonding Metallic cable sheaths and messengers must be
electrically continuous for an effective
Per NESC,bonding is required everywhere a grounding system.
pole ground exists.Therefore, communication
utilities are to make bonding connections to The only exception is where IP installed a
every pole ground. On steel poles,the bonding neutral isolator to separate our neutral from the
connection must be made to a stainless steel nut, customer's neutral for the purpose of reducing
when available.If a nut is not available,the neutral-to-earth voltages on the customer's
connection is not necessary. wiring, see Overhead Manual 04-05-02.
Communication Equipment
To apparatus The communication utility will supply,install,
and maintain its equipment, including risers and
System neutral guys. The equipment must be installed according
® to the requirements of the NESC and IP and
must not interfere with the climbing space on the
pole.
Pole ground If electric service is required for communication
equipment,the communication utility may
install the service equipment.However, IP or an
approved contractor must install the mast or any
Messenger other equipment that extends into the supply
space and connect the service drip loop; see
Overhead Manual 04-05-03.
Idaho Power or an approved contractor must
install or remove power poles; even if the
communications utility owns the pole.
"`�R. General Joint Use Practices

04-02-04 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Climbing Space Multiple Attachments
Position communication equipment on the pole Where multiple communication attachments are
with a clear climbing space that measures at on crossarm,the climbing space may be reduced
least 30 X 30-inches.The climbing space must to 28 X 28-inch. The vertical clearance can be
extend upward through the power conductors reduced to 40-inches where a shift to another
and on the same side or quadrant of the pole; see quadrant is required; see illustration below.
illustrations below.
A 60-inch vertical clearance that's free of
equipment must be provided to allow a worker
to maneuver through the equipment when a shift
to another side or quadrant is required.
30x30"
Y=40"(60"
where shift
is required)
Communications taps Y
` Power services
2Y
30x30" 1 V
O Y
f.
4e
Climbing Space Through
Taps and Services Limiting
Y conductors
or parts
Climbing Space Where Shift is Required
General Joint Use Practices '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 06/22 04-02-05
Communication Anchors
The communications utility will guy its
equipment as necessary, and provide structural
analysis if requested by IP.The guys may be
connected to power anchors with approval of IP
and if it meets the following conditions:
♦ An engineering analysis was performed to
ensure that anchors are adequate for the Fiberglass
load,including appropriate safety factors. stick type
♦ An open position must be available on the
anchor eye.
o Auxillary anchor eyes are not "Johnny Ball"
allowed porcelain type
Multiple guy guards in Approved Guy Strain Insulator Types
high exposure areas
Spare eye position
Anchor Attachments
♦ Anchors within high exposure areas
require an approved IP guy marker. Effectively ground
any guy strand above
♦ An IP approved guy insulator must be a guy strain insulator
installed.
♦ Guys and anchors must be in place before
tension is applied.
♦ Any guy strand above the guy insulator Guy Strand Grounding Requirement
must be bonded to the grounding
conductor; see right.
"`�R. General Joint Use Practices

04-02-06 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Communication Slack Spans Coordination of Reconstruction Work
♦ Spans 100-feet or more must be guyed and Coordinate with all affected Joint Users when
anchored. work being planned will affect them.
♦ Spans less than 100-feet are guyed and
anchored at the discretion of Idaho Power. Communication utilities must transfer their
facilities to the new structures pursuant to their
Pole Attachment Agreement.
Identification of Facilities
Notify the requester that IP and Joint Users will
Joint Users must identify their facilities on all charge for reconstruction work.
poles with identification tags that meet the
following requirements:
♦ Made of weather and corrosion resistant
material
♦ Print the approved Joint User 4-letter
code in at least 1.25-inch font
♦ Attach securely on the cable near the
pole, so the tags do not slide down the
cable
♦ Position the tag so that it can be read
from the ground
NOTE. Wrap-around sleeve tags are not
compliant.
GS
000
TC
Communications Identification Tags
General Joint Use Practices '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 06/22 04-02-07
Communication Antennas & Equipment
Purpose
This section provides standards for installation, ♦ Primary Distribution Poles (750 V+)
operation, and maintenance of Joint Use antenna Antennas are allowed only in the
equipment and service connections to stand- communication space* on these poles.
alone antennas. However,it is not recommended to
place antennas on these poles. In the
Location Selection event that newtransformer are needed,
then Idaho Power(IP)will require the
Use the following guidelines when choosing Joint User to move the antenna to a new
structures for antenna placement: location.
♦ Secondary Poles&Light Poles *Communication space is area on the pole
(750 V or less) separated from the supply space by at
These are the best options to place antennas. least 40-inches vertical and 60-inches for
They can be placed above the secondary or 4-up flat-top construction; see Overhead
service conductor,with the bottom of the Manual 11-20-10 and NESC 235C4.
antenna at least 12-inches above the
secondary line. See this section 04-02-10 for ♦ Transformer Poles—Antennas are not
AMR antenna illustration. allowed on any pole with a transformer.
High Voltage
0
♦ Pole Sizing—Use at least a class-2 pole.
NOTE.If a lesser pole is used,the Joint
User must provide engineering analysis for
Open-Wire smaller class poles.
Secondary
Multiplex Incident Energy Levels
Maintain the Maximum Permissible Exposure
(MPE)within the General Population/
Neutral Uncontrolled limit of 8-feet from the antenna.
NOTE:Radio frequency levels that exceed
ao° ten times the Occupational Exposure Limits
Communication are not allowed. Therefore,a Warning sign
Max Height of is not needed or allowed.
Antenna Antenna when
either High
Voltage or Open
wire Secondary
are on the Pole
�POMR. Communication Antenna and Equipment

04-02-08 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Metered Vs. Non-Metered Amplifiers & Battery Backups
Most antenna equipment will qualify for a non- These are not allowed on the pole.
metered service connection.To do so,the
following requirements must be met: Pole Risers
♦ 1800 Watts—Single or multiple-unit Follow IP pole riser standards in Overhead
loads totaling less than 1800-watts. Manual 04-04.
♦ Fixed Load—The load must be constant
and fixed, so the actual usage can be Aesthetics
accurately determined; no wired or plug- Create a consistent appearace with other
in outlets. overhead electrical installations in the area by
♦ Service Drop Only—Idaho Power's only installing antenna equipment of similar color.
investment will be an overhead service
drop. Small Cell Clearances
Grounding Small cells installed above the secondary or
street light must meet the following vertical
♦ Bond the communication ground to the clearances,also shown in the illustration on the
pole ground. next page:
♦ Install antenna grounding electrode. ♦ Bottom of antenna to top of luminaire
♦ Bond metal conduit to the pole ground. bracket—1 2-inches
♦ Bottom of antenna to overhead
For more details, see Overhead Manual secondary cable-12-inches
this section on 04-02-03 and 04-04-01 ♦ Overhead secondary cable to top of
antenna service weather head—
Breaker/Disconnect Enclosure 4-to 8-inches
Install the breaker or disconnect enclosure ♦ Overhead span guy wire to top of
outside of the MPE radius and accessible to IP. antenna service weather head-
12-inches
Labeling ♦ Bottom of the disconnect enclosure to
♦ Install the information sign 5-feet above the ground-15-feet
the ground ♦ Lowest standoff bracket to second
standoff bracket-9-feet
♦ Include the following information on the
sign: Additional requirements include the following:
• Site name ♦ Provide at least 5-feet coiled wire for the
• Communications owner service connection to ensure enough
• Contact phone number cable to form the drip loop.
♦ Install appropriate Caution or Notice sign ♦ Install required non-metallic conduit
at least 10-feet from the antenna. from the antenna mount to the overhead
♦ Label the disconnect enclosure. secondary cable or 40-inches,whichever
is smaller. Also,from from the overhead
secondary cable to 6-feet below, see
NOTE: Warning labels are not used, illustration on the next page.
because radio frequency levels that exceed
ten times the Occupational Exposure Limits
are not allowed.
Communication Antenna and Equipment WOP RR.

Overhead Revised 06/22 04-02-09
I;
u- >r
Non metallic conduit
from AO'above to 6'
J •. below wcondaty
L[taw S'a=49d for
drip loovaw dw
r
R� Communication Antenna and Equipment

04-02-10 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Automatic Meter Reading (AMR)Antenna
'6,
J 12-Minimum
Multiplex Service Drop
Sch 40 PVC Bell End
Cat ID 6483
1"Pipe Strap
Cat.ID 4612
1"SO 80 PVC
Cat.to 5398
..........
Outside of RIF Zone-Minimum
Breaker
Radio Control Box
To Batter Backup Off Pole 15 Minimum
y Backup Off Pole =TAb.v Ground Antenna
Antenna with Light
to
12"
Multiplex
os
40"
...........
Communication ........ Outside of RF Zone
12"from other utilities
Breaker
Radio Control Box
To Battery Backup Off Pole 15'Minimum
Above Ground
Antenna Secondary Pole
lor-MIDAW
Communication Antenna and Equipment WOPMR.

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-03-01
Joint Use Clearances
Follow NESC and Idaho Power clearance specifications for Joint Use, summarized here.Any deviation
must be approved by the Joint Use Team.For more detail see Overhead Manual 03.
Ground Clearance for Communications
Jurisdictional clearance requirements may vary.
Joint Use Users must secure their own crossing permits. For sailboating areas and river crossings contact
Idaho Power.
Distribution primary AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
to 34.5GrdY/1 9.92 kV page 03-04-01 for adders.
22.0'+ 355+
Open-wire secondary
&services 0-750V
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
19.0'+ 32.5'+
Multiplex secondary
&services 0-750V
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
Neutral,grounded guy, 18.5'+ 32.0'+
communications cable
AT MAXIMUM SAG. See
page 03-04-01 for adders.
18.0'+ 31.5'+
C&W
Foods
000
0000
Idaho Power Design Clearances for Communications
"`�R. Joint Use Clearances

04-03-02 Revised 06/21 Overhead
Crossing on the Same Structure
Where communication lines and power lines cross on the same structure, follow clearances shown below.
Open-wire primary
0
Open-wire secondary
and services
Multiplex secondary
and services
60" -More if a neutral
will be added later in
Primary aerial cables the secondary position
40"
Guys, neutrals
All dielectric fiber � 40" 40"
optic cables located
in the supply space 40"
30"
ur�ca�\o�s gab\e
Goo
Clearance at a Crossing on the Same Structure
�POI�N R.
Joint Use Clearances 1 mP11Y

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-03-03
Crossing in the Span If a communications line is within 3-feet of a
power pole it must be attached to the pole, see
Crossings should be made on the same NESC Rule 234B(1)(a).
supporting structure; see NESC Rule 233A.
Where this is not practical, follow vertical
clearances shown below.
Open-wire primary
0
Note: Clearances are for the upper wire
at maximum sag and the lower wire at
minimum sag. See p. 03-04-01 for adders.
e
Open-wire secondary
and services
Multiplex secondary 72"
and services
Primary aerial cables °°® 48" (36"for
T
30'1
power service)
Guys, neutrals
30"
All dielectric fiber 24"
optic cables located 24"
in the supply space
��r\Gat\o�s cable Point of crossing
Gory
Clearance at a Crossing in the Span
ROMER; Joint Use Clearances

04-03-04 Revised 06/21 Overhead
Parallel Lines on Separate Structures
Separate power lines and communication line structures far enough away from each other so that if either
structure falls they wont fall on each other, see NESC Rule 221.
Where this is not practical,meet one of the following options:
♦ Separate the structures as far as practical and use Grade B construction for the Idaho Power line.
Or
♦ Bond either the communication messenger or ground conductor to Idaho Power's neutral or ground
at least 8 times per mile.
With either option,the communication's protection system must be adequate for Idaho Power's system
voltage.
I�
I
Structure Conflict
�POI�N R.
Joint Use Clearances 1 mPa1Y

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-03-05
Parallel Lines on the Same Structure To meet clearance in the span, increase the
clearance at the structure.
For parallel lines on the same structure there are
two requirements that must be met: Note. Structure clearances must be measured
between the closest equipment and not between
♦ Clearance at the structure, see below. bolt holes, as shown below.
♦ Clearance at any point in the span, see the
next page.
Open-wire primary
a
Open-wire secondary
and services
Multiplex secondary �F
and services 60"-More if a neutral
will be added later in
Primary aerial cables the secondary position
40"
Guys, neutrals o
All dielectric fiber 40
11
40"
optic cables located
in the supply space 40"
30"
Communication
cables NOTE:These are clearances AT
THE STRUCTURE. See the next
page for midspan clearances.
Clearance at the Structure for Parallel Lines
"`�R. Joint Use Clearances

04-03-06 Revised 06/21 Overhead
Open-wire primary
❑o
Open-wire secondary
and services
Multiplex secondary
and services 45"-More if a
neutral will be
added later.See
the additional re-
Primary aerial cables quirement below.
30"
Guys,neutrals
® 30"
All dielectric fiber 30"
optic cables in 30"
the supply space t 2"
NOTE:These are clearances AT ANY
Communication POINT IN THE SPAN.See the previous
cables page for clearance at the structure.
❑o 0
Additional requirement for primary only:
Primary must not sag below a straight
line between communications attachments.
Straight line between attachments
--------------------
Clearance at Any Point in the Span
for Parallel Lines
�POI�N R.
Joint Use Clearances 1 m"a

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-03-07
Clearance at Service Drops The structure clearance must be maintained as
shown on page 04-03-05.
Clearance between supply service drop and the
communication service drop must meet the
following requirements at any point in the span
including the point of service:
♦ Multiplex supply cable—l2-inches
♦ Open wire supply cables-30-inches
40"Min.for ordinary communications cables.
Not touching for fiber optic cables in supply space.
12"for multiplex
30"for open wire
1
12"for multiplex
30"for open wire
Clearance at Service Drops
"`�R. Joint Use Clearances

04-03-08 Revised 06/21 Overhead
Clearance at Drip Loops Clearance to Street Lights
The clearance requirements between Grounded mast requires at least 20-inches
communication cables and the supply drip loop clearance from communication cross-arms.
is 40-inches. If mast is not grounded,then it must be 40-
The only exceptions are: inches above the nearest communication cable.
♦ Service-drop drip-loops at the building are
12- and 30-inches, see previous page.
♦ Covered drip-loops to street lights are
12-inches, as shown below.
6" Min. @ pole& Multiplex Secondary
not touching any-
where in the span
T All dielectric fiber optic
cable in the supply space
30" Min. 40" Min.
Communications cable
51
Multiplex or open
wire secondary
6" Min. Keep 2" Min.
All dielectric fiber hardware separation
optic cable in
the supply space
Note: If mast is not effectively grounded
(connected to pole ground or neutral)
40" then it must be 40"above the nearest
30" o communication cables.
12" 20"
Communications
cable in the com- I Comm Crossarm
munications space
Street Light and Drip Loop Clearances
�POI�N R.
Joint Use Clearances 1 m

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-03-09
Clearance from Power Equipment All metallic hardware within 2-inches of each
other must be bonded. This helps reduce radio
Clearances between various power equipment and interference.
communication equipment are shown below.
Clearances are measured between the closest
equipment surface or energized parts;not between
bolt holes per NESC.
Primary energized parts
o �g
0
Primary hot parts
o Secondary
conductors
60"
Top of riser
40" 40"-7.2kV o
40" 42.3"-14.4kV
44.5-34.5kV 60"
40"
40"
®o®
®o®
Communications cable
in the communication space
Clearance from Power Equipment
"`�R. Joint Use Clearances

04-03-1 U Revised 06/21 Overhead
Extension Bracket Clearance
Extension bracket clearance is measured vertically from the top of the bracket to the supply space;not
diagonally.The use of brackets does not reduce the vertical clearance requirement; see NESC Rules 235
and 238.
40"vertically(not 40"vertically(not
diagonally)between diagonally)between
closest parts closest parts
Communications cable in the communications space
Extension Bracket Clearance Requirement
�POI�N R.
Joint Use Clearances I mPIIY

Overhead Revised 06/21 04-03-1 1
All Dielectric Fiber Optic Cables ♦ Transistion from the supply space to the
communications space occurs only at a
The requirements for all dielectric fiber optic structure.
cables are as follows:
♦ New construction of communication
♦ Maintain 30-inches vertical clearance from utility ADSS fiber optic cable is not
communication space,with 12-inches allowed in the supply space.
clearance at midspan.
♦ Do not touch fiber optic cables and the
secondary conductors.
♦ Maintain a vertical clearance of at least 6-
inches from power equipment.
Neutral or Secondary
0
Fiber optic 6" Min
cable
40" Min
30" Min
Neutral or Secondary
6" Min 0
All dielectric
fiber optic cable
12" Min
40" Min
30"Min ®O®
Communication ®°®
cable
Transition from Supply to Comm Space
All Dielectric Fiber Optic Cable in the Supply Space
"`�R� Joint Use Clearances

04-03-12 Revised 06/21 Overhead
Small Cell Clearances Additional requirements include the following:
♦ Provide at least 5-feet coiled wire for the
Small cells installed above the secondary or service connection to ensure enough
street light must meet the following vertical cable to form the drip loop.
clearances, also shown in illustration: ♦ Install required non-metallic conduit
♦ Bottom of antenna to top of luminaire from the antenna mount to the overhead
bracket-12-inches secondary cable, or 40-inches;
♦ Bottom of antenna to overhead whichever is smaller.Also, from from
the overhead secondary cable to 6-feet
secondary cable-12-inches below.
♦ Overhead secondary cable to top of
antenna service weather head-4-to fl-
inches
♦ Overhead span guy wire to top of
antenna service weather head-12-
inches
♦ Bottom of the disconnect enclosure to
the ground-1 5-feet
♦ Lowest standoff bracket to second
standoff bracket-9-feet
12" 12,
Secondary
48„ Non-metallic conduit
from 40"above to 6'
�'- below secondary
Leave 5'+coiled for
drip loop connection
�POI�N R.
Joint Use Clearances 1 mPa1Y

Overhead Revised 1/22 04-04-01
Communication Risers
Means of Attachment Stand Off Brackets
There are three ways to attach communication Stand off brackets are required to meet the
riser cables to wood poles; conduit,molding, and following, see NESC Rule 217:
direct. For steel-pole attachments, see Overhead
Manua104-02-01. ♦ One set of standoff brackets are
allowed per pole.
For any attachement,the first step is to bundle all ♦ Vertical clearance of 9-feet between
cables together. Based on the outer diameter(OD) the first two brackets on the pole.
of the bundle, follow the instructions below. Any object near the pole that can be
♦ OD 1-1/2" and larger—install the riser used as a step is considered a bracket.
cables in a conduit attached to standoff For example,a fence near the pole
bracks; see Conduits below. that can be used as a step.
♦ OD smaller than 1-1/2"—install the ♦ Install additional riser conduit on the
riser cables in non-conductive front or back side of the existing
conduit,non-conductive molding, or channel. Idaho Power can install
direct attachment. wider channels up to 24 (Cat. ID
5794)at the Joint User's expense.
When using direct attachment,Joint Users
accept the risk of damage by gaffs, Bonding
pedestrians,traffic, etc., see NESC Rule
239D. All metallic riser conduit must be bonded.
This is done by bonding to the highest
All methods must start at the ground and extend to standoff bracket attached to the metallic
within 18"of main line attachment. conduit to the pole ground. If no pole ground
exists,use non-conductive conduit or submit
NOTE. Offset the risers as necessary to a request to Idaho Power Joint Use for one to
allow clearancefor down guy(s)on be installed.
deadend poles.
NOTE.NESC Rule 92C3 requires that
Conduits all messengers and neutrals must
connect to the grounding conductor
Non-conductive conduits smaller than 1-1/2"OD any time one exists.
may be attached directly to the pole in at least 36"
intervals using pipe straps or long barbed square
shank staples, see NEC Article 352-30B.
Conduits 1-1/2" OD and larger must be attached
using 6"standoff brackets (Cat. ID 5510).
NOTE.All cables and conduits owned by
the same Joint User must be combined
and attached using the appropriate
method.
�POR. Communication Risers

04-04-02 Revised 1/22 Overhead
Bound to pole ground
1
©LJ©
#6 Cu
Pole Ground
1
36"max
Attach non-conductive
riser conduit
smaller than 1-1/2"OD
di ctly to the pole.
9'-0" 1-1/2" OD and larger
conduit
777777,
Typical Smaller than 1-1/2" OD Typical 1-1/2" and Larger
Non-conductive Communication Riser Communication Riser
Communication Risers "` R„

Overhead Revised 1/22 04-04-03
Preservation of Climbing Space
Climbing space must be preserved by consolidating all equipment to one section of the pole. Follow the
steps and guidance below to preserve the climbing space:
1. Determine the normal 30"x30"climbing space, see Overhead Manual 04-02-04.
2. Locate communication risers outside of the normal climbing space.
3. Consolidate risers into one 900 quadrant.
♦ All risers,including direct attached,must fit within the 90'quadrant.
♦ The maximum number of risers that can be attached to a pole depends upon the size of the
conduits used.All conduits must fit on a single channel set;maximum size is 24".
NOTE.Bond the metallic conduit to the pole ground via the highest standoff bracket
attached to the metallic conduit
Place the standoff bracket and all Place power and Joint Use risers on the same standoff
conduits within the same 900 bracket. Use channels,up to 24",as needed.
quadrant of the pole. One set of standoff brackets per pole is allowed.
900 Pole Quadrant
no 0
1 Keep risers out
J / of the 30"x 30"
climbing space
�POMR. Communication Risers

Overhead Revised/ Reviewed 06/20 04-05-01
Special Circuits and Equipment
Floating Neutral Delta Circuits and Others with No
Neutral
When a structure with a floating neutral(F-N)is
encountered, contact the Idaho Power Joint Use Idaho Power has a limited amount of delta
representative for specific instructions. primary distribution circuits and some wye
primary circuits with no neutral installed.A
neutral should be installed on these circuits
before the communication utility attaches.
FMN
Neutral Isolator
Floating Neutral Sign When a neutral isolator is encountered, contact
(3"x 8-3/4", Black Letters the Idaho Power Joint Use representative for
on Yellow Background) specific instructions.
® � U
F-N
0
Connection to a floating Neutral isolator
neutral(by an Idaho Power
personnel)is permissible.
Do Not run a ground wire Insulated
down the pole. secondary
ground is not
bonded to
system neutral
Do not bond the
communication
oLl®o®L to the secondary
ground(insulated)
at the pole
�o®
The ground here
Do bond the will need to be lifted,but be
communication sure to bond the grounds
messenger to at the service entrance
the primary neutral
ground wire(bare)
009DAHO
POWM Special Circuits and Equipment
M,o�o�amPa�,

04-05-02 Revised/ Reviewed 06/20 Overhead
Harmonic Suppression Reactor
At some locations the Joint Use Licensee may reactor could have high voltage on it. Two-
request that a harmonic suppression reactor be bushing capacitor cans must be used, so that the
installed at a capacitor bank to reduce bank midpoint can be isolated. For 14.4 and
interference. The Joint Use Licensee will supply 19.92 W, special cans with canted bushings on
the reactor, and an Idaho Power crew will install one side must be ordered. See page 20-03-64 for
it. Under unbalanced conditions,the grounding details.
6"min
12"
�J HarmoJ(HSR)
DI TM
Suppre to bolt
Reacto
DITM
To case grounds
To cap To system neutral 40.0"- 7.2 W
bank 42.3"-14.4 W
neutral 44.5"-19.9 W
Top View
rl DOE
Top and Side View of a Harmonic Suppression Reactor
Special Circuits and Equipment '`per RR.

Overhead Revised/ Reviewed 06/20 04-05-03
Communication Power Supply Power supply apparatus have been attach
directly to poles,provided that climbing space is
preserved. This is page outline maintenance
only. New construction shall use ground All
metallic cases and ducts must be effectively
grounded. The Joint Use Licensee will install the
equipment. Idaho Power or an approved
contractor will install the riser and weatherhead
and will make the connection to the power
secondary. The Joint Use Licensee must provide
enough wiring to reach the power secondary
with allowance for a drip loop.
e Neutral
Leave enough wire
to reach the secondary,
and to form a drip loop.
IPCo will make the
connection to the
secondary.
Keep 40"from lowest point of drip
loop to closest communication
equipment.
®o®
Cover communication cable
riser with molding or duct if
this distance is over 18".
Effectively ground all metal
equipment cases and risers.
—�T
Communications Power Supply (For Maintenance Only, New Construction Use Ground Cabinet)
"`IDAHO
PONM Special Circuits and Equipment
M,o�o�amPa�,

Overhead Revised 08/15 04-06-01
Fiber Optic Cable
General Information Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cables
This section covers the requirements for a Single-mode fiber optic cable is a small diameter
single-mode fiber optic cable installation for fiber optic tube that transmits a single ray of
Idaho Power Communications along the light for data communication and is suited for
company owned transmission and/or distribution use over long distances.
system. Communications routes can be found on
the Communications Dashboard. Consult with the Idaho Power Communications
Engineering Group for project-specific fiber
Outside of Substations:Install fiber optic cables optic cabling requirements.
in accordance with the Idaho Power Overhead
Manual(Sections 04-06-21, -31, Section 10)and Optical Ground Wire Cable(OPGW)
the Underground Manual(Sections 64 and 65). performs the duties of a shield wire,while
Inside Substations: Install fiber optic cable in providing a path for data signals by
accordance with the Idaho Power Stations incorporating optical fibers into the design of the
Construction Specifications. cable. OPGW cable can be integrated into new
and existing high-voltage transmission(or
Safety distribution) systems, and is typically placed at
the highest point on structures.
In addition to safety procedures for working
around overhead power lines and with All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Aerial Cable
underground conduit systems, observe the (ADSS)has high-tension strength capability
following when working with fiber optic cables: required for various environmental and electrical
conditions without the need for a support
Glass. Beware of glass shards, especially messenger.ADS cables are unaffected by
when cutting, stripping and splicing cables. The electromagnetic fields at distribution voltages.
shards are often very sharp,thin,tiny and can be
nearly invisible.Always wear safety glasses ADS cables may also be installed underground
when working with optical glass. where practical to avoid a cable transition and
splice from an overhead run to a short
Chemicals. Become familiar with Material underground section. Typical situations for this
Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)for cleaning practice include entering a substation or when
products and gel-filled fiber optic tubes.Always crossing a roadway.
work in well-ventilated areas and keep
flammable materials away from ignition sources Non-Armored All Dielectric Loose Tube
including fusion splice machines. Cable(AD) is for use in long runs of duct
buried applications or where transitioning from
Laser. Never look directly into the end of fiber OPGW cable to an underground section. The
cables (especially with a microscope)until it is cable can be obtained pre-installed in armored
certain that there is not an active light source at conduit for direct burial, or pulled through an
the other end of the cable.Refer to the cable and innerduct installed in PVC conduit.
hardware manufacturers'detailed instructions
for additional information and safety
precautions.
AHO
�POR. Fiber Optic Cable
M­­.m 'Y

04-06-02 Revised 08/15 Overhead
Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable CU Codes and Manufacturers
Cat. ID Description CU Code Manufacturer Part Number
45870 OPGW,24-Count TROPGW24 AFL Telecom AC-12/62/552 (DNO-5484)
44556 OPGW,48-Count TROPGW48 AFL Telecom AC-40/46/646 (DNO-4382)
48381 ADSS, 24-Count FADSS24 AFL Telecom AE0249C521BA1 (DNA-27261)
53618 ADSS, 48-Count FADSS48 AFL Telecom AE0489C521BA1 (DNA-30216)
42513 AD Loose Tube, 12-Count FAD12 AFL Telecom LE0129C5101N1
Corning 012EU4-T4701D20
37396 AD Loose Tube, 24-Count FAD24 AFL Telecom LE0249C5101N1
Corning 024EU4-T4701D20
53659 AD Loose Tube,48-Count FAD48 AFL Telecom LE0489C5101N1
Corning 048EU4-T4701D20
Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable Properties
DO 90000
• O 0 0 0 q :�
•• • • (D 00
OPGW OPGW AD
Cable Property (48-Count) (24-Count) ADSS Loose Tube
Cable Diameter 0.646" 0.552" 0.512" 0.410"
Cable Weight 0.402 Ibs/ft 0.372 Ibs/ft 0.088 Ibs/ft 0.060 Ibs/ft
Rated Breaking Strength 16,879 Ibs 18,606 Ibs 2,9161bs --
Maximum Rated Cable Load 13,053 Ibs 14,049 Ibs 1,696 Ibs --
Maximum Stringing Tension* 3,376 Ibs 3,721 Ibs 583 Ibs --
Maximum Tensile(Pulling)Load
Short Term -- -- 1,6961bs 600lbs
Long Term -- -- 5831bs 200 Ibs
Minimum Bull Wheel Diameter 46" 39" 36" --
Minimum Stringing Sheave Diameter—
First and Last Structures 26" 23" 21" --
Stringing Angle<20' 20" 17" 12" --
20° <Stringing Angle<_45' 26" 23" 21" --
45° <Stringing Ang I e<_60° 33" 28" 2611 --
60° <Stringing Angle<_90' 39" 34" 31" --
Minimum Bending Radius
Cable Static (no load) 101, 9" 6" 4.1"
Cable Dynamic (under tension) 13" 11" 11.1 8.2"
Fiber(no load) 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5"
Buffer Tube(no load) 3.0" 3.0" 3.0" 3.0"
Sag 10TM Chart Number 1-355 1-1166 -- --
Coefficient of Linear Expansion 9.73E-06 1/°F 8.39E-06 1/°F 8.69E-06 1/°F --
Cable Modulus
Initial -- -- 749.5 kpsi --
Final -- -- 808.2 kpsi --
10 Year -- -- 624.5 kpsi --
Short Circuit Rating 175(kA)2•sec 87(kA)2•sec -- --
Short Circuit Ambient Temperature 104°F 104°F -- --
Short Circuit Duration 1 sec 13.2 kA 9.3 kA -- --
Short Circuit Max Cable Temperature 410°F 410°F -- --
Temperature Range
Storage -58°F to 185°F -58°F to 185°F -58°F to 158°F -58°F to 167°F
Installation -40°F to 185°F -40°F to 185°F -22°F to 158°F -22°F to 158°F
Operation -40°F to 185°F -40°F to 185°F -40°F to 158°F -40°F to 158°F
Measure stringing tension atthetensioner side.Neverexceed 20% ofthe cable's rated breaking strength.
** Angle is measured both horizontallyandvertically.Donotstringfiberopticcableatanglesexceeding90°.
Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable "` R„

Overhead Revised 08/15 04-06-03
Splices and Closures
Pr
Splice locations of the fiber optic cable must be 4 Valveurizing 4
planned and the reels specified to locate splices
at predetermined points along the route. Cable f
can be ordered in lengths of up to approximately Attach to coil Bullet Guard
20,000'per standard reel. Order reels of cable 40 5/8"boltsith 38„
between 10,000'-15,000'in length. Use reels Mount bracket
with longer or shorter lengths only when to pole using
u 1/2"x 16"
necessary to facilitate the cable run. mach n
ine bolts
0 0
Keep splices to a minimum to reduce light
transmission loss. Splicing must be performed in 12.5" 9" 14.7"
a clean and air-conditioned environment such as
a work trailer or van specifically equipped for Pole-Mounted Splice Closure
fiber optic splicing. For that reason, locate all Train the fiber optic cable down the tower/pole
splices along roads or easements that allow for to the ground for splicing. Include the
easy access with a vehicle. appropriate quantity and type of cable
Use the fusion method for all fiber optic cable connecting kit for the cable being spliced. Install
splices with a fusion splice machine that is a bullet guard on every closure.
equipped with a method for estimating the Pole Mounted Splice CU Codes
achieved splice loss.A"Local Injection
Detection"or"Core Alignment Loss Description CU Codes
Estimation"system is acceptable. This machine Pole-Mounted Splice Closure* FS
Connector Kitfor 0.552" OPGW 24 FSCOPCOPGW24
must be serviced and certified by the factory or Connector Kitfor0.646" OPGW 48 FSCOPGW48
its authorized representative within the previous Co n n ecto r Kit fo r 0.410" AD FSCAD
six months before making splices. Co n n ecto r Kit fo r 0.512" ADSS FSCADSS
NOTE. Include1 connector kit per cable entering and
CAUTION. Observe minimum bending exiting the closure.
radius of all fiber optic cables into and Code includes all necessary mounting hardware
and bullet guard fora wood pole and equipment
inside splice closures. for up to 72 splices.
Pole-Mounted Splice Closure. This closure Provide a minimum of 75'of fiber slack on each
can be mounted to wood or metal poles or lattice side of the splice. This will allow the closure to
structures and will accommodate OPGW,ADS be removed and lowered to the ground if
and AD Loose Tube type fiber optic cables. necessary for maintenance. Bundle fiber cable
slack and coil together in a neat and
Mount the bottom of the closure a minimum of workmanlike manner. Properly secure at each
15' above grade while also providing 40" splice point.
minimum clearance below the neutral
(grounded)conductor or 60"minimum clearance
below primary(energized)conductors,
whichever is greater. Inside substations,mount
the bottom of the closure at 40" above grade.
POWER. Fiber Optic Cable
M­­.m 'Y

04-06-04 Revised 08/15 Overhead
Underground Splice Closure. Underground Splice CU Codes
All underground splices shall be Description CU Codes
installed in an underground UG Splice Closure up to 24 splices FSUG24
handhole. Utilize a sealed splice UG Splice Closure up to 48 splices FSUG48
closure. This closure will NOTE. Select code based on the maximum number of
accommodateADSS and AD splices required in the closure.Call for
Loose Tube type cables. For hand hole separately.
transition to OPGW running
overhead,utilize an overhead Provide a minimum of 75'of slack fiber cable
splice closure. beyond the underground handhole to facilitate
splicing. Bundle and coil the slack together and
place neatly in the handhole.
Splice Closures CU Parts List
Splice Closure Hardware
CU Code
Cat. ID Description Manufacturer Part Number
CU Code FSPM72
41753 "Opti-Guard"Pole-Mounted Closure" AFL Telecom OG03
41759 Bullet Guard for"Opti-Guard"Closure AFL Telecom OGBG01
40886 External Coil Bracket AFL Telecom CB-44
47389 Splice Tray, "Opti-Guard"for 72 fibers AFL Telecom OGST01-72
41757 Splice Protection Sleeve(5 ea) AFL Telecom SPS60
CU Code FSCOPGW24
46111 Connector Kit,"Opti-Guard"OPGW,0.552 AFL Telecom OCK12/62552
CU Code FSCOPG W48
41845 Connector Kit,"Opti-Guard"OPGW,0.646 AFL Telecom OCK40/46646
CU Code FSCADSS
47600 ConnectorKit,"Opti-Guard"ADSS,0.512 AFL Telecom ACK512080
CU Code FSCAD
49759 Connector Kit,"Opti-Guard"AD 0.410 AFL Telecom LCK410
CU Code FSUG24
51217 LG-150 Inline/Underground Closure— AFL Telecom LG-150-U-0
49401 Splice Tray,"Lightlink"for 24 fibers AFL Telecom LL-2000
41757 (5 ea) Splice Protection Sleeve AFL Telecom SPS60
CU Code FSUG48
51217 LG-150 Inline/Underground Closure— AFL Telecom LG-150-U-0
49401 (tea) Splice Tray,"Li g h tl i n k"fo r 24 fi bers AFL Telecom LL-2000
41757 (5 ea) Splice Protection Sleeve AFL Telecom SPS60
Maximum of(5)splicetrays perclosure.
Maximum of(3)splicetrays perclosure.
Fiber Optic Cable W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 08/15 04-06-05
Conduit and Risers Armored Conduit. Use pre-lubricated,
armored conduit colored orange(Cat. ID
The Idaho Power Communications Group will 53687). If fiber optic cable is to be pre-installed,
provide guidance as to the quantity and type of coordinate requirements with the Idaho Power
conduit required. For single fiber optic cable Communications Group.
runs,typically only one conduit is required. For
multiple runs, or where spare duct is requested, Risers. All underground risers shall be rigid
use a single PVC conduit with multiple steel conduit installed on the first 10'. The
innerducts. minimum bending radius for all conduits is 24"
with 36"radius bends preferred. Refer to the
PVC conduit with innerduct is preferred and will Overhead Manual section 04-04,
typically be installed in open trenches or where Communications Risers, for more information.
spare innerducts are desired for future expansion
of the fiber network. Handholes
Armored conduit may be used for single runs of Handholes are 24"x36"x30" deep polymer
fiber cable being plowed in over a long distance, concrete with slip-resistant covers and solid
or where PVC might be susceptible to damage floors. Covers are Rated Tier 15 for occasional
from rodents or adverse soil conditions. non-deliberate vehicular traffic.Do not locate
handholes where they are subject to deliberate
REMINDER. Install a#14 AWG tracer vehicular traffic.
wire with all underground fiber optic
cables. All handholes shall be installed level with
tamped backfill. Conduits should enter the
PVC Conduit with Innerduct. Use schedule handholes through the side. Refer to Section 66-
40 PVC conduit in non-traffic areas. Refer to the 07-01 of the Underground Manual for specific
Underground Manual, Section 62 for PVC installation requirements.
conduit requirements. In traffic areas use
schedule 80 PVC or schedule 40 PVC encased Cat. ID Description Rated
in concrete 6"thick on top and 2"thick on the 49564 Hand hole 24"x36"xW' Tier 15
sides and bottom of the conduit. Install conduit 49565 Cvr W/2 bolts F/hndhl Tier 15
or concrete encasement to a minimum depth of
30"below finished grade. Provide handholes(CU Code FSBX233) at all
fiber optic cable splice points and at other
Use 1-1/4" smooth-walled, SDR-11,High locations along the project route to facilitate
Density Polyethylene(HDPE)innerduct.Single cable installation. Place a handhole
runs colored orange are on 8000'reels (Cat. ID approximately every half mile(3000')of cable
53685). Three runs colored orange, green and length. Do not exceed 360' of bends between
blue are on a single 2500'reel(Cat ID 53686). handholes.
CU Codes for Schedule 40 Ducts and Risers Provide a minimum of 200'slack cable in each
2" PVC 4" PVC handhole. Coil or arrange the slack cable in a
Description w/1 Innerduct w/3 Innerduct "figure-8"pattern in the hole to help prevent it
Straight Sections* FDB2 FDB4 from binding or kinking.
45' Bend* FDB452 FDB454
90' Bend* FDB902 FDB904 For plowed-in armored conduit or special
Pole Riser** FPR2 FPR4 conditions, longer distances may be allowed
* Includes conduit,innerductand tracerwire.Call between handholes. Consult with the Idaho
for excavation and backfill(CU Code FTR30)or Power Communications and/or Methods and
boring costs separately. Materials group for more information.
** Co d e i n c I ud es al I n ecessary mo un ti ng h ardware
for conduitand innerductto wood poles.
" AHO
`ppRR Fiber Optic Cable
", 'W-Pa Y

04-06-06 Revised 08/15 Overhead
Fiber Optic Cable Installation In some situations,beginning the cable
installation from the center of a run is the best
Handle and install the cable properly. Maintain method. With the cable reel positioned at a
the minimum bend radius and do not kink the handhole near the midpoint of the section to be
cable.Never crush or twist fiber optic cables. installed,the cable is installed in one direction.
Any such damage will alter the transmission The remaining cable is then removed from the
characteristics of the fiber and may require reel and laid out in a"figure-8"pattern to
replacement of that cable section. prevent tangling. The free end of the cable is
then fed into the duct in the opposite direction
Overhead Installations. Refer to Sections and installed toward the next handhole.
04-06-21 and 04-06-31 of the Overhead Manual
for information on overhead ADS S and OPGW Identification Devices
fiber optic cable installation.
Overhead. Install an adjustable cable marker
Underground Installations. Refer to Section (Cat. ID 50333)onADSS cable at every pole or
64 of the Underground Manual for trenching structure. OPGW cable is not required to be
and backfill requirements. identified.
Fiber optical cable can be pulled by hand for Underground. Install two coiled cable
shorts runs of a few hundred feet or less with not markers(Cat. ID 53238)in every handhole
more than 180'of bends. (2 markers are included in CU Code for
handhole). Covers may be labeled"Fiber Optic"
For a long-distance pull,the Aramid Yarn and but DO NOT indicate that they are owned by
strength member of the cable can be attached to Idaho Power.
a pulling eye. Use a pull rope that is sturdy
enough to avoid stretching. Do not use steel due Install Warning Tape(CU Code FBTAPE)
to its tendency to cut into the innerduct.Use a 6" above top of conduit or concrete encasement.
break-away swivel rated for less than 600 Warning tape is not required if conduit is
pounds pulling force to avoid exceeding the installed by directional boring.
maximum pulling tension of the fiber optic
cable. Install Post Markers(Cat. ID 53239)along cable
route every 1 Oth of a mile(or approximately
High air speed blowing(HASB)is a method of every 500');and where preformed conduit bends
installing fiber optic cable, in which high air exceeding 22' alters a cable route that does not
volume(300-600 cfm)is blown through an open follow a roadway, or established transmission/-
conduit and pushes on the cable to advance it distribution route.
forward at whatever speed the pusher will
support. In this method,there is no pulling force Identification Device Cat.ID
on the front end of the cable; only a mechanical Cat.ID Description
pushing force at the back and an air drag force 50333 Adjustable Cable Marker for Overhead
distributed along its length. For this reason, duct 53237 Underground Warning Tape(1000')
bends (including waves from reel memory)do 53238 Coiled Cable Marker for Underground
not limit the HASB process as much as they do 53239 Buried Line Post for Fiber Route
traditional cable pulling. 53240 Label for Buried Line Post(Replacement)
Fiber Optic Cable '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/15 04-06-07
Testing Fiber Optic Cable Single-Mode Fiber Optic Performance
Parameter Maximum Attenuation
Pre-Installation Testing. Test each individual 1310 nm Wavelength 0.40 dB/km
fiber in the cable with an optical time domain 1550 nm Wavelength 0.30 dB/km
reflectometer(OTDR) for length and Splice Loss 0.3 dB or less
transmission anomalies while on the reel. Return Loss 26 d b or g reater
Connector Loss 0.75 dB or less
Post-Installation Testing. Test all single- Results are to be recorded and supplied to the
mode fiber strands end-to-end for bi-directional Idaho Power SPC Regional Leader in the form
attenuation(1310 nm/1550 nm)to verify
performance. Comply with TIA/EIA-526-7 or of hard-copy printouts,photographs of screen
OFSTP 7 Method B, according to the traces, or electronic copies.
manufacturer's instructions for the test set being
utilized. NOTE. Fiber optic cable that does not
meet these parameters must be repaired or
Tests must ensure that the measured link loss for replaced so that the required performance
each strand does not exceed the"worst case" is met.
allowable loss defined as the sum of the
connector loss, splice loss, and the optical loss
as specified in the table in the next column.
After splicing,termination, and bulkhead
mounting each fiber shall be tested with an
OTDR for length,transmission anomalies, and
end-to-end attenuation.
POWER. Fiber Optic Cable
M­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 02/13 04-06-21
All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Fiber Optic Cable
(ADSS)
General Information Sag and Tension Methods
ADSS cable is mounted in the communications The methods used for placing ADSS fiber optic
space on distribution poles and meets the cable are similar to those used for placing power
requirements of the NESC for joint use. Refer to utility phase conductors. Do not over-tension the
sections 04-01 thru 04-05 for additional cable. The table on page 04-06-02 provides
information regarding joint-use requirements. information that can be used to model ADSS
cable in Sagl0 software.
Precautions
Sag ADSS cable following the sag of the neutral
Observe all Idaho Power safety precautions conductor.A minimum of 40" separation
when placing ADSS on energized structures, or between the ADSS cable and neutral conductor
structures involving power crossings.Although is required at maximum sag.
ADSS is an all-dielectric cable, some
conductivity can result from moisture on the If the cable is over-tensioned beyond the
cable and in the surrounding air. In high voltage maximum rated cable load, fiber damage may
environments,the cable and metallic attachment occur that will alter the transmission
hardware require grounding. characteristics of the fiber and/or require
replacement of the cable.
Leakage current can be induced onto ADSS and
attachment hardware even when the cable is a Do not sag/tension the cable with angles larger
relatively long distance from the phase than 15°. This will cause a crushing force to be
conductors. placed on the cable.Always sag/tension the
cable from deadend segment to deadend
Dry Weather Conditions. When the cable is segment.
suspended by insulators or on wooden poles, a
voltage potential may be induced in the metal Maximum Span Length. ADSS cable can be
suspension grips and support hardware. To avoid installed on a maximum span of 850'under
dangerous electrical shock, ground the metal NESC medium loading and 600'under NESC
grips before touching them. heavy loading.
Wet Weather Conditions. When the cable is Temporary Grips. Temporary grips can be
wet,the resistance to ground is low near the used when stringing the ADSS, during sagging,
tower or grounded structure, so there is little or where it is necessary to make short-term catch
voltage potential on the metal grips or cable at on the ADSS.
these points. However, at distances of 10'to 15'
or further from the metal grips, a voltage
potential may exist. To avoid dangerous
electrical hazards, ground the cable within
3'to 5' on both sides of the area to be touched.
Additional safety tips to be familiar with can be ADSS Temporary Grip
seen on page 04-06-01.
AW
�POR. All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Fiber Optic Cable
M­­.m 'Y

04-06-22 Revised 02/13 Overhead
Attachment Hardware
The hardware described in this section and This type of non-formed-wire deadend
associated CU Codes are intended for mounting dramatically increases the speed of installation
ADSS cables on wood poles. Contact Methods by using fitted wedges to grip the cable instead
&Materials for other pole types. of formed wire.
Tangent Support. Use a trunion clamp in At the last structure, establish a deadend
applications where the line angle is from 0°to assembly that maintains the minimum bend
22' (11° each side). radius requirements where the cable is run down
the structure. If the ADSS cable is run down the
structure, install a pole riser to protect the cable
as it makes the transition of aerial cable to
conduit. Refer to the Underground Manual
11°(MAX) section 63.
pC0
Trunion Clamp BB
The trunion clamp may also be used for
stringing the ADSS cable prior to installing the
bushing insert up to a maximum of 15' (7.5°
each side)and 30 poles. Use sheaves for larger
line angles.
as
Torque the bolt holding the ADSS cable to
15 lb-ft after the line has been properly sagged Deadend and Pole Riser
and tensioned.
Use deadends on poles where the line angle is
Deadends. Deadend ADSS cable at all road, greater than 22°. Cutting the cable at a double
river, or railroad crossings; and at points of cable deadend is not necessary,but allow for 2'of
termination for splices. Deadends are also cable on the inside turn of the pole to minimize
required for spare cable storage systems contact between the pole and ADSS cable.
(snowshoes)and risers.
ADSS Wedge Deadend
All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Fiber Optic Cable '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 02/13 04-06-23
Anchors and Down Guys
Design and build ADSS systems to the same
grade of construction as the distribution line.
Provide down guys where cable tensions or pole
angles require it. Refer to section 06 of the
Overhead Manual for requirements.
When the span length for a deadend exceeds ;space pole
100' in length, it must be guyed and anchored. If clamps every
there is not an open position on an existing 5 to 8'
anchor,then a new anchor must be installed.
Refer to page 04-02-05 of the Overhead Manual
for additional information.
Mount top of coil—
bracket at 23'-8"
using 1/2"bolts
0
o
M
Spare eye position
okay for use by 0
communications.
a
a
Coil slack cable
around bracket
for splicing.
Existing Anchor Attachment
Place guys and anchors before applying tension
to the ADSS cable. Install guy guards in high ADSS Deadend and Splice Closure
exposure areas.
Pole clamps are used to secure the cable to the
pole. Place one clamp every 5-8'down the
Splice Points length of the pole.
Provide a minimum of 75'of excess cable on
both sides of a splice to allow the splicing ADSS WOOD
process to be accomplished on the ground. Refer CABLE POLE
to page 04-06-04 for splice CU Codes. f
ADSS Wood Pole Clamp
" ORM
`ppR. All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Fiber Optic Cable
M­­.a

04-06-24 Revised 02/13 Overhead
Spare Cable Vibration Dampers
Spare ADS S cables are placed on cable storage Aeolian vibration is caused by low velocity wind
loops, sometimes called"snowshoes". Install a blowing across a cylindrical conductor under
pair of snowshoes approximately every one-half tension.Although the vibration will not typically
mile(2500-3000'). Since snowshoes require the affect the optical or mechanical performance of
use of deadends, consider locations where the ADS S fiber optic cable, it can damage the
deadens are already required.Also consider support hardware.
placing spare cable loops where pole damage is
more likely such as intersections. Use spiral vibration dampers when the cable
spans exceed 350'and/or the cable tension
The amount of spare cable required is the length exceeds 15%of the cable breaking strength, and
of the longest span plus 100'. This will allow for there is a prevailing laminar wind 2-20 mph.
a cable splice in that section in the event that the
ADSS cable is damaged or broken mid-span. Gripping
Damping Section Section
Example. In a section of cable with a
maximum span distance of 350'the required
length of spare cable is 450'. The snowshoes TADSS Cable
would be mounted approximately I I Won either Smaller Helix
side of a pole. ADSS Spiral Vibration Damper
Install cable wraps (Cat ID 53699)every 34
along the spare cable to bind it to the tensioned Vibration dampers can be installed anywhere in
cable. CU Code FADSSSNO includes 7 wraps the span,but must be at least one hand-width
to be installed on the snowshoe. away from each other or support hardware.
Call for CU Code FCWADSS(contains 5 Number of Vibration Dampers per Span
wraps)for every 20'of bundled cable. For the Span Percent of Rated Breaking Strength*
above example,there is approximately 220'of Length (ft) 0-10 11-15 16-20 21-25 25+
bundled cable,which requires(II)FCWADSS. < 350 0 1 1 2 2
351-600 1 1 2 2 4
601-1000 1 2 2 4 4
CAUTION. Do not over-tighten cable * Take the initial sag tension and divide by the
wraps. They should be snug and hold the cable's rated breaking strength to determinethis
cable securely,but not crush the cable. percentage
Top View
(Not to Scale)
Tensioned wire Tensioned wire
goes thru deadend comes out deadend
Tensioned /� Tensioned
Cable Routing Block
separates and holds
all 3 loops of wire. It
does not matter which
loop goes thru which
hole.
Spare Cable Storage System
All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Fiber Optic Cable '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 02/13 04-06-255
Cable Installation First and Last Structures. The minimum
diameter of the sheave must not be less than 21".
The location of the tensioner and puller relative Larger diameter sheaves are acceptable, and
to the structure must be selected so that the offer some advantages by reducing the radial
structure is not overloaded. Where possible, a (crushing)load applied to the cable.
pulling slope of four or five horizontal to one
vertical is considered good practice. This ratio Tangent and Angle Structures. The diameter
will minimize the load on the cable,traveler, and of the sheaves must not be less than 12" at mid-
structure. span suspension points. Where the cable line
makes either a vertical or horizontal angle of 20'
or greater,the sheave diameter must be 21" or
larger.
:;;7­� NOTE.4:1 horizontal to vertical The minimum radius of the sheave groove must
distance and fin:t two structures
in line at both ends of the pull - be 0.8" and the minimum depth of the groove
must be 0.64". The sides of the groove should
flare between 15'to 20' from the vertical,to
Equipment Locations facilitate passage of grips, swivels, etc. and to
The minimum diameter of the bullwheel contain the cable within the groove.
(measuring at the bottom of the groove)must be Do not allow the cable to twist as it is pulled
at least 70 times the diameter of the cable.Use through the sheaves. Due to the light weight of
bullwheels having semicircular, elastomer lined ADS in relation to most sheaves and the
grooves with depths of 50%or more than the relative low stringing tensions used during
cable diameter, and with a flare angle of 5°to installations,the traveler will require support at
150 from the vertical center line reference. the base to help prevent the cable from riding
Operate the pulling and braking smoothly to out of the groove of the traveler or excessive
prevent any sudden jerking or bouncing of the twisting during installation.
cable during deployment. Control each system to Pole
maintain a constant and even tension and pulling Structure
velocity. Use pullers and tensioners that are
equipped with tension indicating and limiting Support
devices. Positive braking systems are required for p
pullers and tensioners to maintain cable tension <DSS Cable
when pulling is stopped. Fail safe type braking
systems are recommended.
Properly Adjusted Pulley
Pulling rates of 180 to 440 feet per minute
usually provide safe, smooth, efficient passage Pole
Structure
of cable. Once the cable movement has started,
maintain the pulling rate at a constant speed
until the cable segment has been pulled into ADSS Cable
place.
Do not exceed more than one-half the maximum
initial sagging tension when pulling ADS Improperly Adjusted Pulley
cable. If greater tensions are required, (Note twist present as cable leaves pulley)
consideration must be given to the fact that
when long lengths of cable are pulled,the Sheave Adjustment
tension at the pulling end may exceed the
tension at the tensioner by significant amounts.
�POR. All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Fiber Optic Cable

04-06-26 Revised 02113 Overhead
Monitor cable twisting by using either a cloth A running ground provides constant contact with
"tail"wrapped around the cable,by spray the moving cable without excessive tension.
painting a broad and visible stripe on the cable, Locate the running ground prior to first support
or by watching the cable markings. structure. The spring tension on the running
ground should be adjustable, and the rollers
Grounds. Grounding attachments are required sized for the diameter of cable.
when stringing fiber optic cable under energized
phase conductors.At a minimum, equip the first
and last traveler of a pull with a traveler ground
attached to the structure grounding system.
ADSS Hardware CU Parts List
ADSS Fiber Optic Hardware for Wood Poles
CU Code
Cat. ID Description Manufacturer Part Number
CU Code FADSSDETEB
48666 Wedge Dead end,0.512" ADSS AFL Telecom ADEW16-J2AL0512
44108 Thimble Eye Bolt,5/8"x14"
5170 Curved Washer,3"x3"x1/4"
50333 Adjustable Cable Marker for Overhead
CU Code FADSSDETEN *
48666 Wedge Dead end,0.512"ADSS AFL Telecom ADEW16-J2AL0512
5346 Thimble Eye Nut,5/8"
5170 Curved Washer,Yx3"x1/4"
CU Code FADSSTFB
44187 Trunion Clamp,0512"ADSS AFL Telecom ATGN475/525
4109 Machine Bolt,5/8"x14"
5170 Curved Washer,Yx3"x1/4"
53251 Square Washer,2"x2"x1/4"
14652 Lock Washer5/8"
50333 Adjustable Cable Marker for Overhead
CU Code FCWADSS
53699 (5)Stainless Steel Cable Wraps Panduit MLT4SH-LP
CU Code FADSSWPC
44192 Wood Pole Clamp,0.512" ADSS AFL Telecom AGW469/561
CU Code FADSSVD
43017 Spiral Vibration Damper,0.512" ADSS AFL Telecom AVD 462/563
CU Code FADSSWPC
44192 Wood Pole Clamp,0.512" ADSS AFL Telecom AGW469/561
CU Code FDGK/T
32924 Guy Wire EHS Kit
4726 Guy Strain Insulator
5325 Guy Guard
* Add to FADSSDETEB for double deadend on tangentpoles.For double deadendon angle poles,call
for FADSSDETEB.
** Requires doubledead end FADSSDETEB and FADSSDETEN along with additional cablewraps
FCWADSS for every20' of bundled sparecable.
All-Dielectric Self-Supporting Fiber Optic Cable MOWER,

Overhead Revised 02/13 04-06-31
Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic Cable
(OPGW)
General Information The maximum tension limit on the temporary
grip is 5,000 pounds or 50%of the rated strength
OPGW is constructed of aluminum clad steel of the OPGW cable. Two or more grips may be
strands and/or aluminum alloy strands used if tension exceeds 5, 000 pounds and the
surrounding a fiber unit(core)which contains grips can be attached anywhere along the length
optical fibers. More information regarding of an OPGW.
OPGW cables and system design can be found
on the T&D Design SharePoint site. CAUTION. Other types of grips are
strictly prohibited for use on OPGW as
they might damage the fiber optic core of
the cable. Temporary grips are not
Precautions intended for use as dead ends and shall
not hold conductors at sag tension limits
Take care to avoid damaging the OPGW during for longer than 6 hours.
handling and stringing operations. The
transmission quality of the optical fibers can Include 3 or 4 temporary grips with each project.
potentially be degraded if the cable is subjected
to excessive pulling tensions and/or small bend
diameters. Attachment Hardware
Deadends are installed on OPGW spans that
terminate at splicing towers or ends of the
Sag and Tension Methods system. Use deadends at angle structures when
the angles are too great for the use of suspension
The methods and procedures for sagging OPGW clamps.
cables are basically the same as those for normal
overhead shield wires. For determining sags,
refer to the OPGW cables in the table on page
04-06-02.
Install a temporary grip on the OPGW to tension
the cable. The grip must be designed to hold the
OPGW without damage, and in particular not
pinch the cable or crush the aluminum pipe.
Only use grips specified for the diameter of the OPGW Bolted Type Deadend
OPGW cable being installed.
OPGW Temporary Grip
WMPOMR. Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic Cable (OPGW)
M--.m 'Y

04-06-32 Revised 02/13 Overhead
Suspension clamps are normally used at towers Cable Support Hardware
where deadends are not necessary. A single
suspension clamp can have a maximum of 15' OPGW Cable Support Clamps. For
sag below the horizontal. applications on lattice steel towers,use the
Downlead Clamp to attach the cable to the
NOTE. Armor rod is required at all lattice steel angle.
suspension clamps.
Pole Clamps are used to secure the cable to
BREAK-AWAY wood poles. Place one clamp every 6-8' down
ARMOR BOLT HEAD the length of the pole.
ROD
15°
O DOWNLEAD
CLAMP
Single Suspension Clamp
O -YOKE PLATE OPGW CABLE
SUSPENSION
CLAMP o CLEVIS EYE
30°
o MAX
GROUNDING
ATTACHMENT Downlead Clamp
Double Suspension Clamp
OPGW WOOD
CABLE � POLE
The general rules for suspension clamp uses are:
• Use a Single Suspension at structures Pole Clamp
with line angles less than 30'
• Use a Double Suspension with line
angles between 300 and 60'
• Use a Deadend at structures with line
angles over 60'
In the instance when double suspensions are not
desired, a deadend can be used starting from line
angles of 300.
Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic Cable (OPGW) '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 02/13 04-06-33
Vibration Dampers Selective Damping places dampers only on
sections of line where the span is subject to
Vibration dampers are used on OPGW cable to damaging vibrations.
reduce the effects of certain damaging wind-
caused vibrations(called Aeolian vibrations). The effectiveness of a damper can be reduced
This section provides some general guidance for through vibration in adjacent,undamped spans
applying dampers,but their proper selection and even if the vibration in the undamped span is not
application requires careful engineering. at a damaging level. Therefore,when applying
selective damping, spans adjacent to those spans
are recommended to also be damped at the same
spacing.
Mid-Span Damping. When dealing with long
spans and/or higher tensions, dampening around
the structures may be insufficient for protection
of the span. Mid-Span damping supplements
dampers installed near the suspension points
with additional dampers within the span.
The number of additional dampers required for
mid-span damping is based on the length of the
OPGW Vibration Damper span versus the maximum span length protected
with dampers on both ends. Place mid-span
dampers at equal distances apart along the span.
Where required,vibration dampers may be
installed directly to the OPGW cable—armor rods
are not necessary. Dampers are typically
installed in pairs with the second damper
installed at an equal distance from the first
damper as the first damper is installed from the
deadend or suspension point.
Dampers may be installed at one or both sides of
a deadend or suspension. If dampers are
installed on only one end of a span containing a
single dead end, apply them to the suspension
side of that span.
�POMR. Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic Cable (OPGW)
M­­.m 'Y

04-06-34 Revised 02/13 Overhead
Splice Points Re-seal the exposed ends of the OPGW to
prevent moisture from entering the fiber units.
Provide a minimum of 75'of excess cable on The cable reel may be supplied with a pair of
both sides of a splice to allow the splicing plastic caps for sealing the cable ends. Electrical
process to be accomplished on the ground.Note tape,RTV silicone, or other means can also be
that an additional 15'may be needed to eliminate used.
any stressed cable. Store the excess cable on the
pole. CAUTION. Do not cut the cable under
any circumstances without prior approval
After the cable has been sagged and clipped into of the engineer responsible for the design
its final position, coil the surplus OPGW in of the project.
preparation for splicing. Make the coils
approximately 3-1/2'to 5'in diameter and attach Changes to the total number of splice points can
them to the structure to prevent any damage to potentially degrade quality of transmission of
the OPGW cable. the system. The number and location of splices
are usually determined in the initial system
design.
Clamp both cables
to allow them to be
cut to the same When cutting is necessary, do not cut OPGW
length for splicing. with ratchet cutters, or other types of tools that
could crush the fiber unit. Use a hacksaw so the
fiber optic units are free to move within the pipe
Mount the splice closure while being cut.
coil bracket to mounting
brackets on steel pole or 0
drill through wood pole. OPGW Splice CU Codes
e 9 Description CU Code
® 24 fiber OPGW TOPGWSPL24
48 fiber OPGW TOPGWSPL48
24 fiber OPGW to ADSS TOPGWADSSSPL24
48 fiber OPGW to
(2)24fiber ADSS TOPGWSPL48-2X24
24 fiber OPGW to
AD in substation TOPGWADSPL24
20' 48 fiber O PG W to
AD in substation TOPGWADSPL48
NOTE. CU Codes include splice closure,coil mounting
bracket, bullet guard,pole hardware,splice
trays,splice kit,heat shrink sleeves kitand fiber
connectors.IPCo M&M Dept
\ \
Grounding
Splice Closure Mounting to Steel Pole OPGW cable must be grounded at every pole or
structure. Connect the ground wire to the
suspension clamp where available, or use a
properly sized ground clamp at deadend
structures.
Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic Cable (OPGW) '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 02/13 04-06-35
Cable Installation First and Last Structures. The minimum,
required stringing(sheave)block diameter of 40
Use the controlled tension stringing method of times the diameter of the OPGW if the pulling
installation. Ordinary stringing equipment can line slope is at least three horizontal to one
be utilized as if installing standard overhead vertical from the traveler to the site. This is
shield wire. Suitable equipment includes pullers, based on a sheave through angle of 45' and
tensioners,reel winders, and stringing blocks. maximum stringing tension(at tensioner)of
20%of the rated strength of the OPGW.
Use stranded wire pulling lines or nylon ropes
rated strong enough to withstand the required Tangent and Angle Structures. For tangent
stringing tensions with the same direction lay structures and stringing angles refer to the
(left hand) as the OPGW to help resist the following table for required sheave diameters:
tendency to rotate under stringing load.
Minimum Sheave Diameters
Use a bull-wheel type tensioner with round(not Stringing Angle Sheave Diameter
"V")type,polyurethane lined contact grooves. 0° -20' 30 X OPGW diameter
Use a tensioner with two bullwheels,both 21° -45' 40 X OPGW diameter
having multiple grooves to minimize cable 46' -60' 50 X OPGW diameter
damage. The minimum diameter of the 61' -90' 60 X OPGW diameter
bullwheels must be at least 70 times the
diameter of the OPGW.
An Anti-Rotational Device is necessary to
The tensioner must be capable of maintaining prevent the OPGW from twisting while being
the required tensions at various pulling speeds. pulled.Attach the anti-rotational device to the
Positive braking systems are necessary for OPGW with a Kellum type grip appropriately
pullers and tensioners to maintain the tension sized for the cable diameter and pulling tensions.
when pulling is stopped. It is important to
monitor the tensions and ensure that excessive
tension is not applied as the OPGW passes from
the reel to the tensioner.
The maximum OPGW stringing tension(at the
tensioner)is 20%of the rated breaking strength
of the cable. The maximum recommended
pulling speed is 195'per minute.
OPGW Stringing Method
Stringing
Block(typ) Pulling
Line
d / d Pulling
Tensioner 1 OPGW Anti-Rotational 1 Machine
1 Devices 1
I— 4d 4d —
Distance to Stringing Equipment
from Tower is 4 Times the
Block Height(d).
Typical OPGW Stringing Method
AHO
�POR. Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic Cable (OPGW)
M­­.m 'Y

04-06-36 Revised 02/13 Overhead
OPGW Fiber Optic Cable Hardware and Catalog IDs
Cat. ID Description Manufacturer Part Number
48-Count OPGW
40806 Bolted Deadend AFL Telecom ODE40/46646G7
16746 Temporary Grip(comealong) AFL Telecom OCA640/649
40805 Single Suspension Clamp AFL Telecom SUME615/646
51215 Double Suspension Clamp AFL Telecom ODSME615/646
28510 Link Plate AFL Telecom ODELP15
41657 Downlead Clamp for Lattice to 0.72" AFL Telecom ODC601/700B
49366 Downlead Clamp for Steel Pole AFL Telecom FDOA-B6B6
41656 Downlead Clamp for Wood Pole AFL Telecom OGW562/655
28519 Downlead Clamp with Banding Bracket AFL Telecom FDOA-B6B6A
16738 Vibration Damper AFL Telecom OVD571/675
51213 Ground Clamp for#2/0 AWG AFL Telecom 0BCN2W11
51214 Ground Clamp for#6 AWG AFL Telecom 0BCN2D11
24-Count OPGW
45871 Bolted Deadend AFL Telecom ODE12/62552G8
46444 Temporary Grip(comealong) AFL Telecom OCA550/559
45873 Single Suspension Clamp AFL Telecom SUME528/555
47603 Double Suspension Clamp AFL Telecom ODSME528/555
45872 Link Plate AFL Telecom ODELP10
47513 Downlead Clamp for Lattice to 0.72" AFL Telecom FDOA-B5B5B
45881 Down lead Cl amp fo r Steel Pole AFL Telecom FDOA-B5B5
45875 Downlead Clamp for Wood Pole AFL Telecom OGW469/561
46133 Downlead Clamp with Banding Bracket AFL Telecom FDOA-B5B5A
45874 Vibration Damper AFL Telecom OVD461/570
48050 Ground Clamp for#2/0 AWG AFL Telecom 0BCF2W11
45880 Ground Clamp for#6 AWG AFL Telecom 0BCF2D11
Optical Ground Wire Fiber Optic Cable (OPGW)

Overhead Revised 06/22 055-00-01
Table of Contents
05- Wood Poles
05-01-01 Introduction 05-01-05 Setting Poles on Slopes
Types Grade Changes
Treatment Hole Size
Class and Length Backfill and Tamping
Anti-split Bolts Setting in Pavement
Boring Rock Holes
Storage and Handling 05-01-06 Barriers
Date Nails 05-01-07 Pole Facing
05-01-02 Tags 05-01-08 Pole Cut Off
Dimensions Strength
Weights Wind Loads
Rake 05-01-09 Pole Stubbing
05-01-03 Location 05-01-10 Inspection Tags
Stability,Keys, and Footings 05-01-11 Treatment Wrap
05-01-04 Marsh Areas 05-01-12 Fire Mesh Wrap
Pole Foam
Setting Depth
Pole in Culvert
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
­­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 10/21 055-01-01
Wood Poles
Introduction Cat. ID Pole Class CU Code
35 ft
Poles are the main structural element supporting 4933 Class 5 DP35S
the overhead distribution system. Poles provide 40 ft
for the basic safety of the system by using 4930 Class 4 DP40C4
elevation to keep hot wires and parts isolated 4919 Class 3 DP40C3
from the public. 4908 Class 2 DP40C2
45 ft
4931 Class 4 DP45C4
Types 4920 Class 3 DP45C3
4909 Class 2 DP45C2
Most of the poles used for distribution are wood; 4897 Class 1 DP45C1
Western Red Cedar and Douglas Fir. Steel, 50 ft
4921 Class 3 DP50C3
fiberglass, and concrete poles are also available. 4910 Class 2 DP50C2
4898 Class 1 DP50C1
Light duty steel poles may be used in situations 55 ft
where wood poles are not strong enough, contact 4922 Class 3 DP55C3
T&D Design for details. 4911 Class 2 DP55C2
4899 Class 1 DP55C1
Treatment
Anti-split Bolts
All wood poles are treated with
pentachlorophenol. Douglas Fir poles are treated All poles require an anti-split bolt, included in
full length,while Western Red Cedar poles are the CU Code above.
butt treated.
Boring
Class and Length
A hole is bored 1' from the top of the pole.Also,
Class relates to the strength of the pole,without it's gained 28" down the face.
regard for the species of wood. Poles in the same
class have the same strength to resist wind and Storage and Handling
line angle loads at the pole tip. However, species
may differ in buckling and bending strengths. Store wood poles so they are not in direct
contact with the ground, and do not cut or scuff
The following table lists pole class and lengths the treated area.
normally purchased for distribution use.
Date Nails
A date nail is installed on every new pole and
shows who and when the pole was inspected.
The nail is flush with the pole, either at the pole
brand or 5'to 8' above the ground line, see
Overhead Manual 24-02.
&:QIPOMR". Internal Use Only Wood Poles
OMan

05-01-02 Revised 10/21 Overhead
Tags Weights
Wood poles are marked with a circular Pole
aluminum tag that's located on the face of the Length ,approximate weight(Pounds)
(ft) Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5
pole 6' above the ground line. The tag shows
Western Red Cedar
species,length, class, and treatment, along with
30' 880 750 645 540 440
other information.A tag is also located on the 35' 1055 880 750 660 570
butt of the pole. 40' 1320 1145 970 790 705
45' 1585 1365 1145 1010 880
Species&Treatment 50' 1760 1585 1365 1230 1145
Producer (Western Cedar,penta) 55' 2025 1760 1540 1410 1350
Tr a&Yr.tment
SAX 60' 2290 1935 1760 1670 -
0 93 Douglas Fir
WC PA 30' 1110 930 810 690 600
1 00 35' 1435 1260 1070 875 770
ag 3 45 ��✓Plant 40' 1760 1560 1340 1120 920
45' 2070 1845 1600 1350 1125
W°I, Pole class&length 50' 2500 2150 1875 1600 1300
Pounds retention (class 3,45)of preservative 55' 2860 2475 2145 1815 1540
60' 3360 2820 2430 2040 1740
Dimensions Note:All weights are provided by the manufacturer
for poles with the Penta/CuNap treatment.
The following table lists the minimum diameters
of poles at various distances below the top, Rake
based upon the taper of a 45'pole.
Poles are usually set vertically. However,rake
Distance the pole in situations where there are angles,
From Dia.for Class Indicated(in)
Top(ft) H2 H1 1 2 3 4 terminals,points of unbalanced strain, or
Western,Red cedar prevailing winds. Raked poles will stand close to
0' 9.9 9.3 8.6 8.0 7.4 6.7 vertical when the load is applied, see Overhead
5' 10.8 10.2 9.5 8.8 8.1 7.4 06-07.
10, 11.8 11.0 10.3 9.6 8.9 8.2
15' 12.7 11.9 11.2 10.4 9.6 8.9 NOTE. Raking a pole does not improve
20' 13.6 12.8 12.0 11.2 10.4 9.6
25' 14.5 13.7 12.8 12.0 11.1 10.3 the strength.
30' 15.4 14.5 13.7 12.8 11.9 11.0
35' 16.3 15.4 14.5 13.6 12.7 11.7 The following table lists the maximum rake
40' 17.3 16.3 15.3 14.4 13.4 12.4 recommended for distribution poles.
Douglas Fir
Length Offset at Pole Top(in)
0' 9.9 9.3 8.6 8.0 7.4 6.7 (ft) Category 1* Category 2**
5' 1 0.6 1 0.0 9.3 8.6 8.0 7.2
10, 11.3 10.6 10.0 9.3 8.6 7.7 35' 7" 18"
15' 12.1 11.3 10.6 9.9 9.1 8.1 40' 8" 20"
20' 12.8 12.0 11.3 10.5 9.7 8.6 45' 9" 23"
25' 13.5 12.6 11.9 11.2 10.3 9.1 50, 10" 25"
30' 14.2 13.3 12.6 11.8 10.9 9.6 55' ill, 28"
35' 14.9 14.0 13.2 12.4 11.5 10.0 60' 12" 30"
40' 15.6 14.7 13.9 13.1 12.1 10.5 65' 13" 33"
*Category 1: Maximum offset at pole top for guyed
deadend and guyed angle poles.
**Category 2: Maximum offset at pole top for
unguyed poles at angles, slack span
deadends, large service drops, or for
prevailing winds.
Wood Poles '` R,

Overhead Revised 07/21 055-01-03
Location Stability, Keys, and Footings
Primary distribution poles are in the street or Stability. Some situations call for more stability
alley right-of-way, approximately 12" from the than what is normally required. Some of these
right-of-way line. situations include:
NOTE.Clearance to buildings or other ♦ Unbalanced conductor tensions, such as at
objects dictate pole location, see deadends or long spans on one side
Overhead Manual 03. ♦ Line angles
♦ Slack spans off the main line
♦ Large or long service drops
♦ Large vertical loads
Locate here if ♦ Heavy down guy loads
owner will grant
easement. ♦ Unbalanced equipment loads off the side of
o the pole
♦ Alley arms
♦ Prevailing winds
ROW Line
NOTE.Guying can alleviate some of these
problem situations and provide stability.
Locate pole 1'off However, guying does not help for
�� property line and vertical loads.
ROW line.
Pole keys stabilize the pole for unbalanced
Place the pole in an alternative location when lateral loads, see Overhead Manual 06.
the right-of-way width is restricted, such as in Pole keys may be used in areas of prevailing
alleys or along streets and roads winds and where the soil is soft or where it has
been disturbed.
NOTE.Private property easement must be
granted before setting poles and anchors For large vertical loads, such as transformer
on the property. banks or down guys with shortened leads, a
special pole foundation may be needed, see
Install poles to avoid conflict with traffic Overhead Manual 06-12.
signals,pedestrian walkways, and streetlights at Soft or wet soil may need bog shoes to support
intersections,
the pole weight, see Overhead Manual 06-12.
IDAW
�POMR". Internal Use Only Wood Poles
OMa.

05-01-04 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Marsh Areas Setting Depth
In soft or marshy areas,use a fully treated pole Setting depth is the major factor in stability for
and backfill with crushed rock or gravel. most poles.A larger butt diameter does not
counter lateral loads. Increase pole depth for
greater lateral stability; see chart below for
—- — depths based on pole length.
++t 0 c o oo�
_ Length Normal Soft/Marshy
• +po° °C� ++_' (ft) Soil Soil
25' 5.0' 6.0'
+ 000c— + + _+ 30' 5.5' 6.5'
35' 6.0' 7.0'
40' 6.0' 7.0'
45' 6.5' 7.5'
50' 7.0' 8.0'
55' 7.5' 8.5'
_- — -- 60' 8.0' 9.0'
65' 8.5' 9.5'
+ = _ 70' 9.0' 10.0'
75' 9.5' 10.5'
When location restrictions prevent a pole from 80' 10.0' 11.0'
being installed in a culvert,use Pole Foam.
Pole in a Culvert
Pole Foam
Poles can be installed in a culvert in weak soil
Use pole foam to set and straighten poles in areas or near riverbanks. In this case, order the
situations when setting a pole in a hole filled culvert and 3/4" crushed rock, see below.
with water(use large kit with bag) and resetting
a pole after straightening(use small kit). It is not Steel Culvert Description Crushed Rock
intended to be used to set every pole. It's also Cat. ID Cat. ID
referenced in the Materials Manual 15-155. 49475 30"x6' 29412
49987 30"x7'
Cat. ID Description 39577 30"x8'
58797 Pole Foam Small Kit
58798 Pole Foam Large Kit
58927 Box of 30 Bags (for water)
Pole foam takes about 30 seconds to mix and
15 minutes to set. The kits come with a drill
attachment to help mix the liquids. Use the box
with the bag included for mixing.
An installation video is available upon request
from the Skills Training Center.
Wood Poles `ppMR

Overhead Revised 07/21 05-01-05
Setting Poles on Slopes Dig the hole large enough to accommodate a
pole key, or a special foundation, such as a bog
Dig a deeper hole when installing a pole on a shoe, see Overhead Manual 06-12.
slope. If the depth is beyond the preservative If using a backhoe,dig the hole perpendicular to
treatment line,then apply a pole wrap. However, the line.
Douglas Fir poles are fully treated and do not
need one. CAUTION. Open holes or trenches must
be guarded. Stay on-site or use
appropriate guards that include
barricades,traffic cones, orange plastic
A � fencing, and warning signs.
Backfill and Tamping
Compact the soil enough to prevent pole lean.
C Pack the soil firmly in a mound around the pole
B to prevent water from draining into the fill.
When using a backhoe, exercise care to properly
tamp the soil.
Use alternate types of backfill materials, such as
gravel or crushed rock when onsite backfill
• A-High minus Low side of pole hole. materials are not suitable for compaction.Never
• B-Setting Depth on level ground. use snow and ice mixed with soil as backfill.
• C=A+B (Depth of pole hole on slope.) Setting in Pavement
When setting poles in concrete or asphalt
Grade Changes surfaces make the hole as small as practical,but
large enough to allow proper tamping.
Dig the hole deep enough for the proper depth
after the grade change. Rock Holes
Use a fully treated Douglas Fir pole or apply a For poles set in rock holes,the setting depth may
pole wrap to a cedar pole when fill is expected be decreased using the following table.Also see
after the pole set. illustration on the next page.
NOTE.If guys are installed,the anchor Surface Soil (Depth to Rock)
rod eye must be 1'above the dirt, Length 0'-1. 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4'
preventing the guy wire connection from 25' 3.0' 3.5' 4.0' 4.5'
corroding. 30' 3.5' 4.0' 4.5' 5.0'
35' 4.0' 4.5' 5.0' 5.5'
Hole Size 40' 4.0' 4.5' 5.0' 5.5'
45' 4.5' 5.0' 5.5' 5.5'
50' 5.0' 5.0' 5.5' 6.0'
The pole hole must be large enough to allow the 55' 5.5' 5.5' 6.0' 6.5'
use of tamping tools without scarring the treated 60' 5.5' 6.0' 6.5' 7.0'
wood. 65' 6.0' 6.0' 6.5' 7.0'
70' 6.0' 6.5' 7.0' 7.5'
75' 6.5' 7.0' 7.5' 8.0'
80' 7.0' 7.0' 7.5' 8.0'
&:QIPOMR". Internal Use Only Wood Poles
OMa.

05-01-06 Revised 06/22 Overhead
� A
y 6 4'
c
1 approx.
OO OC B
gdO�D �oQ / —approx.
Op op ` 7'long
Power Installed Post
O�C� o OTC
Q�pQ Q�DO ( Barriers can be made from other materials such
oDn o0� as a 4" conduit that is filled with concrete or a
- steel pole stub. Contact Methods &Materials for
more information.
A=Surface soil(depth to rock).
es
B=Pole setting depth shopor
field drilling
Barriers
0
Use a pole barrier to protect the base of a pole f
that's exposed to traffic. The preferred barrier is 11 y 6" 4'
a galvanized-steel post(Cat. ID 5772). It's set in approx.
the same manner as a screw anchor.
10'long
Steel Stub Guard Steel 4"Pipe
Wood Poles `ppMR

Overhead Revised 07/21 055-01-07
Pole Facing
Most poles have a natural curve. The concave side of the pole is called the face; the convex side is the
back.The manufacturer's brand is found on the face, see illustration below.
Mount transformers, capacitors, and other distribution Concave side Convex side
equipment on the face of the pole. or"Face"of or"Back" of
the pole. the pole.
Poles should be set according to the face as follows:
♦ Straight Tangent Line—Set the poles alternately face- to-
face and back-to-back. Sweep —
♦ Curve—Face the poles to the center of the curve.
♦ Steep Grade—Face all poles uphill.
♦ Deadend Poles—Face the anchor.
♦ One or Two Poles Before a Deadend—Face the
deadend pole when practical.
♦ Poles at C Corners—Face the anchors.
♦ Junction Pole—For a tap line, face in the direction of the main line.
♦ Railroad,Highway,and Communications Line Crossings—Face poles away from the
crossing.
♦ Poles for Platforms Face away from the rack.
NOTE. Select straight poles for platforms,racks,heavy transformers, etc.
Poles should have a sweep of less than V for each 10'length between groundline and top.
IDAW
�POMRa. Internal Use Only Wood Poles
OMa.

05-01-08 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Pole Cut Off Strength
Occasionally it is necessary to cut off the top of Pole strength data in this manual is based upon
a pole to get a shorter and larger class pole; the following fiber strength values:
cedar pole is best. If a Douglas Fir pole is used, ♦ 6000 lb./in2 for Western Red Cedar
treat the cut top or install a cap. ♦ 8000 lb./in2 for Douglas Fir
The table below lists the poles you may cut off
to get a specific class pole.
NOTE. The table is based on the required
minimum ANSI 05.1 circumferences at
the top of the pole and 6' from the butt.
Pole Length Class Needed
Needed (Ft) CH3 CH2 CH1 C1 C2 C3 C4
30' --- --- --- 35C2 35C3 35C3 35C4
--- --- --- 45C3 45C4 40C4 ---
35' --- 40CH1 40CH1 40C2 40C2 40C3 40C4
--- 45CH1 45C1 45C2 45C3 45C4 ---
40' 45CH2 45CH2 45CH1 45C1 45C2 45C3 45C4
55CH1 50CH1 50C1 50C2 50C3 --- ---
45' 50CH3 50CH2 50CH1 50C1 50C2 50C3 50C3
55CH2 55CH1 55C1 55C2 55C3 --- ---
50' 55CH3 55CH2 55CH1 55C1 55C2 55C3 ---
60CH2 60CH1 60C1 60C2 60C3 --- ---
55' 60CH3 60CH2 60CH1 60C1 60C2 60C3 ---
65CH2 65CH1 65C1 65C2 70C3 --- ---
60' 65CH3 65CH2 65CH1 65C1 65C2 65C3 ---
70CH2 70CH1 70C1 75C2 75C3 --- ---
Wind Loads
The following table lists the wind loads on Western Red Cedar pole lengths and classes assuming
a 4-pound wind.
Pole Pole Class
Length (Ft) CH3 CH2 CH1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C4.5
30' --- --- --- 88 82 76 70 67
35' --- 122 115 107 100 94 86 82
40' 157 148 139 130 122 113 104 100
45' 182 172 162 152 142 132 122 117
50' 208 197 185 174 162 151 --- ---
55' 235 221 209 196 184 170 --- ---
60' 262 247 234 220 205 190 --- ---
IDAHO
Wood Poles '` R

Overhead Revised 07/21 055-01-09
Pole Stubbing
I )
Wood and steel stubs are no longer used to
reinforce poles. If a pole is suffering from \,
obvious damage,then entire pole is replaced. 1 Il
i
Steel
If a pole with a wood stub needs modifying,then bands o0 6"
replace the pole. However, if the pole has a steel ,2
stub, contact Methods and Materials Department Use third band for poles . o. ® .....
over 6'above ground t
4'-n.
for assessment. � za"
Road Side l o i ® o 0 0 01 min.
Field Side
Emergency use of stubs to reinforce a damaged I s"
pole are allowed.After the installation, a work zT ) I
order must be created to replace the damaged I' I
pole.
10%of
pole height 1 ' Treated wood
Wood and steel stubs can be used to protect a +2'-0" stub
pole from impact.Although, it is preferred to I li I li
move the pole or use a different barrier; see
Distribution Manual 11.01-10 for more
information.
The following stubs are available for emergency
use:
Pole Stub Installation
♦ 10' stub poles 45' and shorter
(Cat. ID 4981)
♦ 16' stub poles 50'and longer
(Cat. ID 4983)
♦ 13'Steel Pole Ground wire and clip Pole Wood Stub
(Cat. ID 4984) under the reinforcing
band
Follow these steps to install a stub: �� �r
1. Install the stub on the field-side,when
possible.
2. Remove all loose dirt and rotted Center back
wood adjacent to the pole. Do not
00000 00000 ooa®o 0 00000
use this material for backfill due to
decay causing organisms. Reinforcing sand I I
3. Set the stub the same depth as the
pole. Leave at least 4' of the stub
exposed for binding to the pole. Material Required (Each pole band)
1 -Reinforcing band 2-Curved washers
4. Use new fill material to set the pole. 1 -sis"machine bolt 1 -Lag bolt
5. Bind the pole and stub together using, 1 -Ground wire clip
• two bands for a 10' stub and Reinforcement and Grounding
• three bands for a 16' stub.
6. Bond the ground wire to the metal band;
see illustration.
IDAM
QIPOMR". Internal Use Only Wood Poles
OMan

05-01-1 U Revised 07/21 Overhead
Inspection Tags
Pole inspectors install tags that indicate the
treatment applied at the time of the pole Look for visible physical
damage(splittop,burn
inspection. The tags may also indicate the white pocket,etc.)This pole
condition of the pole.This information helps needs to be replaced.
determine the maintenance work needed.The
tags are installed 6'above the ground on the
roadside of the pole.The code for the tags is as Consider replacing the pole.
Yellow The pole is strong enough to
follows and shown right: be reinforced in an emergency.
♦ Aluminum round tags indicate that the
pole is in sound condition and that Replace
ground line treatment has been applied. Yellow Yellow this pole as soon
as practical.
♦ Aluminum round tag with a rocker
tag indicates the pole is in sound
condition and internal treatment has Replace this
been applied. The type of internal white white pole.It is not strong
treatment is indicated on the rocker tag. enough to be reinforced.
♦ One white square tag indicates visible See Caution note below
defects, such as a split top,burned areas,
or internal decay at 48" above ground
line. Ground line decay may also be oSMOSF This pole was sound when
present. Replace pole. inspected and treated on
�ssa
♦ One yellow square tag indicates the the date indicated.
pole has less than 3" of good wood at rno
round line and below. 05 SF This pole was sound when
g inspected and treated on
♦ TWO yellow square tags* indicates the 7s8S the date indicated.Treat-
Two g ment included woodfume.
pole has more than 1" of good wood at 1*00DF00
ground line or below and is considered a
sub-NESC pole.
♦ Two white square tags* indicates the
pole has less than 1" of good wood at
ground line or below and is considered a
sub-NESC pole. This pole is a priority
for replacement,to be done as soon as
practical.
*CAUTION Do not climb poles with double
yellow or double white tags until
reinforcement or replacement is complete.
Wood Poles `POMR

Overhead Revised 07/21 055-01-1 1
Treatment Wrap 4. Peel off the inner layer of the bandage
and wrap it tightly around the pole
Pole preservative leaches into the soil over time, leaving at least 2" of the bandage
thus sterilizing the soil; retarding pole rot. extended above the ground line.
If the soil is disturbed within 6" of the pole base 5. Nail or staple the top edge and the
reestablish protection with a wrap bandage vertical seam.
(Cat ID 56233). 6. Make a berm on top of the bandage to
Use a bandage when: drain water away and to prevent contact.
♦ Salvaged pole is reused 7. Backfill and tamp thoroughly; careful
♦ Pole is trenched over not to damage the bandage.
♦ Ground line inspection is performed
♦ Pole is set deeper than the butt treatment
level Peel off innermost
Make a berm to the layer.
♦ Fill material will be added later top of the bandage
and tamp thoroughly. 1 2"
Wrap Bandage Installation
Follow these steps to apply a wrap bandage:
1. Dig a hole deep enough to place the pole Excavate 22",or
below pole damage. ■ Bar Code box
22„below ground and up to ground Remove rotted wood.
level.
2. Remove dirt and all damaged or rotten
Overlap 2".Nail Expose silver
wood. top and seam of I ' backing and bar
code to the outside.
3. Fit the bandage so it wraps the pole with ban � 1
an overlap of at least 2";which is about I I
4 panels(42")for a distribution pole and
7 panels(73-1/2")for a transmission
pole. I I
ilk
Genics Cobra Wrap
Cat. ID 40353
&:QIPOMR". Internal Use Only Wood Poles
OMan

05-01-12 Revised 07/21 Overhead
Fire Mesh 4. Install the mesh around the pole, starting
below ground-level and move up the
Fire mesh protects wood poles from fire,but pole until the appropriate height is
only to the height of the mesh. Linemen can reached.
climb the mesh like it's a bare wooden pole.
5. Make sure the bottom mesh overlaps the
upper mesh.
6. Use fencing staples to secure the mesh;
— --( remember to include 2" of overlap on all
I , seams.
i
kk
7. Return the dirt around the base of the
pole when finished.
.i,
i
Installation videos are available from the
Installed Fire Mesh Skills Training Center.
Cat. ID 58408
The mesh guards against grass/brush fires and -
wildfires in heavily forested areas. Poles in Lower Mesh
forested areas may require more mesh than in overlaps
grassy areas. Upper Mesh
by at least 2"
The mesh lasts up to 25-years but will only -
guard against one fire.After a fire,the mesh
needs to be replaced. Fit mesh as
close as
Fire Mesh Installation possible to
pole hardware
Follow these instructions for installing fire mesh
on poles: f '
1. Identify fuel sources around the pole, 4 �.- Mesh is 4-6"
such as trees and bushes,to determine �" below ground
the height of protection needed. level
The pole needs to be wrapped twice as
high as the fuel source and at least 2
wraps high, about 6-8'.
2. Dig 4-6"below ground level around the
pole base.
3. Cut the mesh so it fits tightly around the
pole with 2" of overlap on all seams.
NOTE.When installing mesh around a pole
riser, cut the mesh to fit around the riser
brackets. Complete coverage is
recommended but not required.
Wood Poles `POMR

Overhead Revised 01/21 06-00-01
Table of Contents
06- Anchoring and Guying
06-01-01 General 06-05-01 Guy Strain Insulators
Basic Requirements Scope
Scope of the Anchoring and Types of Guy Strain Insulators
Guying Section Porcelain"Johnny Ball"
NESC Requirements Fiberglass T Guy Strain
Insulator
06-02-01 Definitions 06-05-03 NESC Installation Requirements
06-05-04 Hazards
06-03-01 Grounding and Insulating Guys 06-05-07 Compliance with All NESC
IPCo Practices Installation Requirements
When Grounded at the Pole, 06-05-09 To Isolate a Galvanized Anchor
Solidly Ground the Guy Rod from Copper Grounds
Strand. To Isolate Any Anchor from
Solidly Ground any Guy Strand Cathodic Protection Systems
Between the Pole and the Guy
Insulator. 06-06-01 Guy Strand and Attachment
06-03-02 Also ground or Insulate Guys on Hardware
Structures Carrying Under 300 General
Volts. Guy Wire
Insulate Guys and Hardware in 06-06-02 Guy Grips
the Climbing Space Near HV 06-06-03 Pole Eye Plates (also called Guy
Line Conductors. Eye Plates)
06-03-03 Insulate Guys Where Probable 06-06-04 Pole Bands
Displacement Would Expose 06-06-05 Guy Guards
the Public.
06-03-05 Apply Guy Insulators for 06-07-01 Guy Types
Corrosion Control. General
Anchor Guys
06-04-01 Guy Clearances Medium Duty Guy Assembly for
Scope 3/8"
Ground Clearances 06-07-02 Heavy Duty Guy Assembly for
06-04-02 Clearances to Wires on Different 1/2"
Structures 06-07-03 Guy Anchor Requirements
06-04-03 Clearance to Buildings and Other 06-07-04 Anchor Guy Installation
Installations Procedure
06-04-04 Clearance to Conductors on the 06-07-05 Anchor Guy Installation
Same Structure Procedure Illustrated
Cattle Guards for Anchor Guys
06-07-06 Overhead Guys
06-07-07 Span Guys
06-07-08 Sidewalk Guys
Truss Guys
06-07-09 Arm Guys
Continued on next page
E'er ID 0
�wPOWER Table of Contents

06-00-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
06-08-01 Crossplate and Disk Anchors 06-11-01 Anchor Corrosion
General General
Disk Anchors Types of Corrosion
06-08-02 Crossplate Anchors Galvanic Corrosion
06-08-03 Installation Guidelines 06-11-04 Electrolysis
Highly Corrosive Soils
06-09-01 Rock Anchors
General 06-12-01 Alternatives to Guying and
Grouted Anchor Rods Anchoring
Expanding Rock Anchors General
06-09-02 Installation Guidelines Non-guyed Poles
Depth of rods 06-12-02 Pole Keys
06-12-03 Push Braces
06-10-01 Power Installed Screw Anchors
General
Description
Screw Anchor Assemblies
06-10-02 Rod Assemblies
Square-Shaft Screw Anchor
06-10-03 Installation Guidelines
Calculate Required Strength
06-10-04 Tools Required
06-10-05 Set Up the Tools
Connect the Anchor and Rod
Assembly
Install the Anchor
Table of Contents WWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-01-01
General
Basic Requirements structures,conductors are usually strung to high
tensions which apply significant loads to the
A wood pole supported only by the soil bearing tops of angle or deadend poles. One practical
against the butt portion of the pole will carry a solution for balancing these loads on wood poles
very limited amount of longitudinal or is to use guying and anchoring systems.
transverse load(see definitions)near its top.
Even where an unsupported wood pole does not In recognition of the importance of these
break, it will bend causing reduced wire ground considerations,the National Electrical Safety
clearance. Code(NESC)includes rules for strength of
materials, grounding or insulating,clearances,
To maintain wire ground clearances and and application and installation of guys and
minimize the required number of support anchors.
9'Q IDiAHO
EMPOWER. General

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-02-01
Definitions
Anchor. An anchor is a device that serves as a
reliable support to hold an object firmly in place
(usually a pole supporting wires under tension).
Angle Pole. This is a pole located where a line
changes horizontal direction sufficient) to Buckling
g Y Load
require special design to withstand the pull of
the wires and to provide adequate clearances. jq��
line angle E
Angle Pole
Bending Moment. The bending moment Crossing. A crossing is a point where wires
provides a measure of the tendency of a resultant cross or overhang other wires, limited access
force to bend an object at a certain point. highways, or railroad tracks. The wires are not
F required to be on the same supporting structure.
The NESC sometimes requires that a higher
grade of construction or safety factor(see
definitions)be applied when wires are"at
TFp crossing".
Bending Moment=Force(F)x Distance(D) Design Tension. The maximum wire tension
expected to occur,given the NESC wind and ice
loading for a particular loading district(see
definition),is the design tension.
Buckling Load. The vertical loads that are
applied to poles.These include equipment Electrolysis. A chemical action caused by
weight, iced conductors, down guy loading,pole passing an electric current through an
weight, etc.The resultant, critical,vertical load electrolyte. Further chemical action between the
which renders a pole unstable and produces electrolyte and materials such as pipes, cables
large lateral pole deflection is the buckling load. and other metalwork results in their corrosion
and failure.
E''Q- P1H0 ID
" ppMIER. Definitions

06-02-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Effectively Grounded. Intentionally Line Angle. A line angle is the angle
connected to earth through a ground connection produced by a change in the direction of the line
or connections of sufficiently low impedance conductors at an angle structure as shown.
and having sufficient current carrying capacity
to prevent the buildup of voltages. Line
Angle
Fiber Stress. The stresses acting on the cross
section of a beam are divided into those Angle Structure
components that are perpendicular to the cross-
sectional area(normal)and those that are Loading District. A loading district is an area
parallel to the cross section(tangential)as designated by the NESC with specific sets of
shown. The"normal"forces of tension(T)and combined ice and wind loading criteria for use
compression(C)are referred to as the fiber in overhead line design. The criteria are:
stress. . Medium. According to NESC, all of
shear Idaho Power's service territory falls in the
force Medium Loading district. This is a district
load ` with conductors covered readily with 1/4"of
ice and with a 4 pound wind on the
T structures and the conductors.
beam(pole)
C Pole Key. A device or backfilling technique
axes of �, designed to increase the capability of the soil to
cross section resist overturning forces. See"Pole Keys"in
Fiber stress is generally given in pounds. section 06-12.
Grade of Construction. IPCo distribution Push Brace. A push brace is a pole applied to
lines are designed to meet at least Grade C help support another pole carrying an
requirements except where the code requires unbalanced load, such as a conductor deadend,
Grade B.This is generally for construction at line angle, etc. See"Push Braces" in section 06-
limited access highways and railroad crossings. 12.
See the definition for crossing.
Safety Factor. A safety factor is a number
Guy. A guy is a wire, cable, or rod attached to which increases the calculated loads of a design
an object to brace or hold it. It is a tension problem. The increased value is compared to the
member with one end secured to an anchor(see ultimate strength or designated fiber stress of the
definition)or another pole and the other end materials in use. The net effect is to provide a
attached to the pole, crossarm, or object that it margin for uncalculated variables. In the NESC,
supports. the safety factor is called an Overload Capacity
Factor. In some instances,the NESC specifies
Insulated. Separated from other conducting the forces and the appropriate safety factors that
surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) must be used for a particular grade of
offering a high resistance to the flow of current. construction.
Kip. This is a unit of force equal to 1000 Shear Force(on a pole). The tangential force
pounds. which will cause a pole to break is called the
shear force.
orMIDAW
Definitions WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-02-03
Split Angle Guying. This is a method used to Tangent Pole. A pole in aline of poles with
guy an angle pole in which the guy bisects the no change in the direction of the line conductors
angle produced by the line conductors, as on either side of the pole.
shown.
Tangent Poles
O
900 2 O Angle Pole
0
2
E'q IagHO
MINIPMER. Definitions

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-03-01
Grounding and Insulating Guys
Construction Practices guy in this manner provides the added benefit of
improving the overall effectiveness of the
When grounding or insulating guys,Idaho system ground network.
Power's construction practices are designed to
meet the code requirements and provide an extra
margin of safety for the public and its The guy hook is
employees. Recommended practices are as grounded through
p tension on the guy.
follows:
Extend the guy
strand through
the grip loop
for the ground
The guy hook is connection.
grounded through AEffectivelythe guy tension. o
sulated
rtion
See page 06-05-05.
When Grounded at the Pole,Solidly Ground Solidly Ground any Guy Strand Between the
the Guy Strand. Pole and the Guy Insulator.
Note in the illustration above that when a guy is Note in the illustration above that if there is guy
to be grounded, standard practice is to directly strand between the pole and the guy strain
attach the guy strand pigtail to the pole ground insulator, it is also to be solidly and effectively
wire through bolted and compression grounded. This is an Idaho Power practice,which
connectors. The pole ground wire is,in turn, is not required by code. It is being done in an
connected to the system neutral to achieve an attempt to provide an extra margin of safety for
effective ground(see definition) as required by workers and to improve the chances for detection
code.Note that the pole attachment hardware and isolation of downed conductors. Here again,
(guy hook)is grounded as long as guy tension is the guy hook or other attachment hardware is
applied.However,we are not relying on guy grounded through guy tension only.Note,
tension to ground the guy strand,which extends however,that the practice is to insulate guy wires
down from the supply space and can be touched and attachment hardware in the climbing space
by communication workers and pedestrians. near(within 40")high voltage line conductors.
When copper-bonded anchor rods are used with
no guy insulator, grounding the
E''�IDM0
EMPOWER. Grounding and Insulating Guys

06-03-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Head guy
Do not or Also Ground or Insulate Guys on Structures
ground the Carrying Under 300 Volts.
secondary
rack. 2"min. The NESC exempts guys on these structures
Keep 2"between from grounding and insulating requirements,
unconnected unless the guy is also exposed to higher voltage
hardware.
conductors. Idaho Power design practices
suggest,however,that guys on these structures
2"min. Span guy also be grounded or insulated as shown. This
e- practice provides additional safety. The
or or effectiveness of the overall system ground
network will be improved when the secondary
neutral is connected through the guy strand to a
copper-bonded anchor rod with no guy strain
Open Wire Secondary insulator.When a guy strain insulator is used,
protection against contact with even low voltage
conductors is improved.
The guy hook is
grounded through
tension on the guy.
Insulate Guys and Hardware in the Climbing
Space Near High Voltage Line Conductors.
Effectively
grounded Whenever guys are attached in the climbing
portion space within 40"vertical distance of high
or voltage line conductors (effectively grounded
neutrals and insulated conductors excluded),
Idaho Power practice is to apply insulators to
protect workers as shown in the illustration on
the following page, 06-03-03. Jumpers to
Multiplex Secondary transformers, etc, are not included in this 40"
distance requirement as it is assumed that in
most cases jumpers will be disconnected and
grounded before work proceeds. Please note that
=� the NESC only allows a 25%reduction in the
or usual clearance requirement from the conductor
to the guy when guy strain insulators are
or applied. See pages 06-04-02 and 06-04-04.
Head Guy Pole
Grounding and Insulating Guys WWMRa
A.IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-03-03
ml
0
Guys within 40"of line If 4 or
conductors should be more,guy
insulated. may be
grounded.
Note: Insulate all
guys if the anchor
rod is galvanized.
Insulate Guys in Climbing Space Near High Voltage Conductors
Insulate Guys Where Probable Displacement
Would Expose the Public.
T Guy Strain
Insulator
If it is probable than a guy could sag,break, or (Preferred)
be displaced into a high voltage conductor, i
appropriate insulation should be provided to
minimize the hazard to the public.Note in the
illustration at the right that a loose guy could be
pulled over into the distribution phase wire.Also
note in the illustration on page 06-03-04 that a
loose or broken guy could sag into high voltage Note:Se\the
table on page
jumpers or bushings.Application of a 7'guy 06-04-04 for
strain insulator minimizes the hazard to the conductor-to-guy
public. The 7'insulator also serves in getting the insulator clearance
p g g requirements.
guy strand out of the hot working area(see page
06-03-03), and provides anchor corrosion
control, if required.Note also that Idaho Power
design practices suggest that an additional
insulator be applied,if needed,when guys could
sag into live secondary parts of equipment or
conductors.
!'�IDMO
1wPOMR. Grounding and Insulating Guys

06-03-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Guy Attached Above Energized Equipment
DGEP
\Note:
� DLINK
06-04-04. �� DGG17
-0 -0 -0
Note: Use a
second insulator
if necessary
to clear the
secondary.
Grounding and Insulating Guys WWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-03-05
Apply Guy Insulators for Corrosion insulators for certain types of rods and anchors
Control. in certain areas as depicted in the illustration
below. See Section 06-11,Anchor Corrosion,
One way that Idaho Power attempts to for more information.
minimize corrosion of anchors and anchor
rods is by the application of guy strain
Grouted Rod Crossplate Tubeco Helix Expanding
(Screw Anchor) Rock Anchor
Copper-bonded or Tubeco Rods Galvanized Rods
For these anchors and rods,apply guy strain insulators within: Always apply guy strain insulators
1/8 mile of major oil and gas pipelines for these anchors and anchor rods
1/2 mile of cathodic protection anode beds
E'er IDMO
" POMR. Grounding and Insulating Guys

Overhead Revised 02/06 06-04-01
Guy Clearances
Scope Ground Clearances
This section covers the NESC clearance These clearances are for the guy at
requirements for guys in a much simplified, maximum final sag conditions.No
conservative fashion. For more specific additional clearances are required for guys.
information or for situations not covered,
such as water crossings,consult the Methods
&Materials Department and the NESC.
Overhead Guy at Maximum Sag (note 1)
35'Main Line (note 2) 18' c&w
31.5'Others Foods
.� o m
ova oho
y �
1 Lands and Roads in General
CJ Notes:
® f2.
. No clearance from the ground is required for anchor guys not
crossing RR tracks,roads,driveways,or pathways.
s This is a UPRR requirement.
Ground Clearances for Guys
E'erAH IDO
EMPOWER. Guy Clearances

06-04-02 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Clearances to Wires on Different Structures
Consider the conductor to be at
maximum sag if it is above the guy
600 initial sag if it is below the guy 119
0
1�
4 3' 4'
11*
2.5'for multiplex *1.9'for multiplex 2, Notes 1 &2
T for open wire 2.3'for open wire
Consider the guy to be at
600 initial sag if it is below the conductors
maximum final sag if it is above the conductors
Notes:
1. The code does not specifically allow any reduction when the guy is above a communications or supply conductor.
2. No clearance is required when the wires are electrically interconnected at the crossing(NESC Rule 233C1 Exception).
Table for Vertical Clearance at Crossings
To(lower)
Uninsulated Guy Wire or Guy Strain Insulator #
From (upper) Insulator End Fitting Or Insulated Section
Effectively Grounded 2' § x 0.75 = 1.5'
Neutrals, Other Guys
Communications 2' x 0.75 = 1.5'
Multiplex, URD Primary Cable 2.5' x 0.75 = 1.9'
Open wire, 0 to 750 volts L-G 3' x 0.75 = 2.3'
Open wire, 750 volts to 22 kV L-G 4' x 0.75 = 3.0'
$ See Note 1 above.
§ See Note 2 above.
Guy Clearances W` R,,

Overhead Revised 02/06 06-04-03
Clearance to Buildings and Other Installations
Generally,the required vertical clearance for measured from the guy at rest position(no
guys is 3',with the guy at maximum sag as wind). Reduced clearance is allowed for some
shown below,unless the structure is subject to situations. For swimming pool clearances,
pedestrian or vehicle traffic. The general contact the Methods &Materials Department.
horizontal clearance requirement is 4.5'for
buildings and 3' for other structures,
Guy at maximum sag conditions
3' r Also see note 2. i 3'
r c r i i i
M0T L 88
l 1 A QUALITY INN IT
11 12 3
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
4.5'
Also 2 00 00 3 - _ -
see EEm1] o0 00 -
note 00 00 a
1 00 00
W
O®O
0
Notes. 2. If the roof is accessible to:
1. If the guy is grounded,it may be placed 3"from a wall without windows or a wall --Pedestrians,cars use 10.5'
with non-opening windows.(The guy may be grounded through the anchor.) --Trucks use 15.5'
Clearance to Buildings and Signs
If a roof is accessible to: -- Pedestrians, cars use 10.5'
--Trucks use 15.5'
Guy at maximum sag conditions
3'
3' 3'
3'
3'
Clearance to Other Structures
E'er IDiAHO
RNPOMR. Guy Clearances

06-04-04 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Clearance to Conductors on the Same
Structure
C a x 0.75
These requirements vary, depending on the type Jai
of guy and whether the conductor is a line
conductor(running in the direction of the line) Span guy or head guy
or a vertical or lateral conductor(entirely running parallel to the line
supported on one structure). The NESC allows a
25%reduction in clearance in any direction from
the insulated portion of a guy insulator or from
an insulated section of a guy to a line conductor,
provided that full clearance is maintained from
uninsulated end fittings or guy wire.No
reduction is allowed if the wire is a vertical or
lateral conductor(jumper).These clearances are C b x 0.75
illustrated at the right. Note the special
requirements when guys pass within 12" of
supply and communications circuits on the
next page.
C x 0.75
* b
Guy to Conductor Clearances
Clearance Circuit Voltage(kV Line to Line)
Designation 0-8.7 12.5 24.9 34.5 C
b
Ca t (inches) 12.0 13.6 18.5 22.4 Anchor guy
Cb (inches) 6.0 7.0 10.1 12.5
Cc (inches) 6.0 7.6 12.5 16.4
No reduction is allowed from NESC clearances to a
guy strain insulator if the conductor is a vertical or ° C
lateral conductor Qumper). o
t For communication cable and vertical or lateral
conductors(jumpers), use Cc values. cc x 0.75
Span guy or head guy
On jointly used structures,guys which pass (Not anchor guys)
within 12" of supply conductors, and also pass
within 12" of communication cables, shall be
protected with a suitable insulating covering Clearance to Conductors Structure
the Same Support
where the guy passes the supply conductors,
unless the guy is effectively grounded or Note in table at the left that some of the required
insulated with a strain insulator at a point below clearances are less than 12", so this is an
the lowest supply conductor and above the additional requirement.Note also that ALL
highest communication cable. supply conductors are included, even the neutral.
Methods of meeting this requirement are
illustrated on the next page.When the guy is
effectively grounded or insulated as shown,the
clearance to the communication cable may be
reduced to 3"
Guy Clearances WWMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 02/06 06-04-05
if abrasion protection(plastic tubing,tree guard, with galvanized anchor rods. See page
or plastic conduit secured by a PG clamp)is 06-03-05,
provided. -or-
To meet the above requirements: 3. Apply a guy strain insulator where the guy
passes the supply conductors (maintaining
1. Rearrange the hardware to get at least Table on page 06-04-04 clearances),
12" clearance(Table on page 06-04-04 -or-
clearance if greater)from the supply 4. Apply plastic tubing,tree guard or plastic
conductor to the guy. For instance,the conduit secured with a PG clamp on the guy
neutral could be put on an extension wire where it passes a neutral or insulated
bracket to get 12"+clearance, supply conductors(and by communication
-or- conductors if abrasion protection is needed
2. Effectively ground the portion of the where clearance is less than 6").
guy which passes both conductors
(maintaining Table on page 06-04-04
clearances). Do not use this solution
See the Table on page 06-04-04
for proper clearance from line
conductors to insulated and
uninsulated portions of guys. \_
Add extra Effectively Tree guard,
insulator OR ground OR tubing,duct
AND maintain 6"clearance(3"if abrasion protected.)
Secure with
PG clamp
Guys Passing within 12" of Supply and Communication Conductors
A'Q IDMO
�wPOMR. Guy Clearances

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-05-01
Guy Strain Insulators
Scope
This section describes the insulating portion of a guy system. It is usually composed of a porcelain or
fiberglass insulator,which is placed at the end of or within the guy wire at some point.
Types of Guy Strain Insulators
1 41116"
Porcelain"Johnny Ball" 1�1s rates
This insulator consists of an elongated"ball"of O
porcelain with holes spaced to physically �1�s
separate the grips of the two ends of the guy
strand as shown below.The holes are placed so
the porcelain is compressed when the guy is 51rz
under tension. Typical Dimensions of Porcelain Guy Strain Insulator
Fiberglass 7-feet Guy Strain Insulators.
These insulators consist of a 78-inch fiberglass
�J5 section along with clevis-clevis end fittings and
leach 2emh sheave wheels; 1 each for DGGI7,2 each for
Two grips included for 3i8-inch EHS,cat.ID 5316. DGGI7H. Some manufacturers provide a
Porcelain"Johnny Ball" thimble eye fitting in place of the clevis and
Guy Strain Insulator sheave wheel on one end of the DGGI7
insulator.The 7-feet insulator is purchased in
The mechanical strength of the insulator is two sizes: a light duty size for 3/8-inch strand,
adequate for use with 3/8-inch EHS guy strand, and a heavy-duty size for 1/2-inch EHS guy
but NOT FOR 1/2-inch EHS. strand.
The electrical strength is adequate for insulating It's used in the following situations:
standard voltages only to 12.47-kV,but it may ♦ When the long length is desired to get
be used for corrosion control only at any the guy strand out of the hot work area,
voltage. ♦ To prevent loose guys from becoming
energized
Additional parameters for the porcelain guy ♦ To provide necessary clearances past
strain insulator are as follows: distribution line conductors and
Cat. ID 4765 jumpers
Ultimate Strength 20,000 Ibs Either unit will insulate guys for voltages up to
60 Hz Flashover 35-kV dry 345-kV.The illustration on the next page shows
18-kV wet the units and their associated hardware.
(This allows use at 12.5 kV
or for corrosion control only
at any voltage)
ZID MO
�POMR,r Guy Strain Insulators

06-05-02 Revised 08/22 Overhead
Fiberglass 7-feet Guy Strain Insulators.
These insulators consist of a 78-inch fiberglass section along with clevis-clevis end fittings and sheave
wheels; 1 each for DGGI7,2 each for DGGI7H. Some manufacturers provide a thimble eye fitting in
place of the clevis and sheave wheel on one end of the DGGI7 insulator. The 7-feet insulator is purchased
in two sizes: a light duty size for 3/8-inch strand, and a heavy-duty size for 1/2-inch EHS guy strand.
It's used in the following situations:
♦ When the long length is desired to get the guy strand out of the hot work area,
♦ To prevent loose guys from becoming energized
♦ To provide necessary clearances past distribution line conductors and jumpers
Either unit will insulate guys for voltages up to 345-kV. The illustration on the next page shows the units
and their associated hardware.
Additional parameters for the line strain insulator are as follows:
CU Code DGGI7(light duty) Ultimate Strength 15,000 Ibs for DGGI7
DGG17H (heavy duty) 30,000 Ibs for DGG17H
Cat. ID 4726 60 Hz Flashover 780-kV dry
4727 425-kV wet
(This allows use to 345-kV)
Roller:
2-3/8"x 27/32"
(both &H) 5/8" Rod (L) 5/8"Pin (L)
3/4" Rod (H) 3/4"Pin (H)
7/8"(L)
78"
4-1/8"(L);5-7/8"(H)
T Approx.
Fiberglass 7' Light(L)and Heavy Duty (H) Guy Strain Insulators
5/8"Pin
DGGI7 for --For linking 2 DGG17H assemblies, use a
3/8" EHS 3/4"link(4866).
--For linking 2 DGG17 assemblies, use a 5/8"
link(4865 or CU Code DLINK)
DGEP
DGEPH DPB2
DPB2M,
or
DPB2L 0 UL D O
0
DGG17H
for 3/8" EHS DGG17H for 1/2" EHS
Guy Strain Insulators '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-05-03
NESC Installation Requirements
The NESC has certain requirements regarding the installation of guy strain insulators as described below
and in the illustrations on the following page; 06-05-07:
♦ Locate all insulators shall be located at least 8-feet above the ground.
♦ When a hazard exists with one insulator,place two or more guy insulators to include,when
practical,the exposed section of guy between them.
♦ Place insulators so if any guy sags down upon another,the insulators will not become ineffective.
NOTE: The purpose of these rules is to protect people in situations where guy wires break,
become slack,or are displaced somehow, e.g., a child swinging on a down guy or keeping
grounded guys out of the hot working area for the protection of workers.
`p" AHO
R. Guy Strain Insulators
----pP y

06-05-04 Revised 08/22 Overhead
" This illustration shows how a hazardous situation
could occur with this arrangement. For instance,the
guy for the top distribution circuit sags into the jumper
of the lower circuit.Another guy insulator can be
applied to remedy the situation; for example, a
"Johnny Ball"(guy size and voltage permitting)or a
guy strain insulator. However,be careful about where
it's placed., see page 06-05-05.
A Hazard Exists Here!
Improper placement of the guy strain
insulator has allowed the slackened
guy to become energized.
Hazards Exist when only one guy insulator is used
Guy Strain Insulators '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-05-05
If we place the Johnny Ball as shown here,the insulator
for the lower circuit could be rendered ineffective.
Applying two 7-feet fiberglass insulators linked together
as shown in this illustration for the top distribution
circuit would appear to be the universal solution.
However, see the next page for more information.
A Hazard Exists Here!
Improper application of the guy strain
insulator has allowed the energized
guy to energize another guy.
J� Second
a insulator
is NOT
properly
placed.
Q�
Q
Improper Application of the Guy Strain Insulator
"`�M Guy Strain Insulators

06-05-06 Revised 08/22 Overhead
This illustration shows that the same troubles exist when placing
transmission guy insulators only at the pole.The bottom section of
the guy could become energized if the guy becomes slack and sags
into the distribution circuits.
We could attempt to remedy this by inserting another insulator in
the guy at least 8-feet above ground level. However,improper
placement could result in the same problem shown on the previous
page;that is, other insulators could become ineffective with guy
sag.
A Hazard Exists Here!
Improper application of the guy strain
insulator has allowed the broken guy
to energize another guy.
These insulators have become
/ ineffective through improper
placement of the guy strain insulators
on the broken guy.
0
N
G.
Insulators become ineffective through improper placement of the guy strain insulator
Guy Strain Insulators '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-05-07
This illustration shows how to meet all three
installation requirements.All insulators are
at least 8-feet above the ground and hazards CID
are minimized, even when guys sag or break \0
or anchors pull. ov
Since the upper portion of the transmission
guys are effectively grounded, insulators are J�
not rendered ineffective in a situation like is Qj�
shown on the next page,06-05-08. JQQ
�a
�a
o�
C?
�o
Future
Extension
All guy strain insulators
will be well above the
desired 8' minimum
clearance.
8'Min
I
Compliance with All NESC Installation Requirements
"`�M Guy Strain Insulators

06-05-08 Revised 08/22 Overhead
When the effectively grounded portion of
the guy contacts the distribution jumper,
the distribution circuit should
automatically de-energize.Note that the
Upper guy wires are transmission guy strain insulators are
effectively grounded. positioned in such a way that the guy
insulation requirement for a future
extension off the bottom distribution
circuit is also covered.
It would be impractical to depict every
situation in applying guy strain insulators
to meet the requirements of the NESC.
However, a clear understanding of the
principles stated above will result in
proper application for other installations
not shown.
This insulator has not become
ineffective because the circuit will
de-energize through the effectively
grounded upper guy wires.
NESC Installation Requirements Not Violated
NOTE: The NESC prescribes clearance requirements from conductors to guy strain insulators, see
Guy Clearances in the Overhead Manual 06-04-01.
Guy Strain Insulators '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-05-09
To Isolate a Galvanized Anchor Rod To Isolate any Anchor from Cathodic
from Copper Grounds. Protection Systems.
Anytime a screw or rock anchor is used,a guy A guy strain insulator may be required to isolate
strain insulator must be applied to prevent the anchor(all types) from the multi-grounded
electrolysis due to the galvanic couple formed neutral to stop corrosion of the anchor due to
by the connection of the galvanized anchor rod stray DC currents if one of the following
to the copper ground system, see Anchor applies:
Corrosion in the Overhead Manual 06-11. ♦ It's within 1/2 mile of a cathodic
protection anode bed
♦ It's within 1/8 mile of a major natural
Combine with Johnny Ball or gas or fuel transmission pipeline.
guy strain where possible. Numerous anode beds are located within the
service area to protect major pipelines and
IPCo transmission towers, see Anchor
Corrosion in the Overhead Manual 06-11.
Contact the Methods&Materials
Department for more information.
Galvanized rod
Screw or
rock anchor
To Isolate Galvanized Anchor Rods
From Copper Grounds
"`�R� Guy Strain Insulators

Overhead Revised 06/22 06-06-01
Guy Strand and Attachment Hardware
General Physical Properties of Stranded Guy Wires
Diameter lbs.per Ultimate Cat.
This section describes the guy strand and all the &Material 1000, Strength ID
attachment hardware associated with guying 3/8"EHS 273 15,400 32905*
1/2"EHS 517 26,900 3671
systems currently approved for use on the Idaho *CID 3668 is 3/8-inch EHS 200'coil and included in
Power system. Strength limitations and CU Code DDG3.
application guidelines are included. Note.The CU code includes other items,see
section 06-07.
Some 1/2-inch EHS 19-strand wire was
Guy Wire purchased and can be used interchangeably with
the 7-strand wire.
Idaho Power utilizes stranded extra high strength
(EHS) galvanized steel as the material for guy
wires.All sizes of the EHS guy wire specified
for use on the distribution system are 7-strand,
left hand lay as depicted below.
ve\k raod\a`1
:j
When viewed from either end,the strands
should always lay to the left.Preformed
grips can be used only with this left-hand
lay stranding.
Strand Left Hand Lay EHS Guy Wire
"`ppR. Guy Strand and Attachment Hardware
M­­.m 'Y

06-06-02 Reviewed 06/22 Overhead
Color Code and Cross-over Marks*
Identification Tape (A) (B) Long Leg
Pitch
Length
Cabled Loop Short Leg
*Cross-over marks: (A)Indicates starting point for application of smaller diameter fittings(seepage 06-06-03).
(B)Indicates starting point for larger diameter fittings(grips for 1/2"have only one mark).
Twisted or Cabled Loop Guy Grip
Guy Grips Automatics for Guy Grips. "Strandvise"type
deadends are available.The strandvise is also
For distribution applications,Idaho Power uses applicable where tampering is a problem.
"preformed"wire grips to deadend both ends of
standard guy wire sizes. Two of these grips, Installation Information. In the illustration
appropriately sized, are included in the CU above,note that two cross over marks are
codes for the down guy assemblies. labeled(grips for 1/2-inch EHS have only one).
These mark starting points for wrapping around
Application. The table below gives the particular ranges of seat diameters.Also note
appropriate Cat.ID to be applied for each size that one leg is longer.This will enable you to
and type of guy strand along with identify each leg if you need to remove and
manufacturer's color code.When properly reapply the grip to get the proper tension on the
applied the ultimate strength for a particular grip guy. The short leg should always be wrapped
is as least as strong as the guy wire. first.The grip may be reapplied a maximum of
three times for the smaller grips and twice for
Wraplock Guy Grips the 1/2-inch grips,provided that all the adjusting
Grip Color Compatible Associated is done within about three months of the original
Cat.ID Code Guy Cu Code installation.After three months,a new grip
5316 Orange 3,8"EHS DDG3 should be used. Do not re-use old grips.
5320 Blue W"EHS DDG2
Hardware Considerations. Hardware used
with grips should have smooth contours, ample
groove clearances, acceptable diameters, and
sufficient strength to minimize abrasion and
fatigue of the loop area.The ultimate strength of
the hardware must be compatible with the
strength of the particular guy wire and grip.
Guy Strand and Attachment Hardware WOP RR.

Overhead Revised 06/22 06-06-03
Pole Eye Plates, aka Guy Eye Plates
13/16"D-takes 15/16"
3/4"bolt max.
II I II � 4"
74' 3 5" 3/4"bolts
13/16"D-
�} {0} takes 3/4"
T T max dia. � I I I I I CU code DGEP includes
two 3/4"bolts,nuts,and 3"x4"
13/16"D pin cast washers.
Use with 3/8"EHS
Heavy Duty Pole Eye Plate Cast-Curved Washer
Heavy Duty Pole Eye Plate NOTE: The plate must be aligned with the
This plate (CU Code DGEP) is used in place guy for this pin connection to work
of the 4-way pole band(CU Code correctly. Misalignment may result in failure
DPBAND), formerly specified with 3/8-inch of the insulator end fitting or pole eye plate
EHS guy strand applications. The plate and the pole could split.
accepts 3/4-inch or 5/8-inch pins, such as used
with the fiberglass guy strain insulators.
The link has 7/8-inch hole for pole
Twisted Angle Link, Cat.ID 4872 attachment on one side and 3/4-inch hole on
The twisted angle link can be used for the other for the guy application.
distribution maintenance guy support— See the Materials Manual 03-357-01 for
retrofit for 3/8-inch EHS guy application or more information on twisted angle links.
smaller.
2-7/16"—t 1/2"—I
15/16"dia
3-3/8"
46*
Twisted Angle Link - 3/4'I
CID 4872 13/16"
�POVR. Guy Strand and Attachment Hardware
M­­.m 'Y

06-06-04 Revised 06/22 Overhead
Pole Bands
7/8"Stud bolts Note: Do not apply the DPB2S,M,or L
2-way pole band without
7/8"Through the through bolt. includes two pair of links
9 (one pair not normally used),
bolt = = two rollers(not normally used),
®❑ ❑® and two 7/8"x 3"bolts.
9/16"Sq.holes Through bolt
for lag bolts adapter Joslyn Pole Band
(not used)
Important Instruction:The\band.
of this through bolt is critical to realizing the full rated strength of this
On Joslyn bands(shown),the bolt is oriented in the lower position on
On Hughes pole bands,the bolt must be oriented
in the upper position,as illustrated in the detail
shown to the right.
Hughes Pole Band
2-Way Pole Band
2-Way Pole Band. The 2-way pole band, Pole Pole Band CU
supplied in three sizes for varying pole Diameter Cat. ID Code
diameters, is the one normally used for 8"-10" 5210 DPB2S
distribution applications. The pole band has 9.5"-12" 5211 DPB2M
strength adequate for use with 1/2" EHS guy 11"-13.5" 5213 DPB21-
strand.
Guy Strand and Attachment Hardware "` R„

Overhead Revised 06/22 06-06-05
Guy Guards
Slotted Tube Guy Guard. The slotted-tube
guy is included with the CU codes for all down
guys; DDGKIT and DDGK2SI. They are
secured to the guy strand with a bolted clamp or
a self-contained helix, as shown to the right.
Call for the code that includes the marker on all
anchor guys. Only the top guy requires a marker
where two guys attach to a single anchor except
where exposure is high, such as in a parking lot,
playground, etc. In heavy snow areas where
most of the marker may be covered and where
cross country travel by snow machine or skis is
likely,two lengths of guy markers may be
attached to the anchor guy.
Slotted Tube Guy Guard
MONPOWM Guy Strand and Attachment Hardware
M,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-07-01
Guy Types
General Anchor Guys
This section covers the different types of guys, Anchor guys, also called"down guys",
along with application and installation consist of an assembly that generally
information. includes the hardware necessary to attach to
the pole hardware and anchor strand eye nut.
Medium Duty Guy Assembly
Standard 3/8-inch guy wire for 1-0 or 3-0, 2/0 and Smaller.
Call for the attachment hardware separatel
use DGEP illustrated on page 06-06-03.
Guy insulators must be called for separately,
use DGG17. Grounding hardware is included
in the CU code but it is not
always necessary.
Call for the anchor CU Major Items Major Item
separately; usually Codes Included Cat. ID
DANS10 or DAN19, DDG3 3/8" EHS Guy wire 3669
see section 11-09. 3/8" EHS Guy grips(2 ea) 5316
Guy guard 5325
Guy strain FG 7" 15K# 4726
Rr Guy Types

06-07-02 Revised 08/22 Overhead
Heavy Duty Guy Assembly
Heavy 1/2" Guy Wire for 1-0 or 3-0, 2/0 and Larger.
Note: Do not apply the 2-Way pole Call for pole bands separately;
band without the through bolt. ° ° use DPB2S, DPB2M,or
DPB2L,illustrated on page
06-06-04.
Guy insulators must be called for
separately,use DGG17H only. Grounding hardware is included
in the CU code but it is not
always necessary.
For a special application guy guard,
see DDGSA on page 06-06-06.
CU Major Items Major Item
Call for the anchor Codes Included Cat. ID
separately; usually DDG2 12" EHS Guy wire 3671
DANS10 or DAN23. 12" EHS Guy grips (2 ea) 5320
(See section 11-09.) Guy guard 5325
Guy strain INS T 30K lb 4727
Guy Types "` R„

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-07-03
Guy Anchor Requirements
I
Preferred location with the edge of c
the pole 1'from the property line.
of
Don't cross walks,roads,trails, al
etc.unless the height is
adequate.See page 06-04-01.�
I
Building
4 3'
min. �
I
6 Leave room 6
Curb min. for forms. � I
face �
Sidewalk
Curb
3-inches to walls without openings or non-opening windows.
Anchor Guy Location
Location Installation Guidelines.
Designers or surveyors should mark the anchor Wire clearances should be maintained over long
and pole locations clearly for the benefit of term conditions for safety considerations.
underground utility locators and construction poles should stand reasonably vertical over the
crews. Drive the anchor stake at the point where long-term conditions for appearance
the anchor rod will protrude from the ground
considerations.
along the approximate slope of the guy wire.
Consider the following realities:
Locate anchor guys to minimize interference ♦ In some soils,the pole will sink a
with public activities; 1-foot to 1.5-feet away variable distance with the long-term
from the property line. If this is not practical, application of conductor, equipment,
then choose location as far from the traveled and down-guy loads.
way as practical.Anchor guys should not cross
roads,walkways,trails, etc.,unless there is ♦ Conductor and down-guy material will
adequate height for the expected traffic. Refer to stretch, depending on the loads applied.
the Overhead Manual 06-04-01 for guy ground ♦ The anchor will"creep", depending on
clearances in general and in this section the stability of the soil,type of anchor,
06-07-08 for sidewalk guys. and the applied load.
The NESC requires that guys are located: ♦ A small horizontal deflection of the
♦ at least 6-inches behind the face of a pole will produce a correspondingly
curb, large increase in conductor sag and
♦ 4-feet from fire hydrants, subsequent loss of ground clearance.
♦ 3-inches from building walls, and
♦ 3-feet from windows that open.
See the illustration above.
�PONER. Guy Types

06-07-04 Revised 08/22 Overhead
It's common practice to"rake"the pole a Anchor Guy Installation Procedure
variable distance in anticipation of some
amount of displacement. The following steps refer to the installation
(The term"rake"means to pull the top of method illustrated on the next page.
the pole over with a hoist and pulling eye, or
to set the pole,hand tensioning the guy, a 1) Set the pole with or without rake, as
small distance from perpendicular in the desired. (The suggested value for pole
opposite direction of the load to be applied.) rake is 8-inches fora 40-foot pole).
Observe the installation rules,
It's common knowledge that anchors "creep" particularly backfilling and tamping
in the soil.A pole rake of 8-inches (the rules, see Overhead Manual 05-01-05.
approximate pole top diameter for a 40-foot 2) Apply a vertical load to set the pole
pole) is suggested; see the Overhead Manual foundation.
05-01-02 for other pole lengths. 3) Set the anchor, see pages 06-08, 06-09,
and 06-10.
Most of the anchor and guy wire creep will 4) Make up the guy. Hand tension the
occur as the conductors are pulled up to guy or use the hoist to rake the pole
initial tension.The pole should stay plumb as desired. Ground or insulate the
throughout its life if it's brought to"plumb" guy, see pages 06-03 and 06-05.
and a proper backfill and tamp job is done. 5) Pull the creep out of the anchor using
A problem might occur if there is an the winch line and hoist if desired.
unbalanced load applied in a direction not 6) Sag the conductors at the proper
compensated by the guy, such as a slack temperature, see Overhead Manual
span, or a service drop. For these situations,
it is common to offset the anchor slightly 10-03, using the hoist on the guy and
reapply the grips to adjust the pole to
from the primary direction of strain or to
apply pole keys, see page 06-12-02, and plumb. Tension multiple guys
"rake"the pole in a direction away from the according to their relative strengths,
unbalanced load to compensate for the long- see page 06-06-01.
term deflection. For areas with steady 7) In the course of the job, or follow-up
transverse wind loading, see page 05-01-02. maintenance, check that the pole is
plumb, and the guy wires are taut.
Use a hoist and reapply the grip or
use a new grip if the original one is
over 3 months old.
Guy Types WOP RR.

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-07-05
r
Step 6/
Steps 1 &7
Optional
Winch
Line
bbb u o
Step 2 Step Step 4
Anchor Guy Installation Procedure Step 3
Cattle Guards for Anchor Guys
An animal scratching against an anchor guy can cause the pole to rock and conductors to swing and
make contact.There are three effective ways to alleviate the problem.
The least costly solution is to enclose the guy with two sections �� 1/2"X 10'rigid of
conduit as shown in the illustration right. Since the animal
cannot get relief with the rolling action,it will probably hunt for 1"X 6'thin wall
(painted)
another place to scratch.
Another option is a Cow Scratcher Hardware for 3/8" 3/4"washer
by Carlson Industries, guy shown
non Cat.ID item.
,:..
Cattle Guard Using Conduit
13-bo clamp(5267)
10'wood stub
Guy guard
5.5
The strongest defense against large persistent animals is to
utilize a wood stub, shown right.
This arrangement keeps most of the vibration from reaching
the pole and conductors. Since this is the most common
solution, CU Code DDGS was established as shown below. DDGS
Cattle Guard Using Wood Stub
MONPOW fl Guy Types

06-07-06 Revised 08/22 Overhead
Overhead Guys
When it is not possible to support a deadend with a down guy for any reason, e.g., a road,use an overhead
guy as shown below.
Three assemblies are provided by CU Codes to simplify estimation work. The last two illustrations below
show these along with the head guy assemblies. For additional information,contact Methods&Materials.
For Clearance
See page 06-04-01
For Clearance
See page 06-04-01
Head Guy to Anchor Head Guy to Pole
DPB2S,DPB2M,
or DPB2L � 100 ft.or 28 lbs.of
3/8"EHS guy wire 777�DGG17
2 guy grips DGEPH
for 3/8"EHS
DDG2
For 100'of guy wire and 2 grips: DHGM
Medium Duty Head Guy Assembly
DPB2S, DPB2M,
or DPB2L � 100 ft.or 52 lbs.of
1/2"EHS guy wire �DGG17H
NW-TO
2 guy grips DPB2S, DPB2M,
for 1/2"EHS or DPB2L
DDG2
For 100'of guy wire and 2 grips: DHGHD
Heavy Duty Head Guy Assembly
IDAHO
Guy Types '� R.

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-07-07
Span Guys
This assembly, depicted below, is used for light duty deadending applications where a down-guy is
not practical because of conflicts. Span guys must either be insulated or effectively grounded.
DGG17
CU code,DSG,includes:
DGEPH DSG (or DSGS for secondary)
--2 pole eye plates
(5328)
For clearance
requirements,see 2 sets of 5/8"hardware
page 06-04-01. and grounding hardware
11'min.for 2 u grips for 3/8"EHS
(5316
pedestrians only. guy p)
DSGS )
55 lbs.or 200'of
3/8"EHS
Ground or apply an insulator according Grounding hardware is included.
to practices.(See section 06-03.)
Anchor Pole-Use 1 pole eye plate
Primary and/or Secondary Guys per primary or secondary guy.
Span Guv Assembly
"`�R� Guy Types
In 1—WC11P11y

06-07-08 Revised 08/22 Overhead
Sidewalk Guys Truss Guys
When guys must cross a walkway, or where the This type of guy is used to reduce the
anchor must be installed vertically due to lack of amount of deflection that occurs due to a
right-of-way or traffic conflict,the assembly permanent horizontal load, such as a
shown below can be used for small line angles, primary slack span or a large service drop.
or very light duty deadends. Due to the increased The pole must be of sufficient class to
vertical load on the pole with the short lead and provide the appropriate strength without the
horizontal strut loading, a higher-class pole may truss installed. Once the proper class of pole
be required.A screw anchor is the preferred is selected,the truss is added to provide a
choice for use with this guy. If a plate anchor is straighter looking pole. For unstable soils,
used,tamp the backfill very thoroughly,or use the addition of a pole key may be necessary,
concrete backfill, see page 06-08-04.A plate see page 06-12-02.
anchor would have to bear against disturbed soil.
DSWGY 5/8"hardware included
Note: Always use a through Force
bolt with this assembly. Zlafroarte
L(Cut
r IMC
cessary.)
D
0
Guy end Pole end
fitting fitting
(5266-1-POS) (5265)
(55320-2-POS)
11'min.for \only
pedestrians only ` Note: Always
use a through
bolt with these
assemblies.
Call for the guy
and the anchor
J(A
arately.
screw anchorreferred.)
pede
Sidewalk Guy Assembly --
Anchor preferred if
clearances allow
(A screw anchor (]
is preferred.)
DPKEY
Truss Guy Assembly
Guy Types �PGMR.

Overhead Revised 08/22 06-07-09
Arm Guys
Arm guys run in approximate alignment with the conductors to avoid putting excessive load on the
crossarm assembly.
Arm guys will be engineered on an individual basis, since a variety of situations are possible.
Contact the Methods&Materials Department for support.
0
0
Please note that the angles of the
guys are greatly exagerated because
of the closeness of the two poles for ®❑
illustration purposes.
--------------------------------------------------- ------------------------
Anchor Guy Assembly o
Arm Guy Assembly
Arm Guv Assembly
�POR. Guy Types

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-08-01
Disc and Crossplate Anchors
General Of all the anchor choices,the disc is the
most efficient when very corrosive soil has a
This section includes a description of and high salt, alkaline, acid, or organic material
installation instructions for the disc and the content(feed lots, for instance), or when a
crossplate anchors. These two styles are high water table is encountered. It is the best
when the anchor needs to be manually choice to use when a hand-dug hole is
installed in Idaho Power's distribution required.
applications.
20" Disk Anchor
Corrosion protection has been provided by Cat. ID Description CU Code
the manufacturer. 5004 AN DISK 20" DAN19
5040 ROD AN1"X10' Included
Disk Anchors
The Disk anchors are available in three(3) 24" Disk Anchor
sizes, 20-inch, 24-inch, and 36-inch and are Cat. ID Description CU Code
installed when it is impractical to install 5006 AN DISK 24" DAN23
screw type or rock type anchors. The 36- 5040 ROD AN 1"X10' Included
inch is most generally used for transmission 5042 EXT ROD 1" None
applications. 5044 CPLG ROD 1" None
Eye Nut
/3-1/2' Extension Rod
Coupling
Anchor Rod�I
Disk Anchor
Plastic Insulating Washer
Washer
Steel Cap Nut
"` R,. Disc and Crossplate Anchors

06-08-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Crossplate Anchors
The crossplate anchor was introduced as alternative to the disc anchor when the cost for the disc was
prohibitive.
The crossplate anchor is 20-inches in diameter and is designed to be used with 3/8-or 1/2-inch EHS guy
wire. It consists of two ribbed steel plates that are connected at right angles and bored to accept the anchor
rod. The plates are coated with a protective finish for corrosion control.
Assemble Anchor and Anchor Rod
Nut retainer
Washer
Galvanized Crossplate Anchor
Anchor Rod
Triple Strand
Eyenut
Use the same brand
nut and rod for a tight fit.
20" Crossplate Anchor
Cat. ID Description CU Code
40899 AN CROSSPLATE 20" DAN20
5020 AN ROD 1"XT Included
When anchors are applied in soft soils, apply a concrete backfill as shown on page 06-08-05.
Disc and Crossplate Anchors '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-08-03
Installation Guidelines 2. Assemble the rod and anchor as instructed.
Prior to this installation,the job site should be 3. Dig the anchor hole.Position the
prepared for the crew. Stakes will identify the assembled anchor and rod assembly with the
location of the pole and where the anchor plate anchor plate at the anchor stake and the rod
will be. directly in line with the guy attachment
point. If two guys are to be attached, align
1. Set the Pole.When practical, set the framed the rod along the line of action of the
pole and orient the guy attachment point to resultant force.
the anchor rod.
Drive a stake where the anchor rod is to
Proper alignment for the anchor rod is very protrude from the ground.
important. Improper alignment of the rod will 4. Take care to note other utility locations,then
weaken the installation. either auger or hand dig the hole for the
Digging the pole hole will also give you some anchor plate.
experience about the soil type. This may cause If the anchor is to be installed off the public
you to reconsider the size of anchor to be used. right of way,make sure that easements have
In soft or disturbed soils,use the next larger size been granted. If the customer has specific
anchor plate than would normally be applied. requirements or issues,the foreman should be
You may need to use a different type anchor. notified by the distribution designer.
When the anchor rod trench is dug, it should be
done with a narrow tool, such as a digging bar,
to avoid disturbing the soil in this critical area.
Do not use a method that forces you to enter
an unshored excavation to assemble the
anchor plate to the anchor rod.Plan to leave
-ZL 6-to 12-inches of rod above final grade.
t Keep approximately 6-feet separation to other
anchor rods.
B
Establish the guy 5. Align Anchor Rod with Guy Attachment.
attachment point Misalignment can weaken the installation.
When more than one guy will attach,the
anchor rod should be installed along the line
of action of the resultant force.
Caution:
Align the hardware 6. Backfill and Compact/Tamp. Add
with the guy and anchor Backfill in 6-inch lifts and compact
thoroughly each time. This is necessary to
prevent the anchor from creeping
excessively if water enters the disturbed soil
around the anchor. Compact crushed or
small diameter rock directly on and around
the anchor. If suitable backfill is not
Note the soil conditions available and the soil is very soft it may be
when selecting anchor size necessary to bring in a half yard of concrete.
If this is done,the anchor needs be left
unloaded until the concrete is set sufficiently
to handle the load.Note that the soil around
the anchor rod must also be compacted to
keep water out.
"`POWE R. Disc and Crossplate Anchors

06-08-04 Reviewed 01121 Overhead
Be careful not to damage the protective coating on the rod. If you do damage it,tape the damaged area
with electrical tape.
Dig the Anchor Hole
Augered Hole
Narrow Trench for
the Anchor Rod
Top View
Align Anchor Rod with
Guy Attachment Point
6"to 12" Berm and Tamp to prevent water entry
O
Final grade x d
a.: '
..:. ..... ::
... p:
. .. .�o
:: ::
.. ..
pp Compact this soil
: ,.
.. ..
. ,; -" per specifications
.. ..
.. ...
• s yt1 5 -
Be careful not to damage the rod. If
you do nick the coating, cover the
damaged area with vinyl tape
Use concrete(allow proper set-up
time)or crushed rock or gravel.
a D Compact fill per specifications
e
o �
0
Be sure to fill the void
Install the anchor disc - under the anchor plate
at the proper depth and as much a possible to
position avoid future weakening
of the compaction above
the anchor
Side View 21"min for 20"Disc
25"min for 24"Disc
Thoroughly Backfill and Compact Soil
Disc and Crossplate Anchors "Wpm RR.

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-09-01
Rock Anchors
General See the instructions on the grout bag for more
information.
This section covers methods available for
anchoring when rock is encountered,along with
installation guidelines.For more information, Expanding Rock Anchors
see the Materials Manual.
These anchors are used where the rock is solid
enough to withstand the wedging action of the
Grouted Anchor Rods expanding mechanism.The rod that comes with
this anchor is galvanized steel, so in areas where
This approach finds application where soils are a deep overburden of corrosive soil is above the
corrosive, or where the rock exists in layers rock layer it will probably be better to use the
(stratified rock). The copper bonded rod used grouted rod described previously with a guy
will help in reducing corrosion, and the concrete insulator.
grout will help in spreading the forces over the
rock layers. Assemblies. Two sizes of the expanding type
rock anchor are provided in various lengths as
Assemblies. Three assemblies, as shown listed in the following table.
below, are provided to match various
applications on the distribution system. The CU Code* Galy. Rod Size Cat. ID
most common assembly has been assigned a DANRK 3/4"x 30" 5010
compatible unit code as shown below. — 3/4"x 53" 5011
3/4"x 96" 5012
DANRK1 1"x 53" 5013
1"x 96" 5014
6-12 inches recommended
* 1 bag of non-shrink grout—Cat. ID 5381—is included
in each CU code.
Soil \\ The 3/4" size rod is suitable for use with 3/8"
EHS guy strand.The 1"rod is used with 1/2"
1 7/8"dia.hole for 5/8"Solid Ro &3/4"rods EHS guy strand.
or 2-3/8"dia.hole for 1"
Layers rods
2'for 5/8"rods
3'for 3/4", 1"rods Do not remove
the nut supplied
'Y with the rod.
Carefully install non-shrink grout
(Cat. ID 5381)as directed by the
manufacturer's specifications.
Grouted Rod Rock Anchors
E'er IDAHO
" pp�n►ER Rock Anchors

06-09-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Depth of Rods
Closed 2' for 3/4"rods and 3'for 1"rods. If the rock
seems too soft,then grout should also be
applied. If a boulder is used,the mass must be
Bar adequate to equal the ultimate strength of the
associated guy wire as shown in the following
Expanded table:
Expanding Rock Anchor Assemblies Guy Size Boulder Size Rod Size
3/8" EHS 103 cu ft 3/4"
1/2" EHS 180 cu ft 1"
^ti
6�
Soil
Rock Layer
or Boulder
Rock Penetration: 7
2'Min.for 3/4"Rod
Min for 1"Rod
1-7/8"Dia.Hole for 3/4"Rod Y
2-3/8"Dia.Hole for 1"Rod
Installation of Expanding Rock Anchors
Installation Guidelines
Keep minimum 5' separation to other anchor
rods. For maximum strength,the hole should be
drilled along the alignment of the guy or the
resultant force as shown above. If this is not
possible,however,the hole may be drilled
vertically and the rod may be bent to the proper
alignment after the anchor has been expanded.
However,this may weaken the rod and damage
the zinc coating, allowing corrosion to occur.
Vinyl tape should be applied at the bend, and the
rod should be grouted.
Rock Anchors Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-10-01
Power-Installed Screw Anchors
General Due to the advantages over the manually
installed plate and disk anchors,the screw
This section includes a description of the anchoring system is the preferred choice for
individual components and installation most applications.The retention of manually
guidelines for the screw anchoring system installed anchors are necessary as an alternative.
presently used on the Idaho Power distribution Locations inaccessible for trucks,proximity of
system. other utilities, or rocky soils may dictate that a
manually installed anchor be used. Only
For additional information on screw anchor galvanized rods are available for use with screw
installation tools, see page 108-11-01 in the anchors. These must always be isolated from the
Tools Manual. copper grounding system by the use of guy
strain insulators. In some areas, corrosive soils
may require the protected rods available for use
Description with the manually installed anchors.
Power-installed screw anchors use the torque Screw Anchor Assemblies
available from digging equipment to turn the
anchor into the ground by an advancing screw Screw anchors provide the preferred method for
action.There are several advantages to this installing anchor guys in areas where trucks with
approach over the manually installed plate or diggers have access and the ground does not
disk anchors. Probably the biggest advantage is consist of lava or large rocks.
the labor savings due to elimination of the hand Three helix sizes are provided in an attempt to
digging and backfilling necessary with manually match the various soil conditions across the
installed anchors.Also, site cleanup,landscaping system: 6" for rocky soils, 10" for most normal
replacement,and adverse public reaction are soils, and 14" for soft soils.
minimized in urban areas.
There are some slight variations in design
The screw anchor system provides multiple among the three sizes of approved anchors.
sections of rod of various lengths along with a
torque indicator, allowing the anchor to be DANS6 DANS10 or DANS14
installed to the depth necessary to achieve the
desired strength in a variety of soil classes.A I
variety of helix sizes are available. If the wrong
one was chosen or if rocks are encountered,the
anchor may be backed out and moved over a few Power Point
feet, or the proper helix applied to obtain the \�
desired strength. Chance Tough One
and Dixie"DT"Anchors Chance Square One with
(6", 10",or 14") separate Power Point
attached to the end.
(6-inch only)
E'er IDiAHO
" ppwER Power-Installed Screw Anchors

06-10-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Rod Assemblies Square-Shaft Screw Anchor
A 1" diameter by 7'long galvanized rod is used A square-shaft screw anchoring system,
with all three of these helix sizes in an attempt to illustrated below, is used in transmission
reduce stock items and to minimize the strength construction. That system complements the
reduction effects of corrosion by oversizing the system used on distribution, and may be
rod. employed for distribution construction where
needed. Extra depth in unstable soils can be
The installation system allows for the addition of obtained by the use of multiple extension
up to 7 additional feet of rod length through the sections. For a description of the square-shaft
addition of one or two 3-1/2-foot extension rods. anchor, see Section 4—Guys&Anchors in the
The extension rods are furnished preassembled Transmission Manual.
with a coupling.The various rod assemblies are
illustrated below. •
IIIIII •
(5022)
Triple
Eyenu
(5021)3-1/2
3-1/2 Rod
with Coupling 1
O
Extension Guy Adapter
Lead Section
(5020) (5024) (5023)
1"x 7' Anchor Rod Power
Anchor Rod Coupling Adapt( Square-Shaft Screw Anchors
Screw Anchor Rod Assemblies
arMIDAW
Power-Installed Screw Anchors WWMRa
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-10-03
Installation Guidelines The pressure shown on the gage for the
hydraulic system of the truck is also proportional
A multi-step procedure follows which includes to the number of shear pins and, in turn,to the
the necessary strength calculations,tool holding strength of the anchor. It may be helpful
requirements,tool assembly, and material to record pressures corresponding to numbers of
assembly along with guidelines for the actual shear pins for your truck. This can save a lot of
anchor installation. Note that this is step 3 of the pins.
guy installation procedure on page 06-07-05.
Example: Let's suppose that a 3/8"EHS guy
A. Calculate Required Strength will attach to a 10"screw anchor.CATV may attach
also. Using the conservative method,how many
From one to three guys(including future pins will we have to shear?From page 06-06-01,
communications guys)may be attached to the the strength requirement is:
anchor.The total required strength of the anchor
is defined as the sum of the required strengths of 15,400 lbs(3/8"EHS)= 15,400 lbs
the guys which attach to it.A simple
conservative method of determining anchor Assuming CATV will use 1/4"EHS (6650 lbs),
holding power would be to simply add the total= 15,400+6650=22,0501bs
ultimate strengths of the guys. The required
strength corresponds to the applied number of From the table below, we have to shear 7
shear pins in the Chance torque indicator pins to get 25,000 lbs strength. If we add
according to the table below. any extension rods, then we will have to
shear 8 pins
Number of Shear Pins vs Screw Anchor Holding Power
Number of pins Torque Screw Anchor Holding Power(lbs)
sheared (note 2) (ft-lbs) DANS6 DANS10 DANS14
3 1,500 - 12,000 15,000
4 2,000 - 15,000 18,000
5 2,500 - 18,000 21,000
6 3,000 17,000 21,000 24,000
7 3,500 21,000 25,000 27,000
8 4,000 23,000 27,000 30,000
9 4,500 26,000 31,000 33,000
10 5,000 30,000 34,000 36,000
11 5,500 33,000 36,000 note 1
Note 1 The 1"galvanized rod is rated at 36,000 lbs ultimate.
Note 2 Add a maximum of one additional shear pin to this requirement if extension rods are used. For example, if
27,000 lbs holding strength is required and either one 7'or two 3-1/2'extension rods are used,you will
need to shear 9 pins(8 pins+1).
A'Q IDiAHO
EMPOWER. Power-Installed Screw Anchors

06-10-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
B. Tools Required
1. A Kelly bar adapter is used to connect a
Kelly bar to the torque indicator. Match the Extension
correct adapter to the particular Kelly bar on Assembly
your truck.Note the new Chance retaining
pin which replaces the bolt&nut. o o
0 0
2. A torque indicator is required to indicate Kelly Bar Ada
when the anchor has reached firm soil. The &Retaining P
torque indicator uses shear pins rated
500 ft-lbs each(Cat. ID 7877). Because of o 0
the variety of soil conditions in the IPCo
service area,the torque indicator should be jj
used on all screw anchor installations.
3. A 3-position locking dog assembly is used to
hold the drive wrench and anchor rod. The Torque Indicate
outer position allows the drive wrench to be
inserted or removed,the middle position o
captures the drive wrench only, and the inner
position captures the anchor rod.
4. A 7'drive wrench drives the anchor helix 0
into the ground by applying the torque Drive End
directly to the helix hub,while protecting Assembly Locking Dog i
the anchor rod.
Tools Required
5. An extension will be required for greater
depth.
OFMIDAW
Power-Installed Screw Anchors WWMRa
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-10-05
C. Set Up The Tools 4. Open the dogs to the outer position, slip the
drive wrench into place,and lock the dogs
1. Assemble the components as shown. into the inside position.
Carefully check the condition of the bolts
and retaining pin. Replace if necessary,but
ONLY with an identical grade and length Kelly Bar
bolt.
Kelly Bar Adapter
2. Check torque indicator operation by —Retaining Pin
removing all pins and seeing if the upper Shear
and lower plates can turn independently. Pin
Holes for Shear Pins
3. Align indexing marks on the upper and o 0 0 0 0 Torque Indicator
lower plates of the torque indicator and Capped Holes
insert 14 pins(7,000 ft-lb).This is a bit less
than the torque capability(8000 ft-lbs) of Indexing Marks
the digger motors IPCo uses. Equally space
pins around the torque indicator,using holes
with good shear faces. Cap empty or worn
holes with plastic inserts.These can
preserve unused holes for later use,thereby —Locking Dog Assembly
extending the life of the tool. Drive wrench
Tool Setup
E'er IDiAHO
"EMppwER. Power-Installed Screw Anchors

06-10-06 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
D. Connect the Anchor and Rod Assembly E. Install the Anchor
1. Thread the 1" galvanized rod onto the screw 1. Keep a minimum 5' separation from other
anchor. [In the case of the Chance 6" anchor rods. Start the helix vertically into
"Square-One"anchor, substitute the the ground.After it gets a bite,tilt to the
following step. Insert the 7'rod section proper alignment. Keep the anchor assembly
through the Chance helix,make sure that the in line with the boom, if possible. If not,
leading edge will be down as illustrated, and then you will have to rotate the turret as the
thread on the power point adapter.] anchor goes into the ground(see step 3 on
the next page).
2. Insert the anchor/rod assembly into the drive
wrench.Make sure it is fully inserted and
captured with the locking dogs snapped all
the way in. Don't let the assembly fall out Caution:Rotate turret as
and hit you! Don't stand directly der it! anchor descends or the
y y under turret gear may break.
Drive
Wrench
Drive Wrench
1"Galy. t"Galy.Rod O
Rod Chance 6Square-One
6"Screw Anchor
• Leadin Edge
IPower Point
Chance"Tough-One"
or Dixie"D7 Anchor ► Caution:Keep junction
loose and straight!Keep
Connect Anchor and Rod Assembly nuts and bolts tight!
® Install clockwise
Install the Anchor
Power-Installed Screw Anchors '� Ra
A.IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-10-07
2. While turning, apply enough downward
force to keep the anchor from churning the
soil,but not too much or you may bend or
break the helix. For every revolution,the
anchor should go down the flight distance
(that is,the gap opening) of the helix.When _
working in line with the boom off the side of
the truck,the outrigger can be used as an
indicator of downward force and progress as
follows: Fully retract the outrigger on the
opposite side of the truck. Position the
outrigger on the anchor side of the truck
lightly and flush with the ground.With the '
boom apply downward force to the anchor,
and lift the outrigger 3" to 4".As the anchor 1
screws into the ground,keep the outrigger
floating between ground level and 4"up.
Note that this technique cannot be used Beware of Stored Energy
when the anchor is being installed to the side
of the boom, as in the illustration. 5. Drive the anchor into the ground until:
3. When working to the side of the boom,the a. The pins shear, or the hydraulic pressure
anchor exerts horizontal force on the boom gage or engine sound indicate that pins
as it descends.This force acting through are about to break before adequate depth
leverage of the boom length could easily is reached. The eye should be no more
break the turret gear. Carefully rotate the than 12" out of the ground. If there are
turret as the anchor turns in addition to rocks or other obstructions,then move,
controlling the other boom motions. or use a smaller helix, or a rock anchor.
4. Halt the installation operation occasionally
and check the alignment of the kelly bar and
drive wrench;this juncture should always be
loose, since binding can quickly cause major
equipment damage. Don't rush this
operation.
12"
Stopping for the Shear Test
E'er IDiAHO
RMIRMER. Power-Installed Screw Anchors

06-10-08 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
b. Ten inches of rod is left out of the 6. After the anchor has reached firm ground
ground,or 4" if you know you have the and the end of the eye will be 6"to 12" out
required strength from watching the of the ground,release the anchor rod from
hydraulic pressure gage. If you use the the locking assembly and withdraw the
shear pins to determine strength,remove wrench and wrench extensions. To do this,
extra pins,leaving the required number pull the wrench straight off the anchor while
calculated in step A. Resume turning. If rotating slightly back and forth until it is free
pins shear while not encountering an of the helix hub.Then,rotate the wrench
obstruction,then you may proceed to clockwise until fully withdrawn. Be careful
step 6. Otherwise,make a decision not to let the wrench fall back in the hole
based on knowledge of soil conditions after taking the extensions off. Getting it out
(drilling the pole hole first can give you again can be very difficult.
some) and how easy the anchor was
advancing,whether to add one 3-1/2' 7. Attach the strand eyenut, and tamp the soil
rod,along with a 3-1/2'wrench extension around the rod to keep out water.
or;two 3-1/2'rod extensions or a Trod
along with a T wrench extension.Or,you
might decide to back a smaller anchor
helix out and use a bigger one. In most
cases,reload with 14 pins,add your
best-guess-size extension, and continue.
In general,the anchor should not be o
installed over 14'deep due to difficulty °5
in removing the wrench and extensions.
Note that square-shaft anchors are
available for use in marshy areas. 6"-1 22" /
y
Completion of Installation
MrMIDAM
Power-Installed Screw Anchors WWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

r� � dcu �. � A � a� � a� a� d � Cy
A O �+ .p°` U� � R Q log,A f�D n N A� c0 N A A i--i Aa �. CD CCD
i•.t CD .� 'C7 'C F.,. O C '�' �' cn CD CD O rr A� C ��•• C-D
�.Uq A N A! cD C A t — CD
CD CD A '� A� i-•t '� 'r' O A� R A i..t CD A CD
a
pff ID
•+ .+
".S O• A A A A ID n
CD o8s
C 1 �' v°�o v°�a �. a. �� voCD o cdD cA', �• p CD ? o o °
t CD CD r r+ AC
N s Q.
n ° V D �VAQ C"rD y. O
CDs �. O O
w
ID Z
CD CD
ID N A `h •� A
p� Q ID �. O (D 12
A u cAD gr
¢ Q- CD CD CD � n O ¢ p CD (. O
.3 CIQ O O
•A* 'O-' c� O cD O — O `C O A
p A� ` CD Cl A d �� CD CD CD
Er
CD
�3 p p n �'• Q� A 0 <
CD
nCD
0 a
t A -- O
CD � �- o0' 0
CD
� OA � � �� W �/ W Y� WIG�'�/ W IG W W ��W �\ � � �•�� O �n �• '�
O CD
UQ
A. CAD CD 0 COi' ���� \� \��� \� p O tD O A
�,
v
CtlV
: C o CDD -1 CD m A1= p d CD
n �. UQ
n N' O n N O AA� CD
p CD
p0 O 0_ o 0 o
-t ° Q' m CD CL
Nvm .r d
CD
Off . O O .r CC, - CD O
O, CD p
O 'C cn n
CD CD
N CD
O C p CD CD' O
A 'A s

06-1 1-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Dissimilar Metals.As previously discussed,the Galvanized Steel Anchor Rod+ Copper Pole
connection of two different metals can create a Ground.
galvanic couple in the presence of an electrolyte,
which is usually damp soil. The methods used to When a galvanized steel anchor rod is connected
eliminate or minimize galvanic corrosion and through the guy strand to the copper pole
examples of galvanic couples are provided in the grounds, corrosion of the galvanized rod occurs
following examples. at about 15"below the surface of the ground. To
stop the effects of this galvanic couple, IPCo
To stop the current practice is to insert a guy strain insulator when
flow,apply a guy using galvanized anchor rods, as depicted in the
strain insulator. g g p
illustration on the left.
1 Galvanized Steel Anchor Rod+Bare Steel or
Iron Anchor.
\. .
When a galvanized steel anchor rod is connected
to a bare steel cross plate or screw anchor helix,
corrosion occurs on the anchor rod at the anchor
Copper A- as depicted below. Expanding rock anchors form
Group � a similar couple, a galvanized steel rod in
(cathod )= A�
Galvanized rod combination with an iron anchor, as depicted. In
(anode)corrodes an attempt to minimize the resulting corrosion,
IPCo oversizes the galvanized rod.A minimum
Galvanized Steel Anchor Rod + size of 1" diameter is used for screw anchors. In
Copper Pole Ground view of the assumed dry conditions and
subsequent weaker electrolyte, IPCo oversizes
galvanized rods used with rock anchors only to
3/4"minimum diameter.
Screw Anchor Rock Anchor
3/4, 1"Rods
1" Rod Galvanized Rod
(anode)corrodes
Steel Helix at contact points Iron wedge
(painted) (painted)
•
Corrosion at contact
P— points should be
minimal due to large mass
Galvanized Steel Rod + Bare Steel or Iron Anchor
Anchor Corrosion WWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-11-03
Crossplate Anchor
Copper-bonded Rod Nut retainer.
(Don't scratch coating)
Use same brand nut
and rod for tight fit.
2 or 3 layers of tape Insulate from the
(more if hole will allow)-4 nut retainer using
1-1/2" vinyl electrical tape.
(approx.) Phenolic washer(new
version needs no trimming)
Copper Bonded Steel Rod + Bare Steel Anchor
Copper Bonded Steel Anchor Rod+Bare Differential Aeration.
Steel Anchor.
When an anchor rod passes through soil areas
When a copper bonded steel anchor rod is containing different amounts of air,an oxygen
connected to a bare steel anchor plate,the plate concentration cell is formed in which the metal
corrodes where it contacts the copper bonded in the well-aerated area is less active chemically
rod. IPCo attempts to isolate this couple by than the oxygen deprived metal surface.
applying plastic tape between the rod and the Generally,this tends to concentrate corrosion on
anchor plate, along with a phenolic washer the more deeply buried portion of the structure.
between the nut and the anchor plate, and plastic An example of an oxygen concentration cell
tape between the nut and nut retainer as depicted condition is where the anchor rods are buried in
above. different soil strata, such as sand and clay, as
shown below.
Galvanized Guy Strand+Copper Bonded
Anchor Rod Eye, or Galvanized Eye+ jhde
Galvanized Steel Rod
Copper Bonded Anchor Rod.The corrosion due to these couples is minimized Soil Type 1
by leaving them in air as depicted in the figure —► ��below.Air is usually a poor electrolyte ascompared to soil. Soil Type 2 �R
or Water Table
Galvanized Steel
Guy Grip(anode) Anode Area
(corrodes)
Copper Bonded Galvanic Corrosion Through Differential Aeration
Rod(cathode)
6"-12" The section of the rod in the clay is usually
�V \V deprived of oxygen while the section in the
sand has an excess. The oxygen
concentration cell thus causes corrosion of
Dissimilar Metals in Air that portion of the metal rod in the oxygen
deprived soil. Another example of this
situation is where the anchor rod penetrates
below the surface of the water table. The
rising and falling water level effectively
"pumps" air into the upper soil while the
section of the rod under water is deprived of
oxygen.
E''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Anchor Corrosion

06-1 1-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
The corrosion that results often causes a Electrolysis
gradual reduction of the rod diameter, called
"pencilling". Failure occurs near the upper- Corrosion of buried metals is accelerated by
most part of the rod that is continuously stray DC current in the soil. In the Idaho Power
under water. service area, do current is mainly related to
cathodic protection installations for buried
Corrosion of the anchor rod due to differential pipelines and steel transmission towers.No
aeration has been reduced by using a copper- metallic coating will stop corrosion due to
bonded anchor rod for manually installed electrolysis.When anchoring within 1/2 mile of
anchors. The corrosion of copper generally a cathodic protection anode bed or within 1/8
proceeds at a slower rate than that of a mile of a major natural gas or fuel transmission
galvanized steel rod under the same conditions. pipeline, a guy strain insulator may be required
The copper coating thus protects the steel rod. It to isolate the anchor from the multi-grounded
is extremely important that the copper layer over system neutral. Contact Methods&Materials for
the rod and threads be unbroken since exposure more information.
of the bare steel to the soil would cause rapid
corrosion with possible failure of the rod.An
added benefit of the copper-bonded rod is that it Highly Corrosive Soils
eliminates the need for a strain insulator in the
down guy, except in areas where stray do Some soils may be highly corrosive due to
currents exist(see Electrolysis below). their acidity or alkalinity, water content,
soluble salts, low resistivity, or organic
Similar corrosion protection of the galvanized material content. Metallic coatings cannot
rods used with screw anchors is achieved by protect anchor rods in these areas. Also,
using rods that are purposely oversized for the layers of soils or a high water table may
application. In some areas,where the potential produce a severe degree of the differential
for particularly strong oxygen concentration
cells exists,these rods may have a relatively aeration effect noted previously. In areas
short service life. Should this situation be where extreme anchor corrosion is a known
encountered in the field, contact the T&D fact, in feedlots, in wet areas, and in soils
Department for replacement recommendations. where a high alkaline or salt content is
evident by the light color visible on the
surface or in the subsoils, it may be
advisable to use the special corrosion
protected system described on page
06-08-02.
OrMIDAM
Anchor Corrosion WWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-12-01
Alternatives to Guying and Anchoring
General
Many times,right-of-way for a guy and anchor When a pole supports an unbalanced load
installation cannot be practicably obtained. without guying,a large moment can be applied
Often, a downguy installation is also impractical to the soil around the pole. If the soil does not
because it would interfere with public activity. If have adequate strength to handle this,then the
another location for the structure cannot be pole will turn in the direction of the load,
found,then other alternatives,usually involving displacing the mechanically weak soil. This also
a design or modification of the structure itself, makes for an unsightly installation.The crew
must be examined. This section covers the should note that proper pole setting depth varies
common alternatives to the familiar downguy with the type of soil. See the table on page
and anchor installation. If the shown options are 05-01-04. Proper backfill and tamping must be
not possible,check with the Methods& emphasized. See page 05-01-05. For unstable
Materials Department. soils,or where large transverse loads are held by
an unguyed or otherwise unsupported pole,pole
keying may be necessary.
Non-guyed Poles
A pole of a given class will withstand a certain
amount of strain with no other support(such as
anchoringand in needed. Even though the Unsightly bending
guying) g must be considered
pole will support the load without breaking, for long term loading.
unsightly bending may occur with the passing of
time. The side force exerted on the pole under Pole strength must be
design and long term loading conditions may be considered for worst
case ice and wind
calculated and the required pole class may be loading.
determined. Refer to page 11-07-01 for
appropriate pole class adders. Contact
Methods and Materials for assistance.The Soil strength must be
construction crew should note that when the pole examined. Extra
P depth or a key may
supports a substantial load acting alone,the pole be needed. See"Pole
should be raked an amount based on the Keys" below.
magnitude of unbalanced load. See page 05-01-
06 for pole rake values. A Non-guyed Pole
How much will it take?
E''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Alternatives to Guying and Anchoring

06-12-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Pole Keys
Soil around a properly tamped pole may be equipment may also exceed the mechanical
inadequate to support the forces acting through bearing capacity of some soils,and the pole may
the long moment arm of the pole length.Where sink into the ground.To prevent this,the
this is the case,pole keying is often used.These techniques are shown in the concrete cribbing
techniques, as illustrated below, are designed to and special pole foundations below. Some soils
increase the size of the surfaces which bear with high water content may not be able to
against the mechanically weak soil,transferring support even the pole and conductor weight.The
the load to a greater volume of material.Note technique in the special pole foundation and the
that large vertical loads, such as produced by bog shoes illustration is provided for this
down guys with short lead lengths or heavy situation.
LOAD LOAD
Rake pole Berm to drain
LOAD I �) 1 III water away
orreach 6" f24
18 firm soil O I 5'Treated Log
° (Cat. ID4991). 24" I
Force into place Thoroughly
for snug fit. I + tamp all back-
DPKEY fill materials
� I II
Combination Key Rock Key Rock Cribbing
LOAD
LOAD LOAD Large quantity
DPCP Soft soil or of rock&dirt.
marshland Tamp thoroughly
12" I I I 6 �.I
4
Brace the pole and 1 d-- 1 —
allow concrete
(Cat. ID 18491)to set. 14
Sand and gravel
�—for drainage. 24"
12" 5'treated logs
yy and 5/8"hardware
�— 6"Concrete Pad 6"Concrete Pad I i
(Cat. ID 4972) (Cat. ID 4972)
Concrete Cribbing Special Pole Foundation Bog Shoes
orMIDAM
Alternatives to Guying and Anchoring WWMRa
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 06-12-03
Push Braces
Occasionally, lack of right-of-way,potential use in urban areas should be limited. Other types
interference with public activity, or clearance of guying should always be considered(see Guy
problems make it difficult or impossible to Types, section 06-07). However,it is recognized
install a guy and anchor. Sometimes,though, that necessity dictates in some circumstances.
there is room for a push brace on the other side Therefore,the assembly pictured is provided.
of the pole, as depicted below.This doesn't For any other engineering information, see
make for a particularly beautiful structure and Section 11.
Maintain C=7.3"
Min.for 34.5 kV 3/4"hardware
included.
of
C. ADAS
::]jo
O
Maintain 2" See
hardware Detail A
separation
or bond.
Detail A
Push Brace Connector
(Cat.ID 5329)
/ CU Code DPB includes push brace
connector along with 3/4"hardware
and 50'class 3 pole.
Berm and tamp thoroughly
to keep out water.
Rock keying will add
stability in weak soils.
Thoroughly tamp all
back?ll materials.
Pole Setting Depths may vary.
7'-0"Tangent
7'-6"Deadend and Angles
Concrete pad for weak
soils(Cat.ID 4972)
Push Brace Assembly
E'er IDiAHO
ENPMER. Alternatives to Guying and Anchoring

Overhead Revised 04/21 07-00-01
Table of Contents
07- Crossarms, Pins, & Brackets
07-01-01 Crossarm Selection 07-03-01 Crossarm Assemblies
Application T-8" Wood-DASW8
Arm Positions 10'Wood-DAS 10
Gains 07-03-02 T-8" Apitong-DAA3D
07-01-02 Tangent Crossarm Selection 8'Apitong Medium-DADE8M
Guide-Maximum Spans 8'Apitong Heady-DADE8H
Based Upon Horizontal 07-03-03 10'Apitong Medium-DADE10M
Conductor Spacing and 10'Apitong Heady-DADE10H
Crossarm Strength 07-03-04 10' Steel-DADE10S
Deadend Configuration(Deadend 48" Fiberglass-DAF
Arm,Attachments and Down 10'Wood Single or Double Alley
Guy) Grade B and C -DAAS 10,DAAD 10
Construction 07-03-05 Anti-Split Bolt Assemblies
07-01-03 Deadend Configuration(Deadend DASB6,DASB8,DASB10,
Arm,Attachments and Down DASB 12,DASB 14
Guy)
07-04-01 Braces
07-02-01 Crossarm Dimensions 26" Wood Braces
T-8" Crossarm 42" Wood Braces
10'Medium Crossarm 07-04-02 72" Wood Braces
11'Medium Crossarm 6'-6" X-Brace
07-02-02 T-8" Apitong Equipment
Crossarm 07-05-01 Insulator Pins & Studs
10'Apitong Equipment Crossarm Long Shank Steel Pins
8'Deadend Fiberglass Crossarm Short Shank Steel Pins
07-02-03 10'Deadend.Fiberglass Crossarm Pin-Hole Adapters
10'Extra Heavy Deadend.Apitong Thimble Adapters
Crossarm 07-05-02 Pole-Top Pin
07-02-04 8'Medium Deadend.Apitong Steel Angle Pin
Crossarm Line Post Insulator Studs
8'Heavy Deadend.Apitong
Crossarm 07-06-01 Primary Brackets
07-02-05 10'Medium Deadend Apitong 18" Fiberglass BK-18 Bracket
Crossarm Angle Mounting Base
10'Heavy Deadend Apitong 07-06-02 Pole Top Bracket
Crossarm Neutral Brackets
07-02-06 10'Deadend Steel Crossarm 07-06-03 NEMA Bracket
8'Tangent Fiberglass Crossarm— Arrester Bracket for
Wildfire Mitigation Autotransformers
07-02-07 10'Tangent Fiberglass Crossarm—
Wildfire Mitigation 07-07-01 Washers,Locknuts,& Bonding
07-02-08 11'Tangent Fiberglass Crossarm— Clips
Wildfire Mitigation Square Washers
48" Fiberglass Crossarm— Double Coil Washers
Maintenance Use 07-07-02 MF Locknuts
Bonding Clips
`p" AHO
pR. Table of Contents
­­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 03/20 07-01-01
Crossarm Selection
Application In lines that run uphill, crossarms should be
placed on the upper side of the pole.
Wood crossarms for tangent application and
fiberglass DE crossarms application are the
company-preferred type of construction for
single circuit, double circuit configurations and
where distribution is beneath transmission
circuits.
Arm Positions Single crossarms located on curves should be
On a pole carrying two or more circuits, placed on the side of the pole that faces the
crossarms that support circuits of similar midpoint of the curve. Whenever possible, it is
alignment should be located on the same side of better construction to run lines straight and then
that pole. make a large angled turn than to make several
small angled turns.
Single crossarms should preferably be placed on
the face of the pole and poles should generally
be set alternately face-to-face and back-to-back.
In case of road crossings, obstacles, and long
spans, crossarms should be placed on the side of
the pole opposite such special situations.
Gains
Poles 50'and shorter are gained from the plant
supplier. Use a cut gain when mounting all
crossarms, except those provided with metal
mounting brackets. The use of plastic gains has
been discontinued. In a rare case double
crossarm installations, cut only one gain for that
arm which is compressed against the pole by the
deadend forces.
IQAM
MONPOiWER. Crossarm Selection
M­­.m 'Y

07-01-02 Revised 03/20 Overhead
Tangent Crossarm Selection Guide— Maximum Spans Based Upon Horizontal
Conductor Spacing and Crossarm Strength
2-Conductor Loading 3-or 4-Conductor Loading
Maximum Allowable Span feet at 34.5 kV 12.5 kV inparentheses)
Ruling DAF!!! DASW8 DAS10 DAS10
Span Fiberglass 7'8"Arm 10'Medium 10'Medium
Conductor Used 48"Separation 42"Separation 56"Separation 30"Separation
#4 ACSR 350' 655 (750) 575 (665) 770 (865) 430 (505)
2/0 ACSR 350' 880 (1035) 740 (895) 1070 (1225) 455 (610)
336 AAC 300' 600 (675)* Do not 730 (830)* 305 (415)
795 AAC 300' 355* (355)* USe 455 (455)* 300 (405)
Caution:These maximum spans arefor34.5-kV(12.5-kV in parentheses)lines at the indicated conductor spacing.Greaterspans
maybe possible through the use of phase spacers,contact Engineering for assistance.You must also considerground clearance
and vertical spacing between phase and neutral conductors.See Section 11-02forfurtherguidance.
Span values exceeding 120%of the ruling span should be deadended in the long span.Seepages 07-01-04 and-05 for
maximum spans due to spacing on deadend arms.
!!! DAF FG Arms are for maintenance use only.
* Maximum span limited by the rated strength of the arm.
Deadend Configuration (Deadend Arm, Attachments and Down Guy)
i
2-Conductor Loading
Grade B and Grade C Construction
Design Max.Allow. Pole Attachments and Down Guy Neutral Attachments
Tension Span Deadend 40°minimum 30°minimum 30°minimum
Conductor (lbs) 34.5kV(12.5) Arm angle to pole angle to pole to pole
#4 ACSR 1000 450 (520) DFDE8 DDG3C DDG3 None
2/0 ACSR 1850 685 (830) DFDE8 DDG3C DDG2 DDG3C
336 AAC 2233 545 (650) DFDE8 DDG2 DDG2 DGEP, DLS1 or
DGSI, DDG5, DDG3C
795 AAC 4073 525 (635) DFDE10 (2) DDG2 NO DGEP, DLS1 or
DGSI, DDG5, DDG3C
NOTE. Crossarm assemblies are suitable fordesignated conductor design tensions and a maximum weight span of 420'.For higher
weight spans contact Methods and Materials.
You must also considerground clearance and vertical spacing between phase and neutral conductors.See Section 11-02for
further guidance.
Crossarm Selection W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 12/19 07-01-03
Deadend Configuration (Deadend Arm, Attachments and Down Guy)
4-Conductor Loading
Design Max.Allow. Pole Attachments and Down Guy
Tension Span Deadend 40°minimum 30°minimum
Conductor (lbs) 34.5kV(12.5) Arm angle to pole angle to pole
Grade B Construction
#4 ACSR 1000 360 (425) DFDE10 DDG3C DDG3
2/0 ACSR 1850 495 (635) DFDE10 DDG2 (2) DDG3
336 AAC 2233 370 (480) DFDE10 DDG2 (2) DDG2
795 AAC 4073 370 (480) DADE10S (2) DPB2 S, M or L (2) DPB2 S, M or L
(2) DDG2 (2) DDG2
Grade C Construction
#4 ACSR 1000 360 (425) DFDE10 DDG3C DDG3C
2/0 ACSR 1850 495 (635) DFDE10 DDG3C DDG2'
336 AAC 2233 370 (480) DFDE10 DDG2 (2) DDG2
795 AAC 4073 370 (480) DFDE10 (2) DDG2 NO
NOTE. Crossarm assemblies are suitable fordesignated conductordesign tensions and a maximum weight span of420'.Forhigher
weight spans contact Methods and Materials.
You must also considerground clearance and vertical spacing between phase and neutral conductors.See Section 11-02for
furtherguidance.
rQ-IORM
R Crossarm Selection

Overhead Revised 04/21 07-02-01
Crossarm Dimensions
7'-8" Crossarm 11/16"Pin Hole(4)
Cat. ID 4945 11/16"Anti-Split or"DA"Bolt Hole(2)
CU Code: DASW8 7/16"Wood Brace(26")Hole(2)— 450
11/16"Pole Bolt Hole(1) hamfe�
o oI . o 4-1/4-1/4"4
4" 27" _ 15" _I-191, 6" � 3-1/4"— I
"'Tlll-8"
10' Medium Crossarm
Cat. ID 4947
CU Code: DAS10 DAD10
11/16"Pin Hole(4) 11/16"Anti-Split or"DA"Bolt Hole(4)
9/16"Wood(42")or Alley Arm Brace
Hole(2) 45°
Chamfer
13/16" Pole Bolt Hole(1)
° o ° 5-3/4"
:'
4" 30" ►� 26" ��21" 30" 6" — —I I
3-3/4"
10'-0"
11' Medium Crossarm-Rarely used, see Materials Manual 01-501-01.
Cat. ID 04949
CU Code: DAS11 Chamfer
34" Drilling&dimensions
5-3/4"
30" — are symmetrical.
9/16"D Holes are centered
4" on each face.
�1/16"D 11/16"D 4-3/4"
Top
11'0"
�°° O ° °
Front
'*-11/16"D �-11/16"D 13/16"D
6"
36"�
66"
��IQAHO
EQNPOiWER. Crossarm Dimensions
­­­

07-02-02 Revised 11/21 Overhead
7'-8" Apitong Equipment Crossarm
Cat. ID 35093
CU Code: DAMD
45" 21"for 8' 24"
24" 21"for 8' �� 33"for 10' 22-11/16"
33"for 10' lu
0 0 0 0 0 0 6-3/8"
Top View
92"or 116" -
9/16"Dia.2 Holes
�I 8-3/8"
11 11/16"Keyhole
®O 2-11/16"
9
11/16"Notch—%L�--A'
Front View
10' Apitong Equipment Crossarm
Cat. ID 45962
CU Code: DAA31310
8' Deadend Fiberglass Crossarm
Cat. ID 58463
CU Code: DFDE8
A*
B
C
0 0 0 0 0 4 5/8"
E 0 13/16"TYP.
III--- D
0 13/16"KEYHOLE
12 0 0 01013 5/8"
0 13/16"NOTCH 1 I
11 3/4"
NOTE: Use carbide bit(11/16" CID 59688 or 13/16" CID 59689)to drill or widen
hole; see photo on next page, 07-02-03. 14"
For 4-up construction, use CIDs 58522 and 57422 to train the ground wire on the o
FG arm.
DIM A(in) DIM B fin) DIM C(in) DIM D(in) DIM E(in) WGT.it
96" 90- 30" 86" 26" 73.38
Crossarm Dimensions MOP RR.

Overhead Revised 04/21 07-02-03
10' Deadend Fiberglass Crossarm
Cat. ID 58464
CU Code: DFDE10
A*
B
C
0 o O O 6"
� I 013/16"
E
D III
0 13/16'KEY HOLE
12" � 4"
10
0 13/16"NOTCH
13 25/32"
NOTE: Use carbide bit(11/16" CID 59688 or 13/16" CID 59689)to drill or widen x
hole, see photo below. For 4-up construction, use CIDs 58522 and 57422 to train 14
the ground wire on the FG arm.
0.940
Carbide bit used to drill or widen hole.
��IQAHO
�POiWER Crossarm Dimensions

07-02-04 Revised 11/21 Overhead
10' Extra Heavy Deadend Apitong Crossarm
Cat. ID 54905
CU Code: DADE10E11111)
� 42"
Iq 0 r'
8 34" _ 34"
o ail �
12" O O 5114'
C di
C 4 26 ® 26„
6 9116"
e
I—01"NOTCH -
0 0 5-1/2"
s 01"
43" + 43" 5"L
4 v8
86" 5 1/8'
1"HOLE 2-11/16"
0 o o o 10
o
0 o 0 0
1"NOTCH 1"DIA.
96"
12-1/2"
8' Heavy Deadend Apitong Crossarm-OBSOLETE
Cat. ID 4960
CU Code: DADE81-11
30" 15" 15" 30"
11/16"holes
Qp o 0 0 o Qo 5-1/2"
6-1/2"
41-1/2" 96„96 41-1/2"� 6" 0
6-1/2"
1"holes
1"hole
0 0 o 0 0
12" ® 4-1/4"
0 0 0 0
0
° � ° 6„
0
15/16"holes o � o 7"
1"notch
Crossarm Dimensions '`per R".

Overhead Revised 04/21 07-02-05
10' Medium Deadend Apitong Crossarm—OBSOLETE
Cat. ID 22314
CU Code: DADE10M
3"— 35" 42" 35" � 3° 11/16"PINHOLE
® ® e ® 5-1/2"
35" 17-1/2" 17-1/2"�� 35" 6-1/2"
52-1/2" 52-1/2"
105"
1"HOLE
12" 4-1/4"
14-1/4"
1"NOTCH
118" 1"DIA.�
12-1/2"
10' Heavy Deadend Apitong Crossarm—OBSOLETE
Cat. ID 4961
CU Code: DADE10H
8" 26" 25' 25" 26' 8"—
11/16"Holes
00 7-1/4"
°° °
4" 34" - 42" 34" —4"
118" °
6"
°
1"Hole 1"Holes
9"
0 ® 3-1/2"
O 0 O
0
6"
1"Holes o C 7"
1"Notch
�'�IQAHO
��POiWM Crossarm Dimensions

07-02-06 Revised 11/21 Overhead
10' Deadend Steel Crossarm
Cat. ID 39869
CU Code: DADE10S
11/16"Pin hole(4) Brace hole(2)
11-1/2"
® o ❑ o o
Top View
5" T-1" 1'-6" 1'-6" 3'-1" 5"
10'
3' 3'
A no
0 0 0 0
® o
29-3/8"
0
Front View
16"
Side View
8' Tangent Fiberglass Crossarm—For Wildfire Mitigation Only
Cat. ID 58881
CU Code: DAFT8
96"*
84"
30"
® ® ® 3 5/8"
0 11/16"
TYR X 4
Crossarm Dimensions '`per R".

Overhead Revised 04/21 07-02-07
80"
38"
011/16"
TYRX2
0 11/16"
KEYHOLE
12" 10„ 8„ ® o 0 4 5/8"
011/16"
011/16" NOTCH 07/16" 6 1/16"
TYP.X 2 TYP.X 2
14 1/2"
10' Tangent Fiberglass Crossarm—For Wildfire Mitigation Only
Cat. ID 58882
CU Code: DAFT10
120"
112"
52"
42" 3 5/8"
09/16"
TYP.X 2 011/16"
TYP.X 4
108"
48"
011/16"
KEYHOLE
12" 10" +' • • o o • � 4 5/8"
011/16"
011/16"' TYP.X 4
NOTCH 011/16"
TYRX2
6 1/16"
14 1/2"
NOTE: Use carbide bit(11/16" CID 59688 or 13/16" CID 59689)to drill or widen hole; see
photo on page 07-02-03.
For 4-up construction, use CIDs 58522 and 57422 to train the ground wire on the FG arm.
E'A IORM
POWER,: Crossarm Dimensions

07-02-08 Revised 11/21 Overhead
10'Tangent Alley Fiberglass Crossarm—For Wildfire Mitigation Only
Cat. ID 58914
CU Code: DAASF10
120-
117'-
57'
47'
09/16"J 011/16
TYP.X 2 TYP.X 4
y 108"
48"
I
• • • • fi 4 5/8"
011/16"
TYP.X 5
11'Tangent Fiberglass Crossarm—For Wildfire Mitigation Only
Cat. ID 58883
CU Code: DAFT11
132""
120"
72"
-t
® • 1 3 5/8"
09/16" 013/16"
TYP.X 2 TYP.X 2
Crossarm Dimensions '`per R".

Overhead Revised 04/21 07-02-09
126"
011/16"
011/16" TYR X 2
KEYHOLE
12" 10" 8" • 0 4 518"
011116"
011/16" NOTCH
TYR X 2
6 1/16"
16, 141/2"
NOTE: Use carbide bit(11/16" CID 59688 or 13/16"CID 59689)to drill or widen hole; see
photo on page 07-02-03.
For 4-up construction, use CIDs 58522 and 57422 to train the ground wire on the FG arm.
48" Fiberglass Crossarm—For Maintenance Use Only
Cat. ID 4962
CU Code: DAF
a O
5"Imn. 11/15'Hole
8",trek. O
1 11116"SIOt
Front Mew Side View
�
�'�IQAHO
POiWER� Crossarm Dimensions
m—w—P^

Overhead Reviewed 03/20 07-03-01
Crossarm Assemblies
DASW8
Crossarm Single 3-1/4" x 4-1/4" x T-8" with
Wood Braces
Cat. ID Description Qty
4945 XARM,T-8" 1
5149 BLT CRG 3/8X4-1/2" 2
5100 BLT GALV MCH 1/2X12" 1
5105 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X6" 2
5109 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X14" 1
5170 WSHR CRVD 3X3X1 1/16" 2
22146 WSHR DBL COIL 9/16" 1
22147 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16" 3
5188 WSHR SQ 2X2X9/16" 1
5189 WSHR SQ 2-1/4X11/16" 6
29659 BRC XARM WOOD 26' 1
5339 NUT MF 3/8" 2
5340 NUT MF 1/2" 1
5341 NUT MF 5/8" 3 Notes:
5279 BONDING CLIP F/5/8"SQ. NUT 2 -- Not to be used for full tension deadend.
--See Section 07-01 for suitable applications.
DAS 10
Crossarm Single 4" x 6" x 10'with Wood
Braces
Cat. ID Description Qty
4947 XARM,4"X6"X10'MED 1
5098 BLT GALVMCH 1/2X8" 2
5105 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X6" 2
5108 BLT GALV MCH 5/8X12" 1
5125 BLT GALV MCH 3/4X16" 1
5170 WSHRCRVD3X3X11/16" 2 ❑o� o
5172 WSHRCRVD4X4X13/16" 1
5177 WSHR TAP FLGD 3X3X.5" 2
5189 W SH R SQ 2-1/4X2-1/4X3/16" 4
22146 WSHR DBL COIL 9/16" 2
22147 WSHR DBL COIL 11/16" 1
22149 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16" 1
5188 WSHR SQ 2X2X9/16" 2 0
5193 WSHRSQ4X4X13/16" 1
5242 BRC XARM WOOD42" 1
5340 NUT MF 1/2" 2
5341 NUT MF 5/8" 2
5342 NUT MF 3/4" 1 Notes:
5350 NUT GALV PLAIN 5/8" 1 -- Not to be used for full tension deadend.
5279 BONDING CLIP F/5/8"SQ. NUT 2 -- See Section 07-01 for suitable applications.
EM�R. Crossarm Assemblies
----pP y

07-03-02 Revised 03/20 Overhead
DAA3D
Crossarm 7'-8" Apitong Equipment
Cat. ID Description Qty
35093 ARM 7'-8"APITONG 1
5108 BOLT MACH 5/8"X 12" 2
5170 WSHRCRVD3X3X1" 2
5341 NUT MF 5/8" 2 1.
22147 WSHR DBL COIL 2
28806 COND CU#6 BARE 20 ft
5700 CONN C-TAP CU#6 3
DAA3D 10
Crossarm 10'Apitong Equipment
Cat. ID Description Qty
45962 ARM 10'APITONG 1
5108 BOLT MACH 5/8"X 12" 2
5170 WSHRCRVD3X3X1" 2
5341 NUT MF 5/8" 2
22147 WSHR DBL COIL 2
28806 COND CU#6 BARE 20 ft
5700 CONN C-TAP CU#6 3
DFDE8
Crossarm 8' Deadend Fiberglass
Cat. ID Description Qty
58463 ARM,8'DE FBGL 1
5124 BLT GAL MCH 3/4X14" 2
5176 WSHRCRVD3X4X15/16" 2 0 0 0 1010 0
5342 NUT MF 3/4" 2
5345 OVAL EYE NUT 3/4" 1
4838 SHACKLE,ANCHOR 5/8" 1
22149 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16" 2
DFDE10
Crossarm 10' Deadend Fiberglass
Cat. ID Description Qty
58464 ARM, 10'DE FBGL 1
5126 BLT GAL MCH 3/4X18" 4
5176 WSHRCRVD3X4X15/16" 4
5342 NUT MF 3/4" 4
5345 OVAL EYE NUT 3/4" 1
4838 SHACKLE,ANCHOR 5/8" 1
22149 WSHR DBL COIL 13/16" 4
Crossarm Assemblies '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 03/20 07-03-03
DADE10S
Crossarm 10' Steel Deadend
Cat. ID Description Qty
39869* XARM, 10'HVY DE STEEL 1
5137 BOLT,MA, 7/8X14" 2
5109 BOLT,MA, 5/8X14" 1
5176 WSHRCRVD3X4X15/16" 2
5189 WSH R SQ 2 1/4X2-1/4X1 1/16" 1
5341 NUT IMF 5/8" 1 o 111110
5343 NUT IMF 7/8" 2
22150 WSHR DBL COIL 15/16" 2
* The 42" wood brace comes with the crossarm
0 0
DAF- For Maintenance Only
Crossarm 48" Fiberglass
Cat. ID Description Qty
4962 XARM,48"FBGLS,VERT 1 a
5108 BOLT,MA, 5/8X12" 1 0
5109 BOLT,MA, 5/8X14" 1
5170 WSHR,CURVED,3x3X11/16" 2
5341 NUT MF 5/8" 2
22147 WSHR DBL COIL 2
DAAS10, DAAD10
Single or Double Alley Arm
with a 6'-6" Baby GX Brace e
An extended alley arm is occasionally built Bond
where greater clearance or additional phase
separation is needed. This assembly consists of a
10'medium crossarm supported using one half Modify end fittings
of what is commonly called a"baby GX brace by rotating it 180°.
assembly". The brace is normally used on a two-
pole transmission GX structure(see page
01-450-01 in the Transmission Manual). This
brace must have one of its end fittings modified
by taking it apart and rotating it 180'to allow its
use in this application.
EMPOWR� Crossarm Assemblies
M--.m 'Y

07-03-04 Reviewed 03/20 Overhead
DASB6,DASB8,DASB10, DASB12,DASB14
Anti-Split Bolt Assemblies
Anti-split bolt assemblies, consisting of a
machine bolt, curved washers(for poles)or flat
square washers (for arms), a double coil washer,
and a locknut are used to help prevent pole and
arm splitting.
In crossarms. Use anti-split bolts on all
NOTE: Wherever anti-split bolt hardware non-apitong wooden crossarms.
is positioned within 2" of other primary-
associated hardware such as steel pins and
studs,the hardware must be bonded to
reduce RFI problems. Refer to 07-07-02
for more bonding clip information. f
l
The required hardware(including bonding clips) _
is included in the CU Codes for poles and
crossarms.
In poles.Use an anti-split bolt 8" from
the top of all wood poles.
Crossarm Assemblies '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 04/21 07-04-01
Braces
26-inch Wood Brace, Cat. ID 29659
Twenty-six-inch wood
CU Code: braces are used in pairs on L
DWB the 7-foot-8-inch crossarm.
The brace has one
7/16-inch and one
9/16-inch diameter hole, L10
spaced 26-inches apart.
Assembly details for the pole and crossarm bolts
are shown to the right.
42-inch Wood Brace, Cat. ID 5242 'r=�
Forty-two-inch wood 40
CU: braces are used in pairs
DWB42 on the 10-foot medium
crossarms.The 42-inch
------------
dimension refers to the 0 -
span of a pair of braces. -
The braces currently
being ordered are reversible and can be used on
either the right or left side of the crossarm If crossarm is too wide
assembly.Assembly details for the pole and flanged washer
crossarm bolts are shown to the right. may be turned over.
MONPAHO
OINM Braces
M—W—P^

07-04-02 Revised 04/21 Overhead
72-inch Wood Brace, Cat ID 5240 6-feet-6-inch X-Brace, Cat. ID 5239
The 72-inch wood The 6-foot-6-inch cross brace, commonly called
braces are used in .r a"baby GX brace
pairs on 11-foot assembly", is normally
cu medium and used on a two-pole
DWB72 heavy crossarms. transmission GX structure
The 72-inch with 6-foot-6-inch pole
dimension refers spacing, see the
to the span of a Transmission Manual
pair of braces. 01-450-01. This brace must
The drop distance have one of its end fittings
is 36-inch. The braces currently being ordered modified by taking it apart and rotating it 180'
are reversible and can be used on either the right to allow its use in this application.
or left side of the crossarm assembly.Assembly
details for the pole and crossarm bolts are the An illustration of the completed assembly
same as the 42-inch braces shown on the appears in the Overhead Manual 07-03-05.As
previous page. with the conventional alley arm assembly,all
questions concerning allowable conductor sizes
and span lengths should be directed to
Transmission Engineering Design Group.
Braces WOPO�W RR.

Overhead Reviewed 03/20 07-05-01
Insulator Pins, Pin-Holes, & Studs
Long Shank Steel Pins
Long shank steel pins are used to mount pin type
insulators on wood crossarms. On older arms
drilled for wood pins, a wood pin-hole adapter 6„
(bushing)is required,as described below. 6
Double coil washers and MF locknuts shall be
used on all installations. Square washers are
needed between the double coil washer and the
crossarm. 1-3/4"
Short Shank Steel Pins 7-1/2" _�5/8"Shank 3/4"Shank
Short shank steel pins are used to mount pin- - DSPS
type insulators on metal brackets, such as on a = 5157
BK-18. The shank diameter is 3/4".
Pin-Hole Adapters DSP
Steel pinhole adapters are used to reduce the 5159
wood pinholes in crossarms to accept steel pins
and are available in three sizes.Two adapters are
required for each hole- one on the top and one
on the bottom.
♦ Cat. ID 5199 for 5/8"pins DSPA58
(T-8"and 10'medium crossarms)
♦ Cat. ID 5200 for 3/4"pins DSPA34
(T-8"and 10'medium crossarms)
♦ Cat. ID 5202 for 3/4"pins TSPA
(I F transmission crossarms)
Thimble Adapters
_
p 6"min
Thimble adapters are attached to the ends of 5/8"
DA or machine bolts, and are usually used for
jumpers,busing,or where only moderate strain _ 5/8"DA or
may apply.The lateral stability may be increased - Machine Bolt
by threading the bolt up to the lead thread -----------
portion of the adapter.Do not use a thimble =
adapter to support a primary line under =
tension.Double coil washers and MF locknuts ------------- -----
shall be used on all installations.
Drill Bit Size Hardware Size DTADP
11/16 5/8" 5166
13/16 3/4"
15/16 7/8"
"`�R. Insulator Pins & Studs

07-05-02 Revised 5/21 Overhead
Pole-Top Pin New arms need the pin-holes redrilled to accept
the 3/4" diameter studs.
The pole-top pin is used to support the phase
conductor on 1-0 lines and the center conductor
on crossarm and streamlined construction.
Use the upper middle and bottom holes that are
8"apart,on the pole top pin to mount it to the 5_1/8"
pole. 0
Anti-split bolts are required on all poles. 20"
Materials section 05-01 lists the pole class CU 0
Codes that include the anti-split bolt sizes.
Y
Construct varying angles of conductor flow 0
between poles by attaching the pole-top pin to
other sides of the pole, see details in section 5"
Overhead 11-22.
If there is an existing single crossarm,modify 0 '
f
the lower hole of the pole-top pin to make an
open slot to mount it to the pole with the DPTP
crossarm. To do this, loosen the crossarm bolt, 5163
rather than removing it,to install the pin.Use 250
curved washers and MF locknuts on both bolts
of the pole top pin.
Steel Angle Pin
8-1/4"
• Steel angle pins offer considerable
resistance to side pull.
• Refer to Overhead 11-22 for the maximum
angle turn on pins.
• Double coil washers and MF locknuts are
used on all installations.
• Install anti-split bolts through the wood _
crossarm ends wherever angle pins are used. DSAP12 5153(12.5-kV,seldom used)
DSAP35 5154(34.5-kV shown here)
Line Post Insulator Studs
3/4"
Line post insulator studs are used for mounting 3/4"
line post insulators on arms and brackets. A
Ar If
NOTE: Do not use ordinary bolts A
Three stud sizes are available:
♦ Cat. ID.4876 = 10" - 8'
CU Codes: DSPL = = y Ae-3/4"
♦ Cat ID: 56954 = l
CU Codes DSPM-use on steel brackets. _QT f — 1-3/4"
♦ Cat ID: 4874
CU Codes DSPB 4876 56954 4874 f
DSPL DSPM DSPB
Insulator Pins & Studs '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 10/22 07-06-01
Primary Brackets
184nch Fiberglass Bracket 9116"Square Hole(2)-Chance
11/16"Round+(2)ContinentaThis bracket is used to support the cutout ,
and arrester on single-and two-phase4"transformer and underground riser
installations. It may also be used with a pin, 1e" s-1/2° —
post,or strain insulator to support a line or
tap conductor. Install using two 5/8-inch
machine bolts,with curved washers, double 8" �r�$
coil washers,and MF locknuts. Do not use O
a lag bolt.
CU Code: DBK18
Catalog ID: 5220
Angle Mounting Base
The angle mounting base is used with line
post insulators when turning angles.Attach
the insulator with a short stud that's 4.,TAP 42
furnished as part of the CU assembly. Use a B
short,medium, or long stud to attach the 2 a a to
base to the bracket or crossarm, call for o• _
separately; see page 07-05-02.Use anti- 3 3 6' 4""
split bolts on crossarms. 1
CU Code: DAMB
Catalog ID: 4873
I''�IDiAHO
RNPOAMR. Primary Brackets

07-06-02 Revised 10/22 Overhead
Pole Top Bracket CU Code: DNB12
This bracket is used for pole top mounting of —
line post insulators.For line angles,mount on
the side of the pole and use an angle
mounting base.Mount with 5/8-inch machine O 4"
bolts,curved washers,double coil washers,
and MF locknuts.In new construction,its use
is limited to supporting current sensor o
0 8
insulators on stand-alone capacitor banks. 0
Elsewhere,pin-type insulators are generally
used.
CU Code: DPTBR
Catalog ID: 5234
Neutral Brackets Catalog ID: 50868
Several options are available for supporting 12"
the neutral conductor at its own level on the
pole. This neutral bracket fits pole widths up
to 10-inch.These upset bolts have 6-inch of
thread length.Note that a second curved 10"
washer should be installed against the upset
to provide a larger bearing surface against the
pole. The gray spool insulator, Catalog ID
4723,is used for the neutral.
Larger diameter poles may require that a DA
bolt with associated curved washers,round
washers,and MF locknuts be assembled to
field fabricate a neutral bracket, as shown to
the right.
CU Code Bolt Length Catalog ID
DNB 12" 5148
DNB14 14" 54936
DNB16 16" 54937
The neutral bracket extended(NBX)is used
to extend the neutral away from the pole to
provide clearance around transformers,in 12"
heavy icing areas to lessen the chances of
phase-to-neutral contact when ice unloads
from the conductor.
CU Code: DNBX
Catalog ID: 5223 °
The heavy duty neutral 12-inch bracket for
#4 ACSR is used on tangent and dead-end
applications.
Primary Brackets WWO Ra
11 IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 10/22 07-06-03
NEMA Crossarm Brackets Up to 4"(40106)
5'to 9"(50979)
These NEMA brackets are used to mount
cutouts and disconnects on crossarms. They
are made of 5/16X 1-1/2-inch stock and are
no longer packaged with the cutouts and 4.12"
to
disconnects. 5.151,
CU Code Bolt Length Catalog ID + ]' •
DCMBK 5" 40106
DCMBK10 10" 50979
O
8„
Arrester Bracket for
Autotransformers �� 2"x 1-1
Carriage Bolt
This 12-inch bracket is used to mount surge 900 &Star Washei
arresters on distribution autotransformers. 12„ -� (Captive)
It is drilled and slotted to fit the various 101, ® 96 1
weld-nut spacings found adjacent to the
7.2-, 14.4-, and 19.9-kV primary bushings. p„1
Refer to section 19 for additional
5
information. ,�.� 96"dia.(3 holes)
CU Code: None
Catalog ID: 1481 }�I
�- 3
E'er IDiAHO
EMPOWER. Primary Brackets

Overhead Reviewed 04/21 07-07-01
Washers, Locknuts, & Bonding Clips
Square Washers primary(7.2 kV or above)conductors and
apparatus that is not grounded.An exception
would be if the bolt is under constant tension so
l; that loose hardware is not a factor. Then a
double coil washer would not be required.An
example would be an eyebolt deadend.
r+ Double Coil Washers Cat. ID
1/2" 22146
5/8" 22147
3/4" 22149
Bolted connections to wood members require 3/8" 22150
the use of flat, square washers on flat surfaces
such as crossarms and timbers; curved square On washers on the curved surface of a pole.When poles,a square
curved washer should be
double coil washers are involved, see the c
discussion below. installed between the
double coil washer and
Square Flat Washers Cat. ID the pole surface.
2" x 2" x 1/8" x 9/16"hole 5188
2-1/4" x 2-1/4" x 3/16" x 11/16" hole 5189
3" x 3" x 1/4" x 11/16" hole 5191 On crossarms,use a
3" x 3" x 3/16" x 13/16" hole 5192 square flat washer on
4" x 4" x 3/16" x 13/16" hole 5193
4" x 4" x 1/4" x 15/16" hole 5194 the pole through bolt
only.
Square Curved Washers Cat. ID
3" x 3" x 1/4" x 11/16"hole 5170 A flat washer is
3" x 3" x 1/4" x 13/16" hole 5169
4" x 4" x 1/4" x 13/16" hole 5172 installed under the
4" x 4" x 1/4" x 15/16" hole 5173 double coil washer on
the DA bolts and the
Double Coil Washers steel pins.
Double coil washers help
-� to compensate for the
compression of wood
fibers and keep Use a larger 4" x 4"
hardware tight over an flat washer under the double coil washer for 34.5-
extended period of time. This is important in kV steel angle pins; see page 07-05-02.
controlling radio interference. They are to be The use of double coil washers does not eliminate
used on all steel pins, insulator studs,and on all the need for MF locknuts.
bracket or crossarm bolts associated with
"`�R. Washers, Locknuts, & Bonding Clips
M--.m 'Y

07-07-02 Revised 04/21 Overhead
MF Locknuts Bonding Clips
As the MF locknut is tightened Bonding clips provide a simple and effective
against a nut,the center portion method of bonding the threaded end of bolts,
advances on the thread while the steel pins,and studs. The bent sides fit over the
outer edges are not allowed to square nut and capture the copper wire between
move. The result is a spring jam the nut and the clip. They are used for both
action and a permanently tight bonding and grounding metal hardware. These
connection. Thus they help to clips are included, for example, as part of the
prevent a nut from backing off a anti-split bolt assemblies DASB6 and DASB8.
bolt where the hardware has
loosened.MF locknuts shall be used on all bolts Size Cat. ID
through wood and fiberglass members, including 1/2" 5278
where double coil washers have been installed. 5/9' 5279
Be sure that the square end of the square nut 3/4" 5280
faces the MF locknut thus locking and 7/9' 5281
preventing it from loosening.
NOTE: This nut is a locking device only.It
should not be used as a structural member.
Do not use an impact wrench to install the O
locknut.
II II
Size Cat. ID
3/8" 5339
1/2" 5340
5/8" 5341
3/4" 5342
7/8" 5343
NOTE: MF stands for McClean and Fogg.
Washers, Locknuts, & Bonding Clips '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 09/18 08-00-01
Table of Contents
08- Connectors, Clamps, & Deadends
08-01-01 Connector Selection&Installation 08-03-01 Bolted Connectors, Clamps,&
Guidelines Terminals
Introduction "PG"Parallel Groove Connectors
Selecting Connectors 08-03-02 Bronze Eyebolt-Type Equipment
Selecting the Proper Tool Case Ground Connectors
Oxide Inhibiting Compounds Bronze Vise-Type Equipment
08-01-02 Surface Preparation Case Ground Connectors
Common Causes of Failure of Copper Split-Bolt Connectors
Compression Connections Copper 2-Bolt Connectors
08-03-03 Copper Vise-Type Connectors
08-02-01 Compression &Automatic Bronze"TLS" Tap-Lug
Connectors Connectors
Scope Aluminum and Bronze 2-Hole
Insulated Splicing Sleeves Bolted Terminals
Aluminum Reduced Tension 08-03-04 Bronze Hot Line Clamps
Compression Splicing Sleeves Aluminum Multi-Tap Connectors
Aluminum Full Tension
Compression Splicing Sleeves 08-04-01 Deadends and Conductor Clamps
Aluminum Automatic Sleeves Aluminum Wedge-Clamp
Aluminum Terminal Rods Deadends
08-02-02 Copper Compression Sleeves Aluminum Bolted Deadend
Automatic Splices Clamps
Steel Automatic Sleeves Aluminum Automatic Deadends
Heat Shrink Sleeves 08-04-02 Basket-Type Service Grips
08-02-03 Rubber Pre-Stretched Cold-Shrink Copper Compression Deadends
Insulating Sleeves Copper Automatic Deadends
Roll-On Sleeves Copper Bolted Deadend Clamp
Burndy"Crimpit"Aluminum Steel Automatic Deadends
Compression Connectors 08-04-03 Line Post Insulator Clamp
Installation of Sleeves for Suspension Angle C-Shoe Clamp
Overhead Applications
08-05-01 Fired-on Wedge Connector System
Wedge Connectors
Wedge Installation Tool
08-05-02 Application Chart and CU Code
Tables for Fired-On Wedge
Connectors
08-05-03 Wedge Stirrups
Application Chart and CU Code
Tables for Fired-On Wedge
Stirrups
08-05-04 Wedge Connector Cartridges
Wedge and Stirrup Applications
Non-Aluminum Line Conductors
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
M,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Revised 11/03 08-01-01
Connector Selection
and Installation Guidelines
Introduction Oxide Inhibiting Compounds
The performance of any electrical connection An oxide-inhibiting compound must be used at
depends ultimately upon the care used in its the contact surfaces of all electrical connections
selection and application. (bolted or compression)involving aluminum to
aluminum or aluminum to copper surfaces.
Selecting Connectors
The inhibitor seals the clean,brushed surfaces
Be sure that the appropriate connector is selected from the air,which prevents the formation of
for the job based on the following: oxides that degrade the connection. It also seals
the connection from moisture,protecting it from
♦ Conductor metal corrosion. Inhibitor is also recommended for
♦ Conductor size copper-to-copper connections.
♦ Mechanical and Electrical stresses
Two types of inhibitor are available depending
Selecting the Proper Tool on the applications. Both contain a synthetic
(non-petroleum)base that will not damage
Compression connections must be installed rubber products.
using:
♦ Proper die
CUAL-AID CUAL-AID
♦ Adequate compressive force #11 #12
Contact Aid ® Contact Aid
♦ Sufficient number of crimps witno�t Grit GF-178 With Grit GF-198
NON GRIT WITH GRIT
NOTE. Detailed information on o"E E "°'"L eOx E WL eOx
approved compression tools and dies may
be found in Section 106 of the Idaho
Power Tools Manual.
Cat. ID Description
Die information is commonly stamped on the 4695 INHIBITOR W/O GRIT 8 OZ
sleeves. 4696 INHIBITOR W/GRIT 8 OZ
Inhibitor without grit(Cat.ID 4695)is
designed for underground applications. It is
suitable for use on threaded connections and
connections where one or both surfaces are
plated. This inhibitor will not scratch the surface
plating(which may lead to corrosion)or gall(or
jam)threads.
IORM
R. Connector Selection and Installation Guidelines
M,o�o�amPa,

08-01-02 Revised 11/03 Overhead
Inhibitor with grit(Cat. ID 4696)is designed Copper Surfaces Copper surfaces should be
for overhead applications. The grit helps break cleaned to a bright finish prior to making a
through the oxides that may form on the connection.A semi-conductive oxide film forms
connection. Grit also helps increase the force on copper conductor. Inhibitor should be applied
required to pull a conductor out of a to prevent continuing oxidation.
compression sleeve.
Tinned or Plated Surfaces Tinned or plated
Surface Preparation copper or aluminum surfaces should not be
cleaned by abrasion, as this would remove the
The surfaces of both the conductors and the plating. Instead,the plated surface should be
connector must be free of contaminants and cleaned with solvent and clean rags. If both
oxides that might interfere with the long-term surfaces are plated, oxide inhibitor is not
operation of the connection. required.
Most of the connectors used on aluminum Galvanized or Bare Steel Galvanized or bare
conductor are purchased cleaned and pre-filled steel should be cleaned to a bright finish. The
by the manufacturer with appropriate oxide- use of oxide inhibitor is highly recommended.
inhibiting compound. On case ground connections,be sure that the
threads in the side of the tank are thoroughly
NOTE. If connectors are re-used,they cleaned and brushed prior to applying the
must be cleaned,brushed, and re-coated inhibitor compound and screwing in the
with the approved compound. connector.
The conductors must be thoroughly dry brushed Common Causes of Failure of
and visually inspected to indicate that the entire Compression Connections
contact area has been adequately cleaned and
scored. In the case of aluminum conductor,the The following represent some of the most
cleaning must be immediately followed by commonly recognized workmanship problems
application of oxide inhibiting compound, or that can result in eventual failure of a
installation of the pre-filled connector. compression connection:
The various surfaces should be cleaned as ♦ Compressing the sleeve using the wrong set
indicated. of dies.
♦ Compression type fittings installed with
Aluminum Surfaces Aluminum surfaces are fewer die bites than specified by the
covered with a high-resistance, aluminum oxide manufacturer.
film when exposed to air.Aluminum oxide is a ♦ Connectors installed on unclean or poorly
dielectric and has a high electrical resistance, cleaned conductors, or without the use of
and must be removed before making an oxide inhibitor compound.
electrical joint. The oxide is removed by wire ♦ Conductors not fully bottomed out in
brushing then applying oxide inhibitor and then
wire brushing again to seal the aluminum sockets of compression fittings during
installation.
surface from reoxidizing.
Connector Selection and Installation Guidelines '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 06/21 08-02-01
Compression & Automatic Connectors
Scope Aluminum Automatic Sleeves
This section describes compression and I I
automatic connectors. For additional information
refer to the previous page,08-01 and the Aluminum automatic splices are used for tension
Materials Manual 07-005. splices in aluminum and ACSR primary
conductors.
Insulated Splicing Sleeves
CAUTION:Do not use automatic splices
"Insulinks"have been set to No-Purch and are for slack span installations.
OBSOLETE; do not use them.
Aluminum Reduced Tension NOTE:Never beat on the sides of an
automatic sleeve. This can cause
Compression Splicing Sleeves connector failure.
Cat. ID Size Color Code
jli= 4355 4 ACSR Orange
4356 2 AA&ACSR Red
Aluminum sleeves are used to splice reduced 4357 1/0 AA&ACSR Yellow
4358 2/0 AA&ACSR Gray
tension overhead aluminum primary and 4359 4/0 ACSR Pink
secondary; see 08-02-03 for cold-shrink rubber 4360 336 AL Brown
insulating sleeves that are suitable for use over 4361 397 ACSR Blue
these splices. 4362 795 AL*
*Restricted use on lines where the design
Cat. ID Size Color Code Die Size tension will not exceed 5,000 lbs.
4290 #6 Blue 5/8,nose
4291 #4 Orange 5/8, nose Aluminum Terminal Rods
4398 #2 Red 5/8,nose
45362 #4-#2' Orange, Red 5/8,nose
4402 1/0 Yellow 5/8,nose
4405 2/0 Gray 840
4408 4/0 Pink 840
53317 336 Orange 490 Compression terminal rods are used to terminate
*Compression Sleeve will splice#4 to#2 wire. aluminum secondary or service conductors in an
overhead-transformer secondary bushing
Aluminum Full Tension Compression connector.
Splicing Sleeves
Cat. ID Size Die Size
4043 #6 AL 5/8, nose die
5736 #2 AL 5/8, nose die
5737 1/0 AL 5/8, nose die
5738 2/0 AL 840
Aluminum compression splices are generally 5741 4/0 AL 840
used in slack span applications.Automatic 5739 350 AL U31ART
5740 750 AL U39ART
splices are preferred for full tension applications.
Cat. ID Size Die Size
4313 795 AL Alcoa die 11CD
"`POM R� Compression & Automatic Connectors

08-02-02 Revised 06/21 Overhead
Copper Compression Sleeves Cat. ID Size Die -CID
4370 #4 ACSR ORANGE-54288
4369 #2 ACSR PLUM—54289*
4371 #8A CU-WELD P-Die—7596 Full
Tool XR Groove**
Copper compression splices are used to make a 4367 1/0 ACSR PLUM -54289
full tension splice in copper and copperweld 4368 2/0 ACSR PEACH-54290
conductor. 30300 4/0 ACSR WK840—7603***
* Although this is a peach sleeve, plum die works on it.
Cat. ID Size Nicopress Die * Use XPJ Tool on this sleeve.
This is Burndy WK840 die for 2/0&4/0 sleeves and lugs.
4340 8A CW P
4341 6A CW P Steel Automatic Sleeves
4342 4A CW X
4343 2A CW F6
4346 #8 Sld CU J
4347 #10 Sld CU C
4348 #6 Sld CU J
4349 #4 Sld CU P The steel, 1/4-inch automatic splice makes a full
4350 #2 Str CU X
tension splice in 3-strand steel conductor.
Automatic Splices CAUTION: Do not use automatic splices
for slack span installations.
Cat. ID Size
Copper automatic splices are used for tension 13922 3SS
splices in copper and copperweld conductors.
Steel Compression Sleeves
Cat. ID Size
4381 8A CW _____
4379 6A CW
4380 #6 CU -- -
4381 #4 CU t�
4382 #2-3 CU
4383 #2 CU Galvanized steel compression sleeves are used
4384 #1 CU to splice galvanized steel conductors. They're
4385 1/0 CU used for full tension and slack span applications.
4386 2/0 CU
4387 4/0 CU
Cat. ID Size Die
Repair Sleeves 4351 3SS W248/U248
Heat Shrink Sleeves
o ,
The 600-volt heat shrink insulating sleeves are
Split repair sleeves are used and slipped over used to seal and insulate splices on underground
damaged or broken wire. The sleeve restores the 600-volt cables. The sleeves are heated with a
original conductor conductivity and 95% of propane torch to shrink them onto the connector
conductor breaking strength, see table next and cable insulation, creating a watertight seal.
column. An adhesive on the inside of the sleeve melts
when heat is applied and provides an additional
seal. They are available in precut lengths up to
48-inches and can be cut to fit any application.
I DAM
Compression Automatic Connectors & Repair Sleeves ` R„

Overhead Revised 06/21 08-02-03
The sleeves are suitable for direct-buried Burndy "Crimpit"Aluminum
installations and applications in direct sunlight. Compression Connectors
Conductor range varies dependent upon
manufacturer, see the Materials Manual The Crimpit connector is
07-151-01. generally used for street light
applications. It provides a simple
Cat. ID Length Conductor Range method of connecting#14
5867 9" #8 thru 1/0 through#8 copper wire to#6
5868 9" #4 thru 4/0 through#2 aluminum conductor.
5870 12" 1/0 thru 400 It is pre-filled with corrosion
5871 12" 250 thru 1000 inhibiting grease.
5869 48" #4 thru 4/0
Cat. ID Size Die Size
Rubber Pre-Stretched Cold-Shrink 4284 #642 To#1448 5/8, nose die
Insulating Sleeves
Installation of Sleeves for Overhead
Applications
♦ Non-heat shrink sleeves install the same as
for underground applications.
♦ Roll-on sleeves roll over the connector like
The following sizes of rubber pre-stretched a type of inner tube.
sleeves may be used to cover bare aluminum
splices on overhead 600 volt conductors and NOTE.Do not use roll-on sleeves for
cables. below-ground connections.
Cat. ID Conductor Range
4293 #10 thru 1/0
23656 #2 thru 1/0 Cable Roll-on Sleeve
23658 2/0 thru 250
13501 250 thru 400
13511 500 thru 800 Roll sleeve from the
cardboard tube onto the cable
Roll-on Sleeves Mastic
Roll-on Sleeve
Install compression connector
and mastic
Roll-on sleeves are another way of insulating a
connector that requires no special tools. They
come on cardboard tubes and are installed by Roll-on Sleeve
rolling them off the tube and onto the cable.
Cat. ID Conductor Range Roll roll-on sleeve over
the connector and mastic
4294 #8 thru 2/0
4295 1/0 thru 250
4296 250 thru 600
39103 600 thru 1000
"`�R� Compression & Automatic Connectors

Overhead Revised 05/22 08-03-01
Bolted Connectors, Clamps & Terminals
Parallel Groove (PG) Connectors Copper to aluminum connections. When
Parallel groove connectors are used to make connecting copper to aluminum, orient the
non-tension connections of aluminum to connection so that the copper wire is below the
aluminum or aluminum to copper conductors. aluminum wire to help keep any copper salts
Use a copper connector for copper to copper from washing onto the aluminum conductor and
connections. causing corrosion.
DO NOT use PGs for primary and Copper to galvanized steel connections. PGs
primary neutral connections.Use can be used to make copper to galvanized steel
wedge connectors instead. connections, such as when connecting a pole
ground wire to guy strand or to chain-link
fencing.
71SO Hot Line Tools. The hot line tools for
14A 2M - installing PGs are shown in section 111-12 of
the Tools Manual.
O 00
Insulating compound. Insulate PGs and other
connectors used on the hot legs at service
entrance drip loops and where needed at
transformer bussing.Mold the material around
3td uneven surfaces,and cover with at least three
layers of vinyl electrical tape.
Cat ID Description CU Code
1-Bolt PGs
4059 8 Sol-2 Str TO 8 Sol-2 Str none
4060 6 Sol-2/0 TO 6 Sol-2/0 none
4061 3/0-336.4 TO 6 Sol-2/0 none
4065 397-795 TO 6 Sol-2/0 none
2-Bolt PGs
4063 2 Str-3/0 TO 8 Sol-2 Str none
38064 2 Str-3/0 TO 2 Str-3/0 none
4062 3/0-336 TO 3/0-336 none
4066 397-795 TO 3/0-336 none
3-Bolt PGs Cat. ID Description CU Code
4064 3/0-336 TO 3/0-336 none 50541 Airseal Cmpd Pad 8"x8" none
4067 397-795 TO 397-795 none 50354 Airseal Cmpd Roll 4"x10' none
Tightening PGs. Place the conductors in the PG Cover.
PG and tighten the bolt(s)to"finger tight".Use
a wrench to tighten the bolts an additional 1-1/4 Cat. ID Description
turns to obtain the proper torque. 57306 Blue bolt—SNAP-ON, BLACK, F/1-BOLT PG
CLAMPS
59926 Yellow bolt—SNAP-ON, BLACK, UTCCOVER
Reusing PGs. F/LARGE 1-BOLT PG CLAMPS
♦ DO NOT reuse 1-bolt PGs.
♦ 2-bolt and 3-bolt PGs may be reused rill
provided they are cleaned,brushed, and mf ) 1
coated with fresh inhibitor compound. nn
��PO II R. Bolted Connectors, Clamps & Terminals
In1—owC11Pa.V
Internal Use Only

08-03-02 Revised 05/09 Overhead
Bronze Eyebolt-Type Equipment Case Copper Split-Bolt Connectors
Ground Connectors
Split-bolt connectors are used only for making non-
tension copper-to-copper connections on secondary,
Transformer ground connectors are used to make neutral,and ground circuits.
the tank or case ground connection on electrical
apparatus. They are to be used only with copper NOTE. Do not use a split-bolt connector
conductor. on aluminum conductor.
Cat. ID Description Range Cat. ID Size
3850 TF GRD 6-2 STIR #6 -#2 3859 #8 CND
3860 #6 CND
3862 #4 CND
Bronze Vise Type-Equipment Case 3864 #2 STIR
Ground Connectors 3866 1/0 STIR
Copper 2-Bolt Connectors
Vise type case ground connectors are used on -
overhead and pad-mounted apparatus. The
grounding conductor can be easily removed from
the connector whenever the equipment is being
replaced. Copper 2-bolt connectors are used for making
non-tension, copper-to-copper connections for
Cat. ID Description Range larger sized copper conductors.
3852 TF GRID VISE 6-1/0 #6 - 1/0
NOTE. Do not use the copper 2 bolt
connectors on aluminum conductor.
Cat.ID Main Tap
3867 2-2/0 6-2/0
3868 1/0-4/0 6-4/0
3869 250-350 4-350
3870 350-500 4-500
3871 600-800 2-800
3872 750-1000 2-100
Bolted Connectors, Clamps & Terminals "` R„

Overhead Revised 09/18 08-03-03
Copper Vise Type Connectors Bronze "TLS" Tap-Lug Connectors
The copper vise-type connector may be used as The tin-plated,bronze,tap-lug connector,
an alternate to a split-bolt connector for copper- commonly called a"TLS" lug,provides a means
to-copper connections on secondary,neutral, and of connecting copper conductor to a terminal
ground circuits. It has the advantage of not pad. Where compression tools are available, one
requiring disassembly during installation. or two hole compression lugs are preferred.
NOTE. Do not use this connector on NOTE. Do not use this connector on
aluminum conductor. aluminum conductor.
Cat.ID Description Cat.ID Size
44922 #8 Stranded 3873 #1041
3861 #6 Solid 3874 #8-2/0
3863 #4 Stranded 3875 #6-250
3865 #2 Stranded 3876 #2-350
44923 2/0 Stranded 3877 1/0-500
44924 4/0 Stranded 3878 2/0-1000
44925 350 Stranded
44926* 500 Stranded Aluminum and Bronze 2-Hole Bolted
44927** 750 Stranded
44928 1000 Stranded Terminals
* Discontinued by manufacturer. Replaced by CID _
47659 bolted type.
** With inventory left but no more future purchases.
Bronze U-Bolt PG Connector
O t
O O
0 t
The aluminum bolted terminals are used to
connect aluminum conductor to aluminum or
The bronze U-bolt parallel groove connector is tin-plated NEMA pads found on pole top and in-
used to deadend secondary copper circuits. line switches,transformers,bus fittings, etc.
Similarly,the bronze bolted terminal is used to
NOTE. Do not use this connector on connect copper jumpers to NEMA pads.
aluminum conductor.
Cat. ID Description Metal
Cat. ID Description 3741 300-795 Aluminum
3712 #4-600 Copper
57980 #2-2/0 Stranded CU
�POMR. Bolted Connectors, Clamps & Terminals
M­­.m 'Y

08-03-04 Revised 01/18 Overhead
Bronze Hot Line Clamps Aluminum Multi-Tap Connectors
Bronze Hot line clamps provide a means of
tapping an energized primary conductor using a
"shotgun"tool. ®®® ®®®®®
®®®®® ®®®®®
0
0
o -
O
Cat. ID 4071 Cat. ID 4072
Bronze Hot Line Clamps The aluminum multi-tap connectors have double
setscrew connections and can be used on copper
Cat.ID Main Line Tap or aluminum conductors sized#2 to 750 kcmil.
4071 #6-2/0 #6-2/0 They are individually specified and supplied
4072 #6-400 #6-4/0 with inhibitor in the connector area.An
insulating cover is used to protect the phase and
Caution. Do not attempt to break load neutral connectors. Using a cover helps to keep
current with these clamps.Also, do not moisture out and the integrity of the connection.
make or break magnetizing current for
transformers over 50 kVA. Cat.ID #of Positions Range
39924 4 #2-750
Hot line clamps are purchased with inhibitor. 39925 6 #2-750
Before reinstalling a clamp it must be properly 39926 s #2-750
57113 10 #6-2/0
cleaned and coated with fresh inhibitor grease.
The stirrup should also be wire-brushed.
NOTE. Hot line taps must never be
installed over formed ties, grips, or repair
armor.
Cover
The tap conductor(jumper)on hot line taps IL
should be soft drawn stranded copper.
Caution. These hot line clamps should
not be used as grounding clamps. They
are not designed to withstand high fault
currents. Service Entrance
Refer to section 08-05 for proper use and Service Drop
applications of hot line clamps on wedge NOTE. When installing the connectors,
stirrups. arrange the conductors so that the ones
feeding in are in the center positions.
Bolted Connectors, Clamps & Terminals '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/16 08-04-01
Deadends and Conductor Clamps
Aluminum Wedge-Clamp Deadends Aluminum Automatic Deadends
The wedge-clamp deadend is commonly used to The automatic deadend may be used as an
deadend multiplex service conductors through alternate to bolted deadends on aluminum or
4/0. It is used to grip the bare messenger. ACSR. It can be used on primary or secondary
conductor. It is used on tension installations.
Cat. ID Size
4180 #6-#2
4181 1/0-4/0
Cat. ID Size Color Code CU Code
Aluminum Bolted Deadend Clamp 4154 #4 ACSR Orange DDR4H
4157 2/0 ACSR Gray DDR20H
The aluminum bolted deadend clamp is used for 4159 336 AL Green DD336H
deadending aluminum distribution primary and 4160 795 AL Orange DD795H
neutral conductors. The clamps may be used on
tension and slack span applications.
CAUTION.Do not use automatic deadends for
0 slack spans.
NOTE.Never beat on the sides of the
splice or deadend. The wall is
relatively thin, and any deformation
Cat. ID Size of the wall could affect proper setting
4147 #4-2/0 of the jaws.
4148 4/0-336
4149 397-795
"`�R� Deadends and Conductor Clamps

08-04-02 Revised 05/19 Overhead
Basket-Type Service Grips Copper Automatic Deadends
Basket-type service grips, commonly called Copper automatic deadends are used on copper
"Kellems grips", are used to deadend insulated or copperweld conductor. They may be used in
service conductors. full tension applications only.
C==f
4161 4 CU &8A CW DDCBA
4177 4/0 AL WP DDAW40 4162 6A CW DDC6A
4178 500 AL WP DDAW500 4163 6 CU DDC6H
4165 2 CU DDC2
4166 1 CU DDC1
4167 1/0 CU DDCO
4168 2/0 CU DDC20
4169 4/0 CU DDC40
Copper Bolted Deadend Clamp
The bronze bolted deadend clamp is used for
deadending copper distribution primary and
Copper Compression Deadends neutral conductors. The clamps may be used on
tension and slack span applications.
Copper compression deadends are used as an
alternate to automatic deadends on copper and
copperweld conductor. They may be used on — --
both full tension and slack spans.
Cat. ID Size CU Code Die*
4170 8A CW DDCWBA P
4171 6A CW DDCW6A P
4172 4A CW DDCW4A X
37628 #8 CU SLID J
4173 #6 CU SLID DDC6 J 58001 #6-1/0 CU
4174 #4 CU SLID DDC4 P 58119 1/0-4/0 CU
4175 #2 CU STIR X
* All these dies are included on the 53-JPX NOTE. Do not use this clamp on
crimpers. aluminum conductor.
Steel Automatic Deadends
Steel automatic deadends are used on 3-strand
steel conductor. They may be used in full tension
applications only.
Cat. ID Size CU Code
20047 3SS DD3SS
Deadends and Conductor Clamps "` R„

Overhead Revised 10/21 08-04-03
Line Post Insulator Clamp Suspension Angle C-Shoe Clamp
Line post insulator clamps are used on both A suspension angle C-shoe clamp is generally
horizontal and vertical clamp-top line post used on 1-0 construction for angles up to 60°. It
insulators. will accept copper, copperweld, 3-strand steel,
or#4 ACSR conductor.Armor rod should be
used with the#4 ACSR.
O
O
Cat. ID OD Range
4802 0.50-1.06 Cat. ID OD Range
4803 0.23-0.57
4804 0.35-0.84 4116 0.23-0.60
59727* 0.23-0.84
'New CID consolidates CIDs 4803 and 4804;see OH 09-01-02 for details.
"`�M Deadends and Conductor Clamps

Overhead Reviewed 4/22 08-055-01
Fired-on Wedge Connector System
i7
l
Wedge Connectors The same tool is used to"fire"the pieces apart,
if it is necessary to remove the connection.
Aluminum wedge connectors are the basic Wedge connectors can be installed and removed
component of the wedge connector system that repeatedly in the same location without
includes a variety of different connectors and damaging the conductors.Although it is possible
accessories. to reuse wedge connectors,this is not a
Wedge connectors are used to make primary and recommended practice at Idaho Power.
primary neutral electrical connections on our Wedge connectors are available for most
distribution system.They have replaced combinations of conductors.When a large and a
aluminum parallel groove connectors for these small wire are being connected together,make
applications. sure the larger groove in the wedge goes with
Wedge connectors are not rated for loadbreak the larger conductor.
operation.They are installed and removed by
hand or while energized using rubber l Large groove for
g g gloves or large conductor
hot sticks depending on the application.
"C"Member
"Wedge" 4' Small groove for
d Wedge small conductor
Refer to the manufacturer's instruction for
installation procedures.
Click here for
instructions
The basic wedge connector consists of a"C"
member and"Wedge"that is forced into the"C"
member along with the conductors to make the Wedge Installation Tool
electrical connection.
A special tool that uses a cartridge to"fire"the The large and small Tyco/AMP wedge connector
pieces together is used to create consistent,high installation tools use the Tyco/AMP cartridges to
quality connections. fire on and fire off the wedge connectors. See
Tools Manual for more information.
"`�R. Wedge Connectors
­­­ 'y Internal Use Only

08-055-02 Revised 04/22 Overhead
Application Chart for
0
Fired-On Wedge Connectors
a.
G� MAIN Conductors C!> V
8 Cu Sol 4 Cu Str
9 Iron 4 Cu Sol 6 3SS 2 Str(All) 2/0(All)
6 Cu Sol 8A CW 4 ACSR 4A CW 1/0 Cu 410(All) 336 AAC 397 ACSR 795 AAC
1 IF
11696 11820 55032 55032 12358 12837 12869 13131 13227 4-8 Cu Sol
MUM DWC4S4S DWC4T6S MUM MUMS DWCOM DWC336T6S DWC397T6S DWC795T6S 8A CW
9 Iron
55033 55034 12801 12849 12874 13132 13228 4 Cu Str
Use White Cartridge— DWC4T4 DWC2T4 DWC20T4 DWC40T4 DWC336T4 DWC397T4 DWC795T4 6 3SS
4 ACSR
55034 12843 12835 12886 13134 13229 2 Str AI&Cu
DWC2T2 MUM DWC40T2 DWC336T2 DWC397T2 DWC795T2 4A CW
—Use Red Cartridge— 12835 12858 12894 13181 13245 2/0(All)
DWC20T20 DWC40T20 DWC336T20 DWC397T20 DWC795T20 1/0 Cu'
Cat. ID 12860 12895 13182 13311 4/0(Al I)
DWC40T40 DWC336T40 DWC397T40 DWC795T40
12835
DWC20T20 250 Cu
CU Code LUse Blue Cartridge 12921 13182 13439 350 Cu
WC336T336 WC397T336 WC795T336 336 AAC
13214 13440 397 ACSR
*For 795 AAC to 1/0 Cu WC397T397 WC795T397 500 Cu
13459 13442 795 AAC
D W C795T10 WC795T795
Use Yellow Cartridge
Use Yellow Cartridge
Cat. ID Description CU Code Cat. ID Description CU Code
White Wedge Connectors Yellow Wedge Connectors
116966 SOL TO 6-4 SOL DWC6S6S 12869 336 TO 6-4 SOL DWC336T6S
118204 SOL TO 6-4 SOL DWC4S4S 12874 336 TO 4 STIR DWC336T4
Red Wedge Connectors 12886 336 TO 2 DWC336T2
55032 4 STIR TO 6-4 SOL DWC4T6S 12894 336 TO 2/0 DWC336T20
55032 2 TO 6-4 SOL DWC2T6S 12895 336 TO 4/0 DWC336T40
55033 4 STIR TO 4 STIR DWC4T4 12921 336 TO 250-336 DWC336T336
55034 2 TO 2-4 STIR DWC2T4 13131 397 TO 6-4 SOL DWC397T6S
55034 2 TO 2-4 STIR DWC2T2 13132 397 TO 4 STIR DWC397T4
13134 397 TO 2 DWC397T2
Blue Wedge Connectors 13181 397 TO 2/0 DWC397T20
12358 2/0 TO 6-4 SOL DWC20T6S 13182 397 TO 4/0 DWC397T40
12801 2/0 TO 4 STIR DWC20T4 13182 397 TO 336 DWC397T336
12834 2/0 TO 2 DWC20T2 13214 397 TO 397-500 DWC397T397
12835 2/0 TO 2/0 DWC20T20 13227 795 TO 6-4 SOL DWC795T6S
12837 4/0 TO 6-4 SOL DWC40T6S 13228 795 TO 4 STIR DWC795T4
12849 4/0 TO 4 STIR DWC40T4 13229 795 TO 2 DWC795T2
12835 4/0 TO 2 DWC40T2 13459 795 TO 1/0 DWC795T10
12858 4/0 TO 2/0 DWC40T20 13245 795 TO 2/0 DWC795T20
12860 4/0 TO 4/0 DWC40T40 13311 795 TO 4/0 DWC795T40
13439 795 TO 250-336 DWC795T336
13440 795 TO 397-500 DWC795T397
13442 795 TO 795 DWC795T795
Wedge Connectors POWER.

Overhead Revised 08/14 08-05-03
Wedge Stirrups Installation instructions
Line conductor Although they can be installed toward or away,
__-- from a fixed point,refer to the installation guide
--- of wedge stirrup on#4 stranded ACSR and
smaller:
firing away-firing toward: Give at least
12-inches or more apart(face—face)between
the wedge stirrup and the deadend clamp.
For firing away this distance(12-inches or more)
gives enough room for a hammer swing to tap
Tinned the power tool—rubber gloving or sticking. It is
Copper Bail
preferable to fire them away from the fixed point
(DE clamp)to prevent bird caging(basketing).
Wedge stirrups are used to create locations for Make sure the larger groove of the wedge goes
separable connections on circuits with aluminum with the larger conductor.
conductors. The tinned copper bail allows a Reminders to the installer:
bronze hot line clamp(Cat.ID 4071)to be
installed and removed with a shotgun tool. 1) Make sure the wedge groove is square-
up and the wire is properly oriented on
The size of the bail varies with the size of the the groove so it will not grab any strand,
wedge stirrup. The small stirrups have a#2 Cu which may result in"basketing"during
bail,the 2/0 through 397 stirrups have a 1/0 Cu the firing installation.
bail, and the 795 stirrup has a 2/0 Cu bail. The 2) Wedge orientation—print outside is
bronze hot line clamp fits all these bail sizes. preferred.
Wedge stirrups are not rated for loadbreak Non-aluminum line conductors.
operation.They are installed and removed by When connecting a copper tap or riser wire(up
hand or while energized using rubber gloves or to#2 Cu)to a non-aluminum line conductor(up
hot sticks depending on the application using the to 2/0 Cu), such as copper,copperweld, steel,
same special tools and cartridges as the wedge etc.,use the bronze hot line clamp and install it
connectors. directly onto the line conductor.A wedge stirrup
is not necessary for these applications.
Application Chart for
Fired-On Wedge Stirrups
G= MAIN CONDUCTORS C;J
8-4 Sol 4 Str-2 1/0-2/0 4/0 336 AAC 397 ACSR 795 AAC
55035 55036 25170 25181 25182 25183 25185
DWS6R4 DWS4R4 DWS20R4 DWS40R4
0 DWS336R4 DWS397R4 DWS795R4
#2 Cu Bail #2 Cu Bail 1/0 Cu Bail 1/0 Cu Bail 2/0 Cu Bail 2/0 Cu Bail 2/0 Cu Bail
Use Use
Red Red Use Blue Cartridge��—
Cartridge Cartridge Cat. ID Description Color CU Code
Cat. ID Wedge Stirrups
25182 �� 55035 8 TO 4 SOL RED DWS6R4
55036 4 STIRTO 2 RED DWS4R4
DWS336R4
25170 1/0 TO 2/0 BLUE DWS20R4
CU Code 25181 4/0 BLUE DWS40R4
25182 336 YELLOW DWS336R4
25183 397 YELLOW DWS397R4
25185 795 YELLOW DWS795R4
`�R. Wedge Connectors
-_- Internal Use Only

08-05-04 Revised 04/22 Overhead
Wedge Connector Cartridges Wedge and Stirrup Applications
Special cartridges are used to install and remove Use wedge connectors for the following
wedge connectors. The larger the connector is primary and primary neutral applications:
(as defined by its color coding),the more
powerful the cartridge needs to be. The power of • All mline„phase and neutral connections
each cartridge is indicated by its color. Red is ♦ All jumper wires—except#2 Cu or smaller,
the least powerful,then white,then blue, and at sectionalizing points
yellow is the most powerful.
♦ 1/0 Cu and larger riser wires for equipment or
Removing a connector requires a cartridge that cutouts, disconnects, and switches
is one color less powerful than needed for
installation. ♦ High-side and low-side riser wires for 1500
and 2500 kVA step down transformers
Store the cartridges in their original box and
keep them dry to help avoid misfires. Use wedge stirrups for the following
applications:
II _ ♦ Riser wires for all distribution transformers
♦ #2 Cu and smaller riser wires for equipment
or cutouts, disconnects,and switches
I I I I I I I I I ♦ #2 Cu or smaller jumper wires at
sectionalizing points
Red White Blue Yellow Non-aluminum line conductors. When
Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge
Cat. ID 25229 Cat.ID 25230 Cat. ID 25232 Cat.ID 25234 connecting a copper tap riser wire or over the
arm jumper(up to#2 Cu)to a non-aluminum
Cat. ID Description CU Code line conductor(up to 2/0 Cu), such as copper,
Cartridges copperweld, steel, etc.,use the bronze hot line
25229 TYCO RED CARTRIDGE none clamp and install it directly onto the line
25230 TYCO WHITE CARTRIDGE none
25232 TYCO BLUE CARTRIDGE none conductor.A wedge stirrup is not necessary for
25234 TYCO YELLOW CARTRIDGE none these applications.
Stud Disconnect
STABILIZER RIBS _
DISENGAGED FROM
HOT STICK
1
HOT STICK
EYEBOLT
CLOCKWISE
HOT STICK
Catalog ID and Approved Manufacturers
Cat. ID Description Cartridge CU Code
49120* HD CU STUD DISC WEDGE F/33 Yellow DDJ336
49126 HD CU STUD DISC WEDGE F/795 Yellow DDJ795
*For 397 ACSR,order Cat.ID 49120 and Cat.ID 13214(WEDGE F/397 TO 397-500,YELLOW CARTRIDGE)
Wedge Connectors '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/18 09-00-01
Table of Contents
09- Insulators & Ties
09-01-01 Insulators 09-06-01 Wire Ties
General Information General Information
Porcelain Pin-Type Insulators Installation Considerations
09-01-02 Line Post Insulators Armor Rod
High Contamination Areas 09-06-02 Table of Wire Ties for Pin-Type
09-01-03 Polymer Deadend Insulators Insulators-ACSR,AL, CU
Polymer DE Insulator CU 09-06-03 Table of Wire Ties for Pin-Type
Assemblies Insulators-Copperweld, Steel
09-01-04 Vandal Resistant Insulators Table of Wire Ties for Spool
Extension Links Insulators
09-06-04 Top Tie- Single Pin-AL,ACSR,
09-02-01 Vise-Top Pin Insulators and AL w/Armor
General Information Side Tie - Single Pin-AL,ACSR,
09-02-02 Vise-Top Wind Spacer and AL w/Armor
09-06-05 Neutral Tie-AL, ACSR, and AL
09-05-01 Formed Ties w/Armor
General Information Secondary Tie-AL,ACSR
09-05-02 Wraplock Top Ties 09-06-06 Top and Side Tie - Single Pin-
09-05-03 Side Ties
09-05-04 Spool Ties Copper, Copperweld, and Steel
09-05-05 Double Side Ties -Hot
09-OS-06 Double Top Ties 09-06-07 Top Tie- Single Pin- Copper,
Copperweld, and Steel-Cold
Top Tie-Double Pin-Copper,
Copperweld, and Steel-Cold
Side Tie - Single Pin-Copper,
Copperweld, and Steel-Cold
09-06-08 Side Tie -Double Pin-Copper,
Copperweld, and Steel-Cold
Secondary and Neutral Spool Tie
—Copper
"`IDAHO
POWM Table of Contents
M,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Effective 04/20 09-01-01
Insulators
General Information For crossarm construction with the neutral on
the crossarm,use a C-Neck insulator to indicate
This section describes insulators used in primary the neutral conductor, see Cat. IDs in table
distribution construction and provides below.
application guidelines.
Insulator Pin Cat. IDs
Porcelain Pin-Type Insulators Cat. ID Application Neck CU Code
4762 Neutral on x arm C D14C
The porcelain pin-type insulator is used on most 4763 12.5 kV F D112F
primary distribution construction that uses
4797 34.5 kV J D135J
fiberglass or wood crossarms.
All insulators are purchased with asemi-
conductive glaze applied to the upper portion of
the insulator. This glaze reduces interference
with radio and TV signals.
All pin-type insulators used in distribution
construction utilize a 1-inch thread diameter to
accommodate the standard steel pin or for
maintenance on a fiberglass"V"arm.
NOTE. Steel pins are not available for use
There are two types of porcelain pin-type on the older heavy-duty wood crossarms
insulators approved for new construction: that are more than 5-3/4-inches deep. Line
post insulators must be used on these
♦ F-Neck insulator—Use on all 12.5-kV crossarms.
construction
The top groove of the F-and the J-Neck pin-type
♦ J-Neck insulator—Used for 25-kV and insulators accept all conductor sizes through
34.5-kV construction 795 Al. The side groove is limited to 336 Al
conductor.
NOTE. Do not use J-Neck insulators for
12.47-kV construction. Refer to page 09-01-04 for a vandal resistant
polyethylene pin-type insulator.
"`PM Insulators

09-01-02 Revised 08/22 Overhead
Line Post Insulators High Contamination Areas
Line post insulators are mainly used for rebuilding Use line post insulators in high contamination
34.5 W lines,maintenance of existing distribution areas. They have an increased leakage distance
lines,underbuilt distribution lines on steel poles, and greater exposed surface to be washed by the
and distribution lines in the Oregon area.Most new rain.
construction uses pin-type insulators.
Other solutions to consider are:
There are tie-top and clamp-top versions of line ♦ Bonding the steel pin, see page
post insulators.Clamp-top insulators use a trunnion 20-01-04.
clamp, see next page.Tie-top insulators use ♦ Applying special coatings; contact the
standard wire ties,see sections 09-05 and 09-06. Methods&Materials Department.
4733 4735 4734
Vertical Tie-top Vertical Clamp-top Horizontal Clamp-top
Post Insulator Post Insulator Post Insulator
Cat. ID Type Neck Application Voltages CU Code
4732 Vertical Tie Top F 12.5 kV DIP12
4733 Vertical Tie Top F 34.5 kV DIP35
4731 Vertical Clamp Top Clamp Top 12.5 kV DIPT12
4735 Vertical Clamp Top Clamp Top 34.5 kV DIPT35
4739* Horizontal Clamp Top Clamp Top 12.5 kV DIPH12**
4734* Horizontal Clamp Top Clamp Top 34.5 kV DIPH35**
Note: The Compatible Unit assembly furnishes only the porcelain insulator and the clamp (for clamp-top
insulators). For ties, see sections 09-05 and-06. For studs, see pages 07-05-02. For the most current
information,see the Materials Manual 02-251-03.
* No-Purch
** Obsolete
Insulators WOP RR.

Overhead Effective 08/22 09-01-03
Trunnion Clamps Rotating Conductor Keeper
Trunnion clamps are used with clamp-top The keeper on Cat. IDs 59727 and 13772 can
versions of line-post insulators to hold conductor flip to accommodate smaller or larger conductor
of varying sizes.All trunnion clamps will fit into sizes of the clamp. To do this,remove the bolts,
any clamp-top insulator.Refer to the table below flip the keeper, and reinstall the bolts.
for trunnion clamp sizing.
Trunnion clamps secure the wire using a
conductor keeper. The �..
keeper is secured by -_
2 bolts,which makes it `\
easier to install in
hotstick situations. -' 6
Anti-Vibration Clamps
Trunnion clamp Cat. IDs 45843,45844, and71 �
45845 are used to reduce conductor vibration.
6
Contact Methods and Materials for more -�
information.
Trunnion Clamp Lookup Table
Conductor #2 2/0 4/0 13361795 #4 1 #2 11/0 2/0 4/0 1397 #3 1 #2 1 #1 1/0 2/0 4/0 1250 500 8A 6A 4A 2A
Cat.IDs Aluminum ACSR Copper Cop erweld
59727
4802
4808
4809
45843 x x x x x x
45844 x x
45845 x
13772
13918
Use with Armor Rod
X Use when vibration damping is needed
OWN—POWER. Insulators

09-01-04 Revised 04/20 Overhead
Polymer Deadend Insulators
The 35 kV polymer deadend insulator, Cat. ID. This insulator has a maximum working load of
4771 is used on all distribution voltages and all 7,500 lbs. The pictorial below illustrates all
conductor sizes up through 795. compatible units associated with the polymer
deadend insulator.
Attaches To Application
CU Codes (Not Part of Code) CU Set Assemblies Notes
Pf� rf�
l f ��
DDLEN35
5/8"Eyenut
Q`
DDLEB35 x 10Q ° 2
I �
5/8"x 12"Eyebolt
DDLC35 [o Q o ° 3
5/8"x 12"Eyebolt C-Shoe
DPRBK2 (ffD ° 4
5/8"Link
DDLS35 o ° 5
5/8"Shackle
DDL101335 6
`~~~ 5/8"x 10"Eyebolt
11Q
DPRBK ° 4 ° 7
°
0
0
Application Notes:
1. This assembly for a polymer insulator connected to a 4. This assembly is used as a primary breaker.
DA bolt on a wood double arm is rarely used. 5. The shackle is used to attach the deadend insulator to
2. This assembly is used for deadending directly off the a fiberglass bracket;DBK18.
pole. 6. This assembly,DDL10B35 is used for a polymer
3. The suspension angle C-shoe assembly with a 12- deadend off a single heavy deadend arm and is now
inch eyebolt is generally used only on#4 ACSR 1-0 obsolete/retired.
construction for angles ranging between 15°and 600. 7. Shackle and insulator for an Apitong arm and for DE
Smaller angles can be turned directly on the pole-top fiberglass crossarm.
pin,see Overhead Manual 11-22.Armor rod is
required at the C-shoe for Al conductors.
Insulators '`pM RR.

Overhead Effective 05/22 09-01-05
Vise-Top/Vandal Resistant Insulators
Vise top polymer pin-type insulators are used are The 35 kV polymer type deadend insulators are
used for all distribution voltages: 12.47 kV,24.9 used on all Distribution voltages.
kV and 34.5 kV.They are only used to hold
jumper conductors(covered or tubed)for avian
protection application such as double dead-end
and tap construction configurations. o °
They can also be used in areas that may be
subject to vandalism. The vise-top insulator is
fabricated from high-density polyethylene. Refer
to Overhead Manual 11-33-02 and the
Installation Guide in the Materials Manual 02- Extension Links
006-01.
NOTE. Do not use on fiberglass V-arms. If additional clearance is required to extend the
primary deadend away from the support
structure or arm,use the eyebolt and clevis of
2 lightweight deadend insulators and deadend
Obsolete since June 2007 clamp clevis to assemble.
0
4800
Hendrix
HPI-35
4800 Hendrix HPI-35
When
using the 35-kV Hendrix polymer insulator(Cat.
ID 4800)on fiberglass arms, a cast aluminum
pin
5167
Pin Extension
extension must be used.
CAUTION. These insulators are not to be used
with the conductor in the side groove because of
in0any.eq of cracking and failure.
"`�R� Insulators

Overhead Revised 03/21 09-02-01
Vise-Top Pin Insulators
Vise-Top Pin Insulators Proper installation of conductor into the
vise-top insulator:
Vise-top pin insulators are made of plastic 1. Once the insulator has been properly
material and HD polyethylene plastic.These installed,remove the top bolt and loosen the
insulators are used for all distribution voltages: bottom bolt
12.47 kV,24.9 kV and 34.5 kV.They are only
used to hold jumper conductors(covered or 2. Install the conductor into the top saddle
tubed) for avian protection application such as position
double dead-end and tap construction 3. Loosely re-install the top bolt
configurations. This insulator has a nylon insert (approximately)half-way in.
good for covered conductor application.
4. Tighten the bottom bolt until the eye off the
bolt breaks off(either by hand or with a hot-
stick). ALWAYS TIGHTEN THE
BOTTOM BOLT FIRST.
5. The eye will break off somewhere betwwen
75-85 in-lbs.
6. Tighten the top bolt using the same method
Tighten the vise-top using a shotgun stick as above.
inserted into the eye ring. Tighten until eye
breaks away(shears)from the plastic bolt.To
unscrew the bolt,use a socket tool. �0
NOTE. DO NOT USE this insulator
for tangent and angled construction
application.
Proper installation of vise-top insulators on a
crossarm or ridge pin:
1. Install the Vise-Top Insulator onto the
crossarm or ridge pin by threading onto 1"
pin(1-2-3 turns).
2. Starting at the 4th turn there will be some
resistance where the threads begin to engage
and compress the mastic.DO NOT
OVERTIGHTEN as it may result in a
micro crack on the insulator.
3. Align the saddle to the conductor.
Cat. ID Description Manufacturer Part Number CU Code
19166 INS VISE-TOP, F NECK, 12.5 or 34.5 kV Victor Insulators VIP 35CT D135V
Hendrix HPI-35VTP-01
For application information, see Overhead Manual Avian pages 11-33-02 and 11-34-05.
"EMS R. Vise-Top Pin Insulators

09-02-02 Reviewed 03121 Overhead
Vise-Top Wind Spacer -
Two vise-top insulators and a threaded rod can
be used as a wind spacer. The vise-top
insulators are screwed onto the rod then
clamped to the overhead conductor to prevent
the conductors from slapping together in windy
areas. Available rod lengths are 24" and 36".
CU Code Major Items Included Cat ID Qty. Ea
DCSR24 24"THREADED SPACER ROD 35938 1
INS VISE-TOP 19166 2
DCSR36 36"THREADED SPACER ROD 21221 1
INS VISE-TOP 19166 2
Vise-Top Pin Insulators POWER,.

Overhead 09-03-01
This page intentionally left blank.
IDAHO
POWM Reserved
M,00amPa,

Overhead 09-04-01
This page intentionally left blank.
IDAHO
POWM Reserved
M,00amPa,

Overhead Revised 09/00 09-05-01
Formed Ties
General Information A formed tie must fit both the conductor and the
insulator. It may be used only with insulators of
Formed ties are used to tie aluminum, aluminum the proper neck size.All ties are factory color
alloy, and ACSR conductors to top groove, side coded, giving conductor size and insulator type
groove, and spool type distribution insulators. to aid in selecting the proper tie.
They are generally used in all applications of
this type except where working space limitations Formed ties are supplied with pads that are
necessitate the use of wire ties and armor rod. placed between the conductor and the insulator.
Formed ties are not available for use on copper, This pad prevents the aluminum conductor from
copperweld, or steel conductors. damage caused by rubbing directly on the
ceramic insulator.
Formed ties are simple to apply on both hot and
cold lines and assure uniform tie installations. NOTE. Because of the potential for tracking,
They offer the same vibration damping and do not tape the pad to the insulator.
flashover protection as wire ties with armor rod
while also providing superior abrasion Formed ties are applied without armor rods.
protection.
Tie Elastomer Center Section
Identification— _Conductor
\ Tag Color Code
Conductor insulator
Pad Color Code Color Code
Identification
Tag
Pad Identification
,-'Tag -Pad
Insulator
Color Code
/ \—Conductor
Insulator Color Code Color Code
and Crossover Mark Identification
Tape
Insulator Tie Pad
Color Code
Conductor Conductor
Color Code Color Code
\ Tie Pad Insulator
Identification Color Code
Tape
IDAHO
OWN—POWER. Formed Ties
M--.m 'Y

09-05-02 Revised 04/06 Overhead
Wraplock Top Ties post-type insulators. It may also be re-formed
into a C and used as a slack-span deadend. For
The formed top tie, commonly called a the slack-span deadend application, use an F-
Wraplock,is used for securing primary neck tie on a J-neck insulator.
aluminum conductor to the top groove of pin- or
Cat. ID Wire Size Conductor Color Code CU Code
F-Neck Ties(Color Code Yellow)
4237 #4 ACSR Orange DFTF4
4238 #2 AA&ACSR Red DFTF2
4240 2/0 AA&ACSR Blue DFTF20
4242 4/0 AA&ACSR Red DFTF40
4241 336 AL Brown DFTF336
46657" 397 AL Orange DFTF397
4239 795 AL Brown DFTF795
J-Neck Ties(Color Code Green)
4243 #4 ACSR Orange DFTJ4
4244 #2 AA &ACSR Red DFTJ2
4245 2/0 AA &ACSR Blue DFTJ20
4246 4/0 AA &ACSR Red DFTJ40
4248 336 AL Brown DFTJ336
4249 795 AL Brown DFTJ795
* May be used on 2/0 ACSR with armor rod.
Tie / Elastomer Center Section
Pad\ Conductors Insulator
Identification Color Code Color Code
Tag
Wraplock Tie
Formed Ties '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 09/00 09-05-03
Side Ties groove of pin or post type insulators. It may be
used on insulators mounted vertically or
The formed side tie is used to secure horizontally but must be used only with
aluminum primary conductors to the side insulators of the proper neck and groove
dimensions.
Cat. ID Wire Size Conductor Color Code CU Code
F-Neck Ties(Color Code Yellow)
4254 #4 ACSR Orange DFSF4
4255 #2AA& ACSR Red DFSF2
4256 2/0 AA&ACSR Blue DFSF20
4257 4/0 AA&ACSR Red DFSF40
4258 336AL Yellow D FSF 336
J-Neck Ties(Color Code Green)
4259 #4 ACSR Orange DFSJ4
4260 2/0 AA&ACSR Blue DFSJ20
4261 336 AL Yellow DFSJ336
Identification Conductor
Tag Color Code
— Pad
Inciilatnr Cnlnr Cnrta
7 _ ff
Side Tie
EM�M Formed Ties
M--.m 'y

09-05-04 Revised 09/00 Overhead
Spool Ties bolts and neutral offset brackets. The spool
insulators can be vertically or horizontally
The formed spool tie is used to secure aluminum mounted. The conductor should be positioned so
neutral conductors to spool insulators on upset it will adequately bear against the insulator.
Cat. ID Wire Size Conductor Color Code CU Code
4247 4 ACSR Orange DFSP4
4251 2 AA &ACSR Red DFSP2
4252 2/0 AA&ACSR Blue DFSP20
4253 336 AL Purple DFSP336
Identification Conductor
Tag Color Code
— Pad
Spool Tie
Formed Ties '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 09/00 09-05-05
Double Side Tie The formed double side tie has two applications
for primary distribution:
The formed double side tie is used to secure
aluminum primary conductors to the side groove l. Tying the conductor to the side groove of
of pin type insulators where double crossarms double pin or post insulators on line angle
and double pins are used. construction.
2. One half of a double side tie assembly (i.e.
one grip)may be used as a light duty slack
span deadend.
Cat. ID Wire Size Conductor Color Code CU Code
CIF-Neck Double Side Ties
4262 4 ACSR Orange DFDSF4
4263 2 AAC Red DFDSF2
4264 2/0 AAC Blue DFDSF20
4265 336 AL Purple DFDSF336
J-Neck Double Side Ties
4266 4 ACSR Orange DFDSJ4
4267 2 AAC Red DFDSJ2
4268 2/0 AAC Blue DFDSJ20
4269 336 AL Brown DFDSJ336
Pad Identification
Tag \
Conductor
Color Code
Insulator Color Code Insulator Color Code
and Crossover Mark and Crossover Mark
Formed Double Side Tie
11111IM—PM Formed Ties
M--.m 'Y

09-05-06 Revised 09/00 Overhead
Double Top Tie double arms and insulators. These would be
typically found at Grade B crossings. Since
The formed double top tie, also called a double these ties are used only infrequently, only J-neck
support tie, is used on tangent lines that call for types are stocked. On 12.5 kV lines, substitute J-
neck insulators at double arm locations.
Cat. ID Wire Size Conductor Color Code CU Code
J-Neck Double Top Ties(Color Code Green)
4277 4 ACSR Orange DFDTJ4
4278 2 AA &ACSR Red DFDTJ2
4279 2/0 AA&ACSR Blue DFDTJ20
4280 336 AL Purple DFDTJ336
4281 795 Green D F DTJ 795
Identification
Insulator Tape
Color Code �Tie Pad
Conductor <=ConductorColor Code
i
Tie Pad Insulator
Color Code
Identification
Tape
Formed Double Top Tie
Formed Ties '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 04/20 09-06-01
Wire Ties
General Information ♦ The tie make-up distance out from the
insulator is critical with aluminum
Wire ties are used for securing the conductor to conductor.The optimum distance is six
the insulator.These ties should provide a firm times the diameter of the over armor.This is
binding between the conductor,the insulator,the covered more fully in the tie diagrams. Page
wire tie, and should reinforce the conductor on 09-06-04
both sides of the insulator.
♦ Ties should be applied by hand or by hot-
Correct installation of the wire tie is important tools without the use of pliers.The lengths
so that the conductor is not damaged.Any shown in the tables beginning on page 09-
looseness will result in chafing or injury to the 06-02 include an allowance for gripping.
conductor. The extra should be cut from each end as the
tie is completed.
The following installation considerations ♦ Do not re-use a wire tie.
provide some guidelines for correctly installing
the wire tie.Additional guidelines illustrating the ♦ Never allow the wire tie to cross diagonally
make-up of each type of wire tie are shown over the conductor in the insulator groove.
beginning on page 09-06-04. (Also known as a saddle tie)
♦ Do not use a copper wire tie that is annealed
Installation Considerations or injured by overheating.
♦ Properly select a top or side groove position Armor Rod
so that the insulator takes the strain and the
tie merely holds the conductor in place. Because of the soft nature of aluminum and
♦ Avoid nicking the line conductor. ACSR, additional protection to these conductors
is usually provided when wire ties are used. The
♦ Use only soft wire for making ties. installation of armor rod at the insulator restricts
♦ The direction of serve of a wire tie is vibration, conductor fatigue and provides
extremely important. If improperly made, flashover protection to the conductor, since any
the conductor will rotate and loosen the tie. arcing will concentrate its heating effect on the
When properly made, as one part tends to armor rather than on aluminum strands.
loosen,the other tightens and the tie will
remain tight. Generally, armor rods are not required where
manufactured formed ties are used to hold and
protect the conductor. In addition,they are not
used with wire ties where the spans are short and
lightly tensioned.
"`PAHO
OWM Wire Ties
M­­.m 'Y

09-06-02 Reviewed 04/20 Overhead
Table of Wire Ties for Pin-Type Insulators
Conductor Make-up Size Wire tie
Size Diameter Distance (soft wire) Application Approximate Length
(D) (6D) 12.5 kV 34.5 kV
A CSR
#4 .542 w/a* 3 1/4" #4 Al Top 7'-3" T-9"
Side 6'-0" 6'-6"
#2 .617 w/a* 3 3/4" #4 Al Top 7'-5" T-11"
Side 6'-3" 6'-9"
1/0 .732 w/a* 4 12" #4 Al Top 8'-3" 8'-9"
Side 7'-3" T-9"
2/0 .781 w/a* 4 3/4" #4 Al Top 8'-6" 9'-0"
Side 7'-4" T-10"
4/0 .927 w/a* 5 W" #4 Al Top 9'-3" 9'-9"
Side T-11" 8'-5"
397.5 1.283 w/a* 7 W" #4 Al Top 11'-6" 12'-0"
Side 9'-11" 10'-5"
Aluminum
336.4 .666 w/o* 4" #4 Al Top T-11" 8'-5"
Side 6'-9" T-3"
795 1.026 w/o* — — Top &Side Not known
Copper
#6 — — #6 Cu Top T-10" 4'-4"
Side 4'-4" 4'-10"
Hot two 2'-0" two 2'-6"
#4 — — #6 Cu Top 4'-2" 4'-8"
Side 4'-8" 5'-2"
Hot two 2'-0" two 2'-6"
#2 — — #6 Cu Top 4'-6" 5'-0"
Side 5'-0" 5'-6"
Hot two 2'-6" two T-0"
#1 — — #4 Cu Top 4'-6" 5'-0"
Side 5-0" 5'-6"
Hot two 2'-6" two T-0"
1/0 — — #4 Cu Top 4'-8" 5'-2"
Side 5'-2" 5'-8"
Hot two 2'-8" two T-2"
2/0 — — #4 Cu Top 4'-10" 5'-4"
Side 5'-4" 5'-10"
Hot two 2'-10" two 3'-4"
4/0 — — #4 Cu Top 5'-2" 5'-8"
Side 5'-8" 6'-2"
Hot two 3'-0" two 3'-6"
* w/a =diameter measured with armorrod;
w/o =diameter measured withoutarmor rod.
I DAM
Wire Ties W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 04/20 09-06-03
Table of Wire Ties for Pin Type Insulators (cont.)
Conductor Make-up Size Wire tie
Size Diameter Distance (soft wire) Application Approximate Length
(D) (6D) 12.5 kV 34.5 kV
Copperweld
2A — — #6 Cu Top 4'-8" 5'-2"
Side 5'-2" 5'-8"
Hot two 2'-6" two 3'-0"
4A — — #6 Cu Top 4'-4" 4'-10"
Side 4'-10" 5'-4"
Hot two 2'-6" two 3'-0"
6A — — #6 Cu Top 3'-10" 4'-4"
Side 4'-4" 4'-10"
Hot two 2'-0" two 2'-6"
8A — — #6 Cu Top 3'-8" 4'-2"
Side 4'-2" 4'-8"
Hot two 2'-0" two 2'-6"
Steel
6-3SS — — #6 Cu Top 4'-6" 5'-0"
Side 5-0" 5'-6"
Hot two 2'-0" two 2'-6"
Table of Neutral and Secondary Wire Ties for Spool Insulators
Conductor Make-up Size Wire tie
Size Diameter Distance (soft wire)
D 6D Approximate Length
ACSR (AR) &Aluminum Alloy(AA)
#4 .542 w/a* 3 '4" #4 Al 5'-8"
#2 .617 w/a* 3 3/4" #4 Al 5'-11"
2/0 .781 w/a* 4 3/4" #4 Al 7'-0"
4/0 .927 w/a* 5 12" #4 Al 7'-7"
Aluminum (AL)
#2 .584 w/o* 3 12" #4 Al 5'-10"
336.4 .666 w/o* 4" #4 Al 6'-5"
Copper(Cu)
#6 — — #6 Cu 3'-8"
#4 — — #6 Cu 4'-0"
#2 — — #6 Cu 4'-4"
2/0 #4 Cu 5-0"
4/0 #4 Cu 5'-4"
* w/a =diameter measured with armor rod;
w/o =diameter measured withoutarmor rod.
E'�IDAHO
�130MR, Wire Ties

09-06-04 Reviewed 04/20 Overhead
Top Tie—Single Pin—AL, ACSR,and AL with Armor
6D
1
D
Looking Down 1 Turn 3 Turns 2 Turns 2 Turns 2 Turns
Close Close Close Open Close
Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch
Side Tie—Single Pin—AL, ACSR,and AL with Armor
60
Looking Down
D
1-1/2 2 Turns 3 Turns 2-1/2 Turns
90 deg. Turns Close Close Close
Close Pitch Pitch Pitch
Pitch
Wire Ties '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 04/20 09-06-05
Neutral Tie—AL, ACSR, and AL with Armor
Pole
Looking Down 6D
D
1-1/2 2 Turns 3 Turns 2 Turns
Turns Close Open Close
White Spool7 Close Pitch Pitch Pitch
Pitch
Secondary Tie—AL, ACSR
2-
Turns 2 Turns 3 Turns 2 Turns
Close Close Open Close
Looking Down Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch 1
1
D
Secondary -
Spool Insulator
6D
`p" AHO
pR. Wire Ties
M--.m 'Y

09-06-06 Reviewed 04/20 Overhead
Top and Side Tie—Single Pin—Copper, Copperweld, and Steel—Hot
Step 1
Two tie wires each tied
to the insulator with
3 close pitch turns as shown
Step 2
Top tie
2 Turns at 5 Turns at approx.
close pitch 45-degree helix
Step 2
Side tie
2 Turns 5 Turns at approx.
Close 45-deg.helix
Pitch
Wire Ties '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 04/20 09-06-07
Top Tie—Single Pin—Copper, Copperweld, and Steel—Cold
Looking Down
A /N A A r% A 977 � f% A A A eN
VV
Final Wraps
6 Turns at
Initial Wraps approx.45-deg.helix
2 Turns at
close pitch
Top Tie—Double Pin—Copper, Copperweld, and Steel—Cold
Looking Down
Under Under Under
Under �� � Over Under � 7/_Under
V V V V
V V V V W V
Final Wraps Final Wraps Final Wraps
ffFurns at 6 Turns at 6-1/2 Turns at
approx.45-deg.helix Initial Wraps Initial Wraps approx.45-deg.helix approx.45-deg.helix
2 Turns at 2 Turns
close pitch Close Pitch
Side Tie—Single Pin—Copper, Copperweld, and Steel—Cold
Looking Down
Final Wraps
Initial Wraps 6 Turns at approx.
90 deg. 2-1/2 Turns 45-deg helix
Close Pitch
EM�M Wire Ties
M­­.m 'Y

09-06-08 Reviewed 04/20 Overhead
Side Tie—Double Pin—Copper, Copperweld, and Steel—Cold
Final Wraps Initial Wraps Final Wraps Initial Wraps Final Wraps
IFurns 2Furns 6 Turns 2Furns ®Furns
at approx. Close Pitch at approx. Close Pitch at approx.
45-deg helix 45-deg helix 45-deg helix
�A�
dmr%
Under Under
- Over Over Under
Secondary and Neutral Spool Tie—Copper
2Furns 5 Turns at 1 Turn
Close approx. Close
Pitch 45-deg.helix Pitch
Wire Ties "` R„

Overhead Revised 01/14 10-00-01
Table of Contents
10- Conductor Data & Stringing Charts
10-01-01 Conductor Data 10-03-01 Conductor Sag Tables
Overhead Conductors Introduction
Grounding Conductors Initial Sag Tables
10-01-02 Bare Overhead Conductor Data Final Sag Tables
and Properties 10-03-02 Initial Sag Table-#4 ACSR-
10-01-03 Multiplex Conductor Data and 350'Ruling Span
Properties Initial Sag Table-2/0 ACSR-
Weatherproof conductor Data and 350'Ruling Span
Properties 10-03-03 Initial Sag Table- 336 A1-
UG Service Entrance(USE)Cable 300'Ruling Span
for use on Overhead Initial Sag Table- 397 Al-
Applications Conductor Data 300'Ruling Span
and Properties 10-03-04 Initial Sag Table- 795 Al-
300'Ruling Span
10-02-01 Conductor Sag 10-03-05 Bare Copper
Conductor Sag Initial Sag Tables
Sag Designations 10-03-06 Copperweld& Steel
Initial Sag Initial Sag Table
Final Sag
10-02-02 Conductor Tension
Ruling Span
10-02-03 Conditions and Limitations for
Sag Specifications
Measurement of Sag
Transit Method
10-02-04 Stop Watch Method
10-02-05 Time- Sag Table
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
M,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Revised 12/19 1 U-01-01
Conductor Data
Overhead Conductors UG Cable for use on Overhead Applications
Cat. ID Size CU Code
This section addresses mechanical and electrical Single ConductorAluminum
properties for bare and covered overhead 32928 2/0 DAW20
conductors. 3628 4/0 DAW40
3634 500 DAW 500
For other conductor parameters and data see
section 25. Multiplex Conductor
Cat. ID Size Neutral CU Code
Bare Aluminum and ACSR
Duplex Aluminum
Cat. ID Size Strand CU Code 28803 #6 #6 ACSR DS2P6
28457 #4 ACSR 7/1 DR4 Triplex Aluminum
28469 2/0 ACSR 6/1 DR20 3474 #6 #6 ACSR D(S)3P6
28470 336 AL 19 DA336 29010 #2 #2 AAC D(S)3P2
28475 795 AL 37 DA795 28477 2/0 2/0 ACSR D(S)3P20
3479 4/0 4/0 ACSR D(S)3P40
Bare Copper Quadruplex Aluminum
Cat. ID Size Strand CU Code 28476 #2 #2 AAC D(S)4P2
Hard Drawn 28478 2/0 2/0 ACSR D(S)4P20
3501 #6 Solid DC6(S) 28805 4/0 4/0 ACSR D(S)4P40
3502 #4 Solid DC4
28816 #2 7 DC2
3508 2/0 19 DC20
Copperweld Grounding Conductors
3658 #8 Solid DCW8
3659 8A 2/1 DCW8A Soft Drawn Bare Copper
3660 6A 2/1 DCW6A
3661 4A 2/1 DCW4A Cat. ID Size Strand Ampacity
3662 2A 2/1 DCW2A 28806 #6 Solid 130
28807 #4 Solid 170
Weatherproof 19658 #4 7 170
28808 #2 7 230
Cat. ID Size CU Code 28809 2/0 19 355
Single Conductor Copper 28810 4/0 19 480
28812 #2 DWC2 28811 250 19 530
3524 2/0 none 3519 350 37 650
28813 4/0 none 3520 500 37 810
28814 350 none
28815 500 none
Rr Conductor Data

10-01-02 Revised 12/19 Overhead
Bare Overhead Conductor Data and Proprieties
Max* Ultimate Loading (Ibs/ft)
Continuous Diameter Weight Strength Vertical Horizontal
Cat. ID Size Ampacity (in) (Ibs/ft) (Ibs) Wt+1/4"ice 4 Ibs/sq ft
A CSR
28457 #4 152 0.257 .0670 2360 0.2246 0.2523
28469 2/0 312 0.447 .1831 5310 0.3998 0.3157
Aluminum
28470 336 536 0.666 .3160 6150 0.6008 0.3887
28475 795 932 1.026 .7464 13900 1.1431 0.5087
Copper
3500 #8 101 0.1285 .0500 826 0.1677 0.2095
3501 #6 135 0.1620 .0794 1280 0.2075 0.2207
3502 #4 181 0.2043 .1263 1970 0.2675 0.2348
28816 #2 250 0.2920 .2049 3045 0.3714 0.2640
Copperweld
3658 #8 116 0.277 .1385 5174 0.3023 0.2590
3659 8A 112 0.199 .0743 2233 0.2139 0.2330
3660 6A 146 0.230 .1016 2585 0.2508 0.2433
3661 4A 196 0.290 .1615 3938 0.3294 0.2633
3662 2A 261 0.366 .2568 5876 0.4483 0.2887
* Based on 40°C ambient and 40°C rise,3mph wind,0.5 conductor emissivity,full sunshine.
Conductor Data W.-POWER,

Overhead Revised 12/19 1 U-01-03
Multiplex Conductor Data and Properties
Max Diameter(in) Insulation Cable Weight Ultimate
Cat. ID Size Ampacity Phase Neutral Thickness(in) OD(in) (Ibs/ft) Strength (Ibs)
Duplex Aluminum
28803 #6 110 .184 .198 .045 0.470 0.077 1,190
Triplex Aluminum
3474 #6 110 .184 .198 .045 0.550 0.118 1,190
29010 #2 195 .292 .292 .045 0.770 0.238 1,350
28477 2/0 300 .414 .447 .060 1.080 0.528 5,300
3479 4/0 405 .522 .563 .060 1.320 0.794 8,350
Quadruplex Aluminum
28476 #2 175 .292 .292 .045 0.870 0.326 1,350
28478 2/0 280 .414 .447 .060 1.240 0.685 5,300
28805 4/0 375 .522 .563 .060 1.500 1.045 8,350
TC= 65°C (149°F); Wind=1.36 mph
Weatherproof Conductor Data and Properties
Max Bare Strand Insulation Cable Weight Ultimate
Cat. ID Size Ampacity Dia. (in) Thickness(in) OD(in) (Ibs/ft) Strength (Ibs)
Single Conductor Copper
28812 #2 223 .292 .045 0.386 .2289 3,045
3524 2/0 330 .414 .060 0.534 0.464 5,926
28813 4/0 441 .522 .060 0.642 0.723 9,154
28814 350 607 .678 .060 0.803 1.1509 15,140
28815 500 750 .813 .075 0.967 1.6454 21,590
TC= 75°C (167°F); Wind=3 mph
UG Service Entrance (USE) Cable for use on Overhead Applications Conductor
Data and Properties
Max Insulation Cable Weight Maximum*
Cat. ID Size Ampacity Thickness(in) OD(in) (Ibs/ft) Tension (Ibs)
Single ConductorAluminum
32928 2/0 245 .080 0.570 0.181 842
3628 4/0 335 .080 0.680 0.268 1282
3634 500 600 .095 0.990 0.592 3000
" Cable should notbetensioned
Rr Conductor Data

Overhead Reviewed 08/21 10-02-01
Conductor Sag
This document contains brief descriptions of Final Sag.From its initial sag,the conductor
conductor sag, conductor tension, and ruling will continue to creep at a declining rate over
span.These terms must be understood to time as it is subjected to cyclical temperatures,
properly apply the values listed in the sag tables wind, and ice loading conditions.After 10 years
which appear in Overhead Manual(OH) 10-02, the creep will stabilize, and the conductor will
10-03 and 25-02. not stretch further unless the design tension is
exceeded. The conductor is now designated to
The conditions in which the sag tables apply and be at Final Sag.
two methods for measuring sag in the field are
also discussed. The rate at which the conductor stretches from
the initial sag to its final sag position may be
Conductor Sag approximated as follows:
Table 1 Rate of Creep from Initial to Final Sag
Conductor sag is the amount of vertical drop that Time %of Total Creep
the midpoint of a span of conductor falls below
its end supports. It is determined by the vertical 1 hour 0%
0
position of its endpoints,length of the span, 1 month 35%
amount of tension in the conductor, and weight 1 year 60%
of the conductor per foot. 10 years 100%
Temperature changes,wind loading,ice loading, Final Sag tables are generally used for design
and elongation of the conductor due to aging and purposes only;to make certain that final
stretching affect the sag of a conductor and must minimum clearances will be met after the
be taken into consideration in the design of a conductor reaches its final sag condition. They
line. are based upon the assumption that the
conductor has been stressed to the maximum
Sag Designations tension called for in the design process.
Final Sag tables are not generally used for field
Initial Sag.A conductor erected in a span,while sagging, except on the rare occasion when an old
not having been previously stressed to a used conductor,that has already been stretched
maximum design tension,will begin to stretch or from previous loadings,is being installed.
creep as soon as it is pulled through the stringing
blocks.When the conductor has been at this CAUTION. Since NESC Code clearances must
initial tension for one hour or less, it is be met,including after the conductor has
designated to be at Initial Sag. stretched,the Final Sag tables must be used for
Tables carrying this designation are used to aid clearance calculations; see OH 25 Reference
in field sagging conductors,which have not been Data, and 25-02-02 Final Sag Tables.
previously installed.
OWN—POWER. Conductor Sag

10-02-02 Reviewed 08/21 Overhead
Do not confuse them with Initial Sag Tables, If all the spans in a section of line between two
conductor data and stringing charts, found in deadends are the same length,the formation of a
Overhead Manual(OH) 10-03-02. uniform thickness of ice combined with a wind
load results in equal conductor tension in all the
Conductor Tension spans.
Conductor tension is the sum of all the forces However, span lengths vary.When ice and wind
acting upon the conductor which tend to stretch loads are applied to these real-life spans, longer
or extend it. The conductor tension between spans are subject to greater conductor tensions
fixed position deadends is influenced by the than short ones.
conductor weight,ice and wind loading, amount Unequal tensions are equalized through slight
of sag, and temperature. movements of the structures in the section.
Initial conductor tensions,or stringing tensions, Unless the conductor is strung to limit this
are shown as design conditions for the initial sag condition, it is possible for the conductor tension
tables in OH 10-03. in the long spans to reach a value greater than
Loaded conductor tensions, or design tensions, desired,resulting in damage to the line or its
are based upon the initial tensions and the structures. To avoid this problem, string the
conductor to a tension that is based upon a
NESC medium loading conditions,which calculated span called a ruling span.
stipulate that it's assumed that the conductor is
loaded with 1/4 inch of ice at 15°F with a 4- The sag data contained in the tables in OH 10-03
pound wind. The final sag tables are determined and 25-02 are based on specific ruling spans
using these loaded tensions, see OH 25 considered typical for the system. Each table
Reference Data. specifies the ruling span on which it's based.
On existing lines,the span and sag data are Methods for calculating the ruling span are
obtained by actual field measurements. given in OH 25-01.
Calculate the conductor tension using the The individual spans between deadends should
appropriate programs or equations Contact not exceed the ruling span by more than 20%.
Methods and Materials Department for Where ground contour or taller poles permit
assistance. larger spans,the conductor should be dead
ended at each end of the large span to prevent
Ruling Span excessive tension unbalance.
A ruling span is a calculated length for which the
conductor tension best represents the average
conductor tension in the spans between two
deadends,which varies with temperature and
tension.
Conductor Sag '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 08/21 10-02-03
Conditions and Limitations for Sag Once the sag has been determined by one of
Specifications these two methods, compare the results against
the appropriate initial sag table value.The sag
The sags specified in the tables in Overhead must be set for the proper conductor size, span
Manual(OH) 10-03 and 25-02 apply only for length,temperature,and wind conditions to meet
those parameters that they are based on. Because proper clearance and tension values. If the
of the dynamic nature of the conductor position, measured value differs from the table value,the
sags are best determined using software line must be adjusted to meet the table value.
available through Methods and Materials
Department. Transit Method
Although, some basic formulas for calculating
sag and the conductor tension are provided in Transit method is the most accurate for
OH 25 the results are erroneous,unless all the determining sag and is the recommended
parameters such as wind,ice loading, and method. Follow the steps below to determine
temperature are considered. sag:
If any of the following conditions are 1.When stringing conductor with supports at the
encountered, contact Methods and Materials same or nearly the same elevation, see
Department for assistance. illustration below.
♦ If any span exceeds the Ruling Span by more
than 20%. S i _ SF Si / IS i
Table 2 Typical ruling spans are as follows: Target or Sighting)
sagging in Minimum Cleaeavnce
el
350 feet-#4 and 2/0 conductor to Ground
300 feet-336 and 795 All Aluminum
175 feet-Copper Urban
275 feet-Copper Rural Span length
500 feet-Copperweld and Steel Rural
♦ If the ground profile is such that up-strain may Where: Si=Initial Stringing Sag
be encountered. SF=Final Maximum Sag
♦ If expected loading conditions are more severe 2.When stringing conductor with supports at
than medium loading conditions. different elevations, see equation below and
Medium loading conditions are 1/4 inch of illustration on the next page.
ice,a 4-pound wind, and a temperature of
15°F. If the% slope, (H/L x 100), is greater than
♦ If existing circuits which were not accounted 10%,the slope span(Ls)must be computed
for in the design are already in place on the and used to determine the proper stringing
poles. sag.
Measurement of Sag
There are two methods for measuring sag in a
line:
♦ Transit method
Use this method where practical; it's
more accurate for determining sag.
♦ Stop-watch method.
"`�R� Conductor Sag
­­­.m 'Y

10-02-04 Reviewed 08/21 Overhead
an(�sl The relation between"sag"and"time for return
H I- Slope span s; waves"is independent of span length,tension, or
s Si the size and type of conductor.
Si Target for
Sighting level sagging in
Minimum Clearance conductor As in the Transit Method,if the elevation
to Ground difference is greater than 10%,the slope span
(Ls)must be computed and used to determine
the proper stringing sag; see Equation 1.
I� Span length(L)
Si = Initial Stringing Sag A sharp blow on the conductor near one support
SF = Final Maximum Sag will initiate a wave,which will travel to the next
support where it is partially reflected. The
Use the equation below to compute the slope reflection will travel back to be reflected again
span and use as a stringing span. from the near support.These reflected waves
will continue back and forth until they are
Equation 1 damped out by energy loss.
Ls = J2 +Hz The return waves may be detected by a person
on the pole placing their hand lightly on the
LS = Slope span conductor. Or,readings may be made from the
L = Span length ground by throwing a light,dry cord over the
H = Difference in height between poles conductor about three feet from the support.
This cord may be used to initiate the wave as
Stop-Watch Method well as to detect its return,removing the need to
Stop-Watch Method is an alternate method, climb the structure.
which involves the timing of a traveling
mechanical shock wave on a conductor as it is The length of time required for the wave to
reflected,back and forth,between supports. It return to the near support corresponds to a
also uses the Time-Sag table. definite sag. Table 3 Time Sag illustrates this
relationship, see table on next page.
This method requires a stop-watch as the
calculation involves a square of the time and, NOTE: To calculate the time of return of other
consequently, any error is magnified in the waves, select the arithmetic combination of
calculated sag value. For convenience,the Time- values from the table that correspond to the
Sag table is usually used,but sag may be number of wave returns desired, see Table 3
computed from the following equation: Time Sag.
Equation 2 For example,the time of return of the 8th wave
2 is the sum of the 3rd and 5th,while the 10th
S = 1.0063
( t wave return is twice the time of the 5th.
\N )
w
S = Sag in Feet WARNING: Take care to count"one"on the
t = time in seconds
first return of the wave. In other words,count
"hit, one,two,three, etc."
Nw = Number of return waves counted
Conductor Sag '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 08121 10-02-05
Table 3 Time Sag
Return of Wave
3rd 5th 3rd 5th 3rd 5th 3rd 5th
Sag Time Time Sag Time Time Sag Time Time Sag Time Time
(ft) (sec.) (sec.) (ft.) (sec.) (sec.) (ft.) (sec.) (sec.) (ft.) (sec.) (sec.)
0.5 2.1 3.5 4.4 6.3 10.5 8.3 8.6 14.4 12.2 10.4 17.4
0.6 2.3 3.9 4.5 6.3 10.6 8.4 8.7 14.4 12.3 10.5 17.5
0.7 2.5 4.2 4.6 6.4 10.7 8.5 8.7 14.5 12.4 10.5 17.6
0.8 2.7 4.5 4.7 6.5 10.8 8.6 8.8 14.6 12.5 10.6 17.6
0.9 2.8 4.7 4.8 6.6 10.9 8.7 8.8 14.7 12.6 10.6 17.7
1.0 3.0 5.0 4.9 6.6 11.0 8.8 8.9 14.8 12.7 10.7 17.8
1.1 3.1 5.2 5.0 6.7 11.1 8.9 8.9 14.9 12.8 10.7 17.8
1.2 3.3 5.5 5.1 6.8 11.3 9.0 9.0 15.0 12.9 10.7 17.9
1.3 3.4 5.7 5.2 6.8 11.4 9.1 9.0 15.0 13.0 10.8 18.0
1.4 3.5 5.9 5.3 6.9 11.5 9.2 9.1 15.1 13.1 10.8 18.0
1.5 3.7 6.1 5.4 6.9 11.6 9.3 9.1 15.2 13.2 10.9 18.1
1.6 3.8 6.3 5.5 7.0 11.7 9.4 9.2 15.3 13.3 10.9 18.2
1.7 3.9 6.5 5.6 7.1 11.8 9.5 9.2 15.4 13.4 10.9 18.2
1.8 4.0 6.7 5.7 7.1 11.9 9.6 9.3 15.4 13.5 11.0 18.3
1.9 4.1 6.9 5.8 7.2 12.0 9.7 9.3 15.5 13.6 11.0 18.4
2.0 4.2 7.0 5.9 7.3 12.1 9.8 9.4 15.6 13.7 11.1 18.4
2.1 4.3 7.2 6.0 7.3 12.2 9.9 9.4 15.7 13.8 11.1 18.5
2.2 4.4 7.4 6.1 7.4 12.3 10.0 9.5 15.8 13.9 11.1 18.6
2.3 4.5 7.6 6.2 7.4 12.4 10.1 9.5 15.8 14.0 11.2 18.6
2.4 4.6 7.7 6.3 7.5 12.5 10.2 9.6 15.9 14.1 11.2 18.7
2.5 4.7 7.9 6.4 7.6 12.6 10.3 9.6 16.0 14.2 11.3 18.8
2.6 4.8 8.0 6.5 7.6 12.7 10.4 9.6 16.1 14.3 11.3 18.8
2.7 4.9 8.2 6.6 7.7 12.8 10.5 9.7 16.2 14.4 11.3 18.9
2.8 5.0 8.3 6.7 7.7 12.9 10.6 9.7 16.2 14.5 11.4 19.0
2.9 5.1 8.5 6.8 7.8 13.0 10.7 9.8 16.3 14.6 11.4 19.0
3.0 5.2 8.6 6.9 7.9 13.1 10.8 9.8 16.4 14.7 11.5 19.1
3.1 5.3 8.8 7.0 7.9 13.2 10.9 9.9 16.5 14.8 11.5 19.2
3.2 5.3 8.9 7.1 8.0 13.3 11.0 9.9 16.5 14.9 11.5 19.2
3.3 5.4 9.1 7.2 8.0 13.4 11.1 10.0 16.6 15.0 11.6 19.3
3.4 5.5 9.2 7.3 8.1 13.5 11.2 10.0 16.7
3.5 5.6 9.3 7.4 8.1 13.6 11.3 10.1 16.8
3.6 5.7 9.5 7.5 8.2 13.7 11.4 10.1 16.8
3.7 5.8 9.6 7.6 8.2 13.7 11.5 10.1 16.9
3.8 5.8 9.7 7.7 8.3 13.8 11.6 10.2 17.0
3.9 5.9 9.8 7.8 8.4 13.9 11.7 10.2 17.0
4.0 6.0 10.0 7.9 8.4 14.0 11.8 10.3 17.1
4.1 6.1 10.1 8.0 8.5 14.1 11.9 10.3 17.2
4.2 6.1 10.2 8.1 8.5 14.2 12.0 10.4 17.3
4.3 6.2 10.3 1 8.2 8.6 14.3 1 12.1 10.4 17.3
MIMPMR, Conductor Sag

Overhead Revised 08/21 10-03-01
Initial Conductor Sag Tables
Introduction Final Sag Tables
The sag tables provided in this document list sag Final sag tables are used when designing
values for common conductors that are used in overhead power lines to determine the
the construction of overhead distribution lines. clearances after loading has occurred.
Initial Sag Tables Caution.Do not use the final sag tables
when stringing new conductor.
The Initial Sag tables are used to determine the
proper sag and tension for new conductor All final sag tables are found in Overhead
installations. Manual(OH)25-02.
Caution.Do not use the initial sag tables
to establish clearances.
To ensure proper tension,take care to use the
sag value that corresponds to the appropriate
span length, conductor size, and temperature.
For questions regarding the sag tables or for
information not found in the tables contact the
Methods&Materials Department.
"`�R. Initial Conductor Sag Tables

10-03-02 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Initial Sag Table - # 4 ACSR (Swanate) - 350' Ruling Span*
Caution. DO NOT use initial sag tables to establish clearances,refer to OH 25-02.
Design Conditions: 350'ruling span; 1,000 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10, 20' 30' 40' 50' 60' 70' 80' 90, 100, 110, 120'
Tension(Ibs) 493 459 424 392 361 329 304 279 254 237 220 203
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
210 9 10 10 12 13 13 15 16 17 19 21 22
230 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 23 25 26
250 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 23 24 27 29 31
270 15 16 17 19 21 22 24 27 29 32 34 36
290 17 18 20 22 24 25 28 31 33 36 39 42
310 20 21 23 25 27 29 32 35 38 42 45 48
330 22 24 26 28 31 33 36 40 43 47 51 54
350 25 27 29 32 35 37 41 45 48 53 57 61
370 28 30 32 36 39 41 46 50 54 59 64 68
390 31 33 36 40 43 46 51 56 60 66 71 76
410 34 37 40 44 48 51 56 62 66 73 78 84
420 36 39 42 46 50 53 59 65 69 76 82 88
* For span lengths that are not included in the table,contact the Methods&Materials Department.
Initial Sag Table - 2/0 ACSR (Quail) - 350' Ruling Span
Caution. DO NOT use initial sag tables to establish clearances,refer to OH 25-02.
Design Conditions: 350'ruling span; 1,850 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp CF) 100 201 301 40, 501 601 701 80, 90, 100, 1100 1201
Tension(Ibs) 1271 1186 1101 1024 946 869 808 746 685 641 598 554
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
210 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 21 22
230 12 13 13 14 16 17 18 20 21 23 25 26
250 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 23 25 27 29 31
270 16 17 18 20 21 23 25 27 29 32 34 36
290 19 20 21 23 25 27 29 32 34 36 39 42
310 21 23 24 26 28 31 33 36 38 42 45 48
330 24 26 28 29 32 35 37 41 44 47 51 54
350 27 29 31 33 36 39 42 46 49 53 57 61
370 30 32 35 37 40 44 47 51 55 59 64 68
390 34 36 38 41 45 48 52 57 61 66 71 76
410 37 40 43 45 49 54 58 63 67 73 78 84
420 39 42 45 48 52 56 60 66 71 76 82 88
* For span lengths that are not included in the table,contact the Methods&Materials Department.
Initial Conductor Sag Tables WNPOI�N R,,
A11DACORF U1Pa1Y

Overhead Revised 08/21 1 0-03-03
Initial Sag Table - 336 Al (Tulip) - 300' Ruling Span*
Caution. DO NOT use initial sag tables to establish clearances„ see OH 25-02.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 2,233 lbs tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10, 20' 30' 40' 50' 60' 70' 80' 90, 100, 110, 120'
Tension(Ibs) 1559 1402 1244 1135 1025 916 850 785 719 679 639 599
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
200 12 14 15 17 19 21 23 24 26 28 30 32
220 15 17 18 20 23 25 27 30 32 34 36 38
240 18 20 22 24 27 30 33 35 38 40 43 45
260 21 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47 50 53
280 24 27 30 33 37 41 44 48 51 55 58 62
300 28 31 34 38 42 47 51 55 59 63 67 71
320 32 35 39 43 48 53 58 63 67 72 76 81
340 36 40 44 49 54 60 66 71 76 81 86 91
360 40 45 49 55 60 68 73 79 85 91 96 102
* For span lengths that are not included in the table please contact the Methods&Materials Department.
Initial Sag Table - 397 ACSR (Ibis) - 300' Ruling Span*
Caution. DO NOT use initial sag tables to establish clearances, see OH 25-02.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span;5,000 lbs tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp CF) 10, 201 301 40, 501 601 701 801 90, 100, 110, 1201
Tension(Ibs) 4703 4448 4194 3935 3677 3418 3172 2926 2680 2473 2265 2058
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
200 7 8 8 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 15 16
220 9 9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19
240 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 21 23
260 12 13 14 14 15 17 18 20 21 23 25 27
280 14 15 16 17 17 19 21 23 24 26 29 31
300 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 33 36
320 18 19 20 22 23 25 27 30 32 34 38 41
340 21 22 23 24 26 28 31 33 36 39 42 46
360 23 24 26 27 29 32 35 37 40 43 48 52
* For span lengths that are not included in the table,contact the Methods&Materials Department.
"` R, Initial Conductor Sag Tables

10-03-04 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Initial Sag Table - 795 Al (Arbutus) - 300' Ruling Span*
Caution. DO NOT use initial sag tables to establish clearances, see OH 25-02.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 4,073 lbs at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10, 20' 30' 40' 50' 60' 70' 80' 90, 100, 110, 120'
Tension(Ibs) 3280 2931 2632 2416 2199 1983 1853 1722 1592 1510 1429 1347
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
200 14 16 17 19 21 23 24 26 28 30 32 33
220 17 19 20 23 25 27 30 32 34 36 38 40
240 20 22 24 27 30 33 35 38 40 43 45 48
260 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47 50 53 56
280 27 30 33 37 41 44 48 51 55 58 62 65
300 31 35 38 42 47 51 55 59 63 67 71 75
320 35 40 43 48 53 58 63 67 72 76 81 85
340 40 45 49 54 60 66 71 76 81 86 91 96
360 45 50 55 60 68 73 79 85 91 96 102 108
* For span lengths that are not included in the table,contact the Methods&Materials Department.
Initial Conductor Sag Tables WNPOI�N R,,
A11DACORF U1Pa1Y

Overhead Revised 08/21 10-03-05
Bare Copper
Initial Sag Tables #4 Hard Drawn Bare Solid Copper
Spans 200' or less Temp CF) 35' 55' 751 95'
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
Design Conditions: 175'ruling span; at 225 20 24 28 32
250 22 26 30 34
NESC medium loading. 275 29 34 39 44
300 38 44 49 56
All Copper Conductors
Temp ff) 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 #2 Medium Hard Drawn Bare Stranded
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches) Copper
100 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Temp CF) 35' 550 751 951
125 10 11 13 14 16 17 19
150 13 16 18 20 23 25 27 Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
175 18 21 24 27 30 34 37 225 17 19 21 24
200 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 250 22 25 28 31
275 28 32 36 40
300 36 40 45 50
Spans (200' or greater)
Design Conditions: 275'ruling span; at 1/0,2/0,4/0 Medium Hard Drawn Bare
NESC medium loading. Stranded Copper
Temp ff) 350 55, 750 95,
#6 Hard Drawn Bare Solid Copper Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches)
Temp CF) 35' 551 751 951 225 16 20 24 29
250 20 23 26 29
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches) 275 24 27 30 34
225 38 43 47 52 300 29 32 35 40
250 42 48 53 58
275 43 48 53 59
300 43 48 54 60 Caution. DO NOT use initial sag tables
to establish clearances, see OH 25-02.
EMppMR,: Initial Conductor Sag Tables

10-03-06 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Initial Sag - Copperweld & Steel * The values in this table are under medium loading
conditions, 60%of the ultimate strength.
Temp ff) 0° 320 600 90° 1200 To use the sag table for copperweld or steel the
Span(ft) Initial Sag(inches) span lengths must be less than, or equal to,the
100 3 3 3 4 4 lengths shown in the following table.
120 4 4 5 5 6
140 5 6 6 7 8 Conductor Max Span length (ft)
160 7 7 8 9 10
180 9 9 10 11 13 6-3SS 750
200 11 12 13 14 16 8A 860
220 13 14 15 17 20 6A 920
240 15 17 18 20 24 4A 1,200
260 18 19 22 24 28
280 21 23 25 28 32 Caution. DO NOT use initial sag tables
300 24 26 29 32 37 to establish clearances, see OH 25-02.
320 27 29 33 36 42
340 31 33 37 41 47
360 34 37 41 46 53
380 38 42 46 51 59
400 42 46 51 56 65
420 47 51 56 62 72
440 51 56 62 68 79
460 56 61 68 74 86
480 61 66 74 81 94
500 66 72 80 88 102
520 71 78 87 95 110
540 77 84 93 103 119
560 83 90 100 110 128
580 89 97 108 118 137
600 95 104 115 127 147
620 101 111 123 135 157
640 108 118 131 144 167
660 115 125 139 153 178
680 122 133 148 163 189
700 129 141 157 172 200
720 137 149 166 182 212
740 145 158 175 193 223
760 152 166 185 203 236
780 161 175 195 214 248
800 169 184 205 225 261
820 178 194 215 237 274
840 186 203 226 248 288
860 195 213 237 260 302
880 204 223 248 273 316
900 214 233 259 285 330
920 223 244 271 298 345
940 233 254 283 311 361
960 243 265 295 324 376
980 254 277 307 338 392
1000 264 288 320 352 408
1020 275 300 333 366 424
1040 286 312 346 381 441
1060 297 324 360 396 458
1080 308 336 373 411 476
1100 319 348 387 426 494
1120 331 361 401 442 512
1140 343 374 416 457 530
1160 355 388 431 474 549
1180 368 401 446 490 568
1200 380 415 461 507 588
Initial Sag Tables W.—�POI�N R,,
A11DACORF U1Pa1Y

Overhead Revised 01/21 11-00-01
Table of Contents
11- Primary Design and Configurations
11-01-01 Design Guidelines 11-04-01 Grades of Construction
Balancing Load on Primaries Definition
Overhead Line Appearance Communication Lines
Streamlined Construction 11-04-02 Railroads
Crossarm Construction Limited Access Highways
11-01-02 Road Crossing Angle 11-04-03 Inverted Voltage Levels
"Raptor-Safe"Construction in Multiple Crossings
Open Rural Areas and Federal
Lands 11-05-01 Equipment Weights and Wind
Loads
Transformers
11-02-01 Design Considerations Auto-Transformers up to 500kVA
Pole Height Verses Span Length Auto-Transformers over 500kVA
Factors 11-05-02 Two-Winding Transformers
11-02-02 Example Problem Capcitors
11-02-05 Tables of Pole Height Verses Regulators
Span Length Reclosers
11-02-06 1-0 19.9 kV Tangent Sectionalizers
Construction
11-02-07 1-0 7.2 kV Tangent Construction 11-06-01 Unguyed Tangent Pole Class
11-02-08 3-0 34.5 kV Tangent Streamlined Selection Tables
11-02-09 3-0 12.5 kV Tangent Streamlined General
11-02-10 3-0 34.5 kV Tangent Crossarm Unguyed Tangent Pole Class vs.
11-02-11 3-0 12.5 kV Tangent Crossarm Span Length&Equipment
11-02-12 3-0 34.5 kV Raptor-Safe T-8" Load Tables
Crossarm 11-06-02 40'Pole
11-02-13 3-0 12.5 kV Raptor-Safe T-8" 11-06-03 45'Pole
Crossarm 11-06-04 50'Pole
11-02-14 3-0 12.5 kV Raptor-Safe 11-06-05 55'Pole
10'Crossarm 11-06-06 60'Pole
11-02-15 3-0 12.5 kV Raptor-Safe
10'Crossarm 11-07-01 Unguyed Angle Pole Selection
11-02-16 Communication Attachment Pole Class Selection
Height vs. Span Length
Continued on the next page
M�10PNO
EMPOWER. Table of Contents

11-00-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
11-09-01 Guy Selection 11-09-41 Bisect Angle Guys
Scope Scope
Guy Hardware Guy Tension
11-09-02 Anchors Vertical Pole Loading
Shear Pins Neutral Guy
Guy and Anchor Location 11-09-42 Example Calculation
11-09-03 Guy Tensions 11-09-44 5°Line Angle Tables
Guy Angles #4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs
Vertical Pole Loading 2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs
11-09-04 Vertical&Horizontal Span 11-09-45 336 AL @ 2233 lbs
Lengths 795 AL @ 4073 lbs
Buckling Strength for Wood Poles 11-09-46 Communication Conductor @
11-09-05 Calculating Deadend Guys 2240 lbs
11-09-06 Calculating Bisect Angle Guys 11-09-47 10'Line Angle Tables
11-09-07 Calculating Bisect Angle Guys #4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs
Illustration 2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs
11-09-08 Calculate Guy Tensions 11-09-48 336 AL @ 2233 lbs
Vertical Guy Loads 795 AL @ 4073 lbs
Calculate Vertical Pole Loads 11-09-49 Communication Conductor @
2240 lbs
11-09-50 150 Line Angle Tables
11-09-21 Deadend Down Guys #4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs
Scope 2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs
Guy Tension 11-09-51 336 AL @ 2233 lbs
Vertical Pole Loading 795 AL @ 4073 lbs
Neutral Guy 11-09-52 Communication Conductor @
Index for Tables 2240 lbs
11-09-22 Deadend Tables Example 11-09-53 20'Line Angle Tables
11-09-23 Guy Selection Tables for #4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs
Deadends; 2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs
#4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs 11-09-54 336 AL @ 2233 lbs
11-09-24 2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs 795 AL @ 4073 lbs
11-09-25 336 AL @ 2233 lbs 11-09-55 Communication Conductor @
11-09-26 795 AL @ 4073 lbs 22401bs
11-09-27 Reduced Neutrals 11-09-56 25'Line Angle Tables
11-09-28 CATV/Communications #4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs
2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs
11-09-57 336 AL @ 2233 lbs
795 AL @ 4073 lbs
11-09-58 Communication Conductor @
22401bs
11-09-59 30'Line Angle Tables
#4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs
2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs
11-09-60 336 AL @ 2233 lbs
795 AL @ 4073 lbs
11-09-61 Communication Conductor @
22401bs
Continued on the next page
Table of Contents `ppR.

Overhead Revised 01/21 11-00-03
Structure Design and Construction 11-24-01 Junction
General Information
11-20-01 Tangent 11-24-02 1-0 Junction
General Information 11-24-04 3-0 Junction- Crossarm
11-20-02 1-0 Tangent 11-24-06 3-0 Junction- Streamline
11-20-04 3-0 Tangent-T-8" Crossarm
11-20-06 3-0 Tangent- 10'Crossarm 2-Up 11-25-01 Multi Circuit(Underbuild)
11-20-08 3-0 Tangent- 10'Crossarm 3-Up General Information
11-20-10 3-0 Tangent- 10'Crossarm 4-Up 11-25-02 3-0 Multi Circuit-Crossarm
11-20-12 3-0 Tangent- Streamline under Crossarm
11-20-14 3-0 10'Alley Arm 11-25-04 3-0 Multi Circuit-Crossarm
11-20-16 3-0 Tangent- 8'Fiberglass 2-Up under Streamline
11-20-18 3-0 Tangent- 10'Fiberglass 2-Up
11-26-01 Grade B
11-21-01 Deadend General Information
General Information 11-26-02 1-0 Tangent-Grade B Crossing
11-21-02 1-0 Deadend 11-26-04 1-0 Angle Grade B Crossing
11-21-04 1-0 Deadend-Corner Double 11-26-06 3-0 Angle Streamline Grade B
11-21-06 3-0 Deadend-Corner 336 or 795
11-27-01 Neutral Construction
11-22-01 Angle Detailed Illustrations
General Information
11-22-04 1-0 Angle(Top of Insulator) 11-28-01 Slack Spans
11-22-06 1-0 Angle (Side of Insulator) Slack Span Sag
11-22-08 1-0 Angle C-Shoes (#4 ACSR Slack Span-Wood 10'Crossarm-
Only) All Conductors
11-22-10 1-0 Angle Double Deadend 11-28-02 Slack Span- Side of Wood
11-22-12 3-0 Angle Crossarm w/Pole Top Crossarm-#4 ACSR Tap
Pin 3-Up (Top) Slack Span-Fiberglass Tangent
11-22-14 3-0 Angle Streamline 3-Up(Top) Arm-#4 ACST or 2/0 ACSR
11-22-16 3-0 Angle Crossarm 3-Up- (Top) Tap
11-22-18 3-0 Angle Crossarm w/Pole top 11-28-03 Slack Span-BK-18 -All
Pin 3-Up(Side) Conductors
11-22-20 3-0 Angle Streamline w/BK-18 Mid-Span Tap -#4 ACSR Tap
Brackets 3-Up(Side)
11-22-22 3-0 Angle Crossarm 3-Up(Side) 11-29-01 Tension Deadends
11-22-24 3-0 Angle Double Crossarm Scope
w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up Vertical Pole Load and
11-22-26 3-0 Angle Double Crossarm 3-Up Pole Class Selection
11-22-28 3-0 Angle Double Deadend 3-Up 11-29-02 Example Vertical Pole Load and
11-22-30 3-0 Angle Double Deadend 4-Up Pole Class Selection
11-29-03 1-0 Deadend-#4 ACSR
11-23-01 Tap 11-29-04 1-0 Deadend-2/0 ACSR
General Information 11-29-05 3-0 Deadend-#4 ACSR
11-23-02 1-0 Tap-Without Switch 11-29-06 3-0 Deadend-2/0 ACSR
11-23-04 1-0 Tap-With Fused Disconnect 11-29-07 3-0 Deadend- 336 AL
11-23-06 3-0 Crossarm w/1-0 Tap 11-29-08 3-0 Deadend- 795 AL
11-23-08 3-0 Streamline w/1-0 Tap
11-23-10 3-0 Streamline w/1-0 Tap w/o
Disconnect
11-23-12 3-0 Tap -Crossarm Continued on the next page
11-23-14 3-0 Tap - Streamline
E''�ID 0
�wPOWER Table of Contents

11-00-04 Revised 01/21 Overhead
11-30-01 Wildlife Protection 11-33-01 Wildlife Protection Structure
Idaho Power's Bird Management Modification
Program 11-33-02 Modification Materials
Protection Criteria 11-33-03 3-0 Deadend—Corner
Maps-CLICK HERETO VIEW
Types of Protection 11-34-01 Wildlife Protection Structure
Avian Symbols Modification Details
Tangent Configuration-Crossarm
11-31-01 Wildlife Protection Materials, 3-Up
Covers 11-34-02 3-0 Transformer Framing
Covers (Crossarm)
Small Animal/Bird Guards 11-34-03 100 Amp, 34.5-kV, 3-0 Riser
11-31-02 Switch Covers 11-34-04 3-0 Junction(Crossarm)
11-31-03 Insulator and Conductor Covers 11-34-05 Angle Configuration-Double
11-31-04 Tool to Install 3-piece Covers Deadend 3-Up
Pole-Top Switch Protection 11-34-06 3-0 Multi Circuit-Crossarm
11-31-05 Installation Instructions of under Crossarm Construction
3-piece Covers
Installation with Shotgun Tool 11-35-01 Wildlife Protection Guidelines
for Retrofitting
11-32-01 Wildlife Protection Materials, Structure Requirements
Diverters 11-35-02 Transformer Retrofit Options
Bird Diverters
11-32-02 Bird Flight Diverters
11-32-03 Perches
Perch Construction Details
11-32-04 Nesting Platforms
Anti-Nesting Deflectors
Table of Contents `ppR.

Overhead Revised 11/16 11-01-01
Design Guidelines for
Overhead Distribution Primary Lines
Balancing Load on Primaries Crossarm Construction
Transformers and branch line taps should be Wood crossarms are to be used in the following
connected such that loads on each phase are as instances:
nearly balanced as practical as the loading
progresses out from the substation. ♦ 40" and 60"avian zone areas - see section
11-33 and 11-34 for raptor zone areas.
Overhead Line Appearance ♦ Federal lands (i.e. BLM,Forest Service,
The policy of Idaho Power is to make every etc.).
reasonable effort to achieve and maintain ♦ Open rural areas.
satisfactory appearance in its overhead plant ♦ Maintenance of existing crossarm
while not compromising safety. construction.
♦ Where transmission lines are underbuilt with
Streamlined Construction primary distribution circuits, and for the
Streamlined construction denotes construction lower circuit(s)on multiple circuit
utilizing fiberglass arms and brackets to support distribution lines.
conductors, cutouts, and arresters. This is now ♦ Poles that are not easily accessible to bucket
mainly used for maintenance only of existing trucks, or where maintenance is normally
streamlined construction in areas with no avian performed by climbing,taps, corners,
restrictions. junctions, apparatus poles to provide
climbing and working spaces, and to provide
® � easy access to the center phase hot tap
® connector.
30"
0
0"
0
60"
Basic Streamlined Construction
With the change of design philosophy, due to
avian protection, crossarm constructions are now Basic Crossarm Construction
the preferred configurations for new
construction and retrofit.
E''� AH IDO
�wPOWER Design Guidelines for OH Distribution Primary Lines

11-01-02 Revised 09/18 Overhead
Road Crossing Angle When replacing crossarms on existing lines, a
10'crossarm may be more practical to maintain
Road crossings should be as close to 90 degrees minimum ground clearance.
as practical according to the Idaho
Transportations Department(ITD) Guide for
Utility Management. Regional ITD approving
authorities have the final say on what is"close to t
90 degrees", and"practical".
24"
"Raptor Safe" Construction in Open
Rural Areas and Federal Lands
Any new line extensions on open rural areas or 60"
federal land shall utilize crossarm construction
with increased spacing between the top and side
phases.This construction is designated as
"Raptor safe"construction in this manual. See
section 11-30 for other raptor protection
methods.
Raptor-Safe Construction Using a
10'Crossarm
48"
0
0
60"
Raptor-Safe Construction Using a
T-8" Crossarm
WMIDAW
Design Guidelines for OH Distribution Primary Lines WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-01
Design Considerations
Pole Height Verses Span Length In view of these factors, and in preparing the
Factors tables on the following pages,we have assumed
the following:
The maximum span allowable is a function o£ • Pole heights of 40',45', and 50'.
• Pole height. • Setting depths of 6', 6-1/2', &7',
• Setting depth. respectively.
• Conductor size,type, and design tension. • Common aluminum and ACSR
conductors.
• Ruling span. • Common ruling spans of 300'and 350'.
• Required phase and neutral wire
clearances over ground,rails, and water. • Phase clearance: 22'at 212°F; neutral
• Required horizontal clearance between
clearance: 18'at 145°F, or 32°F, 1/4" ice
loading.
phase and neutral conductors. . Normal fiberglass and wood arm
• Required vertical clearance between phase horizontal conductor spacings.
and neutral conductors. . Vertical clearance between phase and
• Attachment heights of wires. neutral conductors is examined in 6"
• Elevation differences of supports and increments.
ground profile. . Common framing dimensions
• Voltage of conductors. (Section 11).
• Strength of supports(crossarm size and • Level ground and equal elevations of wire
pole class). attachment points at each end of the
• Required clearances to other structures, span.
buildings,bridges,pools, etc. . 34.5GrdY/19.9 Wor
• Allowances for additional circuits, 12.5GrdY/7.2 W.
communication attachments. . The designer must choose the proper pole
• Required clearance to adjacent and class and crossarm(Sections 07 and 11).
crossing wires on different structures. • Proper clearances to buildings, etc.,
(Section 03)must be examined by the
designer.
• No allowances for additional circuits or
communication attachments are
provided.
• The designer must plan for proper
clearances to adjacent or crossing wires
(Section 03).
•'Q ID
EMP1H0 POWER. Design Considerations

11-02-02 Revised 03/07 Overhead
With these assumptions,the variables that 2. Ground clearance of phase and neutral
determine maximum span length are: conductors. Examining the illustration on
the following page, Ground Clearance
(R) Ruling span Considerations,we can write the following
(G) Ground clearance(phase or neutral) equations:
(H) Horizontal clearance between wires PH= SD+ 18'+ Sn+Ht-n,and
(N) Vertical phase-to-neutral clearance PH= SD+22'+ Sp+Ht-p,where
The following example problem illustrates the PH=pole height
required procedure for determining maximum SD=setting depth(see page 05-02-01)
span length. Sn=neutral sag at 145°F final, or at 32°F
Example Problem with 1/4" ice loading,whichever is worse
Sp=phase wire sag at 212°F final
Find the maximum span length for 336-kcmil Ht-n=distance from top of pole to neutral
aluminum conductor with a 336 AL neutral,45'
poles, 34.5 W streamlined tangent construction, Ht-p=distance from top of pole to phase.
and sufficient phase-to-neutral clearance to The sags, Sn and Sp for maximum span
allow for a 1-0 transformer installation on any lengths Ln and Lp are related to the ruling
pole. span sags and lengths by the equation in
paragraph 1. Solving the equations for the
1. Ruling span consideration. A 300'ruling maximum spans lengths allowed for proper
span is used for 336-and 795-kcmil ground clearance,we arrive at:
aluminum conductors. The maximum span
recommended for this ruling span is 1.2 x Ln=Lrs (PH—SD—18'-Ht-n)/Snrs
300=360',(see page 10-02-03). Sags for
spans differing from the ruling span are
calculated according to the following Lp=Lrs (Px—SD—22 xt p)/Sprs
formula: From the final sag tables in Section 10 for a
S= Srs x(L/Lrs)2,where 300' span,the 212°F sag for the 336-kcmil
aluminum conductor Sprs=9.33'. The
S= Sag for a particular span length,L; 145°F sag for a full 336 neutral Snrs=7.75'.
Srs= Sag for the ruling span length,Lrs. Noting that we need a neutral drop of 78" to
accommodate a 19.9 W transformer(page
Note: #4 and 2/0 ACSR conductors are 19-02-03).This corresponds to an Ht-n
strung assuming a 350'ruling span. dimension of 108" or 9'. Plugging in the
numbers,and solving for the span lengths,
we obtain:
Ln=300 (45—6.5—18—9)/7.75 = 365.4'
Lp =300 (45—6.5—22—1.5)/9.33 = 380.4'
Design Considerations R.
1.IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-03
Note that for this Ht-n dimension the design H=0.3•kV+7 (S/3)—8 for under#2 AWG
neutral ground clearance(18')becomes
more restrictive than the minimum phase- H =0.3•kV+8 (S/12) for 42 AWG&larger
wire ground clearance(22')in determining For streamlined construction,the vertical
the maximum span possible. For greater separation between the conductor on the
neutral drop (greater Ht-n dimension)the poletop pin and the conductors on the
minimum neutral ground clearance will fiberglass arm satisfies the NESC.
continue as the more limiting factor for Therefore,the horizontal clearance between
these two considerations in determining the the conductor on the poletop pin and the
maximum span length possible. conductors on the fiberglass arm need not be
considered. However,the horizontal
clearance between the two conductors on the
o fiberglass arm will limit the span length
Ht-p o 30" according to the above formulas. From the
illustration below, H=48" - 0.67" =47.33"
'�A
12° for the 336-kcmil aluminum conductor.We
will need to find the maximum span possible
Sp Ht-n for this horizontal clearance.
NESC requires
PH 16"for 12.5 kV,
unspecified for
�48"C/Lto C/L owl 24.9&34.5 kV
22'design Sn — �
clearance
18'design
clearance
SD H=48"minus wire diameter.
See page 10-01-02
Horizontal Conductor Clearances
From the ruling span consideration on page
Ground Clearance Considerations 11-02-02,we learned that:
3. Horizontal clearance between conductors. S = Srs x(Mrs)2
The required horizontal clearance(H in Substituting this formula into the horizontal
inches)varies according to the wire size,the clearance formulas above, and solving for
60 F final sag(S in inches)of the conductor
having the greater sag,and the voltage the maximum span length,L:
between the conductors being evaluated For wires smaller than#2 AWG,
according to the following formulas. See the
Advisory Manual, page 03-12-03. 2
L =Lrs {[(H-0.3•kV)l7] +8}(3/Srs)
E'erAH IDO
�wPOWER Design Considerations

11-02-04 Revised 03/07 Overhead
For wires of#2 AWG and larger,
L =[Lrs 12/Srs•(H-0.3•kV)]/8
For our example, 336 kcmil is much larger
than#2 AWG, so we should use the second
formula.According to the final sag tables in
Section 10,the 60OF final sag for a 300' span
„ N=phase
is 62 . For 34.5 kV,then: X=neutral to neutral
drop from clearance
Xarm bolt at the pole
L = [300 12/62•(47.3—0.3.34.5)]/8 C/L to C/L
of bolt for Sp
=609.6' bracket
Since this is much larger than the maximum
span allowed by the ruling span limitation
(Paragraph 1),we see that the required
horizontal clearance between conductors Appro .
produces no real limitation for this wire size 2 inch s
Sn V=phase
and streamlined construction.For lighter to neutral
however,the horizontal clearance
conductors, > at midspan
clearance factor becomes more of a
limitation, especially with underbuild
crossarm construction.
Phase to Neutral Clearance
4. Vertical clearance between phase and According to the NESC,this clearance must
neutral conductors. Since we obviously be maintained with the upper conductor at
won't have the required horizontal clearance its final sag and at maximum temperature or
between the phase and neutral conductors in with ice loading,whichever is worse(see the
this example(neutral extension brackets are Advisory Manual,page 03-12-19) and with
commonly used),we must check the vertical the lower conductor at its final sag under the
clearance between the lower phase same ambient conditions and without
conductors and the neutral conductor. The electrical loading. From page 25-07-08,this
required phase-to-neutral clearance at clearance is with the phase wire at 212°F
midspan(V), (see the Advisory Manual, and the neutral wire at 41°F.
page 03-12-21), is:
V =0.75 x 16" = 12" for 12.47 kV, and Examining the illustration above,we can
write the following expression for the
V = 0.75 x[16 + 0.4(19.92-8.7)] required clearance at the pole (N) for a
=15.37" for 34.5 kV as in our example. particular span length, in terms of the
required midspan clearance(V) and phase
and neutral conductor final sags(Sp at
212°F, and Sn at 41°F,respectively):
N = Sp-Sn + V
IDAHO
Design Considerations W Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-05
Applying our equation for sag in terms of N=x+12"-2"=x+10" approximately.
ruling span sag(page 11-02-02):
NOTE. In the tables that we can use
N = (Sprs-Snrs)x(Mrs)2 + V longer spans by increasing the neutral
drop until other considerations, such as,
Where L is the maximum allowable span ruling span,and ground clearance start to
length for a given phase-to-neutral clearance govern.
at the pole, Sprs is the 2127 final sag for
the phase conductor, and Snrs is the 41°F Tables of Pole Height Verses Span
final sag for the neutral conductor for the Length
ruling span length(Lrs=300'for our
example). Solving the equation for L: The following tables list the maximum
allowable span length for various construction
L=Lrs (N- V)/(Sprs-Snrs) configurations according to voltage,wire size,
ruling span, design tension,and neutral drop
From page 10-03-04, Sprs is 112" and Snrs from the arm bolt. See page 11-02-01 for the
for a 336 AL neutral sagged to match the assumptions made in producing the tables.Note
336-kcmil aluminum phase conductor is particularly that the tables assume level ground.
52.5" (40°F final sag). Plugging in the No allowance is made for communication utility
numbers for our example, along with a 78" attachments. See page 11-02-16 for information
neutral drop between bolt centers concerning communication utility attachments.
(approximately 88"phase-to-neutral In the tables,the factor limiting the span length
clearance at the pole)to allow for a 1-0 is identified according to the following codes:
transformer installation:
(R) Ruling span limits the allowable span
L = 300 (88- 15.37)/(112-52.5) = 331.45 length;
(G) Ground clearance limits the span length;
Note that phase-to-neutral clearance is the (H) Horizontal phase-to-phase clearance limits
most limiting factor of the four for this the span;
example, so this span length value is listed (N) Phase-to-neutral clearance limits the span.
in the table on page 11-02-08. The letter"N"
after the value indicates that phase-to- NOTE. Shorter spans or taller poles may
neutral clearance is the limiting factor.Note be necessary for deadend or junction
that the neutral drop from the crossarm bolt poles.
centerline to the neutral bracket bolt
centerline (distance"X")is referenced in the
table for convenience instead of the actual
phase-to-neutral clearance.The actual
phase-to-neutral conductor clearance at the
pole for streamlined construction(see the
illustration on the previous page)is:
E''� AH IDO
EMPOWER. Design Considerations

11-02-06 Revised 03/07 Overhead
Pole Height vs Span Length — 1-0 19.9 kV Tangent Construction
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
40' Pole
60" 412N 391 N
66" 420R 409N
1-0 19.9 kV Transformer 72" 416G 411 G
78" 405G 400G
1-0 19.9 kV Riser 84" 353G 388G
90" 380G 376G
96" 368G 363G
102" 355G 350G
108" 341 G 337G
114" 327G 323G
120" 312G 308G
126" 297G 293G
45' Pole
60" 412N 391 N
12" 66" 420R 409N
72" 420R 420R
78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 420R
Neutral 90" 420R 420R
Drop
96" 420R 420R
102" 420R 420R
108" 420R 420R
114" 420R 420R
120" 420R 420R
126" 416G 411 G
50' Pole
60" 412N 391 N
66" 420R 409N
72" 420R 420R
78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 420R
90" 420R 420R
96" 420R 420R
102" 420R 420R
108" 420R 420R
114" 420R 420R
120" 420R 420R
126" 420R 420R
Design Considerations W` R,,

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-07
Pole Height vs Span Length — 1-0 7.2 kV Tangent Construction
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
1 40' Pole
1-0 7.2 kV Transformer or Riser 60" 420R 401 N
66" 420R 419N
72" 416G 411 G
78" 405G 400G
84" 393G 388G
90" 380G 376G
96" 368G 363G
102" 355G 350G
108" 341 G 337G
114" 327G 323G
120" 312G 308G
126" 297G 293G
45' Pole
60" 420R 401 N
12" 66" 420R 419N
72" 420R 420R
78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 420R
Neutral 90" 420R 420R
Drop
96" 420R 420R
102" 420R 420R
108" 420R 420R
114" 420R 420R
120" 420R 420R
126" 416G 411 G
50' Pole
60" 420R 401 N
66" 420R 419N
72" 420R 420R
78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 420R
90" 420R 420R
96" 420R 420R
102" 420R 420R
108" 420R 420R
114" 420R 420R
120" 420R 420R
126" 420R 420R
ENPOMR,, Design Considerations

11-02-08 Revised 03/07 Overhead
Pole Height vs Span Length — 3-0 34.5 kV Tangent Streamlined
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
40' Pole
60" 385N 365N 287N 296N
66" 389G 384N 303N 300G
72" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
1-0 19.9 kV Transformer 78" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
84" 350G 346G 274G 271 G
90" 337G 332G 264G 260G
1-0&3-0 34.5 kV Risers 96" 322G 318G 252G 249G
102" 307G 303G 241 G 237G
108" 291 G 288G 228G 225G
114" 275G 271 G 215G 212G
34.5 kV Capacitor Bank 120" 257G 254G 201 G 199G
1-011 5 kV Trnncfnrmar ua„k 126" 238G 235G 186G 184G
132" 217G 214G 170G 168G
45' Pole
60" 385N 365N 287N 296N
1 0 66" 406N 384N 303N 312N
0 72" 420R 403N 317N 327N
30"
1 78" 420R 420R 331 N 341 N
84" 420R 420R 345N 352G
90" 420R 420R 349N 344G
96" 420R 420R 341 G 336G
Neutral 102" 420R 418R 332G 327G
Drop 108" 412G 407G 323G 319G
114" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
120" 389G 384G 305G 300G
126" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
132" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
50' Pole
60" 385N 365N 287N 296N
66" 406N 384N 303N 312N
72" 420R 403N 317N 327N
78" 420R 420R 331 N 341 N
84" 420R 420R 345N 355N
90" 420R 420R 358G 360R
96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
102" 420R 420R 360R 360R
108" 420R 420R 360R 360R
114" 420R 420R 360R 360R
120" 420R 420R 360R 360R
126" 420R 420R 360R 360R
132" 420R 420R 360R 360R
Design Considerations W` R,,

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-09
Pole Height vs Span Length —3-0 12.5 kV Tangent Streamlined
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 30ORS 30ORS
40' Pole
60" 397N 376N 296N 305N
1-0 7.2 kV Transformer 66" 389G 384G 305G 300G
1-0 k I-0 i? 5 kV u;QPr, 72" 376G 372G 295G 291G
78" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
84" 350G 346G 274G 271 G
90" 337G 332G 264G 260G
96" 322G 318G 252G 249G
102" 307G 303G 241 G 237G
108" 291 G 288G 228G 225G
3-0 12.5 kV Transformer 114" 275G 271 G 215G 212G
Bank12.5 kV Capacitor Bank 120" 257G 254G 201 G 199G
126" 238G 235G 186G 184G
132" 217G 214G 170G 168G
45' Pole
60" 397N 376N 296N 305N
1 0 66" 417N 395N 311N 320N
30" ° 72" 420R 413N 325N 335N
78" 420R 420R 339N 349N
84" 420R 420R 352N 352G
90" 420R 420R 349G 344G
96" 420R 420R 341 G 336G
Neutral 102" 420R 418G 332G 327G
Drop 108" 412G 407G 323G 319G
114" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
120" 389G 384G 305G 300G
126" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
132" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
50' Pole
60" 397N 376N 296N 305N
66" 417N 395N 311N 320N
72" 420R 413N 325N 335N
78" 420R 420R 339N 349N
84" 420R 420R 352N 360R
90" 420R 420R 360R 360R
96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
102" 420R 420R 360R 360R
108" 420R 420R 360R 360R
114" 420R 420R 360R 360R
120" 420R 420R 360R 360R
126" 420R 420R 360R 360R
132" 420R 420R 360R 360R
ONPOMR,. Design Considerations

11-02-1 U Revised 03/07 Overhead
Pole Height vs Span Length —3-0 34.5 kV Tangent Crossarm
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
40' Pole
60" 385N 365N 287N 296N
66" 406N 384N 303N 312N
72" 412G 403N 317N 319G
78" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
1-0 19.9 kV Transformer 84" 389G 384G 305G 300G
90" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
1-0&3-0 34.5 kV Risers 96" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
102" 350G 346G 274G 271 G
108" 337G 332G 264G 260G
114" 322G 318G 252G 249G
120" 307G 303G 241 G 237G
126" 291 G 288G 228G 225G
34.5 kV Capacitor Bank 132" 275G 271 G 215G 212G
3-0 34.5 kV Transformer Bank 138" 257G 254G 201 G 199G
144" 238G 235G 186G 184G
45' Pole
60" 385N 365N 287N 296N
66" 406N 384N 303N 312N
72" 420R 403N 317N 327N
78" 420R 420R 331 N 341 N
84" 420R 420R 345N 355N
0 90" 420R 420R 358N 360R
Neutral 96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
Drop 102" 420R 420R 357G 352G
108" 420R 420R 349G 344G
114" 420R 420R 341 G 336G
120" 420R 418G 332G 327G
126" 412G 407G 323G 319G
132" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
138" 389G 384G 305G 300G
144" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
50' Pole
60" 385N 365N 287N 296N
66" 406N 384N 303N 312N
72" 420R 403N 317N 327N
78" 420R 420R 331 N 341 N
84" 420R 420R 345N 355N
90" 420R 420R 358N 360R
96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
102" 420R 420R 360R 360R
108" 420R 420R 360R 360R
114" 420R 420R 360R 360R
120" 420R 420R 360R 360R
126" 420R 420R 360R 360R
132" 420R 420R 360R 360R
138" 420R 420R 360R 360R
144" 420R 420R 360R 360R
Design Considerations W` R,,

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-11
Pole Height vs Span Length —3-0 12.5 kV Tangent Crossarm
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
40' Pole
60" 397N 376N 296N 305N
66" 417N 395N 311N 320N
1-0&3-0 12.5 kV Risers 72" 412G 407G 323G 335N
1-0 7.2 kV Transformer 78" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
84" 389G 384G 305G 300G
90" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
96" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
102" 350G 346G 274G 271 G
108" 337G 332G 264G 260G
114" 322G 318G 252G 249G
120" 307G 303G 241 G 237G
3-0 12.5 kV Transformer Bank 126" 291 G 288G 228G 225G
12.5 kV Capacitor Bank 132" 275G 271 G 215G 212G
45' Pole
60" 397N 376N 296N 305N
66" 417N 395N 311N 320N
12" 72" 420R 413N 325N 335N
78" 420R 420R 339N 349N
84" 420R 420R 352N 360R
° 90" 420R 420R 360R 360R
Neutral
Drop 96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
102" 420R 420R 357G 352G
108" 420R 420R 349G 344G
114" 420R 420R 341 G 336G
120" 420R 418G 332G 327G
126" 412G 407G 323G 319G
132" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
50' Pole
60" 397N 376N 296N 305N
66" 417N 395N 311N 320N
72" 420R 413N 325N 335N
78" 420R 420R 339N 349N
84" 420R 420R 352N 360R
90" 420R 420R 360R 360R
96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
102" 420R 420R 360R 360R
108" 420R 420R 360R 360R
114" 420R 420R 360R 360R
120" 420R 420R 360R 360R
126" 420R 420R 360R 360R
132" 420R 420R 360R 360R
R� Design Considerations

11-02-12 Revised 03/07 Overhead
Pole Height vs Span Length —3-0 34.5 kV Raptor-Safe T-8" Crossarm
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
40' Pole
60" 364G 359G
66" 350G 346G
72" 337G 332G
78" 322G 318G
1-0 19.9 kV Transformer 84" 307G 303G
90" 291 G 288G
1-0&3-0 34.5 kV Risers 96" 275G 271 G
102" 257G 254G
108" 238G 235G
114" 217G 214G
120" 194G 192G
126" 168G 166G
34.5 kV Capacitor Bank 132" 137G 135G
3-0 34.5 kV Transformer 138" 97G 96G
45' Pole
60" 420R 420R
66" 420R 420R
72" 420R 420R
48„ 78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 418G
90" 412G 407G
96" 401 G 396G
102" 389G 384G
Neutral 108" 376G 372G
Drop
114" 364G 359G
120" 350G 346G
126" 337G 332G
132" 322G 318G
138" 307G 303G
50' Pole
60" 420R 420R
66" 420R 420R
72" 420R 420R
78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 420R
90" 420R 420R
96" 420R 420R
102" 420R 420R
108" 420R 420R
114" 420R 420R
120" 420R 420R
126" 420R 420R
132" 420R 420R
138" 420R 418G
Design Considerations W` R,,

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-13
Pole Height vs Span Length —3-0 12.5 kV Raptor-Safe T-8" Crossarm
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300R
40' Pole
60" 364G 359G
66" 350G 346G
1-0&3-0 12.5 kV Risers 72" 337G 332G
1-0 7.2 kV Transformer 78" 322G 318G
84" 307G 303G
90" 291 G 288G
96" 275G 271 G
102" 257G 254G
108" 238G 235G
114" 217G 214G
3-0 12.5 kV Transformer Bank 120" 194G 192G
126" 168G 166G
12.5 kV Canacitor Bank 132" 137G 135G
45' Pole
60" 420R 420R
" 420R 420R
72
72" 420R 420R
48"
78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 418G
90" 412G 407G
Neutral 96" 401 G 396G
Drop 102" 389G 384G
108" 376G 372G
114" 364G 359G
120" 350G 346G
126" 337G 332G
132" 322G 318G
50' Pole
60" 420R 420R
66" 420R 420R
72" 420R 420R
78" 420R 420R
84" 420R 420R
90" 420R 420R
96" 420R 420R
102" 420R 420R
108" 420R 420R
114" 420R 420R
120" 420R 420R
126" 420R 420R
132" 420R 420R
`POMR,. Design Considerations

11-02-14 Revised 03/07 Overhead
Pole Height vs Span Length —3-0 34.5 kV Raptor-Safe 10' Crossarm
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
40' Pole
60" 412G 403N 317N 319G
66" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
72" 389G 384G 305G 300G
78" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
1-0 19.9 kV Transformer 84" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
90" 350G 346G 274G 271 G
1-0&3-0 34.5 kV Risers 96" 337G 332G 264G 260G
102" 322G 318G 252G 249G
108" 307G 303G 241 G 237G
114" 291 G 288G 228G 225G
120" 275G 271 G 215G 212G
126" 257G 254G 201 G 199G
34.5 kV Capacitor Bank 132" 238G 235G 186G 184G
1-011 5 kV Trnncfnrmar ua„k 138" 217G 214G 170G 168G
45' Pole
60" 420R 403N 317N 327N
66" 420R 420R 331 N 341 N
72" 420R 420R 345N 355N
24 78" 420R 420R 358N 360R
® 84" 420R 420R 360R 360R
90" 420R 420R 357G 352G
Neutral 96" 420R 420R 349G 344G
Drop 102" 420R 420R 341 G 336G
108" 420R 418G 332G 327G
114" 412G 407G 323G 319G
120" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
126" 389G 384G 305G 300G
132" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
138" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
50' Pole
60" 420R 403N 317N 327N
66" 420R 420R 331 N 341 N
72" 420R 420R 345N 355N
78" 420R 420R 358N 360R
84" 420R 420R 360R 360R
90" 420R 420R 360R 360R
96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
102" 420R 420R 360R 360R
108" 420R 420R 360R 360R
114" 420R 420R 360R 360R
120" 420R 420R 360R 360R
126" 420R 420R 360R 360R
132" 420R 420R 360R 360R
138" 420R 420R 360R 360R
Design Considerations W` R,,

Overhead Revised 03/07 11-02-15
Pole Height vs Span Length —3-0 12.5 kV Raptor-Safe 10' Crossarm
Neutral Maximum Span Length (ft)
Drop-see #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336 AL 795 AL
Equipment page -06 350RS 350RS 300RS 300RS
40' Pole
60" 412G 407G 323G 319G
66" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
1-0&3-0 12.5 kV Risers 72" 389G 384G 305G 300G
1-0 7.2 kV Transformer 78" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
84" 364G 359G 285G 281 G
90" 350G 346G 274G 271 G
96" 337G 332G 264G 260G
102" 322G 318G 252G 249G
108" 307G 303G 241 G 237G
114" 291 G 288G 228G 225G
120" 275G 271 G 215G 212G
3-0 12.5 kV Transformer Bank 126" 257G 254G 201 G 199G
12.5 kV Canacitor Bank 132" 238G 235G 186G 184G
45' Pole
60" 420R 413N 325N 335N
66" 420R 420R 339N 349N
24" 72" 420R 420R 352N 360R
® 78" 420R 420R 360R 360R
84" 420R 420R 360R 360R
90" 420R 420R 357G 352G
Neutral 96" 420R 420R 349G 344G
Drop 102" 420R 420R 341 G 336G
108" 420R 418G 332G 327G
114" 412G 407G 323G 319G
120" 401 G 396G 314G 310G
126" 389G 384G 305G 300G
132" 376G 372G 295G 291 G
50' Pole
60" 420R 413N 325N 335N
66" 420R 420R 339N 349N
72" 420R 420R 352N 360R
78" 420R 420R 360R 360R
84" 420R 420R 360R 360R
90" 420R 420R 360R 360R
96" 420R 420R 360R 360R
102" 420R 420R 360R 360R
108" 420R 420R 360R 360R
114" 420R 420R 360R 360R
120" 420R 420R 360R 360R
126" 420R 420R 360R 360R
132" 420R 420R 360R 360R
ONPOMR,, Design Considerations

11-02-16 Revised 03/07 Overhead
Communication Attachment Height at 60OF final sag, assuming 18" of sag increase
vs. Span Length for the communication conductor. Oregon State
requires an 18'minimum clearance at maximum
Communication utilities often attempt to string final sag over state highways, so we are
their cables to match the sag of the power utility providing another table for this criterion. If the
neutral conductor. Cable sizes and tensions vary sag of the communication cable under maximum
greatly, so as an approximation we are final sag(Srs) is known for a particular ruling
assuming that the communication cable span length(Lrs),then the maximum span
under high temperature or ice loading will length allowed(L) for a given ground clearance
match the sag of the neutral conductor at its value(C)and a particular attachment height(H)
MAXIMUM FINAL SAG. The following table can be calculated according to the following
gives maximum span lengths for various formula:
attachment heights assuming a 16'-6"minimum
clearance at MAXIMUM FINAL SAG. This L=Lrs (H-C)/Srs
corresponds to a clearance of approximately 18'
Typical Communication Attachment Height vs. Span Length
Power Communication Attachment Height vs Maximum Span Length(feet)
Wire Sag 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 25.5 26.0 26.5 27.0 27.5 28.0
#4 ACSR 6.47' 217 238 257 275 291 307 322 337 350 364 376 389 401 412 420 420 420 420 420
2/0 ACSR 6.63' 214 235 254 271 288 303 318 332 346 359 372 384 396 407 418 420 420 420 420
336 AL 7.74' 198 217 235 251 266 281 295 308 320 332 344 355 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
795 w 336-N 7.95' 196 215 232 248 263 277 291 304 316 328 339 351 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
Typical Communication Attachment Height vs. Span Length for State Highway Crossings
Power Communication Attachment Height vs Maximum Span Length(feet)
WireSag 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 25.5 26.0 26.5 27.0 27.5 28.0
#4 ACSR 6.47' 137 168 194 217 238 257 275 291 307 322 337 350 364 376 389 401 412 420 420
2/0 ACSR 6.63' 135 166 192 214 235 254 271 288 303 318 332 346 359 372 384 396 407 418 420
336 AL 7.74' 125 154 177 198 217 235 251 266 281 295 308 320 332 344 355 360 360 360 360
795 w 336-N 7.95' 124 152 175 196 215 232 248 263 277 291 304 316 328 339 351 360 360 360 360
WMIDAW
Design Considerations WWOMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead 11-03-01
This page intentionally left blank.
IDAHO
�POWER. Reserved

Overhead Revised 08/03 11-04-01
Grades of Construction
Definition The communication utility may need to be
contacted to determine whether proper devices
In order to perform strength calculations,the have been used for overvoltage and short circuit
grade of construction must be determined. The protection.Protection against electrical contact
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)has two usually involves bonding the communication
designations that are used by Idaho Power for messenger to the primary neutral.
the construction of T&D facilities, either grade
"B"or grade"C".The difference is the overload
capacity factors(OCF)required for each grade.
Grade"B"requirements are the higher of the
two.
This section lists the areas where grade"B"
construction is required.All other construction
should be grade"C". '
/Note,Add maximum conductor
sag to determine conflict with
Note. Deadends or double crossarms, I\ communication conductors
pins,insulators and brackets are required
at both ends of a Grade"B"span.
Communication Lines
Grade"B"construction may be required in areas
of communication conductors if: Structure Conflict with Communications
♦ Communication pole lines parallel the
primary lines where structure conflict exists. Note. See section 04 for the definition
♦ Communication lines cross under primary of"structure conflict"and bonding of
joint use facilities.
lines whether or not on a common structure.
To use grade"C,"the communications plant
must be protected against an electrical contact.
(See Rule 223 of the 2003 NESC)This includes
both crossings and structure conflict situations,
and joint use construction where proper bonding
has not been accomplished.
E''�IDMO
�wPOWER Grades of Construction

11-04-02 Revised 08/03 Overhead
Railroads Limited Access Highways
Grade"B"construction is required for lines in Grade`B"construction is required for lines in
proximity to railroad tracks if: proximity to limited access highways(freeways)
♦ Lines cross railroad tracks. if-
♦ Lines parallel the railroad tracks and could ♦ Lines cross the limited access highway.
fall on the tracks. ♦ Lines overhang the right-of-way.
♦ Lines could fall into the traveled way.
C&W
Foods
m
ODO
11 Li
0000
Crossing Limited Access Highway or RR
�y Note: Add maximum conductor sag when determining conflict
C&W
Foods
ODO
Paralleling Limited Access Highway or RR
IDAHO
Grades of Construction W Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 08/03 11-04-03
Inverted Voltage Levels Multiple Crossings
Grade`B"construction is required when the Grade`B"construction may be needed for
top circuit of a double circuit line is of a the upper span,where a span crosses other
lower voltage level than the bottom circuit, wire spans for certain circumstances.This
either on a common structure or at a includes:
crossing.
♦ Where a line crosses in one span over
Lower Voltage Circuit two or more other lines of different
o voltage levels.
® ♦ Where a line crosses over a span of
another line,which span in turn crosses
over a third line with different voltages.
Higher Voltage Circuit
See Rules 241 C3a and 241 C2 NESC code.
o
Inverted Voltage Levels at Crossing or
Underbuild on Same Structure
Bottom Bottom-34.5 kV Top-34.5 kV
12.5 kV Grade B required
due to Rule 241 C3a
Top-34.5 kV Bottom-34.5 kV
Grade B required Grade B over RR
due to Rule 241C3a
Ift
Bottom Bottom-34.5 kV
12.5 kV 1
Top � Top-34.5 kV
34.5 kV Grade B required
due to Rule 241C3a
it
Multiple Crossings within One Span
�wPOMR. Grades of Construction

Overhead Revised 02/17 11-05-01
Equipment Weights and Wind Loads
General Transformers
Size Weight(Ibs) Wind Load (Ibs)
The equipment weights and wind loads (kVA) raw B or C* (unfactored)
(4 lb wind) shown in the tables are used for 1- 25 710 1,562 45
performing pole and guy strength calculations. 1- 50 995 2,189 55
1- 75 1,215 2,673 60
Raw and factored values are given for 1- 100 1,440 3,168 65
equipment weights. 1- 167 1,795 3,949 75
1- 250 2,420 5,324 85
The Overload Capacity Factors(OCF's) for 1- 333 3,065 6,743 105
Poles (2.2)is the same for Grade `B"and"C". 1- 500 4,040 8,888 130
See Table 253-2 of the 2002 edition of the 3- 25 2,130 4,686 100
National Electrical Safety Code. 3- 50 3,055 6,721 120
3- 75 3,825 8,415 130
Weights and surface areas are the maximums 3- 100 4,435 9,757 140
3- 167 5,370 11,814 160
observed in the BOC yard or manufacturer's 3- 250 6,990 15,378 180
data for any distribution primary or secondary 3- 333 8,735 19,217 220
voltage for a particular transformer kVA size. 3- 500 11,615 25,553 275
* Use these factored equipment weights in
Transformer weight includes: performing pole strength calculations.
♦ Cutouts
♦ Arresters Auto-Transformers up to 500 kVA
♦ Switch arm or bracket Size Weight(Ibs) Wind Load (Ibs)
♦ Racks (kVA) raw B or C* (unfactored)
♦ Bussing 1- 75 1,759 3,870 309**
1- 100 1,851 4,072 229
♦ 50' of service conductor sized according to 1- 167 2,287 5,031 344
present practice 1- 250 2,594 5,707 372
1- 500 3,340 7,348 462
Note. Other equipment weights and * Use these factored equipment weights in
wind loads also include hardware performing pole strength calculations to properly
normally associated with the equipment size the pole.
** Based on 25 kV-12.5 kV step down unit. Other
listed. sizes are based on 34.5 kV-12.5 kV step down
units.
The OCF's for wind loads differ depending on A single unit step down transformer can be pole-
the grade of construction, and whether you are mounted as long as pole is properly sized and the
factored weight does not exceed the values shown
calculating loads for a pole or for a guy. Only on OH pages 11-06-02 to 06.
the unfactored wind loads are shown in the
tables.
IMppMR,: Equipment Weights and Wind Loads

11-05-02 Revised 02/17 Overhead
Auto-Transformers over 500 kVA Reclosers
Size Weight(Ibs) Weight(Ibs) Wind Load (Ibs)
(kVA) raw Type raw B or C* (unfactored)
1-1500 4,528 6H 494 1,086 110
1-2500 8,250 VWV38X 1,030 2,508 115
38-kV NOVA 422 928 110
VWVE38X 1,090 2,398 120
Two-Winding Transformers
Use these factored equipment weights in
Size Weight(Ibs) performing pole strength calculations.
(kVA) raw NOVA weight includes 1/2 kVA transformer.
1-2500 13,209
Note. Supplier of rack-mounted 2500 Sectionalizers
kVA OH step-down unit has gone dry in Weight(Ibs) Wind Load (Ibs)
the market place. Call M&M for a Type raw B or C* (unfactored)
padmount options. GN3 470 1,034 100
GV 690 1,518 105
GW 1,100 2,420 120
Capacitors
Use these factored equipment weights in
Size Weight(Ibs) Wind Load (Ibs) performing pole strength calculations
(kVAR) raw B or C* (unfactored)
600 800 1,760 115
1200 1,100 2,420 130
1800 1,400 3,080 145
* Use these factored equipment weights in
performing pole strength calculations.
Regulators
Size Weight(Ibs) Wind Load (Ibs)
(Amps) raw B or C* (unfactored)
7.2-kV
50A 1,380 3,036 100
75A 1,565 3,443 105
100A 1,680 3,696 110
150A 2,145 4,719 120
219A 2,575 5,665 130
19.9-kV
25A 2,360 5,192 135
50A 3,010 6,622 135
* Use these factored equipment weights in
performing pole strength calculations.
Equipment Weights and Wind Loads "`�R„

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-06-01
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class Selection Tables
General Transformers
Use these tables to select the pole class for The transformer weight and wind loading(4-
strength considerations. pound wind)includes
♦ Cutouts
The allowable buckling safety factor used for ♦ Porcelain arresters
each grade of construction was 2.2 for`B"and ♦ Switch arm or bracket
1.9 for"C."If a pole of a certain class buckled ♦ Secondary rack
under the design span calculated by the ♦ Bussing
program,then the pole was rejected for that ♦ 50'of service conductor
case.
CAUTION. The tables are based on pole Services
strength considerations only. Clearance
aspects of the construction must also be The service conductor tension is applied 3'
considered(See Section 11-02). below the equipment attachment,which is also
assumed to be the neutral level(neutral with 0.5'
The tables were created using POLEDA with the eccentricity).
following parameters:
Cable TV
Poles
Cable TV is assumed to be equivalent to one 795
♦ Western Red Cedar Al conductor attached at 23'above ground level
♦ Wood density-40 pounds pcf at 1.0' eccentricity(approximates a 0.75" cable
♦ Modulus of elasticity of 1,120,000 psi plus 0.25"messenger).
♦ Modulus of rupture of 6000 psi Loading
♦ Pole dimensions from ANSI 05.1-1987;
♦ Pole setting depth 10% of height plus 2' NESC medium loading with 1993 Table 253-2
♦ Crossarm construction with center conductor factors applied to all loads except equipment
0.75'above the pole top weight;pole 2° out of plumb; design option 3;
♦ Other phase conductors level with center uniform wind profile. Other parameters were the
conductor, program defaults.
♦ Neutral in secondary position
♦ 100 pounds at 1'below the pole top
(unfactored)for crossarm,pin,insulator
weight
Note. See REA Bulletin 1724E-200,
Design Manual for High Voltage
Transmission Lines, 1992 Revision,page
13-3.
E''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Unguyed Tangent Pole Class Selection Tables

11-06-02 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class vs. Span Length and Equipment Load-40' Pole
Factored Grade"B" Maximum Span Grade"C" Maximum Span
Equipment Pole 1-0 3-0 1-0 3-0
Weight(lbs)* Class 4 210 4 210 336 795 4 2/0 4 2/0 336 795
1 605 500 415 320 445
0-2,700 2 485 400 335 255 730 590 485 360
(Up to 75kVA) 3 605 520 360 295 245 185 930 790 545 445 365 270
4 425 365 250 205 170 670 570 395 320 260 190
H1 690 570 475 365 525
1 525 435 365 280 665 555 405
2,701 -5,400 2 670 580 405 335 280 215 640 520 430 320
(Up to 3-25kVA) 3 455 390 275 230 190 775 660 460 375 305 225
4 270 230 165 510 435 305 245 200 150
H1 620 515 430 330 495
1 650 455 375 315 240 735 605 495 370
5,401 -8,900 2 545 470 330 275 230 175 810 560 455 380 280
(Up to 3-75kVA) 3 320 275 200 165 630 540 375 305 255 185
4 360 305 220 175
* See section 11-05 for factored equipment weights.
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class Selection Tables 99 R,,

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-06-03
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class vs. Span Length and Equipment Load-45' Pole
Factored Grade "B" Maximum Span Grade"C" Maximum Span
Equipment Pole 1-0 3-0 1-0 3-0
Weight(lbs)* Class 4 2/0 4 2/0 336 795 4 2/0 4 2/0 336 795
1 620 510 420 320 745 605 445
0-2,700 2 700 480 390 325 245 720 585 475 345
(Up to 1-75kVA) 3 610 520 355 290 240 180 800 545 440 360 260
4 430 365 250 205 170 690 580 395 315 255 185
H1 695 570 475 360
1 530 435 360 275 670 550 400
2,701 -5,400 2 660 565 390 320 265 200 625 505 410 300
(Up to 3-25kVA) 3 445 380 265 215 180 775 650 445 360 295 215
4 255 220 155 505 425 290 235 190
H1 615 505 420 320 480
5,401 -8,900 1 765 650 450 370 305 235 740 600 490 360
(Up to 3-75kVA) 2 515 435 305 250 205 155 775 530 430 350 255
3 290 245 175 600 505 350 280 230 165
4 320 270 190 155
H1 595 490 405 310 630 465
8,901 - 11,900 1 430 350 290 220 705 570 470 345
(Up to 3-167kVA) 2 280 230 190 495 400 330 240
3 150 310 250 205
H2 645 530 440 335 525
11,901 - 19,250 H1 455 375 310 235 785 640 525 390
(Up to 3-333kVA) 1 285 230 195 545 440 360 265
H2
19,251 -25,600 H1 Equipment above 19,250 Ibs—Platform mount; see section 19-05
1
* See section 11-05 for factored equipment weights.
ONPOMR,. Unguyed Tangent Pole Class Selection Tables

11-06-04 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class vs. Span Length and Equipment Load-50' Pole
Factored Grade"B" Maximum Span Grade"C" Maximum Span
Equipment Pole 1-0 3-0 1-0 3-0
Weight(lbs)* Class 4 210 4 2/0 336 795 4 2/0 4 2/0 336 795
H1 630 520 390
0-2,700 1 615 500 410 310 735 590 430
(Up to 1-75kVA) 2 700 475 385 320 240 720 580 465 335
3 625 525 355 290 235 175 970 805 550 435 355 250
H1 675 550 455 345 495
2,701 -5,400 1 520 420 350 260 650 530 380
(Up to 3-25kVA) 2 655 550 375 305 255 190 610 490 395 285
3 440 365 255 205 170 775 640 435 350 280 200
H2 630 520 390 570
H1 590 480 395 300 755 615 450
5,401 -8,900 1 740 625 425 345 285 215 710 570 465 335
(Up to 3-75kVA) 2 485 410 280 230 190 895 745 505 405 330 235
3 260 215 155 575 475 325 260 210 150
H2 745 610 505 380
8,901 - 11,900 H1 565 460 380 285 720 590 430
(Up to 3-167kVA) 1 395 325 265 200 670 535 435 315
2 250 205 170 465 365 300 215
3 275 220 175
H3 405
11,901 - 19,250 H2 585 480 395 300 795 650 475
(Up to 3-333kVA) H1 400 325 270 205 720 580 470 345
1 235 190 155 480 385 315 225
H3
19,251 —25,600 H2 Equipment above 19,250 Ibs—Platform mount; see section 19-05
H1
1
* See section 11-05 for factored equipment weights.
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class Selection Tables 991130MR,

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-06-055
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class vs. Span Length and Equipment Load-55' Pole
Factored Grade "B" Maximum Span Grade"C" Maximum Span
Equipment Pole 1-0 3-0 1-0 3-0
Weight(lbs)* Class 4 2/0 4 210 336 795 4 2/0 4 210 336 795
H1 620 510 380
0-2,700 1 610 495 405 300 730 580 415
(Up to 1-75kVA) 2 705 475 385 315 235 720 570 460 325
3 600 500 340 270 220 165 950 775 525 415 330 235
H1 665 540 440 330 470
2,701 -5,400 1 750 510 410 335 250 805 635 510 365
(Up to 3-25kVA) 2 650 545 370 295 245 180 605 475 385 275
3 400 330 225 180 150 730 595 405 320 255 180
H2 745 605 495 370 545
H1 565 460 375 280 725 590 425
5,401 -8,900 1 715 595 405 330 270 200 690 545 440 315
(Up to 3-75kVA) 2 460 385 265 210 175 875 715 485 385 310 220
3 195 160 495 405 275 220 175
H2 715 580 475 355 520
8,901 - 11,900 H1 535 430 355 265 685 560 405
(Up to 3-167kVA) 1 370 300 245 185 640 505 405 290
2 225 180 430 340 275 195
3 210 160
H3 785 645 515 385
11,901 - 19,250 H2 535 435 360 270 740 600 430
(Up to 3-333kVA) H1 350 285 235 175 660 525 425 305
1 180 150 420 335 265 190
H3
19,251 -25,600 H2 Equipment above 19,250 Ibs—Platform mount;see section 19-05
H1
* See section 11-05 for factored equipment weights.
ONPOMR,. Unguyed Tangent Pole Class Selection Tables

11-06-06 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class vs. Span Length and Equipment Load-60' Pole
Factored Grade "B" Maximum Span Grade "C" Maximum Span
Equipment Pole 1-0 3-0 1-0 3-0
Weight(lbs)" Class 4 210 4 2/0 336 795 4 2/0 4 2/0 336 795
H1 615 500 370
0-2,700 1 610 490 400 295 725 575 405
(Up to 1-75kVA) 2 680 455 365 300 220 695 545 440 305
3 585 485 325 260 210 155 930 750 505 395 315 220
H2 665 545 405
H1 655 525 430 320 455
2,701 -5,400 1 740 500 400 325 240 795 625 500 350
(Up to 3-25kVA) 2 610 505 340 275 255 165 845 570 445 355 250
3 365 300 200 160 685 555 375 290 230 160
H2 720 580 475 355 520
H1 545 440 360 265 705 565 405
5,401 -8,900 1 695 575 390 310 255 190 995 670 525 420 295
(Up to 3-75kVA) 2 400 330 225 180 800 645 435 340 270 190
3 420 340 225 170
H2 685 550 450 335 490
8,901 - 11,900 H1 505 410 335 245 650 530 375
(Up to 3-167kVA) 1 345 280 225 165 605 475 380 270
2 175 370 285 230
H3 475 355
11,901 - 19,250 H2 490 395 325 240 870 685 550 395
(Up to 3-333kVA) H1 305 245 200 605 475 385 270
1 360 285 220
H3
19,251 -25,600 H2 Equipment above 19,250 Ibs—Platform mount;see section 19-05
H1
* See section 11-05 for factored equipment weights.
Unguyed Tangent Pole Class Selection Tables ` R

Overhead Revised 01/06 11-07-01
Unguyed Angle Pole Selection
Pole Class Selection See the table for side forces due to change in
line direction on page 25-06-02. Be sure to
An unguyed line angle puts an additional multiply the forces by the number of
horizontal load on the pole.The following conductors to get the total horizontal force.
table provides the number of classes Then, determine the number of classes of
necessary to accommodate the added increase from the table below.Add this class
horizontal load(unfactored). increase amount to the class normally
required to arrive at the total class
To use the table, first determine the tangent requirement. For slack span deadend design
pole class required without the added information, see section 11-24.
horizontal force produced by the line angle.
(Note that service tensions are already Rake and key poles with unbalanced
included in the unguyed tangent pole class horizontal loads. For rake values see
selection tables in section 11-06.)Then, Table 2,page 05-01-02. For pole keys, see
determine the additional horizontal force. page 06-12-02.
Table 1. Pole Class Adders for Additional Horizontal Loads
Total (not per phase) Pole Class Adder
Unfactored Single Phase (1-0) Three Phase(3-0)
Horizontal Load #4 2/0 #4 2/0 336 795
0-200# l l 1 l l 1
201-400# 2 2 2 2 2 1
401-600# 3 3 3 2 2 2
601-800#* 3 3 3 3 3 3
*Contact the Methods&Materials Department for loads exceeding 800 pounds.
E''�IDiAHO
ENPMER. Unguyed Angle Pole Selection

Overhead 11-08-01
This page intentionally left blank.
IDAHO
POWER. Reserved

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-09-01
Guy Selection
Scope The following table lists the ultimate strength for
This section determines the proper guying the guy wire.
hardware for deadend and bisect angle Wire Rated Breaking CU
structures. Guy tensions must always be Cat. ID Size Strength (Ibs) Code
calculated to determine if the hardware strength 3668 3/8" 15,400 DDG3
is adequate. 3671 1/2" 26,900 DDG2
Guy Hardware Attachment Hardware
Attachment hardware is used to connect the guy
There are four guying components that must be to the pole. It should is sized so that its'ultimate
checked for strength when designing a guyed strength matches that of the guy breaker and the
structure. guy wire.
♦ Guy Wire The following table lists the working load and the
♦ Guy Attachment Hardware ultimate strength for the guying hardware.
♦ Guy Strain Insulator Working Ultimate Guy CU
♦ Anchor Cat. ID Load(Ibs)Strength(Ibs)Wire Code
NOTE. For additional information 5328 7,600 20,000 3/8" DGEPH
regarding guying and anchoring see 5210 12,500 30,000 1/2" DPB2S*
Section 06. For Deadend Crossarms
22312 10,000 38,500 t DADE8M
Attachment hardware 4960 20,000 56,000 1/2" DADE81-1
strength&allowable 22314 10,000 38,500 t DADE10M
`working load in wood 4961 20,000 56,000 1/2" DADE10H
* For poles larger then class 1 or underbuilt construction use
Guy strain insulator DPB2M or DPB2L.
Pole strength t Use for 3/8"or 1/2"guy wire.
strength
Guy wire Guy Strain Insulator
'r strength
The guy strain insulator provides isolation
Anchor rod between energized conductors and ground in the
stren th event of a failure of the guy wire. The ultimate
Foundation Anchor strength strength of the insulator should be matched with
strength in the soil that of the guy wire. Guy strain insulators will
Guy Wire be used on all down guys.
The following table lists the guy strain insulator
Guy wire is purchased in 3/8" and 1/2" sizes. strengths and appropriate guy wire.
The attachment hardware should be selected to
Ultimate Guy CU
match the guy wire. Cat. ID Strength (Ibs) Wire Code
The guy wire rated breaking strength must be 4726 15,000 3/8" DGG17
checked,by determining the guy tension. 4727 30,000 1/2" DGG17H
E''� P1H0 ID
EMPMER. Guy Selection

11-09-02 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Anchors Shear Pins
There are four types of anchors that are Screw anchor holding power is proportional to
purchased: screw,disk, crossplate, and rock. The the installation torque.
holding strength of the anchor is dependent on
the size of the rod and the type of soil that the The following table indicates the number of
anchor is installed in. shear pins needed to achieve a certain amount of
anchor holding power
NOTE. Anchors should be located to
provide a 1:1 guy slope,if possible. This Sheared Torque Anchor Holding Power
means that the distance from the pole is Pins (ft-Ibs) DANS6 DANS10 DANS14
approximately equal to the attachment 3 1,500 --- 12,000 15,000
height. 4 2,000 --- 15,000 18,000
5 2,500 --- 18,000 21,000
6 3,000 17,000 21,000 24,000
An anchor must be able to hold all guys that are 7 3,500 21,000 25,000 27,000
attached to it without pulling. If the tension of 8 4,000 23,000 27,000 30,000
the guys(including a communication guy) 9 4,500 26,000 31,000 33,000
exceeds the holding strength of the anchor,then 10 5, 00 3 ,000 34,000 3 ,000
11 5,500 33,000 36,000 ---
an additional anchor must be installed.
NOTE. All anchors should have enough Guy and Anchor Location
excess capacity so that one
communication guy may be installed. The phase guy is located just below the phase
conductor or arm. If multiple guys are required
If multiple anchors are required,they should be the bolts need to be spaced at least 6" apart
space 5'apart to utilize the full strength of the vertically to allow the bolts to develop their full
soil. vertical strength in the wood.
Rod Ultimate CU The neutral guy is located just below the
Cat. ID Size Strength (Ibs) Code neutral conductor,when the neutral is in the
Screw Anchors secondary position.
5016 1" 36,000 DANS6
5017 1" 36,000 DANS10
5018 ill 36,000 DANS14 NOTE. It is not necessary to guy the
Disk Anchors neutral for#4 ACSR when the neutral is
5004 3/4" 23,000 DAN19 in the secondary position.
5006 1" 36,000 DAN23
Crossplate Anchors Locate the anchor to provide a 1:1 guy slope,if
40899 1" 23,000* DAN20 practical,to reduce the loads on the pole and in
Rock Anchors the guy.
5010 3/4" 23,000 DANRK
5013 1" 36,000 DANRK1
De-rated from 36,000 because of crossplate
loading.
Note. The screw and crossplate anchors
use the same r,anchor rod(Cat. ID 5020).
Guy Selection 'W@PMRl,
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-09-03
Guy Tensions Vertical Pole Loading
Guy tension(Gt) is calculated to determine the Vertical pole loading(Vt) is calculated to
proper size of guying hardware,which includes; determine the class of pole required to handle
anchors, guy wire, and attachment hardware. vertical loads.Vertical loading includes the
following:
NESC overload factors must be applied
depending on the grade of construction. (See ♦ Conductor Weight+ 1/4" ice
Section 11-04) ♦ Down guy
♦ Equipment Weight
NESC Overload Factors for Down Guys ♦ Workman and Tools Weight
Grade of Construction
Load Nature B C The overload factors for wood poles are
Transverse Loads different than for down guys and also depend on
Wind (OW) 2.5 2.2 the grade of construction. (See Section 11-04)
Wire Tension (Ot) 1.65 1.3
Deadends(Ot) 1.65 1.3 NESC Overload Factors for Poles
Grade of Construction
Load Nature B C
NOTE. Guy tension and pole loading Vertical Loads(OPT) 2.2 2.2
calculations must be done for phase, Transverse Loads
neutral,and communication conductors. Wind (OPW) 4.0 2.67
Wire Tension (OPt) 2.0 1.33
Guy Angles Deadends(OPt) 2.0 1.33
Guy angles are determined by the following NOTE. The weight of any equipment
equation: must be added to the vertical guy load to
Angle 0=tan-' (L-H) correctly size the pole.
Where:
L=lead length V'
H=Guy hardware 7 CAUTION. Check to make sure the guy will
attachment point 6 clear equipment and live parts by the required
distances. See the construction drawings for the
equipment and the required clearances to live
parts on page 03-10-04.
H
L
M�10RHO
EM POWER. Guy Selection

11-09-04 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Vertical & Horizontal Span Lengths
L1 L2
Vertical Span Length
(low point to low point)
Horizontal Span Length
(1/2 L1 + 1/2 L2)
Buckling Strength for Wood Poles To use this table, add the loads listed below then
find the pole class,which has sufficient capacity
The following table provides values for in the table:
unfactored buckling strength of wood poles with ♦ Iced weight of conductors(factored)
the guy attachment at 18"below the top of the ♦ Factored vertical guy loads for all guys
pole. ♦ Factored equipment loads
Strengths were calculated using the Gere and ♦ Workman plus tools load(500 lbs)
Carter formula assuming:
See the examples on the following pages for
♦ Pinned-pinned end conditions detailed calculations, or use the tables starting
♦ Normal pole setting depth on page 11-09-21 for deadend poles, or page 11-
♦ Western Red Cedar(MOE 1,120,000psi) 09-41 for bisect angle poles.
Unfactored Buckling Strength (lbs)for Wood Poles
Pole Wood Pole Class
Length H3 H2 H1 1 2 3 4 5
35' 23,090
40' 120,490 96,820 75,120 57,290 43,930 32,170 22,940
45' 100,670 81,240 63,410 48,680 36,680 27,050 19,440
50' 86,430 68,710 53,860 41,560 31,480 23,360
55' 75,800 59,450 46,780 36,250 27,600 20,130
60' 66,500 52,360 41,360 32,180 24,110
65' 59,220 46,800 37,090 28,430 21,390
Guy Selection WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-09-05
Calculating Deadend Guys Communication
Gc*=[(C x T x Ot)-sin 01-0.9
Example Gc*=[(1 x 2240 x 1.3)-sin 40°]-0.9=5,034 lbs
Refer to the illustration on page 11-09-22. Provider supplied guy.
The working load for the guying hardware is
Calculate the guy tension and the vertical pole calculated using the vertical loading without
loading, given the following information. overload factors.
3-0 Grade C construction with neutral(2/0)in Vo=(C x T)-tan 0=3 x 1850_tan 300
secondary position =9,613 lbs
2/0 ACSR conductor @ 1850 lbs(Page 10-03-01)
Communication Cable @ 2240 lbs(Page 25-02-09) Use deadend crossarm attachment hardware
Guy angle of 30'for Phase DADE8M(Section 07-01)
Guy angle of 35'for Neutral Vn=T-tan 0= 1850-tan 35'=2,642 lbs
Guy angel of 40'for Comm.
3-167 kVA transformer Use a DGEPH(Page 11-09-01)
45'pole To determine total load on anchor
C=#of conductors attached G*Total= 16,033+4,659+5,034=25,726 lbs
Ot= 1.3 (NESC for Guys-Page 11-09-03) Use single anchor—DANS(6,10 or 14),DAN23 or
OPt= 1.33 (NESC for Poles—Page 11-09-03) DANRK1 (Page 11-09-02)
OPv=2.2(NESC for Poles—Page 11-09-03) Shear pins for screw anchors(Page 11-09-02).For
Span Length=320' DANS10=8 pins,9 pins with extension rod.
Man Weight(MW)=5001bs
Ruling Span(RS)=350 Vertical Pole load (Factored)
NOTE. The following calculations use Phase
144%of the ruling span for vertical Vo—(C x T x OPt)-tan 0
loading, Sv=(1.44) x (350')= 504'in the Vo—(3 x 1850 x 1.33)-tan 300
example. = 12,785 lbs
Neutral
For 2/0 ACSR Vn*=(T x OPt)-tan 0
Tension(T)= 1850 lbs Vn*=(1850 x 1.33)-tan 350
Conductor Weight(Cw)=0.3998 lbs/ft(Page 10-01-02) =3,514 lbs
For Communication conductor Communication
Tension(T)=2240 lbs Vc*=(C x T x OPt)-tan 0
Conductor Weight(Cw)=1.143 lbs/ft(Page 10-01-02) Vc*=(2240 x 1.33)-tan 400
=3,550 lbs
Guy Tension(* Factored) Conductor Weight
Phase Cw*=(C x Cwo+Cwn+Cwc) x (SO x OPv
Grp*= [(CT x Ot)_sin 0] -0.9 Cw*=(3 x 0.3998+0.3998+ 1.143) x (504) x 2.2
Grp*= [(3 x 1850 x 1.3)_sin 300]_0.9= 16,033 lbs =3,041 lbs
Use DDG2(Page 11-09-01) Equipment Weight
Neutral Ew*=Equipment Wt. x OPv
Gn*=[(T x Ot)-sin 0]-0.9 Ew*=5,370 x 2.2= 11,814 lbs(Page 11-05-01)
Gn*=[(1850 x 1.3)_sin 350]-0.9=4,659 lbs To determine total vertical pole load:
Neutral guy required for 2/0 ACSR and larger. V*Total =Vo*+Vn*+Vc*+Cw*+Ew*+MW
Use DDG3(Page 11-09-01) = 12,785+3,514+3,550+3,041 + 11,814+500
=35,204 lbs
Use Class 2 Pole min. (Page 11-09-04)
Make tangent pole check.
E''-IDiAHO
PouveR Guy Selection

11-09-06 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Calculating Bisect Angle Guys
Example For 2/0 ACSR
Calculate the guy tension and the vertical pole T= 1850 lbs(Page 10-03-03)
Conductor Wt=0.3998 lbs/ft(Page 10-01-02)
loading, given the following information. Conductor loading(Chl)=0.3157 lbs/ft
3-0 Grade C construction with neutral in secondary (Page 10-01-02)
position For Communication conductor
C=#Conductors attached T=2240 lbs(Page 25-02-09)
45'pole needed Conductor Wt= 1.1431 lbs/ft(Page 10-01-02)
2/0 ACSR conductor @ 1850 lbs(Page 10-03-03) Conductor Horizontal loading(Chi)=0.5087 lbs/ft
Communication Cable @ 2240 lbs(Page 25-02-09)
Ruling span(RS)=350' (Page 10-01-02)
Line angle(6)of 10° Calculate guy angles.
50-kVA Transformer , ,
Span forward(Sf)=300' Ao=tari(Lo/Ho)=tan-'(21/36.5)=30°
Span back(Sb) 275' An=tan-'(Ln/Hn)=tan'(21/30.5)=35°
Man Weight=500 lbs Ac=tan'(Lc/Hc)=tan'(21/25)=40°
Calculate conductor side tensions(unfactored).
NOTE. To be conservative,use 120%of
ruling span for horizontal wind loading and So=2 x To x sin(6/2)=2(1850)(0.087)=3221bs*
Sn=2 x Tn x sin(5/2)=2(1850)(0.087)=322 lbs
144%of ruling span for vertical conductor Sc=2 x Tc x sin(6/2)=2(2240)(0.087)=3901bs
loading. * Sn<1000 lbs,no neutral guy required
In this example Calculate wind loads on pole,equipment,wires.
Sh= 120%(350')=420' Wp=152 lbs(assuming 45C1,Page 05-01-07)
Sv= 144%(350')=504' We=55 lbs(50 kVA transformer,Page 11-05-01)
Wo=Chi x Sh x cos(6/2)
Wo=0.3157 x 420'x cos(10/2)
=114.9 x cos(5°)=132 lbs
Wn=Chl x Sh x cos(6/2)
Wn=0.3157 x 420'x cos(10/2)
=114.9 x cos(5°)=132 lbs
We=Chl x Sh x cos(6/2)
We=0.5087 x 420'x cos(10/2)
=213.7 x cos(5°)=213 lbs
Guy Selection WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-09-07
2/0 ACSR @ 1850 Ibs Phase Vertical Loading
Sf=300'span
= Ho=36.5'
Equipment Weight
° r1
5 = 10,
Sb=275'span 30'
2/0 ACSR @ 1850 Ibs
A.
Hn=30.5'
Phase Guy Tension
---- 35' Comm Loading @ 2,240 Ibs
Hc=25'
/ \ 40'
I �
I � I
I 21' I
Comm Guy Tension=1,067 Ibs /
i
Calculating Bisect Angle Guys
E'er ID ID
1wPOMR. Guy Selection

11-09-08 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Calculate Guy Tensions (* Factored) Calculate Vertical Pole Loads
Loads using Overload Factors for GUYS. (* Factored)
Factor loads with Overload Factors for POLES.
Ot=1.3(Page 11-09-03)
Ow=2.22(Page 11-09-03) OPt=1.33(Page 11-09-03)
So*=So x Ot=322 x 1.3=419 lbs OPµ,=2.67(Page 11-09-03)
Sn*=Sn*x Ot=322 x 1.3=4191bs So*=So x OPt=322 x 1.33=428 lbs
Sc*=Sc x Ot=390.5 x 1.3=508 lbs Sn*=Sn x OPt=322 x 1.33=4281bs
Wp*=Wp x Ow=152 x 2.2=334 lbs Sc*=Sc x OPt=390 x 1.33=5191bs
We*=We x Ow=55 x 2.2=121 lbs Wp*=Wp x OPµ,=152 x 2.67=406 lbs
Wo*=Wo x Ow=132 x 2.2=2901bs We'We x OPµ,=55 x 2.67=147 lbs
Wn*=Wn* x Ow=132 x 2.2=2901bs Wo*=Wo x OPµ,=132 x 2.67=352 lbs
We*=We x Ow=213 x 2.2=4691bs Wn*=Wn x OPµ,=132 x 2.67=3521bs
Calculate guy tension loads. Wc*=We x OPµ,=213 x 2.67=569 lbs
Assume top guy takes all load,no neutral guy. Calculate vertical pole loads.
Go*_ 1[3(So*+Wo*)+Wp*+We ]* -sin(Ao)} 0.9
Assume top guy takes pole,equipment wind load.
-
+[(Sn*+Wn*)-sin(Ao)] -. 0.9 Vo*_[3(So*+Wo*)+Wp*+We*]_tan(Ao)
= 1[3(419+290)+334+1211-0.51-0.9 +(Sn*+Wn*)-tan(Ao)
+[(419+290)/0.5]-0.9 =[3(428+352)+406+147]-0.575
=7313 lbs +(428+352)-0.575=6361 lbs
Use DDG3(Page 11-09-01) Vn*_(Sn*+Wn*)=tan(An)=0
Gn*=[(Sn*+Wn*)-sin(An)]-0.9=0 Neutral included with phase conductors.
Neutral included with phase conductors Vc*=(Sc*+We*)-tan(Ac)
Gc*=[(Sc*+We*)-sin(Ac)]-0.9 =(519+569)-0.839=1297 lbs
=[(508+469)_0.643]_0.9=16891bs Vpt*=6371 +0+1297=7668 lbs
Determine load on anchor. Calculate equipment weight.
Gt*=Go*+Gn*+Gc*=7313+0+1689=8,992 lbs OPv=2.2(Page 11-09-03)
Use single anchor-DANS(6,10 or 14),DAN19 or Ew*=Raw Weight(page 11-05-01)x OPv
DAN20 or DANRK(Page 11-09-02) Ew*=995 x 2.2=2189 1bs
Shear pins for screw anchors(Page 11-09-02).For Calculate total iced conductor weight.
DANS10=8 pins,9 pins with extension rod.
(Assume Comm weight=795 AL-Page 10-01-02)
Cwt* = {[C x Cwo+Cwn+C x Cwc] x Sv} x OPv
Vertical Guy Loads = {[3(.3998)+0.3998+1(.143)]x 5041 x 2.2
=3041 lbs
Calculate unfactored vertical guy loads to determine
Men and tools(unfactored).
attachment hardware.
Vo =[3(So+Wo)+Wp+We]-tan(Ao) Mw=5001bs
+(Sn+Wn) '. tan(Ao) Calculate total vertical pole load.
=[3(322+132)+152+551-0.575 Vt* -V t*+Ew*+Cµt*+Mw
+(322+132)-0.575 - p
=3504 lbs =7668+2189+3041+500
=13,3981bs
Use DGEPH(Page 11-09-01) For a 45'pole use Class 4(Page 11-09-04)
NOTE. DGEPH is a component of DDG3C. Compare with required tangent pole class(Section 11-
06 or the Tangent Pole Calculation Tool).
Vn=(Sn+Wn)-tan(An)=0 From page 11-06-03,a 287.5'span of 2/0 ACSR with a 50-
Neutral included with phase conductors kVA requires a Class 4 pole for grade"C".
Vc>Communication provider determines own Use a Class 4,45'pole.
attachment hardware
Guy Selection WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-09-21
Deadend Down Guys
Scope Vertical Pole Loading
The following tables provide the information Vertical pole loading is the force exerted on the
necessary to choose the guy attachment pole by the down guy(s),iced conductor,
hardware, guy, guy strain insulator,anchor, and workman and tools,and equipment weight.
pole class for a deadend pole. The tables are Assumption for calculating Vertical pole
based on a guy angle(A). loading:
NOTE. Angles should be at 1:1 slope if ♦ NESC OCF's for poles
possible. ♦ Iced conductor weight using 144%of the
ruling span
The tables provide the down guy,crossarm and ♦ Workman and tools weight of 500 lbs
attachment hardware CU codes. Choose the other
guy hardware according to the usual assembly NOTE. The numbers in the single wire
normally associated with that guy size, as shown column do not include the workman and
tools weight,except for 2/0 ACSR.
in section 06-07.
For an example calculation, see page 11-09-22. The factored weight of any equipment is added
to the vertical pole load to get the total load on
Guy Tension the pole. (Page 11-05-01 &02)
The total vertical load is used to determine the
The tables provide the factored guy tension pole class required. (See table on page 11-09-
based on the guy angle. 04).Also check the unguyed tangent pole
selection tables(page 11-06-01).Always choose
Assumptions for calculating guy tension the higher-class pole,by either the deadend or
♦ NESC OCF's for guys tangent calculations.
Where two 1/2" guys are indicated,two anchors Neutral Guy
will be required. Divide total guy tension for the A neutral guy is not needed where the neutral
1/2" guys by two(2)to determine the load on deadend force is less than 1142 lbs or for#4
each anchor.Add in neutral and communication ACSR.Add one conductor to the top conductor
guy tension for the anchor closest to the pole if group to cover the additional forces produced by
applicable. This loading is used to determine the neutral.
torque requirements for screw anchors. Index for Tables
#4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs 11-09-23
2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs 11-09-24
336 AL @ 2233 lbs 11-09-25
795 AL @ 4073lbs 11-09-26
336AL Neutral W/795 AL 11-09-27
CATV/Communications 11-09-28
M�10RHO
EMPOWER. Deadend Down Guys

11-09-22 Revised 12/19 Overhead
Deadend Tables Example NOTE. The following tables use 144%of
Using the tables determine the guying and pole ruling span for vertical loading. (1.44)(350)
class requirements.Assume grade"C"
= 504'in the example.
construction.
Vertical Pole Loading (Factored)
45'pole +
♦ Phases= 14,615 (Page 11-09-24)
2/0 ACSR @ 18501bs(Phases)
2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs(Neutral) ♦ Neutral=3,957 (Page 11-09-24)
Neutral in secondary position (4457-500= 3,957)
Ruling Span=350' ♦ Comm=4,818 (Page 11-09-28)
320' span ♦ Equipment Weight= 11,814
Top guy attachment at 37' (Page 11-05-01)
Neutral guy attachment at 26.5' Total Vertical Pole Load=35,204 lbs
CATV attachment at 23' + Includes Man Weight
Lead Length 21'(all)
3-167 kVA transformer bank Determine Pole Class(Table on page 11-09-04)
Calculate the guy angles Class 2 pole required,by deadend determination.
A0 =tari'(LO/Ho)=tan-' (21/37)=29.6° Check tangent pole table,on page 11-06-03 or
tangent pole calculation tool: Class 2 required.
An =tari (Ln/Hn)=tari (21/26.5)=38.4° Class 2,45'pole should be used.
Ac =tan (Lc/Hc)=tan' (21/23)=42.4°
Use approximate angles 30°, 35° and 40°
Guy Tension(Factored)
♦ Phases= 16,033 (Page 11-09-24)
♦ Neutral=4,659(Page 11-09-24) Extension off back of pole Phase Vertical Loading
♦ Comm= 5,034 (Page 11-09-28) is included in calculations =14,615 Ibs
Total Guy Tension=25,726 lbs
Phase Guy Tension
Use(1)DDG2 for phase conductors. =16,033 lbs
Use(1)DDG3 for neutral conductor.
Use DFDE8 for deadend crossarm 30°_
Use DGEPH for neural guy attachment
hardware
Anchor Selection.(Page 11-09-02)
DANS(6, 10 or 14);DAN23 or DANRKI da
Shear Pins for screw anchor(Page I I- Factored Equipment Weight
( g =11,814 lbs
09-02). For DANS 10: 8 pins,
9 pins with extension rod. Neutral Vertical Loading
=3,957 lbs
Neutral Guy Tension
=4,659 lbs
�35--> Comm Vertical Loading
=4,818 Ilbs
Total Guy Tension
=25,726 lbs CATV @ 2240 lbs
Comm Guy Tension
=5,034 Ibs 40°
Deadend Down Guys WWMRa
1�IDAC°RPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/19 11-09-23
Guy Selection Table for Deadends, #4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs
NOTE: Possible revision pending in 2020 depending on Pole Loading Study.
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires 1 Wire
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
20'
DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
21,441 23,476 16,893 16,113 16,081 17,732 12,670 12,210 10,721 11,988 8,447 8,306 5,360 5,744 4,223 3,903
250
DDG2 DDG3 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
17,352 18,652 13,671 12,905 13,014 14,114 10254 9,804 8,676 9,576 6,836 6,703 4,338 4,538 3,418 3,101
30'
DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
14,667 15,353 11,556 10,711 11,000 11,639 8,667 8,158 7,333 7,926 5,778 5,605 3,667 3,713 2,889 2,553
350
DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
12,785 12,921 10,073 9,094 9,589 9,816 7,555 6,945 6,393 6,711 5,037 4,797 3,196 3,105 2,518 2,148
400
DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
11,409 11,030 8,989 7,836 8,556 8,398 6,741 6,002 5,704 5,765 4,494 4,168 2,852 2,633 2,247 1,834
450
DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
10,371 9,496 8,171 6,816 7,778 7,247 6,128 5,237 5,185 4,998 4,086 3,658 2,593 2,249 2,043 1,579
500
DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
9,573 8209 7,542 5,960 7,180 6,282 5,657 4,595 4,786 4,355 3,771 3,230 2,393 1,927 1,886 1,365
600
DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
8,468 6,115 6,672 4,568 6,351 4,711 5,004 3,551 4,234 3,308 3,336 2,534 2,117 1,404 1,668 1,017
* Guy angles less than 30'may physically conflict with larger transformer banks framed with 12.5-kV spacing and mounted on
the guy side of the pole.See example,page 11-09-22
Legend:
--------------------------------------------------
Guy Hardware CU
Deadend Crossarm or Guy Attachment Hardware CU
' Factored guy tension Factored vertical pole load,
less equipment weight
-------------------------------------------------
��IDAHO
"MPOWER. Deadend Down Guys

11-09-24 Revised 12/19 Overhead
Guy Selection Table for Deadends, 2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs
NOTE: Possible revision pending in 2020 depending on Pole Loading Study.
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires 1 Wire'
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
20'
2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
--- --- DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
29,750 32,327 23,439 22,110 19,833 21,718 15,626 14,907 9,917 11,109 7,813 7,703
250
2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
32,101 34,012 25,292 23,379 24,076 25,634 18,969 17,660 16,051 17,256 12,646 11,940 8,025 8,878 6,323 6,220
30'
2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
27,133 27,908 21,378 19,320 20,350 21,056 16,033 14,615 13,567 14204 10,689 9,910 6,783 7,352 5,344 5205
350
DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
23,653 23,410 18,636 16,329 17,740 17,682 13,977 12,372 11,826 11,955 9,318 8,414 5,913 6,227 4,659 4,457
40°
DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
21,106 19,911 16,629 14,002 15,829 15,058 12,472 10,627 10,553 10,206 8,314 7,251 5,276 5,353 4,157 3,876
450
DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
19,186 17,073 15,116 12,115 14,390 12,930 11,337 9,211 9,593 8,787 7,558 6,308 4,797 4,643 3,779 3,404
500
DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
17,710 14,692 13,953 10,532 13,283 11,144 10,465 8,024 8,855 7,596 6,977 5,516 4,428 4,048 3,488 3,008
600
DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
15,665 10,818 12,342 7,955 11,749 8238 9,257 6,092 7,833 5,659 6,171 4,228 3,916 3,079 3,086 2,364
* Guy angles less than 300 may physically conflict with larger transformer banks framed with 12.5-kV spacing and mounted on
the guy side of the pole.See example,page 11-09-22.
+ 500 lbs included in factored vertical pole load for(worker&tools)when 1-2/0 ACSR phase conductor is used;subtract the
500 lbs when the 1-2/0 ACSR is used for a neutral conductor.
--- Conventional hardware not adequate;contact Methods&Materials.
Legend:
--------------------------------------------------
Guy Hardware CU
Deadend Crossarm or Guy Attachment Hardware CU
Factored guy tension Factored vertical pole load,
less equipment weight
-------------------------------------------------
Deadend Down Guys WWMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 12/19 11-09-25
Guy Selection Table for Deadends, 336 AL @ 2233 lbs
NOTE: Possible revision pending in 2020 depending on Pole Loading Study.
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires 1 Wire
Ang*Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
20'
2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
--- --- DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
35,909 39,024 28,292 26,692 23,939 26,182 18,861 17,961 11,970 12,841 9,431 8,731
250
2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
38,747 41,093 30,528 28,260 29,061 30,945 22,8% 21,320 19,374 20,797 15,264 14,380 9,687 10,148 7,632 6,940
30'
2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
32,751 33,725 25,804 23,360 24,563 25,419 19,353 17,645 16,375 17,113 12,902 11,930 8,188 8,306 6,451 5,715
350
2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
28,550 282% 22,494 19,750 21,412 21,347 16,870 14,937 14275 14,398 11247 10,125 7,137 6,949 5,623 4,812
400
DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
25,476 24,073 20,072 16,941 19,107 18,180 15,054 12,831 12,738 12,287 10,036 8,721 6,369 5,893 5,018 4,110
450
DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
23,158 20,648 18,246 14,663 17,369 15,611 13,684 11,123 11,579 10,574 9,123 7,582 5,790 5,037 4,561 3,541
500
DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
21,376 17,774 16,842 12,752 16,032 13,455 12,632 9,689 10,688 9,137 8,421 6,626 5,344 4,318 4,211 3,063
600
DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DFDE10 DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
18,909 13,098 14,898 9,643 14,181 9,948 11,173 7,357 9,454 6,799 7,449 5,071 4,727 3,149 3,724 2286
* Guy angles less than 30'may physically conflict with larger transformer banks framed with 12.5-kV spacing and mounted on
the guy side of the pole.See example,page 11-09-22.
--- Conventional hardware not adequate;contact Methods&Materials.
Legend:
--------------------------------------------------
Guy Hardware CU
Deadend Crossarm or Guy Attachment Hardware CU
' Factored guy tension Factored vertical pole load,
less equipment weight
-------------------------------------------------
��IDAHO
"MIRMER. Deadend Down Guys

11-09-26 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Guy Selection Table for Deadends, 795 AL @ 4073 lbs
NOTE: Possible revision pending in 2020 depending on Pole Loading Study.
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires 1 Wire
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
30'
2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
--- - --- --- DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
29,869 30,891 23,533 21,438 14,934 15,196 11,766 10,469
350
2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
DADE10S DADE10S DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
52,074 51,380 41,028 35,791 39,056 38,660 30,771 26,968 26,037 25,940 20,514 18,146 13,019 12,720 10,257 8,823
40°
2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
DADE10S DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
46,467 43,678 36,611 30,669 34,851 32,883 27,458 23,127 23,234 22,089 18,305 15,584 11,617 10,794 9,153 7,542
45°
2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
DADE10S DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
42,241 37,430 33,281 26,514 31,681 28,197 24,960 20,010 21,120 18,965 16,640 13,507 10,560 9,232 8,320 6,503
500
2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
DADE10S DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
38,991 32,187 30,720 23,028 29,243 24265 23,040 17,396 19,495 16,343 15,360 11,764 9,748 7,922 7,680 5,632
600
2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
DADE10S DFDE10 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DFDE8 DGEPH DGEPH
34,489 23,658 27,173 17,356 25,867 17,868 20,380 13,142 17,245 12,079 13,587 8,928 8,622 5,789 6,793 4,214
* Guy angles less than 300 may physically conflict with larger transformer banks framed with 12.5-kV spacing and mounted on
the guy side of the pole.See example,page 11-09-22.
--- Conventional hardware not adequate;contact Methods&Materials.
NoTF- When DADE10S is specified,use 2-DPB2(S,M orL)see Page 07-02-05.
Legend:
i--------------------------------------------------
Guy Hardware CU
Deadend Crossarm or Guy Attachment Hardware CU
Factored guy tension Factored vertical pole load, '
less equipment weight
-------------------------------------------------
Deadend Down Guys WWMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 02/06 11-09-27
Guy Selection Table for Deadends, Reduced Neutrals*
336 AL @ 2133 (lbs) W/795AL
Guy
Ang Grade B Grade C
20o
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
11,434 12,292 9,008 8,365
25'
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
9,253 9,719 7,290 6,655
300
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
7,821 7,960 6,162 5,485
35'
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
6,818 6,663 5,372 4,623
400
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
6,084 5,655 4,793 3,952
450
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
5,530 4,837 4,357 3,408
500
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
5,105 4,151 4,022 2,951
600
DDG3 DDG3
DGEPH DGEPH
4,515 3,034 3,558 2,209
* Neutrals are assumed to be strung to match the sag
of the phase conductor at 607 initial sag.See section
10-03.
Legend:
r-------------------------------------------------:
Guy Hardware CU
Guy Attachment Hardware CU
Factored guy tension Factored vertical pole load,
less equipment weight
--------------------------------------------------
A'Q IDAHO
EMPOWER. Deadend Down Guys

11-09-28 Revised 02/06 Overhead
Guy Selection Table for Deadends, CATV/ Communications*
300' Ruling Span (336&795 AL) 350' Ruling Span (#4&2/0 ACSR)
Guy Ang Grade B Grade C Guy Ang Grade B Grade C
20° 20°
12,007 13,395 9,460 9,272 12,007 13,576 9,460 9,453
25° 25'
9,717 10,694 7,656 7,475 9,717 10,875 7,656 7,656
30° 30'
8,213 8,846 6,471 6,247 8,213 9,027 6,471 6,428
350 35'
7,160 7,485 5,641 5,341 7,160 7,666 5,641 5,522
40 40°
6,389 6,425 5,034 4,637 6,389 6,607 5,034 4,818
45' 45°
5,808 5,566 4,576 4,066 5,808 5,747 4,576 4,247
50° 50°
5,361 4,846 4224 3,586 5,361 5,027 4224 3,767
60° 60°
4,742 3,673 3,736 2,806 4,742 3,854 3,736 2,988
* Cable TV is assumed to be approximately equal to a 795A1 conductor strung at 2240 lbs at NESC
medium loading.
Legend:
---------------------------------------------------
Factored guy tension Factored vertical pole load,
less eauinmentweieht
---------------------------------------------------
Deadend Down Guys "` R,,

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-41
Bisect Angle Guys
Scope Vertical Pole Loading
The following tables provide the information Vertical pole loading is the force exerted on the
necessary to choose the guy attachment pole by the down guy(s), conductor and
hardware, guy, guy strain insulator,anchor, and equipment weight.
pole class for a bisect angle guy pole.The tables
are based on a guy angle(A) and a line angle Assumption for calculating Vertical pole
(6). loading:
♦ NESC OCF's for poles
NOTE. The tables cover line angles up ♦ Iced conductor weight using 144%of the
to 30°.For angles greater than 30°,use a
double deadend configuration with in-line ruling span
♦ Workman and tools weight of 500 lbs
guys. ♦ Load does not include factored equipment
NOTE. The numbers in the single load
conductor column do not include the Add factored weight of any equipment to the
workman and tools weight. vertical pole load in the tables to get the total
load on the pole. For factored equipment
For an example calculation, see page 11-09-42. weights, see page 11-05-01 & 02.
Guy Tension The total vertical load is used to determine the
pole class required. (See table on page 11-09-
The tables provide the factored guy tension 04).Also check the unguyed tangent pole
based on the bisect angle and the guy angle. selection tables(page 11-06-01) or the tangent
structure program; select the largest pole class.
Assumptions for calculating guy tension
♦ NESC OCF's for guys Neutral Guy
♦ Wind load on 120%of the ruling span A neutral guy is not needed for most bisect angle
♦ Wind load on a 45'class 1 pole guys.Add the neutral conductor to the total
♦ Wind load on a 50-kVA transformer number of phase conductors to cover the
additional forces.
Where two 1/2" guys are indicated,two anchors The table below list the maximum bisect angle,
will be required. Divide total guy tension for the which does not need a neutral guy,based upon
1/2" guys by two(2)to determine the load on 1142 lbs of allowable side tension.
each anchor.Add in the neutral and
communication guy tension for the anchor Max Angles for Unguyed Neutrals
closest to the pole if applicable. Conductor Line Angle
#4 ACSR @ 1000 lbs 63.4°
2/0 ACSR @ 1850 lbs 31.8°
336 AL @ 2233 lbs 26.0°
795 AL @ 4073 lbs 13.5°
E'er IDiAHO
"RNIPMER. Bisect Angle Guys

11-09-42 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Example Calculation Calculate the guy angles.
Using the tables(Pages 11-09-44 to 61), A0 =tan-1(LO/Ho)=tan-1(21/36.5)=29.90(Use
determine the guying.Also calculate the pole 30 )
class requirements and anchoring for a bisect Ac =tan-1(Lc/Hc)=tan-1(21/25)=40.0°
angle structure. Vertical Pole Loading
Grade"C"construction ♦ 3 Phases&Neutral(4W)=8,645 (Page 11-
Line Angle= 10' 09-47)
45'pole ♦ Comm(1W)=2,564(Page 11-09-49)
2/0 ACSR Phase conductors
Neutral in secondary position(2/0 ACSR) ♦ Equip Wt.=2,189, (Section 11-05-01)
Total Vertical Load= 13,398 lbs
NOTE. Since the line angle is less than Select Pole Class
31.8° a neutral guy is not needed. See
table on page 11-09-41. Determine Pole Class(Page 11-09-04)
Class 4 pole required
Top guy attachment at 36.5' Also check tangent table, (Page 11-06-03)
CATV attachment at 25' and/or tangent pole program for pole class
Lead Length 21' calculation; Class 4 pole. Pick largest class pole.
1-50 WA transformer
Span forward Sf)=300' Guy Tension
Span back(Sb)=275'
Approximately level ground assumed ♦ 3 Phases &Neutral(4W)=7,321
(Page 11-09-47)
NOTE. The following tables use 120% ♦ Comm= 1,687(Page 11-09-49)
of ruling span(350')for horizontal wind Total Guy Tension at anchor=9,008 lbs
loading and 144%of ruling span for Select Down Guy Assembly
vertical conductor loading, so these spans
are well within the table parameters. Use(1)DDG3 (Page 11-09-47)
♦ Communication provider supplies own guy,
but will attach to IPC anchor
Select Anchoring
♦ See table on(Page 11-09-02)
DANS6,10 or14 or
DAN 19 or
DAN20 or
DANRK
♦ If a screw anchor is used, see shear pins
table (Page 11-09-02).
Example: If a DANS 10 anchor is used; 3 shear
pins and 4 shear pins if an extension rod is used.
Bisect Angle Guys WWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-43
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Section
11-30
t Phase Vertical Loading=7,168#
2/0 ACSR @ 1850#
0
300'spanTA
Ho=36.5' T
uipment Weight=2,189#
S=5 300'span is not needed since the
21 is 5°.Loading is
h phase conductors
Phase Guy Tension=5,181#
j Comm Vertical Loading=1,978#
CATV @ 21240#
He=25' t
40°
Comm Guy Tension=1,067#
21'
��IDiAHO
RwPOWER. Bisect Angle Guys

11-09-44 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 51
#4 ACSR @ 1000 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Angle Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
13,770 19,758 11,778 13,676 11,156 16,117 9,562 11,165 8,541 12,477 7,346 8,655
15° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
9,239 13,513 7,902 9,511 7,485 11,033 6,416 7,774 5,730 8,552 4,929 6,037
200 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
6,991 10,343 5,980 7,397 5,664 8,451 4,855 6,052 4,336 6,559 3,730 4,708
250 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
5,658 8,401 4,840 6,102 4,584 6,870 3,929 4,998 3,509 5,339 3,018 3,894
300 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
4,782 7,073 4,091 5,216 3,874 5,789 3,321 4,276 2,966 4,504 2551 3,337
400 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
3,720 5,334 3,182 4,056 3,014 4,372 2,583 3,331 2,307 3,410 1,985 2,607
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
2,761 3,355 2,362 2,736 2,237 2,761 1,917 2,257 1,713 2,167 1,473 1,778
210 ACSR @ 1850/bs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
18,602 26,310 15,742 18,300 14,780 21,032 12,535 14,633 10,957 15,753 9,328 10,967
150 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
12,481 18,091 10,562 12,820 9,916 14,466 8,410 10,255 7,351 10,841 6,258 7,691
20° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
9,445 13,918 7,992 10,037 7,504 11,132 6,364 8,033 5,563 8,346 4,736 6,028
25° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
7,643 11,362 6,468 8,333 6,073 9,091 5,150 6,671 4,502 6,819 3,833 5,009
30° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
6,460 9,614 5,467 7,168 5,133 7,694 4,353 5,740 3,805 5,774 3240 4,313
400 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
5,025 7,324 4,253 5,641 3,993 5,865 3,386 4,520 2,960 4,406 2,520 3,400
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
3,730 4,720 3,156 3,905 2,963 3,785 2,513 3,133 2,197 2,849 1,870 2,362
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
CU i Note: Use pole attachment hardware normally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
Bisect Angle Guys Ra
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-45
Line Angle: 51
336 AL @ 2233 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C
100 DDG2 DDG2
20,483 29,002 17,267 20,263
150 DDG3 DDG3
13,742 20,037 11,585 14,286
200 DDG3 DDG3
10,399 15,486 8,767 11,252
250 DDG3 DDG3
8,416 12,698 7,095 9,393
30° DDG3 DDG3
7,114 10,791 5,997 8,122
400 DDG3 DDG3
5,533 8,293 4,665 6,457
600 DDG3 DDG3
4,107 5,453 3,462 4,563
795 AL @ 4073 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C
10, 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
30,023 42263 25,038 29,781
150 DDG2 DDG2
20,143 29,469 16,799 21,255
200 DDG2 DDG3
15,243 22,973 12,712 16,926
25° DDG3 DDG3
12,336 18,994 10,288 14,275
30° DDG3 DDG3
10,427 16,273 8,696 12,461
40° DDG3 DDG3
8,111 12,708 6,764 10,086
60° DDG3 DDG3
6,020 8,655 5,020 7,384
r--------, Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=fictored vertical pole load,less equpment weight
#lC #2 Note: Use pole attachment hardware nominally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPH;DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
'-
------- P.
�'�IDiAHO
"EMPOWER. Bisect Angle Guys

1 1-09-46 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 5°
350' Ruling Span (#4 & 2/0 ACSR)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 5,477 8,326 4,630 5,973
15' 3,675 5,912 3,106 4,364
20' 2,781 4,687 2,351 3,547
25' 2,251 3,936 1,902 3,047
30' 1,902 3,423 1,608 2,705
40' 1,480 2,751 1,251 2,256
60° 1,098 1,986 928 1,747
300' Ruling Span (336& 795 AL)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 4,990 7,453 4,201 5,331
15° 3,348 5,276 2,818 3,879
20° 2,533 4,171 2,133 3,143
25' 2,050 3,494 1,726 2,691
30' 1,733 3,031 1,459 2,383
40° 1,348 2,424 1,135 1,978
60° 1,000 1,735 842 1,518
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight.
Bisect Angle Guys ` R

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-47
Line Angle: 100
#4 A CSR @ 1000 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Angle Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
10° DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
17,428 23,681 14,659 16,285 13,899 19,059 11,722 13,122 10,370 14,438 8,786 9,960
15° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
11,693 16,095 9,835 11,228 9,325 12,969 7,865 9,062 6,957 9,843 5,895 6,895
200 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
8,848 12,244 7,442 8,661 7,057 9,876 5,952 7,000 5,265 7,509 4,461 5,340
25° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
7,161 9,885 6,023 7,088 5,711 7,983 4,817 5,737 4,261 6,080 3,610 4,387
30° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
6,053 8,272 5,091 6,013 4,827 6,687 4,071 4,874 3,601 5,103 3,051 3,735
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
4,708 6,158 3,960 4,604 3,755 4,990 3,167 3,743 2,801 3,822 2,374 2,881
60° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
3,495 3,755 2,939 3,002 2,787 3,061 2,350 2,456 2,079 2,366 1,762 1,910
210 ACSR @ 1850/bs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
25,381 33,584 21,081 23,137 19,863 26,487 16,539 18,261 14,346 19,390 11,997 13,386
150 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
17,029 22,878 14,143 16,003 13,327 18,056 11,096 12,643 9,625 13,234 8,049 9,283
200 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
12,886 17,442 10,703 12,381 10,085 13,775 8,397 9,790 7,284 10,108 6,091 7,200
250 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
10,429 14,113 8,662 10,162 8,162 11,154 6,796 8,043 5,895 8,194 4,930 5,924
30° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
8,815 11,836 7,321 8,645 6,898 9,360 5,744 6,848 4,982 6,885 4,167 5,051
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
6,857 8,853 5,695 6,657 5,366 7,011 4,468 5,283 3,876 5,170 3,241 3,908
60' DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
5,089 5,461 4,227 4,397 3,983 4,340 3,316 3,503 2,877 3,219 2,406 2,608
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
r-------
CU i Note: Use pole attachment hardware normally associatedwith the guy wire 0DDG3 uses DGEPH;DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
#1 #2 i P.
�'�IDiAHO
"EMPOWER. Bisect Angle Guys

11-09-48 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 10'
336 AL @ 2233 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
28,668 37,788 23,714 26,105
150 DDG2 DDG2
19234 25,818 15,910 18,130
20' DDG3 DDG3
14,555 19,742 12,040 14,082
25° DDG3 DDG3
11,779 16,020 9,744 11,602
30' DDG3 DDG3
9,956 13,474 8,236 9,906
40° DDG3 DDG3
7,745 10,140 6,406 7,685
600 DDG3 DDG3
5,748 6,347 4,755 5,158
795 AL @ 4073 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
44,967 58,306 36,809 40,450
150 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
30,169 40,026 24,696 28,275
20° DDG2 DDG2
22,830 30,745 18,688 22,094
25' DDG2 DDG2
18,476 25,061 15,124 18,309
30° DDG2 DDG3
15,617 21,173 12,783 15,719
40' DDG3 DDG3
12,148 16,080 9,944 12,327
60° DDG3 DDG3
9,016 10,288 7,381 8,470
r--------, Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
#1C#2 Note: Use pole attachment hardware normally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
--------- P.
Bisect Angle Guys MWMRa
A�IDACORPCa ny

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-49
Line Angle: 101
350' Ruling Span (#4 & 2/0 ACSR)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 7,527 10,524 6,244 7,435
15° 5,050 7,359 4,189 5,326
20° 3,821 5,752 3,170 4,255
25° 3,093 4,768 2,566 3,600
30° 2,614 4,095 2,168 3,151
40° 2,033 3,213 1,687 2,564
60° 1,509 2,210 1,252 1,895
300' Ruling Span (336& 795 AL)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 7,041 9,653 5,816 6,794
15° 4,724 6,724 3,902 4,842
20° 3,575 5,237 2,953 3,851
25° 2,893 4,326 2,390 3,245
30° 2,445 3,703 2,020 2,829
40° 1,902 2,887 1,571 2,286
60° 1,412 1,959 1,166 1,667
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
ONPOMR,, Bisect Angle Guys

11-09-50 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 151
#4 ACSR @ 1000 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Angle Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
21,059 27,570 17,516 18,871 16,622 21,977 13,866 15,062 12,185 16,383 10,215 11,253
15° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
14,129 18,655 11,752 12,930 11,152 14,889 9,303 10,338 8,175 11,122 6,854 7,746
200 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
10,692 14,128 8,893 9,914 8,439 11,290 7,040 7,940 6,187 8,451 5,186 5,966
250 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
8,653 11,356 7,197 8,066 6,830 9,086 5,697 6,471 5,007 6,816 4,197 4,876
300 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
7,314 9,460 6,083 6,803 5,773 7,578 4,816 5,466 4,232 5,697 3,548 4,130
400 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
5,689 6,975 4,732 5,147 4,490 5,603 3,746 4,150 3,292 4,231 2,760 3,153
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
4,223 4,151 3,512 3,265 3,333 3,358 2,780 2,654 2,443 2,564 2,048 2,042
210 ACSR @ 1850/bs
Guy 4 Wires(3 0) 3 Wires 2 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2
32,117 40,808 26,384 27,940 24,916 31,905 20,517 21,864 17,714 23,002 14,649 15,787
150 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
21,548 27,631 17,702 19,164 16,717 21,621 13,765 15,013 11,885 15,611 9,829 10,863
20° DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
16,306 20,941 13,396 14,708 12,650 16,400 10,417 11,535 8,994 11,858 7,438 8,363
25° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
13,197 16,844 10,841 11,979 10,238 13,202 8,430 9,405 7,279 9,560 6,019 6,832
30' DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
11,154 14,042 9,163 10,112 8,653 11,015 7,125 7,948 6,152 7,988 5,088 5,785
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
8,676 10,371 7,128 7,667 6,731 8,150 5,543 6,040 4,785 5,929 3,957 4,413
60' DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
6,440 6,196 5,290 4,886 4,996 4,892 4,114 3,869 3,552 3,587 2,937 2,853
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight.
r-------
CU i Note: Use pole attachment hardware nonnally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPH;DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
#1 #2 i P.
Bisect Angle Guys Ra
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-51
Line Angle: 151
336 AL @ 2233 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
36,805 46,515 30,121 31,908
150 DDG2 DDG2
24,694 31,562 20209 21,950
20° DDG2 DDG2
18,687 23,970 15,293 16,893
25° DDG2 DDG3
15,123 19,320 12,376 13,797
30° DDG3 DDG3
12,782 16,140 10,461 11,679
40° DDG3 DDG3
9,943 11,974 8,137 8,%4
600 DDG3 DDG3
7,380 7,236 6,040 5,749
795 AL @ 40731bs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 1 Wire
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
45,701 56,991 37,115 39,201 14,130 17,265 11,400 11,856
150 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
40,142 50,522 32,550 35,255 30,662 38,789 24,901 27,082 9,480 11,733 7,649 8,173
20° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
30,377 38,472 24,632 27,233 23,203 29,548 18,844 20,929 7,174 8,924 5,788 6,304
25° DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
24,584 31,092 19,934 22,320 18,778 23,888 15,250 17,161 5,806 7,204 4,684 5,159
30' DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
20,779 26,044 16,849 18,959 15,872 20,017 12,890 14,583 4,907 6,027 3,959 4,375
400 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
16,163 19,431 13,106 14,556 12,346 14,945 10,026 11;207 3,817 4,486 3,080 3,349
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
11,997 11,912 9,728 9,550 9,164 9,178 7,442 7,367 2,833 2,733 2,286 2,183
r--------, Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight.
#lC#2 Note: Use pole attachment hardware nonTally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
'-
-------- P.
�'�IDiAHO
"EMpOMR. Bisect Angle Guys

1 1-09-52 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 151
350' Ruling Span (#4 & 2/0 ACSR)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 9,562 12,705 7,846 8,886
15' 6,415 8,794 5,264 6,281
20' 4,855 6,808 3,983 4,958
25' 3,929 5,592 3,224 4,148
30° 3,321 4,761 2,725 3,594
40° 2,583 3,671 2,120 2,868
60° 1,917 2,432 1,573 2,043
300' Ruling Span (336& 795 AL)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10, 9,078 11,838 7,420 8,246
15° 6,091 8,161 4,978 5,798
20° 4,609 6,295 3,767 4,555
25° 3,730 5,152 3,049 3,794
30' 3,153 4,370 2,577 3,273
40' 2,452 3,346 2,004 2,591
60' 1,820 2,181 1,488 1,815
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight.
Bisect Angle Guys W.-POWER,

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-53
Line Angle: 200
#4 A CSR @ 1000 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Angle Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
10° DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
24,656 31,420 20,346 21,431 19,320 24,864 15,988 16,982 13,984 18,308 11,630 12,533
15° DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
16,542 21,188 13,651 14,614 12,962 16,788 10,727 11,601 9,382 12,389 7,803 8,588
200 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
12,518 15,993 10,330 11,154 9,809 12,688 8,117 8,870 7,100 9,384 5,905 6,586
250 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
10,131 12,811 8,360 9,034 7,938 10,177 6,569 7,197 5,746 7,543 4,779 5,360
300 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
8,563 10,635 7,066 7,584 6,710 8,460 5,553 6,053 4,857 6,285 4,039 4,521
400 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
6,661 7,784 5,497 5,685 5,219 6,210 4,319 4,554 3,778 4,636 3,142 3,422
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
4,944 4,543 4,080 3,526 3,874 3,651 3,206 2,849 2,804 2,760 2,332 2,172
210 ACSR @ 18501bs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2
38,799 47,967 31,644 32,701 29,927 37,274 24,461 25,434 21,055 26,581 17,279 18,168
150 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
26,031 32,342 21,230 22,296 20,079 25,154 16,412 17,363 14,126 17,966 11,593 12,430
20° DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
19,699 24,410 16,066 17,014 15,194 19,001 12,419 13,265 10,690 13,592 8,773 9,516
250 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
15,942 19,552 13,002 13,779 12,297 15,233 10,051 10,755 8,651 10,914 7100 7,732
30' DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
13,475 16,228 10,990 11,566 10,394 12,655 8,495 9,039 7,312 9,081 6,001 6,512
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
10,482 11,875 8,548 8,667 8,085 9,278 6,608 6,790 5,688 6,681 4,668 4,913
60' DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
7,780 6,925 6,345 5,371 6,001 5,438 4,905 4233 4,222 3,951 3,465 3,095
r--------- Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
' CU
#1 #2 Note: Use pole attachment hardware normally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
�'�IDiAHO
"EMPOWER. Bisect Angle Guys

11-09-54 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 201
336 AL @ 2233 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
44,879 55,168 36,476 37,663
150 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
30,110 37,256 24,473 25,736
200 DDG2 DDG2
22,786 28,162 18,520 19,681
25° DDG2 DDG2
18,440 22,592 14,988 15,973
300 DDG2 DDG3
15,586 18,783 12,668 13,436
400 DDG3 DDG3
12,124 13,792 9,854 10,113
600 DDG3 DDG3
8,999 8,117 7,314 6,335
795 AL @ 4073 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 1 Wire
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 DDG2 DDG2
17,819 21,222 14,305 14,487
150 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
50,043 60,937 40,346 42,181 38,088 46,600 30,748 32,277 11,955 14,337 9,598 9,905
20° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
37,869 46,139 30,531 32,331 28,822 35,298 23,268 24,753 9,047 10,841 7,263 7,578
25° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
30,647 37,077 24,708 26,299 23,325 28,377 18,831 20,146 7,322 8,700 5,878 6,154
300 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
25,904 30,878 20,884 22,173 19,716 23,642 15,916 16,994 6,189 7,236 4,968 5,179
400 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
20,150 22,757 16,245 16,768 15,336 17,440 12,381 12,866 4,814 5,318 3,864 3,902
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
14,956 13,523 12,058 10,621 11,383 10,387 9,189 8,171 3,573 3,136 2,868 2,451
r--------, Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
#lC#2 Note: Use pole attachment hardware nomnally associated with the guy wire 0DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
'--------- P.
Bisect Angle Guys MWMRa
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-55
Line Angle: 200
350' Ruling Span(#4 & 2/0 ACSR)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 11,579 14,864 9,433 10,321
15° 7,769 10,215 6,329 7,225
20° 5,879 7,854 4,789 5,654
25° 4,758 6,409 3,876 4,691
30° 4,021 5,420 3,276 4,033
40° 3,128 4,125 2,548 3,170
60° 2,322 2,652 2,206 2,189
300' Ruling Span (336& 795 AL)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 11,098 14,001 9,010 9,685
15° 7,446 9,585 6,045 6,745
20° 5,635 7,343 4,574 5,252
25° 4,560 5,970 3,702 4,338
30° 3,854 5,031 3,129 3,712
40° 2,998 3,800 2,434 2,893
60° 2,225 2,401 2,122 1,962
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight.
ONPOMR,, Bisect Angle Guys

11-09-56 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 251
#4 ACSR @ 1000 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Angle Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3
28,213 35,221 23,143 23,958 21,987 27,714 18,086 18,877 15,762 20,208 13,029 13,796
150 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
18,929 23,689 15,527 16,278 14,752 18,664 12,134 12,849 10,575 13,640 8,741 9,420
200 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
14,324 17,834 11,750 12,378 11,163 14,069 9,182 9,788 8,003 10,305 6,615 7,198
250 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
11,592 14,249 9,509 9,990 9,034 11,255 7,431 7,914 6,476 8,262 5,353 5,838
300 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
9,798 11,796 8,038 8,356 7,636 9,330 6,281 6,632 5,474 6,865 4,525 4,907
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
7,622 8,583 6,252 6,216 5,940 6,809 4,886 4,952 4,258 5,035 3,520 3,688
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
5,657 4,929 4,640 3,783 4,409 3,942 3,626 3,042 3,160 2,954 2,612 2,301
210 ACSR @ 1850/bs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2
45,413 55,048 36,848 37,409 34,888 42,585 28,365 28,966 24,362 30,122 19,881 20,522
150 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2
30,469 37,002 24,722 25,395 23,407 28,649 19,031 19,687 16,345 20,296 13,339 13,979
200 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
23,057 27,840 18,708 19,295 17,713 21,574 14,401 14,976 12,369 15,308 10,094 10,657
250 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
18,660 22,229 15,140 15,559 14,335 17,241 11,655 12,091 10,010 12,252 8,169 8,622
30' DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
15,772 18,391 12,797 13,004 12,116 14,277 9,851 10,117 8,461 10,163 6,905 7,231
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
12,268 13,363 9,954 9,657 9,425 10,394 7,663 7,532 6,581 7,425 5,371 5,408
60' DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
9,106 7,646 7,388 5,850 6,995 5,979 5,687 4,592 4,885 4,312 3,986 3,335
Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=facroredvertical pole load,less equipment weight
r-------
CU i Note: Use pole attachment hardware normally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
Bisect Angle Guys Ra
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-57
Line Angle: 25'
336 AL @ 2233 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C
l o° - -
15° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
35,474 42,891 28,694 29,483
20° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
26,844 32,310 21,714 22,439
25' DDG2 DDG2
21,725 25,830 17,573 18,126
300 DDG2 DDG2
18,363 21,398 14,853 15,175
40° DDG3 DDG3
14,284 15,591 11,554 11,310
60° DDG3 DDG3
10,602 8,988 8,575 6,914
795 AL @ 4073 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 1 Wire
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
10° DDG2 DDG2
21,474 25,140 17,183 17,092
15° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
45,445 54,336 36,540 37,421 14,408 16,915 11,528 11,619
20° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
45,293 53,733 36,375 37,381 34,390 40,993 27,651 28,540 10,903 12,739 8,724 8,841
250 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
36,655 43,004 29,438 30,240 27,831 32,822 22,378 23,102 8,824 10,182 7,060 7,139
300 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
30,982 35,665 24,882 25,356 23,524 27,232 18,914 19,382 7,458 8,433 5,967 5,975
400 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
24,100 26,051 19,355 18,958 18,298 19,910 14,713 14,508 5,801 6,141 4,642 4,450
600 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
17,887 15,119 14,366 11,682 13,582 11,583 10,920 8,967 4,306 3,535 3,445 2,716
r--------- Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
CU
#1 12 ' Note: Use pole attachment hardware normally associated with the guy wire 0DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
M�IDiAHO
EMPOWER. Bisect Angle Guys

1 1-09-58 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 25'
350' Ruling Span (#4 & 2/0 ACSR)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 13,574 16,997 11,002 11,740
15' 9,107 11,619 7,381 8,159
20' 6,892 8,888 5,586 6,341
25' 5,577 7,215 4,521 5,227
30° 4,714 6,071 3,821 4,466
40° 3,667 4,573 2,972 3,468
60° 2,722 2,869 2206 2,334
300' Ruling Span (336& 795 AL)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 13,097 16,140 10,582 11,107
15° 8,787 10,993 7,100 7,681
20° 6,650 8,379 5,373 5,941
25' 5,381 6,779 4,348 4,876
30' 4,549 5,684 3,675 4,147
40° 3,538 4,250 2,859 3,192
60° 2,626 2,619 2,122 2,107
Legend: #1-factored guy tension;#2-factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
Bisect Angle Guys WW.-POWER,

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-59
Line Angle: 301
#4 A CSR @ 1000 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Angle Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2
31,722 38,966 25,901 26,449 24,619 30,524 20,155 20,745 17,517 22,081 14,408 15,042
150 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
21,283 26,154 17,378 17,917 16,518 20,513 13,522 14,078 11,752 14,872 9,666 10,240
200 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
16,106 19,649 13,151 13,585 12,500 15,430 10,233 10,693 8,893 11,212 7,315 7,802
250 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
13,034 15,665 10,643 10,932 10,116 12,318 8,281 8,620 7,197 8,970 5,920 6,308
300 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
11,017 12,940 8,995 9,117 8,550 10,188 7,000 7,202 6,083 7,437 5,004 5,287
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
8,570 9,370 6,997 6,740 6,651 7,399 5,445 5,344 4,732 5,428 3,892 3,949
600 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
6,361 5,311 5,194 4,036 4,936 4,228 4,041 3,232 3,512 3,144 2,889 2,428
210 ACSR @ 1850/bs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 2 Wires
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
100 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
39,788 47,827 32,219 32,451 27,629 33,617 22,451 22,846
150 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2
34,853 41,602 28,171 28,453 26,695 32,099 21,617 21,981 18,537 22,596 15,063 15,508
20° DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
26,374 31,226 21,318 21,547 20,201 24,113 16,358 16,665 14,028 17,001 11,399 11,783
250 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
21,344 24,872 17,252 17,317 16,348 19,223 13,239 13,409 11,352 13,574 9,225 9,501
30' DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
18,041 20,526 14,582 14,423 13,818 15,878 11,190 11,182 9,596 11,230 7,797 7,940
40° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
14,033 14,832 11,343 10,633 10,749 11,496 8,704 8,265 7,464 8,159 6,065 5,896
60' DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
10,416 8,357 8,419 6,323 7,978 6,512 6,460 4,947 5,540 4,668 4,502 3,571
r--------- Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
' CU
#1 #2 Note: Use pole attaclunent hardware nonTAy associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
P.
A'�IDiAHO
�wPOWERfi. Bisect Angle Guys

11-09-60 Revised 11/07 Overhead
Line Angle: 301
336 @ 2233/bs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 1 Wire
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
10° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
46,408 55,439 37,466 37,643 14,366 16,748 11,517 11,336
15° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
40,774 48,455 32,864 33,183 31,136 37239 25,137 25,528 9,638 11,216 7,727 7,655
20° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
30,855 36,406 24,870 25,163 23,562 27,998 19,022 19,377 7,294 8,408 5,848 5,786
25° DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
24,971 29,027 20,127 20,252 19,068 22,339 15,394 15,610 5,903 6,688 4,732 4,642
30° DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
21,106 23,980 17,012 16,892 16,117 18,468 13,012 13,033 4,989 5511 4,000 3,859
40° DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
16,418 17,368 13,233 12,491 12,537 13,398 10,121 9,658 3,881 3,970 3,111 2,833
60° DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
12,186 9,849 9,822 7,487 9,305 7,631 7,512 5,820 2,880 2,218 2,309 1,667
795 AL @ 4073 Ibs
Guy 4 Wires 3 Wires 1 Wire
Ang* Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C Grade B Grade C
10° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2
25,089 29,013 20,028 19,668
15° DDG2 DDG2
16,833 19,464 13,437 13,314
20° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
39,895 46,621 31,984 32283 12,738 14,616 10,168 10,088
25° 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
42,595 48,861 34,114 34,136 32,287 37,215 25,885 26,023 10,309 11,646 8,229 8,113
30' 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
36,003 40,396 28,834 28,502 27,290 30,780 21,879 21,741 8,713 9,615 6,956 6,761
400 2-DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3
28,005 29,306 22,429 21,123 21,228 22,351 17,018 16,132 6,778 6,955 5,410 4,991
600 DDG2 DDG2 DDG2 DDG3 DDG3 DDG3
20,786 16,696 16,647 12,731 15,756 12,766 12,632 9,753 5,031 3,929 4,016 2,978
r--------, Legend: #1=factored guy tension;#2=factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
#lC#2 Note: Use pole attachment hardware normally associated with the guy wire(DDG3 uses DGEPK DDG2 uses DPB2S,M or
'--------- L)
Bisect Angle Guys MWMRa
A�IDACORPCa lY

Overhead Revised 11/07 11-09-61
Line Angle: 301
350' Ruling Span (#4 & 2/0 ACSR)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 15,543 19,101 12,550 13,138
15° 10,428 13,003 8,420 9,079
20° 7,891 9,907 6,372 7,018
25° 6,386 8,011 5,157 5,756
30' 5,398 6,714 4,359 4,893
40' 4,199 5,015 3,390 3,762
60° 3,117 3,083 2,516 2,476
300' Ruling Span (336& 795 AL)
Communication Conductor @ 2240/bs
Guy 1 Comm Conductor
Angle Grade B Grade C
10° 15,071 18,251 12,135 12,511
15° 10,112 12,382 8,142 8,604
20° 7,652 9,402 6,161 6,621
25° 6,193 7,577 4,986 5,406
30° 5,234 6,329 4,214 4,575
40° 4,071 4,693 3,278 3,487
60° 3,022 2,834 2,433 2,249
Legend: #1-factored guy tension;#2-factored vertical pole load,less equipment weight
ONPOMR,, Bisect Angle Guys

Overhead Reviewed 09/20 11-20-01
Tangent Construction
General Information If needed, see section 11-30 for avian protection
options.
A tangent construction is when a conductor
flows from one pole to another in a straight line.
Page Number Title Date of Change
11-20-01 Tangent Construction 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Revised
11-20-02&03 1-0 Tangent 09/2020
Changed From: To:
PGs Reviewed and Revised
11-20-04&05 3-0 Tangent-7'-8"Crossarm 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed and Revised
11-20-06&07 3-0 Tangent- 10'Crossarm 2-Up 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Add Wood Reviewed and Revised
11-20-08&09 3-0 Tangent- 10'Crossarm 3-Up 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed
11-20-10& 11 3-0 Tangent- 10'Crossarm 4-Up 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed
11-20-12& 13 3-0 Tangent-Streamline 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed
11-20-14& 15 3-0 10'Alley Arm 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Add 10' FG Crossarm Reviewed and Revised
11-20-16& 17 09/2020
Tangent 8'Crossarm New pages
11-20-18,19& 09/2020
20
Tangent 10'Crossarm New pages
ONPOMR,. Tangent Construction

11-20-02 Reviewed 09/20 Overhead
1-0 Tangent
i%ew (c*�
(D) �F)
12"T 8„
o
(A*)
60" Min.
For details, see the next page.
IDAHO
Tangent Construction W Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 09/20 11-20-03
1-0 Tangent Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (B) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(C) DFTF... Formed Top Tie 1 (C) DFTJ...` Formed Top Tie 1
(D) D112F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (D) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(E) DNB ...` Neutral Bracket 1 (E) DNB...' Neutral Bracket 1
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(B) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(C) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
'(E) Neutral Bracket-DNB-Use DNBX for extra clearance.
DNB Neutral Bracket DNBX Neutral Bracket Extension
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,, Tangent Construction

11-20-04 Revised 09/20 Overhead
3-0 Tangent— 7'-8" Crossarm -Wood
(E"�
—(F)
1.6
0
Bond to C) Bond to
Steel Pin 0 Steel Pin
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
For 8' FG Crossarm—see page 11-20-16 and 11-20-17.
IDAHO
Tangent Construction W Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 09/20 11-20-05
3-0 Tangent - 7'-8" Crossarm —Wood Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DASW8 Crossarm 8' 1 (C) DASW8 Crossarm 8' 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (E) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(G) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(1) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (1) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
*Notes
'(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Tangent Construction

11-20-06 Revised 09/20 Overhead
3-0 Tangent—10' Crossarm 2-Up -Wood
(E*�(F)
(B*)
12"
6" ° AL
—(I)
(A Bond to �) Bond to
Steel Pin Steel Pin
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
(H) D*)
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
For 10'FG Crossarm—see page 11-20-18 and 11-20-19.
IDAHO
Tangent Construction W Ra
1�IDAC°RPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 09/20 1 1-20-07
3-0 Tangent— 10' Crossarm 2-Up —Wood Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1 (C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (E) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(G) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(1) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (1) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
*Notes
'(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,, Tangent Construction

11-20-08 Reviewed 09/20 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - 10' Crossarm 3-Up
(E*�
18"
(H)
0 °
(A) Bo
Bond to /orC) Bond to
Steel Pin Steel Pin
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
Tangent Construction W R°
A�IDAC°RPCa ny

Overhead Reviewed 09/20 11-20-09
3-0 Tangent— 10' Crossarm 3-Up Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1 (C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (E) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (G) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(H DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (H) DSP Steel Pin Long 3
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,, Tangent Construction

11-20-10 Reviewed 09/20 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - 10' Crossarm 4-Up
Fi*) (D*�
f B*)
18 F) ---(E)
❑0°
(A (A)
Bond to (C) Bond to
Steel Pin Steel Pin
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
To Build This Structure With
The Preferred Secondary Neutral
Position,See Page 11-20-08.
For details, see the next page.
OrMIDAM
Tangent Construction MWMRa
A�IDACORPCa ny

Overhead Revised 09/20 1 1-20-1 1
3-0 Tangent— 10' Crossarm 4-Up Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1 (C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1
(D) DFTF... Formed Top Tie 4 (D) DFTJ...` Formed Top Tie 4
(E) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (E) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(F) D14C Insulator 4-kV Pin Type C-Neck 1 (F) D14C Insulator 4-kV Pin Type C-Neck 1
(G) DSP Steel Pin Long 4 (G) DSP Steel Pin Long 4
(H) DWC...* Wedge Connector 1 (H) DWC..." Wedge Connector 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(D) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(H) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ENPOMR,. Tangent Construction

11-20-12 Reviewed 09/20 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - Streamline
(G)
12" 8" � D-)
(B*) r(E)
18"
o 0
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
Tangent Construction Ra
A�IDACORPCa ny

Overhead Reviewed 09/20 11-20-13
3-0 Tangent— Streamline Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1 (A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB... Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (C) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(D) DFTF...' Formed Top Tie 3 (D) DFTJ...- Formed Top Tie 3
(E) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (E) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(F) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (F) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(D) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Tangent Construction

11-20-14 Reviewed 09/20 Overhead
3-0 10'Alley Arm
�F*)
- (G)
12" 0)
Redrill for (B)
(C) 3/4"bolt (A) Bond to
Bond Steel Pin
to
through-bolt
78"Min.
See section
11-02.
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
Tangent Construction WWMRa
A�IDACORPCa ny

Overhead Revised 09/20 1 1-20-15
3-0 10' Alley Arm Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAAS10/DAASF10'Arm Alley Single 10' 1 (A) DAAS10/DAASF10' Arm Alley Single 10' 1
(B) DASB6� Anti-split Bolt 6" 1 (B) DASB6� Anti-split Bolt 6" 1
(C) DAS68' Anti-split Bolt 8" 1 (C) DAS68' Anti-split Bolt 8" 1
(D) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (D) DASB...- Anti-split Bolt 1
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF... Formed Top Tie 3 (F) DFTJ...` Formed Top Tie 3
(G) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(H) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extension 1 (H) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extension 1
(1) DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (1) DSP Steel Pin Long 1
*Notes
'(A) Arm Alley Single—DAAS10 or DAASF10...,Wood or Fiberglass Crossarm.
'(D) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Tangent Construction

11-20-16 New 09120 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - 8' Fiberglass 2-Up
( C*)
a
(D) (F)
12'T
g
o
(H) 6�� 8
cl
(G)
60" Min.
(B*)
�Ek
(
For details, see the next page.
Tangent Construction HPMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead New 09/20 11-20-17
3-0 Tangent Details - 8' Fiberglass
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (B) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(C) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (C) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(D) D112F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (D) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(E) DNB ...* Neutral Bracket 1 (E) DNB...* Neutral Bracket 1
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(G) DAFT8 Crossarm 8' 1 (G) DAFT8 Crossarm 8' 1
(H) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (H) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(B) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(C) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(E) Neutral Bracket-DNB-Use DNBX for extra clearance.
DNB Neutral Bracket DNBX Neutral Bracket Extension
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Tangent Construction

11-20-18 New 09120 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - 10' Fiberglass 2-Up
8 C*
(D) � (F)
( 12"
811 w
a
(AM)
6t
(H) p
o
(G)
60" Min.
(B*)
I�.
(E')
For details, see the next page.
Tangent Construction HPMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead New 09/20 11-20-19
3-0 Tangent Details - 10' Fiberglass
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (B) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(C) DFTF... Formed Top Tie 3 (C) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(D) D112F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (D) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(E) DNB ...` Neutral Bracket 1 (E) DNB...* Neutral Bracket 1
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(G) DAM Crossarm 10' 1 (G) DAFT10 Crossarm 10'FG 1
(H) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (H) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(B) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(C) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(E) Neutral Bracket-DNB-Use DNBX for extra clearance.
DNB Neutral Bracket DNBX Neutral Bracket Extension
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Tangent Construction

Overhead Revised 09/20 11-21-01
Deadend Construction
General Information If needed, see section 11-30 for avian protection
options.
A deadend construction is when a conductor
ends at that structure.
Page Number Title Date of Change
11-21-01 Deadend Construction 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed
11-21-02&03 1-0 Deadend 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed
11-21-04&05 1-0 Deadend-Corner Double DE 09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed
11-21-06&07 3-0 Deadend-Corner For 336 or 795
09/2020
Changed From: To:
Reviewed and Revised
ONPOMR,. Deadend Construction

11-21-02 Reviewed 09/20 Overhead
1-0 Deadend
\3 A*)
6
12" a❑
6"
T
/See
Min.ectio n
02.
6"
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
(C*)
i
For details, see the next page.
Deadend Construction Ra
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Reviewed 09/20 11-21-03
1-0 Deadend Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 1 (B) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 1
(C) DDG' Down Guy EHS 2 (C) DDG' Down Guy EHS 2
(D) DDLEB35 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyebolt 1 (D) DDLEB35 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyebolt 1
(E) DDR...` Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (E) DDR...` Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(F) DWC... Wedge Connector 1 (F) DWC... Wedge Connector 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(C) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(E) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(F) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
�POMR,. Deadend Construction

11-21-04 Reviewed 09/20 Overhead
1-0 Deadend - Corner Double
Optional Build o
if conductor is
not long enough.
0
8"
4"
(D*)(C 6"
8"
®❑
72"Min.
See section
11-02.
(E (D (A)
IP F,
f 4"
6"
8"See Neutral Details 0 S B*)
in Section 11-27 0❑ r/
For details, see the next page.
orMIDAW
Deadend Construction WWMRa
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Reviewed 09/20 11-21-05
1-0 Deadend - Corner Double Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eyebolt 2 (A) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eyebolt 2
(B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 4 (B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 4
(C) DDLEB35 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyebolt 2 (C) DDLEB35 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyebolt 2
(D) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 4 (D) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 4
(E) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4 (E) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4
*Notes
*(B) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(E) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
ONPOMR,, Deadend Construction

11-21-06 Revised 09/20 Overhead
3-0 Deadend - Corner for 336 or 795
When Reconstructing
Verify Phasing Matches Existing }
A
B
FF C
A C
Round Corner
(Shown is Preferred)
7.
A -
B
C
C B A a)
Square Corner
rl
1
(G-) B,) Option a)add Deadend Shoe Cover
6"
D)placement
36"min
(is a)
40"min
a%
r
72"min (A� �E) �(F)
/Z(C} JF)
L is
(D)placement
/ (D (K�1 Option b)add another Deadend
Insulator
For table and details, see the next page. For eagle zone,refer to OH 11-33-03.
IDAHO
Deadend Construction W Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 09/20 11-21-07
3-0 Deadend - Corner for 336 or 795 Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DFDE10 Crossarm Fiberglass 10' 2 (A) DFDE10 Crossarm Fiberglass 10' 2
(B) DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 2 (C) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 2
(D) DDG...' Down Guy EHS 4 (D) DDG...' Down Guy EHS 4
(E) DDLEN35 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyenut 6 (E) DDLEN35 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyenut 6
(F) DD...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 8 (F) DD...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 8
(G) DAPD1... Deadend Shoe Cover 2 (G) DAPD1...' Deadend Shoe Cover 2
(H) D135V' Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Vise Top 2 (H) D135V' Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Vise Top 2
(1) DJMPR Jumper-Covered 4 (1) DJMPR Jumper-Covered 4
(J) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (J) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(K) DWC...' Wedge Connector 1 (K) DWC...' Wedge Connector 1
*Notes
'(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(D) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Section 11-09.
'(E) If option B on 11-34-05 is chosen,add quantity of 2 from 6 for total of 8. Do not order G.
'(F) Deadend&Tension-DD....Primary and neutral
DD336 for 336 AAC
DD795 for 795
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
'(G) Deadend Shoe Cover, DAPD1..., Mid phase only.
DAPD1C1 up to 2/0
DAPD1 C795 larger conductor up to 795. If option A on 11-34-05 is chosen,quantity of E stays at 6.
'(H) Vise Type Insulator-DI...,Vise-top style(D135V).
'(K) Wedge Connector-DWC....Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Deadend Construction

Overhead Revised 10/22 11-22-01
Angle Construction
General Information
An angle or line angle construction is when a conductor flows from one pole to another with an angle.
If needed, see section 11-30 for avian protection options.
Page Number Title Date of Change
11-22-09 1-0 Angle—Double Deadend Details 10/2022
Change:Added an option, Note I.
11-22-11 3-0 Angle-Crossarm w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up(Top) Details 10/2022
Change:Added Red Risk Zone, Note B
11-22-12& 13 3-0 Angle-Streamline 3-Up(Top) 10/2022
Change: For existing streamline only. DAF CU Code is inactive, Note A.
11-22-15 3-0 Angle-Crossarm 3-Up (Top) Details 10/2022
Change:Added Red Risk Zone, Note B.
11-22-17 3-0 Angle-Crossarm w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up(Side)Details 10/2022
Change:Added Red Risk Zone, Note C.
11-22-21 3-0 Angle-Crossarm 3-Up (Side) Details 10/2022
Change:Added Red Risk Zone, Note B.
11-22-23 3-0 Angle-Double Crossarm w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up Details 10/2022
Change:Added Red Risk Zone, Note C
11-22-25 3-0 Angle-Double Crossarm 3-Up Details 10/2022
Change:Added Red Risk Zone, Note B
11-22-27 3-0 Angle-Double Deadend 3-Up Details 10/2022
Change: Option added, Note I.
11-22-29 3-0 Angle-Double Deadend 4-Up Details 10/2022
Change: Option added, Note G
R Angle Construction

11-22-02 Reviewed 10122 Overhead
This page intentionally left blank.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 10122 11-22-03
1-0 Angle — (Top of Insulator)
Conductor Max Angle
#4 ACSR 3.0'
2/0 ACSR 3.0°
max
angle
1-0 Angle — (Top of Insulator) Details D )
(E) �
For 12.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty (G)
(A) DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1 12 8"
(B) DDG...' Down Guy EHS 1
(C) DFSP... Formed Spool Tie 1 6"
(D) DFTF...' Formed Top Tie 1 A')
(E) D112F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 1
(F) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty B") (F) (C')
(A) DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1 i
(B) DDG...' Down Guy EHS 1
(C) DFSP...' Formed Spool Tie 1
(D) DFTJ...' Formed Top Tie 1
(E) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(F) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
*Notes
'(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(B) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Oder by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
'(C) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(D) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-04 Reviewed 10/22 Overhead
1-0 Angle — (Side of Insulator)
Conductor Angle
#4 ACSR 3.0'-29.6°
2/0 ACSR 3.0'- 15.2°
1-0 Angle — (Side of Insulator) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 max
(B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 angle
(C) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 —
(D) DFST...* Formed Side Tie 1
(E) D112F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 1
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(G) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1 SD-)
For 34.5-kV Construction (E)
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 1� 8" A*)
(C) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(D) DFST...* Formed Side Tie 1 6
(E) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(G) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and
pole CU codes.
*(B) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator, 60"Min.
and Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size. See section
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying 11-02.
options see OH 11-09 and 11-25. (B*)
*(C) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according
to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0 /(
*(D) Formed Side Tie-DFST...,Order by wire size. / C*)
For 795 use DFT...Formed Top Tie.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed. 11
Refer to Overhead Manual 05,06,10,&20.
Angle Construction W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 10/22 11-22-055
This page intentionally left blank.
��R� Angle Construction

11-22-06 Reviewed 10/22 Overhead
1-0 Angle - C-Shoes (#4 ACSR Only)
Conductor Angle
#4 ACSR 15.0°-60.0°
14t- w
Angle
(
D�
72"Min.
See section
11-02.
(B) (C
(E)-i
(F'Y-1,
Angle Construction '`per R".

Overhead Revised 10/22 11-22-07
1-0 Angle — C-Shoes
(#4 ACSR Only) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB... Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DDENC DE Neutral on 12"Eyebolt w/C Shoe 1
(C) DDG...` Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DDLC35 Deadend one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins 1
(E) DRD4 Rod Armor F/ACSR&AAAC 4 2
(F) DWC... Wedge Connector 1
For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DDENC DE Neutral on 12"Eyebolt w/C Shoe 1
(C) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DDLC35 Deadend one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins 1
(E) DRD4 Rod Armor F/ACSR&AAAC 4 2
(F) DWC...* Wedge Connector 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
'(F) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-08 Reviewed 10/22 Overhead
1-0 Angle - Double Deadend
Conductor Max Angle
#4 ACSR 30.0°
2/0 ACSR 30.0°
For over 30'deadend on separate bolts.
(J*))
�D)
Option build
if conductor is
not long enough
Max
angle
�H*)
(K)(1)
12"
Fol
of
(G*) (F� (C) �C�E) (G*) (L*)
72"Min.
See section
11-02.
(B� SA)
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 10/22 11-22-09
1-0 Angle —Double Deadend Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description City CU Codes Description City
(A) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 1 (A) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 1
(B) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (B) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(C) DDENS Shackle 5/8" 2 (C) DDENS Shackle 5/8" 2
(D) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 (D) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(E) DDLEB35 DE 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/12"Ebolt 1 (E) DDLEB35...* DE 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/12"Eblt 1
(F DDLEN35 DE 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Eyenut 1 (F) DDLEN35 DE 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Eyenut 1
(G) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (G) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(H) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1 (H) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 1
(1) D112F* Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (1) D135J..* Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(J) DJMPR...* Jumper 1 (J) DJMPR...* Jumper 1
(K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(L) DWC...* Wedge Connector (L) DWC...* Wedge Connector
*Notes
*(D) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(G) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(H) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(I) Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck—Option to use D135V instead of porcelain insulator,do not order Item H.
*(J) Jumper-Refer to OH Section 08-05.Order by wire size.Wedges are included according to wire size ordered. For rebuilds
note existing wire type and sizes and order appropriate connector combinations.
DJMPR...4 ACSR to...
DJMPR...2/0 ACSR to...
*(L) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.Quantity will vary.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-1 U Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle — Crossarm w/Pole top Pin 3-Up (Top)
Conductor Angle
#4 ACSR 0°-3.0°
2/0 ACSR 0°-3.0°
336AL 0°-3.0°
795AL 0°-2.0°
max
angle
(G) (H)
8"
B-)
18" (d)
O
6"
(A) (A)
Bond to C ) Bond to
Steel Pin 60"Min. Steel Pin
See section 0
11-02.
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 1 1-22-1 1
3-0 Angle — Crossarm w/Pole top Pin 3-Up (Top) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DASW8* Crossarm 8' 1 (C) DASW8* Crossarm 8' 1
(D) DDG' Down Guy EHS 2 (D) DDG' Down Guy EHS 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP... Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFT...` Formed Top Tie 3 (F) DFT...` Formed Top Tie 3
(G) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(J) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (J) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Crossarm, DAS..., For 336 and 795 AL replace DASW8 with DAS10. In Red Risk Zones use DFT8 and do not order item A.
*(D) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
'(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-12 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle— Streamline 3-Up (Top)
Conductor Angle
#4 ACSR 0°-3.0°
2/0 ACSR 0°-2.0°
336AL 0°- 1.5°
795AL 0°-0.3°
Note: For existing streamline only
fmax
angle
(F)
12"
8" -(B')
18"
0 0
8"
60"Min. 6
g (A)
See section
11-02.
, (,) ° )
Angle Construction '`per R".

Overhead Reviewed 10122 11-22-13
3-0 Angle — Streamline 3-Up (Top) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF* Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDG* Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF* Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDG* Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
*Notes
*(A)DAF CU Code is inactive.
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-14 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle- Crossarm 3-Up (Top)
Angle
Conductor (3 up) (4 up)
#4 ACSR 0°-3.0° 0°-3.0°
2/0 ACSR 0°-3.0° 0°-3.0°
336AL 0°-3.0° 0° -2.0°
795AL 0°-2.0° 01- 1.0°
0
max
angle
(E*)
3/4"bolt (F) (H)_�
M
10
6"
(A A)
Bond to'7Bond to
Steel Pin (B) Steel Pin
60"Min.
See section �
11-02.
(G) (D*)
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per R".

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 1 1-22-15
3-0 Angle — Crossarm 3-Up (Top) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1 (B) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1
(C) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 (C) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3 (E) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (G DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(H) DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (H) DSP Steel Pin Long 3
(') Optional See Note Below (') Optional See Note Below
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(B) Crossarm, DAS..., For 336 and 795 AL replace DASW8 with DAS10.In Red Risk Zone, use fiberglass arm DFT8 or DFT10.
Item A is not needed.
'(C) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
'(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
`(`) Alternate Neutral Position-See section 11-26.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-16 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle-Crossarm w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up (Side)
Angle
Conductor 7'-8"Arm 10'Arm
#4 ACSR 3.0° - 10.7° 3.0° - 18.3°
2/0 ACSR 3.0° -5.1° 3.0° -9.1°
336AL - 3.0° -7.4°
795AL - 2.0° -3.5°
1
max
angle
(H) —
4„ (F*)
18" g„ B*)
6" (G) (1)�►
0
6"
(A I A)
Bond to 60"Min. C*) Bond to
Steel Pin See section Steel Pin
0
11-02.
(D*) (J) (E*)
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 10122 11-22-17
3-0 Angle — Crossarm w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up (Side) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DASW8* Crossarm 8' 1 (C) DASW8* Crossarm 8' 1
(D) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 (D) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFST... Formed Side Tie 3 (F) DFST...' Formed Side Tie 3
(G) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(1) DSAP Steel Pin Angle 2 (1) DSAP Steel Pin Angle 2
(J) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1 (J) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes. In Red Risk zones, use fiberglass arm, DFT8 or
DFT10. Item(A)is not needed.
*(C) Crossarm, DAS...,For 336 and 795 AL replace DASW8 with DAS10.
*(D) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(F) Formed Side Tie-DFST....Order by wire size. For 795 use DFT...Formed Top Tie.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
"` R, Angle Construction

11-22-18 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle - Streamline w/BK-18 Brackets 3-Up (Side)
Conductor Angle
#4 ACSR 3.0°- 18.4*
2/0 ACSR 2 0°-8 9*
336AL 1.5°-7.1°
795AL 0.3°-3.1°
NOTE. Use top ties for 795 AL and for angles less than 3°.
max
angle
(F) (G)—=
12 8„ (A*)
(E*)
18"
(H)
1 �
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 10122 1 1-22-19
3-0 Angle — Streamline w/BK-18 Brackets 3-Up (Side) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 2 (B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 2
(C) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 (C) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFST...* Formed Side Tie 3 (E) DFST...* Formed Side Tie 3
(F) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(H) DSP35S Steel Pin Short 2 (H) DSP35S Steel Pin Short 2
(1) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1 (1) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(C) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
'(F) Formed Side Tie-DFST..., Order by wire size. For 795 use DFT...Formed Top Tie.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-20 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle - Crossarm 3-Up (Side)
Angle
Conductor (3 up) (4 up)
#4 ACSR 8.0°- 10.0' 3.0'-6.6°
2/0 ACSR 3.0'-5.0°
336AL 3.0'-4.0°
795AL
Refer to page 11-22-18.
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
0
I I
I I
I I
I I
max I
an i --———
Alternative
neutral position SE")
See section 11-27
--,
3/4"bolt I (*) (F) (G)
I I
--I I
6" --- '
� I
(A I—Bond—� (A)
A
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin (B) Steel Pin
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
i
i
i
i
i
�H) D )
i
i
Preferred neutral position
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 1 1-22-21
3-0 Angle — Crossarm 3-Up (Side) Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1 (B) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1
(C) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 (C) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFST...* Formed Side Tie 3 (E) DFST...* Formed Side Tie 3
(F) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DSAP12 Steel Pin Angle 3 (G) DSAP35 Steel Pin Angle 3
(H) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1 (H) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
(') Optional See Note Below (') Optional See Note Below
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(B) Crossarm 10-feet—In Red Risk Zone, use fiberglass crossarm—DFT.... Item(A)is not needed.
*(C) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(E) Formed Side Tie-DFST....Order by wire size. For 795 use DFT...Formed Top Tie.
'(') Alternate Neutral Position-See section 11-26.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-22 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle - Double Crossarm w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up
Angle
Conductor 7'-8"Arm 10'Arm
#4 ACSR 0°-26.7° 0°-28.9°
2/0 ACSR 0° - 13.6° 0°- 14.8°
336AL - 0°- 12.1°
795AL - 0°-6.1°
* Use top ties for 795 AL and for angles less
than 3°.
max
angle
� H) �F*)f-(
4"
18" 8" -(B*)
0
6"
Bond to 60"Min. (C*) Bond to
Steel Pin See section Steel Pin
11-02.
(J) (E*)
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per R".

Overhead Reviewed 10122 11-22-23
3-0 Angle - Double Crossarm w/Pole Top Pin 3-Up Details
For 12.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 4
(B) DASB... Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DADW8' Dbl Crossarm T-8" 1
(D) DDG...' Down Guy EHS 1
(E) DFSP...' Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFD...' Formed Dbl Side Tie 3
(G) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 6
(H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2
(1) DSAP35 Steel Pin Angle 34.5-kV 4
(J) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
*Notes
'(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(C) Crossarm-DAD...,Order as indicated in the table by angle required.
One(1)DADW8,or one(1)DADW8 plus an additional 26"brace, DWB
One(1)DAD10 or one(1)DAD10 plus an additional 42"brace, DWB42
In Red Risk Zone,use fiberglass crossarm DFT...with brace. Item(A)is not needed.
'(D) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
'(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
'(F) Formed Double Side Tie-DFDST...,Order by wire size. For 795 use DFDTJ795 Formed Double Top Tie.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-24 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle - Double Crossarm 3-Up
Angle
Conductor (3 up) (4 up)
#4 ACSR 0°-26.2* 0*- 18.3°
2/0 ACSR 0°- 13.4* 0°-9 2°
336AL 0°- 10.9* 0°-7.4°
795AL 0*-5.5* 0°-3.6°
* Use top ties for 795 AL and for angles less
than 10'
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
0
� I
I I
I I
I I
I I
max I
J
angle Alternative
neutral position (E*)
See section 11-27.
3/4"bolt I f�(F) (G)
® ❑ I
6" ---- '
� I
(A I Bond i A)
Bond to ---- Bond to
Steel Pin (B*) Steel Pin
60"Min.
See section (B*)Note:Use double braces where
11-02. the angle is too large for one crossarm
i
i
i
i
(C* f(H) D*)
i
i
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per R".

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 11-22-25
3-0 Angle - Double Crossarm 3-Up Details
For 12.5 or 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB6' Anti-split Bolt 6" 4
(B) DAAD10` Dbl Crossarm 10' 1
(C) DDG...- Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFD...* Formed DbI Side Tie 3
(F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 6
(G) DSAP35 Steel Pin Angle 35-kV 6
(H) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
(') Optional See Note Below
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(B) Crossarm-DAAD10,or one(1)DAD10 and an additional 42"brace, DWB42.Order as indicated in the table by angle
required. In Red Risk Zone,use fiberglass crossarm, DFT...Item(A)is not needed.
'(C) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
'(E) Formed Double Side Tie-DFDST...,Order by wire size. For 795 use DFDTJ795 Formed Double Top Tie.
'(') Alternate Neutral Position-See section 11-26.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

11-22-26 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle-Double Deadend 3-Up
Max Angle
Conductor 8'Arm 10'Arm
#4 ACSR 30.0° 30.0°
2/0 ACSR 25.2° 30.0°
336AL - 30.0°
795AL - 17.1°
max. Optional Build
angle
Either connection is acceptable,
Ajumper string that comes with
2 wedge connectors or
if the conductor is long enough,
�(E*) 1 wedge connector will be sufficient.
�H*)
�I)
B')
6"
6"
(J)�
72"Min. (A� o �F) "II)G') �K')
E)placement
(D)) P
�K')
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 10/22 11-22-27
3-0 Angle —Double Deadend 3-Up Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DFDE10 Crossarm Fiberglass 10' 1 (A) DFDE10 Crossarm Fiberglass 10' 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 1 (C) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 12"Eyebolt 1
(D) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (D) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(E) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 (E) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(F) DDLS35 DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 6 (F) DDLS35 DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 6
(G) DDR * Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (G) DDR * Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(H) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (H) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(1) D112F* Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (1) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(J) DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (J) DSP Steel Pin Long 3
(K) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4 (K) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(E) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(G) Deadend&Tension-DDR...,Primary. Order by wire size.
*(H) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
*(I) Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck—Option to use D135V on DDE construction.
*(K) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
"` R,. Angle Construction

11-22-28 Revised 10/22 Overhead
3-0 Angle - Double Deadend 4-Up
Conductor Max Angle
#4 ACSR 30.0°
2/0 ACSR 17.7°
336AL 14.5°
795AL 7.4°
max. Optional Build
angle
Either connection is acceptable,
Ajumper string that comes with
2 wedge connectors or
if the conductor is long enough,
�(C) 1 wedge connector will be sufficient.
�IF
�G)
1
6 B)
6"
(H)_�
(A) (p) (E) (1)
0
Details on next page.
Angle Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 1 1-22-29
3-0 Angle —Double Deadend 4-Up Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DFDE10 Crossarm Fiberglass 10' 1 (A) DFDE10 Crossarm Fiberglass 10' 1
(B) DASB... Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDG...' Down Guy EHS 1 (C) DDG...' Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DDLS35 DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 6 (D) DDLS35 DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 6
(E) DDR ' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 8 (E) DDR ' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 8
(F) DFTF...' Formed Top Tie 3 (F) DFTJ...' Formed Top Tie 3
(G) D112F' Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) D135J' Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H) DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (H) DSP Steel Pin Long 3
(1) DWC...' Wedge Connector 4 (1) DWC...' Wedge Connector 4
*Notes
'(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(C) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
'(E) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Order by wire size.
'(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
'(G)Insulator 12.5-kV Pin type F-Neck—Option to use DI 35V
'(I) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
R Angle Construction

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-23-01
Tap Construction
General Information
A tap construction is when a lateral conductor is connected to the main line.
If needed, see section 11-30 for avian protection options.
1-0 Tap —Without Switch
1J
6" a
(c) �D*)
60"Min.
See section
11-02 r�(A) D*)
6,
See Neutral Details
E*) in Section 11-27
(J*)
For details, see the next page.
EM�Ra Tap Construction

11-23-02 Revised 09/22 Overhead
1-0 Tap -Without Switch Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (A) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 2 (B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 2
(C) DDLEB35 Deadend one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins 1 (C) DDLEB35 Deadend one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins 1
(D) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (D) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1 (F) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 1
(G) DI12F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (G) DI35J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (H) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(1) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (1) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(J) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4 (J) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4
*Notes
*(B) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR.For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DDR.... Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(J) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
Tap Construction W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-23-03
1-0 Tap —With Fused Disconnect
i%ww
(O*)Stirrup Detail (H*)(1) sO*
_ / )
1 �M) E) (F*)✓
4" 2/0 ACSR
8"
6" N*)
I (B) W)
66"Min.
See section
(D*) See Neutral Details
�G*) 1 in Section 11-27
(N*)
(D*� iod
For details, see the next page.
"`PM Tap Construction
--—

11-23-04 Revised 09/22 Overhead
1-0 Tap -With Fused Disconnect Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB,,,* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1 (B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1
(C) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (C) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(D) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 2 (D) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 2
(E) DDLS35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Sha 1 (E) DDLS35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Sha 1
(F) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (F) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(G) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (G) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(H) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1 (H) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 1
(I) D112F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (I) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(J) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 1 (J) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 1
(K) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (K) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(M) DSCS151 Sw Fused Cutout 7.2/12.5-kV 100A 1 (M) DSCS351 Sw Fused Cutout 19.9/34.5-kV 100A 1
(N) DWC...* Wedge Connector 3 (N) DWC...* Wedge Connector 3
(0) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 1 (0) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(D) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR.For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(F) Deadend&Tension-DDR.... Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(G) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(H) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(J) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW....order equivalent wire size and connector(s)needed.
*(N) Wedge Connector-DWC....Order by wire sizes.
*(0) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If applicable.Order DJMPRW... if more jumper wire is needed.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
Tap Construction W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-23-05
3-0 Crossarm w/1-0 Tap
(R*)Stirrup D tail
�J*)
(R*�
� (M)
'(K)
e
Bond to (C Bond to
Steel Pin 36„ Steel Pin
0
ABC
8-1
F-20 6" (O*�
40K �D*)
C 66"Min. (L*�
See section
11-02.
�N X/
6' y See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27* *
NOTE:
DO NOT OPEN NEUTRAL
For details, see the next page.
EMP Ra Tap Construction

11-23-06 Revised 09/22 Overhead
3-0 Wood Crossarm w/1-0 Tap Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB6' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DASB6' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB..." Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB..." Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DASW8- Crossarm 8' 1 (C) DASW8- Crossarm 8' 1
(D) DBK18" Bracket 18" 1 (D) DBK18" Bracket 18" 1
(E) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (E) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(F) DDG... Deadend Guy EHS 2 (F) DDG...' Deadend Guy EHS 2
(G) DDLS35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Sha 1 (G) DDLS35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Sha 1
(H) DDR * Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (H) DDR * Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(1) DFSP..." Formed Spool Tie 1 (1) DFSP..." Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFTF...' Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFTJ... Formed Top Tie 3
(K) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (K) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(L) DJMPRW..." Jumper Wire 1 (L) DJMPRW..." Jumper Wire 1
(M) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (M) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(N) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (N) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(0) DSCS151 Sw Fused Cutout 7.2/12.5-kV 100A 1 (0) DSCS351 Sw Fused Cutout 19.9/34.5-kV 100A 1
(P) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (P) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(Q) DWC...* Wedge Connector 3 (Q) DWC...* Wedge Connector 3
(R) DWS...' Wedge Stirrup 1 (R) DWS...' Wedge Stirrup 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Crossarm 8—In Red Risk Zones use fiberglass tangent arm-DAFT8,see OH 11-20-16 for framing and materials.'
'(D) Bracket 18"-DBK18,Use to deadend#4 ACSR or 2/0 ACSR only.
'(F) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR.For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
'(H) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
'(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
"(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
"(L) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW....order equivalent wire size and connector(s)needed.
*(Q) Wedge Connector-DWC....Order by wire sizes.
'(R) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If applicable.Order DJMPRW... if more jumper wire is needed.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
Tap Construction W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 11/13 11-23-07
3-0 Streamline w/1-0 Tap
Optional(Q*) (*P)Stirrup D tail
Maintain 9" Minimum �(J)
to Support Surfaces.
-(M)
12" f�B*) 1*)
of (A*) (P*)
18" /
o � o
ABC (N)� (F)
18"
L40K
0 1
C 8"
6" �C* (0*)�
01 )
66" Min. 1 (K*�
See section
11-02.
6
See Neutral Details
E ) (H*) in Section 11-27
NOTE:
DO NOT OPEN NEUTRAL
For details, see the next page.
�ppR,. Tap Construction

11-23-08 Revised 09122 Overhead
3-0 Streamline w/1-0 Tap Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF* Arm Fiberglass 48" 1 (A) DAF* Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DBK18* Bracket 18" 1 (C) DBK18* Bracket 18" 1
(D) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (D) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(E) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2 (E) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2
(F) DDLS35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Sha 1 (F) DDLS35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins w/Sha 1
(G) DDR * Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (G) DDR * Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(H) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (H) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(1) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (1) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(J) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (J) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(K) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 1 (K) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 1
(L) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (L) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(M) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (M) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(N) DSCS151 Sw Fused Cutout 7.2/12.5-kV 100A 1 (N) DSCS351 Sw Fused Cutout 19.9/34.5-kV 100A 1
(0) DWC...* Wedge Connector 3 (0) DWC...* Wedge Connector 3
(P) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 1 (P) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 1
(Q) Optional See Note Below (Q) Optional See Note Below
*Notes
*(A)Arm Fiberglass 48"—For existing streamline construction only.DAF CU Code is inactive.
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(D) Bracket 18"-DBK18,Use to deadend#4 ACSR or 2/0 ACSR only.
*(F) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR.For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(G) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(H) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(I) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(K) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW....order equivalent wire size and connector(s)needed.
*(0) Wedge Connector-DWC....Order by wire sizes.
*(P) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If applicable.Order DJMPRW... if more jumper wire is needed.
*(Q) Optional-For tapping other phases.Additional materials needed are DTADP, another DI..., and an appropriate tie.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
Tap Construction W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-23-09
3-0 Streamline w/1-0 Tap w/o Disconnect
Optional(0*) (N")Stirrup Detail
Maintain 9"Minimum �(I)
(i
to Support Surfaces.
12" ®❑
10-1 (A) �N*)
18"
1 0 0
1
ABC
18"
C 12„
)E) (K)� (F" (M'
66"Min. 1 NOTE:
See section The additional insulator and 12"spacing
11-02. is required for clearance purposes.
�J) �F*)
6 See Neutral Details
D ) in Section 11-27
(D:
NOTE:
DO NOT OPEN NEUTRAL
For details, see the next page.
"`�M Tap Construction

11-23-1 U Revised 09122 Overhead
3-0 Streamline w/1-0 Tap w/o Disconnect Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1 (A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB..." Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB..." Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (C) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(D) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2 (D) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2
(E) DDLEB35 Deadend one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins 1 (E) DDLEB35 Deadend one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins 1
(F) DDR - Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (F) DDR - Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(G) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (G) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(H) DFTF..." Formed Top Tie 3 (H) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(1) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (1) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(J) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (J) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(K) DPRBK2 Pri Breaker up to 35-kV w/Link 1 (K) DPRBK2 Pri Breaker up to 35-kV w/Link 1
(L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(M) DWC...- Wedge Connector 3 (M) DWC...- Wedge Connector 3
(N) DWS..." Wedge Stirrup 1 (N) DWS... Wedge Stirrup 1
(0) Optional See Note Below (0) Optional See Note Below
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(D) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR.For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(F) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
'(G) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(H) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
"(M) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(N) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If applicable.Order DJMPRW... if more jumper wire is needed.
*(0) Optional-For tapping other phases.Additional materials needed are DTADP, another DI..., and an appropriate tie.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
Tap Construction W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-23-11
3-0 Tap —Wood Crossarm
(Q*)Stirrup Detail
(J*)
Q*)
(K�►
(M�►
12" C. (N)--
0
(B) (B)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin 3C (D*) Steel Pin
42"neutral up (0))- F--]
ABC
A
B /
C
(H*)NOTE:One shackle will
be excess if not installed on
the center tap or"B"phase.
72"Min.
(L) F) (E*)
See Neutral Details
if in Section 11-27
*G) 6"
1
(G* I*) P*)
For details, see the next page.
"`PM Tap Construction

11-23-12 Revised 09122 Overhead
3-0 Tap - Crossarm Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DFDE8* Arm Fiberglass Deadend 8' 1 (A) DFDE8* Arm Fiberglass Deadend 8' 1
(B) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (B) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(D) DASW8* Crossarm 8' 1 (D) DASW8* Crossarm 8' 1
(E) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 4 (E) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 4
(F) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (F) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(G) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2 (G) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2
(H) DDLS35* DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 3 (H) DDLS35* DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 3
(1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3
(K) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 4 (K) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 4
(L) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (L) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(M) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (M) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(N) DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (N) DSP Steel Pin Long 3
(0) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 1 (0) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 1
(P) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4 (P) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4
(Q) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 3 (Q) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 3
*Notes
*(A) Deadend Crossarm—Fiberglass deadend arms vary,see Overhead Manual 07-01 to select appropriate arm based
on wire sizes.
*(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(D) Crossarm, DAS..., For 336 and 795 AL replace DASW8 with DAS10. In Red Risk Zones use fiberglass tangent arm DAFT8.
For framing and materials see Overhead Manual 11-20-16.
*(E) Deadend& Tension-DD..., Primary.Order by wire size.
*(G) Down Guy-DDG...,Order by wire size and grade construction.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR.For other guying options see Sections 07-01, 11-09,and 11-25.
*(H) 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins-DDLS35,w/shackle. 1 shackle will be excess if not installed on the center tap.
*(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT....Order by wire size.
*(K) Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck—On deadend arms,option to use visetop to hold jumper. If used, reduce quantity to 3
and don't order tie wire F/CU,see(0).
*(0) Tie Wire F/CU—Do not order if using visetop insulator.
*(P) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(Q) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If applicable.Order DJMPRW... if more jumper wire is needed.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
I DAM
Tap Construction "` R„

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-23-13
3-0 Tap — Streamline
(Q*)
(J) —
(�) _ (Q*)Stirrup Detail
12" 8" C*)
(0)
18"
0 0
8" 1
T (N) (B)
36" (O�
(M)��
ABC
0
0
A
B (A* G*) �D*) (P*)
C (G*)NOTE:One shackle will
be excess if not installed on
the center tap or"B"phase.
72" Min.
/ See Neutral Details
1 �l in Section 11-27
1 l
(F ) (H*) �P )
For details, see the next page.
�PMR,: Tap Construction

11-23-14 Revised 09122 Overhead
3-0 Tap - Streamline Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DFDE8* Arm Fiberglass Deadend 8' 1 (A) DFDE8* Arm Fiberglass Deadend 8' 1
(B) DAF* Arm Fiberglass 48" 1 (B) DAF* Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(D) DD...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 4 (D) DD...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 4
(E) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1 (E) DDENEN Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eye Nut 1
(F) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2 (F) DDG...* Deadend Guy EHS 2
(G) DDLS35* DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 3 (G) DDLS35* DE one 35-KV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shkl 3
(H) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (H) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(1) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 4 (1) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 4
(J) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 5 (J) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 5
(K) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (K) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(M) DSP Steel Pin Long 1 (M) DSP Steel Pin Long 1
(N) DTADP Thimble Adapter 1 (N) DTADP Thimble Adapter 1
(0) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 2 (0) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 2
(P) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4 (P) DWC...* Wedge Connector 4
(Q) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 3 (Q) DWS...* Wedge Stirrup 3
*Notes
*(A) Deadend Crossarm-Fiberglass deadend arms vary,see section 07-01 to select appropriate arm based on wire sizes.
*(B) Arm Fiberglass 48"—Use on existing streamline construction only.CU Code is inactive.
*(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DD..., Primary.Order by wire size.
*(F) Down Guy-DDG...,Order by wire size and grade construction.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR.For other guying options see Sections 07-01, 11-09,and 11-25.
*(G) 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins-DDLS35,w/shackle. 1 shackle will be excess if not installed on the center tap.
*(H) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(I) Formed Top Tie-DFT....Order by wire size.
(J) Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck—Option to use visetop insulator,if used reduce quantity to 3.
*(P) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(Q) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If applicable.Order DJMPRW... if more jumper wire is needed.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
Tap Construction W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 05/09 11-24-01
Junction Construction
General Information If needed, see section 11-30 for avian protection
options.
A junction construction is when a line crosses
another line. This section shows single phase
and three phase illustrations.
Page Number Title Date of Change
11-24-01 Junction Construction 05/2009
Changed From: To:
New page
11-24-02&03 1-0 Junction 05/2009
Changed From: To:
PGs Wedge Connectors and CU code tables added
11-24-04&05 3-0 Junction -Crossarm 05/2009
Changed From: To:
PGs Wedge Connectors and CU code tables added
11-24-06&07 3-0 Junction -Streamline 05/2009
Changed From: To:
PGs Wedge Connectors and CU code tables added
`ppR,. Junction Construction

11-24-02 Revised 05/09 Overhead
1-0 Junction
I-%1WIP
E
4" • (H)
12" ❑®
1 8"
F`)
214"
1
(B)
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
if
--------- (�•)
(G) (C")
For details, see the next page.
IDAHO
Junction Construction W Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 11/13 11-24-03
1-0 Junction Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1 (B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1
(C) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (C) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(D) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1 (D) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 1
(E) D112F Insulator 12-kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (E) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(F) DJMPR... Jumper 1 (F) DJMPR...` Jumper 1
(G) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (G) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(1) DSP35S Steel Pin 35-kV Short Shank 1 (1) DSP35S Steel Pin 35-kV Short Shank 1
(J) DWC...* Wedge Connector 2 (J) DWC...* Wedge Connector 2
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(D) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(F) Jumper-Refer to OH Section 08-05.Order by wire size.Wedges are included according to wire size ordered. For rebuilds
note existing wire type and sizes and order appropriate connector combinations.
DJMPR...4 ACSR to...
DJMPR...2/0 ACSR to...
*(J) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire size.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
"` R,, Junction Construction

11-24-04 Revised 05/09 Overhead
3-0 Junction— Crossarm
(E*�
12"
6" B*)
7Bd
�
o36" n (K*)
42"with neutral up (C)
48"different circuits
(*) i -W
F--1 °
(A) A)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin Steel Pin
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
(D*)(1)
if
V
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
(K*) (G*)
For details, see the next page.
IDAHO
Junction Construction W R°
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 11/13 11-24-055
3-0 Junction — Crossarm Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 4 (A) DAS66' Anti-split Bolt 6" 4
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 2 (C) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 2
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 2 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 2
(E) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 6 (E) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 6
(F) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 6 (F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DJMPR..." Jumper Wire 1 (G) DJMPR..." Jumper Wire 1
(H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 2 (1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(J) DSP Steel Pin Long 5 (J) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(K) DWC... Wedge Connector 4 (K) DWC... Wedge Connector 4
(L) DWS..." Wedge Stirrup 3 (L) DWS..." Wedge Stirrup 3
(*) Optional See Note Below (*) Optional See Note Below
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(G) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW....order equivalent wire size and connector(s)needed.
*(K) Wedge Connector-DWC....Order by wire sizes.
'(L) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If lower conductor is larger than 2/0.Order DJMPRW... instead of the stirrups.Be sure to adjust wedge connector quantities.
( ) Alternate Neutral Position-See section 11-26.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
EMPOMR,, Junction Construction

11-24-06 Revised 05/09 Overhead
3-0 Junction— Streamline
(F*�
~(G) �(O')
4"
.01 (C*)
30" 7
8 �
18" 9"Min.
if
(A)
36" (�)(M) (N
42"with neutral up
48"different circuits (D)
(*) (K)
❑ Q
Rj
(B) B)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin Steel Pin
0
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
(E*) (I)
11
V
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
(N*)(H*)
For details, see the next page.
IDAHO
Junction Construction W Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 11/13 11-24-07
3-0 Junction - Streamline Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1 (A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB6' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (B) DASB6' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(C) DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1 (C) DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1
(D) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1 (D) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1
(E) DFSP... Formed Spool Tie 2 (E) DFSP...' Formed Spool Tie 2
(F) DFTF...' Formed Top Tie 6 (F) DFTJ...' Formed Top Tie 6
(G) D112F Insulator 12.5-kV Pin Type F-Neck 7 (G) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 7
(H) DJMPR...' Jumper Wire 1 (H) DJMPR...' Jumper Wire 1
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 2 (1) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(J) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (J) DNB Neutral Bracket 2
(K) DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (K) DSP Steel Pin Long 3
(L) DTADP Thimble Adapter 1 (L) DTADP Thimble Adapter 1
(M) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 1 (M) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 1
(N) DWC...' Wedge Connector 5 (N) DWC...' Wedge Connector 5
(0) DWS...' Wedge Stirrup 3 (0) DWS...' Wedge Stirrup 3
(') Optional See Note Below (') Optional See Note Below
*Notes
'(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
'(H) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW....order equivalent wire size and connector(s)needed.
'(N) Wedge Connector-DWC....Order by wire sizes.
'(0) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...,Order by wire sizes.
If lower conductor is larger than 2/0.Order DJMPRW... instead of the stirrups.Be sure to adjust wedge connector quantities.
Alternate Neutral Position-See section 11-26.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
"` R,, Junction Construction

Overhead Revised 9/22 1 1-25-01
Multi Circuit Construction
General Information
A multi circuit or underbuild construction is when a line runs under a separate line that is on the same
pole.
When a distribution line is required to attach to a steel transmission pole an 11-foot medium wood
crossarm, Cat ID 4949,may be used to achieve the clearances needed due to the steel pole being wider
than a wood pole. See Materials Manual 01-105-01 and Transmission Manual 01-800.
If needed, see section 11-30 for avian protection options.
IDAW
Multi Circuit Construction
�,o�o�amPa,

11-25-02 Revised 09/22 Overhead
3-0 Multi Circuit- Crossarm under Crossarm (Wood)
Illustrated with both circuits as 34.5 W
The table shows the recommended separation For additional information contact Methods&
for double circuit distribution conductors based Materials
on the following assumptions:
Lower Upper Circuit
• Span is based on the shortest ruling span either Circuit #4 2/0 336 795
circuit(300'for 336&795,350'for 44&2.0). #4 6'-6"* 6'-6"* 8'-6" 8'-6"
Longer spans may require greater separation. 2/0 6'-6"* 6'-6"* 9'-0" 9'-0"
• Both circuits are assumed to be 34.5 W.For 336 6'-6"* 6'-6"* T-0" T-0"
both circuits at 12.5 W you may subtract 6".
• Top circuit @ 212° 795 6'-6"* 6'-6"* 7'-0" 7'-0"
• Bottom Circuit @ 40°final Sag * Separation of 6'-6"(6'for 12.5)minimum is recommended
to provide bucket access.
(F*)
12" �i(B ) ��J)
0
(A � A)
Bond to (C*) Bond to
Steel Pin Steel Pin
❑O
See Table
❑° °
(A) qA)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin A 0�� D) Steel Pin
60"Min. P
See section
11-02.
E*)
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
Multi Circuit Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-255-03
3-0 Multi Circuit - Crossarm under Crossarm Details
For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 4
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DASW8*/DAS10 Crossarm 8710' 1
(D) DAS10 Crossarm 10' 1
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 6
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(H) D135J Insulator 34.5 kV Pin Type J-Neck6
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(J) DSP Steel Pin Long 5
(*) Optional See Note Below
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Crossarm, DAS..., For 336 and 795 AL replace DASW8 with DAS10. In Red Risk Zone areas,use fiber glass crossarms,
DAFT8/DAFT10
*(D) Crossarm 10'—In Red Risk Zone areas,use fiber glass crossarms.'
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...Order by wire size.
*(*) Alternate Neutral Position-See section 11-26.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
`p NER,: Multi Circuit Construction

11-25-04 Revised 09/22 Overhead
3-0 Multi Circuit Wood Crossarm under Streamline
Illustrated with both circuits as 34.5 W
The table shows the recommended separation For additional information contact Methods &
for double circuit distribution conductors Materials
based on the following assumptions:
Lower Upper Circuit
• Span is based on the shortest ruling span either Circuit #4 2/0 336 795
circuit(300-feet for 336&795,350-feet for #4 6'-6"* 6'-6"* 8'-6" 8'-6"
#4&2.0).Longer spans may require greater 2/0 6'-6"* 6'-6"* 9'-0" 9'-0"
separation. 336 6'-6"* 6'-6"* T-0" 7'-0"
• Both circuits are assumed to be 34.5 W.For
both circuits at 12.5 W you may subtract 795 6'-6"* 6'-6"* T-0" T-0"
6-inches. * Separation of 6'-6"(6'for 12.5)minimum is
• Top circuit @ 212° recommended to provide bucket access.
• Bottom circuit @ 40°final sag
f�H)
f (B*) F*)
30" o
f�G)
0
0 �C)
See Table
W)
0
(A A)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin "(D) Steel Pin
60"Min. 0
See section
11-02.
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
Multi Circuit Construction '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 09/22 11-255-055
3-0 Multi Circuit— Crossarm under Streamline Details
For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB6' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB..." Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DAF...' Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(D) DAS10 Crossarm 10" 1
(E) DFSP..." Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFT...- Formed Top Tie 6
(G) D135J Insulator 34.5 kV Pin Type J-Neck 6
(H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(j) DSP Steel Pin Long 3
(") Optional See Note Below
"Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C)DAF—Use for existing streamline construction only. DAF CU Code is inactive
*(D) Crossarm 10%In Red Risk Zones,use fiberglass crossarm DAFT10
"(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by sire size.
'(') Alternate Neutral Position-See section 11-26.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
`p ER; Multi Circuit Construction

Overhead Revised 05/09 11-26-01
Grade B Construction
General Information It is also recommended to double deadend the
neutrals. The designs in this section will need to
A Grade B construction can by any be modified if the double deadended neutral
configuration of the previous construction construction is used.
sections but is a heavier construction, sometimes
consisting of double and heavier materials. If needed, see section 11-30 for avian protection
options.
When designing and constructing a freeway or
railroad crossing, it is strongly recommended to
use the Grade B structure on both sides of the
crossing.
Page Number Title Date of Change
11-20-01 Grade B Construction 05/2009
Changed From: To:
New page
11-20-02&03 1-0 Tangent-Grade B Crossing 05/2009
Changed From: To:
PGs Wedge Connectors and CU code tables added
11-20-04&05 1-0 Angle-Grade B Crossing 05/2009
Changed From: To:
PGs Wedge Connectors and CU code tables added
11-20-06&07 3-0 Angle-Streamline Grade B 05/2009
Changed From: To:
PGs Wedge Connectors and CU code tables added
Changed From: To:
Changed From: To:
ONPOMR,. Grade B Construction

11-26-02 Revised 05/09 Overhead
1-0 Tangent— Grade B Crossing
-�%wd!e
A*)(F)
60"Min.
(C% E)
See Neutral Details
in Section 11-27
For details, see the next page.
Grade B Construction Ra
A�IDACORPCa ny

Overhead Revised 11/13 11-26-03
1-0 Tangent— Grade B Crossing Details
For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DFDTJ...* Formed Dbl Top Tie F/J-Neck Ins 2
(C) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(D) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 2
(E) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
(F) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(B) Formed Double Top Tie-DFDTJ..., Double top ties are available for J-neck insulators only. If insulators touch,shim the pole
with curved washers.
DFDTJ4 Tie, Double Top,J-Neck Orange F/J4 Conductor
DFDTJ20 Tie, Double Top,J-Neck, Blue F/J2/0 Conductor
'(C) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Grade B Construction

11-26-04 Revised 05/09 Overhead
1-0 Angle — Grade B Crossing
Conductor Max Angle
#4 ACSR 3.0°-28 9°
2/0 ACSR 3.0°- 14.8°
angle
maxe
(C*)
(E) (G�
12" $„ o
6" (A')
4
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
(B�
For details, see the next page.
Grade B Construction Ra
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 11/13 11-26-05
1-0 Angle — Grade B Crossing Details
For 12.5-kV Construction For 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1 (B) DDG...* Down Guy EHS 1
(C) DFDSF... Formed DbI Side Tie F/F-Neck Ins 2 (C) DFDSJ...' Formed DbI Side Tie F/J-Neck Ins 2
(D) DFSP..." Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 2 (E) D135J Insulator 35-kV Pin Type J-Neck 2
(F) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1 (F) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2 (G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(B) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(C) Formed Double Side Tie-DFDSJ..., If insulators touch,shim the pole with curved washers.
DFDSF4 Tie, Double Side, F-Neck Orange F/#4 Conductor DFDSJ4 Tie, Double Side,J-Neck Orange F/#4 Conductor
DFDSF20 Tie, Double Side, F-Neck, Blue F/2/0 Conductor DFDSJ20 Tie, Double Side,J-Neck, Blue F/2/0 Conductor
'(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
ONPOMR,. Grade B Construction

11-26-06 Revised 05/09 Overhead
3-0 Angle — Streamline Grade B
Conductor on Side of Insulator
Conductor Angle
#4 ACSR 0°- 14.8°
2/0 ACSR 0°-7.3°
336AL 0°-5.9°
795AL 0°-2 7°
NOTE. Use top ties for 795 AL and for angles less
than 3°.
Shim pole with curved
washers if insulators
touch.
max
angle
Use this configuration
at both sides of a Grade B (F) (G)-�
crossing.
12" 8„ (B*)
�E*)
18"
0 0
8"
®s° (A)
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
For details, see the next page.
Grade B Construction Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 11/13 11-26-07
3-0 Angle — Streamline Grade B Details
For 12.5 or 34.5-kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDG...` Down Guy EHS 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFDSJ... Formed Side Tie 3
(F) D135J Insulator 34.5-kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(H) DSR1 Sec. Rack, 1 Spool W/Spool 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Down Guy-DDG,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
*(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(E) Formed Double Side Tie-DFDSJ...,Order by wire size.For 795 use DFDTJ...Formed Double Top Tie.
Pole,conductor,anchor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
ONPOMR,, Grade B Construction

Overhead Reviewed 06/22 11-27-01
Neutral Details Illustrated
General The wedge being installed between the spool
and the shoe is structurally stable but it makes
The following illustrations show the neutral installation and removal difficult so is not
configurations in more detail for clarification of recommended.
design and build.
Alternate neutral position on a crossarm can
be used when the preferred(secondary)neutral
location is not possible or you need to balance
the load on the crossarm. The alternate(primary)
position is discouraged because this puts
grounded materials within the"hot"area. See
the next page and installation details on page
11-20-10. Identify the illustration that fits your application
most.
When a Grade B construction is used, it is
recommended to double deadend the neutral.
mod �� a°� Top View of
\fit Q°� Pole Ground
°a Connection
\-
Pole Ground
Wedges,
Spool Tie order separately
CU code includes unless a jumper
a wedge. is used, in which
Wedge wedges are included. This Wedge is Included
in the Spool Tie CU Code
Top View of
Pole Ground
Connection
0
Pole Ground Pole Ground
Wedge will need to be
ordered because it isn't Wedges,
included in any other order separately
CU code here. Z-10"
unless a jumper
This Wedge is Included is used, in which
in Spool Tie CU Code wedges are included.
"`ppR. Neutral Details Illustrated

11-27-02 Reviewed 06/22 Overhead
Alternate Neutral Position Be sure to
replace the neutral bracket and spool tie
with the insulator, a steel pin, additional Top View of
tie and a wedge connector to attach the Pole Ground
pole ground. Connection
Pole Ground
Wedge 7used
Pole GroundA Jumper Wi There is a Wedge Included
in each Spool Tie CU Code
here.To avoid having
an excess Wedge,order
Jumper Wire and Wedge
separately.
See Page 11-20-10
Neutral Details Illustrated '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 06/22 11-28-01
Slack Spans
Slack Span Sag When slack spans are installed on wood
crossarms,the arm should be 10-feet for space.
A slack span is a span of conductor that is on Use 10-foot fiberglass tangent arm if in a
reduced tension;usually used where guying and Wildfire Management Project-Red Risk Zone
anchoring is not an option. (WMP-RRZ)
Unguyed slack spans should be kept as short as If long heavy slack spans are installed,up the
possible. Length should not exceed 100-feet for pole class by one.
the smaller conductors or 75-feet for 795 Al.
Slack spans are accounted for in the pole sizing of Fuse slack spans to protect the main line either
tangent,bi-sect angle,and deadend designs. To on the main pole or on the first slack span pole.
manually figure tangents, see section 11-06. Contact your field engineer for the fuse size.
To figure bi-sect angles and deadends, see section
11-09.
Calculation tools for pole-sizing are available on
the Spillway at Methods and
Materials/Frequently Used Information.
Slack Span—Wood or Fiberglass 10-foot Crossarm—All Conductors
This is a good configuration choice for single phase where the neural slack span needs to be installed on
an arm for clearance purposes.
CU Codes Description Qty
DASB6' Anti-spit Bolt 6-inch(in arm CLI code) 2
DAS10/DAFT10" Crossarm 10-foot 1
DDLEN35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyenut t
DDR...— DE Bolted Primary In-Line t
DFT...***or DTYC Formed Top Tie or Top Tie F/CLI t
DI Insulator t
DJMPRW...*** Jumper Wire t
DSP Steel Pin Long t
DWC *** Wedge,Stirrup or Stud Disconnect t
'Wood arm only
"Red Risk Zone only
"'Order by wire size
tOrder by wire size and quantity as required for 1-0 or 3-0
and neutral
0
Wedge
NOTE. The insulators in
this illustration are an option
Jumper Wire used to train the jumpers.If
the main conductors and
neutral are directly above,
they may not be needed.
Neutral
"`ppRR Slack Spans

11-28-02 Revised 06122 Overhead
Slack Span — Side of 10-foot Wood or Fiberglass Crossarm - #4 ACSR Tap
CU Codes Description Qty
DDLEN35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyenut 1
DDENEN DE Neutral on an Eyenut 1
DDR...* DE Bolted Primary In-Line 2
DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire t
DWC...* Wedge Connector t
* Order by wire size
t Order by wire size and quantity as required for 1-0 or 3-0 and neutral
This neutral shows another
option using an eyenut.The
slack neutral wire runs
through the bolted deadend
to the main neutral requiring
only one wedge connector;
jumper wire is not used.
'0
Neutral
Slack Span —Fiberglass Tangent Arm - #4 ACSR or 2/0 ACSR Tap
Use this tap configuration when the tap runs straight off the fiberglass arm. The fiberglass arm will bend
under angled stress. If an angle is needed, use the BK-18 configuration.
CU Code Description Qty
DPRBK2 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Link 1
DDR * DE Bolted Primary In-Line 2
DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire t
DWC...* Wedge Connector t
* Order by wire size
t Order by wire sizes and quantity as required for
1-0 or 3-0 and neutral
This neutral shows another o
option using an eyenut.The
slack neutral wire runs
continuous threw the bolted
deadend to the main neutral
requiring only one wedge connector.
Ajumper wire is not used.
Neutral
Slack Spans "` R„

Overhead Revised 06/22 11-28-03
Slack Span — BK-18 —All Conductors
CU Codes Description Qty
DBK18 Bracket 18-inch 1
DDLS35 DE one 35-kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Shackle 1
DDR...* DE Bolted Primary In-Line 2
DFT...* Formed Top Tie 1
DI...* Insulator Pin Type 1
DJMPR Jumper Wire t
DSP...* Steel Pin Long 1
DWC...* Wedge,Stirrup,or Stud Disconnect t
* Order by wire size
t Order by wire size and quantity as required for
1-0 or 3-0 and neutral
This neutral shows the
option of using an eyebolt. °
Ajumper wire and two
wedge connectors are used
6" in this illustration.
o
Neutral
Mid-Span Tap - #4 ACSR Tap
Mid-Span Tap and Neutral
CU Codes Description Qty
DMST...* Mid-Span Tap(Wire Size)to#4 ACSR 1
DMST...N* Mid-Span Tap(Wire Size)to#4 ACSR 1
* Order by wire size
This neutral shows the
option of running the
neutral wire continuous
threw the bolted deadend
directly to the wedge connector.
No jumper wire is required. o 0
Mid-Span Neutral
�PM Slack Spans

Overhead Revised 08/10 11-29-01
Deadend Tensions
Guy Hardware A 10" screw anchor has been shown for each
configuration,along with the required number of
Hardware items are for grades`B"and"C" shear pins, assuming one added rod section.For
construction except where otherwise noted.To the shear pin requirement of larger size screw
determine which grade of construction applies, anchors, see the charts on page 06-10-03.
see section 11-04.
Guy Tension The proper size of plate anchor is also shown in
Y the following tables.
The guy tension includes the overload capacity
factors prescribed by the NESC for each NOTE. The anchor is assumed to have
construction grade. capacity to hold one communications guy.
CATV forces have also been listed, assuming Vertical Pole Load and Pole Class
that the cable has a maximum tension of 2240
lbs. Selection
Guy Angle The vertical forces shown in the configuration
drawings include:
The guy angle is the angle between the pole and
the down guy. Each drawing shows the tensions ♦ Down Guy load
for angles that are 30'to 39°, and 40' or greater. ♦ Person(s) and tools weight(500 lbs)
Angles less than 30'may conflict with the ♦ Conductor weight for a vertical span of
transformer bank. 144%of the ruling span
NOTE. For Additional guy angles and To determine total vertical pole load use the
loadings,use the tables in 11-09. values in the table along with the factored
weight of any equipment.Then choose the pole
Communications mounting height was assumed class,using the tables on page 11-09-03 and 04.
to be 22'. For steeper guy angles, other
conductor tensions, or other conductors,use the NOTE. The vertical load values for#4
guy selection tables for deadends, section 11-09- ACSR include the loading from the
21. neutral.
Anchors
The appropriate sized anchor is called for in the
tables found in this section. Soil conditions or
other factors may require the use of another type
of anchor. If two guys are required,it is assumed
that the load is divided equally between the two
guys.
EMPOWER. Deadend Tensions

11-29-02 Revised 08/10 Overhead
Example Vertical Pole Load
Determine guying and pole class requirements: From the table on Page 11-29-06
45'.pole Phase= 10,627#
Grade"C"construction Neutral=3,876#
2/0 ACSR CATV=4,818#
40'guy angle Transformers=6,721#(Pg 11-05-01)
350'. span Total=26,042#
3-0, 50-kVA,transformer bank Need Class 3 Pole(Pg 11-09-04)
Guy Tension
From the table on Page 11-29-06
Phase= 10,553# Use DDG3C (Pg 11-09-01)
Neutral=3,518# Use DDG3C (Pg 11-09-01)
CATV=4,259# N/A
Total= 18,330# Use (1)DANS10 (Pg 11-09-02)
or DAN19
0
210 ACSR @ 1,850# x 3 = 5550#
GUY
An9/e
B
L
2/0 ACSR @ 1,850#
CATV @ 2,240#
Deadend Tensions Ra
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 08/10 11-29-03
1-0 Deadend - #4 ACSR
Guy Anchor Shear Guy Vertical
Conductor Hardware Type Pins Tension Pole Load
Guy Angle-40'or Greater
Phase&Neutral DDG3C DANS10 or 3 3,803# 4,168#
DAN20
CATV 4,259# 4,818#
Guy Angle-30'-39°
Phase&Neutral DDG3C DANS10 or 3 4,889# 5,605#
DAN20
CATV 5,476# 6,428#
For additional guy angles and tensions see section 11-09.
Vertical pole load includes 144%of conductor weight span, 500 Ibs person weight and down guy load.
12" ❑o
#4 ACSR @ 1,00(
6"
60" Min
See Section
11-02.
Goy
#4 ACSR @ 1,000i
CATV @ 21240#
E'er IDAHO
RNPM ER. Deadend Tensions

11-29-04 Revised 12/19 Overhead
1-0 Deadend - 2/0 ACSR
Guy Anchor Shear Guy Vertical
Conductor Hardware Type Pins Tension Pole Load
Guy Angle-40'or Greater
Phase DDG3C DANS10 or 3 3,518# 3,876#
DAN20
Neutral DDG3C 3,518# 3,876#
CATV 4,259# 4,818#
Guy Angle-30'-39°
Phase DDG3C DANS10 or 3 4,500# 5,205#
DAN20
Neutral DDG3C 4,500# 5,205#
CATV 5,476# 6,428#
For additional guy angles and tensions see section 11-09.
Vertical pole load includes 144%of conductor weight span, 500 Ibs person weight and down guy load.
12" O
6"
72" Min.
See section
11-02. Goy
�n9/�
° 2/0 ACSR @ 1,850#
CATV @ 2,240#
Deadend Tensions Ra
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 12/19 11-29-05
3-0 Deadend - #4 ACSR
Const Deadend Guy Anchor Shear Guy Vertical
Type Arm Hardware Type Pins Tension Pole Load
Guy Angle-40'or Greater
3-up DFDE8 DDG3C DANS10 or 3 7,606# 7,836#
DAN20
4-up DFDE10 DDG3C DANS10 or 3 7,606# 7,836#
DAN20
CATV 4,259# 4,818#
-----------
Guy Angle-30'-39'
3-up DFDE8 DDG3C DANS10 or 3 9,778# 10,711#
DAN20
4-up DFDE10 DDG3C DANS10 or 3 9,778# 10,711#
DAN20
CATV 5,476# 6,428#
For additional guy angles and tensions see section 11-09.
Vertical pole load includes 144%of conductor weight span, 500 Ibs person weight and down guy load.
� O
12"
#4ACSR @ 1000#
72"Min.
See section
11-02.
Guy
Angle
#4ACSR @ 1000#
CATV @ 2240#
E'er IDAHO
RNPM ER. Deadend Tensions

11-29-06 Revised 12/19 Overhead
3-0 Deadend - 2/0 ACSR
Const Deadend Guy Anchor Shear Guy Vertical
Type Arm Hardware Type Pins Tension Pole Load
Guy Angle-40'or Greater
3-up DFDE8 DDG2C DANS10 or 4 10,553# 10,627#
DAN20
Neutral DDG3C 3,518# 3,876#
4-up DFDE10 DDG3C DANS10 or 4 14,071# 14,002#
DAN20
CATV 4,259# 4,818#
Guy Angle-30'-39'
3-up DFDE8 DDG2C DANS10 or 6 13,567# 14,615#
DAN20
Neutral DDG3C 4,522# 5,205#
4-up DFDE10 DDG2C DANS10 or 6 18,089# 19,320#
DAN20
CATV 5,476# 6,428#
For additional guy angles and tensions see section 11-09.
Vertical pole load includes 144%of conductor weight span, 500 Ibs person weight and down guy load.
12" O
2/0 ACSR @ 1,850#
72"Min.
See section
11-02.
GUy
�n9/e
2/0 ACSR @ 1,850#
CAN @ 2,240#
o
Deadend Tensions Ra
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 12/19 11-29-07
3-0 Deadend - 336 Al
Const Deadend Guy Anchor Shear Guy Vertical
Type Arm Hardware Type Pins Tension Pole Load
Guy Angle-40'or Greater
3-up DFDE8 DDG2C DANS10 or 6 12,738# 12,773#
DAN20
Neutral DDG3C 2,800# 3,200#
2/0 Neutral DDG3C 2,800# 3,200#
4-up DFDE10 DDG2C DANS10 or 6 16,984# 16864#
DAN20
CATV 4,259# 4,818#
Guy Angle-30'-39'
3-up DFDE8 DDG2C DANS10 or 7 16,375# 18,068#
DAN20
Neutral DDG3C 3,600# 4,364#
2/0 Neutral DDG3C 3,600# 4,364#
4-up DFDE10 (2) DDG2C DANS10 or 7 21,834# 23,924#
DAN20
CATV 5,476# 6,428#
For additional guy angles and tensions see section 11-09.
Vertical pole load includes 144%of conductor weight span, 500 Ibs person weight and down guy load.
12" O
y — 336 AL @ 2,233#
72"Min.
See section
11-02.
Guy
ng/ems
a 2/0ACSR @ 1,473#
CATV @ 2,240#
E'er IDAHO
PouveR Deadend Tensions

11-29-08 Revised 12/19 Overhead
3-0 Deadend - 795 Al
Const Deadend Guy Anchor Shear Guy Vertical
Type Arm Hardware Type Pins Tension Pole Load
Guy Angle-40'or Greater
3-up DFDE8 (2) DDG2C (2) DANS10 or 7 23,232# 23,127#
(2) DAN20
Neutral DDG3C 7,744# 4,967#
336 Neutral DDG3C 3,678# 3,952#
CATV 4,259# 4,818#
4-up DFDE10 (2) DDG2C (2) DANS10 or 7 30,976# 30,669#
(2) DAN20
CATV 5,476# 6,428#
For additional guy angles and tensions see section 11-09.
Vertical pole load includes 144%of conductor weight span, 500 Ibs person weight and down guy load.
12"
0
o
795 AL @ 4,073#
72"Min.
See section
11-02.
G
A�8/e
Note.Separate anchors 'to 336AL @ 2,133#
achieve maximum strength
/ 5 CATV @ 2,240#
Deadend Tensions Ra
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-30-01
Wildlife Protection
Idaho Power's Bird Management Protection Criteria
Program
The two(2)basic principles of avian protection
Birds commonly use power poles for perching, are isolation (separation) and insulation
hunting, and nesting which increases their risk (coverings). See section 11-31 and 11-32 for
of electrocution. Several laws protect raptors and insulation materials and section 11-33 and-34
other migratory bird species. It is Idaho Power's for specific isolation construction details.
policy that new or rebuilt lines be built to avian
protection guidelines or safe construction Types of Protection
standards.
There are several types of protection measures
A GPS was used to develop a map delineating 3 that are available to protect wildlife on existing
zones within our service territory that would structures.
govern which design guidelines were ♦ Covers(See section 11-3 1)Preferred
appropriate for new construction and the ♦ Bird Diverters(See section 11-32)
rebuilding of lines: ♦ Perches(See section 11-32)
1) no raptor restrictions, ♦ Nesting Platforms(See section 11-32)
♦ Structural Modification(See section 11-33
2) a 40" guideline where hawks and owls and 34)Preferred
would be found but we do not expect eagles
to be found, and Avian Symbols
3) a 60" guideline where eagles would be
found.Note that all federal and state(BLM, This symbol on any construction
FS) land is to be built by zone 3, eagle safe illustration means that the structure,if
standards. built as shown, is not avian protected.
(zone 1),no restriction)
Maps are located in your regional operations
center or on the Spillway. If you see an error, This symbol on any construction
contact Environmental Affairs so that the map illustration means that the structure,if
can be updated. built as shown,is avian protected for
hawks and owls(zone 2),40").
This symbol on any construction
NOTE. For information regarding illustration means that the
procedures for Avian Mortality,Raptor structure,if built as shown,is
Nesting on Power Poles and Bird avian protected for any kind of
Collisions see Distribution Manual bird,including eagles(zone 3), 60").
section 13.01.
An example of the Bird Mortality Report
(PSD 007)form is located in Distribution See sections 11-31 through 11-34 for examples
Manual section 13.01-02 on page 04.This of how to modify various structures to make
report can be completed on the Spillway them"avian protected".
or a hard copy may be obtained from the
Environmental Affairs Department
E''�ID 0
�wPOWER Wildlife Protection

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-31-01
Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers
Covers Cat. ID Description CU Code
54130 Grd, Med, F/Xfmr Bushing DAP
These bird guard covers are made out of non- 49353 Grd, Lrg, F/Rclr/Seclr,Reg&Pothead none
conductive,UV stable, fire-retardant and flame DAP Includes arrester bolt cover, bushing guard and
resistant plastic.They may be used on all 2' protective tubing. See Material Manual page
voltages. 05-051-01.
Small Animal/Bird Guards Gray Vinyl Tape. In your opinion, if a small
animal/bird guard does not lock securely
enough you have the option to make a couple
Animal Bushing Guards. The high voltage wraps with this gray tape around the center of
bushing on all overhead distribution the guard.
transformers shall have an animal guard
installed to reduce the incidence of outages Cat. ID Description CU Code
caused by birds and small animals. 48515 Tape, Gray,Vinyl 3/4" none
Covered Wire or 49307 Tape, Gray,Vinyl 2" none
f Protective Tubing See Material Manual page 15-251-02.
NOTE. Manufacturer Regulator Arrester Cover is installed on a
does not recommend series arrester.
use on primary
metering bushings. Cat. ID Description CU Code
Seepage 11-35-01. 45342 Cover F/Regulator Series Arrester none
Arrester Bracket Cover. The arrester bracket
covers the bolt where an animal or bird might
stand. They are easy to install;just slip them
over a creepage skirt on polymer arresters to
effectively cover the mounting bolt. This cover
CAUTION. Only place the animal guard has an insulation value of 21-kV.
over the top skirt of the bushing.
Otherwise,the creepage distance provided
by the skirts is lost.
The flexible fingers on the
bottom of the animal guard
may be cut to fit larger
bushings
Tab prevents cover
from falling off
44487 Arrester Bkt Grd DAPAB
See Material Manual page 05-052-01.
NOTE. Cover all transformer primary
bushings—single and two bushing
transformers.
"`pp�RR Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers

11-31-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Protective Tubing. All primary jumpers from Switch Covers
the top of the transformer bushing to the bottom
of the switch and from the switch to the phase Non-loadbreak Cutout Covers cover the top of
will be covered with protective tubing. the cutout and are securely held in place by a
locking pin. This pin prevents the cover from
On 1-0 structures the jumper between the blowing off during strong winds.Use protective
transformer bushing and the switch will be tubing to cover the bare wire exiting the top of
covered with protective tubing. the cutout or use covered wire.
CAUTION. Tubing is not to be
considered personnel safe insulation.
0
00
m
(1
Gray Tubing Split Tubing Insulation Tubing
NOTE. The universal cover is not
Cat. ID Description w/Inside Dia CU Code manufacturer specific. It fits all
43694 Tubing,Wildlife Gray, 1/2" DAPGT12 non-loadbreak cutout switches including the
4682 Tubing, Split, Gray, 5/8" DAPGTS58 linkbreak style.
24748 Tubing, Split, Gray, 3/8" DAPGTS38
47639 Tubing, Split, Gray, 3/4" DAPGTS34
47769 Insul Tubing, Gray, 3/4" DAPGTI34 Cat. ID Description CU Code
44970 Insul Tubing, Gray, 1" DAPGTI1 53348 Universal Cover fits all DAPNLBC
39894 Insul Tubing, Gray, 1-1/4" DAPGTI125 53966 Lock-pin Replacement none
The gray wildlife tubing is included in many CU codes.
If ordered individually these are issued by the foot. The Solid Blade 600 Amp Cutout Cover
comes with 2 pieces. One part covers the top of a
A stick-application tool is available for installing non-loadbreak solid blade cutout and the other part
insulation tubing on pre-existing jumpers. See covers the NEMA pad.Use protective tubing to
Tools page 111-12-04 for installation details. cover the bare wires exiting the top of the cutout
Size Tubing with Jumper Conductor for existing construction or use covered wire for
Jumper Conductor Dia Tubing Cat. ID new construction.Two parts are hot"stickable."
#4 CU 0.2043" 24748 or 43694
#2 CU 0.2920" 24748 or 43694
2/0 CU 0.414" 43694,47639 or 47769
4/0 CU 0.522" 4682,47639 or 47769
250 CU 0.574" 4682,47639 or 47769
336 AL 0.666 44970,47639 or 47769
500 CU 0.811" 44970 or 39894
For more information about tubing see Materials
Manual page 05-053-01 and 02.
Use covered wire or
be sure that the protective
tubing completely covers
the jumper wire that is Solid Blade 600A Cover
connected to the transformer
bushing inside the bushing
cover. Cat. ID Description CU Code
55721 Cover, SLD BLD 600A DAPNLBSLD6
For more information on NLB covers see Materials
Manual page 05-054-01.
Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers "`PM

Overhead New 10/21 11-31-03
Loadbreak Switch Covers consists of 2 pieces Cat. ID 14700(3 Piece)
and attach to the top of the cutout by snapping 4734 Por. Hrz Clamp Top 35kV DIPH35
together. Protective tubing should be used on the 4739 Por. Hrz Clamp Top 25kV DIPH12
wire comin out of the to of the cutout. Cat. ID 56889(3 Piece)
g p 4743 Poly Hrz Clamp Top 69kV
• For more information see the Materials Manual page
05-056-01.
r �
Installation steps begin on page 11-31-05.
�r Double Crossarm Cover. The 3-piece double
JOE" '"' crossarm bird guard adjustable covers go over
the two double phase insulators and the phase
conductor. Saw cut middle adjustable part to
cover the two insulators. Call M&M for
47445 Cvr, Loadbreak Switch DAPLBC extension arms.
For more information see Materials Manual page
05-054-02.
Insulator and Conductor Covers _
Insulator and Conductor Covers are 3-piece
phase and insulator bird guards that cover the -
insulator and conductor to keep birds from
making phase to phase or phase to ground
contact. Different types of insulators require Cat. ID Description CU Code
different covers. The ends of each cover may be Bird Guards for DXarm Vert. Type Insulators
cut to accommodate various wire sizes. 55179 3 PC DXARM F/CFJ Neck Ins DAPDXV3J
These covers are made out of non-conductive, For more information, see the Materials Manual page
UV stable, fire-retardant and flame resistant 05-056-03.
plastic. They may be used on all voltages. Double Crossarm Side Tie Cover. The 3-piece
double crossarm side tie bird guard adjustable
Cat. ID Description CU Code covers go over the two double phase insulators
52971 3 PC F/Vert Clamp Top Ins DAPVIC3CT
5 3 PC LP F/Vert Tie Top Ins DAPVIC3CFJK where conductors are on side tie configuration.
971
56889 3 PC F/Hrz Poly Clamp Top Ins NONE Saw cut middle adjustable part to cover the two
14700 3 PC F/Hrz Por. Clamp Top Ins DAPHIC insulators. Order extension arms for both sides.
The following table matches the appropriate
cover with insulator:
3-piece Cover to Insulator Table I
Cat. ID Description CU Code '
Cat.ID 51464(3 Piece Low Profile)
4732 Por.Vert Tie Top 25kV DIP12
4733 Por.Vert Tie Top 35kV DIP35
4762 Por. Pin Type 4kV DI4C \' ►
4763 Por. Pin Type 11kV DI12F
4797 Por. Pin Type 35kV DI35J
4799 Plastic Pin Type 15kV None
4800 Plastic Pin Type 35kV None
Cat. ID 52971 (3 Piece)
4731 Por.Vert Clamp Top 25kV DIPT12
4735 Por.Vert Clamp Top 35kV DIPT35 56653 3 PC DBL PINS SIDE TIES, DAPDPST3CFJ
ADJ, F/CJF NECK INS
�ppMR,: Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers

11-31-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
3 Piece Low Profile Cover for C, F,J,&K Tie Top Insulators(CID 51464) Assembled Length=80"
3 Piece Cover for Horizontal Insulators(CID14700 for Porcelain and CID 56889 for Poly)Assembled Length=120"
3 Piece Cover for Vertical Clamp Top Insulators(CID52971) Assembled Length=120"
Short Line/Insulator Cover. The 1-piece
short line/insulator bird guard cover goes over
an insulator and a short piece of conductor. The
overall length of this cover is 32".
""Ww DE(Shoe)Cover with a Low-Profile Cover
Deadend Clamp (Shoe) Cover. This cover
goes over the clamp(shoe)reaching from the
last skirt of a polymer insulator to the conductor.
Cat. ID Description CU Code The sizes and style varies according to the age
57296 1 Pc SL Vert F/CFJ-Neck Ins DAPVIC1CFJ and style of the clamp. e
Low-Profile Insulator Cover is a plastic
cover that pops over the top of the insulator
only, allowing the bottom of the porcelain pin- Cat. ID Description Size CU Code
type insulator to remain open to the air. 48621 1 Pc F/Poly DE Ins Up to 2/0 DAPDIC1
50467 1 Pc F/Poly DE Ins 795 DAPDIC795
Useful for existing tie top insulators on double For more information see the Materials Manual
dead end 3-0 corners and taps. page 05-057-01.
Shotgun Installation Tool for 3-piece Covers
may be used while installing Avian covers when
_ the line is hot. Instructions begin on the next
page.
Cat. ID Description CU Code
57116 Cvr, LP F/J NECK Ins DAPLPCFJ
For more information on the 1-piece covers see
Materials Manual page 05-055-01. Cat. ID Description CU
Code
48622 Tool F/Inst 3-Pc Cvr Shtgn Op
None
For more information,see the Tools Manual page
111-14-07.
Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers POMR,

Overhead New 10/21 11-31-05
Pole Top Switch Protection Installation of 3-piece Covers
Steel framed pole top switches make Step 1: Cut the ends off the 2 outside pieces
protecting birds and small animals a unique to fit the conductor size being covered.
issue. The base covers and the disc diverters
have been proven to protect the animals. Conductor Required Cut on
Size Outside Pieces
See page 11-32-02 for the disc diverter. #4 No Cuts Required
2/0 Cutoff 1 st Step of Cover
Wildlife Base Covers are made of plastic in 336 Cutoff 1 st Step of Cover
three lengths; short,med or long. It spans the 795 Cut off 1st&2nd Step of Cover
steel frame between the insulators and is held
on with 2 spring clips.
The clip may be covered with gray vinyl tape
if it falls in the path of a curious small animal.
Length
Step 2: Snap the center piece (sized for the
insulator, see page 11-30-07 for appropriate
cover size) over the 2 outside pieces.
Cat. ID Description CU Code
40593 Base Cvr, Short 15-1/2" DAPPTSAC16 -
40607 Base Cvr, Med 20" DAPPTSAC20
49139 Base Cvr, Long 26" DAPPTSAC26
41041 Spring Clip Assembly None
Two(2)spring clip assemblies are included with
each cover's CU code. For more information, see
the Materials Manual page 05-058-01.
Step 3: Using a shotgun/hotstick place and
push/"snap"the assembled(3 piece) cover over
the insulator and then the conductor.
i
S
y
r
R� Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers
�,o�o�amPa,

11-31-06 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Installation of 3-piece Covers with a Step 5: Move the tool down to the end of the
Shotgun Installation Tool cover arm and pull down, snapping the cover
into place.
Steps 1 and 2: Follow steps shown on the
previous page.
Step 3: Fit the Installation tool into the eye
hole in the top of the center piece. The tool
must be over a recessed area to accommodate
larger conductors.
Step 4: Drawing the tool up tight against the
part for stability,center the cover over the
insulator and pull down over the conductor.
r
Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers W-POO ER.

Overhead New 10/21 11-31-07
Power Fuse Cutout Covers
These cover the top of the power fuse cutout
holder and are securely held in place by a
locking pin,which prevents the cover from
blowing off during strong winds.
Use protective tubing to cover the bare wire
exiting the top of the cutout or use covered wire.
Cat. ID Description CU Code
59754 Power Fuse Cutout Cover DAPPF
-fits all
53966 Lock-pin Replacement none '2?
e�
s
NOTES:
• The power fuse cutout cover is not
manufacturer specific. It fits all the power
fuse cutout holders that are approved in
Standards.
• This CID-59754 is embedded on the CU
Codes of Power Fuse Holders DSMD 15P,
and DSMD35P for new power fuse
installation.
"`ppR Wildlife Protection Materials, Covers
�,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-32-01
Wildlife Protection Materials, Diverters
Bird Diverters Bird Spike Diverters are positioned to deter
birds from landing on certain locations on our
Diverters are installed between phases to crossarms.Note that these spikes may not deter
discourage birds from landing on an unsafe the larger birds and smaller birds may nest in
location on a structure. Ideally,when a diverter them. This should only be used in combination
is installed,leave a safe alternative perch site on with covers with the intent to keep birds from
the same structure if possible. If a safe area is perching which may cause contamination. Some
left open the bird hopefully will choose that spot birds use the spike to build their nests.
to perch.Note that diverters are not always
successful. The preferred method to protect birds Spikes 5"tall and are attached by 10 nails or#8
is to use insulator and conductor covers. wood screws per 2' section.
Triangles should only be used on existing
construction when insulator and conductor
covers cannot be installed. The triangle style has
2 configurations; one is hotstick installed andone can be installed without a hotstick which
requires the work area to be de-energized.This Cat. ID Description CU Code
diverter is installed on with lag screws that come 25633 Bird Spikes 5"x2' DAPBDSPIKE
with the unit. The hotstick type can be installed This CU code does not include the screws or nails.
while the work area is energized using a shotgun
tool to turn the eyebolt securing it to the Fake Horned Owls may be attached to a
crossarm. Each type needs to be ordered by the crossarm or affixed to an area if you believe it
crossarm size it is to be used on. could deter other birds from landing or nesting
in a certain spot. These owls are made of plastic
Note the 5" distance maximum. If exceeded, it and have a head that rotates in the breeze.
will allow birds to perch and do no good.
NOTE. Some assembly may be required.
"IFE
5" Max
� f o •
Train the owl in anti- "y•
bird techniques! 7.
�.
Cat. ID Description CU Code
37407 Diverter f/T-8"Xarm/NHS DAPBD8
37819 Diverter f/7'-8"Xarm DAPBDH8 Owl with Mount Assembly Attached
37864 Diverter f/10'M Xarm DAPBDH10M
36692 Diverter f/10' HD Xarm DAPBDH10H Cat. ID Description CU Code
37293 Diverter f/GX-14'Xarm DAPBDH9 49580 Diverter, Fake Owl None
39764 Diverter f/6"sq Xarm/NHS DAPBD6IN None Mount Assembly w/owl DAPBRDOWL
For more information on the triangle or spikes, see Mount assembly is required prior to installation.
Materials Manual page 05-061-01. Click Here for mount attachment instructions. For
more information see Materials Manual page
05-061-02.
A'Q IDAHO
"ROOMER. Wildlife Protection Materials, Diverters

11-32-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Small Animal Bird Diverter Discs snap Bird Flight Diverter,Target Type is attached
together between the second and third skirt of a directly to the conductor up to 2-1/2" in diameter
vertical or angled insulator to deter animals or by means of a clamping jaw. This device can be
birds from getting into hot areas. This 13-1/2" installed with a hotstick. The total length is
plastic disc is made for pole top switches but 11-1/2".
may be used where it may divert and protect as
needed. Consult the Environmental Department for
recommended placement(location) and use.
Stations uses a larger version of this disk.
Cat. ID Description CU Code -
47583 Wildlife Disc Diverter DAPPTSDISC
For more information see Materials Manual page
05-062-01.
Bird Flight Diverters
Cat. ID Description CU Code
Bird flight diverters are attached directly to the 41701 Diverter, Target DAPFDOT
conductor to help prevent bird collisions with
Idaho Power's power lines. Bird Flight Diverter,FireFly is attached
directly to the conductor up to 2-1/2" in diameter
Bird Flight Diverter(BFD). The BFD is by means of a clamping jaw. This device can be
installed directly on the conductor and held in installed with a hotstick. The FireFly has a
place by means of the Heliformed rod gripping florescent 3-in-1 color flapper that glows in the
section(small end). Order based upon the dark.
conductor size.
Studies have determined the most effective Consult the Environmental Department for
spacing for the bird flight diverters to be 15' recommended placement(location) and use.
apart on the topmost outside conductors.
Consult the Environmental Department for
recommended placement(location) and use.
Cat. ID Conductor Cond. Range CU Code
36395 #4 ACSR 0.250-0.349 DAPFD4
40463 210 ACSR 0.350-0.449 DAPFD20 Cat. ID Description CU Code
46498 336 Al 0.600-0.770 DAPFD336 46619 Diverter, FireFly DAPFDFF
36413 795 Al 0.970-1.050 DAPFD795
For more information see Materials Manual section For more information on the target or FireFly, see
05-063-01. Materials Manual page 05-063-02.
Wildlife Protection Materials, Diverters WWMRa
11IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-32-03
Perches Perch Construction Details
Perches are used in combination with diverters Light-duty crossarm:
to elevate birds above energized wires. • Use 5/8" x 8"Machine bolts in upper set
of mounting holes
Perches are made by the IPCo M&E Shop in a Heavy-duty crossarm:
"Straight"configuration. • Use 5/8" x 8"machine bolts in lower set
of mounting holes
Consult the Environment Department for
recommended placement(location) and use.
II
;7 24"min. �I
above conductor 1
I
X-Arm
o See mounting bar
Anti-split bolt r c detail below for hole
o Nail spacing
3/8"x 2"x 11"bar
drilled for three
5/8"bolts
-1 2" �1
24 �-Cj , 5/8"bolt holes
$�O� 0 6-1/4"
Nail holes
3"
0 1
O 1„
0
Cat. ID Description CU Code
4976 Perch, "T" OBSOLETE DAPTP
4977 Perch, "Straight" DAPST
For more information see Materials Manual section
05-064.
E'er IDAHO
RNPOWER. Wildlife Protection Materials, Diverters

11-32-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Nesting Platforms Top View
Nesting Platforms are used to elevate the nests 0 0 •
of large birds above energized wires or can be
placed on a nearby non-energized pole.
0 2"x 6"timbers 0
for pole-top
Platforms are installed on specific poles where extension
nesting birds affect the reliability of the system.
0 5/8"DA 0
bolts
After installing a next platform it should be
checked periodically to make sure the nesting
materials are not drooping down into our lines 0 0
which may cause an outage.
Consult the Environment Department for 0 0 0
recommended placement(location) and use.
End View
End View
8'to
5'min Anti-Nesting Deflector
Two 2"x 8"x 8' timber:
�i bolted to each side of the pole Anti-Nesting Deflectors are used and
o installed around pole where birds have the
potential to build nests around the
equipment and devices i.e. transformer bank
and primary metering packages. This will
® deflect nesting material to ground and birds
0
will not be able to build its nest. Attach it
around pole using nails.
s�
�..s :'. '
Side View `
Cat. ID Description CU Code
4980 Nesting Platform DAPNB
The platforms are made in the IPCo M&E shop.
For more information see Materials Manual Yt A w=mwIWff_-
section 05-065.
Cat. ID Description CU Code
56465 Nesting Deflector DAPND
Wildlife Protection Materials, Diverters �1POI�N Ra
11IDACORPCIm Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-33-01
Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification
Structure Modification A 10' crossarm can also be used if clearances
allow the arm to be lowered 24" from the top of
Structure modification involves increasing the the pole(preferred).
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground spacing to
make a given structure safe for birds. Refer to
section 11-34 for more detail. 60"
24"
A T-8" crossarm with increased vertical spacing 147
can be used if there is adequate clearance to
ground or other circuits.
60"
40"
18"
0
0
0
60" For Zone 3)Avian Protection, 60"
A 10' apitong deadend crossarm can be used if
clearances allow the arm to be lowered 42" from
the top of the pole.
12"
For Zone 2)Avian Protection, 40"
Normal 3-0 Tangent Framing)See section 11-20.
30" 60'
60"
43"
/7-2,"Min.
60"
For Zone 3)Avian Protection, 60"
For Zone 3)Avian Protection, 60"
E'erAH IDO
�wPOWER Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification

11-33-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
A 48" Fiberglass"V"arm, lowered 10" to Modification Materials
obtain diagonal separation. Refer to page
11-20-12. Vise-top Insulators are made of HDPE material
and are the preferred avian safe construction
option to train covered jumpers. The top allows
the avian protective tubing to be placed on the
12" conductor and run through the top of the
insulator so an insulator cover is not needed.A
Zs°
formed tie is not required
if a vise-top insulator is used. To tighten,use
shotgun stick onto the black ring of the insulator
® and tighten(rotate)until it shears. Once it
shears,that indicates bolt is tight and installed in
proper torque.To loosen,use your socket
60"Min. wrench into the hex head of bolt. Rotate back to
loosen.
To view jumper training
as mentioned on
Retrofit 11-34-05 see
pages
For Zone 2)Avian Protection,40"
An It' crossarm drilled to mount insulators 60" Cat. ID Description CU Code
apart will obtain proper separation. 19166 Ins Vise-Top, 12.5 or 34.5-kV D135V
For more information see Materials Manual page
02-006-01 and Overhead Manual page 09-02-01.
60" 60"
Drill for C
12" 3/4"bolt C
L ual
p
Bond
78"Min.
See section
11-02.
The pole top extension is no
longer a construction option on
60" Zone 3 eagle safe area.
Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification Ra
11IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-33-03
3-0 Deadend - Corner
When Reconstructing
Verify Phasing Matches Existing
Nr A
B
F C
A B C -, r
Round Corner y
(Shown is Preferred) -
J
B
C
F+- ! I
C B A
Square Corner
6"
6"
30"min Note:
Use Vise Top Insulator to hold jumper
if it is too long (optional).
o�
36"min
1
40"min
\ a)
W)
-I
72"min Option a)add Deadend Shoe Cover
Option b)add another Deadend
Insulator
Option c) 18"Guy Link(CID 4725)
E'erAH IDO
�wPOWER Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-34-01
Wildlife Protection, Structure
Modification or Retrofit Details
Tangent Configuration—Crossarm 3-Up
The illustrations on this page show T-8" Avian Materials
crossarm configurations as shown on page Description CU Code
11-33-01. Option 1
Lower arm
Note that no changes are necessary for the Option 2
normal construction is already zone 2 safe. 3-piece Cover DAPVIC3CF or J
Changes are required however,to make this
structure zone 3 or eagle protected.
Option 1. Lower arm as shown on page 11-33- Option 2. Add a 3-piece insulator and
01 if feasible. conductor cover. See Section 11-31.
Zone 2
40"
18"
0
o
0
60"
3-piece Vertical
Insulator Cover
See Section 11-31
Top View
Option 1
Option 2
i''� AH IDO
�wPOWER. Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification or Retrofit Details

11-34-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
3-0 Transformer Framing (Crossarm)
Refer to page 19-03-03. Step 1. Add a 3-piece insulator and conductor
cover. See Section 11-31.It may be necessary to
Note that there are 3 steps to make this structure move the wedge connection out beyond the
avian zone 2 and zone 3 protected. cover.
Step 2. Coverall switches. See Section 11-31.
Step 3. Verify all jumpers are covered with
avian protective tubing or replace with covered
wire. See section 11-31.
Top View
0
O
0
0
d ❑ od
0
3
Avian Materials
d �d Description CU Code
0
3-piece Cover DAPVIC3CF or J
Switch Cover DAPNLBC
Tubing -Comes with Jumper or DAPGT or
DJMPRW4C
Covered Wire
Bushing Cover DAP
Arrester Brkt Cover DAPAB
Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification or Retrofit Details 99POI�N R,,.

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-34-03
100 Amp, 34.5 kV, 3-0 Riser
This page refers to Underground Manual Pole Step 1. Coverall switches. See Section 11-31.
Riser section 63-07. and
To make this structure zone 2 or zone 3 safe the Step 2. Verify all jumpers are covered with
same two steps are required: avian protective tubing or replace with covered
wire. See section 11-31.
Avian Materials
Description CU Code
Switch Cover DAPNLBC
Tubing -Comes with Jumper or DAPGT or DJMPRW4C
Covered Wire
Arrester Brkt Blt Cover(Optional) DAPAB
0 2
1 O
1
0
2
Side View
Tubed or Covered Wire
III
E'erAH IDO
�wPOWER. Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification or Retrofit Details

11-34-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
3-0 Junction (Crossarm)
This illustration refers to the structure on page Step 3. Verify all jumpers are covered with
11-24-04.To make it zone 2 safe the following 3 avian protective tubing. See section 11-31.
steps are required.
Step 1. Cover the top and bottom center To make it zone 3, or"eagle safe", step#4 is
phases with 3 piece covers. See Section 11-31. also required.
It may be necessary to move the wedge Step 4. Lower the top crossarm distance from
connections out beyond the covers. the top of the pole to 24" from the normal 18".
Step 2. Cover the neutral if in the up position.
See Section 11-31.
and �
12"
6"
36"
42"with neutral up
48"different circuits
o
0
60"Min.
See section
11-02.
Preferred Neutral
J Position
Include Step 4
O
12"
1
® 6"
3
36"
42"with neutral up
48"different circuits O
2
O
0 Avian Materials
Description CU Code
3-piece Cover DAPVIC3CF or J
Preferred Neutral Position Switch Cover DAPNLBC
Tubing-Comes with Jumper DAPGT or DJMPRW4C
° or Covered Wire
IDAW
Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification or Retrofit Details "` R,,.

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 1 1-34-055
Angle Configuration Double Deadend 3-Up
These illustrations refer to the structure on page To make this structure zone 2 or zone 3 safe the
11-22-28 which are modified based on avian same steps are required.
zone.
Retrofit as follows:
1) Zone 2 -arm drops 18" from top of pole
1. Replace with vise top insulator.
2. Use tubed wire or covered wire as shown.
' 3. On center phase,use either a)or b) or c).
M.
v b
Avian Materials
Description CU Code
Options a, b, or c Tubing -Comes with Jumper DAPGT or DJMPRW4C
or Covered Wire
'�m` `jp'l s.4 ,�,/�t�f Vise Top Insulator D135V
K DE Shoe Cover DAPD1C1 or 795
DE Polymer Insulator DDL35
� x
2) Zone 3 - arm drops 24" from top of pole
ti'
l
a) Deadend Shoe Cover b) Add Another Deadend Insulator
c) 18" Link+ DE Insulator. Please see 11-33-03.
E'erAH IDO
�wPOWER. Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification or Retrofit Details

11-34-06 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
3-0 Multi Circuit - Crossarm under Crossarm Construction
This illustration refers to page 11-25-02. Step 1. Cover the top and bottom center
phases with 3 piece covers. See Section 11-31.
To make this structure zone 2 or zone 3 safe the Step 2. Cover the neutral if in the up position.
same steps are required. See Section 11-31.
Avian Materials
7-1—'. y I Description CU Code
3-piece Cover DAPVIC3CF or J
0
0 0 0
o4%CW
O
1
a
0
Alternate Neutral
Position
O �
Ir
0 0 0
0
Preferred Neutral
Position
Wildlife Protection, Structure Modification or Retrofit Details "` R,,.

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 11-35-01
Wildlife Protection Guidelines for Retrofitting
Structure Retrofit Requirements
Structures should be retrofitted by the same Double Deadend Pole
criteria as a new or rebuild structure. Isolation
(separation) or insulation(covering), see ♦ Move center jumper to pole top pin insulator
sections 11-33 and 11-34. when possible(preferred)
♦ Use covered wire (preferred)or tube wire
Arresters
Junction Pole
♦ Move arrester as close to the protected
equipment as possible ♦ Move center jumper to pole top pin insulator
♦ Cover caps and bracket bolt when possible
♦ Cover jumpers(top&Bottom) ♦ Replace jumpers either covered(preferred)
or covered wire
Cutout/Switches
Anti-Perching and Nesting Devices
♦ Cover all switches
♦ Cover jumpers or replace using covered wire ♦ Triangles—only on underbuilt
configuration. Using conductor cover is the
Jumper Wires preferred method
♦ Cover all or use covered wire, equipment Depending on the Diameter of the Pole for
to primary Underbuild Only
♦ Any coiled jumpers should be replaced ♦ 1 F medium crossarm may be used
and covered Contact M&Mfor approval and ordering
Grounds/Guys Streamline Configurations
♦ Lowered or covered(guarded) ♦ Use vise-top insulator to train center phase
♦ Guy wire should have guy strain insulator jumpers.
installed
Primary Metering Terminal Cover/Tape
Pole Top Switches
• Use gray compound(AirSeal)to cover
♦ Change out old switch with newer avian PT/CT terminals and wrap with gray tape.
protected CT/PT manufacturer does not recommend
♦ Add covering to base and insulator skirts using any bushing guards.
♦ Use TL lugs instead of bolts at the terminals
Equipment Mounting Arms/Brackets for better connection
♦ Replace any metal with fiberglass or wood
9'QID 0
ELOO ►ER. Wildlife Protection Guidelines for Retrofitting

11-355-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Transformer Retrofit Options Option 2: Existing transformer with no threaded
holes(BOSS)on the tank. Order DCMBK
Move arrester close to the transformer. (NEMA) and DLA CU Codes then retrofit just
like in picture below:
Option 1: Existing transformer with threaded
holes(BOSS)on the tank. '
Order DLA CU Code—OH Page 13-11-01 and
retrofit just like new transformer- see below: I ,
F
If you do not have
these,
then install
arrester as shown.
Option 3: Existing riser arrester configuration.
Order bushing guard—CID 54130 and cover
over with the arrester cap.
•
Retrofit by using
the bushing guard
as shown.
Wildlife Protection Guidelines for Retrofitting Ra
11IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/21 12-00-01
Table of Contents
12- Poletop Switches
12-01-01 Poletop Switches 12-03-01 Poletop Switch Installation
General Information Primary Line Connections
Definitions 12-03-02 Preferred Horizontal Switch with
Hookstick Control
12-02-01 Poletop Switch Types & 12-03-03 Alternate Horizontal Switch with
Applications Hookstick Control
Poletop Switches 12-03-04 Horizontal Switch with Control
Horizontal Switches Rod&Handle
Vertical Tie Switches 12-03-05 Vertical Tie Switch with
Operating Mechanisms Hookstick Control
Deadending 12-03-06 Vertical Tie Switch with Control
12-02-02 Switch Types Rod&Handle
12-02-03 Switch Applications 12-03-07 Vertical Tie Switch on 3-0, 600
Amp Riser(12.5 kV AND 34.5
kV)
E''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Table of Contents

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 12-01-01
Poletop Switches
General Information Definitions
Deadending Hookstick Operable.A 3-0 poletop switch that
is opened or closed by using an extendo or long
The primary conductor may be deadended on the stick.
poletop switch if it is deadended on both sides of
the switch. Load Break Capability. The magnitude of
primary load current that a 3-0 poletop switch
Insulators can interrupt.
The insulators on a poletop switch will be either
porcelain or polymer.
Mounting
All poletop switches are purchased factory
mounted and adjusted on their own base.
Switch Base or Arm
New poletop switches are purchased with
fiberglass bases. However,a steel base is
available.
EMPOMR. Poletop Switches

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 12-02-01
Poletop Switch Types & Applications
Poletop Switches Operating Mechanisms
Poletop switches are a 3-0 sectionalizing device Poletop switches are available with hookstick,
and are used on distribution circuits where all control rod or motor operated mechanisms
phases need to be opened simultaneously. They depending on application.
can continuously carry and interrupt 900 amps
of primary current. Hookstick operating mechanisms are available
for all approved poletop switches. This
A poletop switch utilizes a fiberglass or steel mechanism allows the switch to be operated
base with two switches on one side of the from the ground by means of an"extendo"or
mounting bracket and a single switch on the long stick.
other side.
Control Rod operating mechanisms use a
There are two styles of poletop switches control rod and handle to open or close the
available for new construction; the Horizontal switch. This type of mechanism can be used for
Offset switch and the Vertical Tie switch. all switch applications but should be limited to
switches that are mounted more than 40'from
Horizontal Switches the ground or where conditions make it
impractical to use a hookstick operated
Horizontal poletop switches are the most mechanism.
commonly type of switch.A horizontal switch is
available with three or four deadending positions Motor operating mechanisms are available for
but with only three switches. all types of poletop switches. Switches with
motor operators are generally controlled
All horizontal switches come with brackets for remotely and are installed to improve reliability.
deadending the conductor to the switch. Call the Methods &Materials team for all
applications that require a motor operator.
Vertical Tie Switches
Vertical tie switches are used to tie two Deadending
distribution circuits together that are on the same Poletop switches can deadend up to 8,000 lbs.
pole.The Switch is mounted between the per conductor when equal forces are applied to
circuits. both sides of the switch.
CAUTION. Do not deadend on only one
side of the poletop switch except in slack
span applications where the conductor
tension is less then 500 lbs each.
IDiAHO
NIPMER. Poletop Switch Types & Applications

12-02-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Poletop Switch Types
Horizontal Vertical Tie
Allto
uu
0
0
12.5-kV Hookstick Operated (Cat ID 35095) 34.5-kV Hookstick Operated(Cat ID 42784)
T T
o•
IN III
34.5-kV Hookstick Operated (Cat ID 39028)
-a 34.5-kV with Operating Handle(Cat ID 1656)
0
34.5-kV with Operating Handle(Cat ID 1655)
Cat. ID CU Code Voltage Rating Operation Type Length
3-Position
35095 DPTS15HH 12.5-kV Hookstick Horizontal 7'-0"
1655 DPTS35O6 34.5-kV Control Rod Horizontal 8'-6"
39028 DPTS35HH 34.5-kV Hookstick Horizontal 8'-6"
1656 DPTS35Z6 34.5-kV Control Rod Vertical Tie 8'-6"
42784 DPTS35VH 34.5-kV Hookstick Vertical Tie 8'-6"
4-Position
37376 DPTS35X 34.5-kV Control Rod Horizontal 12'-0"
♦ All switches, with control rod and handle operating mechanism, will be insulated for 34.5-kV.
♦ All hookstick operated switches can be converted to motor operator.
Poletop Switch Types & Applications 99POMR�
no ioncoar c P11v

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 12-02-03
Switch Applications 4-Position Horizontal Poletop Switch
Horizontal Poletop Switches Horizontal poletop switches with control handles
are available in a 4-position configuration(Cat.
Horizontal poletop switches with hookstick ID 37376). There are only three switches,but a
operating mechanisms will be used for all switch position is available for deadending the neutral
applications regardless of existing construction conductor.
to provide 3-0 interrupting capabilities at 12.5—
kV(Cat. ID 35095) and 34.5-kV(Cat. ID NOTE. The 4-position switch is only to
39028),provided the following conditions are be used if the neutral must remain in the
met. primary position.
♦ Load current is less then 900A.
♦ Switch is mounted less the 40'from the
ground(See page 12-03-03 for alternate Vertical Tie Switches
configuration).
♦ Conductor is deadended on both sides of the Vertical tie switches with hookstick
switch or switch mounted below deadend. (Cat. ID 42784)or control handle(Cat. ID 1656)
are only used to tie two circuits together that are
on the same structure. The switch is mounted
Horizontal poletop switches with control between the two circuits.
handles, (Cat. ID 1655)are available for
applications that require mounting the switch Vertical tie switches are all rated at 34.5-kV
such that a hookstick cannot be used. Both types regardless of control mechanism and have a
of switches have the same current ratings and continuous current rating of 900A.
deadending requirements.
CAUTION. All switches with control
handles require a ground grid(See section
20-03).
E''�IDiAHO
EMPMER. Poletop Switch Types & Applications

Overhead Revised 12/22 12-03-01
Poletop Switch Installation
Primary Line Connections 2-Hole Bolted Terminals. Bolted terminals
are used to connect the jumper to the poletop
Fired-on Wedges Use fired-on wedges for all switch. The terminals are available in aluminum
primary line connections, see OH-08-05 and bronze.
CAUTION. Do not use parallel groove Use aluminum terminals, Cat. ID 3 74 1,for 336
clamps for primary line connections. and 795 aluminum jumpers.
Use bronze terminals, Cat.ID 3712 for copper
Stirrups. Stirrups maybe used as long as the jumpers from#4 to 600.
rating of the stirrup is not exceeded. See Section
OH-08-05-03.
Deadend Extensions. When deadending on
the poletop switch,use two deadend insulators 0 0
(Cat. ID 4771)to increase the distance between O O
the primary conductor and the poletop switch 0 0
base.
Cat. ID Description Range
3741 Aluminum Terminal 336-795 AL
3712 Bronze Terminal #4-600 Cu
Jumpers. Aluminum jumpers are normally
used to connect the switch to the primary line.
Copper jumpers may also be used. Jumpers are
Conversion of Hubbell AR Hookstick to a either covered or tubed.
Control Rod. To convert Hubbell AR
hookstick to a control rod, order this kit: Primary Jumper
Conductor (Min)
Cat ID 58265-28-feet Long Kit #4 ACSR #4 ACSR or#4Cu
Cat ID 58266-7-foot pipe for additional length 210 ACSR 210 ACSR or 2/0 Cu
336 AL 336 Al or 4/0 Cu
Hubbell Overtoggle Retrofit Kit 795 AL 795 AL or 500 Cu
Hubbell AR hookstick gang-op switch retro
fit kit converts old roller to a spring
overtoggle style.
Cat.ID 60155
4414
`POWER. Poletop Switch Installation

1 2-03-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Preferred Horizontal Switch with Hookstick Control
See Section
11-30
• it9tl�
o
11 $„
6"
1
48"min.
120"Max
0
ao
40'max.to
60"min.to Ground Line
Neutral
1
Side View
NOTES
♦ Do not install hookstick operated switches more than 40-feet from the ground.
♦ A ground mat is not required for hookstick operated switches.
♦ Use covered wire or bare wire with tubing for jumpers.
Poletop Switch Installation '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/22 1 2-03-03
Alternate Horizontal Switch with Hookstick Control see section
11-30
6"
LLLJ
o
o o o
0
40'max.to
Ground Line
1
60"min.to
Neutral
1
Side View
NOTES
♦ Do not install hookstick operated switches more than 40-feet from the ground.
♦ A ground mat is not required for hookstick operated switches.
♦ Use covered wire or bare wire with tubing for jumpers.
"`�R� Poletop Switch Installation

12-03-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Horizontal Switch with Control Rod & Handle See Section
11-30
6°
1
610 min.to
Neutral
Approx.
10' '� Insulated Rod
, Section
NOTE. Construction details may vary.
See the installation instructions and
drawings supplied with the switch.
Approx.
10,
5i8 3"Approximately
bolts
\
Galvanized
control pipe
Approx.
10,
CAUTION. Effectively
ground operating
rod and handle.
o Clearance
42"Min
o
NOTE. Drawing is not
to scale.
Side View
NOTES
♦ Operating handle mounting height may be increased in heavy snow-pack areas or to clear obstacles.
♦ When mounting switch above 44',another section of control rod must be added.Equally space Guide Brackets.
♦ See Section 20 for bonding and grounding details.
Poletop Switch Installation '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/22 12-03-05
Vertical Tie Switch with Hookstick Control see section
11-30
0
30"
IN �
30"
1
8 oa
®0
0
0
48"
® o o
0
t,z �>-J
Side View
NOTES
♦ Do not install hookstick operated switches more than 40'from the ground.
♦ A ground mat is not required for hookstick operated switches.
♦ Use covered wire or bare wire with tubing for jumpers.
"`�R� Poletop Switch Installation

12-03-06 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Vertical Tie Switch with Control Rod & Handle see section
11-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 e
30"
NOTE. Construction details may vary.
f See the installation instructions and
drawings supplied with the switch.
300"
7
48" Insulated Rod
Section
Approx.
19
Approx.
10,
0
0
Approx.
10' CAUTION. Effectively
ground operating
rod and handle.
� o
o
a 42"Min
NOTE. Drawing is not
to scale.
v
Side View
NOTES
♦ Operating handle mounting height may be increased in heavy snow-pack areas or to clear obstacles.
♦ When mounting switch above 44',another section of control rod must be added.Equally space Guide Brackets.
♦ See Section 20 for bonding and grounding details.
Poletop Switch Installation '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/22 1 2-03-07
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Tie Switch on 3-0, 600 Amp Riser
See Section
(12.5 kV and 34.5 kV) 11-30
12"
0
6"
Jumper Main Line
DDJ336 ...... 336
DDJ795 ...... 795
60"Min.
o
0 0 0
DPTS35VH
A o 0 0
0
O
Grounding Stud
(Cat.ID 4390) DTM...
DLAR15VT
72"(12.5 W) DLAR35VT
78"(34.5 W)
6"
DPRP5 or
DPRP6
NOTES
♦ Install arrester brackets and arresters as shown.
♦ DDJ jumper codes include stud disconnect and covered wire.
♦ See Underground Manual63-08-06.
♦ See Section 20 for bonding and grounding details.
EM�Ra Poletop Switch Installation

Overhead Revised 10/20 13-00-01
Table of Contents
13- Cutouts & Arresters
13-01-01 Switch Types&Application 13-02-01 Loadbuster Tool Operation
100 Amp Cutouts Loadbuster Tools
Non-Loadbreak Cutouts Step 1 -Placement
Loadbreak Cutouts 13-02-02 Step 2-Open the Circuit
Linkbeak Cutouts Step 3 -Disengaging the Tool
13-01-02 Protecting Fused Cutout Body 13-02-03 Step 4-Resetting the Tool
(Doors) Recommended pole and bucket
Solid-Blade Disconnects positions
300 Amp
13-01-03 600 Amp 13-10-01 Distribution Arresters
In-Line Disconnects General Information
600 Amp In-Line Tension Definitions
13-01-04 600 Amp"V" Type
Bypass Switches 13-11-01 Arrester Types and Application
13-01-05 Bypass Switches for Underground Distribution Arrester
Application with Sectionalizers TYPE 1 (SPU)Arresters
200 Amp Power Fuse Holders 13-11-02 TYPE 2
Installation
13-11-03 Installation and Connection of
Arrester w/SPU
Mounting Brackets
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
M,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Revised 08/22 13-01-01
Switch Types & Application
100 Amp Cutouts Loadbreak Cutouts
Non-Loadbreak Cutouts The loadbreak cutout is a fused disconnect
with loadbreak arc chutes(delrin acetal
Non-loadbreak cutouts are silicone rubber. They resin)that have the capability of interrupting
provide fusing and disconnection for loads up to 100-amps of primary load current. The
amps. Maximum interruption of 16,000A bodies are made of silicone rubber/polymer.
(Asymmetrical).
NOTE. The non-loadbreak cutout can be Application
opened under load using a loadbuster tool. The loadbreak cutout is used only for
underground risers and primary taps at
Application
Non-loadbreak cutouts are used on all conventional
overhead distribution transformers, as bypass fuses
on reclosers& sectionalizers with current<100 O
amps and to fuse underground risers and all primary
taps on the 7.2/12.5 kV system. The cutout body is
compatible with ELF fuse; see
Overhead Manual 14-04-01.
19.9/35 kV.
100 amp Loadbreak Cutouts
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
16639 35 kV 100A Cutout DSLBS35
O
NOTE. Avian switch cover is
embedded in the switch CU code.
Linkbreak Cutouts
NOTE.The fuseholders of approved Linkbreak cutouts are
cutouts are interchangeable. used on capacitor bank
NOTE. *For jumpers 2/0 or larger installations. They are a
the PG connector can be removed fused disconnect switch
with a lever arm on the
and replaced with a TLS lug. lower portion of the
switch.
100 amp Non-Loadbreak Cutouts Linkbreak Cutouts
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
42188 15 kV 100A DSCS151 50045 15 kV 100A DSLKBS151
42189 35 kV 100A DSCS351 55500 35 kV 100A DSLKBS351
NOTE. Avian switch cover is embedded in NOTE. Avian switch cover is
the switch CU code. embedded in the switch CU code.
OWN—POWER. Switch Types & Application

13-01-02 Reviewed 08/22 Overhead
Protecting Fused Cutout Body (Doors) This information was included in the
November 2012 issue of In The Know#40.
When loadbreak and non-loadbreak cutouts on
seasonal transformer banks and open-fused bypass Solid Blade Disconnects
cutouts are left open,they are exposed to the weather
and can collect rain and freeze. This deteriorates the The 300 amp solid-blade disconnect
tube's fiber material,thus affecting the interrupting switch is a non-loadbreak device with a
capability over time; see Photo 1 below. continuous current rating of 300 amps. It
Best practice is to protect the fuse tube's integrity of must be operated with the line de-energized
seasonal banks and normally open bypass switches or with a loadbuster tool.
of line equipment by gathering the fuse tubes,then
hang and tie them in an upright position on the Application
equipment mounting bracket or at the neutral
location. Store them on the pole with a hook screw The 300 amp disconnect is used as a
or eye nut and hang upright using zip-tie, see Photo sectionalizing switch on the feeder where
2 below. the load current is less then 300 amps.
Disconnects may be installed to provide a
visible open for clearances beyond some
reclosers and sectionalizers.
O
Silicone Rubber
Note. For 2/0 or larger jumpers, this connector
may be removed and replaced with a TLS lug
300 amp Solid-Blade Disconnects
Photo 1—Do not leave cutout doors Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
open for an extended time.
Silicone
< < 45101 15 W 300A Disconnect DSSB153S
I 48311 35 W 300A Disconnect DSSB353S
NOTE. The blades of approved
300 amp disconnects are
interchangeable.
NOTE. Avian switch cover is
included in the switch CU code.
For switch disconnects to be mounted on a
- crossarm, order the mounting bracket.
Photo 2—Store bypass in upright position
Switch Types & Application '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/22 13-01-03
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code NOTE. Avian switch cover is included
40106 X-arm Cutout Mnt Brkt 5"Blt DCMBK in the switch CU code.
50979 X-arm Cutout Mnt Brkt 10" BIt DCMBK10
See Overhead Manual 07-06-03 for more details. In-Line
Disconnects
The 600-and 900-amp solid-blade disconnect
switch is a non-loadbreak device with a continuous The 600 amp In-Line
current rating of 600-and 900-amps. It must be Tension Disconnect is a full tension
operated with the line de-energized or using a in-line switch. It may be used for a recloser
loadbuster tool. This switch does not have a by-pass switch in place of the solid-blade
removable blade. cutout switch.
Application NOTE. This disconnect may be used as an
alternate construction on recloser 336 or 795
This device is used to provide sectionalizing, conductors only. It requires a clamp top
bypassing and visual opens for feeders, large insulator and a trunion to prevent twisting.
underground risers and 3-0 reclosers.A 600-amp
switch is also required on the 7.2 kV side of step
transformers that are 1500 kVA or larger. r
The 900-amp switch is for special applications when
the load current exceeds 600-amps.
CAUTION:Many of the other feeder components are
rated for 600-amps only.
These disconnects are acceptable for substation get-
600 Amp In-Line Switch
away risers. Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
1460* In-Line Disconnect Switch DSSBL156
DSSBL356
�r Used for either 12.5 and 34.5 kV
f�
Application
In-line disconnect switches are used to
provide a sectionalizing point on the
primary distribution line or to provide a tie
point between feeders.
The switch can be closed "hot" to bypass a
recloser or pick up loan in the event of a
15 kV Polycrete/silicone 35 kV Silicone recloser failure.
The 15 kV version can have a polymer concrete The switch is a loadbuster compatible
(polycrete)or silicone body. The 35 kV version only device capable of breaking full load
has the silicone body. currents; use the appropriate loadbuster
tool. Note that older versions of this switch
600-or 900-amp Solid-Blade Disconnects may not have loadbreak hooks and are
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code notlLoadbuster compatible.
Polycrefe/Silicone
50047 15 kV 600A Disconnect DSSBS1560H When the recloser is back in service
or DSSBS156UG operating in parallel with the switch, you
52752 35 kV 600A Disconnect DSSBS356 can open it without the Loadbuster. Be
60077 15 kV 900A Disconnect DSSB1590H sure to confirm the recloser is closed
before opening the switch.
"`�R� Switch Types & Application

13-01-04 Revised 01/16 erhead
The 600 amp "V"type disconnect is a non-
loadbreak switch capable of deadending primary
conductor.
00
0
ao
O
o D
0
e
0
0
600 amp "V" Disconnects
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
1476 15 kV 600A Disconnect* DSSBD156
1478 35 kV 600A Disconnect* DSSBD356
55115 15 kV 600A Poly Disc DSSBDP156
55116 35 kV 600A Poly Disc DSSBDP356
'Porcelain
Application
The"V"disconnect is most commonly used for 600
amp underground risers where there is not room to
set a switch arm.The conductor is deadended
directly to the switch. For additional information see
Underground Manual 63-08.
NOTE. The"V"switch will deadend
conductors up to 795 Al at 4100 lbs.
D
Switch Types & Application POWER.

Overhead Revised 08/22 13-01-05
Bypass Switches Cat. ID Description CU Code
The 600 amp regulator bypass switch is used to 49028 15 W Bypass<600 DSRB15649028 15 W Bypass>600 DSRB156H
bypass and isolate voltage regulators for 49037 34.5 W Bypass<600 DSRB356
maintenance and shutdowns 49037 34.5 W Bypass>600 DSRB356H
AO Source Load
Application
Regulator — The bypass switch can be used for pole or
ypass rack mounted regulators.
® ° For the rack mounted applications the
u ® bypass switch is mounted to the standoff
ArrE r/ bracket attached to the timber arms.
\— For additional information see Ovcrhead
N Syste Manual 16.
m _
Neutral For pole mounted regulators,the bypass
switch is also mounted on a standoff bracket
which is attached directly to the pole.The
bracket gives the switch the proper angle.
For additional information see Overhead
0 0
Manual 16.
0 0
0 0 0 0 Bypass Switches for Underground
0 Application with Sectionalizers
Bypass Switches for Underground Application
0 0 0 0 with Sectionalizers
Cat. ID Description CU
0 0
Code
® 0 ® 55050 15 W Bypass F/Risers DSB156
® o ® 55051 35 W Bypass F/Risers DSB356
See also the Underground Manual 63-08-05.
This switch may be used for a combination
disconnect and bypass switch. It is installed on a
bracket that provides the proper angle for long stick
operation.
0
Regulator
Bypass Switches
0 0 0 0
0
0 0
"`�R� Switch Types & Application

13-01-06 Revised 08/22 --Overhead
200 Amp Power Fuse Holders NOTE. We are transitioning to a 2-hole
The S&C SMD-20 power-fuse holders are used in NEMA terminal from PG clamp;top and
conjunction with SMU-20 power fuses.A detailed bottom.The S&C power fuse unit is not a
discussion on this and other power fuse mounting loadbreak device,however it comes with
options appears in the Overhead Manual 14-05. arching horns for use with loadbuster tools.
Application OBSOLETE
Power fuses are used mainly on the following 200 amp SMD-20 Power Fuse Holder Porcelain
primary distribution system locations: Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
♦ Underground riser locations where fuses 1474 15 kV 200A SMD-20 DSMD15
are larger than 100-amp 1475 35 kV 200A SMD-20 DSMD27
♦ Line tap fuse protection in
Red Risk Zones
♦ Underground riser protection in Red Risk
Zones
�s* .
End Fitting
SMU-20
Power
Fuse Unit
r/ (ordered
separately)
low
200 amp SMD-20 Power Fuse Holder Polymer
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
54124 15 kV 200A SMD-20 DSMD15P
54125 35 kV 200A SMD-20 DSMD35P
Information for porcelain fuse holders moved to
the next page.
The CU Codes include two PG clamps, Cat ID
59803, for use on small riser cables and line tap
protection on 2/0 and smaller.
Switch Types & Application MPO Rn..
A� aRP—P,

Overhead Revised 08/21 13-02-01
Loadbuster Tool Operation
Loadbuster Tools Follow these steps for using the loadbuster tool
onto a cutout, switch,disconnect, or powerfuse:
The loadbuster tool can be used on all
non-loadbreak cutouts, disconnects and Placement
powerfuses equipped with attaching hooks.
1. Hook the Loadbuster D-ring onto the
The loadbuster tools are used on the 12.5-kV attachment hook located onto the far side
and 34.5-kV systems and where the load current and top of the cutout,disconnect or switch.
is less than 600-amps. (By hooking the D-Ring of the tool away
from the operator, it does not obscure the
Refer to Tools Manual 111-22-01 for CIDs and line of vision with the loadbreak tool).
other information.
2. Swing the loadbuster into the fuse until the
loadbuster pull ring hook latches onto the
pull ring of the fuse. The pull ring latch will
spring back and lock in place when it has
been fully inserted. The loadbuster is now
connected across the upper contact of the
switch, cutout, disconnect or powerfuse.
0
'A-
O _e ;
A
O
"`POM R� Loadbuster Tool Operation

13-02-02 Revised 08/21 Overhead
Open the circuit Disengaging the Tool
3. To open the circuit,pull the loadbuster down 4. To detach the loadbuster tool after the circuit
with a firm steady pull until the tool is has been interrupted,just raise it up slightly
extended to its maximum length. and roll it upward.This allows the latch to
The only indication that switch has opened disengage from the fuse pull ring and fall
will be the sound of the loadbuster tripping. fully opened.
5. Do not push the fuse up so far that it comes
in contact with the upper contacts of the
switch. This will cause a re-strike and
uncontrolled arc.
Loadbuster Tool Operation '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 08/21 13-02-03
Resetting the Tool
6. To reset the loadbuster tool,extend the top
section slightly and lift the resetting latch =
with your thumb.With the latch up,pull the
tool out completely until the trigger resets. '
7. To check for proper resetting, extend the top
of the Loadbuster tool about 3"by hand. The
resistance of the spring should be felt and
increases the further you pull.
e"ing Latch
JIMA
r
i
I
i
tir
lil
�I I
i
f
1
� I
1
Recommended pole and bucket positions
for using the Loadbuster tool
`POWER. Loadbuster Tool Operation

Overhead Reviewed 08/21 13-10-01
Distribution Arresters
General Information Arrester Ratings.Arresters are rated based on
the MCOV.This rating does not correspond
MOV type arresters are installed on all overhead directly with the system operating voltage.
transformers and equipment to provide
protection from surges and over-voltages, The following table indicates the proper arrester
voltage transients from faults and customer for each primary voltage.
loads, and lightning.
Primary Voltage Rated Voltage MCOV
Definitions 7.2/12.5-kV 10-kV 8.4-kV
14.4/24.9-kV 18-kV 15.3-kV
Ground lead disconnect(GLD)is a 19.9/34.5-kV 27-kV 22.0-kV
mechanism for removing the ground connection
from an arrester when the arrester is damaged by Grounding.Proper operation of arresters
a lighting strike or sustained power frequency requires that the GLD or isolator is connected to
over-voltage and current. ground. For more information on grounding see
Section 20.
Margin of protection is the difference between
the arrester voltage response curve and the Mounting.Arresters are generally mounted as
protected device damage voltage curve fora close as possible to the equipment being
given impulse wave. protected.Arresters are mounted on device arms,
NEMA brackets or on transformer tanks.
Maximum continuous operating voltage
(MCOV)refers to the arrester's maximum NOTE. For all distribution equipment
continuous operating voltage rating.The MCOV that requires a fused disconnect and an
must be greater than the maximum continuous arrester,the arrester will be mounted on
voltage of the feeder. the load side of the disconnect.
Metal oxide varister(MOV) is a gapless Lead Length.Primary lead length should be
arrester design incorporating metal oxide valve keep as short as possible. The grounding lead is
elements with superior protective characteristics. also included in the overall lead length.
�POR. Distribution Arresters

Overhead Revised 10/20 13-11-01
Arrester Types and Applications
Distribution Arresters senses the current flow through the arrester
and monitors its thermal loading. When
Distribution arresters are required on the source the connected arrester reaches its load limit,
or primary side of all distribution transformers, the SPU trips, disconnecting the arrester
underground risers and capacitor banks. before it overloads preventing catastrophic
Arresters are required on both the source and failure of the arrester. The SPU trips and the
load side of all reclosers, sectionalizers, red indicator pops out from the bottom.
regulators and step transformers.
There are two types of arresters that are
available:
TYPE 1
Arresters with SPU are only used in Red Risk
Zone 3 of WFM(Wildfire Mitigation)program.
e T6,�
The arrester and
the SPU are
fully operational.
The SPU has tripped
and disconnected
the arrester.
Distribution Arresters w/SPU The SPU shall be installed in vertical position or
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code inclined by max.45 degrees only as shown in
58877 Arstr SPU 12.5-kV DLA15SPU the photos. Horizontal installation is not
58878 Arstr SPU 24.9-kV DLA25SPU recommended and may result in malfunction of
58879 Arstr SPU 34.5-kV DLA35SPU the SPU. Provide 6"of slack on yellow green
All CU codes include bushing guard &avian bolt
ground wire at bottom of SPU for proper
cover.
operation.
The arrester SPU is an MOV arrester with
spark prevention unit(SPU). The SPU
`PWER, Arresters Types and Applications

13-11-02 Revised 07/20 Overhead
TYPE 2
Heavy duty arresters are used for all applications
outside of Red Risk Zone 3.
O
12.5-kV Arrester
24.9-kV Arrester For maintenance applications arrester kits can be
ordered which contain the mounting bracket,
ground strap, 18" lead wire and bird guard.
Transformer Mounted Arresters
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
1490 Arstr Xfmr 12.5-kV DLA15B
40094 Arstr Xfmr 24.9-kV DLA25B
13500 Arstr Xfmr 34.5-kV DLA35B
34.5-kV Arrester
Distribution Arresters bbb
Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
1488 Arstr HD 12.5-kV DLA15
1492 Arstr HD 24.9-kV DLA25
1495 Arstr HD 34.5-kV DLA35
All CU codes include an avian bolt cover.
Installation
Switch Arms. On older types of reclosers, �
sectionalizers and capacitors, HD arresters are
mounted on the switch arm.
For retrofitting applications where arresters are
located on the switch arm,lower them to the
rack.
Arrester Types and Applications "` R,,

Overhead Revised 12/21 13-11-03
Installation and connection of arrester Mounting Brackets
w/ SPU
There are two types of mounting brackets that
Mounting procedure are available for maintenance or for retrofitting
1. Install the insulating bracket to a existing installations,NEMA and 14-1/2"
horizontal surface,pole,cross-arm or transformer mounting bracket.
similar as required. The NEMA bracket, shown right,
2. Install the surge arrester on the bracket is used to mount an arrester or a
(on the upper part of the bracket). solid blade switch on a distribution
3. Connect the top side of the SPU(the crossarm with dimensions of 4"X5"
part with brass connection)with the or smaller. This bracket can be used
surge arrester(bottom or ground side) for new or existing installations.
using the delivered bolt and/or metal
brackets through the insulation bracket.
4. Connect the ground cable of the SPU to f
the ground connection at the bracket's
opposite side or directly to the ground. IL
The SPUs must be solidly connected to
the equipment or system ground with a Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
possibly low impedance 40106 NEMA Brkt DCMBK
#4 AWG
Covered Wire The 14-1/2" transformer mounting bracket,
T shown below,is used to attach a distribution
arrester to the tank of an overhead distribution
CID 54130 transformer.
NOTE.This bracket should only be used
to retrofit existing transformers.All new
transformers will come with arresters
already attached to the tank.
SPU
Cat. ID
6"
#6 AWG Cu
u
u
IMPORTANT NOTE:When storing,handling,or
transporting a SPU Arrester, everyone must
comply with the following:
Short Descrip CU Code
♦ Have a copy of the required exemption
tion
package documentation. Secure a copy 1480 Xfmr Mnt Brkt,14-1/2" none
from your respective warehouse.
♦ Store and transport the SPU arrester in
the original packaging.
RNPOW R� Arresters Types and Applications
a.,oACORP­Pa.Y

Overhead Revised 09/21 14-00-01
Table of Contents
14- Overhead Distribution Protection
14-01-01 System Protection 14-03-01 OBSOLETE—ELF Current
Limiting Fuses
14-02-01 Expulsion Fuses
General 14-04-01 ELF Current Limiting Fuses
Fuse Link Make-up General
How a Fuse Link Works Application
Fuse Link Types 14-04-02 Installation,Maintenance,and
14-02-02 Button-Head Fuse Links Removal
Fuse Link Selection Additional Information
14-02-03 Fuse Link Application
Coordination Principles 14-05-01 Power Fuses
14-02-04 Transformer Fusing Application
Wye-connected Transformers 14-05-02 Power Fuse Operation
14-02-05 Delta-connected Transformers 14-05-03 Power Fuse Mounting Options
Special Fusing Instructions for
Delta Banks with Mixed 14-08-01 Overhead Fault Indicators
Transformer Sizes General
Closed Delta Banks Definitions
14-02-06 Capacitor Bank Fusing 14-08-02 Types of Overhead Fault
Fusing Schedule for Shunt Indicators
Capacitor Banks Table Overhead FCI Specifications
Current Limiting Fuses
14-09-01 Overhead Line Monitors
General
Overhead Line Monitor Types
14-09-02 Placement
Installation
`p" AHO
pR. Table of Contents
­­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 02/11 14-01-01
System Protection
General
The protection of Idaho Power's distribution
system relies on how the system is designed. To
attain best protection and coordination the
distribution designer must consult their field
engineer for the type/rating of protective devises
including fuse sizing.
E''� AH IDO
EMPOWER. Distribution System Protection

Overhead Revised 09/21 14-02-01
Expulsion Fuses
General Although the auxiliary fuse tube aids in
extinguishing the arc and in interrupting the
The most common type of fuse cutouts on the current, especially on low-current faults,the fuse
overhead distribution system is designed to use cutout is still the basic interrupting device.
expulsion type fuses outside of Red Risk Zone
(RRZ). Fuse Link Types
Fuse Link Make-up Two categories of fuse links are currently
specified for use on the distribution system:
A fuse link consists of four basic parts;button,
fusible element, auxiliary fuse tube,and a ♦ Type T links are obsolete and should be
leader; as shown below. replaced with K type.
Button Auxiliary Fuse ♦ All new K-type fuse links will have a silver
Leader element.
K—fast
KS or MS—very slow
Fusible Element
Figure 1: Basic Parts of a Fuse Link Button-head fuse links are installed in the fuse
barrel of pole-mounted cutouts. They are used to
Fuse link designs vary to provide for different provide overload and fault protection to
current ratings and time elements. It is primarily overhead primary lines and equipment.
the length and the cross-sectional area of the
fusible element that determines these All the fuse links have removable button heads
parameters. Each fuse link is designed with to permit their use in 35 kV cutouts that have an
fusible elements of given materials,length, and arc shortening rod.
cross section. Each is rated to carry specific load
current and to melt in a definite amount of time Button-head fuse links are also used in cutouts at
when carrying a specific fault current. riser poles to protect underground cables and
equipment; see Underground Distribution
How a Fuse Link Works Manual.
As a fault current passes through the fuse link, 3/4"Diameter Washer
the generated heat melts the fusible element, and
heats the auxiliary fuse tube and fiber liner of E 5-3/8°�
the cutout tube to emit de-ionizing gases.When E 23"Min.
the fusible link has melted, an arc is created.It is 1 through 50 Amps
stretched,compressed, and cooled within the
tube. During this process, some of the particles, .A--3/4"Diameter Washer
which would tend to sustain the fault-current
arc, are carried away with the gas;which E 5-3/8"
escapes from one or both ends of the tube. Both E 23"Min. �J
single and double venting cutouts are used on 65 through 100 Amps
the distribution system. Successful extinction of
the arc depends upon the expulsion process. Figure 2 Button-head Fuse Links
"`ppRR Expulsion Fuses

14-02-02 Revised 09/21 Overhead
The following table lists all the available button- Trip-O-Link fuse links are obsolete.They were
head fuse links. used in Trip-O-Link cutouts on the overhead
♦ All"K"fuse links have silver elements. primary system.Trip-O-Link cutouts were
♦ The"KS"fuse links have tin elements. replaced with cutouts that use button-head fuse
links.
NOTE.Use SMU-20 Fuse Units with SMD
power fuse mountings for applications
requiring fuse links larger than 100 amps, Figure 3 Trip-O-Link Fuse Link
OH taps and risers within RRZ.
Table 1 Button-head Fuse Links Fuse Link Selection
Cat. ID Rating Overload Ampacity Correct fuse link selection requires knowledge
Type KS- Tin Link of the system characteristics and the equipment
6101 1 KS 1.5 to be protected.
6102 2KS 3.0
6103 3KS 4.5
Type K— Silver Link When installing expulsion fuses in-line for
35286 6K 9 sectionalizing purposes, consider the following
35287 8K 13 parameters:
35288 10K 15
35289 12K 20 ♦ The normal and the overload currents of the
35290 15K 23 circuit including sustained harmonics.
35291 20K 31 ♦ Transient currents of the circuit such as
6111 25K 37 transformer magnetizing currents,inrush
6112 30K 42
6113 40K 51 currents, etc.
6114 50K 66 ♦ Burn-down characteristics of the conductors.
6115 65K 84 ♦ Coordination with other protective devices.
6116 80K 105
6117 100K 115 When installing expulsion fuses for equipment
Capacitor Chance Type K— Silver Link protection, consider the following parameters:
50152 Cap Only 8K 13
50153 Cap Only 10K 15 ♦ The overload and the short-time capabilities
50154 Cap Only 15K 23 of the equipment.
50155 Cap Only 20K 31 ♦ The transient currents of the circuit such as
50156 Cap Only 25K 37 inrush current, lightning surges, etc.
50157 Cap Only 30K 42
50158 Cap Only 40K 51 ♦ The relative importance of protecting the
50159 Cap Only 50K 66 equipment versus providing service
50160 Cap Only 65K 84 continuity.
50161 Cap Only 80K 105 ♦ Coordination with other protective devices.
NOTE. Silver links and tin links have roughly the
same overload ampacity ratings. The values in this When installing expulsion fuses outside of RRZ
table should be used for both. for capacitor protection, consider the above
For more information, see Materials Manual 09- equipment protection parameters and use the
05. proper Capacitor Only Chance fuses, see OH
14-02-06,Table 4 Fusing Schedule for Shunt
Capacitor Banks for the fusing schedule; RRZ
and outside of RRZ.
Capacitor bank CU codes include the Chance
fuses.
Expulsion Fuses '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 09/21 14-02-03
Fuse Link Applications The minimum melting and the maximum
clearing time have been determined from test
When two or more fuse links, or other protective data and plotted on time-current curves such as
devices,are applied to a system,the nearest the one shown here.
device to the fault on the supply side is the
"protecting"device and the one next nearer the 300
00
supply is the"backup"or"protected"device.
100
One essential rule for application of fuse links 60
states that the maximum clearing time of the 40
protecting link shall not exceed 75%of the 30
20
minimum melting time of the protected link.
This principle assures that the protecting link 10
will interrupt and clear the fault before the 6
6 Maximum Clearing Time
protected link is damaged. 0 4
c> 3
CD
Also,the load current at the point of application CD
must not exceed the continuous current rating of P s
the link. Exceeding this rating may cause .6
damage to the link and lead to its unexpected .4
operation. .2
NOTE.This 75%rule does not apply to
.os
silver link fuse elements. .06
.04
.03
Minimum
Coordination Principles .02 Melting Time
.01
0 000 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0
♦ Melting time—The interval
N fMVLo r,-O O 000 CD o 0 0 0
between the N co V LLB F 0 0 CD
fault-current initiation and the start of the Current(amperes) N M n
arc. Figure 4 Typical Time-Current Curves
♦ Arcing time—The time duration of the arc is
called. Time-current curves, as shown above,are used
to coordinate the timing of the various protective
♦ Clearing time—The sum of the melting time devices for a given circuit.
and the arcing time.
Fuse link coordination can be achieved using
time-current curves, coordination tables, or
coordination software.
Consider the following guidelines when
coordinating protective devices:
♦ The protecting device must clear a
permanent or temporary fault before the
protected device, or back-up device,
interrupts or locks out the circuit.
♦ Outages caused by permanent faults must be
restricted to the smallest section of the
system for the shortest possible time.
�POR. Expulsion Fuses

14-02-04 Revised 09/21 Overhead
Transformer Fusing C
B
Fuse 1-0 and 3-0 transformers as shown in A
the following tables. N
Wye-connected Transformers.Table 2
shows the fusing schedule for transformers
with wye-connected primary windings. For @h PHye-Delta 3ph Wye-Wye
primary step transformers, contact your
field engineer for proper fuse size and type. Ppen Wye-open Delta
See Overhead Manual 14-04-01 for more
information on ELF Fuses used in RRZs.
Fusing Schedule for Wye-connected Transformers
kVA Primary Voltage —RRZ*Fuse Equivalent
10 30 2.4/4.2 kV 7.2/12.5 kV 14.4/24.9 kV 19.9/34.5 kV 7.2/12.5W 14.4/24.9W 19.9/34.5W
Standard Transformers
15 45 10K 3KS 2KS 1KS 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
25 75 15K 6K 2KS 2KS 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
50 150 30K 12K 6K 3KS 12 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
75 225 50K 15K 8K 6K 18 ELF 8 ELF 6 ELF
100 300 65K 25K 12K 8K 20 ELF 12 ELF 8 ELF
167 500 100K 40K 20K 12K 30 ELF 18 ELF 12 ELF
333 1000 150E 65K 40K 25K 65 ELF** 30 ELF** 25 ELF**
500 1500 250E 100K 50K 40K 80 ELF** § §
1500 4500 - t 125E 100K 125 E § t
2500 7500 - t 200E 150E 200 E 150 E t
Non-standard Transformers
1 3 1 KS - - - 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
1'/2 4'/2 1 KS - - - 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
3 9 2KS 1 KS - - 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
5 15 3KS 1 KS 1 KS 1 KS 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
7'/2 22'/2 6K 2KS 1 KS - 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
10 30 8K 2KS 1KS 1KS 6 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
30 90 20K 8K 3KS 2KS 8 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
37'/2 112'/2 25K 10K 3KS 3KS 8 ELF 6 ELF 6 ELF
250 750 125E 50K 25K 20K 50 ELF 25 ELF 18 ELF
667 2000 - 125E 65K 50K 125 E § §
833 2500 - 125E 80K 65K 125 E § §
1250 3750 - 200E 100K 80K 200 E § §
*Red Risk Zone (RRZ)
**ELF Double Barrel configuration
t The rated load current exceeds fusing capabilities.A recloser or other device is recommended for this
application.
§The load current exceeds ELF Fuse capabilities. Please contact Methods and Materials for SMU fuse sizing.
IDAM
Expulsion Fuses "` R„

Overhead Revised 09/21 14-02-05
Delta-connected Transformers.Table 3 shows the fusing schedule for transformers with delta-connected
primary windings including those serving motor loads. Delta-connected transformers are not standard for
new construction.
Table 2
Fusing Schedule for Delta-connected Transformers
kVA 2.4 kV Delta 12.5 kV Delta
10 30 Fig.A& B Fig. C Fig.A&B Fig. C
1 3 1KS 1KS - -
1'/z 4'/2 1KS 2KS - -
3 9 2KS 3KS 1KS 1KS
5 15 3KS 6K 1KS 1KS
7'/z 22'/2 6K 10K 1KS 2KS
10 30 8K 12K 2KS 2KS
15 45 10K 20K 2KS 3KS
25 75 15K 30K 3KS 6K
30 90 20K 40K 6K 8K
37'/2 112'/2 25K 50K 6K 10K
50 150 30K 65K 6K 12K
75 225 50K 80K 10K 15K
100 300 65K 100K 12K 20K
167 500 100K 150E 20K 40K
250 750 125E 200E 30K 50K
500 1500 - - 65K 100K
Special Fusing Instructions for Delta Example.Refer to Fig. C; if this is a 12.5
Banks with Mixed Transformer Sizes kV bank with a 15 kVA transformer
connected to AO and BO, a 15 kVA
Open Delta Banks.Fuse the two phases to the transformer connected to,BO& CO and a
larger transformer and the third phase to the 37 '/2 kVA transformer connected to AO and
smaller transformer with fuses sized for 1-0 CO.What fuse sizes should be installed?
transformers of their respective sizes. Answer.Aft and CO should have a 6K fuse;
Example.Refer to Fig. B; if this is a 12.5 BO should have a 3KS fuse.
kV bank with a 50 kVA transformer
connected to AO and BD and a 10 kVA
transformer connected to BO and CO,what
fuse sizes should be installed?
E
Answer.AO and BO should have a 6K fuse; �
CO should have a 2KS fuse.
Closed Delta Banks.Fuse the two phases to the LkAtAA
larger transformer with fuses sized for a 1-0
transformer of the same size. Fuse the third
phase to the two smaller transformers with a Fig.A Fig.C
fuse sized for a closed delta bank, see Fig. C. 0
Fig. B 30 Delta-Delta
with the same size transformers. However,the Mpen Delta-Open Delta
fuses for the larger transformer should not be
smaller than the fuse to the smaller transformers.
009DAHO
PONM Expulsion Fuses
M—W—P^

14-02-06 Revised 09/21 Overhead
Capacitor Bank Fusing
Table 3 Fusing Schedule for Shunt Capacitor Banks
Expulsion Fuse RRZ* Fuse Equivalent
WAR 7.2/12.47Y kV 14.4/24.9Y kV 19.9/34.5Y kV 7.2/12.47Y kV 14.4/24.9Y kV 19.9/34.5Y kV
1-0 3-0 Amps Link Amps Link Amps Link Fuse Fuse Fuse
100 300 13.9 15K 6.9 8K 5.0 8K 18 ELF 18 ELF 18 ELF
150 450 20.8 20K 10.4 10K 7.5 10K 25 ELF 18 ELF 18 ELF
200 600 27.8 30K 13.9 15K 10.0 10K 30 ELF 18 ELF 18 ELF
300 900 41.7 40K 20.8 20K 15.1 15K 50 ELF** 25 ELF** 18 ELF
400 1200 55.6 50K 27.8 30K 20.0 20K 65 ELF** 30 ELF** 25 ELF**
450 1350 62.5 65K 31.2 30K 22.6 25K 80 ELF** 30 ELF** 25 ELF**
600 1800 83.3 80K 41.7 40K 30.2 30K § § 30 ELF**
*Red Risk Zone
**ELF Double Barrel configuration
§The load current exceeds ELF Fuse capabilities. Contact Methods and Materials Department for SMU fuse sizing.
Current Limiting Fuses.When an existing CL
fuse blows,you may remove it. However, if the
fault current at the location exceeds 7100 amps
symmetrical, 10.000 amps asymmetrical)
replace the cutout with a new one rated 10,000
amps asymmetrical or greater.
RRZ Line Tap Fusing
When fusing line taps in an RRZ, refer to OH
14-06,Table 4 Fusing Schedule for Shunt
Capacitor Banks, for an Expulsion to SMU-20
Fuse conversion chart.
Expulsion Fuses "` R„

Overhead Revised 01/07 14-03-01
OBSOLETE
Back-up Current Limiting (CL) Fuse Protection
NOTE. Current limiting fuses are no longer Construction
used.When a current limiting fuse blows,
replace it with a 6000A interrupting capacity O
cutout.
Interrupting Capability Silve Ribbon
Fuse rElement
Fused cutouts and internal CSP fuses,normally Silica Sand
called weak links,have limited interrupting
ratings.At 7.2 kV our standard cutout is listed as
having an interrupting rating of 7100 Amps,
while the CSP fuse is listed at 3500 Amps
(symmetrical).Where the available line-to-
neutral fault current exceeds these ratings,back- Universal
up CL fuses can be applied to extend the Adapter O
interrupting ratings to 50,000 Amps. CL fusing
also helps to protect against transformer tank Figure 1. Back-up CL Fuse
rupee. Sectional Drawing
Theory of Operation The fuse consists of a silver ribbon wound
around a supporting core housed in a glass
Expulsion fuse links cannot interrupt a fault until reinforced epoxy tube packed with a high purity
the 60 Hertz alternating current waveform silica sand.
passes through a current zero. The CL fuse,by
contrast,is designed to drive the fault current to All back-up CL fuses used for overhead
zero quickly, quietly, and with minimum applications will have a spade connector on one
expulsion action. end to accommodate a copper hot tap connector,
and either a universal adapter(25K and 40K
When a high level fault occurs, a silver ribbon sizes)or an eyebolt(80K size) on the other end.
fuse element melts and flows out into the silica
sand, see Figure 1. The fault current suddenly ♦ The universal adapter allows a hot tap
encounters a high resistance path,producing connector to be applied on the load side of
tremendous heat and energy which the fuse. The universal adapter is not
instantaneously turns the sand to a glass available for the 80K size.
insulator.This forces the current waveform to ♦ The eyebolt on the 80K size(used mainly
zero much more quickly than its normal 60 hertz for underground risers)will allow a piece of
zero point. #2 copper stirrup to be inserted to serve the
The fuse drastically reduces the energy let-
same purpose as the universal adapter.
through to the fault;hence,the likelihood of a
catastrophic rupture is greatly reduced.
•'Q IDAHO
EMPMER. OBSOLETE — Back-up Current Limiting Fuse Protection

14-03-02 Revised 01/07 Overhead
Application Back-Up CL Fuse Changeout
Procedure
Back-up CL fuses are to be applied on all
12.47GrdY/7.2-kV overhead capacitor and For low level faults,the series expulsion fuse
conventional transformer installations where the should blow before damage occurs to the back-
symmetrical line to neutral fault current up CL fuse. However,there is a possibility that
exceeds 7100 Amps. If the transformer is a CSP, the CL fuse will be damaged,and yet show
then CL fuse protection(or a cutout) is required continuity.Therefore,ALWAYS CHANGE
when line to neutral fault current exceeds 3500 OUT THE CL FUSE WHEN THE
Amps. These fault levels correspond to the EXPULSION FUSE BLOWS. If the CL fuse is
symmetrical interrupting ratings of the cutout bolted in, change to the new mounting
and CSP under-oil weak-link fuse,respectively. arrangement using hot tap connectors.
Due to its limited voltage withstand capability Exercise caution when dealing with a blown
and its ability to clear only high level faults,the all fuses.A high level fault may occur inside a
back-up CL fuse must be installed in series with transformer or capacitor tank. Check for
a conventional expulsion fuse link. The signs of an internal fault(bulging tank,
characteristics of these two fuses must operated pressure relief valve,leaking oil,
coordinate so that a low level fault will cause burnt smell,etc.).The tank could rupture
only the expulsion link to blow,but a high when re-energizing,even with the CL fuse in
magnitude fault will cause both fuses to blow. the circuit.Get away as far as practical if you
choose to re-energize the unit.Do not bypass
Caution. Improper coordination may the CL fuse.Use a long stick. Stay away from
result in severe damage to the the transformer for a few minutes before
installation. See the Coordination approaching to ensure that conditions are
Requirements Section on this page. normal.
The Distribution Primary Analysis Program, not Coordination Requirements
the fault current zones indicated on feeder maps,
should be used to determine the application of Back-up type CL fuses must coordinate with the
CL fuses. Please contact Engineering. size and type of expulsion link used.The label
on the fuse should indicate clearly which K link
Because of problems with fuse operations on will coordinate with the back-up CL fuse.When
transients and temporary faults,we do not using another type fuse,use the following table.
recommend that you apply back-up CL fuses on Use a 25K size backup CL fuse with all 7.2-kV
overhead taps. Fuse the individual transformers CSP units.
with back-up CL fuses where the 7100-Amp
cutout interrupting rating is exceeded(3500 Cat. CL Fuse CU Max. Fuse
Amps for CSP transformers without a cutout). ID Size Code in Cutout
29839 25K DCLF25 5KS,15T,25K
29840 40K DCLF40 20T, 40K
29841 80K DCLF80 80K
OBSOLETE — Back-up Current Limiting Fuse Protection MWMRa
A.IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/07 14-03-03
Mounting Arrangement for Back-Up
CL Fuses
Back-up CL fuses are normally hung directly7DCLCFBIKT
DHT.
from the wire using hot tap connectors, as shown
in Figure 2. However,if the wire is slack or
smaller than#4 ACSR,then use the mountingCLF..
bracket shown in Figures 3 and 4. The heavier,
80K size should be mounted on the bracket
when the wire is smaller than 2/0 or slack.
tout
Use 2 PGs on 4AR
Use only tin-plated copper
stirrups and copper hot line
connectors. Figure 3. Crossarm Mounting Using Bracket
0 0
DCLF25,
DCLF40 DCLF80 _
Universal adapter
o Piece of Cu stirrup
0
To cutout
DBK18 DCLFBKT
Figure 2. Normal CL Fuse Mounting Position
Additional Information To Cutout
See Section 73-02 of the Underground
Distribution Design and Construction Manual.
Figure 4. Mounting on BK-18
E'er IDiAHO
�wPOWER OBSOLETE — Back-up Current Limiting Fuse Protection

Overhead Written 09/21 14-04-01
ELF Current Limiting Fuses
o � o
O O
0 0
General Application
The ELF fuse is a current limiting dropout fuse ELF fuses are only used in Red Risk Zone
compatible with the standard expulsion cutout (RRZ) 3 of the Wildfire Mitigation Program.
body. The standard expulsion fuse is used outside of
RRZ 3 areas.
It operates silently and suppresses the arc within
the ELF unit. The ELF fuse protects pole-type Fusing tables and the equivalent ELF fuse for
transformers and capacitor banks. expulsion fuses are available in the previous
section; Overhead Manual 14-02.
Cat. ID Description Current Rating Line Voltage CU Code
58856 FUSE ELF 6A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 6A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF156ELF
58857 FUSE ELF 8A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 8A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF158ELF
58858 FUSE ELF 12A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 12A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1512ELF
58859 FUSE ELF 18A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 18A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1518ELF
58860 FUSE ELF 20A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 20A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1520ELF
58861 FUSE ELF 25A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 25A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1525ELF
58862 FUSE ELF 30A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 30A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1530ELF
58863 FUSE ELF 40A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 40A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1540ELF
*58864 FUSE ELF 50A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 50A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1550ELF
*58865 FUSE ELF 65A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 65A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1565ELF
*58866 FUSE ELF 80A F/USE ON 7.2/12.47KV 80A 7.2/12.47KV DCLF1580ELF
§58868 FUSE ELF 6A F/USE ON 19.9/34.5KV 6A 19.9/34.5KV DCLF356ELF
§58869 FUSE ELF 8A F/USE ON 19.9/34.5KV 8A 19.9/34.5KV DCLF358ELF
§58871 FUSE ELF 12A F/USE ON 19.9/34.5KV 12A 19.9/34.5KV DCLF3512ELF
§58872 FUSE ELF 18A F/USE ON 19.9/34.5KV 18A 19.9/34.5KV DCLF3518ELF
§58873 FUSE ELF 20A F/USE ON 19.9/34.5KV 20A 19.9/34.5KV DCLF3520ELF
*§58874 FUSE ELF 25A F/USE ON 19.9/34.5KV 25A 19.9/34.5KV DCLF3525ELF
*§58875 FUSE ELF 30A F/USE ON 19.9/34.5KV 30A 19.9/34.5KV DCLF3530ELF
*Double Barrel Design
§ ELF Fuse is also used on 14.4/24.9kV system using 35kV cutout body(Cat.ID 42189)
"`�R,, ELF Current Limiting Fuses

14-04-02 Revised 12/21 Overhead
Installation, Maintenance, and
Removal
The ELF Fuse is designed like standard
expulsion fuses in installation,removal,
and fault clearing. They fit in standard non-
loadbreak and link-break fuse cutouts.
Pull Ring
To install an ELF Fuse,follow these steps: Lifting Eye
1. Grab the lifting eye of the ELF
Fuse with a hotstick.
2. Hang the fuse on the lower contact
of the cutout.
3. Grab the pull ring of the fuse and o
rotate it towards the upper contact.
O Dropout Actuator
4. Drive the fuse into the upper (Operated)
contact of the cutout quickly and
firmly. Operated Elf Fuse
To open an ELF Fuse,follow these steps:
♦ Use a loadbuster tool to grab the
pull ring. IMPORTANT NOTE:Anyone storing,
handling,or transporting an ELF Fuse
♦ Remove the fuse from the upper must comply with the following:
contact.
♦ Have a copy of the required
♦ Grab the lifting eye of the fuse and exemption package documentation.
remove it from the lower contact. Secure a copy from your respective
To remove a blown ELF fuse: warehouse.
♦ Use a hotstick to grab the fuse's ♦ Store and transport ELF Fuses in
lifting eye. the original packaging.
♦ Lift the fuse off the lower contact.
Additional Information
Refer to Materials Manual 09-055 for more information regarding ELF Fuses.
ELF Current Limiting Fuses "`�R.

Overhead Revised 09/21 14-05-01
Power Fuses
General
Power fuses provide the following
advantages over fused distribution o o
cutouts and are often applied where
one or more of these advantages can be
effectively utilized.
♦ Higher interrupting ratings
♦ Less violent arc interruption
♦ More accurate time-current characteristics
♦ Better coordination with upstream devices for large fuse sizes
Application
The SMU-20 is the power fuse specified for use on the Idaho Power Company distribution system. It is
applied for all primary voltages where a fuse size larger than 100A is required. Smaller sizes are used in
special applications. It's fast and accurate time-current characteristics help resolve coordination
difficulties presented by large cutout-mounted distribution fuse links.
Max Interrupting
Cat. ID Short Description Rating* CU Codet
6150 FUSE SMU-20 3K 15 kV 14,000 none
59657 FUSE SMU-20 5E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU155
59658 FUSE SMU-20 7E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU157
6151 FUSE SMU-20 10E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1510
59659 FUSE SMU-20 13E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1513
6152 FUSE SMU-20 15E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1515
6153 FUSE SMU-20 20E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1520
6154 FUSE SMU-20 25E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1525
6155 FUSE SMU-20 30E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1530
6156 FUSE SMU-20 40E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1540
6157 FUSE SMU-20 50E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1550
6158 FUSE SMU-20 65E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1565
6159 FUSE SMU-20 80E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU1580
6160 FUSE SMU-20 100E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU15100
6161 FUSE SMU-20 125E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU15125
6162 FUSE SMU-20 150E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU15150
6163 FUSE SMU-20 175E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU15175
6164 FUSE SMU-20 200E 15 kV 14,000 DSMU15200
59660 FUSE SMU-20 5E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU355
59661 FUSE SMU-20 7E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU357
36164 FUSE SMU-20 10E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3510
59662 FUSE SMU-20 13E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3513
36165 FUSE SMU-20 15E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3515
36168 FUSE SMU-20 20E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3520
59663 FUSE SMU-20 25E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3525
59664 FUSE SMU-20 30E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3530
36173 FUSE SMU-20 40E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3540
36169 FUSE SMU-20 50E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3550
36170 FUSE SMU-20 65E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3565
36171 FUSE SMU-20 80E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU3580
6165 FUSE SMU-20 100E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU35100
6166 FUSE SMU-20 125E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU35125
6167 FUSE SMU-20 150E 27 kV 12,500 DSMU35150
*Maximum interrupting rating in symmetrical amps
tCU codes are for the power fuse only, see page 13-01-05 for the power fuse holder
RNpWORR Power Fuses
--- Pa Y Internal Use Only

14-05-02 Revised 09/21 Overhead
K to SMU-20 Fuse Conversion Chart
Overhead line tap fuses located in RRZs (Red Risk Zones)must be converted to SMU-20 Power
Fuses. The table below outlines the fuse conversion from K to SMU-20 fuses.
K Expulsion Fuse SMU-20 Fuse
6K 5E
8K 7E
10K 10E
12K 13E
15K 15E
20K 20E
25K 25E
30K 30E
40K 40E
50K 50E
65K 65E
80K 80E
100K 100E
This table is valid for 12.5kV through 34.5kV lines.
For SMD-20 power fuse holders, see OH 13-01-05.
NOTE: SMU-20 power-fuse and SMD-20 power-fuse holders are ordered separately to
complete the power-fuse assembly for new power-fuse installation or retrofit of expulsion-fuse to
power-fuse protection in RRZ.
Power Fuses WOP RR.

Overhead Revised 09/21 14-05-03
Power Fuse Operation
The basic components of a power-fuse are Arcing between the lower terminal and the
illustrated below, see(A). Operation of the fuse traveling arcing rod vaporizes the solid material,
begins with the melting of the fusible element. producing a deionizing gas, see illustration(B)
This releases the arcing rod,which is then spring below.The combination of high-speed
driven up through the arc extinguishing material. separation of electrodes and the deionizing gas
extinguishes the arc, and the current is
interrupted, see illustration(C).
The tip of the arcing rod
punctures the top seal
to actuate a blown fuse
indicator or to trip a
drop-out release.
Cl-
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
The arcing rod is
driven upward by
spring action.
Cr
Drive Spring
CE-
Cr
zr
The arc has
been
extinguished and
Arcing Rod the current
interrupted.
The heat of the
arc vaporizes the
Arc Extinguishing extinguishing
Material material.
The fuse is melted
and the rod is
released.
Fuse Element
(A) (B) (C)
"`ppVM Power Fuses
­­­ 'y Internal Use Only

14-05-04 Revised 09/21 Overhead
Power Fuse Mounting Options
The SMD-20 is the mounting hardware used with the SMU-20 power fuse; see illustrations below.
Clamp screw
Upper End Fitting
0
o
Locating pin
(inside bore)
Locknut
Locating Clamp
slot screw
0,
Lower End Fitting SMD-20 Mounting
Actuating pinD Upper
Extends through seal
the upper seal
when the fuse unit
is blown and
released the latch
(not shown).
Locating
slot
CAUTION. Do not place
your hand over the top of
the fuse unit.Accidental
operation could result in
severe injury!
The red cap must
not be disturbed Lower
when the SMU-20 ferrule
fuse unit is used in
the SMD-20
mounting. Locating
_ pin
SMU-20 Fuse Unit Fuse unit with end fittings attached
Power Fuses "` R„

Overhead 14-07-01
This page intentionally left blank.
HIORM
�PMR. Reserved

Overhead Revised 01/21 14-08-01
Overhead Fault Indicators
General Definitions
Overhead Fault Circuit Indicators(FCI)are Adaptive trip means that the trip current logic
often referred to as"fault indicators."They are eliminates the need for trip rating selection or
cost effective tools to locate faults faster,thus revision with changing load.
reducing costs and customer outage time.
Automatic reset is the feature that resets the
During fault condition, FCIs positioned along target automatically after the circuit becomes
the path of fault current(a short circuit with high energized.
current)will sense the high current and display a
"target."The target may be a flashing light or a Cold load pick-up is the high current that occurs
reflective flag. Those that don't sense the fault after the circuit was de-energized long enough
current remain in their"normal"position. In this for the load diversity to disappear. (All the
manner,FCIs help to locate the source of the connected load is on at the same time.)It
fault. normally stabilizes in less than 1/2 hour but can
last up to an hour or more.
Fixed trip means that the current is fixed or
programmed at a specific current level which
fixed is set to switch the indicator to tripped or
fault position.
Inrush is the high current that occurs
immediately after a circuit becomes energized. It
lasts only a few cycles.
Inrush restraint is the fault indicator feature
For Underground Fault Indicators see the that prevents the target from tripping during the
Underground Manual section 58. first few cycles after the circuit becomes
energized.
Maximum load current refers to the peak,
steady-state load current. This figure is used to
calculate the minimum fault indicator trip
setting.
Minimum available fault current refers to the
lowest expected fault current. This current must
be higher than the fault indicator trip setting.
Reset restraint is the feature that prevents the
fault indicator from automatically resetting the
target during 3-0 transformer backfeed
conditions.It senses circuit parameters to
determine whether or not the circuit is back to
normal.
EMPOWER. Overhead Fault Indicators

14-08-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Types of Overhead Fault Indicators
The old-style overhead fault indicator Fisher Overhead FCI Specifications
Pierce 1548 series has been replaced with Power Cat. ID Conductor OD Conductor Type
Delivery Products, Inc. The new fault indicators 58600* 0.16"to 1.15" #6 CU to 795 ACSR
provide many benefits including visible LED, 58623* 0.16"to 1.15" #6 CU to 795 ACSR
self-adjusting trip rating,replaceable batteries *Bumper pads have been added to these to allow for a
and hot stick installation with a specialized tool. broader range of conductors
The following tables show details of distribution
overhead FCIs that may be used on circuits up Tripped with LEDSs
and Flag Activated
through 46 kV.
Cat. ID Description CU Code
58600 FCI 8 Hrs Strobe none
58623 FCI 4 Hrs Strobe, 24 Hrs flag none
Once installed,the fault indicators will measure ?
the load current and step up the trip setting based
on the measured load. The response time of the — -
trip is based on a Time Current Curve which is
available from M&M upon request.
The strobe fault indicators will behave
differently than the strobe/flag indicators. The
strobe indicators have amber and red lights that
will flash during the outage.When the power is
restored,the red light will stop flashing and the
amber light will stay lit until the time is met or it
is manually reset with a magnet.
The strobe/flag indicators will flash a red light
and the red flag will rotate to be visible.When
power is restored, or after 4 hours have passed,
the red lights will stop flashing;however,the
flag will remain visible. The flag will reset itself
after 24 hrs, or it is reset manually with the
magnet tool.
Two tools are useful for these fault indicators:
♦ Reset magnet Cat.ID 58601
♦ Long stick tool Part No. PDP#49-6006-004
Overhead Fault Indicators "9@1POI�Iu R.
AlIDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 10/21 14-09-01
Overhead Line Monitors
General The Zero Amp Monitor(ZM1)OLM is battery
powered and has a 10-year shelf life.This unit is
Overhead Line Monitors(OLM)remotely best utilized in areas with seasonal or light
monitor current for loading and fault loading.
information using management software.It's a
simple and cost-effective way to identify issues In a fault condition,both
within the system. devices immediately
notify the operations
There are two types of approved OLMs for use; center and provide an
line harvesting and battery operated. Both utilize accurate global
cellular networks to communicate line positioning system(GPS)
information. location.When detecting
a fault,the device will
Overhead Line Monitor Types operate its strobe LED to
help ground crews locate
The Master Monitor(MM3) is a line harvesting it. It will stop indicating
monitor type. It uses a current transformer(CT) and continue monitoring Figure 2:Zero Amp Monitor
to power itself. This unit requires a constant load when the power is restored.
above 10-amps for optimum operation and is
best utilized on the feeder backbone or on large Cat. ID Description Cu Code
customers that operate around the clock. 59434 Overhead Line DMOFCILINE
Powered Monitor
59435 Overhead Battery DMOFCIBAT
Powered Monitor
P
r
Figure 1: Master Monitor
"`�R� Overhead Line Monitor

14-09-02 Revised 10/21 Overhead
Placement Installation
The OLM's primary purpose is to monitor faults Both OLMs are installed using a shotgun stick
downstream of non-communicating line and will configure automatically.
protection and switchgear.
Refer to the manufacturer instructions for
Verify cellular reception before creating a design detailed installation instructions. The following
using the OLMs. instructions are a summary:
Consider the clamping range of the OLMs. The 1. Measure load current on each phase:
conductor size requirements are as follows: ♦ If less than 20A on any phase, install
ZM1 on all phases.
MM3 ♦ If 20A or more on all phases, install
♦ #1 to 795 (0.375"to 1.030") MM3 on all phases.
♦ Use armor rod for#4ACSR to#2 2. Provide installation information to
(0.250"to 1.029" Reliability Engineering.
ZM1 ♦ Utilize the"Monitor Installation
♦ #6CU to 795 (0.160"to 1.030") Worksheet"from Reliability
♦ Remove the tear off label on the monitor
Here are some examples of OLM placement: and stick it to the worksheet.
♦ Load side of hydraulic reclosers and
sectionalizers
♦ Backbone splits without existing C
Sentient Energy
communication device Pfidlbilu°unililY��lll llll
♦ Major line taps L�111tlIIII11111�IIN 2. Tear otrd--dblelabel.
J it L IIIIINIMi1MIIIII1 N-11Iii i1 8 z. w lc. b dlrcn
device number.
Made in USA 3. Return to Rick Kidneigh
♦ Pole risers O CHq-3,208-982-0282
(byte &pictur ail,...l
♦ Remote service areas """" "'
IIIY/IIIIIII......Al1YY Mxvucuz
SM
Iltllllllllllll II Id7 I IIYIII 7180
Figure 4 Tear off label,write information and
return
3. Locate the load side indicator on the bottom
of OLM and verify orientation towards load.
Figure 3: Overhead line monitor
Figure 5 OLMs 4-feet apart on line
Overhead Line Monitor '`per Re.

Overhead Revised 10/21 14-09-03
NOTE. Carry OLMs in closed position and do
not touch the inside of the clamp assembly. CLAMP ASSEMBLY
5. Tighten screws until snug, starting with the
closed side of the clamp.
♦ Turn clamp screw 15 turns,depending
on conductor size,until snug; do not
over tighten.
♦ Turn lock screw 2 %2 turns until snug;
MM3 only. CLAMP SCREW
♦ Check clamp screw to ensure it's still
snug.
6. Verify that the monitor activated by -
checking the flashing LED light. The
changing colors are described below:
LOCK SCREW
♦ RED LED—Flashes 5 times to indicate
it's powering up. Figure 6 OLM Assembly Points
♦ AMBER LED—System is booting up.
♦ GREEN LEDIlluminates for 30
seconds then turns off, indicates
successful installation.
OWN—POWER. Overhead Line Monitor

Overhead Revised 12/22 15-00-01
Table of Contents
15- Reclosers & Sectionalizers
15-01-01 General Information 15-03-21 Details
Definitions 15-03-22 3-0 Hydraulic Recloser—
15-02-01 Recloser Applications 400 and 560 Amps
1-0 Recloser Applications 15-03-23 Details
3-0 Recloser Applications 15-03-24 3-0 Triple-Single Recloser—
Overhead Co-gen Package Rarely used
15-02-02 Standard Electronic Reclosers 15-03-25 3-0 Triple-Single Electronic
Reclosers for Maintenance Recloser-12.5 kV or 25 kV,
15-02-04 Electronic Recloser Controllers 400 Amp Details
15-02-05 Time-Current Response Curves 15-04-01 Recloser Operating Instruction
15-02-06 Trip Coil Selection for Hydraulic Manual Operation
Reclosers Bypassing
15-03-01 Recloser Installation 15-04-02 Cold-load Pick-up
Disconnect and Bypass Switches Hot Line Hold
Primary Line Connections 15-12-01 Sectionalizer Types and
15-03-02 Recloser Racks Applications
15-03-03 Recloser Control Cables Sectionalizer Operation
Recloser 1KVA PT Sectionalizer Types
15-03-04 Closing Mechanisms 15-12-02 1-OSectionalizer Applications
Device Plate(DNPL) 3-OSectionalizer Application
15-03-05 Antenna Installation
15-03-07 Electronic Controller, Conduit,and 15-12-03 ct Placement
A
Grounding Details 15-12-04 Actuating Coil Section
15-03-08 Standard Installation Number of Overcurrent Counts-
1-0 Spear Recloser to-Trip
15-03-09 1-0 Spear Recloser Details 15-12-05 Sectionalizer Accessories
15-03-10 1-0 Spear Recloser Alternate Low Voltage Wiring
Framing Sectionalizer Electronic Controls
15-03-11 3-0 Single Triple(STS)Recloser- 15-13-01 Sectionalizer Installation&
Solid Dielectric Electronic Configuration
Recloser-630 Amps Installation
15-03-12 Details Identification and Marking
15-03-13 Maintenance 15-13-02 1-0 Hydraulic Sectionalizer
1-0 Viper SP Recloser 7.2-kV up to 100 Amps Type GH
15-03-14 Details 15-13-04 1-0 Electronic Programmable
15-03-15 1-0 Hydraulic Recloser In-Line or Sectionalizer—7.2 and 19.9-kV,
Tap (Slack Span)—Up to 100 up to 100 Amps type PRS
Amps 15-13-06 3-0 Sectionalizer Up to 400A
15-03-16 Details types GV and GW
15-03-17 3-0 Electronic Recloser-
15-14-01 Sectionalizer Operating
400 and 560 Amps
15-03-18 Details Instructions
15-03-19 3-0 Electronic Recloser Supply Manual Operation
Wiring Details Hot Line Hold
15-03-20 3-0 Hydraulic Recloser-Up to Bypassing
200 Amps and 15kV Only
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
­­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 12/22 15-01-01
General Information
Definitions Trip and Lockout Sequences
A close coil or solenoid is a device within a ♦ 1-0 trip/3-0 lockout.The recloser runs
recloser that closes the circuit after is has tripped through its trip close sequence for each
and after a specified time, or reclose interval, phase.
has passed.A high voltage close coil uses
voltage directly from the recloser's source When one of the phases reaches lockout,the
bushings.A low voltage close coil uses 120 volts other two will then trip once and lockout.
AC from a transformer on the source side of the This feature minimizes the single phasing of
recloser. 3-0 loads while eliminating unnecessary
trips on the non-faulted phases.
Cold load pick-up is the high current that occurs
after the circuit was de-energized long enough ♦ 1-0 trip/1-0 lockout.The recloser runs
for the load diversity to disappear. This usually through its trip close sequence for each
lasts 30 to 60 minutes. phase.When one of the phases reaches
lockout,it is the only one that locks out.
Coordination refers to the time-current This feature eliminates unnecessary trips on
characteristic of a protective device such as a the non-faulted phases and risks single
fuse,recloser, etc.When two or more protective phasing 3--0 loads.
devices are connected in series on a circuit,their
time-current characteristics must be arranged so ♦ 3-0 trip/3-0 lockout.The recloser runs
that the device nearest the fault trips,while the through its trip close sequence with all three
others do not. phases ganged and potentially lockout three-
phase.
Inrush is the high current that lasts for a few
cycles when a circuit is energized.A recloser
may mistake inrush for fault current.
Maximum fault current is the greatest
available fault current that the recloser can see
and determines the required interrupting rating
of the recloser. Use the maximum fault current at
the recloser for this value and consult the
device's technical data to ensure that the
interrupting rating is adequate.
A trip coil is the device within a recloser that
opens the circuit after a fault has been detected.
It uses the fault current to arm the coil
mechanism and then delays the trip action
according to the delay specified by the time-
current characteristic and the magnitude of the
fault current.
�PDAW
OR. Recloser and Sectionalizers
­­­.m 'Y

15-01-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Reclosers Recloser Types
Reclosers are automatic devices that facilitates Electronic reclosers have timing mechanisms
the clearing of temporary faults by opening and are electronically controlled and housed in a
then reclosing the circuit. separate cabinet.
Most faults that occur on distribution circuits are
temporary in nature.When a temporary fault A cable connects the control cabinet to the
occurs, it tends to clear itself once the circuit is recloser. The timing of the trip sequence and
de-energized. reclose intervals as well as sending the trip or
If the fault was temporary or beyond a fuse that close signal to the recloser unit occurs in the
cleared it,the recloser will close and power will control cabinet.
be restored. Electronic reclosers can have either a high
A permanent fault will cause the recloser to voltage or low voltage close coil.A low voltage
continue its trip-close sequence and ends with close coil is most common since a 120/240-volt,
the recloser open. AC power source is required for the electronics.
Idaho Power has installed a variety of different Hydraulic reclosers are self-contained devices.
1-0 and 3-0 reclosers. Each uses oil or vacuum They use oil for insulation as well as for
interruption with either hydraulic or electronic interrupting both load current and fault current.
controls. The control mechanism is installed inside the
tank. Manual operation switches are mounted
The recloser unit uses oil or a composite outside the tank.
material for insulation medium and either oil or The closing mechanism has a plunger that
vacuum for interrupting both load current and operates as a pump. The flow of oil through the
fault current. Current transformers(CT) pump controls the timing and tripping functions
mounted inside the tank detect over-current and for the recloser. Because the viscosity of oil
imbalance conditions. varies with temperature,the reset time for a
hydraulic recloser will be longer in cold weather.
Recloser and Sectionalizers '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 15-02-01
Recloser Applications
All new reclosers purchased are vacuum type 3-0 Recloser Applications
units with electronic controls because they
require much less maintenance and therefore The NOVA KN-STS reclosers are the standard
have a lower life cost than the oil-interrupting for 3-0 new construction.
types. The 3-0 KN-STS recloser has triple option
However,there are still many oil-interrupting features:
reclosers in service,namely the R,RV, and WV ♦ 1-0 trip- 1-0 lockout
types. These will continue to be serviced and
maintained by Idaho Power's TransTest shop. ♦ 1— trip- 3— lockout
♦ 3-0 f1�trip- 3-0 lockout
1-0 Recloser Applications The KN-STS uses Form 6-ST control.
Use 1-0 reclosers on 1-0 and 2-0 circuits that Overhead Co-gen Package
do not serve 3-0 loads.
♦ Be sure that the maximum available fault For the 4-pole interconnect,use type
current does not exceed the rating of the VWVE38X, Cat.ID 1143, CU Code DRVWVE;
recloser. contact the System Protection Department to
order.
The SPEAR reclosers are the standard for 10
See Overhead Manual 23-02-21 for 4-Pole
new construction. illustration that displays this recloser.
"`�R. Recloser Applications

15-02-02 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Standard Electronic Reclosers
Maximum Max. Cont. Max. Fault
Interrupting Operating Current Current
Cat. ID Type CU Code Medium Voltage (amps) (amps)
1-0 Packages(Includes control,rack, cables, transformer, and avian)
54925 SPEAR DRlSPEAR15PAC Vacuum 15 kV 400 8,000
54926 SPEAR DRlSPEAR35PAC Vacuum 38 kV 400 8,000
3-0 Packages(Includes control,rack, cables, transformer, and avian)
56893 NOVA-KNSTS DR3KNSTSNOVA15 Vacuum 15 kV 630 12,500
49657 NOVA-KNSTS DR3KNSTSNOVA35 Vacuum 38 kV 630 12,500
Reclosers for Maintenance
Maximum Max. Cont. Max. Fault
Interrupting Operating Current Current
Cat. ID Type CU Code Medium Voltage (amps) (amps)
1-0 Electronic Recloser
NP 38680** 1-0 NOVA DRlNOVA15 Vacuum 15 kV 400 8,000
OB 49435# 1-0 NOVA DRlKNTSNOVA15 Vacuum 15 kV 400 8,000
NP 50184 1—O VIPER DRlVIPER15PAC Vacuum 15 kV 800 12,500
NP 50185 1—O VIPER DRlVIPER35PAC Vacuum 35 kV 800 12,500
3-0 Electronic Reclosers
1142 3-0 RVE DRERVE Oil 34.5 kV 400 6,000
1140 3-0 WVE DRWVE Oil 34.5 kV 560 8,000
42122 3-0 WVE38X DRWVE38X Oil 34.5 kV## 560 8,000
NP 13012**3-0 NOVA-KNTS DR3KNTSNOVA15 Vacuum 15 kV+ 400 8,000
NP 44857**3-0 NOVA DRNOVA38F6 Vacuum 38 kV 630 12,500
NP 50091**3-0 NOVA DRNOVA38CPF6 Vacuum 38 kV 630 12,500
OB 37822# 3-0 NOVA DRNOVA15F6 Vacuum 15 kV 630 12,500
NP 49218**3-0 VIPER-S DRVIPER15PAC Vacuum 15 kV 800 12,500
NP 49219**3-0 VIPER-S DRVIPER35PAC Vacuum 37 kV 800 12,500
NP 51909**3-0 VIPER-ST DRVIPER15STPAC Vacuum 15 kV 800 12,500
NP 51910**3-0 VIPER-ST DRVIPER35STPAC Vacuum 35 kV 800 12,500
3-0 Recloser Only
1142 3-0 RVE DRRVERO Oil 34.5 kV 400 6,000
1138 3-0 RV DRRVRO Oil 12.5 kV 400 6,000
1139 3-0 VW DRVWRO Vacuum 12.5 kV 560 12,000
1143 3-0 VWVE38X DRVWVE38XRO Vacuum 34.5 kV 560 12,000
1-0 Hydraulic Reclosers
39906 1-0 V41-1 DR1M15 Vacuum 7.2 kV 200 2,000*
1133 1-0 E DR1M35 Oil 19.9 kV 100 2,500*
1-0 Hydraulic Recloser Only
1133 1-0 E DRERO Oil 19.9 kV 100 2,500
39906 1-0 V41-1 DRV4HRO Vacuum 7.2 kV 200 2,000
1-0 Recloser Tank Only
49704 1-0 TRI MOD DR1TRIMODTANK15Vacuum 15 kV 630 6,000
3-0 Hydraulic Reclosers
38958 3-0 VWV38X DRVWV35 Vacuum 34.5 kV 560 12,000
1139 3-0 VW DRVW15 Vacuum 12.5 kV 560 12,000
1138 3-0 RV DR31-115 Oil 12.5 kV$ 400 6,000*
1138 3-0 RV DR31-135 Oil 34.5 kV 400 6,000*
34250 3-0 V61-1 DR3M15 Vacuum 15.0 kV 200 2,000*
42121 3-0 WV38X DRWV38X Oil 34.5 kV 560 8,000
Recloser Applications "` R„

Overhead Reviewed 12122 15-02-03
Reclosers for Maintenance Continued
Maximum Max. Cont. Max. Fault
Interrupting Operating Current Current
Cat. ID Type CU Code Medium Voltage (amps) (amps)
3-0 Recloser Only continued
38958 3-0 VWV38X DRVWV38XRO Vacuum 34.5 kV 560 12,000
34250 3-0 V61-1 DRV6HRO Vacuum 14.4kV 200 2,000
1140 3-0 WVE DRWVERO Vacuum 34.5 kV 560 8,000
42122 3-0 WVE38X DRWVE38XRO Oil 34.5 kV 560 8,000
42121 3-0 WV38X DRWV38XRO Oil 34.5 kV 560 8,000
OB 49341# 3-0 NOVA DRNOVATANK15 Vacuum 15 kV 630 12,500
OB 49220# 3-0 NOVA DRNOVATANK38 Vacuum 38 kV 630 12,500
NP 49832**3-0 VIPERTANK DRVIPER1512S Vacuum 12.5 kV 800 12,500
NP 49833**3-0 VIPERTANK DRVIPER3512S Vacuum 34.5 kV 800 12,500
NP 49243**3-0 VIPER-STTANKDRVIPERTANK15 Vacuum 15 kV 800 12,500
NP 49244**3-0 VIPER-STTANKDRVIPERTANK35 Vacuum 35 kV 800 12,500
* The maximum fault current interrupt rating may be limited by the size of the trip coil.
** No Purchase.
$ May also be used at 34.5 W.
# Obsolete, retained for records.
## Transtest only.
+ Transformer ordered separately,see Overhead Manual 15-03-20 and 21.
R, Recloser Applications

15-02-04 Reviewed 12122 Overhead
Electronic Recloser Controllers
All 1-0 and 3-0 controller cabinets are attached to the base of the pole.
Cat. ID Recloser Controllers CU Code Recloser Type
52807 F6 KNTS/KNSTS DRECF6TS NOVA-KNSTS
56431 Spear Recloser Control DRECSPEAR Spear
43280 F6 Recloser Control DRECF6 NOVA
53784 351 R4 Recloser Control DREC351 R Viper-S
®
WIN � E=T*N` COOPER POWER
SER O O EL-
S
SEL m""°"�`�o"� 351R gPFAR51ngIe PXate Retlaer Cenlrol
EL-R PRASE FAULT ALARM
`" corrtRol �*SETTINGS
ABOVE MIN TRIP *SEQUENCE OF CONTROL OK
O �N O C EVENTS AC POWER
*METERING BATTERY
ENTER >
Eu v EDIT DATAPORT
aac CLOSED
O� O �O� p0 O O O O o
Type F6 Control °°° `e
O O O O O O 0 0 HOTLINE
wxma nrt •u�mc TRIP CLOSE TAG SUPER-[:] [:]C7 NON
YIGORY AECIASE
ON OFF
GROUND
ABLED U%I OFF A
EN
0 AU%2 (LOCKOUT) BATTERY ALT
O RECLOSE TEST PROFILE
ENABLED
O
REMOTE WAKE UP
ENABLED Spear Recloser Control
O ALTERNATE �mse O RECLOSER
SETTINGS CLOSED
0 LACK iRi� O RECLOSER
OPEN
351 R4 Recloser Control
Recloser Applications '`per R".

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 15-02-05
Time—Current Response Curves Hydraulic reclosers. Several different time—
current response curves are available for 1--0
Electronic reclosers.There are a variety of and 3-0 hydraulic reclosers.
different fast trip and delayed trip phase and
ground time—current response curves that are ♦ All hydraulic reclosers use an"A"curve for
available for electronic reclosers. The selection the fast trip.
depends on the vintage of the controller and if it ♦ For the delayed-trip curve,you should select
is solid-state or microprocessor-based. the one that most closely matches that of the
Because of the larger curve selection,electronic upstream device it must coordinate with.
reclosers provide better coordination between Time—Current Response Curves
both the upstream and downstream devices.
Consult the manufacturer's literature for more Fast Delayed Trip
information. 1-0 Hydraulic Reclosers
Type V4H A B C D
Type E A B C D E
3-0 Hydraulic Reclosers
Type V6H A B C D
Type RV A B C D E
Type VW A B C D E
Type VWV38X A B C D E
"`�M Recloser Applications
­­­.m 'Y

15-02-06 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Trip Coil Selection for Hydraulic Reclosers
This table shows the available sizes of hydraulic recloser trip coils and their associated minimum trip
current rating and maximum fault current interrupting rating(rms symmetrical amps).
Hydraulic Recloser Trip Coils (amps)
1-0 Type WH
Trip Coil 5 10 15 25 35 50 70 100 140 200
Min.Trip 10 20 30 50 70 100 140 200 280 400
Max. Interrupt 200 400 600 1000 2000 2000 2500 2500 2500 2500
1-0 Type E
Trip Coil 5 10 15 25 35 50 70 100
Min.Trip 10 20 30 50 70 100 140 200
Max. Interrupt 300 600 900 1500 2100 2500 2500 2500
3-0 Type V6H
Trip Coil 25 35 50 70 100 140 160 185 225 280 400
Min.Trip 50 70 100 140 200 280 320 370 450 560 800
Max. Interrupt 1000 1400 2000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
3-0 Type RV
Trip Coil 25 35 50 70 100 140 160 185 225 280 400
Min.Trip 50 70 100 140 200 280 320 370 450 560 800
Max. Interrupt 1500 2100 3000 4200 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
3-0 Type VW
Trip Coil 25 35 50 70 100 140 160 200 225 400 560
Min.Trip 50 70 100 140 200 280 320 400 450 800 1120
Max. Interrupt 1500 2100 3000 4200 6000 8400 9600 12000 12000 12000 12000
3-0 Type VWV38X
Trip Coil 25 35 50 70 100 140 160 200 225 400 560
Min.Trip 50 70 100 140 200 280 320 400 450 800 1120
Max. Interrupt 1500 2100 3000 4200 6000 8400 9600 12000 12000 12000 12000
NOTE.Consult the manufacturer's literature for reclosers not shown in this table.
Not all available trip coil sizes may be shown.
CAUTION. The level of fault current that a recloser can interrupt is dependant on the size of the series
trip coil.
Recloser Applications W.—POWER,

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 15-03-01
Recloser Installation
Disconnect and Bypass Switches Primary Line Connections
Switch requirements.A disconnect switch or Like switches,jumper sizes are determined by
set of switches is required to be installed on the different factors including line conductor,
source side of all reclosers and sectionalizers so recloser rating,and present/future load current.
that a visible open can be obtained for clearance Consult with the field engineer.
purposes.
A set of bypass switches is required on all new ———— ————
3-0 electronic recloser installations so that the
electronic controls can be tested without
interrupting service to downstream loads and to I I I I
remove the device from service in case of
failure.
Consult your field engineer to determine the size Wedge Stirrups.Wedge stirrups with hot line
and type of disconnect and bypass switches, and clamps are to be used on jumpers 2/0 and
if mounting height will exceed 35-feet from the smaller.
ground.
NOTE.Only one hot line clamp per
wedge stirrup assembly,due to the
o size of the hot line clamps for safety
and clearance. QD
CU Code Description Jumper Size
DDJ4 Device Jumper Up to#4 cu
DDJ20 Device Jumper Up to 2/0 cu
300 amp 600 amp These CU codes include a stirrup with a wedge connector
Disconnect Disconnect attached,the hot line clamp,some jumper wire with wildlife
protective tubing,and an appropriate cartridge.
Switch Types. Use 300-amp or 600-amp solid Stud Disconnects. Stud disconnects are
blade disconnects for the visible open disconnect designed for jumpers 4/0 and larger. These are
switches and for bypass switches. an option where a separable means to disconnect
Cat. ID Description CU Code may be necessary.A stud disconnect may be
Silicon replaced with a solid wedge connection if
45101 15 kV SB Disc 300 DSSB153S preferred.
48311 27 kV SB Disc 300 DSSB353S
50047 15 kV SB Disc 600 DSSBS1560H/UG CU Code Description Jumper Size
52752 35 kV SB Disc 600 DSSBS356/UG DDJ336 Device Jumper 4/0 cu
DDJ795 Device Jumper 250 cu
An In-line Disconnect may be used as an These CU codes include the stud disconnect with a wedge
alternate construction on recloser 336 or 795 connector attached,a terminal lug,some jumper wire with
conductors only. It requires a clamp top wildlife protective tubing,and an appropriate cartridge.
insulator and a trunion to prevent twisting. See
Overhead Manual 13-01.
I I I I
RNPOW R� Recloser Installation
a.,oACORPM1Pa1Y

15-03-02 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Recloser Racks
O
1-0 reclosers are mounted directly to the pole
using the hanger bracket that comes attached to
its tank.
3-0 reclosers are mounted in a separate rack
attached to the pole.
♦ The light-duty rack fits type 3H, 6H, and
V6H reclosers.
♦ The heavy-duty rack fits type R,RV,WV,
VWV,RVE,WVE38, and VWVE38
reclosers.
A set of arrester mounting brackets is needed to
accommodate three source-side and three load-
side arresters. o 0 0
New reclosers come with the mounting rack.
The following Cat. IDs are available for
maintenance. o
Cat. ID Description CU CODE
1168 Rack Recloser LD None*
1169 Rack Recloser HD None*
1171 Bracket Arrester Mounting None* Light Duty Rack
NOTE.See Materials Manual 10-156-02
for Heavy-duty rack assembly instructions.
O ® ® O
❑o °
0
Heavy Duty Rack
Recloser Installation 900MR.

Overhead Reviewed 12122 15-03-03
Recloser Control Cables
New reclosers will come with all of the required cables.
The following tables are used for maintenance or when a longer cable is needed.
Standard Recloser F6(Not STS or TS)
Cat. ID Part No.* DESCRIPTION
1158 KA33ME10-35S 35 FT Control—F6 to Tank-14-pin to 14-socket
1157 K00-050-3 35 FT LV Input—J-Box to F6-2-pin to 2-socket
50683 KA33ME10-45S 45 FT Control—F6 to Tank-14-pin to 14-socket
50685 K100382001 45 FT LV Input—J-Box to F6-2-pin to 2-socket
50682 KA33ME10-55S 55 FT Control—F6 to Tank-14-pin to 14-socket
50684 K100382002 55 FT LV Input—J-Box to F6-2-pin to 2-socket
$ Manufacturer is Cooper.
STS or TS Recloser F6
Cat. ID Part No.* DESCRIPTION
1156 KA11MEl-10S 10 FT Power Cable
16771* KNTS125ME35S 35 FT Control-F6 to Tank—26-pin to 26-socket
16761* K09032001 35 FT LV Input—F6 to PT—2-pin to 5-pin
52808* KA34ME10-35S 35 FT Heater—F6 to Tank—2-pin to 2-socket
16771* KNTS125ME40S 40 FT Control—F6 to Tank—26-pin to 26-socket
16761* KA3320ME-40S 40 FT LV Input—F6 to PT—2-pin to 5-pin
52808* KA34ME10-40S 40 FT Heater—F6 to Tank—2-pin to 2-socket
58658 KNTS125ME50S 50 FT Control-F6 to Tank—26-pin to 26-socket
58659 KA3320ME-50S 50 FT LV Input—F6 to PT—2-pin to 5-pin
50699 KA34ME10-50S 50 FT Heater—F6 to Tank—2-pin to 2-socket
None** KNTS125ME60S 60 FT Control-F6 to Tank—26-pin to 26-socket
None** KA3320ME-60S 60 FT LV Input—F6 to PT—2-pin to 5-pin
None** KA34ME10-60S 60 FT Heater—F6 to Tank—2-pin to 2-socket
$Manufacturer is Cooper.
*When the 35-feet stock is used, only 40-feet will be ordered using the same CID.
Confirm with Inventory Analysts about which one is available in stock.
** Rarely used item, order as a non-CID MR.
Recloser 1KVA PT
The electronic reclosers come with the appropriate PT for 34.5 KV or 12.5 KV.
For a 25 KV recloser or for maintenance,use the following table:
Cat. ID DESCRIPTION
54157 XFMR, CN1, 1KVA, 12470GRDY/7200, 120V
54158 XFMR, CN1, 1KVA, 34500GRDY/19920, 120V
56019 XFMR, CN1, 1KVA, 24940GRDY/14400, 120V
"` R,. Recloser Installation

15-03-04 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Closing Mechanisms Hydraulic Closing Mechanisms
Electronic reclosers use a low voltage close coil Existing hydraulic reclosers use either a spring
to provide the energy for reclosing operations. mechanism or a high voltage(feeder voltage)
Additionally,NOVA and NOVA STS use battery close coil to provide the energy for reclosing
back-up to temporarily supply power for closing. operations.
♦ Orient spring operated reclosers with the
Closing Mechanism operating handle on the roadside of the
Type RVE Low Voltage Coil 120/240 V pole.
Type VWVE38X Low Voltage Coil- 120/240 V
Type NOVA Low Voltage Coil 120 V ♦ Orient reclosers with high voltage coils
Type NOVA-STS Low Voltage Coil 120 V with the source side bushings connected
to the source.
The transformer that supplies the low voltage for
the recloser must be energized from the circuit Closing Mechanism
on the source side of the recloser. 1-0 Hydraulic Reclosers Type
Type V4H Spring
ci
Type E Spring
3-0 Hydraulic Rec/osers
Type V6H Spring
® Type RV High Voltage Coil
Type VW High Voltage Coil
t Type VWV38X High Voltage Coil
Labels
Device plate (DNPL)
When installing a device,the pole must be
tagged. Pole tag shall indicate substation, feeder
number, and the device designation.
0 0
0 0
L
50 > 50 o C
2 Shot 2 Shot S
T 0 NOTE. The heads of recloser tanks are 0
mass-produced and designed to fit multiple 0 °
types of reclosers. Even though one set of 041
bushings on a recloser with a low voltage R10
close coil may be marked as the source
side,you do not need connect them as such. 0 0
Recloser Pole Tags
Recloser Installation 900MR.

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 15-03-05
Antenna Installation
Retrofit Existing Recloser
® 1 Neutral
To add an antenna to an existing recloser, it Red tape on top 3"Min.
must be an electronic unit.A door alarm, r1
Cat. ID 59715,needs to be added to the
controller.
If the controller does not have an ethernet 30"Min.
connection, it will need to be replaced with one
that does. Comm.
Orientation/Alignment
The orientation of the antenna(line angle)varies
from location to location and should point
directly towards the assigned master radio
location. It is important that the mount be
installed within 90'of the azimuth(line angle)
to the assigned master radio location which will 8'
be specified by the COMM Engineering and
included on the work order by the distribution First Bracket
designer. This will guide and ensure proper
installation of the antenna mount in the right
direction. If the line angle is not specified at the
time the work order has been written,the 6.5'Min.
antenna installer shall call the distribution 5'Min.
designer for the information.
This information is also in the Overhead Manual
17-03.
DCAYAGI CU Code
Cat. ID Description Qty.
57864 Yagi Antenna 1
58523 Antenna Mount 1
57425 COAX Cable, 30' 1
57421 3/8" Rubber-Insulated Clamps 5
13130 3"Self-tapping Screws 10
5280 Clip, Bonding F/3/4 1
28806 #6 Cu Conductor 3
5700 Connector C-Tap, 6T06 2
12291 1-HL Terminal#6 3/8" Lug 1
58143 1-HL Chair Lug 1
14662 1/4"Washers 4
DRADIO CU Code
Cat. ID Description Qty.
57358 Aprisa SR+ Radio 1
57424 2' Coax SMA to TNC 1
57412 Cable Bulkhead 1
49167 3' CAT6 Cord Patch 1
99POW R� Recloser Installation
a.,oACORP­P11Y

15-03-06 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Mounting and Grounding
The antenna mount and the antenna bracket need to be attached to the pole ground.Use the following
steps to ground the antenna assembly:
1. Crimp 1-hole lug, Cat. ID 12291,to an 18-inch piece of#6 Cu.
2. While assembling the antenna, attach the 1-hole lug to the antenna bracket under an
U-bolt and assemble with the mount for the pole.
3. Use 3 self-tapping lags to attach the antenna mount to the pole.
4. Scrape paint away from the fourth hole.
5. Attach a chair lug, Cat. ID 58143,to a second section of 6-inch piece of#6 Cu.
6. Attach to the antenna mount with a self-tapping screw to the fourth hole.
7. C-tap both strands of#6 Cu to the pole ground.
Coax
The antenna is connected to the radio using a coax cable in a 3-inch conduit for capacitors and strapped to
the pole for regulators. The mating torque for an N type connector is finger tight; do not over overtighten.
Tape and insulate coax connections; top and bottom using the tapes provided with the antenna.
Wrap with the water seal tape first and then wrap with the UV tape.
This information is also in Overhead Manual 16-04 and 17-03
Coil excess coax.
Connect pigtail to coax, hand
tighten. Cover with water tight
tape first and then UV tape. Red tape in top position.
�I
I
i
L
Antenna in right
angled bracket Eith
' an align
as shown.
Attach bracket
and mount to
pole ground.
Recloser Installation "` R.

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 15-03-07
Electronic Controller, Conduit & Grounding Details
Sensor Cable,Control Cable,
and COAX Cable. Stand Off Brackets
Stand-off Bracket
The following is required for standoff brackets:
Plate ♦ One set of standoff brackets are allowed
1 Controller per pole, includes Joint Users.
1.5' ♦ The first 2 brackets on the pole must be
3or4"Conduit at least 8-feet apart.
+� Spacing
See Note 2. ♦ If there is an object near the pole that
5'from Tyrapsand can be used to climb the pole,then the
ground level Clamps
See Note 1. next bracket must be at least 8-feet
See Note 3. above it.
♦ Band conduits to each other if necessary
to stabilize.
#2 Cu is buried 8"
minimum below ground level This page is also included in Overhead Manual
17-04.
s, / Grounding
/ Every recloser pole with a control shall be
/ grounded as shown.
6'to 8' Use#2 stranded bare cu wire buried 8-inches
Notes below the ground level. Separate the electrodes
by 6-to 8-feet.This is to create an equipotential
1. Mount the center of the control box 5-feet safe zone to protect worker(s)that are standing
high on the pole. near the box.
2. Control cable must be fastened on pole as
they come out of the conduit using Bonding
rubberized clamp, Cat ID 57562 and Anti-split bolts located in all non-Apitong wood
Tyraps Cat. ID 20029. crossarms shall be bonded.Fiberglass arms do
3. Locking sleeve can be installed to help not have an anti-split bolt,however bond
prevent vandalism,if appropriate using together any metal hardware within 2-inches
Cat. ID 57408.
4. The#6 bare Cu ground wire is connected to
the control box with a bonding clip and to
pole ground with a C-tap.
5. Bond the#2 Cu wire to the pole ground with
a C-Tap.
6. Train all control cables through the conduit
CU Code Description Qty
DGRID* #2 Ground Grid 1
DCCRM 3" Conduit and Stand-off 1
DCCRM4 4" Conduit and Stand-off 1**
RNPOW R" Recloser Installation
a.,oACORP­Pa"Y

15-03-08 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Standard Installation
1-0 Spear Recloser
Load Source
(F*) (D*) (J) (Q*)
(K)(G)
° (B*) �\
❑ 4" � (H*)
(N)
8" (M)
0
i� ® 4° \� (C*)
9�"
(M) 0
42"
min
d
f�L*)
60"
12" min
(O*)
(E*)
(I)
(P*)Optional Mounting Rack_ (Q*)3"Conduit with
for additional Stand-off Bracket
climbing space
I I
o
I
I o
I
I
I I
I
To
I Pole
To j system
ground
I neutral
For details, see the next page.
Note: Consult the field engineer and line operation technician if bypass switch mounting height will
exceed 35-feet from the ground.
Recloser Installation "`ppRa

Overhead Revised 12/22 15-03-09
1-0 Spear Recloser Details
For 7.2 kV Construction For 19.9 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D Crossarm Apitong 8'Device 3 pos 1 (A) DAA3D Crossarm Apitong 8'Device 3 pos 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DDJ...' Device Jumper 2 (C) DDJ...' Device Jumper 2
(D) DDR...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (D) DDR...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1 (F) DFTJ... Formed Top Tie 1
(G)D112F Insulator 12.5 kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (G)D135J Insulator 34.5 kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(H) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 2 (H) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 2
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1 (J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(L) DRlSPEAR15PAC 1-0 Spear 1 (L) DRlSPEAR35PAC 1-0 Spear 1
(M)DSCS151 * 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 2 (M)DSCS351 * 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 2
(N)DSSB153S 7.2/12.5 kV SB Disc 300A 1 (N)DSSB353S 20/34.5 kV SB Disc 300A 1
(0)DWC...* Wedge Connector 4 (0)DWC ...* Wedge Connector 4
(P)DITM* Individual Mount 1 (P)DITM* Individual Mount 1
(Q)DCCRM' 3"Conduit and Standoffs 1 (Q)DCCRM' 3"Conduit and Standoffs 1
* Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CLI codes.
*(C) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH 08-05. Includes Conductor,Wildlife Tubing,and the appropriate Connector.
DDJ4 for#4 ACSR
DDJ20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(H) Jumper wire-DJMPR..., Refer to OH 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
For rebuilds note existing wire type and sizes and order appropriate connector combinations.
DJMPR... 4 ACSR to...
DJMPR... 2/0 ACSR to ...
*(L) Recloser-DR1..., Includes Surge Arresters and Brackets.
DR1 SPEAR1 5PAC 1-0 Spear(Package) DRlSPEAR35PAC 1-0 Spear(Package)
*(M)and(N)Option—Consult the field engineer and line operation technician. Either configuration may be used:
(M)1 each and(N)1 each,as shown and listed above
or
(N)2 each CAUTION. If this configuration is chosen, be sure an alternative fault protection scheme is used upstream.
*(N) Disconnect-DSSB...
DSSB153S Switch SB Disconnect 7.2/12.5 kV 300A
DSSB353S Switch SB Disconnect 20/34.5 kV 300A
*(0) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.Order 2 for the neutral and 2 for the jumper wires.
*(P) Individual Transformer Mount-DITM, use for additional climbing space.
*(Q)3"Conduit and Standoffs-DCCRM, required for Controller Cables. Includes 30 ft. PVC,brackets,bells and mounting
hardware.
Pole,conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed. Refer to OH 05, 10,& 20.
"` R,, Recloser Installation

15-03-1 U Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
1-0 Spear Recloser Alternate Framing
�P) Load
(D) (F) Source
18"
(N) 7/ (N)
(I) ® 48" "(G)
Fol
(B)
54"min.
t]
18" /(H)
(P')Optional Mounting Rack
— for additional (Q`)3"Conduit with
climbing space Stand-off Bracket
I I
I
I
I
I
I I
I m I
To
To pole
jsystem ground
neutral
Recloser Installation 900MR..

Overhead Revised 12/22 15-03-11
3-0 Single Triple Single (STS) Recloser—
Solid Dielectric Electronic Recloser-630 Amps
(U �W)� (" ��
Source Side
12" 8, (E)
MUM
6" (S)
C) (L')� f�T) — (G*)
Bond to (F)
Steel Pin
(R)\ 48 (B) (q) For the 2/0 Configuration
i a Wedge Stirrup is used in
® _ place of the Stud Disconnect
48' in.*
(M)
(See*Q Note.) d
6"lmin.*
1
(V)Stand-off Bracket
*May increase as long as clearances
are maintained,such as with Joint Use.
For details see the next page.
Note: Consult your field engineer and line operation technician if the bypass switch mounting height
exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
RNPOW R� Recloser Installation
a.,oACORP­P11Y

15-03-12 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
3-0 Single Triple Single (STS) Recloser—630 Amps Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D10 Arm Apitong 10'3 Device 3-0 1 (A) DAA3D10 Arm Apitong 10'3 Device 3-0 1
(B) DAABKT Bracket F/Apitong Arm 1 (B) DAABKT Bracket F/Apitong Arm 1
(C)DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (C)DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(D) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (D)DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(E) DAS10/DAFT10Arm Single 10' 1 (E) DAS10/DAFT10Arm Single 10' 1
(F) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3 (F) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3
(G)DDJ...* Device Jumper 6 (G)DDJ...* Device Jumper 6
(H)DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (H)DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(K) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (K) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(L) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6 (L) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 6
(M)DLA15 Surge Arrester 10 kV F/xfrmr 1 (M)DLA35 Surge Arrester 25-27 kV F/xfrmr 1
(N)DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (N)DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(0)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3 (0)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(P) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (P) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(Q)DR...* Recloser 1 (Q)DR...* Recloser 1
(R)DSCS151 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (R)DSCS351 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(S) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (S) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(T) DSSBS1560H 15 kV SB Disc 600A or 300A* 6 (T) DSSBS3560H 35 kV SB Disc 600A/300A* 6
(U)DWC...* Wedge Connector 7 (U)DWC...* Wedge Connector 7
(V) DCCRM4* 4"Conduit Riser/Standoff 1 (V) DCCRM4* 4"Conduit Riser/Standoff 1
* Notes
*(D) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(G) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH 08-05. Includes Stud Disconnect.
DDJ336 4/0 for 336
DDJ795 250 for 795
*(H) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR40 for 4/0 to 336
DDR397 for 397 to 795
*(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0
DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(L) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW..., Refer to OH 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
DJMPRWC40 4/0 Cu Str
DJMPRWC250 250 Cu Str
*(Q) Recloser-DR..., Includes Surge Arresters and transformer.
15 kV
DR3KNSTSNOVA15 3-0 630A 15 kV Nova w/F6 TS Control. Includes a 1 kVA 12.5 kV transformer.
35 kV
DR3KNSTSNOVA35 3-0 630A 38 kV Nova w/F6 TS Control. Includes a 1 kVA 34.5 kV transformer.
NOTE. If this recloser is used on a 25kV installation, replace with a 25kV transformer Cat ID 56019.
*(T) SB DISC SW 300A or 600 A
DSSB... 15kV
DSSB... 35kV
Consult your local field engineer for feeder loading.
*(U) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(V) 4"Conduit Riser/Standoff-DCCRM
Pole,conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed. Refer to OH 05, 10,& 20.
Recloser Installation �PR,,.

Overhead Revised 12/22 15-03-13
Maintenance
1-0 Viper SP Recloser
Y\
Load Source
(K)(G) (P (D* W) (O*��
o
4„ o (B*) \
8" (M)
4„ (C*)
9
30"
min
d
60" (L-)
min 12"
(O*)
(E*
(Q*)3"Conduit with
Stand-off Bracket
For details, see the next page.
Note: Consult your field engineer and line operations technician if the bypass switch mount height
exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
RNPOW R� Recloser Installation
A.IDACORP­P11Y

15-03-14 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
1-0 Viper SP Recloser Details
For 7.2 kV Construction For 19.9 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D Crossarm Apitong 8'Device 3 pos 1 (A) DAA3D Crossarm Apitong 8'Device 3 pos 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C)DDJ...* Device Jumper 2 (C)DDJ...* Device Jumper 2
(D) DDR...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (D) DDR...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1 (F) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 1
(G)D112F Insulator 12.5 kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (G)D135J Insulator 34.5 kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(H) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 2 (H) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 2
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1 (J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(L) DR1VIPER15PAC* 1-O Viper-SP(Package) 1 (L) DR1VIPER35PAC* 1-O Viper-SP(Package) 1
(M)DSCS151 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 2 (M)DSCS351 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 2
(N)DSSB153S 7.2/12.5 kV SB Disc 300A 1 (N)DSSB353S 20/34.5 kV SB Disc 300A 1
(0)DWC...* Wedge Connector 4 (0)DWC...* Wedge Connector 4
(Q)DCCRM' 3"Conduit and Standoffs 1 (Q)DCCRM' 3"Conduit and Standoffs 1
* Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH 08-05. Includes Conductor,Wildlife Tubing,and the appropriate Connector.
DDJ4 for#4 ACSR
DDJ20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0
DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(H) Jumper wire-DJMPR..., Refer to OH 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
For rebuilds note existing wire type and sizes and order appropriate connector combinations.
DJMPR... 4 ACSR to...
DJMPR... 2/0 ACSR to ...
*(L) Recloser-DR1..., Includes Surge Arresters and Brackets.
DRIVIPER15PAC 1-O Viper-SP(Package)
DRlVIPER35PAC 1-O Viper-SP(Package)
*(0) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.Order 2 for the neutral and 2 for the jumper wires.
*(Q)3"Conduit and Standoffs-DCCRM, required for Controller Cables. Includes 30 ft.PVC,brackets, bells and mounting
hardware.
Pole,conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed. Refer to OH 05, 10,& 20.
Recloser Installation �PR,,.

Overhead Revised 12/22 15-03-15
1-0 Hydraulic Recloser In-Line or Tap (Slack Span)—Up to 100-Amps
1 To Source Side wedge stirrup
2 To Source Side wedge connector
3 To Load Side wedge connector near breaker
4 To Load Side,on load side of insulator
*
Source Side /(O*) �O ) ) Load Side (K)(G)
0 4) 4
(H*)� o
12"_ 8"
8"
(N*)
48" O 1
min 4 (M*)
60"
min.
Road Side L*)
®
(E*
I �
(Q*)3"Conduit with
i Stand-off Bracket
i
(P*)Optional Mounting Rack_ �� Bond Arresters i
for additional `� to Brackets
climbing space
I I
I
I
I
I I
I � I
To
1! �I pole
TO
jsystem ground
I neutral
L— ———
I
For details, see the next page.
Note: Consult your field engineer and line operation technician if the bypass switch mount height
exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
RNPM R,, Recloser Installation
a.,oACORP­Pa"Y

15-03-16 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
1-0 Recloser In-Line or Tap (Slack Span)—Up to 100 Amps Details
For 7.2 kV Construction For 19.9 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket BK18 2 (B) DBK18 Bracket BK18 2
(C) DDJ...' Device Jumper 2 (C) DDJ... Device Jumper 2
(D)DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (D) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1 (F) DFTJ...' Formed Top Tie 1
(G)DI12F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (G)DI35J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(H)DJMPR...' Jumper Wire 2 (H)DJMPR...' Jumper Wire 2
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1 (J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(L) DR1...' Recloser 1 (L) DR1...' Recloser 1
(M)DSCS151' 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (M)DSCS351' 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(N)DSSB153S* 7.2/12.5 kV SB Disc 300A 1 (N)DSSB353S* 20/34.5 kV SB Disc 300A 1
(0)DWC...' Wedge Connector 2 (0)DWC...' Wedge Connector 2
(P)Optional' DITM Individual Mount 1 (P) Optional' DITM Individual Mount 1
(Q)DCCRM' 3"Conduit and Standoffs 1 (Q)DCCRM' 3"Conduit and Standoffs 1
* Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt—DASB...
Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Device Jumpers-DDJ...
Refer to OH 08-05. Includes Conductor,Wildlife Tubing,and the appropriate Connector.
DDJ4 for#4 ACSR DDJ20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...
Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0
DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(H) Jumper wire-DJMPR...
Refer to OH 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
For rebuilds note existing wire type and sizes and order appropriate connector combinations.
DJMPR... 4 ACSR to... DJMPR... 2/0 ACSR to...
*(L) Recloser-DR1...
Includes Surge Arresters and Brackets.
DR1M15 1-0 7.2 kV Type V4H 2O00A Interrupting(Medium)
DR1M35 1-0 20 kV Type E 2000A Interrupting(Medium)
DR1 NOVA15 1-0 7.2 kV Type Nova 8000A Interrupting(Medium)
*(M) Fused Cutout-DSC...
A second fused cutout may be needed for 1 KVA Transformer.
DSCS151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSCS351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
*(M)and(N)Option—Consult the field engineer and line operation technician and line operation technician. Either configuration
may be used:
(M) 1 each and(N)1 each,as shown and listed above or
(N)2 each CAUTION. If this configuration is chosen, be sure an alternative fault protection scheme is used upstream.
*(N) Disconnect-DSSB...
DSSB153S Switch SB Disconnect 7.2/12.5 kV 300A DSSB353S Switch SB Disconnect 20/34.5 kV 300A
*(0) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(P) Individual Transformer Mount-DITM,use for additional climbing space.
*(Q)3"Conduit and Standoffs-DCCRM, required for Controller Cables. Includes 30 ft. PVC,brackets, bells and mounting
hardware.
Pole, conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed, refer to Overhead Manual 05, 10, & 20.
Recloser Installation 99PR,,.

Overhead Revised 12/22 15-03-17
3-0 Electronic Recloser-400 and 560 Amps
(U* (d*� (N)_*)__.' Source Side
(K)(0)
12" T o (E) ® D*)
6"
® (R
(C C) (F)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin 49' Steel Pin
(A) B*) (L*) (G*)
48"min.*
r
42"
d
(T*)
0
1 �--(P*)
1
6"min.*
�M)
May increase as long as clearances are maintained,
such as with Joint Use. (V*)3"or 4"Conduit with
Stand-off Bracket
Comments:
Some installations utilize a junction box to connect the service to the supply cables, see next page.
Note: Consult your field engineer and line operation technician if the bypass switch mounting height
exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
RNPOW R� Recloser Installation
A.IDACORP­P11Y

15-03-18 Reviewed 12122 Overhead
3-0 Electronic Recloser-400- and 560-Amps Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D10 Arm Apitong 9'8"Device 3-0 1 (A) DAA3D10 Arm Apitong 9'8"Device 3-0 1
(B) DAABKT' Bracket F/Apitong Arm 1 (B) DAABKT' Bracket F/Apitong Arm 1
(C)DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (C)DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(D)DASB... Anti-split Bolt 1 (D)DASB...' Anti-split Bolt 1
(E) DAS10/DAFT10Arm Single 10' 1 (E) DAS10/DAFT10 Arm Single 10' 1
(F) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3 (F) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3
(G)DDJ...' Device Jumper 6 (G)DDJ...' Device Jumper 6
(H)DDR...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (H)DDR...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(I) DFSP...' Formed Spool Tie 1 (I) DFSP...' Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFTF...' Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFTJ...' Formed Top Tie 3
(K) DI12F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (K) DI35J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(L) DJMPR...' Jumper Wire 6 (L) DJMPR...' Jumper Wire 6
(M)DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (M)DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(N)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3 (N)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(0)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (0)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(P) DR...' Recloser 1 (P) DR...' Recloser 1
(Q)DSCS15V 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (Q)DSCS35V 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(R)DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (R)DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(S) DSSBS1560H 15 kV SB Disc 600A 6 (S) DSSBS3560H 35 kV SB Disc 600A 6
(T) DT...' Local Service Transformer 1 (T) DT...' Local Service Transformer 1
(U)DWC...' Wedge Connector 8 (U)DWC...' Wedge Connector 8
(V)DCCRM...' Conduit and Standoffs 1 (V)DCCRM...' Conduit and Standoffs 1
* Notes
'(B) See*(T)note
'(D) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(G) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH 08-05. Includes Stud Disconnect.
DDJ336 4/0 for 336
DDJ795 250 for 795
'(H) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR40 for 4/0 to 336
DDR397 for 397 to 795
'(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0
DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
'(L) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW..., Refer to OH 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
DJMPRWC40 4/0 Cu Str
DJMPRWC250 250 Cu Str
'(P) Recloser-DR..., Includes Surge Arresters.These 2 reclosers may be used for 12.5 kV or 34.5 kV applications.
DRWVE 3-0 560A 34.5 kV Type WVE 8000A Intrpt w/HD mounting frame
DRERVE 3-0 400A 34.5 kV Type RVE 6000A Intrpt w/HD mounting frame
'(Q) See*(T)note
'(T) Local Service Transformer-DT...,Order as needed.
NOTE. The Local Service equipment(B,Q,T)may be located on another pole.Order as needed.
'(U) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
'(V)Conduit and Standoffs—DCCRM..., Includes 30 ft PVC, brackets, bells and mounting hardware.
DCCRM 4"Conduit and Standoff Brackets
Pole, conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed, see Overhead Manual 05, 10, & 20.
Recloser Installation "` R,,

Overhead Reviewed 12122 15-03-19
3-0 Electronic Recloser Supply Wiring Details
Materials List(Partial)
Cat ID Description Note in Illustration
1156 240V Supply Cable(may come w/equipment)..1
1157 Supply Cable(may come w/equipment)...........1
1158 14 Pin Control Cable
5700 C-Tap Connector
6454 Padlock
50541 AirSeal 2
Some installations utilize a junction box to connect the service to the supply cables.
-a
b o
y >
0
120/240V Service
to Electronic Recloser
Insulate Hot Leg Connections
See Note 2.
240V Supply Cable to _T
Closing Coil (1156)
(furnished with recloser)
This Wedge is
Ordered Separately
i
120V Supply Cable to
Stand-off Bracket Control Cabinet(1157)
��-- 35'Control Cable (1158) (furnished with control)
(furnished with control) See Note 1.
/ See Note 1. 10,
f '
"All cables will be in a 3"or
4"conduit stand-off.
` AHO
ppM Recloser Installation
a.......a—p-Y

15-03-20 Revised 12/22 Overhead
3-0 Hydraulic Recloser—Up to 200-Amps and 15kV Only
T3K (M) (G*)
(I*) Source Side
(J)(N)
12" 8. ® (p) ® C*)
6" -
® (Q)
(B) (B) �(P)
Bond to Bond to (E)
Steel Pin 48" Steel Pin
(A) (K*)
(F*)
® -(R)
48"
0
�S*)
�L)
For details see the next page.
Note: Consult your field engineer and line operation technician if the bypass switch mount height
exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
Recloser Installation 900MR..

Overhead Reviewed 12122 15-03-21
3-0 Hydraulic Recloser—Up to 200-Amps and 15kV Only Details
For 12.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D Arm Apitong 8'3 Device 3-0 1
(B) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(C)DASB... Anti-split Bolt 1
(D) DAS10 Arm Single 10' 1
(E) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3
(F) DDJ...* Device Jumper 6
(G)DDR...' Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(H)DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(1) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3
(J) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3
(K) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6
(L) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(M)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(N)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(0)DR3M15" Recloser 3-0 Type V6H 2O0A 1
(P) DSCS151 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 3
(Q)DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(R)DSSB153S 7.2/12.5 kV SB Disc 300A 3
(S) DWC...* Wedge Connector 7
* Notes
*(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(F) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH 08-05. Includes appropriate Connector;Wedge or Wedge Stirrup,according to wire size
ordered.
DDJ4 for#4 ACSR
DDJ20 for 2/0 ACSR
'(G) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
"(H) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
`(I) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0
`(K) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW..., Refer to OH 08-05.Wedge Connectors must be ordered separately.
DJMPRW... 4 ACSR to...
DJMPRW... 2/0 ACSR to ...
*(0) Recloser-DR3M15, Includes Surge Arresters.
`(S) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed. Refer to OH 05, 10,&20.
"` R,, Recloser Installation

15-03-22 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
3-0 Hydraulic Recloser-400- and 560-Amps
(w (j*� (N)�*)--., Source Side
-Pfl
(K)(0)
12 $ ® (E) ® *)
ARE 6"
® (R
(C C) (F)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin 49' Steel Pin
(A) B*)
-(S)
(Q*)
48"min
42"
0
l �(P*)
1
8"min.*
�M)
*May increase as long as clearances are maintained,
such as with Joint Use.
For details see the next page.
Note: Consult your field engineer and line operation technician if the bypass switch mounting height
exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
Recloser Installation WOOMR.

Overhead Reviewed 12122 15-03-23
3-0 Hydraulic Recloser—A00- and 560-Amps Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D Arm Apitong 8'3 Device 3-0 1 (A) DAA3D Arm Apitong 8'3 Device 3-0 1
(B) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (B) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (C)DASB... Anti-split Bolt 1
(D)DAS10 Arm Single 10' 1 (D) DAS10 Arm Single 10' 1
(E) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3 (E) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3
(F) DDJ...* Device Jumper 6 (F) DDJ...* Device Jumper 6
(G)DDR..." Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (G)DDR... Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(H)DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (H)DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(1) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (1) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(J) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (J) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(K) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6 (K) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6
(L) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (L) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(M)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3 (M)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(N)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (N)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(0)DR..." Recloser 1 (0)DR...' Recloser 1
(P) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (P) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(Q)DSSBS1560H 15 kV SB Disc 600A 6 (Q)DSSBS3560H 35 kV SB Disc 600A 6
(R)DWC...- Wedge Connector 7 (R)DWC...` Wedge Connector 7
* Notes
*(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(F) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH 08-05. Includes Stud Disconnect.
DDJ336 4/0 for 336
DDJ795 250 for 795
'(G) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR40 for 4/0 to 336
DDR397 for 397 to 795
`(H) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
`(I) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
(K) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW..., Refer to OH 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
DJMPRWC40 4/0 Cu Str
DJMPRWC250 250 Cu Str
*(0) Recloser-DR..., Includes Surge Arresters.
DR3H15 3-0 400A 12.5 kV Type RV 6000A Intrpt w/HD mounting frame
DR3H35 3-0 400A 34.5 kV Type RV 6000A Intrpt w/medium mounting frame
DRVW15 3-0 560A 12.5 kV Type VW 12000A Max w/HD mounting frame
DRVWV35 3-0 560A 34.5 kV Type VWV 12000A Intrpt w.HD mounting frame
"(R) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to OH 05, 10, & 20.
ROOMER,,R,, Recloser Installation

15-03-24 Revised 12/22 Overhead
3-0 Triple Single Recloser—Rarely used
Contact M&M before using
Rarely used- 3 - Individual TS Recloser.
Refer to OH page 15-03-17 & 18 on STS Recloser
Install.
For the 2/0 Configuration
a Wedge Stirrup is used in
7i7
Source Side
(U*�*�(N� (d%
(K*)(O
0
12" $, —(C*) (D)
6"— A
EN
Bond to Bond to \(F) L)
Steel Pin qg" Steel Pin
0
(R>� c*)
S) Vise-top Option:(K*)
72" 9"Min.(T) No tie(T)or cutting
of tubing needed.
Select this option to
provide avian protection here.
O O
0 (V)4"Conduit with
14" —(P*) Stand-off Brackets
0
Triple-single reclosers are most commonly used for SCADA applications or when shifting from three
phases to one.
Notes.
1) Local service can be installed either on the same pole as the recloser or on another pole.
2) Consult your field engineer and line operation technician if the bypass switch mounting height
exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
For details see the next page
Recloser Installation 9001MR..
AlIDA-P"� Y

Overhead Reviewed 12122 15-03-25
3-0 Triple Single Electronic Recloser-12.5 kV or 25 kV, 400 Amp Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 25 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D Arm Apitong 8'3 Device 3-0 1 (A) DAA3D Arm Apitong 8'3 Device 3-0 1
(B) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (B) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (C)DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(D)DAS10/DAFT10Arm Single 10' 1 (D)DAS10/DAFT10Arm Single 10' 1
(E) DCMB Cluster Mount Rack 1 (E) DCMB Cluster Mount Rack 1
(F) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3 (F) DCMBK Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3
(G)DDJ...* Device Jumper 6 (G)DDJ...* Device Jumper 6
(H)DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (H)DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(K) DI12F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 4* (K) DI35J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 4*
(K) (Optional)DI35V* Vise-top Insulator (K) (Optional)DI35V* Vise-top Insulator
(L) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6 (L) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6
(M)DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (M)DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(N)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3 (N)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(0)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (0)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(P) DR...* Recloser 1 (P) DR...* Recloser 1
(Q)DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (Q)DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(R)DSSBS1560H 15 kV SB Disc 600A 6 (R)DSSBS3560H 35 kV SIB Disc 600A 6
(S) DTADP Thimble Adapter 1 (S) DTADP Thimble Adapter 1
(T) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 1 (T) DTYC Tie Wire F/CU 1
(U)DWC...* Wedge Connector 7 (U)DWC...* Wedge Connector 7
(V)DCCRM4* 4"Conduit and Standoffs 1 (V)DCCRM4* 4"Conduit and Standoffs 1
* Notes
*(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(G) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH 08-05. Includes Stud Disconnect.
DDJ336 4/0 for 336
DDJ795 250 for 795
*(H) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR40 for 4/0 to 336
DDR397 for 397 to 795
*(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(K)If the optional Vise-top Insulator is chosen,be sure to adjust the total number of(J),(K)and(T)ordered.
Refer to OH Page 11-33-02 for vise-top application details. (also shown in detail on page 19-02-06)
*(L) Jumper Wire—DJMPRW, refer to Overhead Manual 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
DJMPRWC40 4/0 Cu Str
DJMPRWC250 250 Cu Str
*(P) Recloser-DR...,Includes Surge Arresters.Contact Methods&Materials,see notes previous page
15 kV CALL JUN GOLO
DR3KNTSNOVA15 Three 1-0 400A 15 kV Nova3 W/F6 Control
25 kV CALL JUN GOLO
DR3NOVAF527 Three 1-0 400A 27 kV Nova W/F6 Control
*(U) Wedge Connector-DWC...,order by wire sizes.
*(V) 4"Conduit and Standoffs—DCCRM4...,required for controller cables. Includes 30 ft PVC, brackets, bells,and mounting
hardware.
Pole,conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed. Refer to OH 05, 10,&20.
"` R,, Recloser Installation

Overhead Reviewed 11/19 15-04-01
Recloser Operating Instructions
Manual Operation
Hydraulic reclosers can be manually operated position of the contacts at any time in the
using the yellow operating handle under the sleet operating sequence.
hood. Pull the handle down to open and push it
up to close.When the recloser locks out Low voltage closing and
automatically,the yellow handle drops down to control cable connector
indicate lockout. 0
The hot line hold(non-reclosing)lever and the
operations counter are located under the sleet
hood. Contact Position
Indicator(Red)
Manual Operating Nameplate)
The larger 3-0 units also have a red contact Handle(Yellow)
position indicator under the sleet hood that
shows the position of the contacts at any time in The Contact Position Indicator of a Nova is
the operating sequence. located on the bottom of the Nova tank, and
displays a red indication for closed and green for
Operations Counter open.
(under sleet hood)
There is no operations counter or hot line
CLOSE C protection lever under the sleet hood of the
O%v electronic recloser. These functions are located
in the control cabinet.
Z'Non-reclosing Bypassing
Lever
Manual Operating When bypassing a recloser with solid blades,
Handle(Yellow) make sure the upstream device will sense and
interrupt any expected faults downstream of the
Contact Position safety hazards may f recloser. Serious sae
Indicator(Red) y exist when
a recloser is bypassed.An alternative fault
protection scheme should be used when
Electronic reclosers are normally manually necessary.
opened and closed with a lever or a push button
inside the control cabinet. The yellow manual Depending on the situation,reclosers can be
operating handle under the sleet hood should be bypassed with fuses. Fuses should be sized to
used to open the recloser when the electronic handle load current, coordinate with upstream
controller fails or when it is desired to inhibit and downstream devices, and sized to operate
closing with the electronic control.The yellow for faults in its zone of protection.
handle does not come down when the recloser
locks out. You will not be able to close the A bypass operation shall not be done without
recloser if the control is inoperative. the prior approval of the dispatcher.
With the exception of the Cooper Nova recloser, Bypass switches are used in all 3-0 electronic
a red Contact Position Indicator lever moves up recloser installations.All other installations will
and down under the sleet hood to indicate the use hot jumpers for the bypass operation.
"EMS R. Recloser Operating Instructions

15-04-02 Revised 11/19 Overhead
Cold Load Pick-Up Hot Line Hold
Hydraulic reclosers have no provision for Hot Line Hold is a statement with
picking up cold load. Holding the yellow manual documentation(a Hot Line Hold tag) from a
operating handle under the sleet hood in the dispatcher to a person,that the automatic reclose
closed position will not help since the recloser feature of a protective device(recloser or
will trip anyway. If a hydraulic recloser locks breaker)has been disabled and tagged as such in
out on cold load pick-up,you will probably have the name of the person requesting Hot Line
to reduce the amount of connected load Hold. It is an assurance from the dispatcher,
downstream of the recloser.Exercise caution should the affected device open or affected
because what you think is cold load could circuit become de-energized for any reason
actually be a fault. while the Hot Line Hold is in effect,the line
shall not be re-energized until the person for
Hydraulic reclosers with one or more fast trips who the device is tagged determines workers are
have no provision allowing the fast trip to be clear and releases the Hot Line Hold to the
bypassed. These may need to be closed in their dispatcher. Hot Line Hold always pertains to
normal reclosing mode to allow the recloser to energized lines or equipment.
cycle thru the fast trip(s)to the delayed curve.
Automatic reclose is disabled on the protective
Electronic reclosers. For electronic device either by turning Reclose Off or by
controllers which have a HLH control point enabling the Hot Line Hold On setting. While in
separate and discreet from RECLOSE OFF, Reclose Off,the devices times on its normal
HLH must be turned OFF prior to a manual curve. Hot Line Hold On enables an
close attempt. instantaneous trip and disables reclose.
All electronic controllers should be placed or If a device lockout occurs while a Hot Line Hold
verified in a one-trip-to-lockout mode before a is in effect,the Hot Line Hold shall be released
manual close. This verification can be via before an attempt is made to re-energize the line.
control labeling,onscreen status message or the After the dispatcher releases the Hot Line Hold,
RECLOSE OFF control regular cold load pickup procedures and
guidelines apply.
Cooper Form 4C allows you to hold the control
lever in the cabinet in the closed position to Hydraulic reclosers. Hot Line Hold is
bypass any fast trips and go directly to a delayed accomplished by pulling the non-reclosing lever
trip.As long as the controller is toggled to non- under the sleet hood down to set the recloser to
reclosing prior to the close attempt,it will still Reclose Off mode. Seepage 15-04-01.
initiate trip and lockout if cold load is excessive
or if a fault occurs. The"current above Electronic reclosers. Hot Line Hold is
minimum trip"indicator should be observed accomplished by either turning Reclose Off or
while the operator holds the control lever closed. by enabling the Hot Line Hold On setting.
If the indicator is on,the lever must be held over
as many minutes as necessary until the indicator Sectionalizers. A sectionalizer is not a fault
goes off or the recloser trips and locks out. interrupting protective device, and cannot be
Cooper Form 6, SEL 3 5 1 R and 651R controls used for Hot Line Hold protection.
have features to activate the delayed curve on a
control close with one shot to lock out.About 60
seconds after a successful close,they revert back
to the normal settings.
If the recloser continues to lock out,patrol the
feeder carefully for a fault. If there is no fault,
sectionalize to pick up the load.
Recloser Operating Instructions Ra
11IDACa.PCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/21 15-12-01
Sectionalizer Types and Applications
Sectionalizer Operation Electronic sectionalizers utilize an electronic
control that is housed in a cabinet mounted on
A sectionalizer is a high voltage in-line the tank. Overcurrents and current unbalance
protection device that automatically isolates (ground faults)are detected by means of current
faulted sections of line on a distribution system. transformers (CTs)mounted inside the
A sectionalizer differs from a recloser in that the sectionalizer tank. Electronic circuits perform
sectionalizer does not interrupt fault current or timing and counting functions.
reclose automatically. The sectionalizer depends
on a source side feeder breaker or recloser to
perform these functions. Sectionalizers can be
used in place of a fuse or between a reclosing
device and a fuse.
The sectionalizer"counts"the number of times
an overcurrent happens as a backup device trips
and recloses.After a prescribed number of
"counts"or"shots"the sectionalizer will open or
"lock out". The sectionalizer contacts open 12.5&34.5-kV p Electronic Sectionalize
ype GV& GW
while the circuit is de-energized during the brief
period before the backup device recloses. In this The PRS is an electronic programmable, single-
manner the Sectionalizer is able to selectively phase or three-phase,resettable sectionalizer that
isolate the faulted portion from the main system mount, tout.
without having to interrupt fault current. Since Overc The PRS sectionalizer is no a CT.
the sectionalizer does not include an internal Timini longer used.This information an
fault interrupting mechanism(load break only) electr is shown for reference only RS are
on installed materials.
the installation is more economical than a chang ply
similarly rated recloser installation connecting your PC to the unit using a USB
cable. The PC software comes with the module.
Sectionalizer Types The new style PRS can be reset in air with new
trunnion.To reset new PRS in place,push
Hydraulic sectionalizers are built as self- towards the bottom of the cutout body(a).
contained units. They use oil for insulation. The
control mechanism is mounted inside the tank.
This type of Sectionalizer detects overcurrents
by means of an actuating coil connected in series
with the line.This coil operates the plunger
mechanism of a hydraulic pump that controls the
timing and contact opening functions for the
sectionalizer.The sectionalizer must be closed
manually.
❑ , .
d
Push to reset"in air"
7.2-kV 1-0 Sectionalizer 7.2 &19.9kV 1-0 Sectionalizer Type PRS
Type GH 12.5&34.5 kV 3-0 Sectionalizer Type PRS
"` R Sectionalizer Types and Applications

15-12-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Interrupting Maximum Max. Cont Momentary
Loadbreak Operating Current and Making
Cat. ID Type CU Code Current Voltage (amps) (Max.amps)
1-0 Hydraulic Sectionalizers
1124 1-0 TYPE GH DS111 308 7.2 kV 140 6,50W
1-0 Electronic Sectionalizers
53417 1-0 TYPE PRS DSEP15 0 7.2 kV 300 12,000**
53416 1-0 TYPE PRS DSEP35 014.4 kV or 19.9 kV 300 12,000**
3-0 Electronic Sectionalizers
1127 3-0 TYPEGV DS314E 880 12.5 kV 400 20,000*
1128 3-0 TYPE GW DS334E 880 34.5 kV 400 15,000*
55932 3-0 TYPE PRS DSEP315 0 12.5kV 300 12,000**
55933 3-0 TYPE PRS DSEP335 0 34.5 kV 300 12,000**
* The maximum fault current interrupt rating may be limited by the size of the trip coil and load make assymetrical
current.
** The PRS sectionalizer is obsolete. Shown for infomational purposes only.
1-0 Sectionalizer Applications 3-0 Sectionalizer Applications
Use 1-0 Sectionalizers in conjunction with 1-0 3-0 sectionalizers are always used in
reclosers. On 1-0 taps off a 3-0 circuit a 3-0 conjunction with 3-0 reclosers where there are
recloser may be used as the backup protective coordination problems or on large 3-0
device. Sectionalizers are also used where fuse underground dips where 3-0 switching is
coordination is not possible or where the load necessary.
exceeds the rating of a standard cutout.
There are a number of different types of 3-0
♦ Be sure that the
sectionalizer actuating sectionalizers in service.The only types of 3-0current is 160/o of continuous current sectionalizers that will be installed new or
rating of a hydraulic recloser and 80% maintained by Idaho Power's TransTest shop are
of minimum trip for electronic reclosers. types GV and GW.
♦ Be sure that the maximum fault current For an electronic recloser,use type GV.
level does not exceed the rating of the
sectionalizer 3-0,34.5 kV Circuits. There are no hydraulic
controlled sectionalizers available for 34.5 kV.
CAUTION. The level of fault current that a
sectionalizer can interrupt is dependent on the For an electronic sectionalizer,use type GW or
size of the actuating coil. (See Page 15-12-04) PRS.
3-0,PRS Type. The 3-0 PRS comprises
1-0,7.2 kV circuits. Use a type GH or for three cutout mountings and three electronic
higher fault and continuous current levels use modul en the
type PRS. three L The PRS sectionalizer is no s are
longer used.This information
1-0,7.2 kV, 14.4 kV and 19.9 kV circuits. integr, is shown for reference only s. The
PRS sectionalizer is no longer used. Comm on installed materials. pen air).
A syn all of the
three 30 PRS units when a permanent fault is
seen by any of the three units.The 30 PRS
modules fit into the standard mounting of the
Chance Type C, S&C (MPS)Type XS and ABB
Type ICX cutout.
Sectionalizer Types and Applications WWMRa
AlIDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/21 15-12-03
OBSOLETE 01 /21
tault current o exceed e Actuating body a ter 3-phaseOperation:
Current Setting of the PRS for at least 1
cycle. If one at a time closing of PRS is a concern due
to imbalance and single phasing, do one of the
2. Following this, it looks for a deadline following:
condition of 200mA or less for at least 5
cycles. 1) Close"block"the upstream electronic
recloser before closing the 3-phase PRS one at a
When these 2-events are met,the sectionalizer time. Then put recloser to normal.
registers a count and fires its solenoid to drop Or
out of the cutout. 2) Open the upstream 3-phase device and close
the 3-phase PRS one at a time.Then close the
Important Note on PRS Placement: upstream device to normal.
Sometimes PRS could have a potential problem
with some distributed generation nearby that is Image on page: OH 15-12-01.
back feeding current higher than 200mA.The
same situation will apply to a capacitor bank
very close and feeding back into the device a
E''�IDiAHO
RMIRMER. Sectionalizer Types and Applications

15-12-04 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Actuating Current Settings Actuating Coil Selection
To assure that the sectionalizer will sense and The table below shows the available actuating
count every overcurrent trip operation of the coil sizes for sectionalizers and their Continuous
backup protective device, the minimum and minimum actuating current ratings and
actuating current should be 160% of minimum maximum momentary or fault making current
trip if the backup recloser is hydraulically rating(rms symmetrical amps).
controlled, and 80% of minimum trip if the
backup recloser is electronically controlled. Number of Overcurrent Counts-to-
Trip
The sectionalizer must be set so that the number
of overcurrent counts-to-trip is less than the
number of trips to lockout of the source-side
recloser.
Sectionalizer Actuating Coils(amps)
1-0 Type GH
Cont. Current 5 10 15 25 35 50 70 100 140
Min.Actuating 8 16 24 40 56 80 112 160 224
Momentary 800 1600 2400 4000 6000 6500 6500 6500 6500
1-0 Type PRS OBSOLETE
Cont. Current 300
Min.Actuating Programmable between 10 and 480
3-0 Type GV
Cont. Current 10 15 25 35 50 70 100 140 160 185 200 275 300 400
Min.Actuating 16 24 40 56 80 112 160 224 256 296 320 448 480 640
3-0 Type GW
Cont. Current 10 15 25 35 50 70 100 140 160 185 200 275 300 400
Min.Actuating 16 24 40 56 80 112 160 224 256 296 320 448 480 640
3-0 Type GV&GW Ground
Cont. Current 2 4.5 10 15 25 35 50 70 100 140 160 185 200
Min.Actuating 3.5 7 16 24 40 56 80 112 160 224 256 296 320
3-0 Type PRS OBSOLETE
Cont. Current 300
Min.Actuating Programmable between 16 and 480
Note. Consult the manufacturer's literature for sectionalizer information not shown in this table
Sectionalizer Types and Applications 9911130MR,

Overhead Revised 01/21 15-12-05
Sectionalizer Accessories Sectionalizer Electronic Controls
Voltage Restraint. The voltage-restraint Electronically controlled 3-0 sectionalizers have
accessory may be added to GV and GW a control that is external to the tank.This allows
sectionalizers. This accessory will prevent the settings to be changed without removing the
unnecessary circuit outages due to inrush device from service. Removal and replacement
currents or fault currents that are interrupted by of the plug-in resistors can change the minimum
a load-side device.As long as voltage is present actuating current levels. Selector switches can
on the sectonalizer's source side,the voltage- change the number of overcurrent counts to trip
restraint accessory will prevent the sectionalizer and the reset time.
from opening.
Phase-Min-
Inrush-Current Restraint. This accessory Rutsentg
0000000000 Current
stor
prevents false counting and operation of the 60 90
3 1
sectionalizer during operation of a source side � ,50O Count Reset
protective device for faults on other parts of the �� « �=i)
feeder o o ® �0 -Number of
Counts to
0 o cats Open
o=1 To OPen
Count Restraint.Prevents counting of
overcurrents that are interrupted by downline Ground-Min-
0 Q Actuating
devices. ® 0 Current
Resistor
0 �
Low Voltage Wiring 000
000
Types GV, and GW(equipped with voltage o
restraint)will require 120 volts from a source 00 00
side distribution transformer.The sectionalizers 000 o
will perform basic operations without the 120
volt source; however,the voltage restraint(older
GV,GW)or inrush restraint(newer GV, GW and GV, GW Control
GWC) accessories will not function.
i''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Sectionalizer Types and Applications

Overhead Revised 01/21 15-13-01
Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration
Installation
Disconnect switches. Switches are installed on
the source side of the sectionalizes to provide for
a"visible open"when needed. See page =_ tc
15-03-01 for switch types. Front
Labels
Sectionalizer Racks. A 1-0 recloser comes
with a pole mount hanger.For 3-0 types GV and
GW use a heavy-duty rack. See page 15-03-02
for details.
O
Orientation. All standard sectionalizers on the
distribution system may be oriented without o 0
regard to source or load direction. The tank
should be positioned such that the controls are
visible from the road.
Low Voltage Wiring. If the installation 50 50 0
involves low voltage wiring to an electronic 2 Shot 2 Shot
control, a qualified technician or engineer should ID Stenciled on Hydraulic Sectionalizer
be present to direct the installation.
Pole tag shall indicate substation, feeder number,
Surge Protection. All sectionalizers shall have and the device designation.
lightning arresters mounted on the rack, on both
source and load sides.
00
L
C
Identification and Marking S
Hydraulic sectionalizers shall be stenciled in T
the Idaho Power TransTest shop. The stencil 0 °
should include the continuous current rating and 041
the number of counts to trip.At least 3" S10
stenciling will be used and should be applied as
shown.
Single-phase hydraulic sectionalizers will be
stenciled on the sleet hood side of the tank.
Three-phase sectionalizers will be stenciled on
the tank front and sleet hood side. Sectionalizer Pole Tags
Electronic recloser should only indicate the
type of device (GV or GW).
E''� AH IDO
�wPOWER. Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration

15-13-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
1-0 Hydraulic Sectionalizer 7.2 kV - Up to 100 Amps Type GH
TTb
To Source Side wedge stirrup
To Source Side wedge connector
4%�WTo Load Side wedge connector near breaker
Load Side,on load side of insulator
Source Side (d) (O*) (O*) (F*) Load Side (K)(G)
O o O 101, O 4 ® O
12.. ® 8"
(C*/� 4" (q*�
8"
(N )*
I
48" O
min 4 (M*)
60"
min.
Road Side (L*)
if
(E*)
/
I �
(P*)Optional Mounting Rack_ �� Bond Arresters i
for additional to Brackets
climbing space
I I
For installation details
I
o (see page 19-01-02)
I I
o
To I
I I
pole
TO ground
system
neutral
L------------------I
For details, see the next page
Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration WWMRa
A�IDAC"RPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/21 15-13-03
1-0 Hydraulic Sectionalizer 7.2 kV - Up to 100 Amps Type GH Details
For 7.2 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket BK18 2
(C) DDJ...* Device Jumper 2
(D) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 1
(G)D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 1
(H) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 2
(1) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(L) DS111...* Sectionalizer 1
(M)DSCS151* 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(N)DSSBS153* 7.2/12.5 kV SB Disc 300A 1
(0)DWC...* Wedge Connector 2
(P) Optional* DITM Individual Mount 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH Section 08-05. Includes Conductor,Wildlife Tubing,and the appropriate Connector.
DDJ4 for#4 ACSR
DDJ20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(H) Jumper wire-DJMPR.... Refer to OH Section 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
DJMPR... 4 ACSR to...
DJMPR... 2/0 ACSR to ...
*(L) Sectionalizer-DS111.... Includes Surge Arresters and Brackets.
DS111 1-0 12.5 kV Type GH 140A
*(M)and(N)Option-Either configuration may be used:
(M) 1 each and(N)1 each,as shown and listed above
or
(N)2 each CAUTION. If this configuration is chosen, be sure an alternative fault protection scheme is used upstream.
*(0) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(P) Individual Transformer Mount-DITM, Use for additional climbing space.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,, Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration

15-13-04 Revised 01/21 Overhead
1-0 Electronic Programmable Sectionalizer - 7.2 kV and 19.9 kV, Up to 100 Amps
Type PRS
P) D) (1*)
Load Side "'0�11 '000�/ Source Side
0
G) (J)
4^ (A*) o
12"
8„ o
OBSOLETE 01 /21
an extra fuse door to return
(g) (K) to Stores when installing
this type of sectionalizer.
60"
E*)
(H)
For details, see the next page.
Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration WWMRa
a�,o.CORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/21 15-13-05
1-0 Electronic Sectionalizer - 7.2 kV and 19.9 kV, Up to 100 Amps Type PRS Details
For 7.2 kV Construction For 19.9 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket BK18 1 (B) DBK18 Bracket BK18 1
OBSOLETE 01 /21
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(1) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1 (1) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(J) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (J) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(K DSCS151 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (K) DSCS351 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(L) DSEP15* Sectionalizer 1 (L) DSEP35* Sectionalizer 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Are included in crossarm and pole CLI codes.
*(C) Device Jumpers-DDJ.... Refer to OH Section 08-05. Includes Conductor,Wildlife Tubing,and the appropriate Connector.
DDJ4 for#4 ACSR
DDJ20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(D) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
*(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(L) Sectionalizer-DSEP..., Note.There will be an extra fuse to return to Stores when installing this type of sectionalizer.
DSEP15 1-0 PRS Electronic Programmable DSEP35 1-0 PRS Electronic Programmable
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
�POMR,, Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration

15-13-06 Revised 01/21 Overhead
3-0 Sectionalizer— Up to 400 Amps Types GV and GW
For the 2/0 Configuration
a Wedge Stirrup is used in
place of the Stud Disconnect
(77:f:)
(w (J*, (H*1--,(N -",
Source Side
(K)(0)
6"
® (R
(C C) (F*)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin 48,. Steel Pin
B*)
0
® ( ~(S)
Q
4
42"
d
— (T*)
0
(P*)
�M)
For details, see the next page.
Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration MWMRa
A�IDAC"RP C­"Y

Overhead Revised 01/21 15-13-07
3-0 Sectionalizer— Up to 400 Amps Types GV and GW Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D Arm Apitong 8' 3 Device 3-0 1 (A) DAA3D Arm Apitong 8' 3 Device 3-0 1
(B) DAABKT* Bracket F/Apitong Arm 1 (B) DAABKT* Bracket F/Apitong Arm 1
(C) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (C) DASB6' Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(D) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (D) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(E) DAS10 Arm Single 10' 1 (E) DAS10 Arm Single 10' 1
(F) DCMBK...* Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3 (F) DCMBK...* Mtg Bracket F/Cutout on arm 3
(G)DDJ...* Device Jumper 6 (G)DDJ...* Device Jumper 6
(H) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (H) DDR...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(K) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (K) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(L) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 6 (L) DJMPR...* Jumper Wire 6
(M)DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (M)DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(N)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3 (N)DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(0)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (0)DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(P) DS...* Sectionalizer 1 (P) DS...* Sectionalizer 1
(Q)DSCS151 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (Q)DSCS351 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(R)DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (R)DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(S) DSSB1560H 15 kV SB Disc 600A 6 (S) DSSB3560H 35 kV SB Disc 600A 6
(T) ... Local Service Transformer 1 (T) ... Local Service Transformer 1
(U)DWC...* Wedge Connector 8 (U)DWC...* Wedge Connector 8
*Notes
*(B) See*(T)note
*(D) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(F) Mounting Bracket-DCMBK..., In some cases a fatter crossarm may require a larger bracket.Order as needed.
DCMBK Cutout Mtg Bracket with 5"Bolts
DCMBK10 Cutout Mtg Bracket with 10"Bolts
*(G) Device Jumpers-DDJ..., Refer to OH Section 08-05. Includes Wedge Stirrup or Stud Disconnect.
DDJ4 #4 for#4 ACSR
DDJ20 2/0 for 2/0 ACSR
DDJ336 4/0 for 336
*(H) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for#4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
DDR40 for 4/0 to 336
*(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
DFSP336 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.336
*(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
DFTF336 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.336 DFTJ336 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No. 336
*(L) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW..., Refer to OH Section 08-05.Wedge connectors must be ordered separately.
DJMPRWC4 #4 Cu Str
DJMPRC20 2/0 Cu Str
DJMPRWC40 4/0 Cu Str
DJMPRWC250 250 Cu Str
*(P) Sectionalizer-..., Includes Surge Arresters.
DS314E 3-0 400A 12.5 kV Type GV 15000A Intrpt DS334E 3-0 400A 34.5 kV Type GW 15000A Intrpt
w/HD mounting frame w/HD mounting frame
See*(T)note
*(T) Local Service Transformer-D...,Order as needed.
NOTE. The Local Service equipment(B,Q,T)may be located on another pole.Order as needed.
DCAPTA1 12.5 kV 1/2 kVA Transformer DCAPTR1 34.5 kV 1/2 kVA Transformer
*(U) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
ONPOMR,, Sectionalizer Installation & Configuration

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 15-14-01
Sectionalizer Operating Instructions
Manual Operation
Nameplate
Hydraulic Sectionalizers. Opening and Operations Contact
Count
closing for all hydraulic sectionalizers is (U derr Position
sleet hood) Indicator
controlled by a yellow,manual-operating handle (red)
located under the sleet hood. Pull the handle
down to open the sectionalizer. Push up to close Manual
it.When the sectionalizes contacts open Opening
Pull Ring Manual
automatically,the yellow handle drops down to (yellow) Closing
indicate lockout.Note the absence of the hot line (One pull Pull Ring
to open) O", —to
(Pump 12
protection(non-reclosing)lever found on to 14 times
120 Volt close)
hydraulic reclosers. Connection
Fuse for
120-Volt Supply
One-Count-to-Open
0 Lever
Electronic Sectionalizer Operator Cabinet
0
Bypassing
Manual Operating
Handle (yellow) Bypassing a sectionalizer for long periods is not
as critical as for a recloser since the sectionalizer
Hydraulic Sectionalizer Sleet Hood will always have a backup device which detects
Electronic Sectionalizers. Opening for and interrupts faults in the protection zone of the
electronic types GV and GW sectionalizers is sectionalizer. If a fault occurs while the
controlled by a yellow pull-ring located on the sectionalizer is bypassed, a larger portion of the
underside of the operator cabinet mounted on the feeder will be affected.A bypass operation must
side of the sectionalizer tank. One pull trips a
first be cleared with the dispatcher.
spring and opens the sectionalizer. The gray ring
on the right is the manual closing pull ring. This
pull—ring must be pumped 12 to 14 times to
recharge the springs and close the sectionalizer.
The lever in the middle is the one-count-to-open.
Pulling the lever down programs the electronic
control for one-shot to open.
E''� AH IDO
�wPOWER Sectionalizer Operating Instructions

Overhead Revised 12/22 16-00-01
Table of Contents
16- Regulators
16-01-01 General Information 16-04-01 IVVC Regulator
Definitions Integrated Volt/VAR Control
(IVVC)
16-02-01 Regulator Types and Applications 16-04-03 Rack Mounted Regulator
Introduction Crossarm with Bypass
Voltage Regulators 16-04-04 Details
Installation Criteria 16-04-05 Grounding for Rack Mounted
Regulator Sizing Regulator
Regulator Ratings and Mounting 16-04-06 Pole Mounted Regulator
Styles Crossarm with Bypass
16-02-02 Regulator Controls 16-04-07 Details
Regulator Location 16-04-08 Grounding for Pole Mounted
16-02-03 Regulator Mounting Regulator
Regulator Weights 16-04-09 Guide to Install Antenna
Regulator Dimensions
Nominal Measurements
16-03-01 Regulator Installation
Disconnect and Bypass Switches
16-03-02 Bypass Switch Connections
Primary Line Connections
Grounding
16-03-03 Jumper sizes
Position Indicator
Stability Guy
Switch Timbers
Labeling
16-03-04 Control Mounting
16-03-05 Pole Mounted Regulator
Crossarm with Bypass Switch
for 336 and Below
16-03-06 Details
16-03-07 Pole Mounted Regulator
Streamline with Bypass Switch
for 336 and Below
16-03-08 Details
16-03-09 Grounding for Pole Mounted
Regulator
16-03-10 Rack Mounted Regulator with
Bypass Switches for 336 and
Below
16-03-11 Details
16-03-12 Grounding for Rack Mounted
Regulator
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
---.m 'Y

Overhead Reviewed 11/22 16-01-01
General Information
Definitions Reverse Power Flow. The normal direction of
power flow is assumed to be from the source
Band-edge Indicator. Indicator lights are bushing,through the regulator,to the load
illuminated when the source voltage is either bushing. During switching operations or
above or below the chosen band of acceptable distributed generation the power flows in the
values.These lights help to diagnose or verify reverse direction through the regulator. This
the operation of electronic controls. reverse of power may cause the regulator to
operate incorrectly. To avoid this possibility
Bandwidth. The distance that the control during periods of reverse power flow,the
allows the voltage to move from the set voltage regulator control must be either disabled or be
before a change in the tap changer position is able to recognize and regulate the reversed in
required. This can be selected anywhere from polarity.
1 to 6 volts.
Set Voltage. The voltage level that the regulator
Boost. Indicates a voltage increase caused by a will attempt to keep the line voltage. Generally,
regulator. 120 volts or higher, on a 120-volt base.
Buck. A reduction in voltage caused by a Tap Changer. The mechanical mechanism
regulator. inside a regulator,that moves to increase or
decrease the voltage.
Drag Hands. A dial indicator window-mounted
near the top of the regulator that is used to Time Delay. The amount of time that must be
indicate the most extreme excursions of the satisfied after each tap changer operation, and
regulator tap changer position in either the before another tap changer movement is
"buck"or the"boost"direction. allowed. It's adjustable from 10-to 120-seconds
on all standard Idaho Power(IP)regulators.
Internal Differential Potential Transformer
(IDPT).Equipment and algorithms internal to Voltage Transformer(VT)Ratio. Also called
the regulator and controller that uses a voltage potential transformers(PT),it's the ratio
difference across the regulator to verify that the between the primary and secondary rated
regulator is in the neutral position. voltage.
Line Drop Compensation(LDC). When the
regulator is located a considerable distance from
the load that needs control,use a compensating
circuit that simulates the resistive and reactive
voltage drops that would occur for any given
load current along that portion of the feeder
between the regulator and the actual "load
center."
Neutral Indication. An indicator on the control
panel used to verify that the tap changer is in the
neutral position(neither bucking nor boosting).
An indicator light and a test button for the light
is provided.
"`PM Regulators

Overhead Revised 12/22 16-02-01
Regulator Types and Applications
Introduction Regulators are sized by both current and rated
WA. The regulator load current rating is always
The voltage level on a feeder is a dynamic quantity, constant.The kVA rating changes depending on
caused by the addition of new loads and seasonal and the tap setting of the regulator and the percent of
daily load cycles.These load cycles cause the voltage voltage it is regulating. Because of this,the load
to rise and fall over a given amount of time.This current is the most important consideration when
voltage change is acceptable if the steady-state choosing a regulator for a particular application.
voltage remains within a f5%bandwidth.Voltages
outside of the bandwidth must be corrected. NOTE. The range of correction for all
There are several options that are available to standard regulators:f 10%.
the field engineer to correct voltage problems; In addition to the circuit parameters, also
listed below in order of increasing cost: consider potential load growth and the frequency
♦ Shift load and magnitude of load cycles in sizing
♦ Install shunt capacitors regulators.
♦ Install voltage regulator Regulator Ratings and Mounting
♦ Reconductor affected area Styles
Voltage Regulators The following table shows the regulators that are
Voltage regulators are a type of autotransformer available for purchase.
with a series of taps or steps that allows the load Load Rated Style
side voltage to be increased or decreased up to Current Capacity of
10%. Each step can raise or lower the voltage by Cat. ID CU Code (Amps) (kVA) Mounting
5/8%per step for a total of 16 steps. 7?427 DRG150 50 38 Pole
1428* DRG175 75 57 Pole
Installation Criteria 1429 DRG1100 100 76 Pole
Decidingwhether to install a regulator must be 1431 DRG1219 219 114 Pole
� 1431 DRG1219 219 167 Pole
done using engineering analysis tools and actual 10830 DRG1328 328 250 Rack
field measurements.A regulator should be 49413 DRG1438 438 333 Rack
installed when the voltage drop has reached 75% 14.4-kV
of the allowable limit. This allows for the 1432 DRG250 50 72 Pole
1433 DRG2100 100 144 Pole
voltage support to be added before a problem 39084 DRG2200 200 288 Rack
occurs. 19.9-kV
1434 DRG350 50 100 Pole
Regulator Sizing 1435 DRG3100 100 200 Rack
1437 DRG3200 200 400 Rack
To specify a regulator,a field engineer must 32133 DRG3335 335 667 Rack
determine the parameters of the circuit on which NOTE. Contact Methods&Materials for any other
the regulator is being installed. sizes not mentioned in this table.
Three basic parameters help to determine the * No Purchase.
appropriate size of regulator are listed below:
♦ Load Amps=Connected kVA/L-N voltage
♦ Voltage range=L-N voltage x range of regulation
♦ Regulator kVA=Load Amps X Voltage range
"`�R. Regulator Types and Applications

16-02-02 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Example. Assume a 3-0, four-wire, grounded- With a load current of 52.71 amperes and the
wye 7200/12470 kV circuit with a connected required regulator kVA of 105 kVA, select the
load of 2,800 kVA, and 10%voltage regulation. 200 kVA unit with a load current rating of 100
Three 1-0 regulators are to be installed. amperes,see the table on page 16-02-01.
Determine the appropriate ratings for the
regulators. The 100 kVA, 50 ampere unit is rated close to the
required values.An engineering decision is
1. Determine the load amperes. required to determine the actual requirements.
2800 kVA
L°°aA"'P3 (7.2 kV)•(3 phases) Regulator Controls
LoadAmps=129.63 A Regulators are purchased with a microprocessor-
2. Find the regulated voltage range. based control. This allows for more precise
control as well as data acquisition.
VoltageRange:=7.2 kV•0.10
VoltageRange=0.72 kV All regulators that are refurbished in the Idaho
Power TransTest Shops are retrofitted with a
3. Identify the required Voltage Regulator kVA. Cooper control.
RegulatorKVA:=(129.63 A)•(0.72 kV) The series CL-7 regulator control is a fully
RegulatorKVA=93.334 kVA integrated control that features a modular
universal design capable of being deployed with
Each regulator should be at least 93.33 kVA various communications configurations to meet
differing application needs. Idaho Power uses
With a load current of 129.63 Amperes and the the one with ethernet.
required regulator kVA of 93.33 WA,choose the
114.3 kVA unit with a load current rating of 150 Ett�N 000ree.oR
amperes, see the table on page 16-02-01.
Example.Assume a 3-0,four-wire,grounded-wye
circuit where a circuit with a load of 3,150 kVA at
19920/34500 volts requires f 10%regulation.
Again,three 1-0 regulators will be installed.
Determine the appropriate ratings for the regulators.
1. Determine the load amperes. i I LI*
LoadAmps:_
3150 kVA
(19.99 kV)•(3 phases)
LoadAmps=52.5 A Cat. ID CU Code Description
54918 DRGCL7 Panel, Regulator Control
2. Find the voltage range.
VoltageRange:=19.9 kV•0.10 Regulator Location
VoltageRange=1.99 kV The location of a regulator bank is determined
through voltage study, calculations, and actual
3. Identify the required Voltage Regulator kVA. measurements of circuit voltage characteristics.
RegulatorKVA:=(52.71 A)•(1.99 kV) Place voltage regulators upstream of the problem
RegulatorKVA=105 kVA area,and in a location where the voltage is
between 118V and 120V at peak load.Whenever
Each regulator should be at least 105 kVA. possible,regulators should be placed on the 3-0,
main line to benefit as much of the feeder as
4. Select a regulator size. possible.
Regulator Types and Applications "�ppRa

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 16-02-03
Regulator Mounting Regulator Dimensions
The table on page 16-02-01 lists the different
sizes of regulators and the preferred mounting
style. The standard installation for regulators is
pole mounting, except in the larger sizes where
rack mounting is required to accommodate the
weight.
0
A 22-foot platform, Cat. ID 40924, is used for A*
rack mounting regulators. This platform has a
load capacity of 17,000 lbs. max. for three equal
spaced loads. This capacity can be increased to
30,000 lbs. with the addition of a center pole kit. B
NOTE. For more information on rack
installation see Overhead Manual 19.
Regulator Weights
Nominal Measurements
Cooper GE Siemens
Weight Weight Weight Cooper GE Siemens
Amps (Ibs.) (Ibs.) (Ibs.) Size (in) Size(in) Size(in)
7.2-kV Amps A* B C A* B C A* B C
50 1000 1000 1300 7.2-kV
75 1280 1120 1481 50 59 25 32 64 24 33 61 28 31
100 1400 1280 1598 75 66 28 34 66 27 33 63 28 35
150 1635 1600 2065 100 61 34 34 70 27 35 64 30 35
219 1940 1900 2491 150 68 40 37 71 32 35 70 35 39
328 2530 N/A N/A 219 74 40 37 75 34 43 80 35 39
438 3525 N/A N/A 328 84 35 41
14.4-kV 438 97 35 65
50 1895 1820 2211 14.4-kV
100 2260 2380 2666 50 76 29 36 80 29 38 82 32 35
19.9-kV 100 77 36 35 88 33 40 84 35 39
50 1990 2230 2877 19.9-kV
100 2585 2940 3622 50 75 36 41 94 29 36 79 34 40
201 3860 4150 5700 100 80 39 45 102 31 41 87 37 43
335 7087 N/A N/A 201 88 44 49 104 48 49 100 42 48
t335 106 37 57
* The"A"dimensions include the height to the top of the
series arrester where appropriate.
t This is a square unit.
R, Regulator Types and Applications

Overhead Reviewed 11/22 16-03-01
Regulator Installation
Disconnect and Bypass Switches Consult your field engineer to determine the
Switch requirements. A disconnect switch is appropriate type of disconnect and bypass
switches to use.
required on the source and load sides of all
distribution regulators. Bypass switch. This switch may be used for a
A bypass switch is also required on all combination disconnect and bypass switch.Use
regulators. a standoff bracket for easier operation with a
long stick.
CAUTION. The regulator must be in the
"neutral"position and the control turned 7-7 0
off before the bypass switch is closed.
Steps to Bypass Regulator
To return the regulator to neutral, follow the ° °
steps below. Only a regulator in the neutral
position can be safely removed from service
without interrupting load continuity.
1) Use the Raise/Lower switch to bring the Bypass Switch
regulator to the neutral position.
2) When in neutral,the Neutral light will
be continuously and brightly lit on the
control front panel and the position
indicator will point to zero.
3) Verify the neutral position of the
regulator using four methods.
a. Verify that the neutral indicator Side View 15 kV Switch
light on the control indicates the Bracket is Included with Switch
neutral position.Neutral is
indicated only when the light is Cat. ID Description CU Code
continuously illuminated. 49028 15 kV BYPASS <600 DSRB156
49028 15 kV BYPASS >600 DSRB156H
b. Verify the tap position on the 49037 34.5 kV BYPASS <600 DSRB356
control indicates neutral by 49037 34.5 kV BYPASS >600 DSRB356H
using the Metering-PLUS key
or FC 12. When in neutral,the
display will show zero.
c. Verify that the position indicator
on the regulator is in the neutral
position. The indicator should
point straight up to either zero
or N for Neutral.
d. Using an approved voltmeter,
verify that there is no voltage
difference between the source
and load bushings.
"`IDAHO
R� Regulator Installation
­­­

16-03-02 Reviewed 11/22 Overhead
Bypass Switch Connections Disconnect Switches.
300-amp solid blade
For installations on 336 and smaller, disconnect switches can be
the bypass switch is connected with two used in place of sequenced
600 kcmil copper terminal pads, Cat. ID 3712, by-pass switches for de-
on the top* and two 2-hole copper stud stirrups energizing and for bypassing
with hot line clamps, Cat. ID 4072,on the regulators. Silicone cutouts
bottom. are approved for use in all
*See Jumper Sizes on the next page. areas. In the past,they were only available for
For installations on 795 only,four copper extremely cold and areas of vandalism.
terminal pads will be used to connect all four Cat. ID Description CU Code
jumper points of the bypass switch. 45101 15 kV SB DISC 300 DSSB153S
The bypass CU Codes include the appropriate 48311 27 kV SB DISC 300 DSSB353S
terminal pads, copper stud stirrup with hot line
clamps, and all the miscellaneous hardware to Grounding
assemble and attach the device.
Ground every regulator pole with a control, see
below.
Use#2 stranded bare copper wire buried
8-inches below the ground level. Separate the
0 electrodes by 6-to 8-feet.Adjust as needed for
O O sidewalks, etc., see Regulator Grounding in
0 DO Section 20 for more detail.
Terminal Pad Stud Stirrup
Cat. ID 3712 Cat. ID 49450
8"min
Primary Line Connections T to 4'i
Wedge Connector. Wedge connectors are r 6 coa
used when connecting regulator jumpers directly
to the primary line conductor.
--——I ————
I
I I
I I I I
Regulator Installation '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 11/22 16-03-03
Jumper Sizes Stability guy
The jumpers on the topside of the by-pass switch Use 3/8-inch guy wire to stabilize the rack
may be sized to match the main line conductor. mounted regulators.Use thimble eyenuts and
The jumper between the regulator and the switch formed grips to hold the guy wire.
must be 4/0 copper to attach to the stud stirrup.
NOTE. The stability guy should be
All jumpers listed are made from soft drawn bonded to the neutral in only one place,
copper.Note the bypass upper terminal pads see Overhead Manual19-05-02 for details.
must be changed if aluminum is selected.
Switch Timbers
Source Neutral*
Load Neutral Bus Arrester Two switch timbers, Cat. ID 4970, are used to
Amps (Size) (Size) (Size) (Size) support the bypass switches in 22-foot rack
7.2 W installations.
50 #4 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol
75 #4 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol
100 #4 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol Labeling
150 #2 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol
219 2/0 Str #6 Sol 2/0 Str #6 Sol Regulator Labeling and Spacing.The
328 4/0 Str #6 Sol 4/0 Str #6 Sol regulators are to be labeled with 2-inch stick-on
438 4/0 Str #6 Sol 4/0 Str #6 Sol
14.4 W labels. Place the labels uniformly in the lower
50 #4 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol left portion of each regulator tank, so they can
100 #4 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol easily be seen from the ground. The labels
19.9 W should represent the system phasing,
50 #4 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol e.g.,Phases"A","B", and"C".
100 #4 Str #6 Sol #2 Str #6 Sol
200 2/0 Str #6 Sol 2/0 Str #6 Sol Corresponding labels must also be attached to
335 2/0 Str #6 Sol 2/0 Str #6 Sol the control cabinets. Place one label on the
*The neutral bus conductor applies only to platform installations. outside of the control cabinet and an additional
label on the inside of the control cabinet door.
Position Indicator Each regulator should be marked with the
ampere rating in large black numerals on the
Regulators should be installed so that the control cabinet door.
position indicator is visible from the road when
possible.
0
100
�A)01\
Mark the control cabinet and the
regulator with the appropriate phase,
e.g.,A,B,or C.
"`IDAHO
R� Regulator Installation

16-03-04 Reviewed 11/22 Overhead
Control Mounting The practice of installing control boxes on
crossarms or timbers attached to a stub or center
Bond all control boxes. pole has been discontinued because of the unsafe
location of the center control wire hanging in
Pole mounted regulators should have the midair. Install the controls on the 2 or 3 poles
controls mounted 5-to 12-feet from the ground. used to hold the equipment in place. If a center
If installed below 12-feet,the power cables must pole is needed for weight purposes,use a full
be protected with armor or flex conduit. center pole and not a stub.
O
I
f
5'minimun 5'min
with armored
cables
Rack mounted regulator control boxes shall be
mounted on the poles in various configurations
such as back-to-back or offset, see below, or
separately,one per pole if a center pole is used.
The height to the center of the control box shall
be a minimum of 5-feet with armored cables.
O
0
Back-to-Back or Offset Mounting
Regulator Installation '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 11/22 16-03-05
Pole Mounted Regulator Crossarm with Bypass Switch for 336 and Below
AO )I—
SystemSource Load
RegulatBypass
Switch
SurgArreN _
Neutral (O") (F* (D`�(J�
(G)(K)
(A) (B*) t 12" (H`)
® 6 (M)
(H*)
36"
Bond to
Steel Pin
1111
114"
® �1 (N)
84"
Min
(H`)
4/0 SD Cu Only
(L ) 24" (�l*
1
21' Min
Lowest Live Parts
1T-6"Min To Ground Level
See the next page for details.
"`IDAW
R� Regulator Installation

16-03-06 Reviewed 11/22 Overhead
Pole Mounted Regulator Crossarm with Bypass for 336 and Below Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS10* Arm Single 10' 1 (A) DAS10* Arm Single 10' 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C)DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (C) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(D)DD...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (D) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (F) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(G)D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H)DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 4 (H) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 4
(1) DNBX* Neutral Bracket Extension 1 (1) DNBX* Neutral Bracket Extension 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1 (J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(L) DRG...* Regulator 1 (L) DRG...* Regulator 1
(M)DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (M) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(N)IDS RB156 15 kV Bypass Switch 1 (N) DSRB356 34.5 kV Bypass Switch 1
(0)DWC...* Wedge Connector 2 (0) DWC...* Wedge Connector 2
* Notes
*(A) Arm Single 10=DAS10, In Red Risk Zone, use DFT10
*(B) Anti-split Bolt—DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C)Anti-split Bolt 6"—Not needed if using FG arm
*(D) Deadend&Tension—DID.... Primary.
DDR Order by wire size.
DID Order by wire size
*(E) Formed Spool Tie—DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie—DFT...,Order by wire size.
*(H) Jumper Wire—DJMPRW..., Refer to section 08-05 and Regulator Installation Jumper Sizes page 16-03-03.
DJMPRWC40 Jumper wire Cu 4/0 Order 2 each for attaching regulator to bypass switch. No wedges needed.
DJMPRW... Jumper wire... Order 2 each according to wire size.Wedges need to be ordered separately.
*(I) Neutral Bracket Extension—DNBX. If this bracket does not give enough clearance a BK18 may be used in its place.
*(L) Regulator—DRG..... For Regulator choices and mounting requirements see page 16-02-01.
*(0) Wedge Connector—DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
Regulator Installation "` R„

Overhead Reviewed 11/22 16-03-07
Pole Mounted Regulator Streamline with Bypass Switch for 336 and Below
AO Source Load Use for existing
Structures only.
Regulator
Bypass
Switch
Surge i S L
Arrester
N System _
Neutral
(E') (I C*) (M*)
(F) (J) —►
(B*) 12" ® (G )
18"
a
/ 0 18"
(A
o ° s
84"
Min
(G*)
4/0 SD Cu Only
24" (D*��
(K*) (H"
21'Min
Lowest Live Parts
17'-6"Min To Ground Level
To Ground Level 1
See the next page for details.
OWN—POWER. Regulator Installation

16-03-08 Reviewed 11/22 Overhead
Pole Mounted Regulator Streamline with Bypass for 336 and Below Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1 (A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C) DD...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (C) DD...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(D) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (E) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (F) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 4 (G) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 4
(H) DNBX* Neutral Bracket Extension 1 (H) DNBX* Neutral Bracket Extension 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(1) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1 (1) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(J) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (J) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(K) DRG...* Regulator 1 (K) DRG...* Regulator 1
(L) DSRB156 15 kV Bypass Switch 1 (L) DSRB356 34.5 kV Bypass Switch 1
(M) DWC...* Wedge Connector 2 (M) DWC...* Wedge Connector 2
* Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C) Deadend&Tension-DD..., Primary.
DDR Order by wire size.
DID Order by wire size
*(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
*(G) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW...,Refer to section 08-05 and Regulator Installation Jumper Sizes page 16-03-03.
DJMPRWC40 Jumper wire Cu 4/0 Order 2 each for attaching regulator to bypass switch. No wedges needed.
DJMPRW... Jumper wire ... Order 2 each according to wire size.Wedges need to be ordered separately.
*(H) Neutral Bracket Extension-DNBX. If this bracket does not give enough clearance a BK18 may be used in it's place.
*(K) Regulator-DRG..... For Regulator choices and mounting requirements see page 16-02-01.
*(M) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
Regulator Installation "` R„

Overhead Reviewed 11/22 16-03-09
Grounding for Pole Mounted Regulator
Continuous Ground Wire
O
Control Cabinet
Grounding Detail
Connect the Control Cabinet
Box and the Mounting
Hardware to the Pole Ground
Control cable
System Neutral
#6 Cu
4 K,
#2 Cu #2 Cu
Control Cabinet
Bonding clip
Cat. ID 5279
#2 Cu
#6 Cu
Control Cabinet
#2 Cu Mounting Bracket
#2 Cu
TRegulator Installation

16-03-1 U Reviewed 11/22 Overhead
Rack Mounted Regulator with Bypass Switches for 336 and Below
Source Load
AO
&BO
co
Sequenced
By-pass
Switches
Surge S L S L S L
Arresters
N System Neutral
NOTE. Provide additional
clearances in avian areas
12.1"
(C� / R) 30"
Bond to e L e
Steel Pin
(O( (1*) — 14"
(S*) (o)
15'-16'
j(N )
a_
C
J
> t
Cn
(M*)
J (J*) 12' Min to
o top of flex
c
20' conduit
N f 17.5'Min
5'min
8"min
3'to 4'
j6'to 8'
Regulator Installation '`POWER.

Overhead Revised 12/22 16-03-11
Rack Mounted Regulator with Bypass Switches for 336 and Below Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS10* Crossarm 10' 2 (A) DAS10* Crossarm 10' 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 2 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 2
(C) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 4 (C) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 4
(D) DDENEB Deadend Neutral w/Eyebolt 2 (D) DDENEB Deadend Neutral w/Eyebolt 2
(E) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (E) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 6 (F) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 6
(G) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 6 (G) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 6
(H) D135V Vise-top Insulator 2 (H) D135V Vise-top Insulator 2
(1) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6+6 (1) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6+6
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only
(J) DPOLEKIT* Center Pole Kit 1 (J) DPOLEKIT* Center Pole Kit 1
(K) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3 (K) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2 (L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2
(M) DRACK22* Platform/Rack,Aluminum 1 (M) DRACK22* Platform/Rack,Aluminum 1
(N) DRG...* Regulator 3 (N) DRG...* Regulator 3
(0) DTBR...* Timber 2 (0) DTBR...* Timber 2
(P) DSP Steel Pin Long 4 (P) DSP Steel Pin Long 4
(Q) DSRB156* 15 kV Bypass Switch 3 (Q) DSRB356* 34.5 kV Bypass Switch 3
(R) DTADP Thimble Adapter 2 (R) DTADP Thimble Adapter 2
(S) DWC...* Wedge Connector 8 (S) DWC...* Wedge Connector 8
* Notes
*(A) Arm Single 10!--DAS10, In Red Risk Zone, use DFT10
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C)Anti-split Bolt 6"—Not needed if using FG arm
*(E) Deadend&Tension-DD..., Primary.
DDR Order by wire size.
DID Order by wire size
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
*(I) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW..., Refer to section 08-05 for connectors and 16-03-03 for appropriate jumper sizes.
DJMPRWC... Jumper wire Cu Order 6 each for attaching regulator to bypass switch per 16-03-03 table.
No wedges needed.
DJMPRW... Jumper wire... Order 6 each for attaching bypass switch to conductor.See Jumper Size on page
16-03-03 for wire options.Wedges need to be ordered separately.
Be cognizant of the bypass connection if aluminum is selected for these jumpers.
*(J) Center Pole Kit-DPOLEKIT,See section 19-05 for installation details.
*(M)Rack—DRACK22,Order size according to platform/rack necessary to hold regulators needed.See page 16-02-02.
*(N) Regulator-DRG..... For Regulator choices and mounting requirements see page 16-02-01.
*(0) Timber-DTBR....Order according to platform/rack size used.
DTBR22 Timber 22'
DTBR24 Timber 24'
*(Q) Bypass Switch-DSRB...,For 795 installation,see Bypass Connections on page 16-03-02.
*(S) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
R, Regulator Installation

16-03-12 Reviewed 11/22 Overhead
Grounding for Rack Mounted Regulator
Ground stability guy
at one end only.
O O O
O O O
O O O
#6 Cu
#6 Cu #6 Cu
Control Cabinet —
Grounding Details
see the illustrations
below.
#6 Cu #2 Cu #2 Cu #6 Cu
#2 Cu f: #2 Cu
T
Control Cabinet
Grounding Detail
Connect all Control Cabinet
Boxes and their Mounting
Hardware to the Pole Ground
Bonding clip
Cat. ID 5279\
#6 Cu/4
Control Cabinet
#2 Cu #2 Cu #2 Cu
Mounting Bracket
Regulator Installation "` R„

Overhead Revised 11/22 16-04-01
IVVC Regulator
Integrated Volt/VAR Control (IWC)
The objective of the Integrated Volt/VAR For an IWC regulator installation, Series CL-613
Control(IVVC) is to reduce electric feeder regulator control shall be replaced with Series
losses while minimizing distribution voltage CL-7 regulator control. For Non-IWC/existing
within acceptable operating limits. The controls regulators, Series CL-613 regulator control is still
used to achieve these objectives are transformer accepted which many units are still in active
Load Tap Changers(LTCs), substation and service.
feeder capacitor bank controls plus substation
and feeder voltage regulators. Radio is provided in every feeder regulator bank
for a two-way remote communication control of
Voltage Regulator control: the device at an assigned frequency. There are
The series CL-7 regulator control is a fully two configurations when installing a regulator
integrated control which features a modular, bank;rack mounted(one radio needed) and
universal design, capable of being deployed with individually pole mounted regulator(one radio
various communications configurations to meet per pole needed).
differing application needs. IPC will use the one
with Ethernet. Rack Mounted Regulator Bank
Configuration
E_ -N COOPER POW Ea The radio is installed in one of the CL-7
regulator controllers on the rack mounted
regulator bank. The other two- CL-7 controllers
are connected to the radio using a
communication network cable. The
communication port of CL-7 is located at right
side of the control panel. The communication
network cable is installed in a conduit and the
conduits are trained neatly on the pole and on
the railing of the regulator rack.
'� � • t�its
Cat. ID CU Code Description
54918 DRGCL7 Panel, Regulator Control �-
r �
Cat. ID CU Code Description
57358 DRADIO CONTROL RADIO
OWN—POWER. IVVC Regulator

16-04-02 Revised 10/22 Overhead
CU CODE-DRADIO—REG RADIO
Cat. ID Description Qty
49167 Cat 5 Network Cable RJ45 Connectors 3' 1
57358 Remote Radio 1
57424 COAX Cable 2' 1
57412 Bulkhead Adapter 1
Rack Mount Conduit System -CU Code -DRMCS—Materials
Cat. ID Description Qty Unit
4606 1" 1-Hole Heavy Wall Conduit Straps 24 Each
5460 1" PVC Couplings 4 Each
5494 1" PVC Female Adapters 4 Each
13129 '/4"x 2"Self-tapping Screws 24 Each
22552 1" Liquid Tight Connector 8 Each
54444 1"x 90-degree PVC Elbows w/Bell 4 Each
5384 1"x 10' Sched 40 PVC 60 Feet
46574 CATSE 4PR#24 BY FT 120 Feet
54251 1" Flexible Conduit 12 Feet
IWC Regulator ` R

Overhead Revised 10/22 16-04-03
Rack Mounted Regulator Crossarm with Bypass
Souroe Load
A0
B0
c0
Sequenced y
By-pass
SwRches
Surge L s L s L
Arre ste rs it
N
System Neutral
NOTE. Provide additional
clearances in avian areas
(B*) _—(G)(L)
(P)—� 12"
(AC (H)
(R) 30"
Bond to
Steel Pin
(0( 1*) _ 14"
I
(S*) (D)
15'-16'
Antenna
3"minimum
below the EF
Neutral (N*)
m
o_
J CAT Communication
(M*) Network Cable in
18" Rubber 3 _ conduit trained neatly
Clam Spacing � (J*) 12'Min to as shown
p p g o top of flex
20' conduit
COAX Cable N 17.5'Min
fH
attached on 5'min
the Pole 8"min
3'to 4'
6'to 8'
Install a ground grid on
every pole that has a control.
See Section 19-05 for Center Pole Installation
"`�M IVVC Regulator

16-04-04 Revised 10/22 Overhead
Rack Mounted Regulator with Bypass Switches for 336 and Below Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS10* Crossarm 10' 2 (A) DAS10* Crossarm 10' 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 2 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 2
(C) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 4 (C) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 4
(D) DDENEB Deadend Neutral w/Eyebolt 2 (D) DDENEB Deadend Neutral w/Eyebolt 2
(E) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6 (E) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 6
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 6 (F) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 6
(G) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 6 (G) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 6
(H) D135V Vise-top Insulator 2 (H) D135V Vise-top Insulator 2
(1) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6+6 (1) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 6+6
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only
(J) DPOLEKIT* Center Pole Kit 1 (J) DPOLEKIT* Center Pole Kit 1
(K) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3 (K) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 3
(L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2 (L) DPTP Pole Top Pin 2
(M) DRACK22* Platform/Rack,Aluminum 1 (M) DRACK22* Platform/Rack,Aluminum 1
(N) DRG...* Regulator 3 (N) DRG...* Regulator 3
(0) DTBR...* Timber 2 (0) DTBR...* Timber 2
(P) DSP Steel Pin Long 4 (P) DSP Steel Pin Long 4
(Q) DSRB156* 15 kV Bypass Switch 3 (Q) DSRB356* 34.5 kV Bypass Switch 3
(R) DTADP Thimble Adapter 2 (R) DTADP Thimble Adapter 2
(S) DWC...* Wedge Connector 8 (S) DWC...* Wedge Connector 8
DRMCS Conduit System 1 DRMCS Conduit System 1
DRADIO Radio 1 DRADIO Radio 1
DCAYAGI Antennae 1 DCAYAGI Antennae 1
* Notes
*(A) Arm Single 10!--DAS10, In Red Risk Zone, use DFT10
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C)Anti-split Bolt 6"—Not needed if using FG arm
*(E) Deadend&Tension-DD..., Primary.
DDR Order by wire size.
DID Order by wire size
*(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
*(I) Jumper Wire-DJMPRW...,Refer to section 08-05 for connectors and 16-03-03 for appropriate jumper sizes.
DJMPRWC... Jumper wire Cu Order 6 each for attaching regulator to bypass switch per 16-03-03 table.
No wedges needed.
DJMPRW... Jumper wire ... Order 6 each for attaching bypass switch to conductor.See Jumper Size on page
16-03-03 for wire options.Wedges need to be ordered separately.
Be cognizant of the bypass connection if aluminum is selected for these jumpers.
*(J) Center Pole Kit-DPOLEKIT,See section 19-05 for installation details.
*(M)Rack-DRACK22,Order size according to platform/rack necessary to hold regulators needed.See page 16-02-02.
*(N) Regulator-DRG..... For Regulator choices and mounting requirements see page 16-02-01.
*(0) Timber-DTBR....Order according to platform/rack size used.
DTBR22 Timber 22'
DTBR24 Timber 24'
*(Q) Bypass Switch-DSRB...,For 795 installation,see Bypass Connections on page 16-03-02.
*(S) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole,conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05, 10, & 20.
IWC Regulator "` R„

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 16-04-05
Grounding for Rack Mounted Regulator
Ground stability guy
Iat\,-
ne end only.
O
O O O
#6 Cuu
#6 Cu #6 Cu
Control Cabinet
Grounding Details
see the illustrations
below.
#6 Cu #2 Cu #2 Cu #6 Cu
#2 Cu #2 Cu
Control Cabinet
Grounding Detail
Connect all Control Cabinet
Boxes and their Mounting
Hardware to the Pole Ground
Bonding clip
Cat.ID 5279
#6 Cu
Control Cabinet
#2 Cu #2 Cu #2 Cu Mounting Bracket
Rr IWC Regulator

16-04-06 Revised 10/22 Overhead
Pole Mounted Regulator Crossarm with Bypass
A0 Source Load
Regulator
Bypass
Switch
Surge i
S L
Arrester
N System _
Neutral /// (O`) (F* (D*)�(J)
(G) (K)-,_
(A) ' 12" (H*�
0 6„ (M)
Boo nd to 36"
Steel Pin
0
114"
®❑ (N)
1
84"
Min
(H*)
4/0 SD Cu Only
`t
(L*) 24„ (E*)
Antenna
3"minimum
belowthe neutral
21' Min
Lowest Live Parts
17'-6"Min To Ground Level
To Groundl Level
1
18"Rubber
Clamp Spadng\_
51'
IVVC Regulator '`per R".

Overhead Reviewed 10122 16-04-07
Pole Mounted Regulator Crossarm with Bypass Switches Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAS10* Arm Single 10' 1 (A) DAS10* Arm Single 10' 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(C)DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (C) DASB6* Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(D) DD...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (D) DID...* Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (F) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(G)D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (G) DI35J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H)DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 4 (H) DJMPRW...* Jumper Wire 4
(1) DNBX* Neutral Bracket Extension 1 (1) DNBX* Neutral Bracket Extension 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1 (J) DPRBK2 Pri Brkr to 35 kV LW&Link 1
(K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (K) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(L) DRG...* Regulator 1 (L) DRG...* Regulator 1
(M)DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (M) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(N)DSRB156 15 kV Bypass Switch 1 (N) DSRB356 34.5 kV Bypass Switch 1
(0)DWC...* Wedge Connector 2 (0) DWC...* Wedge Connector 2
DRADIO Radio 1 DRADIO Radio 1
DCAYAGI Antennae 1 DCAYAGI Antennae 1
* Notes
*(A)Arm Single 10=D S10, If in Red Risk Zone, use DFT10
*(B) Anti-split Bolt—DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(C)Anti-split Bolt 6"—Not needed if using FG arm
*(D) Deadend&Tension—DD..., Primary.
DDR Order by wire size.
DID Order by wire size
*(E) Formed Spool Tie—DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(F) Formed Top Tie—DFT...,Order by wire size.
*(H) Jumper Wire—DJMPRW..., Refer to section 08-05.
DJMPRWC40 Jumper wire Cu 4/0 Order 2 each for attaching regulator to bypass switch. No wedges needed.
DJMPRW... Jumper wire ... Order 2 each according to wire size.Wedges need to be ordered separately.
*(I) Neutral Bracket Extension—DNBX. If this bracket does not give enough clearance a BK18 may be used in its place.
*(M)Regulator—DRG..... For Regulator choices and mounting requirements see page 16-02-01.
*(0) Wedge Connector—DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
Pole, conductor, and grounding assembly are not listed. Refer to Sections 05, 10, & 20.
Rr IWC Regulator

16-04-08 Reviewed 10/22 Overhead
Grounding for Pole Mounted Regulator
Continuous Ground Wire
O
Control Cabinet
Grounding Detail
Connectthe Control Cabinet
Box and the Mounting
Hardware to the Pole Ground
Control cable
System Neutral
#6 Cu
#2 Cu11141 #2 Cu
Control Cabinet
Bonding clip
Cat. ID 5279
Ifl #2 Cu
#6 Cu —
Control Cabinet
#2 Cu Mounting Bracket
#2 Cu
OPP
IWC Regulator

Overhead Revised 10/22 16-04-09
Guide to Install Antenna
1 Neutral
Orientation/Alignment Red tape on top -y ® 3"Min.
i
The orientation of the antenna(line angle)varies from
location to location and should point directly towards
the assigned master radio location. It is important that 30"Min.
the mount be installed within 90' of the azimuth(line
angle)to the assigned master radio location which will Comm.
be specified by the COMM Engineering and included
on the work order by the distribution designer. This
will guide and ensure proper installation of the antenna
mount in the right direction. If the line angle is not
specified at the time the work order has been written,
the antenna installer shall call the distribution designer
for the information.
8'
DCAYAGI CU Code
Cat. ID Description Qty First Bracket
57864 Yagi Antenna 1
58523 Antenna Mount 1
57425 COAX Cable,30' 1
57421 3/8"Rubber-Insulated Clamps 5 6.5'Min.
13130 3"Self-tapping Screws 10
5280 Clip,Bonding F/3/4 1 5'Min.
28806 #6 Cu Conductor 3
5700 Connector C-Tap,6T06 2
12291 1-HL Terminal#6 3/8"Lug 1
58143 1-HL Chair Lug 1
14662 1/4"Washers 4
"`�R� IVVC Regulator

16-04-10 Reviewed 10/22 Overhead
Mounting and Grounding
The antenna mount and the antenna bracket need to be attached to the pole ground.Use the following
steps to ground the antenna assembly:
1. Crimp 1-hole lug, Cat.ID 12291,to an 18-inch piece of#6 Cu.
2. While assembling the antenna, attach the 1-hole lug to the antenna bracket under a
U-bolt and assemble with the mount for the pole.
3. Use 3 self-tapping lags to attach the antenna mount to the pole.
4. Scrape paint away from the fourth hole.
5. Attach a chair lug, Cat. ID 58143,to a second section of 6-inch piece of 6 Cu. Attach to the antenna
mount with a self-tapping screw to the fourth hole.
6. C-tap both strands of#6 Cu to the pole ground.
Coax. The antenna is connected to the radio using a coax cable in a 3-inch conduit for capacitors and
strapped to the pole for regulators. The mating torque for an N type connector is finger tight;
do not over overtighten.
Tape and insulate COAX connections; top and bottom using the tapes provided with the antenna.
Wrap with the water seal tape first and then wrap with the UV tape .
This information is duplicated in the Overhead Manual 15-03 and 17-04-05.
Coil excess Coax.
Connect pigtail to Coax, hand
tighten. Cover with water tight Red tape in top position.
tape first and then UV tape.
/� II
I.
L�
Antenna in right
angled bracket Level and align
as shown. with azimuth
angle.
Attach bracket
and mount to
pole ground.
IVVC Regulator

Overhead Revised 12/22 17-00-01
Table of Contents
17- Capacitors
17-01-01 General Information 17-04-01 Stand-Alone Capacitor
Definitions Switched Bank—Crossarm
Capacitor Applications Construction VAR Configuration
Connections with Sensing Insulator and
Capacitor Sizing Controller
17-01-02 Location of Capacitor Banks 17-04-02 Details—Preferred Configuration
Surge and Lightning Protection 17-04-03 Stand-alone Junction(J)-Box
17-02-01 Capacitor Components Wiring
Capacitor Bank Assemblies 17-04-04 Stand-alone Capacitor J-Box
17-02-02 Capacitor Units Detail
Vacuum Switches 17-04-05 Stand-alone Sensing Insulator
17-02-03 Controllers Installation Sensor
Racks 17-04-06 Neutral CT Wiring for 12.5 kV
17-02-04 Voltage Sensor for 35 kV
Sensing Insulator 17-04-07 Grounding
17-02-05 Neutral CT Bonding
Radio 17-04-08 Capacitor Control, Conduit, and
Antenna Ground
Junction Box 17-05-01 Operation &Maintenance
17-02-06 Inrush Suppression Reactors Operation
17-03-01 IWC Capacitor Capacitor Fusing
Integrated Volt/VAR Control Replacing Fuse Links
(IWC) 17-05-02 Capacitor Bank Fuse Sizes
17-03-02 Switched BankCrossarm Capacitor Testing
Construction Configuration
w/Voltage Sensors and 17-06-01 4400 Capacitor Control Wiring
Controller Junction(J)Box Wiring
17-03-03 Details 17-06-04 Maintenance of Existing
17-03-04 IWC Junction(J)Box Wiring Capacitor Bank with 4400 Cap
17-03-05 IWC Capacitor J-Box Details Controller
17-03-06 Voltage Sensor
17-03-07 Sensor Mounting and Orientation
Voltage Sensor Installation
Instruction
17-03-08 Capacitor Grounding—1 2.5kV
and 25 kV
17-03-09 Capacitor Grounding-35 kV
17-03-10 Neutral CT Wiring for 12.5 kV
for 35 kV
17-03-11 Grounding
Bonding
17-03-12 IWC Capacitor Control, Conduit
& Ground
Stand-off Brackets
17-03-13 Guide to Install Antenna
pAHO
pR Table of Contents
�,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 17-01-01
General Information
Definitions
Fixed Capacitor Bank refers to a capacitor bank that is manually controlled. It will remain either"on" or
"off'until it is manually switched to the other position.
If a fixed capacitor-can fails, it should be replaced with a complete switched bank if possible.
Switched Capacitor Bank refers to a capacitor bank that uses a controller to automatically switch it"on"
when the capacitance is needed and"off'when it is not needed.
Capacitor Applications
Capacitors are used on distribution circuits to compensate for the reactive current caused by motors and
other inductive loads,compensating for reactive current will:
♦ Increase the circuit's capacity
♦ Reduce the line current
♦ Reduce losses
Compensating for reactive current on the feeder circuits also helps improve the voltage stability on the
transmission system.
Capacitors can also be used to increase the circuit voltage. Careful design considerations must be
evaluated when using them for this purpose. Contact your Field Engineer.
Connections
Distribution circuits use shunt capacitors that are connected phase-to-ground(grounded-wye for 3-0
applications).
Do not use capacitors on distribution circuits that are connected in any other manner, i.e.,phase-to-
phase or ungrounded-wye.
Capacitor Sizing
The preferred largest capacitor bank Idaho Power will install is 1200 KVAR. If a situation requires for
reactive VAR compensation,contact your field engineer. It will be up to the engineer to determine whether
to add an additional capacitor bank or upgrade the 1200 KVAR to 1800.
Try to place capacitor banks of appropriate sizes throughout the circuit to match load requirements as
much as possible. Since the feeder loads are continuously changing,managing capacitor bank
requirements is an on-going process.
"`�R. General Information

7-01-02 Reviewed 10/22 Overhead
This table shows the WAR of capacitance required per MW of load to correct certain load types to 1.0
power factor.
Type of Load p.f. Required Capacitance
Irrigation 0.85 620 WAR per MW
Commercial 0.88 540 kVAR per MW
Residential 0.95 330 kVAR per MW
Location of Capacitor Banks
Capacitor banks are available in 1-0 and 3-0 configurations in sizes ranging from 100 to 600 WAR per
phase.Most 3-0 banks are either 600 WAR or 1200 WAR.
♦ For power factor correction, install capacitor banks as close to the center of the reactive loads as
practical.
♦ Switched banks that sense the load or current need to be placed ahead of the load.
♦ Larger switched banks should be placed closer to the substation to minimize voltage transients during
switching.
♦ Avoid installing banks that are too large for the load.
♦ Keep capacitor banks at least 1/4 mile apart. Banks closer than this requires inrush reactors, contact
Methods&Materials.
♦ Capacitors installed to raise the circuit voltage require a detailed analysis, contact your field engineer.
Surge and Lightning Protection
New capacitor banks come with arresters installed on the rack.Arresters are required to help protect the
capacitor units.
General Information '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 17-02-01
Capacitor Components
Capacitor Bank Assemblies
Distribution capacitor banks are assembled at the factory. They are purchased in 600 WAR and 1200
WAR sizes and for all primary distribution voltages.
Capacitor bank assemblies from the factory include vacuum switches,transformer, capacitor cans,
arresters,bussing, control cable,base, and the rack.
Cat. ID CU Code Bank Size
12.5-kV
19514 DCBS61 600 WAR
19515 DCBS121 1200 WAR
25-kV
44696 DCBS62 600 WAR
40590 DCBS122 1200 WAR
34.5-kV
20076 DCBS63 600 WAR
19516 DCBS123 1200 WAR
0
0 0
0 0
o �ou
Capacitor Vacuum Switch Bank
EM�R� Capacitor Components

7-02-02 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Capacitor Units Vacuum Switches
Individual capacitors can be purchased for Switched capacitor banks use a vacuum switch
replacement of failed units,or to increase the to connect and disconnect the bank from the
size of an existing bank. primary circuit. Prior to 2007,banks came with
oil-filled switches. If an oil switch fails,it is now
Capacitors for 7.2-kV and 14.4-kV applications the practice to replace it with a vacuum switch.
are purchased in 1-0 100 WAR(non-standard)
and 200 WAR units with two high voltage
bushings. 19.9-kV capacitors are purchased in
1—fry 100 WAR(non-standard)and 200 WAR
units with one high voltage bushing.A special
2-bushing 19.9-kV capacitor is available for
installations of the harmonic suppression reactor
(HSR).
o
oo
El
Vacuum Switch
Operating
Cat. ID CU Code Voltage
36111 DCVS1 12.5-kV
7.2 W 14.4 W 19.9 W 44695 DCVS3 34.5-kV
Linkbreak Cutouts
Cat. ID CU Code WAR Linkbreak cutouts are used
7.2-kV(2 Bushing) on capacitor bank
1442 DC100C 100 installations. They are a
1444 DC200C 200 fused disconnect switch with
14.4-kV(2 Bushing) a lever arm on the lower
1445 DC10ON 100 portion of the switch.
1446 DC20ON 200
19.9-kV(1 Bushing)
1447 DC10OR 100
1449 DC20OR 200 Linkbreak Cutouts
19.9-kV(2 Bushing for HSR) Cat. ID Short Description CU Code
1450 None 200
50045 15 kV 100A DSLKBS151
55500 35 kV 100A DSLKBS351
NOTE. Avian switch cover is embedded in
the switch CU code.
This information is also in Overhead 13-01
Capacitor Components '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 17-02-03
Controllers Control Cable 7-Pin Layout.The 7-pin DIN
signal assignments are as follows:
Type of Controllers. CBC-8000 controllers are
used for IVVC and stand-alone capacitor banks O O
and replacement for 4400 Cap Control. F A
0 0
EO O OB
p O
�.
O O
Pin Signal
® 00 G-=0 ' A Line
man B Trip/Open
T.
C Close
D Sensor Return (Common)
Cat. ID CU Code Description E Neutral Current
F Line Current Sensor Hot/Sensor
57429 DCCBC8000 CBC-8000 Stand Alone G Neutral/Line 2
57966 DCCBC80001VVC CBC-80001VVC
57408 Cable Security Sleeve* Controller 1KVA PT. The new capacitors come
NOTES: 'Issued in areas of vandalism with the appropriate PT for 34.5 KV or 12.5 KV.
Controller cables.Install controller cables For a 25 KV recloser or for maintenance,use the
inside a 3-inch conduit on stand-off brackets following table:
attached to the pole. Cat. ID DESCRIPTION
54157 1KVA, 12470GRDY/7200, 120V
54158 1KVA,34500GRDY/19920, 120V
Control cable pigtail.New capacitors come 56019 1KVA,24940GRDY/14400, 120V
with a cap control cable that is 40-feet,7-wire This information is also included in Overhead
with 7-pin amphenol connector on one end and Manual 15-03.
pigtail on other.
i-�'- Racks
Banks are supplied with racks, Cat ID shown
° below is only for maintenance. The nine-unit
Control Cable Pigtail rack is used for all switched capacitor banks and
holds up to three 200 WAR capacitor cans per
Cat. ID CU Code Description phase.
57354 None 40 FT Cap Control Cable
58451 None 50 FT Cap Control Cable Max. Number of
58452 None 60 FT Cap Control Cable Cat. ID CU Code Capacitor Cans
1439 DCR39 9
R, Capacitor Components

7-02-04 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Voltage Sensor Sensing Insulator
A voltage sensing insulator is required for new A sensing insulator is required for new stand-
IVVC capacitor bank installations. The voltage alone capacitor bank installations.The sensing
sensing insulator is used to measure voltage and insulator measures current in the primary
provide a low voltage output proportional to the conductor and converts it to a voltage that is
primary. Each bank requires 2-voltage monitored by the controller.
sensors,see below.This information also
found in OH 17-03-06. Always point the nipple of the base toward the
load. Discuss capacitor bank control
configurations with your line operations tech.
Caution.The ground wire carries high
voltage with the conductor in the groove
As
AMuntil properly grounded.
r' Porcelain Conductor
insulator
_ body coil
Cat. ID CU Code Voltage
Shield Core
58851 DIVS12 12.5-kV
58852 DIVS35 34.5-kV Potting_-
compound
6-4
Voltage Sensor Cable.The 2-in-1 voltage sensor Ground wire hole
cable has two separate male 4-pin connectors and 314-10 Mounting hole Black
one 8-pin female connector that mates with the white R d� \Ground wire
male sensor input on the CBC-8000 control box. (Not used)
Use anti-seize lube on the amphenol connections
to ease threading, Cat. ID 6684. A Cutaway of a Current Sensing Insulator
Cat. ID CU Code Voltage
1451 DFP15 12.5-kV
1452 DFP35 34.5-kV
F.M
• al
Voltage Sensor Cable Amphenol Plugs
Cat. ID CU Code Description
58853 DVSC2150 Voltage Sensor Cable 50
6684 None Anti-seize lube'
Capacitor Components '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 17-02-05
Neutral CT
Neutral CT is used to detect neutral current unbalance or blown fuse of a capacitor bank.
Cat. ID CU Code Description
9190 56882 DCCCS Neutral Sensor
Radio
Radio is provided in every IVVC capacitor bank for a two-way remote
communication control of the device such as capacitor bank and regulator bank at
an assigned frequency.
Cat. ID CU Code Description
57358 DRADIO Radio Remote
Radio in Capacitor Bank
Antenna
The Yagi antenna includes an integrated mounting plate with
stainless steel U-Bolts for pole mounting,watertight tape, UV
tape and a pigtail terminated with an N-type female connector.
i
Cat. ID Description
57864 Yagi Antenna
58523 Antenna Mount
57425 COAX Cable 30'
Junction Box
v 4
Cat. ID CU Code Description
57428 DCJB J BOX Assembly includes Control Cable, Neutral CT
EM�R� Capacitor Components

7-02-06 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Inrush Suppression Reactors
Capacitor banks may be reconfigured to accommodate the insertion of inrush suppression reactors for the
purpose of limiting the magnitude and frequency of inrush currents associated with back-to-back
capacitor switching.
The manufacturer recommends,when retrofitting a capacitor bank with inrush reactors,the reactors are to
be installed after the lightning arresters.Modify bushing guard to cover terminals as shown.
Cat. ID CU Code Description
36668 DCRUSH Capacitor inrush reactors
0
{p n ql
U
O O
00 0
H -------------1�
Capacitor Bank with Reactors Installed
Capacitor Components '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 10/22 17-03-01
IVVC Capacitor
Integrated Volt/VAR Control (IVVC)
The objective of the Integrated VoltNAR Control(IVVC)is to reduce electric feeder losses while
minimizing distribution voltage within acceptable operating limits.The controls used to achieve these
objectives are transformer Load Tap Changers(LTCs), substation and feeder capacitor bank controls plus
substation and feeder voltage regulators.
NOTE: For capacitor bank installation on a transmission steel pole, contact Transmission
Engineering for permission to drill holes or weld the attachment brackets
Additional Information regarding the switched bank shown on next page.
■ Voltage Sensors installed on different phases as the Voltage transformer.
■ For older capacitor rack,use extension brackets to mount sensor away from rack to maintain
clearance and separation— 12-inch minimum.
NOTE: Consult your Field Engineer if cutout mounting height exceeds 35-feet from the ground.
�P R,. IVVC Capacitor
a.,oao�a�a.

17-03-02 Revised 09/20 Overhead
Switched Bank—Crossarm Construction Configuration w/Voltage Sensors and
Controller
W)
Source Load
(K)(N,-:%�
(E)
e
(C'�► (Q)
R.)
(D) (D)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin C Steel Pin
42'
(B� (O�) (A)
�L)
60"
Voltage Sensors
/(U`) (F')Controller Not Shown
O O (Ci•)
30 : o
(H) (U)—
11 -
(S) (T)

Overhead Written 12/22 17-03-03
Switched Bank-Crossarm Construction Configuration w/Voltage Sensors and Controller Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D/D10 Arm Apitong Device 3-0 1 ((A) DAA3D/D10 Arm Apitong Device 3-0 1
(B) DAABKT Apitong Arm Bracket 1 (B) DAABKT Apitong Arm Bracket 1
(C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1 (C) DASB...* Anti-split Bolt 1
(D) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (D) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(E) DAS.../DAFT..Crossarm 1 (E) DAS.../DAFT..Crossarm 1
(F)* DCIVVC8000* Controller(not shown) 1 (F) DCIVVC8000* Controller(not shown) 1
DRADIO Radio Cap 1 DRADIO Radio Cap 1
(G) DCBS...* Capacitor Bank Switched 1 (G) DCBS...* Capacitor Bank Switched 1
(H) DIVS12 Capacitor Voltage Sensor 12.5 kV 2 (H) DIVS35 Capacitor Voltage Sensor 34.5 kV 2
(1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1 (1) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFT...* Formed Top Tie 3
(K) D112F Insulator 12.5 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (K) D135J Insulator 34.5 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(L) DJMPRW4C Jumper Wire Cu#4 4 (L) DJMPRW4C Jumper Wire Cu#4 4
(M) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (M) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Label Plate(Labor only) 1 DNPL Label Plate(Labor only) 1
(N) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (N) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(0) DSC...* SW Fused Cutout 7.2/12.5 100A 1 (0) DSC...* SW Fused Cutout 20/34.5 100A 1
(P) DSLKBS151 SW Linkbreak 15 kV 100A 3 (P) DSLKBS351 SW Linkbreak 35 kV 100A 3
(Q) DSP Steel Pin Long 2 (Q) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(R) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup W/#4 Wire 3 (R) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup W/#4 Wire 3
(S) DCCRM* 3"Conduit Riser/Standoff 1 (S) DCCRM* 3"Conduit Riser/Standoff 1
(T) DCAYAGI Antenna 1 (T) DCAYAGI Antenna 1
(U) DVSC2150 2 In 1 Voltage Sensor Cable 1 (U) DVSC2150 2 In 1 Voltage Sensor Cable 1
* Notes
*(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
*(F) (Not Shown)Controller-See page 17-03-12 for details for both 12.5kv and 34.5kv.
DCIVVC8000 Controller,Capacitor, IVVC Programmable CBC8000,Order DRADIOCAP
*(G) Capacitor Bank-DC...,w/Rack/PT/Sw/Cap. For 25 kV system,see page 17-02-01.
DCBS61 Cap Bank Switched 600 KVAR 12.5 kV DCBS63 Cap Bank Switched 600 KVAR 34.5 kV
DCBS121 Cap Bank Switched 1200 KVAR 12.5 kV DCBS123 Cap Bank Switched 1200 KVAR 34.5 kV
*(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
*(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
*(0) Cutout-Use appropriate type for your area.
Silicone
DSCS151 Switch Fused Cutout 7.2/12.5 kV 100A
DSCS351 Switch Fused Cutout 20/34.5 kV 100A
*(R) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...R4, Refer to OH Section 08-05. Order according to wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Riser Wire
*(S) 3"Conduit Riser Standoff-DCCRM
Refer to OH 17-03 for grounding and controller installation.
PO R,. IWC Capacitor

17-03-04 Revised 12/22 Overhead
IVVC Junction (J)-Box Wiring
NOTE. If you are viewing this section in black and white, see the online version for color detail.
Wire goes to the Wire goes to the
vacuum switch. vacuum switch
— d
J
Wire goes to i Wire goes to the
1 kVA PT. ; ` vacuum switch
Wire goes to the
CT Neutral.
Control Cable
Cat. ID CU Code Description
57428 DCJB J BOX Assembly includes Control Cable, Neutral CT
57354* DACC 7-Pin Amphenol Connector and Cable
*For maintenance use only.

SWITCH CONTROL CONNECTIONS C o
C m
^ S
l 1 fD
01 L/VAC 01 L/VAC 01 L/VAC n CL
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCHALL PLUG
>v
A 0 POLARIZEDCTACTS KNEYWAY �
B ADJACENT TO E
C` GROUND WIRE TO STRAP
I FUSE 9 AOV TRIP `I
/ WHITE
COMMON
GREEN 8 C CLOSE
POTENTIAL _
TRANSFORMER tlEO FEMALE FACE VIEW d
H r-- CL OF SWITCH PLUG
120V GREEN G i --- OP ,
BLK 'CURRENT G I I I I -- G
SENSOR WHITE S GC
WHT BLACK S 71Tri r GC
T 1 l I
liili I i i JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ON RACK
I I I I I I I I I A
Illlil i i i ALL PLUG CONTACTS
CD
IIII I I I I <•
BLACK(LINE-Pi) POLARIZED KEYWAY
_______ I GROUND ADJACENT TO E
BLUE(SENSOR-RETURN) -, iiIi j I i WHITE
YELLOW J Ilil I i i a
___ ________________J.LIJ_J I I
IIII I I NEUTRAL SENSOR
IIII I �------ LINE A OD � N
IIII I TO CUSTOMER C.T. BLACK N
TO CUSTOMER CONTROL iiIi L-------- (WIRED BY OTHERS) HO OC f N
(WIRED BY OTHERS) WHITE(NEUTRAL-LINE) iiIi i/
_____________________-
I I I
II FEMALE FACE VIEW
I
GREEN(TRIP) III * OF TRANSFORMER PLUG
--------------------- �I NOTES:
jl
1) For Cap Bank with Current Sensor,
-RED(CLOSE)-------------- wire Pigtails at new J-Box as shown.
I 2) If no Current Sensor,just replace the
I
J-Box.
BROWN(LINE CURRENT SENSOR)
�
�1
�I 3
V
� O
0 W
O O
CA

1 7-03-06 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Voltage Sensor
A voltage sensing insulator is required for new
IWC capacitor bank installations. The voltage
sensing insulator is used to measure voltage and
provide a low voltage output proportional to the A—DRAIN D—WHITE
primary. Each bank requires 2-voltage
sensors,see below. This information also found
in OH 17-02-04.
B—DRAI C—RED
(FEMALE SOCKET)
50'
41L-
O
O
Cat. ID CU Code Voltage
58851 DIVS12 12.5-kV Voltage Sensor Wiring Diagram
58852 DIVS35 34.5-kV

Overhead Revised 12/22 17-03-07
Sensor Mounting and Orientation Voltage Sensor Installation Instruction
The voltage sensor is a shunt device, like an 1) Mount the two Lindsey voltage sensors
arrester,that is mounted on the capacitor rack on the frame of the cap bank rack using
using the regular mounting bracket that's the"L"brackets,included in the box.
included. Note: If there are no available holes on
NOTE: Voltage sensors must be installed chosen spot for the sensor, drill 9/16-
on different phases than the voltage inch holes on the aluminum rack to fit
transformer. the regular"L"or 12-inch extension
brackets, see photos below.
For older capacitor racks with possible clearance
issues,use the 12-inch extension bracket
Cat.ID 58870.
a --
J t
2) Bond the sensor base to the rack ground
using#6 SD Cu wire.
3) Connect the jumper, (600-V, insulated,
U #4 Cu covered wire)from the two
voltage sensors to the vacuum switches.
s 4) Install bird guard bushing on the voltage
-� sensor.
5) Connect cable to sensor and CBC-8000
6) Train the sensor cables through the
conduit. Leave enough cable slack to
connect to the controller at each end.
Sensor Grounding Coil any excess cable length and zip-tie
to the overhead rack.
The voltage sensor MUST be solidly grounded
Do not cut excess sensor cable.
before it is energized.
Caution: Connection to phase conductor 7) Once all wires and cables are terminated
will energize the sensor and will result to and landed properly, energize the cap
high voltage across the output unless bank
grounded.
��POI�n Rn. WC Capacitor
Al IDACDW Ca 1Y

17-03-08 Reviewed 12122 Overhead
Capacitor Grounding - 12.5 kV and 25 kV
Ground PT secondary,
PT case,arresters,and vacumn
switch cases to rack #4 Str
(factory installed)* Secondary ground*
#6 Cu
o o o o o o
Neqtral CT
I L
0 0
Note. Inspect rack welds. o 0 0
If continuity is questionable,
run#4 Str Cu around rack
through all rack ground lugs.
Secondary Ground* Connect pole ground Rack
and neutral to rack Neutral CT
#4 Str To Primary Signal to
o Neutral JB
Cap Common Neutral CT
Neutral Ground
#6 Cu
Note. Antenna hardware ground with
"chair lug"and the#6 Cu connected (1)Self-tapping 3-inch screw
to the pole ground w/c-tap.
(2)Self-tapping 3-inch screw
#2 Cu
* If the secondary is not
grounded,ground at the
junction box. -
��DAHO
POIN Rd Capacitor and Control Box Grounding
AlIDACORPC11Pa1V

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 17-03-09
Capacitor Grounding-35 kV
Ground PT secondary,
PT case,arresters,and vacumn
switch cases to rack #4 -.tr
(factory installed)* Secondary ground*
#6 Cu
o a
�, hde W tr;i
LJ �
0 0 1 _
0 0
Note. Inspect rack wields. o To Ground Sensor Ground
If continuity is questionable, Q
run#4 Str Cu around rack
through all rack ground lugs.
JB
Secondary Ground* Connect pole ground Neutral CT
and neutra Ito rack
#4 Str
Neutral CT
To Primary Signal toJB
Neutral Ra
#6 Cu Cap Common
Neutral Ground
Note. Antenna hardware ground with g-
..chair lug"and the#6 Cu connected (1) Self-tapping 3-inch screw
to the pole ground We-tap.
�a
(2) Self-tapping 3-inch screw
* If the secondary is not
grounded,ground at the
junction box.
'116-MM PCIIM Rr Capacitor and Control Box Grounding
an ioa[ozP mmPany

1 7-03-10 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Neutral CT Wiring for 12.5 kV for 35 kV
wo I Cap
Rack
Neutral CT
Cap
RackAi Neutral CT
Signal Wire
_ #6 CU Wire to
Pole Ground
PG r�
Connector
To Primary L
Neutral
��DAHO
POW Rd Capacitor and Control Box Grounding
An IDACORP CCMp3ny

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 1 7-03-1 1
Grounding
Ground all equipment including,racks,voltage
sensors,arresters,transformer cases,vacuum switch
cases, and controller cases.
A ground grid is required at all switched capacitor bank
locations. This creates an equipotential safe zone to
protect workers that are standing near the box if an 8"min 4, �
incident happens at that precise time. Separate the
electrodes by 6-to 8-feet, see illustration right.
Single-bushing capacitor cans are grounded through to s
connectors on the case.
Two-bushing capacitor cans require that one of the high voltage bushings be effectively grounded unless a
harmonic suppression reactor is installed to reduce communications interference.
Bonding
Anti-split bolts located in all non-Apitong crossarms shall be bonded. Fiberglass arms do not have an
anit-split bolt,however bond together any metal hardware within 2-inches
This information is also in Overhead Manual 17-04.
��Rr Capacitor and Control Box Grounding
an ioa[ozP mmPa y

1 7-03-12 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
IVVC Capacitor Control, Conduit & Stand Off Brackets
Ground
Sensor Cable,Cap Control Cable, The following is required for standoff brackets:
and COAX Cable
Standoff Bracket ♦ One set of standoff brackets are allowed
per pole, includes Joint Users.
Plate ♦ The first 2 brackets on the pole must be
fController at least 8-feet apart.
1.5-feet
3-inch conduit,see Note 6 ♦ If there is an object near the pole that
+ Spacing can be used to climb the pole,then the
See Note z. next bracket must be at least 8-feet
5-feet from Tyraps and above it.
ground level Clamps
See Note 1. ♦ Band conduits to each other if necessary
See Note 3. See Note 4
to stabilize.
This page is also included in Overhead Manual
17-04.
#2 Cu is buried 8-inches
minimum below ground level,
see Note 5.
6-tJ�8-feeti
6-to8-feet
Notes
l. Mount the center of the control box 5-feet
high on the pole.
2. Control cable must be fastened on pole as
they come out of the conduit using
rubberized clamp, Cat ID 57562 and
Tyraps Cat. ID 20029.
3. Locking sleeve can be installed to help
prevent vandalism,if appropriate using
Cat. ID 57408.
4. The#6 bare Cu ground wire is connected to
the control box with a bonding clip and to
pole ground with a C-tap.
5. Bond the#2 Cu wire to the pole ground with
a C-Tap.
6. Train all control cables through the conduit
CU Code Description Qty
DGRID #2 Ground Grid 1
DCCRM 3"Conduit and Stand-off 1
IDAHO
Capacitor and Control Box Grounding
1�I-ORP­P11Y

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 1 7-03-13
Guide to Install Antenna
Orientation/Alignment
® 1 Neutral
The orientation of the antenna(line angle)varies Red tape on top 3"Min.
from location to location and should point1111111 Lr
directly towards the assigned master radio
location. It is important that the mount be
installed within 90'of the azimuth(line angle) 30"Min.
to the assigned master radio location which will
be specified by the COMM Engineering and Comm.
included on the work order by the distribution
designer. This will guide and ensure proper
installation of the antenna mount in the right
direction. If the line angle is not specified at the
time the work order has been written,the
antenna installer shall call the distribution
designer for the information.
8'
DCAYAGI CU Code
Cat. ID Description oty First Bracket
57864 Yagi Antenna 1
58523 Antenna Mount 1
57425 COAX Cable,30' 1
57421 3/8"Rubber-Insulated Clamps 5 6.5'Min.
13130 3"Self-tapping Screws 10
5280 Clip,Bonding F/3/4 1 5'Min.
28806 #6 Cu Conductor 3
5700 Connector C-Tap,6T06 2
12291 1-HL Terminal#6 3/8"Lug 1
58143 1-HL Chair Lug 1
14662 1/4"Washers 4
'`�R. Capacitor and Control Box Grounding

1 7-03-14 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Mounting and Grounding
The antenna mount and the antenna bracket need to be attached to the pole ground.Use the following
steps to ground the antenna assembly:
1. Crimp 1-hole lug to an 18-inch piece of#6 Cu.
2. While assembling the antenna, attach the
1-hole lug to the antenna bracket under a
U-bolt and assemble with the mount for the pole.
3. Use 3 self-tapping lags to attach the antenna mount to the pole.
4. Scrape paint away from the fourth hole.
5. Attach a chair lug to a second section of 6-inch piece of#6 Cu. Attach to the antenna mount with a
self-tapping screw to the fourth hole.
6. C-tap both strands of#6 Cu to the pole ground.
Coax
The antenna is connected to the radio using a coax cable in the conduit for capacitors and strapped to the
pole for regulators. The mating torque for an N type connector is finger tight; do not over overtighten.
Tape and insulate coax connections; top and bottom using the tapes provided with the antenna.
Wrap with the water seal tape first and then wrap with the UV tape.
This information is also in Overhead Manual 15-03 and 16-04.
Coil excess coax.
Connect pigtail to coax, hand
tighten. Cover with water tight
tape first and then UV tape. Red tape in top position.
Antenna in right
angled bracket Eith
' an align
as shown.
fl
Attach bracket
and mount to
pole ground.
IDAHO
Capacitor and Control Box Grounding
1�I-ORP­Pa.Y

Overhead Revised 12/22 17-04-01
Stand-Alone Capacitor
W)
Source Load
(E)
(C*)-
�R-)
Bond to Bond to
Steel Pin Steel Pin
42" lip
j0
60" �L)
(F')Controller
Not Shown
See page
17-02-02
LQ for details
0 0 (G,)
310" 0 O 0
1 1 (I*)(M)
Switched Bank—Crossarm Construction VAR Configuration
w/Sensing Insulator and Controller
Additional Information regarding this structure.
■ Sensing insulator on source side of the capacitor primary jumpers.
■ Secondary lead of sensing insulator always points toward Load!
■ Position of primary jumpers determines where electrically the
cap cans are in the circuit and makes the bank current-controlled
or VAR-controlled.
■ In this example the cap cans physically are on the source side of
the sensing insulator but on the load side electrically.
■ Sensing insulator installed on the same phase as voltage
tramsformer. X = 30"
NOTE: On Existing Streamline
For details, see the next page. Construction: The sensing
insulator will be installed in the
NOTE: Consult your Field Engineer if cutout mounting height will exceed middle phase. Replace pole top
pin with pole top bracket
35-feet from the ground (CID 5234, DPTBR)to mount
the sensing insulator.
"`�M Standalone Capacitor
­­­

17-04-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Switched Bank - Crossarm Construction VAR Configuration
w/Sensing Insulator and Controller Details — Preferred Configuration
VAR Configuration Matrix
Primary Jumpers
Load Side Source Side
Capacitor cans X
Sensing insulator X
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAA3D/D10 Arm Apitong Device 3-0 1 (A) DAA3D/D10 Arm Apitong Device 3-0 1
(B) DAABKT Apitong Arm Bracket 1 (B) DAABKT Apitong Arm Bracket 1
(C) DASB...- Anti-split Bolt 1 (C) DASB...- Anti-split Bolt 1
(D) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2 (D) DASB6 Anti-split Bolt 6" 2
(E) DAS.../DAFT..Crossarm 1 (E) DAS.../DAFT..Crossarm 1
(F) DCCBC8000` Controller(not shown) 1 (F) DCCBC8000 Controller(not shown) 1
(G) DCBS..." Capacitor Bank Switched 1 (G) DCBS..." Capacitor Bank Switched 1
(H) DFP15 Capacitor Sensor Insulator 12.5 kV 1 (H) DFP35 Capacitor Sensor Insulator 34.5 kV 1
(1) DFSP..." Formed Spool Tie 1 (1) DFSP..." Formed Spool Tie 1
(J) DFT...` Formed Top Tie 3 (J) DFT...` Formed Top Tie 3
(K) D112F Insulator 12.5 kV Pin Type F-Neck 2 (K) D135J Insulator 34.5 kV Pin Type J-Neck 2
(L) DJMPRWC4 Jumper Wire Cu#4 4 (L) DJMPRWC4 Jumper Wire Cu#4 4
(M) DNB Neutral Bracket 1 (M) DNB Neutral Bracket 1
DNPL Label Plate(Labor only) 1 DNPL Label Plate(Labor only) 1
(N) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (N) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(0) DSC...- SW Fused Cutout 7.2/12.5 100A 1 (0) DSC...- SW Fused Cutout 20/34.5 100A 1
(P) DSLKBS151 SW Linkbreak 15 kV 100A 3 (P) DSLKBS351 SW Linkbreak 35 kV 100A 3
(Q) DSP Steel Pin Long 1 (Q) DSP Steel Pin Long 1
(R) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup W/#4 Wire 3 (R) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup W/#4 Wire 3
DCCRM 3"Riser Conduit I Standoff 1 DCCRM 3"Riser Conduit I Standoff 1
* Notes
*(C) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Are included in crossarm and pole CU codes.
'(F) (Not Shown)Controller-See page 17-04-04 for details
DCCBC8000 Controller,Capacitor,CBC-8000, Programmable
'(G) Capacitor Bank-DC...,w/Rack/PT/Sw/Cap. For 25 kV system,see page 17-02-01.
DCBS61 Cap Bank Switched 600 KVAR 12.5 kV DCBS63 Cap Bank Switched 600 KVAR 34.5 kV
DCBS121 Cap Bank Switched 1200 KVAR 12.5 kV DCBS123 Cap Bank Switched 1200 KVAR 34.5 kV
`(I) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
`(J) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order a separate tie for the sensing insulator. Order by wire size.
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
DFTJ... Formed Top Tie F/Sensing Insulator DFTK... Formed Top Tie F/Sensing Insulator
*(0) Cutout-Use appropriate type for your area.
Silicone
DSCS151 Switch Fused Cutout 7.2/12.5 kV 100A
DSCS351 Switch Fused Cutout 20/34.5 kV 100A
'(R) Wedge Stirrup-DWS...R4, Refer to OH Section 08-05. Order according to wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Riser Wire
Pole and conductor are not listed.Refer to Sections 05 and 10.
Standalone Capacitor —`POWER,

Overhead Revised 12/22 1 7-04-03
Stand-Alone Junction (J)-Box Wiring
NOTE. If vou are viewing this section in black and white, see the on-line version for color detail_
Wire goes to the Wires go to the
vacuum switch.
vacuum switch.
Cc
Wire goes to 4e Wires go to the
1 kVA PT. vacuum switch.
Wire goes to the Wire goes to the
current sensor. CT Neutral.
Cat. ID CU Code Description
57428 DCJB J BOX Assembly includes Control Cable
57354* DACC 7-Pin Amphenol Connector and Cable
*For maintenance use only.
`�R� Standalone Capacitor

(n 3
rt
V
Q C �
SWITCH CONTROL CONNECTIONS c
C
OIL/VAC 01 L/VAC 01 L/VAC
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
ALL PLUG CONTACTS n
A 0 POLARIZED KEYWAY
C B ADJACENT TO E C
2' GROUND WIRE TO STRAP �g
V �
AO I 1 FUSE TRIP
J WHITE 0
COMMON
D C GREEN CLOSE
POTENTIAL BLACK C7
, TRANSFORMER O FEMALE FACE VIEW
H r-- CL OF SWITCH PLUG
120V G op
GREEN I
BLK CURRENT G III -- G
SENSOR WHITE
WHT BLACK S i l i i l GC --
S yTtrl� r GC i 1 CD
CL
liiji I i i JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ON RACK 3
II1111 I I I N
IIIIII I 1 I
IIIIII I I I ALL PLUG CONTACTS N
POLARIZED KEYWAY N
_B----LINE_- _ ______ 1 GROio
JACENT TO E
BLUE(SENSOR-RETURN) i liji I i i W
-------------------J IIII I I
YELLOW----------------1Li1-� I
IIII 1 I NEUTRAL SENSOR
IIII I ------ LINE
I I11 1 TO CUSTOMER C.T. BLACK
TO CUSTOMER CONTROL iili L-------- (WIRED BY OTHERS)
(WIRED BY OTHERS) I
WHITE(NEUTRAL-LINE) II
- II
_--___-------- ------JIII
1
III FEMALE FACE VIEW
GREEN(TRIP) ------- III .NOTES: OF TRANSFORMER PLUG
--------------- '�11
1) For Cap Bank with Current Sensor,
11
-RED(CLOSE)--------------jl wire Pigtails at new J-Box as shown.
I 2) If no Current Sensor,just replace the
I
J-Box.
-BROWN(UNE CURRENT SENSOR)--�
0
CD
3 �

Overhead Revised 12/22 17-04-05
StandAlone Sensing Insulator Installation Sensor
LINE CONDUCTOR
so SOURCE LOAD
F.P. SENSOR
BASE NIPPLE
0
CROSSARM
CAUTION: Drain lead
carries leakage current.
Hi-line voltage appears on
the green/bare conductor
lead until it is grounded.
TIE WRAP
F.P. SENSOR
BASE GROUNDING LUG
WHT
BLK 3—WIRE SENSOR
DRAIN JACKETED LEADS
RED (NOT USED)
#6 AWG GROUNDING
CONDUCTOR, MIN.
CAUTION: Do not tie in the hot primary conductor until the base of the sensing insulator is
grounded and the secondary leads have been terminated.The hot primary is tied onto the sensing
insulator.
"`�R. Standalone Capacitor

7-04-06 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Neutral CT Wiring for 12.5 kV for 35 kV
�&
Cap -
�� Rack
Neutral CT
Cap
Rack -A Neutral CT
'~ Signal Wire a
=— #6 CU Wire to 1
Pole Ground
PG z
Connector y.
To Primary
Neutral
Standalone Capacitor -`�10AHO

Overhead Revised 12/22 17-04-07
Grounding
Ground all equipment including,racks,voltage
sensors,arresters,transformer cases,vacuum switch
cases, and controller cases.
A ground grid is required at all switched capacitor bank
locations. This creates an equipotential safe zone to
protect workers that are standing near the box if an 8"min 4, �
incident happens at that precise time. Separate the
electrodes by 6-to 8-feet, see illustration right.
Single-bushing capacitor cans are grounded through to s
connectors on the case.
Two-bushing capacitor cans require that one of the high voltage bushings be effectively grounded unless a
harmonic suppression reactor is installed to reduce communications interference.
Bonding
Bond anti-split bolts on all wood crossarms.
This information is also in Overhead Manual 17-03.
"`�R. Standalone Capacitor

17-04-08 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Capacitor Control, Conduit, and Ground
Sensor Cable,Cap C°"fro'Cable, Stand Off Brackets
and COAX Cable
Stand-off Bracket
The following is required for standoff brackets:
Plate ♦ One set of standoff brackets are allowed
Controller
per pole, includes Joint Users.
1.5-feet 3-inch conduit,see Note 6 ♦ The first 2 brackets on the pole must be
+ at least 8-feet apart.
Spacing
See Note 2. ♦ If there is an object near the pole that
5-feetfrom Tyraps and can be used to climb the pole,then the
ground level Clamps
See Note,. See Note 3. See Note 4 next bracket must be at least 8-feet
above it.
♦ Band conduits to each other if necessary
to stabilize.
#2 Cu is buried 8-inches
minimum below ground level, g see Nate 5. page a e is also included in Overhead Manual
17-03.
66--to 8-feet
6-to8-feet
Notes
1. Mount the center of the control box 5-feet
high on the pole.
2. Control cable must be fastened on pole as
they come out of the conduit using
rubberized clamp, Cat ID 57562 and
Tyraps Cat. ID 20029.
3. Locking sleeve can be installed to help
prevent vandalism,if appropriate using
Cat. ID 57408.
4. The#6 bare Cu ground wire is connected to
the control box with a bonding clip.and to
pole ground with a C-tap.
5. Bond the#2 Cu wire to the pole ground with
a C-Tap.
6. Train all control cables through the conduit
CU Code Description Qty
DGRID #2 Ground Grid 1
DCCRM 3"Conduit and Stand-off 1
Standalone Capacitor -`�R

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 17-055-01
Operation and Maintenance
Operation Capacitor Fusing
Capacitor Banks are energized and Expulsion Fuses. All capacitor banks will be
de-energized by using the following procedures: fused using the table shown on the next page.
De-Energize a Bank: Replacing Fuse Links
1) Notify the dispatcher.
2) Open oil or vacuum switches if any(usually 1) Notify the dispatcher.
with controller) * 2) Open vac/oil switches if applicable.
3) Open all fused cutouts. 3) Open all fused cutouts.
4) Wait 5 minutes for internal resistors to drain 4) Wait 5 minutes for the discharge resistor to
off capacitor charges. drain away the charge.
5) Using a hot-line tool, ground, and short 5) Ground and short all capacitors within the
circuit by connecting the grounding set to working area.
each leg between switches and capacitors. 6) Inspect the individual capacitors. Check for
bulged or cracked tanks,broken or leaking
To Energize a Bank bushings, and indication of flashover from
1) Notify the dispatcher. foreign objects or animals having been
2) Be sure all neutral and ground connections across leads and jumpers.
are secure.
7) Check all capacitors with a capacitance
3) Remove any temporary shorting and tester(C-Meter).
grounding devices. 8) If no visible damage is observed and the
4) Close in service power to controller. capacitance checks are okay,replace all
5) Match controller with switch position. blown fuses,remove the grounding and
6) Confirm all switches are open. shorting leads, and close the cutouts.
7) Close all fused cutouts. 9) Close the oil/vacuum switches with the
8) Operate the switches with controller. controller. Move way as it closes if
possible.
* Capacitor switches may also be tripped using 10) If the capacitors
the manual operating handle located on the or the controller are damaged,report the bank
switch under the sleet hood. number, location and damage to the
dispatcher. Leave the bank de-energized. If a
PCB fluid spill is involved, see the
O procedures in OH 24-01.
Manual Operating
Handle
Yellow Handle
`POWER. Operation and Maintenance

7-05-02 Reviewed 12/22 Overhead
Capacitor Bank Fuse Sizes Use the following procedure for testing
capacitor cans with using the ABB
Red Risk Zone Fuse Sizing.For information on Capacitor Meter:
capacitor fuse sizes in Red Risk Zones, see 1) Prepare the capacitor bank and units for
Overhead Manual 14-04 ELF and 14-05 SMU. maintenance according to the supplier
Fusing Schedule for Shunt Capacitor Banks instructions,which should include at least
Cat. ID Rating Overload Ampacity the instructions listed below:
Type KS—Tin Link(Local Service) ♦ Switch off and disconnect the
6101 1 KS 1.5 capacitor bank from the network.
Capacitor Chance Type K—Silver Link
(Orange Barrel) ♦ Wait 5 minutes for the capacitor units
50152 Cap Only 8K 13 to discharge.
50153 Cap Only 10K 15
50154 Cap Only 15K 23 ♦ Ground and short-circuit the bank.
50155 Cap Only 20K 31 2) Short-circuit the two bushings and the
50156 Cap Only 25K 37
50157 Cap Only 30K 42 capacitor unit/parallel group to be
50158 Cap Only 40K 51 measured.
50159 Cap Only 50K 66 3) Remove the temporary short circuit.
50160 Cap Only 65K 84
50161 Cap Only 80K 105 4) Connect the voltage clips cable to the CB-
2000 and connect the voltage clips to the
Capacitor Testing capacitor unit or the parallel group of units
If a capacitor bank has a blown fuse,the to be measured.
suspected unit should be checked with a Multi 5) Connect the clip-on transformer cable to
Meter before being energized using the the CB-2000 and hook on the clip-on
following procedure: transformer around one of the bushings of
the unit to be measured. Place it as close
1) Prepare the capacitor bank and units for to the capacitor as possible.The direction
maintenance according to the supplier of the clip-on transformer is not important
instructions,which should include at least for the measurement.
the instructions listed below: 6) Please refer to Section 4, CB-2000 User
♦ Switch off and disconnect the interface,of the User's Guide for handling
of the C13-2000.
capacitor bank from the network.
♦ Wait 5 minutes for the capacitor units
to discharge.
♦ Ground and short-circuit the bank.
2) Short-circuit the two bushings and the
capacitor unit/parallel group to be
measured.
3) Remove the temporary short circuit.
4) Connect the test leads to the capacitor
terminals per the Multi Meter
manufacturer's instructions.The negative
test lead connects to the ground bus.
Operation and Maintenance '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 12/22 17-055-03
Compare the Multi Meter readings against the following table.Any numbers outside the range should be
considered unacceptable and the capacitor unit should be replaced.A reading of zero (0)indicates a short
circuit. This is a common failure mode.
Acceptable Capacitor Test Readings
Voltage(L-G) Size Acceptable Values
7.2 W
100 kVAR 5.11 - 5.88µf
150 WAR 7.67 - 8.82µf
200 WAR 10.22 - 11.75µf
14.4 W
100 kVAR 1.28 - 1.471Af
150 WAR 1.92 - 2.20µf
19.9 W
100 WAR .67 - .77µf
150 WAR 1.00 - 1.15µf
200 WAR 1.34 - 1.54µf
NOTE. If the meter read-out does not stabilize on one value,retighten the bushing hardware and
check the test lead connection at the instrument.
R, Operation and Maintenance

Overhead Revised 01/13 1 7-06-01
4400 Capacitor Control Wiring
NOTE. If you are viewing this section in black and white, see the on line version for color detail.
Junction (J)-Box Wiring
4
�1
See CAUTION w
in Step 4.
These wires go
to the vacuum
J- switch.Up to❑3
� 1
2
3 �>
5
� 4
5
r —
These wires come from the meter These wires go to the Sensing
base and make up the control cable. insulator and the NCT.
Step 1) This red wire is not used so install a wire-nut on the end. Coil in the J-box out of the way.
Step 2) Connect the white wire across from the blue.
Step 3) Connect the black wire across from the red.
Step 4) Connect the bare shield wire/ground here.
CAUTION: This shield wire has the ability to reach line voltage. See pago
Step 5) These black and white neutral current transformer wires have no polarity though Idaho Power's
practice is to wire as shown: The black is connected across from the red black trace and
the white is connected across from the white with black trace. See page(4.
Step 6) Tie wrap as shown to keep the wires neat and grouped together.
NOTE. A color coded,laminated pocket size card is available.
To obtain one contact your local Op Tech
IDAHO
MM R, 4400 Capacitor Control Wiring
AlI—ORPCa 11Y

17-06-02 Revised 05/10
Overhead
Connect the control to the meter base.
6114
T rC
J
Y
x
4400 Capacitor Controller:
Cat. ID 1458 CU Code DC44 g
7
Step 7) Connect the white with black trace wire to the white from the control.
Step 8) Connect the red with black trace wire to the black from the control.
4400 Capacitor Control Wiring 99POMR..

Overhead Revised 05/10 1 7-06-03
Step 9) Tuck the now connected wires back into
the meter base.
R
a
Step 10) Plug control into the meter base and install the meter ring.
1
d _ -
IDAHO
MM R, 4400 Capacitor Control Wiring
AlI—ORPGa 11Y

Overhead Revised 10/19 1 7-06-04
Maintenance of Existing Capacitor Bank with 4400 Cap Controller
When a 4400 cap control fails,it will be replaced with CBC-8000 controller.
Steps:
a) Order CBC-8000 controller CID-57429 f) Install the Beckwith with 6-stab adapter
(CU Code DCCBC8000). into the existing control socket,being
b) Order the Beckwith Adapter Kit- CID- careful to guide the pigtailed wires to
58092- see details below. avoid poinching. Reinstall the retaining
c) Remove the failed 4400 cap control ring and a seal to secure the 6-stab.
from the socket. g) Connect the 7-pin amphenol on the
d) If the existing control does not have a CBC-8000.
neutral sensor,then tape off the yellow
pigtail on the Beckwith 6-stab adapter
and skip to step g).
For caps with a neutral sensor,there are
two pigtail wires in the control socket:
red-black and white-black. Stack the Existing Control
red-black into the top left lug of the CBC-8000 Cable and Socket
socket(sensor return),which becomes
the common sensor return with the
CBC-8000.
e) Butt-splice the black-white pigtail from
the existing socket to the yellow pigtail VI New Adapter Kit:
from the Beckwith adapter. 6-Stab Socket Insert
with 7-Pin Amphenol
Adapter Kit Cable
Yellow wire pigtail comes out of the stab-side of the Beckwith insert. If the cap bank does not have a
neutral sensor,this wire gets taped off and tucked into the control socket. If the cap bank has a neutral
sensor,the yellow pigtail butt-splices to the white-black pigtail in the existing meter socket and then both
get tucked into the control socket.
I Should be amphenol
(female)connector
(A) Line (G) Neutral
(B)Open (F) LC POL
(E) NC POL
V3ci
Yellow Pigtail
(C) Close (D) LC (&NC)
e cable Return
7-PIN
PLUG
Blade Meter Socket/Control
BLADE
Config 1 2 3 4 5 6
62 LC RTN Neutral Line OPEN LC POL cl MF

17-06-05 Written 01/19 Overhead
6.00(5X) 10 4 2.0 A 10 (A)Line (G)Neutral
9 10Q
1B)Open (F)LC POL
©
(E)NC POL
e
s Yellow Pigtail
8�
t C)Close (D)LC&NC
TOP RIGHT Return
MIDDLE RIGHT
BOTTOM RIGHT_
NC POL PIGTAIL
BOTTOM LEFT ��
MIDDLE LEFT
TOP LEFT
' A z 7 NOTES:
MARK PART NUMBER, 1.Tolerance or length"A"shown on table.
REVISION k DATE CODE All other 2 place dims+1-.25,
2.Mark terminals as shown.
Lace a layer of shrink tube 2"long under
PART NO. LENGTH"A" TOLERANCE WIRE LIST the clamped area.
LENGTH"A" WIRE MARKERS CANNON PINS WIRE COLOR Use shrink tubing,item 10,over solder joints.
B-1674-05 5FEET +(-1.00 TOP RIGHT G ORANGE Alternate,molded strain relief made from
MIDDLE RIGHT B RED-BLACK
BOTTOM RIGHT C RED Henkel Part No.OW0645 or equivalent.
BOTTOM LEFT F BROWN When molded strain relief is used, items 8,9
MIDDLE LEFT A BLACK &10 are not required.
TOP LEFT D BLUE
NC POL PIGTAIL E YELLOW
Offer complete assembly&/or Plug assembly NC POL Yellow wire passes
only, minus wires and Amp-connector through with 12 inch pigtail
—1d V1 At—
® Signal Stab Wire Comm
LC&NC RTN 1 TOP LEFT blue D
• O Neutral 2 TOP RIGHT orange G
u
Line 3 MIDDLE LEFT black A
© WARNING OPEN 4 MIDDLE RIGHT red/black B
® LC POL 5 BOTTOM LEFT brown F
• O CLOSE 6 BOTTOM RIGHT red C
INC POL PIGTAIL yellow I E
�B A�
..� �4wng _ I- 11 M Connector
16S-1S
6 Stabs
«
� 6 Stabs
Alk *3
6
z
Bottom Top w/Cover Removed
Capacitor Installation — Standalone Non-IWC "` R„

Overhead Revised 03/01 18-00-01
Table of Contents
18- Transformer Data & Connections
18-01-01 Distribution Transformers 18-04-01 Transformer Loading
Definitions Residential Load- Single-Family
and Duplexes
18-02-01 Distribution Transformers Types Residential Load-Multi-Family
1-0 Applications Dwellings
Conventional Overhead 18-04-02 1-0 Irrigation Loads
Completely Self-Protected(CSP) Other 1-0 loads
18-02-02 3-0 Applications Selecting 1-0 Transformers
Open-Delta and Wye-Delta 18-04-03 Commercial and Industrial Loads
18-02-03 Wye-Wye 3-0 Irrigation Loads
18-02-04 Step Transformers Selecting 3-0 Transformers
Operating Voltages 18-04-04 Non-Standard Transformer
18-02-05 Industry Standard Symbols Applications
Wye-Delta Banks
18-03-01 Transformer Applications Selecting Wye-Delta
1-0 Loads Transformers
Conventional Transformers 18-04-05 Open-Delta Banks
Completely Self-Protected Selecting Open-Delta
(CSP) Transformers
Surge Arresters 18-04-06 Coincidence Factors
1-0 Paralleling 18-04-07 Voltage Drop
18-03-02 3-0 Loads 18-04-08 Voltage Drop Factors
Wye-Wye Connections
3-0 Paralleling 18-05-01 Transformer Secondary Bussing
18-03-03 Wye-Delta Connections General Information
18-03-04 Open-Delta Connections 1-0 Secondary Busing
18-03-05 Step Transformers 3-0 Wye-Wye Secondary Busing
Autotransformers 18-05-02 3--0 Delta Secondary Busing
Two-Winding Transformers
Surge Arresters 18-06-01 Transformer Conversions& Phase
Grounding Rotation
Converting a 120/240
Transformer to 120 for a
120/208Y Bank
18-06-02 Phase Sequence(Rotation)
Phase Sequence Indicators
�wPOWER Table of Contents

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 18-01-01
Distribution Transformers
Definitions Polarity. Polarity is an indication of the
direction of current flow through the low voltage
Autotransformer. A transformer where the terminals of a transformer with respect to the
primary and secondary circuits have a winding, direction of current flow through the high
or part of a winding,in common. They are voltage terminals.
generally used to step up or down the
distribution voltage. NOTE. Transformers sized 200-kVA and
smaller and 8.66-kV and below are
CSP. Refers to a Completely Self Protected additive polarity.All other transformers
Transformer.A CSP transformer contains an are subtractive polarity.
internal primary fuse located in the bushing or
mounted above the core. It also contains a If one transformer in a bank has a different
secondary breaker. polarity,the external connections at the primary
or secondary terminals of that transformer must
Ferroresonance. An over-voltage condition be reversed.
caused by single phase switching of a circuit
where the capacitance and the reactance are Reactance. Describes the resistance to the flow
almost equal forming a resonant circuit. of AC current through a conductor caused by
inductance or capacitance.
Impedance. The combined effect of resistance
and reactance. It is the total opposition to current Resistance. Refers to the natural or inherent
flow. quality of a conductor that resists the flow of
electric current. It is measured in ohms.
Phase Sequence(or Rotation). The order in
which each phase voltage in a 3-0 system Secondary. Refers to the low voltage terminal
appears(i.e.A-B-C or A-C-B). The phase of a distribution transformer. Typically less then
sequence determines the motor's direction of 600 volts.
rotation.Note that there are only two unique
phase sequences.
♦ Clockwise
A-B-C=B-C-A=C-A-B
(A-B-C-A-B-C-A-B-C-A-B-C...)
♦ Counterclockwise
C-B-A=B-A-C=A-C-B
C-B-A-C-B-A-C-B-A-C-B-A...)
E''�IDAHO
EMPM►ER. Distribution Transformers

Overhead Revised 09/22 18-02-01
Distribution Transformer Types
1-0 Applications A completely self-protected (CSP)
transformer has one primary bushing and three
Conventional overhead transformers with secondary bushings. CSP transformers (up to 50
one primary bushing and three secondary WA) are used for 1-0 loads with 120/240
bushings are used to serve 1-0 loads with secondary voltages.
120/240 secondary voltages.
qA
CM CN2
CN1
Primary Voltage: 12,470/7,200
24,940/14,400
4, 0/1 , 0 Cat. ID Rating Polarity Type CU Code
Voltage: 120/240 7.2 kV-120/240
Secondary g 1300 15kVA Add. CN1 DT15J1
1301 25kVA Add. CN1 DT25J1
Cat. ID Rating Polarity Type CU Code 1302 50kVA Add. CN1 DT50J1
7.2 kV-1201240
1203 15kVA Add. CN1 DT15A1
1204 25kVA Add. CN1 DT25A1
1205 50kVA Add. CN1 DT50A1
14.4 kV- 1201240
1227 15kVA Sub. CN2 DT15N1
1228 25kVA Sub. CN2 DT25N1
1229 50kVA Sub. CN2 DT50N1
19.9 kV- 1201240
1260 15kVA Sub. CN1 DT15R1
1261 25kVA Sub. CN1 DT25R1
1262 50kVA Sub. CN1 DT50R1
NOTE. For larger 1-0 applications use
2 bushing transformers.
IMPOMR,. Distribution Transformer Types

18-02-02 Revised 09/22 Overhead
3-0 Applications Catalog ID and Compatible Unit Codes
Open Delta&Wye-Delta Cat. ID Rating Polarity Type CU Code
7.2 kV-1201240
Conventional overhead transformers with two 1174 15kVA Add. CN2 DT15F1
1175 25kVA Add. CN2 DT25F1
primary bushings and three secondary bushings 1176 50kVA Add. CN2 DT50F1
are used to serve open delta loads at all primary 1177 75kVA Add. CN2 DT75F1
voltages and wye-delta loads with 120/240 or 1178 100kVA Add. CN2 DT100F1
240/480 secondary voltages. 1179 167kVA Add. CN2* DT167F1
1180 250kVA Sub. CN2 DT250F1
1181 333kVA Sub. CN2* DT333F1
NOTE.Wye-delta and open delta transformer 1182 500kVA Sub. CN2* DT500F1
configurations are non-standard for new 7.2 kV-2401480
construction. 1184 25kVA Add. CN2 DT25F3
1186 50kVA Add. CN2 DT50F3
1187 75kVA Add. CN2 DT75F3
1188 100kVA Add. CN2 DT100F3
1189 167kVA Add. CN2* DT167F3
1190 250kVA Sub. CN2* none
1191 333kVA Sub. CN2* DT333F3
® � ® 1192 500kVA Sub. CN2* DT500F3
14.4 kV- 1201240
® � ® 1227 15kVA Sub. CN2 DT15N1
1228 25kVA Sub. CN2 DT25N1
1229 50kVA Sub. CN2 DT50N1
1230 75kVA Sub. CN2 DT75N1
1231 100kVA Sub. CN2 DT100N1
14.4 kV-2401480
1233 15kVA Sub. CN2 DT15N3
CN2 CN2* 1234 25kVA Sub. CN2 DT25N3
1236 50kVA Sub. CN2 DT50N3
Open Delta 1237 75kVA Sub. CN2 DT75N3
1238 100kVA Sub. CN2 DT100N3
Primary Voltage: 12,470/7,200 1239 167kVA Sub. CN2* none
24,940/14,400 19.9 kV- 1201240
34,500/19,920 1252 25kVA Sub. CN2 DT25S1
Secondary Voltage: 120/240 19.9 kV-2401480
240/480 1255 15kVA Sub. CN2 DT15S3
1256 25kVA Sub. CN2 DT25S3
1257 50kVA Sub. CN2 DT50S3
Wye-Delta
Primary Voltage: 12,470/7,200
Secondary Voltage: 120/240
240/480
NOTE. Full wye-delta configurations are not
permitted on 24.9 kV and 34.5 kV circuits.
Distribution Transformers Types "` R„

Overhead Revised 09/22 18-02-03
Wye-Wye Cat. ID Rating Polarity Type CU Code
7.2 kV-138612400V
Conventional overhead transformers with one 1216 333kVA Sub. CN1—S none
primary bushing and two secondary bushings are 1217 500kVA Sub. CN1—S DT500A5
used to serve 3-0 wye—wye loads with 120/208, 1218 1500kVA Sub. CN1—S none
277/480, 1386/2,400 and 2,400/4160 secondary 7.2 kV-240014160V
voltages. 1219 100kVA Add. CM—A none
1220 167kVA Add. CM—A none
1221 500kVA Sub. CN1—S DT500A6
NOTE. The ground strap is installed on the left 1222 833kVA Sub. CN1—S none
secondary bushing for additive polarity and on 14.4 kV- 1201208V
the right for subtractive polarity. 1248 25kVA Sub. CN1—S DT50P2
14.4 kV-2771480V
1240 15kVA Sub. CN1—S none
1241 25kVA Sub. CN1—S DT25P4
1242 50kVA Sub. CN1—S DT50P4
1243 75kVA Sub. CN1—S DT75P4
1244 100kVA Sub. CN1—S DT100P4
® 1245 167kVA Sub. CN1—S DT167P4
® ® 1246 250kVA Sub. CN1—S DT250P4
1247 500kVA Sub. CN1—S DT500P4
® 19.9 kV- 1201208V
1286 15kVA Sub. CN1—S DT15R2
1287 25kVA Sub. CN1—S DT25R2
1288 50kVA Sub. CN1—S DT50R2
1289 75kVA Sub. CN1—S DT75R2
1290 100kVA Sub. CN1—S DT100R2
19.9 kV-2771480V
CNI—A CNI —S 1266 15kVA Sub. CN1—S DT15R4
1267 25kVA Sub. CN1—S DT25R4
Primary Voltage: 12,470/7,200 1268 50kVA Sub. CN1—S DT50R4
24,940/14,400 1269 75kVA Sub. CN1—S DT75R4
34,500/19,920 1270 100kVA Sub. CN1—S DT100R4
1271 167kVA Sub. CN1—S DT167R4
Secondary Voltage: 120/208 1272 250kVA Sub. CN1—S DT250R4
277/480 1273 333kVA Sub. CN1—S DT333R4
1274 500kVA Sub. CN1—S DT500R4
1,386/2,400 1275 667kVA Sub. CN1—S DT667R4
2,400/4,160 19.9 kV- 138612400V
1277 50kVA Sub. CN1—S none
Catalog ID and Compatible Unit Codes 1278 100kVA Sub. CN1—S DT100R5
1279 167kVA Sub. CN1—S DT167R5
Cat. ID Rating Polarity Type CU Code 1280 333kVA Sub. CN1—S none
7.2 kV-1201208V 1281 500kVA Sub. CN1—S DT500R5
1196 15kVA Add. CM—A DT15A2 1282 667kVA Sub. CN1—S DT667R5
1197 25kVA Add. CM—A DT25A2 19.9 kV-240014160V
1198 50kVA Add. CM—A DT50A2 1283 333kVA Sub. CN1—S none
1199 75kVA Add. CM—A DT75A2 1284 500kVA Sub. CN1—S none
1200 100kVA Add. CM—A DT100A2 1285 833kVA Sub. CN1—S none
1201 167kVA Add. CM—A DT167A2
7.2 kV-2771480V
1206 15kVA Add. CM—A DT15A4
1207 25kVA Add. CM—A DT25A4
1208 50kVA Add. CM—A DT50A4
1209 75kVA Add. CM—A DT75A4
1210 100kVA Add. CM—A DT100A4
1211 167kVA Add. CN1—A DT167A4
1212 250kVA Sub. CN1—S DT250A4
1213 333kVA Sub. CN1—S DT333A4
1214 500kVA Sub. CN1—S DT500A4
IMppMR,: Distribution Transformer Types

18-02-04 Revised 09/22 Overhead
Step Transformers Catalog ID and Compatible Unit Codes
Overhead step and auto transformers are used to Cat. ID Rating CU Code
change the primary voltage of a distribution 14.4 kV 7.2 kV
1331 75kVA DT75AP7
circuit.They are rated 2500 WA and smaller 1332 100kVA DT100AP7
with primary voltages up to 19.92 kV. 1333 167kVA DT167AP7
10735 250kVA none
Single phase transformers sized up to 250 WA 1334 500kVA DT500AP7
1335 1500kVA DT1500AP7
are pole mounted. 19.9 kV 7.2 W
Three-phase configuration with larger WA sizes, 1341 100kVA DT100T71344 250kVA DT250T7
500 KVA and up, are rack mounted. 1345 500kVA DT500T7
1347 1500kVA DT1500T7
NOTE. Step transformers are generally 1349 2500kVA DT2500T7
autotransformers,however,two-winding 19.9 kV 14.4 kV
transformers are also acceptable. 1352 100kVA DT100T8
1353 167kVA DT167T8
1354 500kVA DT500T8
1355 667kVA DT667T8
1357 1500kVA DT1500T8
35362 2500kVA DT2500T8
NOTE. See the Materials Manual 10-006-01 for
® additional non-standard step transformers.
0
Operating Voltages
High Voltage: 12,470GrdY/7200
24,940GrdY/14,400
34,500GrdY/19,920 volts.
Voltage Taps: None.
Low Voltage: 4,160GrdY/2400
12,470GrdY/7200
24,940GrdY/14,400 volts.
Distribution Transformers Types '`pM RR.

Overhead Revised 09/22 18-02-05
Industry Standard Symbols The nameplate markings and the diagrams
combine to indicate the following information:
The following symbols and diagrams are those ♦ Number of bushings.
that appear on the transformer nameplates of ♦ Voltage rating.
most distribution transformers.They are used to
designate the voltage rating. ♦ Insulation system.
♦ Internal connections between the windings,
E=Voltage rating of the transformer winding terminal blocks, and bushings of a
El =Line-to-Line voltage transformer.
E1 =�3E= 1.73E
Symbols Diagrams Description Nameplate Markings
E ' E indicates a winding of E volts suitable for 12470,2400,480, 13200
bl connection on an E volt system.
E/E1 Y E/E1 Y indicates a winding of E volts 7200/12470Y,2400/4160Y,
suitable for connection on an E volt 120/208Y,277/480Y,
system;Y connection on an E1 volt system. 1386/2400Y
E1 Grd Y/E E1 Grd Y/E indicates a 1 bushing 4160GrdY/2400,
winding of E volts internally grounded and 12470GrdY/7200,
suitable for Y connection on an E1 volt, 24940GrdY/14400,
effectively grounded system. 34500GrdY/19920,
VXV1 ( � ( � VXV1 indicates a dual-rated winding which 2400/4160Y
I I I may be operated initially on a V volt system 7200/12470Y
bl Ib and later switched to a V1 volt system but is
not suitable for a three-wire system
E/2E indicates winding with 2 coils that 120/240,240/480
can b i
can be operated n parallel on an E volt
system;in series for a center tapped 3 wire
service of 2E and E volts.
2E/E 2E/E indicates a winding for 2E volts and 240/120
full WA between the outside terminals on a
2-wire system or for E volts and%WA on
each half of the winding when used on a
3-wire system.
IDAHO
R� Distribution Transformer Types
�,o�o�amPa,

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 18-03-01
Transformer Applications
1-0 Loads
Conventional transformers are used to serve Phase
1-0 loads with 120/240 volt secondary, for
residential,commercial and irrigation loads.
They are available in single bushing
transformers up to 50—kVA and two bushing up
to 500—kVA.
Phase
Common
Multi-grounded
* Neutral
Common * Caution: Schematic only-Ground the
Multi grounded tank in accordance with Section 20-03.
Neutral
Surge Arresters
Arresters are installed by the manufacturer on all
1-0 and 3-0 distribution transformers. Each
* Caution: Schematic only-Ground the arrester comes with a ground lead isolation
tank in accordance with Section 20-03. device,to clear the device from ground in case
of arrester failure.
Completely Self Protected(CSP)
Transformers are used for 1-0 applications 1-0 Paralleling
with 7.2—kV primary and 120/240 volt
secondary. CSP transformers are available up to Paralleling of 1-0 transformers is not a
50—kVA.A CSP transformer is used for recommended practice. It is to be done with the
maintenance applications or in applications approval of the Field Engineer. In making a
where reduced clearance does not allow a parallel connection the following conditions
conventional transformer to be used. must be met:
♦ Voltage ratings must be identical.
CAUTION. CSP transformers can only be used ♦ Tap settings (if any)must be the same.
where the available fault current is less then ♦ The%impedance of one unit must be
4,000 symmetrical amps. between 92-12%and 107-I/2%of the other.
♦ Proper polarity must be observed.
"`�R. Transformer Applications

18-03-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
3-0 Loads
Wye-Wye Connections Disadvantages
♦ Neutral instability.
Application ♦ Telephone interference.
The wye-wye configuration is the most * Transformer tank heating.
common 3-0 transformer connection. It can Load Distribution
be used at all primary voltages and can serve
loads with 120/208, 277/480, 1,386/2,400 A wye-wye connection is such that each
and 2,400/4,160 secondary voltages. transformer carries only that component of load
connected directly to it.Any current imbalance
Wye Primary will appear in the neutral.
A
B Grounding the Primary and Secondary
C Neutrals.The primary and secondary neutrals
* * * must be tied firmly to the system neutral,
** ** ** otherwise, excessive voltages may develop on
Additive 1 1 the seconds Be sure that the grounding strap
Polarity 1 2 3 secondary. g g p
XZ X XZ X XZ X is connected to the X2 secondary bushing on all
three transformers.
N Multi-grounde Neutral
a 3-0 Paralleling
b
o Paralleling of 3-0 transformers is not a
Wye Secondary
recommended practice. It is to be done only with
N—a,N—b,N-c = 120 or 277 Volts the approval of the Field Engineer. In making a
a—b,b—c,c—a = 208 or 480 Volts parallel connection the following conditions
must be met:
**Denotes case ground on 1-bushing transformers ♦ Voltage ratings must be identical.
and H2 on 2-bushing transformers. ♦ Tap settings (if any)must be the same.
* Schematic only-Ground in accordance with ♦ The%impedance of one unit must be
Section 20-03. between 92-12%and 107-12%of the other.
♦ Proper polarity must be observed.
Advantages ♦ Angular displacements of the banks must be
♦ 1-0 loads maybe split evenly the same.
♦ No problems with Ferroresonance.
Transformer Applications '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 18-03-03
Wye-Delta Connections Advantages
Application ♦ No excessive circulating currents when
transformers of unequal impedance and ratio
are banked.
The wye-delta connection is used to supply 3-0 ♦ No problems from third harmonic
load alone or with some 1-0 load. Its main
application is on the 7200/12470Y or overvoltages.
2400/4160Y volt primary overhead systems.
This Connection is nonstandard for all new Disadvantages
installations. ♦ If one phase of the 3-0 primary line opens,
motors and appliances may continue to run
Wye Primary with low voltage and voltage unbalance.
A Also,there will still be voltage on the
s c tripped phase due to backfeed through the
Midpoint Not Grounded bank.
♦ Ferroresonance can also occur for certain
* * * situations with this connection.
Additive 1 - 2 H - 3 H -
Polarity
X3 X2 X X3 Xz X X3 X2 X NOTE. Because of increased probability of
ferroresonance,wye-delta configurations are not
N permitted on 24.9—kV and 34.5—kV circuits. Use
a wye-wye or open-wye-delta.
b
c
Delta secondary - Load Distribution
N—a,N—b = 120 or 240 Volts A balanced 3-0 load is distributed equally
a—b,b—c,c—a = 240 or 480 Volts among the three transformers.Any 1-0 load
N—c = 208 or 416 Volts divides such that 2/3 is supplied by the
transformer directly connected to it,while the
* Schematic only-Ground in accordance with remaining 1/3 is supplied by each of the other
Section 20-03. two transformers.
NOTE. The transformer primary neutral bushing
for all three transformers is not grounded. This
neutral shall be considered as a high-voltage
conductor,as it will raise to full line potential
during certain line faults.
"`�R. Transformer Applications

18-03-04 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Open—Delta Connections Advantages
Application ♦ Supply mixed 1-0 and 3-0 loads.
♦ Can be used at 34.5 kV.
Open-delta connection is used to supply small ♦ Can be used with only two primary phases.
3-0 loads(25 hp or smaller)or mixed 1-0 and
3-0 loads. It can also be used to supply 240 volt Disadvantages
3-0 loads from an underground primary or ♦ Bank can only supply 58%of a full 3-0
19,920/34,500Y volt primary system without bank.
ferroresonance. ♦ More sensitive to primary voltage
imbalance.
NOTE. Open-delta transformer banks should not ♦ Can cause primary voltage imbalance.
be used if a 3-0 wye-wye connection is
possible. Load Distribution
N—a,N—b = 120 or 240 Volts
a—b,b-c,c-a = 240 or 480 Volts An open-delta bank,with transformers of equal
N—c = 208 or 416 Volts size, can only carry 58%of the load that a three-
Wye Primary transformer bank of the same size can carry. For
A a mixture of 1-0 and 3-0 loads,the transformer
B to which the single-phase load is connected is
C generally sized larger because it supplies the full
single-phase load plus 58%of the three-phase
Open Wye load.
Primary
** **
Additive See Section 18-04 for transformer loading and
Polarity X3 X2 X X3 X2 X selection.
Open Delta NOTE. When an open-delta bank has
Secondary transformers of different kVA,the larger
N Multi- rounde Neutral transformer should be connected to the leading
a phase.
b
c Et
Delta Secondary - Multi-grounded
Neutral
* Schematic only-Ground in accordance with
Section 20-03.
**Denotes case ground on 1-bushing transformers
and H2 on 2-bushing transformers.
Transformer Applications '`per RR.

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 1 8-03-05
Step Transformers
Application Two-Winding Transformers
Step transformers are used to change the voltage Two-winding transformers have a separate
of a distribution circuit.Autotransformers and primary and secondary winding. They are larger,
two-winding transformers are both approved for have an increased cost and are able to handle
new installation. Single transformers up to 250 high magnitude fault current better than an
kVA are pole-mounted, larger kVA sizes are autotransformer.
installed on a rack.
25 Amps Surge Arresters
Arresters are mounted on the source and load
1 CL
A side of all step transformers.Arresters are
< generally mounted directly to the tank.
O N
N
O
M _ 69.4 Amps Grounding
N
� a
a 7,200 volts Neutral connections are essential for
autotransformers used for primary voltage
25 Amps 69.4 Amps _ transformation on distribution systems. For
more information, see Section 20,
Autotransformers Grounding and Bonding.
An autotransformer is a transformer where the
primary and secondary circuits have a winding,
or part of a winding in common.This sharing of
the winding allows the physical size of the
transformer to be smaller than a two-winding
transformer of the same kVA rating.
CAUTION. Autotransformers are especially
vulnerable to damage from high magnitude
through faults. It is therefore imperative that
reclosing into a fault through an autotransformer
be held to an absolute minimum.
"`�R. Transformer Applications
m—w—P^

Overhead Revised 03/01 18-04-01
Transformer Loading
Residential Loads — Residential Loads —
Single-Family and Duplexes Multi-Family Dwellings
The demand for single-family and duplex Multi-Family dwellings share interior walls that
residential loads can be estimated by the square reduce the energy required to heat and cool
footage of the home.The demand per square when compared to single-family homes of the
foot(expressed as Watts/Sq.ft.)is higher for same size.Multi-level buildings also share floors
smaller homes than larger homes.Whether gas is and ceilings,which further reduces the required
used for space and water heating also impacts energy.
this ratio. The electrical service for all new
homes is designed to allow for air conditioning. Demands for single-level and multi-level multi-
family buildings are shown in the following
♦ The ratio for electric heat homes varies from table.
16 W/Sq. ft. for small homes to 6.5 W/Sq. ft.
for large homes. Unit Size Electric Heat Gas Heat
♦ The ratio for gas heat homes varies from Single-level Buildings
10 W/Sq. ft. for small homes to 4 W/Sq. ft. Up to 800 sq.ft. 7-kW 4-kW
for large homes. 801 to 1500 sq.ft. 10-kW 6-kW
1501 to 2000 sq.ft. 15-kW 8-kW
Demands for single-family and duplex designs Multi-level Buildings
are shown in the following table. If the size of Up to 800 sq.ft. 5-kW 4-kW
the main breaker is known to be larger or 801 to 1500 sq.ft. 8-kW 6-kW
smaller than typical,the values in the table may 1501 to 2000 sq.ft. 13-kW 8-kW
need to be adjusted up or down accordingly. NOTE. Consult your Field Engineer for units larger
than 2000 sq.ft.
Single-Family
and Duplexes Electric Heat Gas Heat NOTE. Residential loads have a power
Under 1200 sq.ft. 15-kW 9-kW factor of about 1.0 which means the real
1201 to 2500 sq.ft. 20-kW 13-kW power(kW)and the capacity required to
2501 to 4000 sq.ft. 25-kW 18-kW serve the load(kVA) are approximately
Over 4000 sq.ft. 6.5 W/sq.ft. 4.7 W/sq.ft. equal.
NOTE. These load values assume that each unit will
have air conditioning.
E'er IDiAHO
�wPOWER Transformer Loading

18-04-02 Revised 03/01 Overhead
1-0 Irrigation Loads Selecting 1-0 Transformers
The largest individual 1-0 motor that can be 1-0 Overhead transformers can be loaded to
installed is 7.5 HP. 110%of the nameplate rating.
NOTE. The maximum allowable Make sure the load does not exceed the
horsepower on a single transformer using maximum load rating for the transformer.
a phase converter or multiple 1-0 motors
is 25 Hp. Convert 1-0 demand to kVA using the
following equation.
0.746 1-0 kVA= 1-0 Demand (kW)
kVA= 0.94 x 0.85 x HP power factor
1-0 Transformers
NOTE. All new pump installations KVA Min. Load Max. Load (110%)
require approval from the local Field 15 N/A 17-kVA
25 18-kVA 28-kVA
Engineer. 50 29-kVA 55-kVA
75 56-kVA 83-kVA
Other 1-0 Loads 100 84-kVA 110-kVA
167 111-kVA 184-kVA
The 1-0 demand for non-residential loads
usually can be determined by the size of the
main breaker. Since breakers are typically rated For multiple customers served from the same
in amps, convert the value into kVA and transformer,be sure to use the total diversified
multiply by 60%to obtain the estimated load(with the appropriate coincidence factor
demand.Unless otherwise known, assume 0.88 applied from page 18-04-04).
power factor. Total sum
0.6 Breaker Rating Breaker Diversified = of X Coincide ce
1-f�kVA= x x Operating Load Loads
0.88 (amps per line) Voltage(kV)
Where: Breaker Operating Voltage(kV)is the
breaker's line-to-line voltage in kV.
orMIDAM
Transformer Loading WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 03/01 18-04-03
Commercial and Industrial Loads Convert the breaker ampere rating into WA and
multiply by 60%to obtain the estimated demand.
The WA demand to use for the design of 3-0 Assume the power factor to be 0.88.
commercial and industrial loads relies heavily on 3-0 kVA=
the information supplied by the customer. The 3-0 Breaker Breaker
better the information that is supplied,the more 0.6 x 1.732 x Rating x Operating
efficient our design will be.Many factors can 0.88 (amps per 0) Voltage(kV)
affect our design,including: where: Breaker Operating Voltage(kV)is the
♦ The total connected load,motor load, and the breaker's line-to-line voltage in kV.
size of the largest motor.
3-0 Irrigation Loads
♦ How much single phase and lighting load?
♦ The amount of any electric heating, Convert 3-0 horsepower motor ratings into WA
ventilation and air conditioning(HVAC) with the following equation. Motors are assumed
load. to be 94%efficient and have a 0.85 power
factor.
♦ How long will the load be running each day?
Occasionally? 8 hours? 16 hours? kVA= 0.746 x HP
Continuously?Will it be seasonal? 0.94 x 0.85
♦ What is the load's overall power factor? NOTE. All new pump installations
If the power factor is unknown,use: require approval from the local Field
Engineer.
p.f. Type of Load
0.92 Commercial
0.88 Industrial Selecting 3-0 Transformers
NOTE. It is important to investigate actual 3-0 overhead transformer banks can be loaded
demand readings at existing customer to 110%of the nameplate rating.
facilities or similar types of loads. It is also
important to note that actual demand is 3-0 kVA= 3-0 Demand generally much different then connected load. power factor
If the 3-0 WA demand and power factor is not 3-0 Transformers Banks
known, it can be estimated based on the size of 3-0 Min. Max
the customer's main breaker keeping the kVA Load Load (110%)
factors mentioned above in mind. 45 N/A 50 kVA
75 51 WA 83 kVA
150 84 kVA 165 kVA
300 166 WA 330 kVA
500 331 kVA 550 kVA
750 551 kVA 825 kVA
1000 826 kVA 1100 kVA
1500 1101 kVA 1650 kVA
2500 1651 WA 2750 kVA
E'er IDiAHO
ROOMER. Transformer Loading

18-04-04 Revised 03/01 Overhead
Non-Standard Transformer Example 1.Determine the individual
Applications transformer size for a wye-delta bank serving a
75 Hp 3-0 motor.
Wye-Delta Banks Since there is only 3-0 load on all transformers,
they will be the same size.
NOTE. Because of increased probability of
ferroresonance,wye-delta configurations are no Convert motor load to kVA
longer permitted on 24.9-kV and 34.5-kV 0.746 x 75 Hp
circuits.Use wye-wye or open-delta. kVA= 0.94 x 0.85
For a wye-delta bank with 3-0 load only,the = 70
load is distributed equally among the three
Size Transformers
transformers.
Transformer _ 70 kVA
For wye-delta banks with 3-0 and 1-0 load,the (kVA) - 3
3-0 load divides equally between transformers = 23 Use 25 kVA
and the 1-0 load divides such that 2/3 is supplied
by the transformer to which the 1-0 load is
directly connected, and 1/3 is supplied by the Example 2.Determine the individual
other two transformers. transformer size for an wye-delta bank with 50
kW @ 90%Pf of 1-0 load and 80 Hp 3-0 motor
NOTE Ina wye-delta bank serving 1-0 load
loads,the largest transformer should not
exceed twice the kVA size of the smaller Convert motor load to kVA
two units. 0.746
3-0 kVA= 0.94 x 0.85 x 80 HP
Larger 3-0 kVA
Transformer - 3 + (2/3)x 1-0 kVA 3-0 kVA= 75
(kVA)
Convert 1-0 kW to kVA
Smaller 3-0 kVA 50 M
Transformers = 3 + (1/3)x 1-0 kVA 1-fd kVA= 0.90
(kVA)
1-0 kVA= 56
Selecting Wye-Delta Transformers Size Larger Transformer
Each transformer in a wye-delta can be loaded to Larger 75 kVA
_Transformer - 3 + (2/3)x 56 kVA
110%its'nameplate rating. (kVA)
= 62 Use 75 kVA
kVA Min. Load Max. Load (110%)
15 N/A 17 kVA Size Smaller Transformers
25 18 kVA 28 kVA
50 29 kVA 55 kVA Smaller 75
75 56 kVA 83 kVA Transformers = 3 + (1/3)x 56 kVA
100 84 kVA 110 kVA (kVA)
167 111 kVA 184 kVA = 44 Use 50 kVA
orMIDAM
Transformer Loading MWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/07 18-04-05
Open-Delta Banks Selecting Open-Delta Transformers
An open-delta bank has 58% of the capacity of a Each Transformer in an open-delta bank can be
three-transformer bank with the same size loaded to 100%of its'nameplate rating.
transformers.
KVA Min. Load Max. Load (100%)
NOTE. DO NOT use an open delta 15 N/A 15 kVA
configuration if a 3-0 primary circuit is 25 16 kVA 25 kVA
available. 50 26 kVA 50 kVA
75 51 kVA 75 kVA
If an open-delta bank has 1-0 and 3-0 load,the 100 76 kVA 100 kVA
transformer with the 1-0 load must be sized 167 101 kVA 167 kVA
larger because it will carry all of the 1-0 load.
Use the following equations to size the Example 1.Determine the individual
transformer with 1-0 and 3-0 loads. If there is transformer size for an open delta bank with a
no 1-0 load,both transformers will be the same 3-0 25 hp motor and 30 kW @ 95%PF of 1-0
size. load.
Larger (1/2)x 3-0 kVA Convert Hp to kVA
Transformer = 0.87 + 1-0 kVA
(kVA) 3-0 kVA= 0.746 x 25 Hp
0.94 x 0.85
= 0.58 x 3-0 kVA + 1-0 kVA
3-0 kVA= 23.3
Smaller (1/2)x 3-0 kVA Convert 1-0 kW to kVA
Transformer = 0.87
(kVA) 1-0 kVA= 1-0 Demand (kW)
= 0.58 x 3-0 kVA power factor
1-0 kVA= 0395 = 31.6
NOTE. The largest single 3-0 motor
allowed on an open-delta bank is 25 hp. Larger Transformer
The maximum total 3-0 horsepower
allowed on an open-delta bank is 40 hp. Larger
Transformer = 0.58 x 23.3 kVA + 31.6 kVA
(kVA)
45.1 kVA Use 50 kVA
Smaller Transformer
Smaller
Transformer = 0.58 x 23.3
(kVA)
13.5 kVA Use 15 kVA
E'er IDiAHO
�wPOWER Transformer Loading

18-04-06 Revised 03/01 Overhead
Coincidence Factors Coincidence Factors
When a transformer or cable serves more than #of #of
Cust Factor Cust Factor
one customer,the total demand for the combined
customers is less than the sum of the individual 1 1.00 11 0.60
customer demands. 2 0.86 12 0.59
3 0.78 13 0.59
The demand is lower because the chance that 4 0.73 14 0.58
each customer's equipment is running at the 5 0.69 15 0.58
same time is very low.Thermostats and timers 6 0.67 16 0.57
create different load cycles,the customers can 7 0.65 17 0.57
randomly turn loads on and off, and some of the 8 0.63 18 0.56
customers may not even be home. 9 0.62 19 0.56
10 0.61 20 0.56
For residential loads, coincidence factors are The coincidence factor for any number of
used to account for this reduced demand.
Multiply the total load by the coincidence factor customers per cluster is:
to obtain the diversified load. Coincidence = 0.5 x (1+ 5
Factor 2N+3
Diversified Load Coincidence
Load = Per Lot x Factor where "N"is the number of customers.
Transformer Loading '� Ra
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 03/15 18-04-07
Voltage Drop
Voltage drop design criteria. The maximum
total voltage drop from the primary side of the
transformer to the meter is 5.0% which includes 0
a 1.5%voltage drop through the transformer. 100'
#2 Triplex
Transformer Example 1. Determine the %voltage drop for
a 2300 sq.ft. all-electric home with a service
�-------------- ----------- 120/240V 1-0 as shown.
Primary Secondary Service
Using the tables on page 18-04-01, -06 and-08
we find:
Transformer: 1.5%
Secondary: 2.3% %Voltage Drop=(0.1155)x 20x 100
Service: 1.2% 100
Total: 5.0% =2.31
Total Voltage Drop
Total % Voltage Drop= 1.5+2.31 =3.81
For design projects where the actual length and Example 2. Calculate the total voltage drop
size of the service is unknown, limit the voltage for the new service.
drop for the secondary to 2.3%. This will allow
1.2%for the future service. Existing
When calculating the voltage drop, assume the 20 kw 9 �s kw
voltage at the primary of the transformer is at its '
nominal value(i.e. 120 volts on a 120 volt base). --------------------- #2 Tx
If the primary voltage is substantially different 2/0 Tx 60' Service
than this, consult your Field Engineer.Avoid 110'Secondary
over sizing the transformer or conductor to Secondary Voltage Drop
compensate for a feeder voltage problem. Estimated Demand =38 kW
Coincidence Factor = .86
Voltage drop calculations. Use the following VDF= .0597
equation to calculate the percent voltage drop for Diversified Load = (20 +18)x 0.86
the sec/serv. cable run. =32.7kW
VDFx kW x length °/°Voltage Drop= 0.0597x 32.7x 110'
Voltage Drop= 100 100
2.15
where: VDF is the voltage drop factor from the Service Voltage Drop
table on 18-04-08. Estimated Demand = 18 kW
kW is the total diversified load served by Coincidence Factor= 1.0
the cable(with the appropriate VDF=0.1155
coincidence factor. See page 18-
04-06) Diversified Load = 18 x 1.0
length is the circuit length of the Conductor = 18kW
in feet. e Dro 0.1155x 18x 60'
NOTE: Use 1-0 kW for 1-0 circuits and %Voltagp= 100
3-0 kW for 3-0 circuits =1.19
Total Voltage Drop
Total%Voltage Drop= 1.5+2.25+ 1.19=4.94
`ppMR. Transformer Loading

18-04-08 Revised 03/01 Overhead
Voltage Drop Factors Calculating Voltage Drop Factors
Voltage Drop Factors for Aluminum Conductor Voltage drop factors for other voltages or power
1-0 3-0 factors can be calculated using the following
Size 240V 208V 240V 480V equations:
Tx& Qx
#6 .2855 1-0 circuits
#4 .1811 .1212 .0910 .0227
#2 .1155 .0775 .0538 .0145 2-104(R cos6+X sin o)
2/0 .0597 .0405 .0305 .0076 VDF 1-D =
4/0 .0389 .0266 .0200 .0050 V2 cos6
Open Wire Construction(IMP)
2/0 .0713 .0475 .0357 .0089 3-0 circuits
4/0 .0504 .0334 .0251 .0063
500 .0290 .0193 .0145 .0036 104(R cos 6+X sin 6)
2-500 .0199 .0133 .0100 .0025 VDF 3-0 =
NOTE. Loads are assumed to have a 0.9 PF V2 cos6
Where:
V= Line voltage in volts
Voltage Drop Factors for Copper Conductor
R= Resistance
e per 1000'at conductor
1-0 3-0 operating temperature
Size 240V 208V 240V 480V X= Reactance per 1000'based on the
Open Wire Construction(Bare) conductor spacing
#8 .3022 .2011 .1511 .0378 cos 0= Load power factor
#6 .1964 .1307 .0982 .0245 VDF 1-0= 1-0 Voltage Drop Factor
#4 .1293 .0861 .0647 .0162 VDF 3-0= 3-0 Voltage Drop Factor(Requires 3-0
#2 .0869 .0579 .0435 .0109 kW)
#1 .0756 .0503 .0378 .0095
1/0 .0596 .0397 .0298 .0074
2/0 .0500 .0333 .0250 .0062
4/0 .0362 .0240 .0181 .0045
Open Wire Construction(IMP)
350 .0126 .0095 .0024
500 .0097 .0073 .0018
NOTE. Loads are assumed to have a 0.9 PF
Transformer Loading `POWER,,

Overhead Revised 03/07 18-055-01
Transformer Secondary Busing
General Information 3-0 Wye-Wye Secondary Busing
This section describes the busing conductor for 3-0 kVA
1-0 and 3-0 transformer configurations. I= 1.73 x VL-L x 1.25
NOTE. Conductor sizing is based on
125% of transformer nameplate.
b
The following table lists the summer ampacity
rating for weatherproof copper conductors.
Conductor Ampacity Cat. ID
#2 CU 223 28812
2/0 CU 330 3524
350 CU 607 28814 1-0 3-0 Busing CU
500 CU 750 28815 kVA kVA Conductor CODE
1-0 Secondary Busing120YI208 Volt
15 45 #2 CU DYY151
25 75 2/0 CU DYY251
I_ 1-0 kVA x 1.25 50 150 350 CU DYY501
VL_L 75 225 2-350 CU DYY751
100 300 2-350 CU DYY1001
167 500 3-350 CU DYY1671
2771480 Volt
15 45 #2 CU DYY152
25 75 #2 CU DYY252
50 150 2/0 CU DYY502
75 225 350 CU DYY752
100 300 350 CU DYY1002
P 167 500 500 CU DYY1672
1-0 Busing CU
kVA Conductor CODE
120/240 Volt
15 #2 CU DYS15
25 #2 CU DYS25
50 2/0 CU DYS50
75 350 CU DYS75
100 350 CU DYS100
167 2-350 CU DYS167
ONPOMR,. Transformer Secondary Busing

18-05-02 Revised 03/07 Overhead
3-0 Wye-Delta Secondary Busing
Amps Within the Delta Amps Outside the Delta
Largest Xfmr x 1.25 I= 3 x Largest Xfmr x 1.25
VL-L 1.73 X VL-L
o� o
b
I�
rI
Within the Delta(A) Outside the Delta(A)
Largest Within Outside CU
Xfmr the A the A Code
1201240 Volt A
15 #2 CU #2 CU DYD151
25 2/0 CU 2/0 CU DYD251
50 350 CU 350 CU DYD501
75 350 CU 2-350 CU DYD751
100 350 CU 2-350 CU DYD1001
167 500 CU 2-500 CU DYD1671
2401480 Volt A
15 #2 CU #2 CU DYD152
25 #2 CU #2 CU DYD252
50 2/0 CU 2/0 CU DYD502
75 350 CU 350 CU DYD752
100 350 CU 350 CU DYD1002
167 500 CU 500 CU DYD1672
NOTE. The neutral outside the delta may be 1/2 size where multiple conductors
are used.
Transformer Secondary Busing '��Ra
A�IDACa.PCa 1Y

Overhead Reviewed 01/21 18-06-01
Transformer Conversion & Phase Rotation
Converting a 120/240 transformer to To convert a transformer to 120 volt operation in
120 for a 120/208Y Bank a 120/208Y volt 3-0 bank,the internal
connection of the secondary leads to the
All overhead distribution transformers with bushings must be reconnected to a multiple
120/240 volt secondaries use a two-coil arrangement as shown below.
secondary winding as illustrated below,with
leads B and C connected to the X2 bushing.
H 1 � H 2
H 1 H 2
C� A C B D
A B
X3 X1
X3 X1 X2
X2 Connection for 120 Volts Additive Polarity
Series Connection for 120/240 Volts Additive
Polarity NOTE. Only the Xl and Xz bushings are to be
used for the 120-volt connection regardless of
H1 H2
the transformer polarity.
*jH
A C B D
X X3
X23
Series Connection for 120/240 Volts Subtractive X2
Polarity
The coil leads are labeled left to right A-B and Connection for 120 Volts Subtractive Polarity
C-D.These letters are stamped directly on the
secondary leads or the leads may be tagged. NOTE. The conversion of transformers from
120/240 volt to 120/208Y volt operation is
normally done by Transtest.
E''Q- AH IDO
POMR. Transformer Conversions & Phase Rotation

1 8-06-02 Reviewed 01/21 Overhead
Phase Sequence (Rotation) Checking rotation on an open-delta bank
requires the following procedure.
Phase sequence or rotation determines which
direction a 3-0 motor will rotate. This is a ♦ Ground the cases of both transformers and
function of the primary and secondary ground the mid-point of the lighting
connection. transformer.
♦ Connect the secondary jumper between the
NOTE. Generally it is only necessary to transformers in the usual manner,but do not
check rotation when replacing an existing connect to the secondary line.
transformer or bank of transformers. ♦ Then make all primary connections.
♦ Connect the color-coded leads of the phase
Phase Sequence Indicators sequence meter as follows.
1. Red to the outside terminal of the
In order to check phase sequence or rotation on grounded transformer
the secondary(up to 600 volts) of a wye-wye, 2. White to the jumper between the two
wye delta or open delta bank an indicator can be transformers
used. (See tools manual page 117-03-01) 3. Blue to the"wild"phase
CAUTION. Accidental rotation reversal If the rotation is clockwise or if the ABC lamp
of a customer service may damage lights,the transformer connections are correct. If
existing equipment. the disc rotates counterclockwise,or if the BAC
lamp lights, do one of the following:
Checking rotation on the secondary of a
wye-wye or wye-delta bank on be done without ♦ If the transformers are the same size, shift
any special procedures. the ground to the mid-point of the other
transformer, or
If the rotation is incorrect interchange any two ♦ Interchange positions of the transformers.
of the secondary leads on a wye-wye bank and
interchange the two leads that are not the wild After making the change,repeat the rotation
leg. Repeat the rotation check. check.
IDAHO
Transformer Conversion & Phase Rotation M Ra
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/15 19-00-01
Table of Contents
19- Transformer Configurations
19-01-01 Transformer Mounting Brackets 19-04-01 Step Transformer Installations
General Information Pole Mounted Step Transformer
1-0 Installations Installation-250 kVA and
19-01-02 Two Transformer Banks Below
(3-0 Open-Delta)
19-01-03 3-0 Installations with up to three 19-05-01 Platform Types
100 kVA transformers General Information
19-01-04 3-0 Installations over 100 kVA Platform Types
Pole Kit
19-02-01 1-0 Transformer Framing 19-05-02 Switches
Diagrams Switch Timbers
Vise-top Insulator Stability Guy
Riser Wires Stud Disconnects
Fused Cutout Primary Breaker
19-02-02 1-0 Tangent 19-05-03 Pole Class Requirements
19-02-03 1-0 Tangent Details Pole Spacing
19-02-04 1-0 Deadend Pole Foundations
19-02-05 1-0 Deadend Details Concrete Footing
19-02-06 3-0 Tangent Streamlined 19-05-04 Center Poles
19-02-07 3-0 Tangent Streamlined Details 19-05-05 Transformer Spacing on Rack
19-02-08 3-0 Tangent Crossarm 12.5-kV Conductor Sizing
19-02-09 3-0 Tangent Crossarm 12.5-kV Neutral Buss
Details
19-02-10 3-0 Tangent Crossarm 34.5-kV 19-06-01 Platform Installation for Auto
19-02-11 3-0 Tangent Crossarm 34.5-kV Transformers
Details Single Circuit Configuration
19-02-12 3-0 Tangent Multi-Circuit- 19-06-02 Double Circuit Configuration
Crossarm(Underbuild) 19-06-03 3-2500 kVA Two-Winding Step-
19-02-13 3-0 Tangent Multi-Circuit- Down Transformers
Crossarm(Underbuild)Details
19-03-01 3-0 Transformer Framing
Diagrams
Streamlined Construction
19-03-03 Crossarm Construction
19-03-05 Crossarm DE Construction
EMPOWER. Table of Contents

Overhead Revised 01/17 19-01-01
Transformer Mounting Brackets
General Information Space the transformer mounting bolts 12" or 24"
apart, depending on the size of the transformer.
CAUTION. Before installing any
transformer on a pole,make sure that the
pole class is adequate. See Section 11-06
for more information. Use factored weight
to size the pole.
1-0 Installations
1-0 transformers up to 167 kVA and 1-0 step-
down/autotransformers can be mounted directly 12"(up to 50 WA)
to an appropriately sized pole using the bracket 24"(over 50 WA)
that comes attached to the transformer tank.
Different transformer sizes use slightly different 0
bracket designs,but they all attach to the pole
(or cluster mount bracket)in the same manner.
Small transformers up to 50 kVA use two 5/8"
mounting bolts and 3" x 3" curved washers.
Transformers 75 kVA and larger use two 3/4"
bolts with 4" x 4" curved washers.
Two curved washers
3"x3"for 5/8"bolts
(:Dmo
4"x4"for 3/4"bolds-----------------
w 5/8"or 3/4"achine bolts
E'er IDiAHO
RNPMER. Transformer Mounting Brackets

19-01-02 Revised 01/12 Overhead
Two Transformer Banks (3-0 Open-
Delta)
A 3-0 open-delta transformer bank may have
two different-sized transformers. o
♦ Mount the larger transformer in line directly o
against the pole using the transformer's
mounting brackets as described on page
19-01-01.
♦ Mount the smaller transformer at a 90' DITM
angle from the in-line unit using an
individual transformer mounting bracket
(Cat. ID 1420). This bracket fits
transformers with a 12"mounting bolt
spacing(up to 50 WA).
d 0
DITM
6"
I
O
I
12" 0 7-1/16" Open-Delta Bank
I
0
3"x 3"curved washer
Individual Transformer Mounting Bracket
WMIDAW
Transformer Mounting Brackets WWMRa
11IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-01-03
3-0 Installations with up to three 100
kVA transformers D
Mount small 3-0 transformer banks(with up to
three 100 kVA transformers)to the pole using
the small cluster mount transformer bracket d d
(Cat.ID 1423). It is attached to the pole with
3/4"machine bolts and 4"x 4" curved washers
14"
and accepts transformers with a either 12" or 24" °
hanger bracket bolt spacing. Mount includes at
least a 2.1 safety factor.
3-0 Small Cluster Mount Bracket
3-0 bank with transformers up to 50 kVA
24
D
0 0
9-1/4"
tj t
14"
o -
a
12" °
o
24" 3-0 bank with 75 or 100 kVA transformers
Transformer Maximum "D"
o Weight(lbs) (inches)
2500 14
1950 18
1600 22
1350 26
NOTE. For an easier installation,
° transformers up to 50 kVA can be attached
0
to the cluster mount, along with the
bussing,while it is on the ground and then
o lifted as a unit to be attached to the pole.
DCMB For larger transformers,the cluster mount
must be attached to the pole before you
can attach the transformers.
E''�IDiAHO
RNPMER. Transformer Mounting Brackets

19-01-04 Revised 01/12 Overhead
3-0 Installations over 100 kVA The large cluster mount has a series of notches
that allow it to adjust for pole circumferences
Mount large 3-0 transformer banks with 167, between 30" and 45-1/2".The extension plate
250 and 333 kVA transformers to the pole using can be added for larger diameter poles.
the large cluster mount transformer bracket(Cat.
ID 1425). Larger transformers are installed on a Pole Dimension (at mounting bracket) Band
rack.Mount includes at least a 2.1 safety factor. Circumference (Diameter) Notch
30" to 34-1/2" (9-1/2"to 11") Inside
34-1/2" to 40-1/4" (11"to 12-3/4") Middle
NOTE. A cluster mount will not be used 40-1/4" to 45-1/2" (12-3/4"to 14-1/2") Outside
to hang a regulator bank. There are too
many maintenance issues and it is not
avian protectable.
The large cluster mount is clamped to the pole
with its own clamping hardware and accepts
transformers with 24" or 36"hanger bracket bolt
spacings. J
5/8"machine bolt
0 (top position only)
0 0
0 0
Outside notches
Middle notches
24° Inside notches
0 0
0 0
0 0
DCMD
0 0
0
Large Transformer Cluster Mount Bracket
Extension plate
and bolts
CAUTION. The large cluster mount bracket included in kit
requires a minimum pole circumference 30"
(9-1/2" diameter) at the point where it will be
mounted.
Transformer Mounting Brackets '� Ra
11IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/14 19-01-05
The large cluster mount bracket will support
three transformers each,per the table below. D
NOTE. Larger transformers with radiant
cooling fins that do not fit on this bracket must
be rack-mounted. See Section 19-05. DCMD
Transformer Maximum "D" O
Weight(Ibs) (inches)
o
4000 14
3100 18
2550 22
2100 26 LU
O1�4U111P-P
1
Weight=Ibs(per table)max.
��IDiAHO
RNPOWER. Transformer Mounting Brackets

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-02-01
1 -0 Transformer Framing Diagrams
Vise-top Option Jumper Wires
Vise-top Insulator There are two options of#4 jumper wires used
The vise-top insulator can be used as an option on all CSP and conventional transformers up to
to train the jumper wire to be connected on the 500 kVA.
center phase replacing the F or J neck insulator 1. #4 stranded copper. CU DWS...R4. To
on the pole. This fits on a thimble adapter.When be completely covered with the included
using this insulator,you do not need to issue the 1/2" avian tubing.
copper tie wire. 2. #4 covered stranded copper. CU DWC4.
No need to cut tubing and place tie in-between- Whichever option chosen shall be used from the
use one piece of wire and tubing clamped into top side of the fused cutout to the wedge stirrup
the vise on top of the insulator. and from the transformer primary bushing the
the bottom of the cutout. Both types are intended
for brush-contact protection only.
CAUTION. Do not consider as a
° personnel safe insulation.
0
Fused Cutout
4���4 The fused cutout shall be the polymer/silicone
Vise-top Option type with CU code: DSCS.... except for Boise
area until our inventory on porcelain cut-outs is
depleted.
E''�IDAHO
EMPM►ER. 1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-02-02 Revised 12/19 Overhead
1-0 Tangent
D*)(E)
(G)—~ (K') #4 5tr
12" ® 12"
O
24" 24" (B) `
7'-O"
S �
7'-0"
42" -^`
42 '
J. �
a
(L')is Hidde
6"min. 6"min.
1-0, 7.2 W Tangent or 1-0, 19.9 W Tangent
1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams HPMRa
1�IDACORPCa lY

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-02-03
1-0 Tangent Details
For 7.2 kV Construction For 19.9 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-Split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-Split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1 (B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1
(C) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (C) DFSP...- Formed Spool Tie 1
(D) DFTF... Formed Top Tie 1 (D) DFTJ...- Formed Top Tie 1
(E) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 1 (E) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 1
(F) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1 (F) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (G) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(H) DSC..." 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (H) DSC..." 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(1) DT..." Transformer 1-0 1 (1) DT..." Transformer 1-0 1
(J) DWC... Wedge Connector 1 (J) DWC... Wedge Connector 1
(K) DWS...R4' Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1 (K) DWS...R4' Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1
(L) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1 (L) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1
*Notes
*(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Order according to pole top size.
'(C) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
DFSP4 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.4
DFSP20 Formed Spool Tie F/Sec Rack&NB No.2/0
'(D) Formed Top Tie-DFT...
DFTF4 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.4 DFTJ4 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.4
DFTF20 Formed Top Tie F/F-Neck Insulator No.2/0 DFTJ20 Formed Top Tie F/J-Neck Insulator No.2/0
"(H) Fused Cutout-DSC..., Use appropriate type for your area.
Porcelain Porcelain
DSC151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSC351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
Silicone Silicone
DSCS151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSCS351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
'(I) Transformer-DT...,Order according to your job s needs. Refer to OH Section 18-02.
"(J) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(K) Wedge Stirrup Riser-DWS...R4. Refer to OH Section 08-05.Order by wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Str Riser Wire.
*(L) Transformer Bussing-DYS...,Order by application and transformer size. Refer to OH Section 18-02-02.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
INPOMR,, 1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-02-04 Revised 01/12 Overhead
1-0 Deadend
(A*
ti
(F* (E)
O 12"
6"
36"
12"
6 X�#4 Str
( ) 8,-0"
18" (�*)
(G*)
42"
42"
(K*)
(C�
oIF 6"min.IF
Lol
6" min. t
1-0, 7.2 kV Deadend 1-0, 19.9 kV Deadend
1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams HPMRa
1�IDACORPCa lY

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-02-05
1-0 Deadend Details
For 7.2 kV Construction For 19.9 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB...* Anti-Split Bolt 1 (A) DASB...* Anti-Split Bolt 1
(B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1 (B) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1
(C) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eyebolt 1 (C) DDENEB Deadend Neutral on 5/8"Eyebolt 1
(D) DDG...` Down Guy EHS 1 (D) DDG...` Down Guy EHS 2
(E) DDLEB35 35 kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyebolt 1 (E) DDLEB35 35 kV Lt Wt Strain Ins W/Eyebolt 1
(F) DDR...` Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2 (F) DDR...` Deadend Bolted Primary In-Line 2
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(G) DSC... 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (G) DSC...' 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(H) DT..." Transformer 1-0 1 (H) DT..." Transformer 1-0 1
(1) DWC..." Wedge Connector 1 (1) DWC..." Wedge Connector 1
(J) DWS...R4' Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1 (J) DWS...R4' Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1
(K) DYS...' Buss 1-0 Transformer 1 (K) DYS...' Buss 1-0 Transformer 1
"Notes
'(A) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Order according to pole top size.
'(D) Down Guy-DDG...,W/Guy Guard,Guy Strain Insulator,&Pole Eye Plate.Order by wire size.
Neutral guy is not needed for#4 ACSR. For other guying options see Sections 11-09 and 11-25.
'(F) Deadend&Tension-DDR..., Primary.
DDR4 for 4 ACSR
DDR20 for 2/0 ACSR
'(G) Fused Cutout-DSC..., Use appropriate type for your area.
Porcelain Porcelain
DSC151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSC351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
Silicone Silicone
DSCS151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSCS351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
'(H) Transformer-DT...,Order according to your job s needs. Refer to OH Section 18-02.
'(I) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(J) Wedge Stirrup Riser-DWS....R4. Refer to OH Section 08-05.Order by wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Str Riser Wire
'(K) Transformer Bussing-DYS...,Order by application and transformer size. Refer to OH Section 18-02-02.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,06,10,&20.
INPOMR,, 1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-02-06 Revised 01/12 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - Streamlined
�E*)
Keep the jumper wire (H \ (F)
at least 9"away (B*
from the pole.
12" ° — (N*)#4
12" Str
(A)
° 18"
a D
18" (F*)(K)(L*)
O D
�(F*)(K)Option 30" �I*)
18" ❑o (C)
8'-0"
42" 42"
❑® ❑� (O*)is Hidden
6"min. 6"min.
(M*)
3-0, 12.5 kV Streamlined 3-0, 34.5 kV Streamlined
Training Vise-top Option Shown Training Pin insulator Shown
orMIDAM
1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams WWMRa
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-02-07
3-0 Tangent - Streamlined Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1 (A) DAF Arm Fiberglass 48" 1
(B) DASB...* Anti-Split Bolt 1 (B) DASB...* Anti-Split Bolt 1
(C) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1 (C) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3' (E) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 4*
(F) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3* (F) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 4*
(F) (Optional)D135V* Vise-top Insulator(Shown) 1' (F) (Optional)D135V* Vise-top Insulator(Not shown) 0*
(G) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1 (G) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1 (H) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(1) DSC...* 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (1) DSC...* 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(J) DT...* Transformer 1-0 1 (J) DT...* Transformer 1-0 1
(K) DTADP Thimble Adapter 1 (K) DTADP* Thimble Adapter 1
(L) DTYC° Top Tie for CU 0. (L) DTYC` Top Tie for CU 1*
(M) DWC... Wedge Connector 1 (M) DWC... Wedge Connector 1
(N) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1 (N) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1
(0) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1 (0) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB...,Order according to pole top size.
"(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP...,Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
*(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT...,Order by wire size.
"(F) If the optional Vise-top Insulator is chosen be sure to adjust the total number of(E),(F)and(L)ordered. Refer to OH Page
11-33-02 for vise-top application details.See page 01.
*(I) Fused Cutout-DSC..., Use appropriate type for your area.
Porcelain Porcelain
DSC151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSC351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
Silicone Silicone
DSCS151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSCS351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
*(J) Transformer-DT...,Order according to your job s needs. Refer to OH Section 18-02.
*(L) Top Tie for CU-DTYC,Not needed if the(F)Vise-top option is selected.
*(M) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(N) Wedge Stirrup Riser-DWS... R4. Refer to OH Section 08-05.Order by wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Str Riser Wire
*(0) Transformer Bussing-DYS...,Order by application and transformer size. Refer to OH Section 18-02-02.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
INPOMR,. 1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-02-08 Revised 01/12 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - Crossarm 12.5 kV
F )
{B*)
12" o (K)
o (A)
f Bond
Steel Pin
A) 80 ❑ (p) (C) 4
Bond
Steel Pin o 0
(N*) 12'
#4 Str o
T-6"
42" (J*) 5 ❑
0
42"
(O*)is Hidden
6"min. 6"min.
(L*)� (M*)
3-0, 12.5 kV Crossarm 3-0, 12.5 kV Crossarm
(Preferred Switch Position) (Alternate Switch Position)
1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-02-09
3-0 Tangent - Crossarm Details
For 12.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB6 Anti-Split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB...* Anti-Split Bolt 1
(C) DASW8 T-8"Wood Crossarm 1
(D) DBK18 Bracket 18" V
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTF... Formed Top Tie 3
(G) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3
(H) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(1) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(J) DSC...* 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(K) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(L) DT... Transformer 1-0 1
(M) DWC...* Wedge Connector 1
(N) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1
(0) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Order according to pole top size.
'(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
'(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT....Order by wire size.
`(J) Fused Cutout-DSC.... Use appropriate type for your area.
Porcelain
DSC151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A
Silicone
DSCS151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A
*(L) Transformer-DT....Order according to your job s needs. Refer to OH Section 18-02.
*(M) Wedge Connector-DWC....Order by wire sizes.
'(N) Wedge Stirrup Riser-DWS... R4. Refer to OH Section 08-05. Order by wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Str Riser Wire
*(0) Transformer Bussing-DYS....Order by application and transformer size. Refer to OH Section 18-02-02.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
INPOMR,. 1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-02-10 Revised 01/12 Overhead
3-0 Tangent - Crossarm 34.5 kV
(F*)
12" o (K�►
0
/ (A)
(A) 36„ (C) Bond to
Bond to Steel Pin
Steel Pin \
(D) (N*)#4 Str
8'-0"
42"
(O*)is Hidden
(E*)(H)
6"min.
M*)
3-0, 34.5 kV Crossarm
OrMIDAM
1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams WWMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-02-11
3-0 Tangent - Crossarm Details
For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB6 Anti-Split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASB... Anti-Split Bolt 1
(C) DASW8 T-8"Wood Crossarm 1
(D) DBK18 Bracket 18" V
(E) DFSP...* Formed Spool Tie 1
(F) DFTJ...` Formed Top Tie 3
(G) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(H) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(1) DPTP Pole Top Pin 1
(J) DSC...* 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(K) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(L) DT...- Transformer 1-0 1
(M) DWC...* Wedge Connector 1
(N) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1
(0) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1
*Notes
*(B) Anti-split Bolt-DASB....Order according to pole top size.
'(E) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
'(F) Formed Top Tie-DFT....Order by wire size.
"(J) Fused Cutout-DSC.... Use appropriate type for your area.
Porcelain
DSC351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
Silicone
DSCS351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
*(L) Transformer-DT....Order according to your job s needs. Refer to OH Section 18-02.
*(M) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
'(N) Wedge Stirrup Riser-DWS... R4. Refer to OH Section 08-05.Order by wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Str Riser Wire
*(0) Transformer Bussing-DYS...,Order by application and transformer size. Refer to OH Section 18-02-02.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
INPOMR,. 1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-02-12 Revised 01/12 Overhead
3-0 Tangent Multi Circuit - Crossarm (Underbuild)
30"
0
NOTE. When designing an 6'-6"
underbuild on or near a
transmission line, call the 42"
T&D Design Group to get
accurate clearances.
0
6"min.
12.5-kV, 3-0 Tangent
E*) Multi Circuit(Underbuild)
(F) —
❑o
�
A
BondAto (B) Bond to
36"
Steel Pin
Steel Pin (C)
(H*)
42"
(M*)is Hidden
(D ) (G)
6"min.
(d*)� �(W)
34.5-kV, 3-0 Tangent
Multi Circuit(Underbuild)
orMIDAW
1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams WWMRa
A�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 01/12 19-02-13
3-0 Tangent Multi Circuit - Crossarm (Underbuild) Details
For 12.5 kV Construction For 34.5 kV Construction
CU Codes Description Qty CU Codes Description Qty
(A) DASB6 Anti-Split Bolt 6" 2 (A) DASB6 Anti-Split Bolt 6" 2
(B) DASW10 10'Wood Crossarm 1 (B) DASW10 10'Wood Crossarm 1
(C) DBK18 Bracket 18" V (C) DBK18 Bracket 18" 1*
(D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1 (D) DFSP...` Formed Spool Tie 1
(E) DFTF...* Formed Top Tie 3 (E) DFTJ...* Formed Top Tie 3
(F) D112F Insulator 12 kV Pin Type F-Neck 3 (F) D135J Insulator 35 kV Pin Type J-Neck 3
(G) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1 (G) DNBX Neutral Bracket Extended 1
DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1 DNPL Device Plate-Labor Only 1
(H) DSC..." 7.2/12.5 kV Fused Cutout 1 (H) DSC..." 20/34.5 kV Fused Cutout 1
(1) DSP Steel Pin Long 3 (1) DSP Steel Pin Long 2
(J) DT... Transformer 1-0 1 (J) DT... Transformer 1-0 1
(K) DWC... Wedge Connector 1 (K) DWC...' Wedge Connector 1
(L) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1 (L) DWS...R4* Wedge Stirrup Riser#4 Str 1
(M) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1 (M) DYS...* Buss 1-0 Transformer 1
*Notes
*(D) Formed Spool Tie-DFSP....Order by wire size.Wedge is included according to wire size ordered.
"(E) Formed Top Tie-DFT....Order by wire size.
*(H) Fused Cutout-DSC.... Use appropriate type for your area.
Porcelain Porcelain
DSC151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSC351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
Silicone Silicone
DSCS151 Switch Fused NLB 7.2/12.5 kV 100A DSCS351 Switch Fused NLB 20/34.5 kV 100A
*(J) Transformer-DT...,Order according to your job s needs. Refer to OH Section 18-02.
*(K) Wedge Connector-DWC...,Order by wire sizes.
*(L) Wedge Stirrup Riser-DWS... R4. Refer to OH Section 08-05.Order by wire size.
DWS...R4 Wedge Stirrup Hot Tap for...with#4 Str Riser Wire
*(M)Transformer Bussing-DYS...,Order by application and transformer size. Refer to OH Section 18-02-02.
Pole,conductor,and grounding assembly are not listed.Refer to Sections 05,10,&20.
INPOMR,. 1-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

Overhead Revised 10/07 19-03-01
3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams
Streamlined Construction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Section
11-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O D
Keep the jumper wire °
at least 10"away
from the pole. °
24"
12"
0
18" a D
Alt.neutral
18"
24"
Alt.neutral 40' 66"
18"
12'-0"
66" d 0
0 30"min.
o =6"min.
30"min.
12.5-kV Streamlined Construction
Open Delta
6"min.
NOTE. For open delta transformers,
connect the larger transformer to
the leading phase.
See Section 18 for more information.
12.5-kV Streamlined Construction
3 Transformers
E'er IDAHO
EMPOWER. 3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-03-02 Revised 10/07 Overhead
Streamlined Construction (cont.)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Section
11-30
Keep the jumper wire �°
at least 10"away
from the pole. �°
12"
30"
18"
Alt.neutral
18"
30"
® 66"
Alt.neutral
18"
66" d
13'-0" 30"min.
6"min.
d l�
1 0 0
I
30"min. 0 34.5-kV Streamlined Construction
Open Delta
6"min. NOTE. For open delta transformers,
connect the larger transformer to
the leading phase.
See Section 18 for more information.
34.5-kV Streamlined Construction
3 Transformers
orMICIRM
3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams WWMRa
A�IDAC"RPCa ny

Overhead Revised 10/07 19-03-03
Crossarm Construction
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Section
11-30
0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30"
if
Alt.neutral
18"
12"
0
66"
30" 121
1
Alt.neutral d ❑®
30"min.
11'-6"
6"min.
66"
12.5-kV Crossarm Construction
d °d Open Delta
°
NOTE. For open delta transformers,
connect the larger transformer to
30"min. 0 the leading phase.
See Section 18 for more information.
6"min.
12.5-kV Crossarm Construction
3 Transformers
•'�IDAHO
EMPOWER. 3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

19-03-04 Revised 10/07 Overhead
Crossarm Construction (cont.)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Section
11-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L —
42"
0
12"
Ir
42" LI
o❑ Alt.neutral
18"
Alt.neutral 66"
18"
12'-6"
66" d ❑®
30"min.
d d 6"min.
I
30"min. ❑®
34.5-kV Crossarm Construction
6"min. Open Delta
NOTE. For open delta transformers,
connect the larger transformer to
the leading phase.
34.5-kV Crossarm Construction See Section 18 for more information.
3 Transformers
orMIORM
3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams WWMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 10/07 19-03-05
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crossarm Deadend Construction
See Section
11-30
12" 12"
2-DGG17 2-DGG17
36" 36"
Alt.neutral Alt.nleutral
18" 18"
1
12'-0"
66" 66"
B
B
O
O o
0
30"min. 30"min.
6"min. IF 11 6"min.
f f
12.5-kV Crossarm Deadend Construction 12.5-kV Crossarm Deadend Construction
3 Transformers Open Delta
NOTE. For open delta transformers,
connect the larger transformer to
the leading phase.
See Section 18 for more information.
•'�IDAHO
RNIPMER. 3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

1 9-03-06 Revised 10/07 Overhead
Crossarm Deadend Construction (cont.)
See Section
11-30
12" 12"
42" 42"
2-DGGI7 2-DGGI7
Alt.neutral Alt.neutral
18" 1118"
1 1
12'-6"
66" 66"
0
0
O
O
30"min. 30"min.
6"min. IF 6"min.
f f
34.5-kV Crossarm Deadend Construction 34.5-kV Streamlined Deadend Construction
3 Transformers Open Delta
NOTE. For open delta transformers,
connect the larger transformer to
the leading phase.
See Section 18 for more information.
orMIORM
3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead written 12/19 19-03-07
Addition of 4th Switch on WYE-Delta Bank for Switching
Option 1 -Upright Bracket& Ground Strap-
Preferred with boss slot
Instruction installation:
1) Install arrester bracket on the boss slots of
the transformer
2) Mount the solid blade cutout on the bracket
3) Connect the bottom of the solid blade to the
bottom boss slot position of transformer
using ground strap. -
4) Using#4 covered wire, connect top side of
the solid blade cutout to the H2 common
bushings using a C-tap connector or on the
bushing ,
These Materials are embedded in DYD
CU Codes: zoo
Dr2ao
CID-148 1-Arrester bracket-
(qtY-1)
CID-36484-ground strap(qty-1)
CID-45101-15 kV solid blade disconnect(qty-1)
CID-5070744 covered wire w/80 mil(qty-5 ft.)
Option 2-NEMA Bracket on XF Mounting
Bracket- C-tap-Alternate
Instruction installation:
1) Install NEMA bracket in one of the
transformer mounts as shown ^'
2) Mount the solid blade cutout on the bracket
3) Using#4 covered wire, connect the bottom
of the solid blade to the pole ground using C-
tap connector or on the case ground.
4) Using#4 covered wire, connect top side of =
the solid blade cutout to the H2 common
bushings using a C-tap connector or on the
bushing 1 •- '
Materials Needed Are: �I
CID-40106-NEMA bracket(qty-1)
CID-5701-C-tap for#4 (qty-2)
Solid blade SW and#4 Covered Wire are
embedded in DYD CU Codes.
For more information, see OH 19-03-07 and OH 2O-03-35.
•'�IDAHO
EMPOWER. 3-0 Transformer Framing Diagrams

Overhead Revised 01/17 19-04-01
Pole Mounted Step Transformer Installations
Single Pole Mounted Step NOTE. The arresters must be sized for the
Transformer Installation appropriate primary voltage.
A single step transformer with size up to 250 See Section :
WA can be normally pole mounted.In cases 11-30
where you have to pole mount 1- 500 WA, . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • .
make sure that pole is adequate to handle the
transformer*. For 3-phase,transformers may be
pole mounted on three adjacent poles. A:1 U
12" 8„
CAUTION. The pole class must be appropriate
for the size of step transformer being installed. 18"
Refer to Section 11-06 for pole class details. o 0
*Use factored weight to size the pole. El
0
Primary Breakers 30"
The primary voltages are separated using two
polymer deadend insulators(Cat. ID 4771).
The insulators can be connected to a pin type
insulator using a stablink(Cat. ID 4869).
The 60"
insulators can also be connected to a clamp-top,
vertical line post insulator,using a 5/8" eyebolt
with a 5/8" eye nut.
❑®
�IDiAHO
41PMER. Pole Mounted Step Transformer Installations

Overhead Revised 01/22 19-05-01
Platform Types
General Information Three Phase Installations.Use a platform
when the step transformer installation,
Platforms(racks)are used to support large 3-0 transformer,autotransformer,two-winding step
banks of transformers, autotransformers,two- transformer,or regulator exceeds 3-250 kVA.
winding step transformers, and regulators. The For transformer weights see section 11-05.
platforms mentioned in this section are made of
aluminum. Cat. ID Length Capacity CU Code
48054 10, 5,000lbs DRACK10
For regulator installation details see Overhead 40229 22' 8,700 Ibs DRACK22
Manual16-03-01. 40924 22' 17,000lbs DRACK22HD
42599 24' 14,000lbs DRACK24
Platforms are specified based on the weight of 45207 *26' 45,000Ibs DRACK26
the equipment. The load carrying capacity is the Platform is an assembly with 2 pole kits included. If
you use only one(1)pole kit,the platform capacity
total weight of three equally spaced loads. is reduced to 24,000 lbs.
Platform Types CAUTION. The combined weight of
all the equipment must not exceed the
All platforms are basically identical except for capacity of the platform.
length and the number of support beams.
The light duty platform has a single beam on The following table shows the increased
each side,while the other platforms have two platform capacity with the addition of the
beams on each side. center pole kit, see OH 19-05-03 for Pole Class
Requirements.
Cat. ID Capacity w/Pole Kit
40924 30,000 Ibs
42599 27,000 Ibs
22',24', or 26' Platform
This light duty 10-foot platform has a single
beam on each side.
0.
10' Platform
"`IDAW
R� Platform Types and Installation

19-05-02 Revised 12/15 Overhead
Pole Kit Stability Guy. A stability guy goes around the
transformers to stabilize them on the structure.
The load carrying capacity of the platforms can The guy is created with 3/8-inch EHS guy strand
be increased with the addition of a center pole and attached to the poles with bolts, Cat. ID
kit. 5086. Formed grips hold the guy strand.
Cat. ID Description CU Code Cover the guy strand with 5/8-inch gray plastic
43167 Center Pole Kit DPOLEKIT tubing where the guy strand contacts the
transformer to prevent rubbing.
E
Y Bond only
one side
Switches. A fused cutout or solid blade
disconnect is required on the source and load
side of all platform mounted transformers. For
switch choices refer to OH 13-01.
Switch Sizing
KV Switch NOTE. Bond only one side of the stability
Up to 500 100 A fused Cutout guy to the neutral bus.
500-1500 300 A solid blade
Over 1500 600 A solid blade Stud Disconnects. Are designed for jumpers
4/0 and larger.They can be used as an option
Switch Timbers. Timbers are used to support when a separable means to disconnect may be
disconnect switches and jumper support necessary for wires for equipment or cutouts,
insulators. disconnects and switches.Refer to OH 08-05.
A stud disconnect may be replaced with a solid
wedge connection if preferred.
9"or 0 2�or Sc"\e7
' okto
�r7
4"or5"
CU Code Description Jumper Size
Cat. ID Length CU code Platform DDJ336 Device Jumper 4/0 cu
4970 24' DTBR24 24' DDJ795 Device Jumper 250 cu
24269 28' DTBR26 26'
NOTE. These timbers need to be field Primary Breaker. Two polymer deadend
drilled since they are purchased without insulators and a D-link are used to separate the
bolt holes. voltages on either side of a step transformer.
Platform Types and Installation '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 05/19 19-05-03
Pole Class Requirements Pole Foundations
End Poles for all platforms are required to be a Because of the heavy loads that the platforms
minimum of a 45-foot class 2 for single circuit are designed for, care should be taken to ensure
and a minimum of a 50-foot class 2 for double that the foundation will be adequate for the
circuit. loads.
Center Poles are required to be a minimum of a End Poles are set to normal depth.
35-foot class 4.5.The pole will then be cut at the
appropriate height. NOTE. If the earth at the setting depth is
soft,the hole must be dug deeper and
Pole Spacing backfilled with a tamped gravel base.
Pole spacing for a 22' Platform.
Pole Spacing
20'
Platform Length
22'
Pole spacing for a 24' Platform.
Pole Spacing
22'
Platform Length
24'
"`�R� Platform Types and Installation

19-05-04 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Center Poles are installed to increase the load
carrying capacity of the platform. The load NOTE. Because the center pole is only
carried by the center pole is greater than the end carrying vertical loads there is no need for
poles. It is necessary to ensure that the it to be set to normal depth.
foundation for the center pole is adequate to
carry the additional load. Backfill—Use roadmix, crushed rock,or slag.
Use 8-to 10-inches of dirt for last of backfill.
Two railroad ties will be buried at a depth of
48". The center pole is installed directly on the Footing—See options below.
ties. The hole is then backfilled and tamped.
—F�
17'-6"
8"to 10" Dirt
Roadmix
2-Railroad Ties 48
Concrete Footing* o 0
Notes:
♦ *Concrete footing is optional and obsolete;needs to be pre-ordered, Cat. ID 4972.
♦ *Compaction is the other option for the end pole footing; information also in OH 19-06.
♦ Railroad Ties—Cat. ID 59437
Platform Types and Installation MOP RR.

Overhead Revised 12/15 19-05-05
Transformer Spacing on Platform Conductor Sizing
When setting the transformers on the platform it The following table indicates the appropriate
is important to position them so that they are jumper and buss size for step transformers.All
spaced equally on the platform. jumpers are bare copper. The amperes in the
table below are for nameplate loading of
1. Set the center transformer so that it is 7.2/19.9 kV autotransformers.
positioned equally between the poles.
Location Conductor Amperes
500 WA
Low Primary #4 Str Cu 70
® � High Primary #4 Str Cu 25
Neutral #2 Str Cu 45
Neutral Bus #2 Str Cu 70
1500 WA
Low Primary 2/0 Str Cu 208
High Primary #4 Str Cu 75
Neutral 2/0 Str Cu 133
Neutral Bus 2/0 Str Cu 208
2500 WA
Low Primary 4/0 Str Cu 347
2. Place the other two transformers equal High Primary #2 Str Cu 126
distance from the pole and the center Neutral 4/0 Str Cu 221
transformer. Neutral Bus 4/0 Str Cu 347
Neutral Buss
® ® � The system neutral is routed and attached on
lugs provided.The lines are installed in channel
of the rack.
CAUTION.It is important that the transformers
are symmetrically placed on the platform so that
their center of gravity is over the center axis of
the platform.This will prevent tipping.
Generally the center of gravity for the
transformers is at the lifting points. NOTE. The lugs for neutral bussing are
included in a plastic bag with the rack.
Install them in the channel of the rack.
Connect the transformer ground to the neutral
buss using wedge connecters.
Refer to OH 2O-03-43 and 44.
"`�M Platform Types and Installation

Overhead Revised 12/22 19-06-01
Platform Installation for Auto Transformers
Single Circuit Configuration See Section
11-30
2-DPRBK2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
■ ■
JX18"non avian
�3i"min
DRT24
DTBR24
0 0 0
X X X X
0 0
20'or 22'
DRACK 22 or See page 19-05-05 how to train
DRACK 24 neutral buss on the rack. 17'-6"
Use and order center pole only if
additional load capacity is
See section 20 for needed
grounding details
See page 19-05-01 platform
weight capacity
6' _ 6'
Notes:
♦ Concrete footing is optional and obsolete;needs to be pre-ordered, Cat. ID 4972.
♦ Compaction is another option for the end pole footing; information also in OH 19-05-04.
"`�R. Platform Installation
M—W—P^

19-06-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Double Circuit Configuration
See Section
11-30
18"non-avian
DTBR24
30"min
24"min
30"min
0 0 0
X X X X
0 0 0
20'or 22'
DRACK 22 or
DRACK 24 Use and order center pole only if 17'-6"
additional load capacity is
needed
See section 20 for
grounding details
6' - e e - 0 6'
Notes:
♦ Concrete footing is optional and obsolete;needs to be pre-ordered, Cat. ID 4972.
♦ Compaction is another option for the end pole footing; information also on the previous page and
in OH 19-05-04.
Platform Installation '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/22 19-06-03
3- 2500 kVA Two-Winding Step-Down Transformers
See Section
11-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Side Low Side
18"non avian
21"30"min
® U ® ��
DTBR28
EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.
0 0 0
24'
8' 8' 8'
DRACK 26 17'-6"
-2-Pole kits
Refer to section 20
for grounding details
6' 6'
NOTES:
1) 2-Pole kits already included with the rack
2) DRACK 26 CU Code includes the RR ties.
3) 6-Neutral bus hardware included with the rack.To install refer to 19-05-05,see OH 19-05-01 for
platform weight capacity.
4) Concrete footing is optional and obsolete;needs to be pre-ordered,Cat.ID 4972.
Compaction is the other option for the end pole footing;information also in OH 19-06.
"`�R" Platform Installation
­­­

Overhead Revised 01/22 20-00-01
Table of Contents
20- Grounding and Bonding
20-01-01 Grounding and Bonding 20-03-05 Testing Neutral Isolators
Requirements Grounding Electrodes for
Definitions Neutral Isolators
20-01-02 Reasons for Grounding and Neutral Isolator Installations
Bonding Neutral Isolator Sign
National Electrical Safety Code 20-03-06 Guys
(NESC)Requirements Grounding Near Dairies
20-01-03 Primary Neutral Conductor
Neutral Conductor Sizes 20-04-01 Transformer and Line Equipment
Neutral Requirements for Grounding Basics
Special Circuits General Information
Neutral Connections Grounding Details
20-01-04 What Needs to be Connected to
the Neutral conductor Transformer Grounding
What Does Not Need to be 20-04-21 1-0 Single-Bushing Transformers
Connected to the Neutral 20-04-22 1-0 Two Bushing Transformer
conductor
What Needs to be Bonded 20-04-31 3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding
Open Wye-Delta Bank
20-02-01 Grounding Components Single-Bushing Transformers
Grounding Electrodes 20-04-32 Open Wye-Delta Bank
20-02-03 Conductive Cement and Bentonite Two-Bushing Transformers
Grounding Connectors 20-04-33 3-0 Grounded Wye-Wye Bank,
(See 08-03) Single-Bushing Transformers
Grounding Conductor 20-04-34 3-0 Grounded Wye-Wye Bank,
20-02-04 Ground Wire Molding Two-Bushing Transformers
Neutral Isolator 20-04-35 3-0 Ungrounded Wye-Delta Bank
Polarized Cell Replacement Two-Bushing Transformers
(PCR)
20-04-41 1-0 Pole-Mounted Auto
20-03-01 Grounding Methods And Transformer Grounding
Configurations 20-04-42 1-0 Pole-Mounted Two-Winding
Poles Stepdown Transformer
Ground Wire Attachment to Pole 20-04-43 Platform-Mounted Auto
20-03-02 Ground Wire Location Transformer Bank
Neutrals 20-04-44 Platform-Mounted Two-Winding
Neutral Continuity Stepdown Transformer Bank
20-03-03 Connection to Pole Ground
Neutral Isolation
Neutral Isolation Near
Cathodic Protection Continued on next page
Transformer Grounding Near
Cathodic Protection
Neutral Isolation at
Transformer Installations
RNPOW R� Table of Contents
A.IDACORP­P11Y

20-00-02 Revised 01/22 Overhead
Capacitor Grounding 20-05-01 Grounding Meters and Meter
20-04-61 Banks with a Harmonic Bases
Suppression Reactor Metering
20-04-62 Fixed Banks(Maintenance only) Customer-Owned Meter Base or
Cabinet
Reclosers and Sectionalizers Self-Contained Meters
20-04-63 1-0 Recloser or Sectionalizer 1-0 120/240V Meters
20-04-64 3-0 Hydraulic Recloser or 1-0 120/208V Network Meters
Sectionalizer 3-0 4-Wire Meters
20-04-65 3-0 Electronic Recloser or 20-05-02 Company-Owned Meter Base
Sectionalizer Grounding
20-04-66 3-0 Solid Dielectric Recloser CT Meter Bases
1-0 3-Wire Circuit with One CT
20-04-71 Pole Top Switches 1-0 3-Wire Circuit with Two CTs
-with Operating Handle 3-0 4-Wire Circuit with CT Meter
20-04-72 Messengers 20-05-03 Overhead-to-Overhead Primary
Metering
20-05-04 Overhead-to-Underground
Primary Metering
20-06-01 Grounding Arresters,Luminaires
and Fences
Arrester Grounding
Luminaire Grounding
20-06-02 Fence Grounding
Table of Contents 900MR.

Overhead Revised 12/11 20-01-01
Grounding and Bonding Requirements
Definitions Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or
otherwise protected,by means of suitable covers
Bonding. The electrical interconnecting of or casings,barrier rails or screens,mats or
conductive parts, designed to maintain a platforms, designed to minimize the likelihood,
common electrical potential. under normal conditions, of dangerous approach
or accidental contact by persons or objects.
Cable sheath. A conductive protective
covering applied to cables. NOTE. Wires that are insulated but not
otherwise protected are not normally
NOTE. A cable sheath may consist of considered to be guarded.
multiple layers, of which one or more is
conductive. Insulated. Separated from other conducting
surfaces by a dielectric (including air space)
Effectively grounded. Intentionally connected offering a high resistance to the passage of
to earth through a ground connection or current.
connections of sufficiently low resistance and NOTE. When any object is said to be
having sufficient current carrying capacity to insulated,it is understood to be insulated
minimize hazard to personnel and connected
equipment,and to permit prompt operation of for the conditions to which it is normally
circuit protective devices. subjected.
Equipment. Electrical apparatus used in the Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons
operation of the distribution system. This unless special means for access are used.
includes transformers,reclosers, sectionalizers, Isolated by elevation. Elevated sufficiently so
regulators, shunt capacitor banks,etc.
that persons may safely walk underneath.
Grounded. Connected to or in contact Multigrounded/multiple-grounded system.
with the earth or connected to some A system of conductors in which a neutral
extended conductive body that serves conductor is intentionally grounded solidly at
instead of the earth. specified intervals.A multigrounded or multiple
grounded system may or may not be effectively
Grounded system. A system of conductors in grounded.
which at least one conductor or point is
intentionally grounded, either solidly or through Neutral conductor. A system conductor other
a non-interrupting current-limiting device. than a phase conductor that provides a return
path for current to the source.Not all systems
Grounding conductor.A conductor used to have a neutral conductor.An example is an
connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a ungrounded delta system containing only three
wiring system to a grounding electrode or energized phase conductors.
electrodes.
Step and touch potential. The voltage across
a person's body as he touches an object or steps
over the ground where a potential difference
exists. See IEEE Std 80-1986.
E''�IDiAHO
EMPOWER. Grounding and Bonding Requirements

20-01-02 Revised 02/19 Overhead
Reasons for Grounding and Bonding Other Neutral Conductors. Neutrals not
common to primary and secondary circuits have
NOTE. Not all electrical equipment is special grounding requirements(Rule 215B2).
grounded or bonded. Some may be An example of this is a secondary neutral of
insulated or isolated. transformer(s) on"delta"primary circuit. In this
case,the lightning arrester and transformer tank
Public and Worker Safety. Grounding ground must be separated from the secondary
metallic equipment minimizes exposure to neutral. Separate electrodes spaced 20'apart
hazardous voltages during both steady-state and must be used for the two voltage classes(Rule
fault conditions. 97A, 97D1).Also,the resistance of each ground
must be measured to be 25 ohms or less to earth,
Equipment Protection. Grounding equipment or two grounds in parallel must be used for each
helps protect it from lightning and other of the separate grounds. See NESC Rule 96D.
overvoltage conditions as well as helping any
upstream protective devices operate properly by No Earth-only Return Path. Supply circuits
providing a ground path should the equipment shall not be designed to use the earth as the sole
fail internally. return conductor for any part of the circuit.
Reduce Radio Frequency Interference and NOTE. Circuits without a neutral
Pole Fires. Leakage current can flow between conductor and with transformers
non-current-carrying metal parts that are close connected phase-to-ground are not in
together and cause radio interference. Bonding compliance with NESC Rule 215B5.
these metal parts together eliminates unintended
leakage current. Non-current carrying parts. With a few
exceptions,Rule 215C requires metal or metal
Required. The National Electrical Safety reinforced supporting structures to be effectively
Code (NESC)requires that certain equipment be grounded.These include items such as cases,
grounded and bonded. Some alternatives are lamp posts,metal conduits,messengers, switch
allowed. handles and operating rods,and hangers of
equipment. Guys may be insulated with properly
NESC Requirements placed and rated strain insulators.
The NESC carefully details what equipment Communication Circuits. Communication
must be grounded and bonded and the methods cable messengers exposed to power contacts,
used to ground and bond it. induction,or lightning shall be bonded together
and also to the common neutral at least 8 times
Neutral Conductors. A conductor used as a per mile and also at each crossing structure.
neutral for primary and secondary circuits shall Anytime a grounding conductor exists, all
be effectively grounded(Rule 215B 1). messengers and the neutral must be connected to
This rule applies to almost all of the distribution it(NESC Rule 920).
system. The NESC requires that the neutral be Since it is Idaho Powers practice to ground
connected to at least four ground rods (or every pole(unless the neutral is floated),
equivalent)per mile. If only pole butt wire communication messengers shall be bonded at
wraps or plates are used,then eight per mile are each pole.
required.
Grounding and Bonding Requirements MWMRa
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 06/15 20-01-03
If a full sized neutral is impractical on rebuild
or reconductor projects,with design or area
® leader approval, a smaller neutral may be used.
See the table below for the minimum allowable
neutral size.
Rebuild or Reconductor Minimum Neutrals
Phase Conductor Minimum Neutral
4 ACSR 4 ACSR
2/0 ACSR 4 ACSR
336 AAC 2/0 ACSR
795 AAC 336 AAC
NOTE. For non-standard conductor sizes the
minimum neutral size allowed is one half the size
of the phase conductor, based on ampacity.
Neutral Requirements for Special Circuits
Surge Arresters. Effective grounding is ♦ New or rebuilt overhead multiple circuits
necessary for arrestors to operate properly. See with a shared neutral conductor. A full
NESC Rule 215B4. size neutral(of the largest conductor) is
required.
Primary Neutral Conductor ♦ All new lines within one(1) mile of a
All new primary distribution circuits must be substation. A full size neutral is required.
wye-connected and include a continuous ♦ Lines serving and within 1/2 mile of a
multiple-grounded neutral conductor. dairy have special requirements. See
Spillway links:
Neutral Conductor Sizes
hqp:11spillwayl
pubsIDOCSIStVoltGuideProc
♦ For all new construction with the Pro. d
exception of 795 conductors a full size http://spillwa�ubs/DOCS/ConDaiaLoad.
neutral(of the phase conductor,based on f
ampacity)is required. See the table below. oRe.httpp/spillwapubs/DOCS/DairyCustNeutls
Re. d
♦ The following is recommended for all
3-0 rebuild and reconductor projects. NOTE. All ground wires connected to a 795 AAC
neutral must be a#4 Cu or 246 Cu wires as
New Construction Required Neutral Sizes required by NESC.
Phase Conductor Neutral
4 ACSR 4 ACSR Neutral Connections
2/0 ACSR 2/0 ACSR
336 AAC 336 AAC All secondary circuit neutral conductors must be
795 AAC 336 AAC solidly connected to the primary neutral except
where isolation is required.
Wire wraps are to be used at the base of each
pole. Connect the neutral conductor to the
ground at each pole and also to any ground rods
that are present.A ground rod or equivalent is
required at equipment locations.
9'Q IDiAHO
ENPMER. Grounding and Bonding Requirements

20-01-04 Revised 02/19 Overhead
Where two or more different primary circuits are Guy wires installed where there is no neutral
attached to the same pole, connect all neutral conductor or where grounding is prohibited for
conductors together. corrosion control of anchors.
CAUTION. Never open a primary neutral What Needs to be Bonded
circuit without first installing an adequate
jumper across the open. Significant voltages All hardware in the primary area separated by 2"
may exist across the open point.
or less,whether or not there is wood between the
metal parts,to prevent tracking,pole fires, and
What Needs to be Connected to the radio interference.
Neutral Conductor
Hardware separated by more than 2" in
Any metal enclosure,case or tank containing industrial or other contaminated area may also
equipment operating at greater than 50 volts. require bonding.
Any metal rack,platform or arm supporting
equipment or conductors operating at greater
than 50 volts.
Any metal pole,riser,pipe, or operating rod that
extends up toward equipment or conductors Transmission above
operating at greater than 50 volts, or that is
exposed to contact with energized parts.
All switch handles, even if the operating rod is
insulated.
All metallic sheaths and messenger wires.
Guy wires between the pole or structure and the
guy insulator.
Any metal fence and gate around primary
electrical equipment.
Any ground mat for personnel protection.
What Does Not Need to be Connected
to the Neutral Conductor
Bond any distribution metal hardware such as
Conductor supports such as pole top pins, steel the crossarm mounting bolt and the brace heel
pins, line post studs,thimble adapters,primary bolt that is within 6" of the pole ground wire on
dead-end hardware,and metal side brackets. wood transmission structures.
Mounting brackets such as cutout and arrester
mounting brackets(unless directly connected to
a grounded tank or rack), secondary brackets,
and neutral brackets.
Mounting hardware such as anti-split bolts,
standoff brackets and bolts for pole risers,
crossarm brace mounting bolts, or bracket
mounting bolts.
IDAHO
Grounding and Bonding Requirements '0'6'm— Ra
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/11 20-02-01
Grounding Components
Grounding Electrodes Ground Rod. Use a ground rod with a wire
wrap at all transformer and apparatus locations
Several types of grounding electrodes are including regulators,reclosers, sectionalizers,
approved, depending on the circumstances and arresters,pole top switches, capacitor banks,UG
the application. risers,primary splices,primary vaults, and pad-
Wire Wrap (Pancake or Butt Ground). The mounted gear.
NESC recognizes the wire wrap as an acceptable Caution. Do not put the ground rod in
electrode for meeting the system neutral the pole hole. It must be installed in
grounding requirements. undisturbed soil.
NOTE. The NESC does not allow a wire
wrap to be used as the sole electrode at Parallel electrodes should be separated
apparatus locations (Rule 94B4).A more horizontally 6'.The grounding conductor leading
substantial electrode, such as a ground rod to the ground rod should be buried 18" minimum
or ground plate is required. to avoid damage.
For rock holes,or poles set in asphalt or
The wrap consists of a continuous length of#6 concrete,you may slant the rod up to 45' in
or larger copper wire 12'long that is coiled at order to drive it. If the rod becomes stuck before
the butt as shown. full depth is achieved and you cannot remove it,
Attach the wire wrap and the grounding bend the rod over into the trench and install
conductor with ordinary fence staples below another rod 6'away if practical.
ground.Use galvanized nails and ground wire
clips above ground. Install connector
above ground
Use ground wire
clips and nails 18"Min.
above ground line. Drive to a
\ depth of 8'
Max.
6'if practical
Use fence staples
12" to attach the wire
bellowground
1
o� Use coupler(Cat. ID 503\to
connect additional 5/8"ground
rod.
Use 12' of#6 Cu
(#4 for 795 Al neutral)
for the wrap.Do not
make kinks
E'erAH IDO
�wPOWER Grounding Components

20-02-02 Revised 12/11 Overhead
Copper Ground Plate. The copper ground Counterpoise Wire. At least 100'of#6 or
plate(Cat. ID 5031)meets the dimensions in larger copper wire,buried at least 18" laid
NESC Rule 94133C and is equivalent to a ground approximately straight and in direct contact with
rod. the soil is an acceptable made electrode,
equivalent to a driven ground rod for compliance
NOTE. A wire wrap is optional when a purposes(NESC Rule 94B3a).The pole ground
plate is used. wire should be the same size as the counterpoise
The ground plate may be used for new wire. The wire may be installed in a grid.
installations where the plate is buried at a depth
of at least 60". Install the plate so that both sides
will be in contact with the soil. Dig the hole
deep enough to tamp in a 6" layer of good soil or
ground enhancement material underneath the 18"min
plate and another 6" layer tamped on top of the
plate.
NOTE. Use conductive soil around the
plate,not sand, gravel, or rocks. In areas
with rock,add 50 lbs of Bentonite or
conductive cement.
Note. Attach the#6 Tinned Cu from the Concrete-Encased Electrodes. 20'or more of
ground plate to the pole ground above copper wire sized#4 or larger, or steel bar sized
the ground line so the 3/8" O.D. or larger laid as straight as possible
plate can be table made and encased in concrete is an acceptable p
electrode.The NESC requires 12" of depth to
the concrete,but recommends 30".
#6 Tinned Cu
(10'comes with
ground plate) 12"Min.
Use tamped,select
backfill(no rocks)
6"above and beloti
the ground plate. 4" plus 20'min. #4 Cu or
electrode 3/8" rebar
diameter
L
Copper
6 Ground Plate
6"
Grounding Components '� Ra
A.IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/11 20-02-03
Conductive Cement and Bentonite Grounding Conductor
Conductive cement and Bentonite are used to Two types of conductor are approved for use for
reduce the resistance of the earth connection. It grounding the distribution system.
may also be used for reducing electrolytic Copper Conductors. Soft drawn copper in#6
corrosion of grounding electrodes.The material solid, #4 solid, and#2 stranded sizes are the
can be applied dry,but water will allow it to set most common grounding conductors used on the
up more quickly.Apply it below the frost level distribution system.
for best results. Include a bag of Bentonite in the
work order for rock holes. When the neutral size is 795 Al or 500 Cu,the
grounding conductor should be#4 Copper(or
two#6s) (see NESC Rule 93C2).
#2 stranded copper and larger is used for ground
mats and in underground padmount and
t�tiJ 'fJ?Lj,`x enclosure applications.
r
Copperweld Conductors are used to ground the
rMgL6 ins transmission system or where copper theft is a
problem.
On distribution, 10'of copperweld conductor
may be installed above groundline to discourage
copper theft or when replacing stolen ground
Cat. ID Description wire. Use a compression splice to connect to the
5380 Bentonite copper at ground level.An 8'piece of molding
18487 Conductive Cement may also be used; see the next page. CU code
DGCW includes copperweld and molding.
Grounding Connectors
For connectors commonly used on grounding
refer to page 08-03-05,Grounding Connectors.
6"spacing to 10'
then 2'spacing
Copperweld
conductor for Use nails and clips
coppertheft above ground
areas
Use copper Compression splice
conductor and Cat ID 4348
staples below
ground
•'Q IDO
EMAHPOWER. Grounding Components

20-02-04 Revised 12/11 Overhead
Ground Wire Molding Neutral Isolator
Delta Circuits,Other Circuits with No Neutral. The neutral isolator(Cat. ID 24320)is used to
Where a multi-grounded neutral does not exist, separate the customers neutral from the utility
molding is required. primary neutral. The neutral isolator is used to
help reduce or eliminate neutral to earth
Transmission Grounds. NESC and Idaho voltages. For installation drawings see page
Power requires molding be used on 20-03-04.
Transmission ground wires where there is no
shield wire or distribution neutral. See page
02-002-01 of the Transmission Manual.
While not required,molding can also be used to
help deter copper theft. CU code DGMD
includes molding and staples. 7 1/2"
Plastic Molding
Cat ID 4706 1 0 0
Steel Shank Staples
Cat ID 5376 — Ground connection lugs
Polarized Cell Replacement (PCR)
The PCR(Cat. ID 44431)is a solid-state device
$' that is used to simultaneously provide DC
15/16" decoupling and AC continuity for grounding.
The PCR is used where cathodic protection is
1„ employed,usually for pipelines and other steel
structures.For installation drawings see page
End view of the 20-03-04.
plastic molding
8
7-1/2"
01
0 0
Ground connection lugs
Grounding Components WWOMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/11 20-03-01
Grounding Methods and Configurations
Poles When installing a ground rod or ground plate,
make the connection above ground to show that
Frame all distribution poles, including primary, a full electrode is present. Slant the rod if
secondary, and lighting poles,with a#6 copper necessary when it's needed for rock,hardpan,
wire wrap;#4 for a neutral size of 500 Cu or 795 concrete,paving, etc.,but keep it out of the pole
Al and larger. The wire wrap is optional where a hole. Keep the ground rod 6-feet away from the
ground plate is used, except for larger neutrals wire wrap if practical.
requiring#4 copper grounding conductor.
The ground wire should continue up the pole
only as far as the highest ground connection.
2'(1'farms)
NOTE. On poles that have a floating 6"(theft area
neutral the round wire should be g u above
g groundline)
terminated just above the ground.
Make connection
When setting a pole inside the substation ground above groundline
grid,or within 10-feet outside of the perimeter
fence,use#4 copper,minimum, for the wire 1 s"min
wrap, and connect to the grid.
Use fence staples
spaced 2'below
If the pole carries transmission conductors,then 6' _ groundline
the grounding conductor may go to the top of the Slant rod for
pole for shield wire and/or hardware connection. rock,hardpan, Use extra staples
paving,etc. to plow depth for
farming areas
Use compression splices for any repair of the
ground wire.
Wire wrap
Ground Wire Attachment to Pole 12'of#6 Cu
Above ground, fasten the conductor with nails
and ground wire clips to reduce radio
interference.
Below ground,use ordinary fence staples to
avoid treatment penetration.
Generally, attach the wire at 2-foot intervals. In
farming areas, attach the wire at 1-foot intervals
to 10-feet above and 3-feet below the ground
level to minimize exposure to farming
equipment. For areas where copper theft has
occurred, attach the wire at 6-inch intervals up to
10-feet above the ground. Copperweld may be
used up to 10-feet above groundline for copper
theft replacement.
"`�R. Grounding Methods and Configurations

20-03-02 Revised 07/22 Overhead
Ground Wire Location Neutrals
The preferred location of the ground wire is on Neutral grounding is very important since the
the same side of the pole as the neutral neutral serves as the primary grounding path for
conductor,usually the road side, and out of the most equipment on the system accessible to
climbing space quadrant. people.
Neutral Continuity. Neutrals shall be carried
continuously with a minimum of splices and
connections. One wedge connector is sufficient.
45°
Keep the ground wire
out of climbing space
Where circuits deadend at the same pole the
neutral shall be tied through.
Locate the ground wire on the side of the pole NOTE. Regardless of the type of
away from the oncoming traffic to provide some connector,make sure to include corrosion
physical protection from vehicular damage. inhibitor when connecting different metals
or aluminum-to-aluminum on a permanent
Obasis.Always clean and brush wires.
A B
Fiberglass Crossarms
_ Direction of traffic
When installing fiberglass crossarms with 4-up
construction,use retaining clips, Cat. IDs 57422,
58522, and an optional bonding clip, see
B A Overhead Manual 07-07-02,to train the ground
A-Preferred location B-Alternate wire to the pole ground, see illustration below.
Neutral
To Pole
Ground
Bonding Clip Retaining Clips
Grounding Methods and Configurations 9013 RR.

Overhead Revised 12/11 20-03-03
Connection to Pole Ground. The neutral will Neutral Isolation
be connected to the pole ground at every pole.
The only exception to this rule is at poles not Neutral Isolation Near Cathodic Protection
carrying transformers near cathodic protection Do not connect the neutral to the ground wire
anode beds. where a power line is located close to a
cathodically protected structure,pipeline,or a
The multiple connections of the neutral to pole cathodic protection anode bed.
grounds are needed to effectively ground the
distribution circuit. Floating the neutral in these areas will prevent
DC current from flowing through the pole
Caution. Connections that are missing, grounds and causing corrosion.
loose, or damaged must be repaired or
replaced. Attach a sign to the pole or crossarm near the
neutral to alert personnel of a floating neutral.
Do not loop the grounding conductor through
the connector and extend to other equipment.
Use an additional connector to ground
equipment.
® �
Floating neutral
(F-N)sign,
Cat. ID 8801
:-N
affixed near the
Do not loop neutral.
through
primary neutral
connectors
Extend ground
wire to just above
the ground level
for future use.
The pole ground is carried up the pole to just
above the groundline.
Caution. A floating neutral cannot be
used on a pole with a transformer.The
NESC specifically requires that this
connection be made.
"`�R. Grounding Methods and Configurations

20-03-04 Revised 07/22 Overhead
A few pole grounds can be disconnected, Neutral Isolation at Transformer
provided there is a total of four full grounding Installations. Normally,primary and
electrodes, or 8 wire wraps,per mile. secondary neutrals are to be solidly connected. It
is sometimes necessary to install a Neutral
When constructing or reconstructing power lines Isolator,Cat ID 24320 to reduce or eliminate
near large pipelines or cathodically protected neutral to earth voltage(NEV). The neutral
structures contact your field engineer. isolator will keep the primary and secondary
neutrals electrically separated unless the voltage
Transformer Grounding Near Cathodic becomes greater than 45 volts. The device will
Protection. Transformers installed near then switch to the shorting mode and connect the
cathodic protection may need to have a primary and secondary neutrals.
Polarized Cell Replacement(PCR), Cat ID
44431,installed between the primary and Caution. Before re-fusing a transformer
secondary neutrals. The PCR differs from a with a neutral isolator, solidly connect the
neutral isolator in that it passes AC current but primary and secondary neutrals together.
blocks DC current. Coordinate the installation De-energize the transformer before
with the pipeline company. separating the neutrals.
Install a ground rod or plate the same as for
other transformer installations.
Caution. Do not use this device at
dairies and other locations where AC
neutral isolation may be needed. The PCR
does not isolate the neutral from AC Maintain two pa7 ths
to ground for the
current. transformer tank
a
Remove the
ground strap
from the
® secondary
bushing
Primary Secondary
a Neutral 1 Neutral
PCR Remove the T
ground stral Use 600-volt insulated#6 Cu USE wire
from the (Cat ID 3614)for the secondary grounding
secondary wire extending down the pole to the secondary
bushing electrode group(NESC Rule 97D2).
Secondary
Primary Neutral
Neutral
Use 600-volt insulated#6 Cu USE wire
(Cat ID 3614)
Grounding Methods and Configurations '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/11 20-03-05
Testing Neutral Isolators. If an ohmmeter Neutral Isolator Installations. The neutral
indicates a resistance greater than 5,000 ohms, isolators on poles should be installed as shown
then the unit is functional. Promptly return the below.
isolator to service.
Caution. If telephone or CATV is attached to
NOTE. The customer should install a the primary neutral they must be contacted to
suitable voltage monitoring device in case make sure that the grounding system does not
the neutral isolator fails. bypass the isolator.
Grounding Electrodes for Neutral Isolators.
Install the grounding electrodes for neutral
isolators as shown below.
• The ground wire for the primary is#6
bare Cu.
• The ground wire for the secondary is#6
USE Cu.
0
• The#6 USE extends down the pole to Neutral isolator
the first ground rod.
• After the first ground rod use#6 bare Insulated Tape connection
Cu. secondary
ground is not e
bonded to
system neutral
Do not bond the
communication
to the secondary
ground(insulated)
at the pole
Use an 8'section of
molding for secondary
ground wire
m�®
The ground he
Do bond the will need to be lifted,but I
communication Z sure to bond the grount
18"min messenger to at the service entrant
the primary neutral
#6 bare Cu #6 USE Cu #6 bare Cu ground wire(bare)
6'min 6'min 6'min Neutral Isolator Sign. Install a neutral isolator
(NI) sign, Cat. ID 8802, (shown below) at all
• locations with a NI to alert utility workers of the
dangers. Install the sign on an aluminum plate
• attached to the pole 8-feet above ground.
NOTE. The secondary grounding
conductor must be insulated and extended WA R N I N G
to a separate electrode at least 6-feet from
the primary neutral grounding electrode. NEUTRAL
ISOLATOR
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES MAY
EXIST BETWEEN PRIMARY
AND SECONDARY NEUTRAL
CIRCUITS
See Idaho Power Methods&
Materials team for more information
"`PM Grounding Methods and Configurations

20-03-06 Revised 07/22 Overhead
Guys Grounding Near Dairies
The NESC requires that guys be grounded or A ground rod or ground plate shall be installed at
insulated by installing a guy insulator. The every pole within a 1/2-mile of a dairy.
construction practice is to use a guy insulator,
eliminating the need for the ground unless there NOTE. Whenever a new dairy is
is guy strand above the insulator as for proposed,contact the local field or power
transmission underbuild, see Overhead Manual quality engineer.
06,Anchoring and Guying for more information.
For additional information regarding grounding
If a down guy is installed without a guy near dairies see the following documents on the
insulator, ground it as shown below with the Spillway Publications Portal; links provided
ground wire connected directly to the guy below:
strand,not through the hardware.
• Strange Guideline, Procedure, and
Protocol
• Connecting Dairy Load or Adding
Near a Dalry
• Dairy Customer Neutral Insolator
0 Request
Grounding Methods and Configurations '`pM RR.

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-01
Transformer and Line Equipment Grounding Basics
General Information Ground straps provide a second path to ground
for secondary/service.
When installing transformers or line equipment
there are several basic grounding rules and A ground rod or ground plate is required at all
requirements that need to be observed.The transformer and line equipment locations.
information in this section pertains to all
transformer and line equipment configurations When two ground rods are installed for a ground
installed on a pole or on a platform(rack). grid(see Control cabinet below)they are to be
placed opposite each other, separated by 6'to 8'
Grounding Details but may be placed anywhere on the circle of#2
copper conductor.
Securely grounded. Each configuration has
two paths to ground. It is important to ensure When the neutral is in a secondary position
that tanks,mounting racks,and secondary you have an option to connect the secondary
circuits are securely grounded. neutral bussing to the primary neutral or the pole
The ground wire should be looped through the ground.
tank and rack ground lugs with no break in the
conductor. NOTE. With all single-bushing
transformers the tank is used as the path
Welded Nut for the return current. If the tank ground
connection fails,then full primary voltage
would appear on the tank.
Control cabinet(s)are normally viewed and
operated by a worker standing on the ground
/ directly in front of the open cabinet.To provide
Remove the eyebolt extra protection for the worker, install a ground
Do not cut the wire on changeouts grid.Use a#2 stranded bare copper wire buried
at an 8"minimum depth and a 6'to 8'diameter
circle around pole.Adjust if needed for
If the ground connecter is attached to the tank by sidewalks, etc.
a welded nut it is important to wire brush the nut
to remove paint and rust and then apply Stabilize equipment installed on a platform
corrosion inhibitor. with a stabilizing guy.This stabilizing guy wire
must be grounded. Connect one end of the guy
NOTE. Do not wire brush plated wire to the pole ground with one fired-on wedge.
connectors.
Continuous ground. The ground
wire,unless otherwise indicated is a#6
solid copper conductor. It is to be a
continuous length where possible. The
wire is pliable enough to be bent
double and inserted into the bushing
connections and should be looped through the
neutral bushing.
" Q IDAHO
111IMPOINER, Transformer and Line Equipment Grounding Basics

Overhead Revised 01/21 Z0-04-21
1-0 Transformer Grounding
The most common type of transformer for 1-0 NOTE. With all single-bushing
applications is the single-bushing transformer. transformers the tank is used as the path
for the return current. If the tank ground
connection fails,then full primary voltage
would appear on the tank.
1-0 Single-Bushing Transformers
System Neutral
System
Neutral
---------------- a
-------Alternate Grounding Method
System Neutral in the Secondary Position System Neutral in the Primary Position
1-0 Transformer Grounding

20-04-22 Revised 01/21 Overhead
1-0 Two-Bushing Transformers
Two bushing 1-0 transformers are found
typically 2.4-, 7.2-,and 14.4-kV,and in older
19.92-kV installations. Dual voltage
transformers (2.4/4.16Y and 7.2/12.47Y)also
fall into this classification when operated on a
wye-grounded system.
System Neutral
System Neutral
------------------
Altemate Grounding Method
System Neutral in the Secondary Position System Neutral in the Primary Position
1-0 Transformer Grounding '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-31
3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding
Open Wye-Delta Bank Single Bushing Transformers
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire Continuous Ground Wire
1 1
Remove this Remove this
Ground Strap Ground Strap
Leave this
Ground Strap
Leave this
System Neutral Ground Strap
------------------------------------
-------Altemate Grounding Method
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
wrl"POR,: 3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding

20-04-32 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Open Wye-Delta Bank Two Bushing Transformers
System Neutral
Continuous lGround Wire Continuous lGround Wire
1 1 I
Remove this Remove this
Ground Strap Ground Strap
Leave this Leave this
Ground Strap Ground Strap
System Neutral
o
----------------
o
Alternate Grounding Method
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-33
3-0 Grounded-Wye-Wye Bank Single Bushing Transformers.
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire
Continuous Ground Wire /
Leave all 3
Leave all 3 Grounding Straps
Grounding Straps Attached
Attached
System Neutral
-----------------
0 0
0 0
0 0
-------Alternate Grounding Method
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
pR 3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding

20-04-34 Revised 01/21 Overhead
3-0 Grounded-Wye-Wye Bank Two Bushing Transformers
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire
Continuous Ground Wire
Leave all 3
Leave all 3 Grounding Straps
Grounding Straps Attached
Attached
System Neutral
----------- o 1 0
0 0
0 0
Alternate Grounding Method
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding "`�R„

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-355
3-0 Ungrounded Wye-Delta Bank Two Bushing Transformers
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire
Continuous lGround Wire
1
Isolate the mid-point Isolate the mid-point
of the primary wye of the primary wye
connection from the connection from the
ground ground
System Neutral
---------------
0 0
0 0
0 0
-------Altemate Grounding Method
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
pR 3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-33
3-0 Grounded-Wye-Wye Bank Single Bushing Transformers.
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire
Continuous Ground Wire /
Leave all 3
Leave all 3 Grounding Straps
Grounding Straps Attached
Attached
System Neutral
-------------- o 0
0 0
0 0
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
"MM�R, 3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding

20-04-34 Revised 01/21 Overhead
3-0 Grounded-Wye-Wye Bank Two Bushing Transformers
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire
Continuous Ground Wire
Leave all 3
Leave all 3 Grounding Straps
Grounding Straps Attached
Attached
System Neutral
-------------------
0 0
0 0
0 0
T
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding ��R,

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-355
3-0 Ungrounded Wye-Delta Bank Two Bushing Transformers
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire
Continuous lGround Wire
1
Isolate the mid-point Isolate the mid-point
of the primary wye of the primary wye
connection from the connection from the
ground ground
System Neutral
0 LO
0 0
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
" Q IDAHO
MIN POMR, 3-0 Transformer Bank Grounding

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-41
1-0 Pole-Mounted Auto Transformer
NOTE. Grounding is different for
two-winding stepdown transformers.
Continuous Ground Wire
-,#4 Cu up to 500 kVA 19.92/7.2 kV
System Neutral
Loop through the
HoXo Bushing Continuous Ground Wire
#4 Cu up to 500 kVA 19.92/7.2 kV
O
Loop through the
HoXo Bushing
System Neutral O
System Neutral in Secondary Position Systerm Neutral In Primary Position
INppMR, 1-0 Pole Mounted Transformer Grounding

20-04-42 Revised 01/21 Overhead
1-0 Pole Mounted Two Winding Stepdown Transformer
NOTE. Grounding is different for
auto transformers.
Continuous Ground Wire
#4 Cu for up to 500 kVA, 19.92/7.2 kV.
System Neutral
Continuous Ground Wire
#4 Cu for up to 500 kVA, 19.92/7.2 kV.
O
O
System Neutral
System Neutral in Secondary Position Systerm Neutral In Primary Position
1-0 Pole Mounted Transformer Grounding WMpR,.

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-04-43
Platform Mounted Auto Transformer Bank
NOTE. Grounding is different for
two-winding stepdown transformers.
0 0 0
(A) (B) (C)
Table(A) (B) If only one tank connector is provided,
System Neutral/Xfrmr Jumper Xfrmr Size loop through.
#2 Cu Min. 500 kVA 1-0
2/0 Cu Min. 1500 kVA 1-0 NOTE. Tank designs vary by
4/0 Cu Min. 2500 kVA 1-0 manufacturer and vintage. Some designs
use eyebolt type case ground connectors.
(C) Ground the rack at both ends with TLS
lugs.
"RM�W Platform Mounted Transformer Bank Grounding

20-04-44 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Platform Mounted Two-Winding Stepdown Transformer Bank
NOTE. Grounding is different for
auto transformers.
(B)
o 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 (B)
(A) (C)
Table(A)
System Neutral/Xfrmr Jumper Xfrmr Size
#2 Cu Min. 500 kVA 1-0
2/0 Cu Min. 1500 kVA 1-0
O (A) 4/0 Cu Min. 2500 kVA 1-0
(B) If only one tank connector is provided,
loop through.
#6 Cu 0
NOTE. Tank designs vary by
manufacturer and vintage. Some designs
O use eyebolt type case ground connectors.
(C) Ground the rack at both ends with TLS
lugs.
O
Top View
Platform Mounted Transformer Bank Grounding '`POM R
1�11A111P I-P-Y

Overhead Revised 01/22 20-04-61
Capacitor Bank with a Harmonic Suppression Reactor
At some locations the phone company may request that a harmonic suppression reactor be installed to
reduce interference, see page 04-05-04. The phone company will supply the reactor,but our crew must
install it.
Only a programmable
controller requires
a sensing insulator To sensing
insulator
base Bonding clip
Pole ground
Ground PT secondary,
PT case,arresters,and vacumn Connect pole ground
switch cases to rack and neutral to rack
(factory installed)' Secondary ground'
#6 Cu #4 Str Remove the neutral-
to-rack jomper
0 0
O® OO
o
Note.Inspect rack welds. 0
If continuity is questionable, ® 0
run#4 Str Cu around rack
through all rack ground lugs. Warning.Hot jumper!
Use#4 Cu and tubing.
Secondary Ground" Maintain at least 6"from
any grounded surfaces.
Neutral CT-Route the leads #4 Str
to the pole ground and neutral o
through the CT Do not route
cap arrester or transformer
grounds through the CT.
Cover hot jumpers,
bushings,and
arrester leads.
0
#6 Cu
#4 Str
0
* If the secondary is not
grounded,ground at the
junction box.
99PO u R� Capacitor Grounding
a.,oACORP­P11Y

20-04-62 Revised 01/22 Overhead
Capacitor Fixed Bank (Maintenance only)
For a can that fails,refer to section 17,
System Neutral
tL
If the rack does not have
a ground lug,use a bonding
clip on top mounting bolt.
Lor
System Neutral
6'Min. - �6'Min. -
System Neutral In Secondary Position System Neutral In Primary Position
Recloser and Sectionalizer Grounding 900 Ra

Overhead Revised 01/22 20-04-63
Recloser and Sectionalizer Grounding
1-0 Recloser or Sectionalizer
System Neutral
o Lo
O 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
System Neutral
6'Min. � 6'Min.
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
MMPO u R� Capacitor Grounding
A.IDACORP­P11Y

20-04-64 Revised 01/22 Overhead
3-0 Hydraulic Recloser or Sectionalizer
System Neutral
If rack does not have ground
lug,add TLS lug or bonding clip
on top mounting bolt
If rack does not have ground
System Neutral lug,add TLS lug or bonding clip
on top mounting bolt
6'Min. 6'Min.
System Neutral in Secondary Position System Neutral in Primary Position
Recloser and Sectionalizer Grounding "` R,,

Overhead Revised 01/22 20-04-65
3-0 Electronic Recloser or Sectionalizer
ki A---
00
No No
System Neutral
#6 Cu
Control Cabinet
Grounding Detail
Connect the Control Cabinet
Box and the Mounting
Hardware to the Pole Ground
#2
#6 Cu
#2
#2 Cu #2 Cu
Bonding clip
Cat. ID 5279
Control Cabinet
#2 Cu Mounting Bracket
RNPOW R� Recloser and Sectionalizer Grounding
A.IDACORP—Pa1Y

20-04-66 Revised 01/22 Overhead
3-0 Solid Dielectric Recloser
Keep short paths
from arresters to
case grounds.
0
0 0
0 o
o Loop pole ground through
all rack and case grounds
back to the neutral.
System Neutral 11
Control Cabinet
Grounding Detail
Connect the Control Cabinet
Box and the Mounting
Hardware to the Pole Ground #6 Cu
#6 Cu
#2 Cu #2 Cu
#2 Cu
Bonding clip
Cat.ID 5279
Control Cabinet
#2 Cu Mounting Bracket
Recloser and Sectionalizer Grounding "`�Ra

Overhead Revised 01/22 20-04-71
Pole Top Switches with Operating Handle Grounding
NOTE. Hookstick operated pole top
switches do not need a ground mat.
o ®o o ®o a @o
8
Do Not Extend the pole ground wire
past the neutral for fiberglass-base
switches.
Bonding clip
Cat. ID 5279
Wear rubber
gloves to
m operate!
y� Mounting bolt °
#2 Str Cu to #2 Str Cu to
ground mat ground mat
Copper braid to
operating rod
#2 Str Cu
#6 Cu
6'to 8'
"RM�W Pole-Top Switch Grounding

20-04-72 Revised 01/22 Overhead
Messenger Grounding
The NESC requires these to be effectively Caution. The messenger must not be
grounded(Rule 215C1).Anytime a grounding bonded to the pole ground and wire wrap
conductor exists, all messengers and the neutral where a"floating neutral"configuration is
must be connected to it(NESC Rule 920). employed. If a bond is needed where the
Since Idaho Power practice now is to ground neutral is floated,the messenger should
every pole unless the neutral is floated, be bonded directly to the neutral.
communications messengers should be bonded
at each pole.
System Neutral System Neutral
� O
F—
a o
Normal Bonding Configuration Floating Neutral Configuration
IDAHO
Messenger Grounding M Rry.
omP Y

Overhead Revised 01/22 20-05-01
Grounding Meters and Meter Bases
Metering 1-0 120/208V Network Meters
Grounding requirements vary, depending upon
who owns the meter base or cabinet. Securely attach the service
neutral to the customers'
Customer-Owned Meter Base or Cabinet. neutral
Where the customer owns the meter base,it
must be grounded as required by the National
Electrical Code. The inspection tag should
indicate that grounding has been done correctly. Customers'neutral
When installing a meter, or a service, check to Metallic service conduit
see that grounds are in place, tightly connected, must be bonded to the
and corrosion-free. meter enclosure —
Self-Contained Meters Customers'neutral to
service panel neutral
1-0 120/240V Meters bus and grounds
Jumper going to the
® ® ground bus must
_C)
® ® be connected to
Customers'neutral this terminal.
® 3-0 4-Wire Meters
Securely attach the service
neutral to the customers' Securely attach the service
neutral neutral to the customers'
neutral
Metallic service conduit
must be bonded to the
meter enclosure
Customers'neutral i
Metallic service conduit
must be bonded to the
meter enclosure
Bond neutral to
meter enclosure Jumper going to the
neutral or ground bus
must be connected to
this terminal a
Customers'neutral goes to a a
the service panel neutral
bus and grounds
Customers'neutral goes to
the service panel neutral
bus and grounds
"� R Grounding Meters and Meter Bases

20-05-02 Revised 01/22 Overhead
Company-Owned Meter Base Grounding. 1-0 3-Wire Circuit with Two CTs
When CT metering is required, Idaho Power
CT
usually owns the meter base or cabinet. Connect#10 THHN Cu en
Sec. Neutral CT
and#8 green
Cu equipment ground
NOTE. The NESC allows#12 Cu, to service neutral
minimum,as the grounding conductor for
instrument transformer cases and +
secondaries,but#8 Cu,minimum, is
required for other equipment. #8 green
Cu
Other national standards specify that instrument +
transformer secondaries be grounded at one
place only, and as near to the transformers as
practical.
#10 THHN Cu
CT Meter Bases CT Sec. Ground #10 Cu
1-0 3-Wire Circuit with One CT #s green Cu
bonded to a
meter base
Connect#10 THHN Cu CT #8 green Cu
secondary neutral and#8 green extends to _
CU equipment ground to customer ground
service neutral
3-0 4-Wire Circuit with CT Meter
+ #10 Connect#10 THHN Cu CT secondary
green Cu neutral and#8 green Cu equipment
ground to service neutral
#8 THHN Cu CT CT grounding will vary
secondary neutral depending on number of +
Cts and circuit configuration
#8 green Cu bonded #10 Cu
to meter base
#10 THHN Cu CT
secondary neutral wire
� #8 green Cu
#10 green Cu extends 8 equipment ground
to customer ground
Test switch grounding will
depend on number of Ct's
used. (Circuit shown is
4 wire Wye).
#10 Cu CT
secondary neutral
Keep equipment grounds
separate from CT ground.
If larger box is needed, #8 green Cu minimum
ground per next page. to customer ground
Grounding Meters and Meter Bases M Rry

Overhead Revised 01/22 20-05-03
Overhead-to-Overhead Primary Metering
8 4
CT&VT Grounding Detail
° ° #6 Grounded wire for all
A3 VT or CT secondary
circuits:
#10 THHN Cu for Cts,
#12 THHN Cu for Vts
To neutral
u � 00 0
#6 Cu loop from pole o o ° #6 Do not use this
ground through VT and To pole ground terminal
CT ground lugs and rack Vise connectors ground
ground lug to neutral
Junction
VT primary winding #6 box Ground CT and VT non-
polarity secondary leads
case ground at the junction box only
Junction Box Detail
#12 THHN VT secondary neutral
#10 THHN CT secondary neutral��
#12 Terminal block
#10
Inside Meter Cabinet #8 Cu to junction box grd lug
Grounding Detail #6 to pole grd \�
#2
#12 #10 THHN CT secondary neutral
#6 #10 to test switch in cabinet
or #12 THHN VT secondary neutral
#4 #2 #6 to test switch in cabinet
or
#4
0 External Meter Cabinet
#8 minimum Grounding Detail
to bonding studs
Bonding Clip
Detail
#2 Cu to
ground gridAfi
Door bond #10 THHN Cu CT #2 Use Cu vise connector.Scratch
secondary neutral through paint to make contact.
#2 to #12 THHN Cu VT
ground grid secondary neutral #2
#6 or
#4 for
795 neutral
"RNA W Grounding Meters and Meter Bases

20-05-04 Revised 01/22 Overhead
Overhead-to-Underground Primary Metering
Ff::i:NE
#6 CT&VT Grounding Detail
Grounded wire for all
3 VT or CT secondary
circuits:
Vise connector #10 THHN Cu for Cts,
#12 THHN Cu for Vts
0
o To neutral
o
Iz ...
O
---
0
#6 #6 #6
TLS lug Do not use this
Junction To pole ground terminal
Box ground
#6 Ground CT and VT non-
polarity secondary leads
at the junction box only
#2-1/0AI Primary Ile Junction Box Detail
2/0-350,750 AI #12 THHN VT secondary neutral
4/0- 1000 AI #10 THHN CT secondary neutral��
Ground metal riser pipe f#10 Terminal block
at the top bracket —#12 o g g g
#8 Cu to junction box grd lug
#6 to pole grd
#2
Inside Meter Cabinet #10 THHN CT secondary neutral
Grounding Detail to test switch in cabinet
#12 THHN VT secondary neutral
#10 #12 #6 to test switch in cabinet
#6 or
or #4
#4 #2
External Meter Cabinet
#8 minimum
Grounding Detail
0 to bonding studs
Bonding Cli
Detail #2 Cu to
ground grid
#2 Use Cu vise connector.Scratch
ch
through paint to make contact.
Door bond #10 THHN Cu CT
secondary neutral #2
#2 to #12 THHN Cu VT
ground grid secondary neutral
#6 or
#4 for
795 neutral
Grounding Meters and Meter Bases MPCIIMRry

Overhead Revised 01/21 20-06-01
Grounding Arresters, Luminaires and Fences
Arrester Grounding Luminaire Bracket Grounding
Arresters incorporate a ground lead isolator. If the All street light brackets are to be bonded to the
arrester is damaged by a severe lightning stroke or pole ground and system neutral so that they are
by sustained power-frequency over-voltage and effectively grounded. If a system neutral is not
current,the explosive element inside the isolator present,bond the mast arm and green wire to the
will ignite and the ground lead portion will neutral conductor supplied in the duplex wiring.
separate from the arrester.Allow slack in the
ground lead to avoid restricting the isolator Caution. Do not use wire nuts for
operation. connections.
Bond mast arm to pole ,
ground with#6 Cu
#6 At Duplex
Use PGs not j
wire nuts
Connect white wit— ---3#8 Cu THW/THWN insulated
to system neutral conductors furnished with fixture
RL--, (or second phase for
208V or 240V) Connect green wire
BANG! Connect black wire to pole ground
to(120V)phase
conductor
��IDiAHO
"RMIROn►ER. Grounding Arresters, Luminaires and Fences

20-06-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Fence Grounding
If an existing grounded fence is vandalized and Keep live parts at least 10'inside the fence for
needs to be repaired see the illustration below.New safety of the public. Warning signs are required.
construction should use either a platform-mounted See NESC Rules 110 and 124, and the Fences
installation or a pad-mounted transformer. Section 04-030 of the Stations Manual.A
platform-mounted installation or a pad-mounted
We do not need to ground public or private fences transformer might prove to be more practical.
along the right-of-way for distribution voltages. Otherwise, dead front construction utilizing URD
Where transmission lines are involved, see the cable and insulation or guards for the secondary
Transmission Manual,page 02-003-01. However, bushings might need to be provided.
there may be some instances where distribution
transformers are installed at ground level inside
fenced enclosures.The general grounding scheme
is provided below. Elevate hot parts above reach
or use guards inside the enclosure for safety of
workers.
Bond posts to
ground grid.
D
Elevate live parts 8'-8"to 9'-6"
D depending on voltage,or use
dead front construction and
guards.See NESC Rule 124.
D
D D= 10 feet for un-
guarded live parts.
0—
Warning signs are required. Gate must be bonded to the
See the Station Design Manual. ground grid.
Ground grid designed to limit step and touch potentials,
considering soil resistivity and fault current level at the
location. Gates,gateposts,fence fabric,equipment tanks,
and the system neutral must be bonded to the ground grid
as in substation grounding.
Grounding Arresters, Luminaires and Fences W@POI�iN Ra
AlIDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 06/20 21-00-01
Table of Contents
21- Secondary & Services
21-01-01 Secondary& Services 21-02-01 Secondary& Service Hardware
Secondary&Service Voltages 1-, 3-, and 4-Spool Secondary
Secondary Conductors Racks
Overhead Services Extension Bracket
Multiplex Cables Transformer Trainer Bracket
Secondary Supports 21-02-02 Porcelain Wireholders(House
21-01-02 Secondary Separations and Knobs)
Clearances Screw Hook
Secondary Ties and Sags Mid-span Clamp
Primary and Secondary Neutrals Secondary Breaker
and Grounding Secondary Spacers
Point of Attachment for Services 21-02-03 Tree Guard
21-01-03 Service Cable Supports Connectors, Clamps, Grips, and
Connection to Customer's Wiring Deadends
Connection and Reconnection of Formed Wire Spool Ties
Secondary and Service Wires Three-Phase Disconnect Switch
Connection to Transformer
Secondary Terminals 21-03-01 Overhead Services Designs
21-01-04 Recommended Use of Aluminum Scope
Multiplex Service Cables Ownership and Maintenance
21-01-05 Recommended Use of Open Wire Responsibility
Aluminum Weatherproof Meter Location
Service Conductors 21-03-02 Meter Base Requirements
21-03-03 Service Routes
21-03-04 Mid-span Service Drop
Maximum Service Lengths
Design Load for Dwellings
21-03-05 Design Load for non-Dwellings
Service Conductor Size
Voltage Drop
Voltage Flicker
`p" AHO
pR� Table of Contents
M­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 12/19 21-01-01
Secondary & Services
Secondary & Service Voltages Multiplex Cables
This section covers secondaries in the voltage Triplex cable consists of a bare neutral-
range 0 to 600 volts, and services rated 0 messenger and two 600-volt polyethylene
through 2,400 volts. insulated aluminum conductors. Company use is
generally limited to these sizes: #6, (for lighting
Secondary Conductors and sign services),#2, 2/0, and 4/0.
Quadruplex cable consists of a bare neutral-
Secondary conductors maybe either bare, open messenger and three 600-volt polyethylene
wires or multiplex cables.The choice depends insulated conductors.This cable is used on
upon span length and load requirements. Bare three-phase services up to and including 480
wire can be pulled to higher tensions,permitting volts.At least one of the insulated conductors is
longer spans than what is possible with marked with one or more ridges or stripes to
multiplex cable. Both 2/0 ACSR and 336.4 AAC allow for identification of the"wild leg"on
are commonly used for open wire secondaries. delta-connected secondary and services.
Multiplex secondaries are the same as the Commonly used sizes include#2,2/0, and 4/0.
service cables listed below.
Refer to Section 10-01 for additional Secondary Supports
information on wire and cable characteristics Secondary circuits will generally be supported in
and Catalog IDs. vertical configuration.Three-spool and four-
spool secondary racks, insulated clevises,
Overhead Services extension brackets,upset bolt neutral brackets,
and eye bolts are common support hardware.
In general, overhead services will be multiplex
cable. All vertical racks shall be attached to poles by at
least two through bolts. On deadend racks
Open covered conductors may occasionally be supporting 2/0 and larger conductors,use an
used for a service wire to supply a large load, or additional bolt for the inside conductors.
where service voltage is above the multiplex
cable rating. Preferred aluminum open wire When secondary phases are added to an
service sizes are 2/0,4/0, and 500 kcmil. existing neutral only,the bracket should
usually be replaced with a secondary rack.
When one or two conductors are to be added
to an existing secondary, each new
conductor should be supported on an
insulated clevis below or above the vertical
rack.
"`�R. Secondary & Services
M­­.m 'Y

21-U 1-02 Revised 12/19 Overhead
Deadend multiplex cable using wedge clamps. Neutral conductors are commonly supported on
Slack tensions must be used because of the gray or white spool insulators. Brown spool
clamp strength rating. For 2/0 ACSR and 336 insulators are normally used to support the phase
AAC open wire secondaries, deadend each conductors.This practice is not always possible
conductor on a separate eyebolt using a primary due to availability problems with gray or white
deadend clamp(bolted or automatic). Insulate insulators.
the hot legs with one"bell"suspension insulator.
Wire loop deadends may be used when The neutral conductor of each secondary circuit
deadending copper secondaries. shall have multiple ground connections. See
Section 20 for details.
Secondary Separations and
Clearances The primary neutral or common neutral
conductor of an energized primary circuit shall
Secondary rack conductor separations are not be opened or cut unless it is bypassed by a
normally 8".When greater vertical separation is temporary conductor sized as large as the
required, as in spans longer than 250' single common neutral.
spool insulated clevises shall be used. Refer to
page 03-10-02 for more information. The neutral should be sized to be at least one
half that of the phase conductor.Where
Secondary rack extensions shall be used to unbalanced loads are probable,the neutral
provide clearance or climbing space not should be full size.
obtainable with racks alone. Refer to page
03-11-01 for additional information. The frame and mounting hardware of a
secondary rack shall not be grounded. For
Secondary Ties further information on grounding practices,refer
to Section 20.
Preformed and wire ties for secondary Point of Attachment for Services
conductors are described in Sections 09-05 and
09-06 respectively. On angle poles,the
conductors shall be tied to that side of the spool In general,the point of attachment of a service
so that the strain is directly on the spool and not drop shall have at least 12'vertical clearance
on the tie wire. above ground and shall be high enough to
provide other Code clearances. Refer to Section
Primary and Secondary Neutrals and 03 for other clearance requirements.
Grounding Unless impractical because of structure
With a multi-grounded primary circuit,the problems, service heads should be located
neutral should be common to both the primary above the point of attachment of the service-
and secondary circuits, and be located in the drop conductors. For drip loops on the
secondary position.The neutral conductor shall individual conductors to prevent moisture
always occupy the top position of a vertical entering the conductor insulation and service
secondary circuit.The conductor which has the equipment. Service-entrance conductors
highest voltage to neutral shall be in the lowest shall be connected to service-drop
position. conductors below the level of the service
head.
Secondary & Services '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/19 21-01-03
The service head may be located not more than Connection to Customer's Wiring
24" from the point of attachment of the service-
drop conductors.The service wires shall be Suitable connectors for connecting the
separated from any exposed wiring on the load customer's wiring are listed in Section 08.
side of the meter by a minimum of 24". Maintain Proper conductor preparation and bi-metal
a minimum clearance of 12"between the service restrictions are also found in Section 08.
conductors and any communication conductors
attached to the same building or structure(see Connection and Reconnection of
04-03-07). Secondary and Service Wires
Service Cable Supports When connecting secondary and service wires,
the neutral wire shall always be connected
before the phase wires.When disconnecting
Deadend service cables as follows: wires of these circuits,the neutral wire must
♦ All multiplex: wedge clamp never be disconnected until all phase wires have
♦ 2/0 ALWP: wedge clamp been disconnected.
♦ 4/0,500 ALWP: Kellems grip Connection to Transformer Secondary
Where service cable grips are installed at Terminals
secondary racks, do not ground the rack frame
by a metallic contact between the grounded bale Do not connect aluminum conductors to the
and the frame. For services on the same side of secondary terminals of the transformer.Use a
the pole as the secondary rack, attach the service copper bussing conductor and make the
grip to the top neutral spool.Where this transition to aluminum secondary or service
attachment is not practical because of impaired conductors using parallel groove clamps.
clearances, an extra white or gray spool may Aluminum compression rods listed on page
sometimes be inserted just below the neutral 08-02-04 are an alternate means of connecting
spool, and the bail placed around this insulator. aluminum conductor to transformer secondary
terminals.
When a service attaches to a pole on the
opposite side from a secondary rack,the service Refer to page 18-09-01 for busing wire sizes.
grip may be attached to an insulated clevis or to
an eyebolt mounted on the pole with a 2" With more than two multiplex services,run
minimum separation to any hardware. a weatherproof copper bus from the
transformer terminals to a secondary rack.
Service cables shall generally be pulled up by Make service connections to this bus with
hand with initial tension as low as practical.The aluminum parallel groove clamps.
tension in these insulated conductors resulting
from heavy ice build-up may reach values
several times the stringing tension and;with
either excessive span length or initial tension,
will reach damaging values.
"`�R. Secondary & Services
M­­.m 'Y

21-01-04 Revised 12/19 Overhead
For one or two multiplex services on the transformer pole, make service connections through short
lengths of copper conductor placed in the transformer terminals.
At transformer installations without secondary conductor spans, support multiplex services, where
practical,by fastening their deadend clamps to eyebolts or eyenuts mounted on the pole. Extension
brackets may be used to gain clearance and climbing space.
Be aware of the climbing space requirements shown on page 03-11-01.
Recommended Use of Aluminum Multiplex Service Cables
Phase Neutral Maximum
Conductor Conductor Span Service Maximum
Size Size (Feet) Voltage Load Typical Application
Triplex Cable
#6 #6 ACSR 120/240 V Street lighting circuits,signs
#2 #2 120/240 V 22 kVA All residences
2/0 2/0 120/240 V 40 kVA Large commercial loads
4/0 2/0 ACSR 120/240 V 50 kVA Large commercial loads
Quadruplex Cable
#2 #2 75 - 100* 240 V 3W 45 kVA Balanced three-phase service
240 V 4W 110 amp Max current in phases serving 10load
240 V 30 hp Irrigation pump motor
480 V 3W 90 kVA Balanced 30 service
..............................................................................................................4.8.0 V...................7.5 h.p...................1rrigation.P.u.!7!P..motor.............................................................
...... .... .. ...
2/0 1/0 240 V 4W 175 amp Max current in phases serving 10load
480......V...................100..h.p................1 rr i.g ati o n.p.uAmp..mp to r.............................................................
........ ........ ...
4/0 2/0 480 V 125 hp Irrigation pump motor
NOTES:
* Because of voltage drop and starting currents:
• Where the service is directly off the transformer structure,the larger of the two span lengths maybe used.
• Where the service is from a secondary,the shorter span limit should be used.
• Where the service exceeds these limits,use the next larger size cable.
• Where long services are proposed,the requirements of sag,ground clearance,tension,and guying must
always be resolved.
Conductors for irrigation pump service are de-rated about 25% on account of continuous loading,frequent
overloads,and high ambient temperatures.
Secondary & Services W.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 12/19 21-01-05
Recommended Use of Open Wire Aluminum Weatherproof Service Conductors*
Single-Phase Circuits
240 Volts
kVA Amps Service t
75 313 1/500 W P
100 417 1/500 W P
167 696 1/500 W P
250 1042 3/500 W P
Three-Phase Circuits
kVA 208 Volts 240 Volts 480 Volts 2400 Volts
or hp Amps Service t Amps Service t Amps Service t Amps Service t
50 139 Qx 120 Qx 60 Qx 12 2/0 W P
75 208 Qx 180 Qx 90 Qx 18 2/0 W P
100 278 4/0 W P 241 4/0 W P 120 Qx 24 2/0 W P
125 347 1/500 W P 301 4/0 W P 150 Qx 30 2/0 W P
150 416 1/500 W P 361 1/500 W P 180 4/0 W P 36 2/0 W P
200 555 2/500 W P 481 1/500 W P 241 4/0 W P 48 2/0 W P
250 694 2/500 W P 601 2/500 W P 301 4/0 W P 60 2/0 W P
300 833 2/500 W P 722 2/500 W P 361 1/500 W P 72 2/0 W P
400 962 2/500 W P 481 1/500 W P 96 2/0 W P
500 601 2/500 W P 120 2/0 W P
600 722 2/500 W P 144 2/0 W P
700 842 2/500 W P 168 2/0 W P
750 902 2/500 W P 180 2/0 W P
1000 241 4/0 W P
1500 361 1/500 W P
2000 481 1/500 W P
NOTES:
* On three phase loads,the service neutral conductorwill notberequired to carryfull phasecurrent;hence,itwill not
be necessary to parallel neutral conductors on installationswhere the phase conductors are paralleled.As ageneral
rule, on a three-phase service, either Wye or Delta, the neutral conductor may be sized for one-half the current
capacity of the phase conductors.Where unbalanced loads are probable, use a full-sized neutral. Refer to page
18-09-01 fo r tran sfo rmer bus i n g co n d uctors.
t 1/500 means 1 -500 kcmil weatherproof conductors per phase.
2/500 means 2 -500 kcmil weatherproof conductors paralleled per phase.
3/500 means 3 -500 kcmil weatherproof conductors paralleled per phase.
Qx means use Quad ruplex cable(see page 21-01-04).
WP means weatherproof conductor.
EMI Secondary & Services

Overhead Revised 06/20 21-02-01
Secondary & Service Hardware
This section provides a pictorial guide to the Extension Bracket
hardware presently used by IPCo for secondaries
and services. More information is provided in
the Materials Manual.
1-, 3-, and 4-Spool Secondary Racks o
0
Extension brackets are used on secondary racks
or insulated clevises where needed to clear
obstructions or to provide climbing space.They
are also used to provide added clearance to 480
volt secondary conductors.
o Cat.ID Short Description CU
5222 BRACKET GALV EXT SEC 9" DSRX9
The one-spool secondary rack, also called an
insulated clevis, is used for supporting or dead- Transformer Trainer Bracket
ending secondary conductors. It also can be used
to provide for an additional conductor above or
below an existing three-spool rack.Three-and
four-spool racks are used for open wire single-
and three-phase secondaries. Conductor spacing
is 8". On spans longer than 250', substitute three
or four one-spool racks spaced 12" apart. Brown A transformer trainer bracket is made to clamp
spool insulators are used for the energized over the rolled edge at the bottom of a
conductors;white or gray are generally used for transformer. It is used to support transformer
the neutral. secondary leads 350 kcmil and larger, and for
the wild leg on a wye-delta bank. It is furnished
Cat.ID Short Description CU with a gray spool insulator.
5354 RACK 1-SPOOL W/O INS DSR1
5355 RACK 3-SPOOL W/O INS DSR3 Cat. ID Short Description CU
5357 RACK 4-SPOOL W/O INS DSR4
4722 INS SPOOL SEC BRN 5356 BRACKET TF SEC TRAINER DTTB
4723 INS SPOOL SEC GRAY
POWER. Secondary & Service Hardware
M­­.m 'Y

21-02-02 Revised 06/20 Overhead
Porcelain Wireholders (House Knobs) Secondary Breaker
*L
o
00
Two sizes of porcelain wireholders, also referred
to as"house knobs"are listed below. Secondary breakers are typically used to isolate
a section of open-wire secondary so that an
Cat. ID Short Description additional distribution transformer may be cut
4720 INS PORC W/2"WOOD SCREW into the line.
4721 INS PORC W/4"WOOD SCREW
Cat.ID Short Description CU
Screw Hook 4724 BREAKER SEC 6-3/0 AL/CU DSCBK
TON Secondary Spacers
gu_
The screw hook may be driven into the pole for
attachment of a temporary service. Permanent
services should be deadended on a eyebolt.This
hook is also used to attach triplex service Secondary spacers are made of rigid black PVC.
conductor to the wood side of a house. It is used They are used to maintain proper conductor
as an alternate to the above porcelain wireholder. spacing on longer secondary spans, and are used
to correct conductor slapping in high wind areas.
Cat.ID Short Description They are easily installed by simply snapping the
5330 HOOK SCREW DEADEND 7/16' x S' center loop in place and twisting the top and
bottom coils of the spacers around the
Mid-span Clamp conductors.Two sizes are listed below. Other
sizes may be special ordered.
Cat.ID Short Description Color Code
4282 SPCR SEC 2/0-4/0 8" Red
4283 SPCR SEC #442 12" White
The mid-span clamp may be used for mid-span
service drops coming off a primary neutral
conductor.
Cat. ID Short Description
44043 MID-SPAN CLAMP F/#4-336 NEUTRAL
Secondary & Service Hardware '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 06/20 21-02-03
Tree Guard Three-Phase Disconnect Switch
PVC tree guard is designed to protect bare and
covered conductor against mechanical abrasion
caused by tree limbs, etc. Several sizes are listed
below.
Cat.ID Short Description
4702 GUARD TREE 2 TX
4703 GUARD TREE 2/0 TX&#2 QX �4.=
4704 GUARD TREE 4/0 TX& 2/0 QX
4705 GUARD TREE 4/0 QX
Connectors, Clamps, Grips, and
Deadends
Connectors, clamps, grips, and deadends used on
secondaries and services are described in
Section 08.
Formed Wire Spool Ties
Formed ties used on secondaries and services are
described in Section 09-05. Instructions for
preparing wire ties are in Section 09-06.
This manually-operated three-phase disconnect
switch is pole-top mounted and used for
isolating service voltage to a customer's meter
base and equipment.Atypical application would
be at an overhead transformer bank with
multiple services feeding from it.This switch
would enable the disconnection of an individual
service to be accomplished from ground level
with the use of a fuse stick.The pole-top switch
is housed in a lightweight aluminum enclosure.
Cat. ID Short Description
1628 SW SEC MLT SERV DISC
"`ppR. Secondary & Service Hardware
M­­.m 'Y

Overhead Revised 03/21 21-03-01
Overhead Service Designs
Scope The builder or homeowner owns and maintains
the following:
Decisions regarding the location,route, length,
♦ Meter base and its connections.
and size of overhead services and equipment
should be done using good engineering ♦ Wiring and electrical connections on the
judgment.This section describes the design customer side of the meter.
paramaters to make those decisions. ♦ Conduit for the service mast and the
Refer to the Customer Requirements for Electric service entrance cap.
Service document on the Methods&Materials ♦ Conductor between the connections at the
home page for details regarding ownership, drip loop and the meter base.
maintenance, and design.
Meter Location
Contact Methods&Materials when a 3-0
temporary service is needed. These are rare and Locate the meter toward the front and side
are not addressed in Idaho Power manuals since of the house or structure closest to the nearest
each application is different. Idaho Power facility that serves that customer to
ensure access for Idaho Power.
Ownership and Maintenance
Responsibility Alternate locations.Another location might be
behind the fence on the side of the house or
structure closest to the nearest Idaho Power
Any facilities or equipment installed by Idaho facility that serves the customer or at the back of
Power,or its authorized agent, is owned and
maintained by Idaho Power. the house or structure.
Idaho Power owns and maintains the following: Nearest Pole
(rear lot line construction)
♦ Service conductor between Idaho Power's 0
pole and the connections at the drip loop.
Alternate
♦ Connections at the drip loop meter locations
♦ Meter Fence
M
M
M
Preferred
Meter Location
O \ NaarPGt PnIP
"`�R. Overhead Service Designs

21-03-02 Revised 03/21 Overhead
Meter Base Requirements Multiple meter bases must be installed so that
the center of the lowest meter is at least 4'-0"
The meter base must be located on the outside of above the finished grade.The center of the
an outside structure wall so it's accessible to highest meter must be no more than 6'-6" above
Idaho Power. Exceptions must be approved in the finished grade. Exceptions to these heights
advance by Idaho Power. must be approved in advance by Idaho Power.
The meter base must be installed with the center
of the meter between 4'-0" (Y-0"in heavy snow
areas)and 6'-0" above finished grade.
The point of attachment must be high enough to 7�A
maintain the proper vertical clearance for the
span of wire, see OH 03-03-01.
480-volt services and those with open wire
conductor require greater clearances.
Multiple 0 0 0 0
NOTE.The actual installed height of the Meter 0 0 0 0
service conductor must exceed the minimum Bases o 0 0 0 6'-6"
clearance shown on page 03-03-01 to allow 4'-0"
for the High Temperature Sag Adder
shown on OH 03-04-02.
For typical services with an attachment at Idaho Multiple Meter Bases
Power's pole that is appreciably higher than the CT meter base requirements.
customer's end,the customer's attachment point
should be at least 1'-0" higher than the required
clearance to allow for the conductor sag and the
high temperature sag adder. Z4 1"Metallic Rigid
Conduit and Entrance
Cap Provided and
When the attachment heights are approximately Installed by Customer
the same, allow at least Y-0" for sag.
CTs and Meter Wiring
Guy the Mast Provided and Installed
as Needed by IPCo Meter Base Provided
by IPCo and Installed
Customer
by Customer
Customer's Bond to Customer's
Disconnect —_Disconnect or Ground
Device � with#8 Cu(min)
6-0"(max.)
2"(min.)Conduit Ground - 4'-0"(min.)
Recommended per NEC
Point of attachment
must be high enough to
maintain proper service
wire clearance above 1-0 and 3-0 Commercial CT Service
the finished grade
V-0"(max.)
4'-0"(min.)
Finished Grade
Overhead Service Designs 9013 R".

Overhead Revised 03/21 21-03-03
Idaho Power 1. That the installation is in compliance with
Service Conductor Customer's Wire
Idaho Power requirements.
2. That Idaho Power will be indemnified from
1"Metallic Rigid
Conduit and Entrance any liability for injury or death of persons or
Cap Provided and
Installed by Customer damage to property that results from any
CTS
and Meter Wiring Pro failure of the customer's ole.
Provided and Installed 1�
by IPCo
Meter Base Provided by IPCo
I�18►� Rake pole away
and Installed by Customer conductor from strain
Ground Rod and Wire
Provided and installed \
by Customer 6'-0"(max.) Conduit must go
a'-o"(min.) to top of pole
Class 6 Pole(min)Provided
and Installed by Customer
1-0 and 3-0 Residential and Irrigation CT Service
Customer-owned pole
Service Routes A- 35'(min)
. Class 5(min)
A. Full length treated or
The service conductor must not cross an butt treated(s'min)
adjacent property without an easement. O Location of pole must be
confirmed by Idaho Power
Avoid routes that require the conductor to pass Ground meter
over any building roof or a portion of a roof, base per NEC
except that the service may overhang up to 6' of
the eave to reach the service entrance mast.
Mound backfill to
Crossing a private road or driveway is 'drain water from pole
acceptable if proper clearances are met.
6"
Alleys.Although most alleys are right-of-ways, 7 Tamped"Select"backfill
crossing an alley directly to a customer mast is 24" (No rubbish, no ice,
� no rocks larger than 4°)
acceptable if proper clearances are met,to 6,
include: over the alley, on the property, and the
standard mast height requirements found in the 2
Overhead Service Requirmeents. Otherwise 24"
follow guidance for road right-of-ways.
Key pole with 18��
Avoid crossing road right-of-ways. rocks as shown
Use an Idaho Power structure on both sides of Treated
the roadway and cross with secondary 6long
conductor. 4"x4"Post
When it is necessary to cross a road right-of-way
with a service,the customer must install a
service pole meeting all Idaho Power Alternate method
requirements.The customer must also sign a of keying the pole
document certifying the following: Pole Installation Requirements
for Crossing a Road Right-of-Way
"`�R. Overhead Service Designs

21-03-04 Revised 03/21 Overhead
Mid-span Service Drop Maximum Service Lengths
Use a mid-span clamp and lashing rods to The maximum allowable span length of the
suspend overhead#6 duplex, and#2 and 2/0 TX service conductor is limited by the structural
service conductors from a primary. strength of the support at the customer's
attachment point and the conductor's sag which
increases with span length.
Mid-span 1-0 Maximum 3-0 Maximum
Up to 40' /Clamp Wire Span Length Wire Span Length
�5'or6'� f 2 Tx 100' 2 Qx 80'
740" R 30" 2/0 Tx 80' 2/0 Qx 60'
Lashing Rod
(mid span) 4/0 Tx 60' 4/0 Qx 50'
G 500 WP *40'
�, * Pole key or down guy may be required
o.
NOTE. The mid-span clamp must be within ` Design Load for Dwellings
40'of a pole to minimize clearance changes eSI g
in the service drop conductor.
Use the square footage of the dwelling in
combination with whether electricity or gas is
used for heating to calculate the design load.
Assume that gas heat dwellings have air
conditioning.
Mid-span Service Drop NOTE. Most residential loads have a power factor
The mid-span clamp fits all neutral wires up to between 0.95 and 1.0. This means that the real
336. The lashing rods are sized to match both power(kW)and the capacity required to serve the
load (kVA)are approximately equal and any
the neutral wire and the service conductor—use difference can be ignored.
the correct lashing rod to get a good fit.
Cat. ID Short Description CU Single-family Houses and Duplexes
46 Electric Heat:
399 #4 NEUTRAL W/#4 NEUTRAL W/#6 DX None < 3000 ft'kW Demand =0.0013 X (sq.ft.)+9.9
46400 #4 NEUTRAL W/2/0 TX None ft
46 > 3000 'kW Demand =0.0013 X (sq.ft.)+11.0
00 TX None —
&2/0 NEUTRAL W/#2 TX Gas Heat
<4500 ft'kW Demand =0.0012 X (sq.ft.)+6.6
46401 2/0 NEUTRAL W/2/0 TX None
464 2/0 NEUTRAL W/ DX None >4500 ft'kW Demand =0.0015 X (sq.ft.)+6.5
—
&336 NEUTRAL W/#2 TX
46437 336 NEUTRAL W/#6 DX None Multi-family Buildings
46402 336 NEUTRAL W/2/0 TX None (3 or more units with adjoining walls)
Electric Heat:
Once the mid-span clamp is in place on the kW Demand = 0.0083 X (sq.ft.)+0.4
neutral, a service deadend clamp can be attached Gas Heat
to support the service wire as it angles off to the kW Demand = 0.0035 X (sq.ft.)+ 1.8
meter. Maintain 30" separation from any
communication cable in the middle of the span. Multi-story,Multi-family Buildings
(3 or more units with adjoining walls and
Service conductor length limitations apply to floors/ceilings)
mid-span taps because of sag and tension Electric Heat:
considerations. Since the service drop cannot be kW Demand = 0.0083 X (sq.ft.)— 1.6
as tight as usual,there will be extra sag to Gas Heat
consider. Check that proper clearance over the kW Demand = 0.0035 X (sq.ft.)+ 1.8
ground is maintained.
Overhead Service Designs W.—POWER,,

Overhead Revised 03/21 21-03-05
Design Load for non-Dwellings Service Conductor Size
Estimate the customer's summer and winter Use the following table as a guideline to select
peak loads. Use the larger of the two values for the size of the service conductor.A smaller sized
design purposes. Be sure to divide the kW by conductor for a short service might be used, if
the power factor to get the kVA.Most 3-0 the cable's maximum rating is not exceeded.A
power factors are between 0.85 and 0.90. longer service may require a larger conductor to
meet the voltage drop criteria.
kW
WA =
power f actor Conductor Design Max. Continuous
Size Load Range WA Amps
Calculate the design load using information 1-0 1201240V Tx Conductors
supplied by the customer and equipment that 2 Tx 0 to 25 kW 47 195
runs during peak load. 2/0 Tx 25.1 to 40 kW 72 300
4/0 Tx 40.1 to 60 kW 97 405
Convert the kW demand into WA. This value is 1-0 2401480V Tx Conductors
typically between 60% and 80% of the main 2 Tx 0 to 50 kW 94 195
2/0 Tx 50.1 to 80 kW 144 300
fuse or breaker rating, see OH 25-03-02 for 4/0 Tx 80.1 to 120 kW 194 405
more information. 3-0 1201208V Qx Conductors
2 Qx 25.1 to 40 kW 63 175
Customer 3-0 WA 2/0 Qx 40.1 to 60 kW 101 280
Based On 60%of the Main Rating 4/0 Qx 60.1 to 75 kW 135 375
Common Estimated 3-0 Demand 3-0 2771480V Qx Conductors
Breaker Ratings 120/208 V 277/480 V 2 Qx 60.1 to 90 kW 145 175
100 amp 22 WA 50 WA 2/0 Qx 90.1 to 150 kW 233 280
200 amp 43 WA 100 WA 4/0 Qx 150.1 to 200 kW 312 375
400 amp 86 WA 200 WA
800 amp 173 WA 399 WA
1200 amp 259 WA 599 WA Voltage Drop
2000 amp 432 WA 998 WA
3000 amp 648 WA 1,496 WA See OH 25-03-04 for voltage drop calculations.
5000 amp 1,081 WA 2,494 WA
NOTE. The main fuse or breaker actually has three Voltage Flicker
elements (one per phase)—each with the same
rating. Voltage flicker occurs when motors, such as air
conditioning and heat pump units, start up.
Typically the flicker increases as the size of the
motor increases. Design new services with a
maximum voltage flicker of 4.5%to help
minimize customer complaints.
"` R, Overhead Service Designs

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-00-01
Table of Contents
22- Street and Area Lighting
22-01-01 Lighting Concepts 22-02-01 Design Information
Definitions General
Lighting Terms Design Considerations
Color Temperature 22-02-02 LED Catalog IDs and Wattages
Color Rendering Index(CRI) Mast Arms
Fluorescence Mast Arm Clearances,
22-01-02 Luminous Efficacy 22-02-03 Street Lighting
Lumen Depreciation vs. Lamp 22-02-04 Intersections
Life Minor Roadways
History of Streetlighting Major Roadways
Electric Lighting Sources 22-02-05 Cul-de-sacs and Railroads
22-01-03 Luminaires 22-02-06 Area Lighting
Barnyard or NEMA Head Illumination Options
Cobra Head Single Light Installations
Floodlights 22-02-07 Mounting Height Adjustments
Light Distribution Patterns 22-02-08 Multiple Light Installations
22-01-04 Luminaire Classification System 22-02-9 Floodlight Design
Comparing HID and LED Sources 2X by 4X Rule of Thumb
22-01-05 "Dark Sky"Requirements 22-02-10 Voltage Drop
LED Changeout Program
Customer Satisfaction
Technology Continued on next page
22-01-06 Environmental Stewardship
Industry Trends
Replacement Strategy
Rates&Regulatory
What to do with Increased
Efficacy
22-01-07 Wattage Labels
Additional Possibilities with LED
IDiAHO
%POWER. Table of Contents

22-00-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
22-03-01 Installation Details 22-04-01 Maintenance
General General
Luminaire Installation Output Depreciation
Voltage Requirements Cleaning
Electrical Connections 22-04-02 Troubleshooting
22-03-02 Mast Arms Light Fails to Operate
Grounding and Bonding Light Stays On
Mast Arm Clearances Light Cycles on and Off or
22-03-03 Mast Arm Clearances on Joint-use Flickers
Distribution Pole Customer Concerns
22-03-04 Mast Arm Clearances Near Light is too Bright
Communication Cables Light is not Bright Enough
22-03-05 Luminaire at the End of a Duplex Light Trespass
Circuit
Luminaire in the Middle of a
Duplex Circuit
22-03-06 Luminaire Mounted Near a
Secondary Source
Luminaire With an Underground
Source
22-03-07 Photoelectric Controls
Photoelectric Control Socket
Adjustment
Date Coding
22-03-08 Luminaire Adjustments
Pole Labeling
22-03-09 Initial Check for Operation
Shielding Options
Table of Contents RNPOMR,.
nn i,u company

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-01-01
Lighting Concepts
Definitions
Effective Projected Area(EPA)—The Color Rendering Index(CRI)
equivalent surface area of a luminaire for wind
loading on the support brackets. The color rendering index of a light source is a
measure of the degree of color shift that objects
Foot-candle(fc)—A unit of illuminance. One undergo when illuminated by the light source.A
foot-candle is one lumen per square foot(lm/ft2). higher number indicates less color shift with a
CRI of 100 having the least color shift or being
Illuminating Engineering Society(IES)— the most"accurate."
Provides lighting and illumination standards for
the lighting industry.Light output from aaai
luminaire is modeled using the". ies"file format AN-090- *0
standard for light distribution patterns.
Lamp—A replaceable light source such as a L�4
"light bulb". Increasing CRI
Lumen(lm)—The total amount of visible light Fluorescence
emitted by a source. Light sources with more
lumens will provide higher light levels. The process of obtaining"white"light from a
blue LED chip requires a yellow phosphor
Lighting Terms coating to be applied to the chip.The phosphor
emits a yellow photon in a process called
Color Temperature "fluorescence."The more phosphor that is
applied,the warmer the LED appears,but at a
Color temperature describes the appearance of reduced efficiency.
the light provided by a source.The color
temperature of a light source is assigned using Blue Light Blue+Yellow=White Light
the basis of correlated color temperature(CCT) Less Wasted Photons Reduced Efficiency
measured in degrees Kelvin(K)on a scale from
1,000K to 10,000K.Pm p po
L S.dlsmureWhile Whlt1 H l4e �r 00K1 Sre00K 70Wull
K Phosphor
1700K 2200K 3000K 4000K coating
ceggome HlphPressure son col R&IM cen,ere cDmauyly Blue diode
1t500K 2 00K 2700K 3500K M41100Kh1 55WK BSOOK
< Warmer Cooler
3000K 4000K 5000K
Most electric lighting sources fall somewhere on
the scale from 2000K to 6500K.Warmer
(yellow)light has a lower Kelvin temperature
and cooler(blue) light has a higher Kelvin
temperature.
"RNA W Lighting Concepts

22-01-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Luminous Efficacy History of Street Lighting
Luminous efficacy or just"efficacy"is the ratio The invention of the"arc lamp"in the early
of lumen output of a light source to the wattage 1800's led to the first electric streetlights but by
input and is commonly expressed in lumens per the mid 1900's Idaho Power and others used
watt. mostly mercury vapor lamps. Idaho Power
750 phased out these lights in favor of high-pressure
sodium(HPS) or metal halide(MH) lights by
1990; and in 2019,Idaho Power began
transitioning to light-emitting diode(LED)
100 Sodium luminaires.
Hi ry pressure
Fluorescent
Metal Halide v
Electric Lighting Sources
s
Hal en There are four common sources of electric
Incandescent lighting in use today:
1920 is" 1960 1900 2000 2020 ♦ Incandescent lamps utilize a tungsten
filament that is heated in a vacuum and
Efficacy of Light Sources by Year typically will last 1,000-2,000 hours. These
Lumen Depreciation vs.Lamp Life lamps are usually warmer in color
temperature and have a high CRI.
Lumen depreciation is the lumen output of a
light source lost over time. High-intensity ♦ Fluorescent lamps consist of cathodes inside
discharge(HID) lamp life is when 50%of lamps a glass tube that ionize mercury vapor and
will typically last 5,000-15,000 hours. These
fail; or cycle on-and-off. LEDs are given an L70
rating for when the lumen output reaches 70%of lamps come in a variety of color
its initial value. temperatures and usually have 80-90 CRI's.
'°°% ♦ High-intensity discharge(HID) lamps utilize
LED
F%o s mercury, sodium, or metal halides in an arc
50%Lamp tube and typically last 10,000-20,000 hours.
70% � Failure
••;5, VO Rating The color temperature of these lamps varies
°0% by the type of elements used in the arc tube.
3
0% Mercury lamps are very cool with a CRI of
around 50,while sodium lamps are warm
°% .3 with a CRI of 25 or lower.Metal Halide
'°% lamps are in between with CBI's of 75 and
10%
higher.
o —
o 20,000 40,000 so,o°° a°,°°° 100,000
Lumen Depreciation and Lamp Life ♦ Light-emitting diodes(LED) are solid state
devices that produce light from a
semiconducting material and can last
100,000 hours or more. LEDs are available
from approximately 2700K to 5000K and
have CRI's of 70 or higher.
HO
Lighting Concepts MPOWERry
a,oa oaa omPa y

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-01-03
Luminaires
A luminaire is a complete lighting unit Floodlights
consisting of a light source and electrical
components within a housing designed to Floodlights can be used for many different
distribute light. It's also known as a"light lighting applications including parking lots,
fixture." general security,building facade, and sports or
recreational lighting. Because they can be
The light source can be a lamp or LEDs. The "aimed",they provide better uniformity,thus
electrical components can include a ballast and a decreasing the possibility of extremely dark
starter or driver depending on the light source. patches occurring in the lighting area. Flood
lights are not Dark Sky compliant and should not
There are many luminaire types available. For be used in areas with this requirement.
simplicity and economical purposes, only three
basic types are available for use on the Idaho
Power system;barnyard/NEMA, cobra head,
and floodlights.
Barnyard or NEMA Head .. ..
This type is used for off-street-area-lighting
(OSL)to provide illumination for barnyards,
service areas, storage facilities, or other general
spaces. It is typically applied to satisfy a single
luminaire application in which no set boundaries
or level of illumination have been specified.
Light Distribution Patterns
Specific light distribution patterns, as defined by
the Illuminating Engineering Society(IES),are
typically used to light individual area types.
Accuracy of LED photometrics allows more
control over light distribution and has more
Cobra Head precise distribution patterns than HID sources
with less light trespass; see OH 22-03-01 for
Cobra head luminaires are used for street and more information.
area lighting applications. It's the only luminaire
offered that's suitable for street lighting, even
though they may be used in area lighting
applications.
i
" Q IDAHO
RLWOMW Lighting Concepts

22-01-04 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Luminaire Classification System Comparing HID and LED Sources
LED luminaries are classified by the`BUG" An HID lamp relies on the reflector and
rating system: refractor assembly to direct the light in the
♦ Backlight—Light projected behind the required pattern.A large portion of the lamp's
luminaire. light output is lost or uncontrolled.
♦ Uplight—Light emitted above the bottom ♦ Lumen values represent light output from
horizontal edge of the luminare(zero uplight the bare lamp
required for Dark Sky compliance. ♦ 100W HPS lamp z 9500 lumens(95 lm/W)
♦ Glare—Light emitted forward of the luminaire. ♦ Requires a"starter"with tapped(fixed)
input voltage
ler
♦ 80% efficient
u+
♦ 90%power factor
1W ter
er er
tA
sr.
so°
aH
er,
� er
301-
e' With LEDs the light is already traveling in the
desired direction and the small point source
The BUG rating is a scale from 0 to 5: allows for precise optical control with minimal
♦ 0 is the least amount of light projected and waste.
♦ 5 is the most amount of light projected in a ♦ Lumen values represent the output from the
particular direction. luminaire
♦ 32W LED z 4000 lumens(125 lm/W)
♦ Utilizes a"driver"that auto-senses the input
voltage(120-277V)with a constant current
output
♦ 90% efficient
♦ 99%power factor
Lighting Concepts 99POWE R,

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-01-05
"Dark Sky" Requirements LED Changeout Program Drivers
The International Dark Sky Association stives to Cost Benefit
preserve dark sites through responsible lighting
practices.The Sawtooth National Forest north of The cost of LED luminaires is decreasing while
Hailey was designated as a Dark Sky Preserve. the cost of HPS lamps rises, and the longer life
Ordinances in the Wood River Valley,the of LEDs offer significant O&M savings.
Salmon area,Valley County and other
communities require compliance with the Planned maintenance for LED luminaires is
following Dark Sky Requirements: once during the expected 100,000-hour life of
the LED at approximately 12 years,but before
♦ Lighting is on only when needed using 20 years when the PE control reaches its
dusk-to-dawn photocells or a time clock. expected end-of-life.
♦ Light only the area that needs it and be no
brighter than necessary. Customer Satisfaction
♦ Eliminate upward directed light.Lighting Changing to LED lighting demonstrates a
must be fully shielded,pointing downward. commitment to energy efficiency and
Flood lighting or"drop glass"luminaires do environmental stewardship while offering a cost-
NOT qualify. effective street and area light option.
♦ Minimize blue light emissions by using
lighting with a 3000K or lower CCT. Except for floodlights,Idaho Power's LED
luminaries comply with American Medical
Examples of Acceptable/Unacceptable Lighting Fixtures Association(AMA) standards for community
Unacceptable/Discouraged Acceptable lighting and provide"Dark Sky Lighting"
FiaNrn tM1atp d..glare a°tl ligM°espass ipurestM1at Ntl tM1e li Ms°umammirnmizeglareaMlig�o-e-
° Zh options as required in portions of the service
territory.
`__ FUII DN°tt Fipurea
eltletl Fl°°mg^� " Technology
or F°alys^isbstl Fl°°tlllgM
wa°vs^iematl
® � M°uMc Wren" LED luminaries consumes approximately 60%
g�M1iatlatl aIl,aMa less energy and have a life expectancy of 4-6
B UnsM1ieltletl or .
°M� " times that of the HID sources they replace.The
changeover also reduces the number of active
�F1°„ys^�tlatlFi�YfB9 Cat. IDs for lights stocked by 50%.
DmpLens 8 S e-Lens Fixl
D exp°seE^ul I relraci°rulens
The technology of LED luminaires allows for
Oak future upgrades to fully utilize available
h.-da°ar,a s^Ftletl technology such as dimming or control systems
D° „
u ;g em�sn,° ao'la-a= that could increase energy savings, extend life,
D°sM1itl,tl sMeltletl
or increase public safety in the future.
r Fware la Foeeorawe F„Iryse ielaetl
FiM°raa e
Fi—
UmPT \\Ms tl
ws^ielaea wA U
Fb°tllight. smaltlatl r Fr
PAq FI°°°glYils 1°�
"��W Lighting Concepts

22-01-06 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Environmental Stewardship Rates & Regulatory
HID lamps are hazardous waste,while LEDs are The table below displays equivalency between
solid-state products and considered"electronic" the old HID and new LED rate structures:
instead of"universal"waste. LED luminaries do
not contain lead,mercury,or toxic heavy metals. LED"Equivalent" Rate Structure
HID Lamp Average LED Minimum
The CCT of LEDs provide improved color Type Lumens Wattage Lumens
rendering and more accurate light distribution 70W HPS 5,450 40W 3,600
for pedestrians and motorists while reducing 100W HPS 8,550 40W 3,600
nocturnal insect gatherings at streetlights. 20OW HPS 19,800 85W 7,200
250W HPS 24,750 140W 10,800
The lower maintenance requirements will reduce 40OW HPS 45,000 150W 18,000
carbon emissions due to fewer miles driven to 40OW MH 28,200 150W 18,000
perform maintenance.Also,the increased energy 1000W MH 88,000 30OW 32,000
efficiency is estimated to save almost 9,000
MWh annually. What to do with Increased Efficacy
Industry Trends Street and area lighting customers are billed a
flat monthly rate based on the input wattage of
Lighting manufacturers are discontinuing HID the luminaire at 4059 burn hours annually.As
luminaires. In accordance,most other utilities, lighting technology advances,new LED
municipalities, and highway districts are also luminaire will consume less watts for the same
converting to LED lighting for their streetlights. light output.
In addition,rare metals needed for HID lamps LED luminaires are expected to continue and
are becoming more difficult to obtain. improve their efficacy every few years.As new,
more efficient models become available many
Replacement Strategy factors associated with them will change,
Since different types of luminaries with varying including the following:
distribution patterns have been installed at ♦ Cat. ID numbers
different mounting heights,the replacement
program is using a"like-for-like" strategy. ♦ Wattage in the description of the luminaire
will also change
♦ Existing HID luminaries are replaced with ♦ Labeling on the luminaires may change even
similar LED luminaries based on the though the new Cat. ID still replaces the
wattage and light distribution pattern. same wattage HPS luminaire as an older LED
Cat. ID
♦ Luminaires that were placed incorrectly will ♦ Cat. IDs for discontinued LED luminaries
not be changed out, except for 4-way
intersections where the light is angled at 45° will be set to"NOPURCH."
into the intersection.These intersections will Follow these steps to calculate the wattage
receive a Type IV distribution,not a Type II. charged to customers:
♦ All street and fixed area lights have a CCT 1. Obtain the average wattage of all LEDs
of 3000K and floodlights are 4000K,which for each lumen package.
is not"Dark Sky"complaint. 2. Use the total number of lights for each
Cat. ID issued and multiply by the
wattage for that Cat ID.
3. Sum this for all Cat. IDs used for that
lumen output rating and divide by the
total units issued.
HO
Lighting Concepts MPOWERry
a,oa oRa.mPa y

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-01-07
Wattage Labels Additional Possibilities with LED
Luminaires are labeled with their"nominal" Idaho Power LED luminaries are specified with
wattage. These values will differ between HID (0-1OV)dimmable drivers which allow the light
and LED luminaires. On HID luminaires,the output to be adjusted.This option is not
wattage label will correspond to the first two available for use at this time but could be used to
digits of the lamp wattage.A 100W HPS light reduce light output or wattage,pending
will be labeled with a"10"and a 200W HPS restructuring of the rates.This feature would be
light will be labeled with a"20". available through the 7-pin PE control socket
with a different PE device.
LED luminaires are labeled by their input
wattage requirements rounded to the nearest 10
watts. For example,both the 28W,Type II
roadway light and 33W OSL that replace their
respective 100W HPS luminaires will be labeled
as"30LED" since both wattage numbers round
to 30 as the nearest multiple of 10.
"RM�W Lighting Concepts

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-02-01
Design Information
General Distribution Patterns. The IES distribution
patterns most associated with exterior lighting
Lighting design is an art as much as it is a are shown below:
science. It is beyond the scope of this section to
provide all the necessary information for
complex lighting design problems. However,
following the guidance provided will enable the
designer to apply Idaho Power's selection of
luminaires for simple lighting applications. Type II
Design Considerations
The basic objective of roadway lighting is to
enable those who use the roadways to see under
all types of weather conditions,thereby
improving traffic safety, effective traffic
movement,and pedestrian safety.Area lighting Type III
systems should provide adequate light levels for
the activity in the area for safety and security of
persons using the space. Both types of lighting
should not be overly bright, cause excessive
glare, or spill light into unwanted spaces.
Illumination Levels. The Illuminating
Engineering Society(IES)established guidelines
for light levels in most situations based on the Type IV
purpose of the area or activity being performed.
Lighting designers use software that can read
photometric files in the".ies"format for each
luminaire to calculate the effective light levels
for the design and ensure compliance with these
guidelines.
The luminaires available for Idaho Power
designers, along with the mounting height of the
luminaire on the pole will determine the light Type V
levels on the ground.Using higher lumen output
luminaires will provide greater illumination Good designs use the correct distribution pattern
levels at the same mounting height, or broader for each lighting application.
distribution of the light at increased mounting ♦ Type 11 distribution is primarily intended for
heights. roadway lighting
♦ Type V distribution is for area lighting
The illumination levels shown in this section are ♦ Type III and Type IV lighting is sometimes
the initial ones. Long-term light levels will be used in either application.
70-80%of the initial values for LED luminaires.
!'�IDAHO
EMPOWER. Design Information

22-02-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
LED Catalog IDs and Wattages
The following table provides the current LED luminaires used by Idaho Power by Cat. ID with associated
wattages, and other information:
Distribution BUG Color Luminaire Minimum Maximum
Cat. ID Pattern Rating Temp. Type Application Lumens Watts Label
60003 TYPE V 2-0-0 3000K Barnyard Area 3,600 40 30LED
57024 TYPE II 1-0-1 3000K Cobra Street 3,600 40 30LED
58793 TYPE IV 1-0-1 3000K Cobra Street 3,600 40 30LED
57025 TYPE II 2-0-2 3000K Cobra Street/Area 7,200 85 60LED
57026 TYPE II 2-0-3 3000K Cobra Street 10,800 140 90LED
57028 TYPE III 3-0-4 3000K Cobra Street/Area 18,000 200 190LED
58889 WIDE FLOOD N/A 4000K Flood Area 8,100 85 80LED
58890 WIDE FLOOD N/A 4000K Flood Area 18,00 150 120LED
58891 WIDE FLOOD N/A 4000K Flood Area 8,100 300 250LED
Mast Arms
Luminaires are mounted to wood poles using galvanized steel mast arms.All Idaho Power luminaires that
are purchased for street and area lighting applications,require a mast arm. Street and fixed area lights will
accept a 1-1/4-through 2-inches IPS pipe tenon. Floodlights use a trunnion mount; and a twin-mount
bracket is available, Cat. ID 58293.
The three basic styles of mast arms are:
♦ cantilever type,
♦ guy-type, and
♦ floodlight trunnion mount type as shown below.
0
DAM12
DAM6 or
DAM6H
i•
12'Double-guy Arm 6'Cantilever Arm
Used in street& Used in street&
area appliations area appliations
24"-30"Cantilever Arm 24"-30"Trunnion Mount
Used for area Used for floodlights
lighting applications included in light CU Code
included in light CU Code
Design Information W.-POWER,

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-02-03
Streetlighting
To provide even illumination for streetlighting, Optimal spacing of the poles is approximately
poles should be spaced regularly on one or both 7X the luminaire mounting height for Type II or
sides of the roadway.Major roads with multiple Type III roadway luminaires. However,
lanes and more traffic usually require higher streetlights are typically only mounted on Idaho
illumination levels. Power's distribution poles where the pole
spacing is set by other criteria and the mounting
height may be restricted by communication lines
or other equipment on the pole.
pop W These restrictions result in more uneven
One Side Arrangement illumination levels along the roadway,but it is
generally not economically feasible to install
additional poles solely for streetlighting;
especially since many municipalities provide
their own streetlighting.
Using the recommended mounting heights in the
table below at 7X mounting height pole spacing
Staggered Arrangement provides between 0.5 and 1.5 foot-candles
average on the road surface.
Streetlighting CU Codes
Mnimum Distribution Recommended
CU Code Lumens Pattern N/bunting 11.
WIL
DLED40T2S 3,600 Type II 20-ft
I DLED40T4S* 3,600 Type IV 20-ft
DLED85T2S 7,200 Type II 25-ft
DLED140T2S 10,800 Type II 25-ft
DLED200T3S 18,000 Type III 30-ft
WENA4 * Reserved for intersections or cul-de-sacs.
Opposite Arrangement
The CU Codes above do not include the mast
Use Type II luminaries for most roadway arm.They must be called for separately,
applications with single lanes of traffic in each depending on how far the pole is from the edge
direction,and Type III luminaries for roadways of the roadway.
with multiple lanes of traffic in each direction.
Any of these arrangements can be applied on a
particular roadway,but wider or busier roads
benefit from the staggered or opposite
arrangement with higher lumen output
luminaries.
•'Q ID
EMP1H0 hOMR. Design Information

22-02-04 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Intersections
Lighting at intersections has some special In some cases, such as at 4-way stops where
considerations because pedestrians can be pedestrians may be crossing both roadways,a
present. The type and width of the roadways Type V distribution pattern light can be used.
coming together at the intersection also makes a The light may be placed in any corner of the
difference.Minor roadways are 2-lanes with 1- intersection but must be angled into the
lane of traffic going in each direction.Major intersection at a 45'angle to the roadways.
roadways have more than 2 lanes (including a
center turn lane)or more than 1 lane of traffic
going in each direction.
Minor Roadways
For minor roadway intersections, a single, 3,600
lumen output light is generally sufficient. For a
T-intersection,place a single Type II light as •
close as possible to the center of the tee.
Major Roadways
Where a minor roadway intersects a major
roadway, or where two major roadways
intersect,multiple lights should be used. Higher
lumen output lighting can be used depending on
the width of the roadways and the available
mounting heights.
If it is not possible to locate the light across the For a minor roadway interesting with a major
intersection or at a 4-way intersection of minor roadway, 3,600 lumens should be sufficient with
roads, a Type II light can be located at one Type II lights located on the right-hand corner of
corner of the intersection. The right side of the the interaction and the light distribution pattern
intersection is preferred, and the light along the major roadway. If mounting height
distribution pattern should be along the busier of allows, 7,200 lumen lighting can also be used.
the two roads.
orMIDAM
Design Information WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-02-05
For less-busy major roads that may only have Cul-de-sacs and Railroads
one lane of traffic in each direction. However,
with a center turn lane,two lights should be used Use a 3,600 lumen,Type II luminaire located
at either 7,200 or 10,8001umens depending on along the neck of the cul-de-sac, or a 3,600
the road width and mounting height. lumen,Type IV luminaire in the turn-around.
Will
now U
Use a minimum of two Type II luminaires for
0 railway lighting, one on each side of the tracks
I for best visibility.
v _ Optional
location
A luminaire needs to be aligned with each major
roadway; one for each direction.It doesn't
matter which other corner the second luminaire
is located; either directly across from the first or _
diagonally across the intersection.
For very busy roadways with multiple lanes of
traffic in both directions,the best lighting results 4;zF
are obtained with a light at each corner of the
intersection. Use 10,800 lumen Type 11 or
18,000 lumen Type III lights depending on the
road width and mounting height.
li
0
�IDAHO
EMPOWER. Design Information

22-02-06 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Area Lighting
There is no prescriptive formula to create a The following CU Codes area available for area
complete area lighting design. Except for simple lighting.All codes include the mounting arm and
situations, area lighting design should be done hardware.
by qualified professionals who have the
resources and expertise to make appropriate Area Lighting CU Codes
design decisions. Minimum Distribution Recommended
CU Code Lumens Pattern Mbunting H.
Idaho Power can offer the following types of DNGLED40 3,600 Type V 20-ft
simple off-street area lighting services: DNGLED85* 7,200 Type II 25-ft
DNGLED190* 18,000 Type III 30-ft
♦ A single luminaire to provide lighting for a DFLED85 7,200 Flood 25-ft
barnyard, driveway,or other small space. DFLED150 18,000 Flood 30-ft
DFLED300 32,000 Flood 35-ft
♦ A small array of luminaires to light a larger D Recommended for perimeter lighting.
area such as service yards or storage
facilities. Single Light Installations
♦ One or more floodlight luminaires for
parking lots and similar areas. The 3,600 lumen,Type V light is recommended
for most single-light installations. It will provide
Illumination Options smooth illumination surrounding the pole.
Areas may be lighted with barnyard, cobra-head,
or floodlight luminaires. The cobra head are
fixed lighting because they cannot be aimed by
tilting or rotating them on their mounts as can be
done with floodlights.
Only Type II or Type III fixed lighting is
recommended for perimeter mounting.
Barnyard,Type V lights, should be used in the
middle of small areas to avoid light trespass.
When large quantities of luminaires are
necessary,the customer will benefit from a
complete and professional design that uses other
styles of fixed lighting not stocked by Idaho
Power.
The lighted area is approximately 120X120-ft
with a maximum illuminance of 1.4 fc and
approximately 3,700 ft2 of area illuminated to at
least 0.5 fc.
orMIDAM
Design Information WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-02-07
The 7,200 lumen,Type II light is best used The 18,000 lumen,Type III light is best used
along a driveway or other narrow area. It can be for a deeper,but still wide area. It can be used in
used in a single area lighting application,but it a single area lighting application,but it will also
will illuminate side-to-side from the pole and not illuminate side-to-side from the pole and not
provide much light behind the pole. provide much light behind the pole.
■
The lighted area is approximately 200xI00-ft The lighted area is approximately 240x120-ft
with a maximum illuminance of 3.7 fc and area with a maximum illuminance of 3.5 fc and
approximately 3,800 ft2 of area illuminated to at approximately 9,700 ft2 of area illuminated to at
least 0.5 fc. least 0.5 fc.
Mounting Height Adjustments
Raising the mounting height of one of these lights will increase the area of illumination,but lower the
overall light levels. Lowering the mounting height of one of these lights will decrease the illumined area
but increase the overall light levels.
Height Adjusted Light Levels
Mounting Height Illuminated Area* Maximum
DNGLED40
15-ft 3,100 ft2 2.5 fc
25-ft 3,200 ft2 0.9 fc
30-ft 2,500 ft2 0.6 fc
DNGLED85
20-ft 3,400 ft2 5.7 fc
30-ft 3,900 ft2 2.6 fc
35-ft 4,100 ft2 1.9 fc
DNGLED190
25-ft 8,600 ft2 5.2 fc
35-ft 10,400 ft2 2.6 fc
40-ft 11,000 ft2 2.0 fc
*Approximate illuminated area of 0.5 fc or greater
•'� P1H0 ID
�wPOWER Design Information

22-02-08 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Multiple Light Installations
To design area lighting,the following
parameters must be known or determined:
0.
♦ Size of the area to be lighted(perimeter I �0 �: 0.4 1
dimensions)
♦ Desired illumination level
0 0 7 4 07 3 0.2 0.3 0 6
♦ Luminaire type
♦ Pole height 0. . 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.'4 0.'1 90 &'4
♦ Pole spacing and arrangement
For parking lots,the mounting height and the
pole spacing are the major variables. Choose a
mounting height and luminaire type that will
require the least number of poles while still
provide the desired illumination levels. '
Use the following table to help determine the 3.h3.l2'9 11.4 .'31 G.*4 0, 4 2 iS13 I
pole spacing for each luminaire type at the
recommended mounting height.
Pole Spacing for Area Lighting DNGLED190 180 0
Rows Columns Area Average Maximum
DNGLED40
4X 4X 6,400 ft2 0.8 fc 1.4 fc
DNGLED85
4X 6X 15,000 ft2 1.0 fc 3.7 fc ��
.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 01.4 0.q7
DNGLED190
6X 7X 37,800 ft2 0.9 fc 4.1 fc
The diagrams below show the initial foot candle
levels for the various luminaires at the '
recommended mounting height and pole
spacing.
:.4 1):4�
1ii4.i12'.3 1.0 0.4 0.3 0.4 1.0 2.3 4.41 .2
For long,narrow areas,it is better to choose
several short poles than one tall one, especially
since pole costs increase substantially above
40-feet.
Design Information "`�R,,

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-02-09
Floodlight Design
The use of floodlights for area lighting is When poles are in the middle of one side of the
discouraged due to Dark Sky lighting area being illuminated,try to match pole height
requirements in some areas of the service and lumen output to arrange the poles as shown
territory. Floodlights should not be located or in the top illustration below.When poles are
aimed in such a manner that they cause glare located at the corners of an area,they should be
problems to traffic on adjacent streets. spaced a maximum of four times the mounting
height from the nearest poles. Use the following
2X by 4X Rule of Thumb table and refer to the diagrams below to estimate
the illumination levels of a floodlight at the
The area that is uniformly lighted from a single given mounting height:
floodlight on a pole is four times the mounting
height.When using more than one pole,the Pole Spacing for Floodlighting
spacing between poles should be approximately 1Nbunt pole Foot-candle Levels
4X the mounting height. Closer spacing provides Height Spacing Mn. Ave. Mix. Mix/Mn Ave/Mn
better uniformity and fewer shadows. DFLED85
20-ft 80-ft 2.0 4.8 12.0 6.0 2.4
Sometimes the dimensions of specific area 25-ft 100-ft 1.3 3.1 7.7 5.9 2.4
require that the 4X spacing be slightly increased 30-ft 120-ft 0.9 2.1 5.3 5.9 2.3
to avoid the expense of buying taller. Do not DFLED150
exceed spacing of more than 4.5X the mounting 25-ft 100-ft 1.8 4.4 11.0 6.1 2.4
30-ft 120-ft 1.3 3.1 7.6 5.8 2.4
height. 35-ft 140-ft 0.9 2.3 5.6 6.2 2.6
DFLED300
30-ft 120-ft 2.4 5.7 14.3 5.9 2.4
35-ft 140-ft 1.7 4.2 10.4 6.1 2.5
40-ft 160-ft 1.3 3.2 8.0 6.2 2.5
2X�
4X 4X X
2X�
Zx X
2X IX 2X
4X ZX�
2X by 4X Rule of Thumb
E'er IDAHO
EMPOWER. Design Information

22-02-10 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Voltage Drop
LED street and area lighting luminaires that are The values in the previous table were calculated
installed on the system contain drivers which are using typical impedance values for conductors at
designed to operate between 120-277VAC. 25°C in Ohms per 1000-ft from the IEEE Gray
Lighting designs must maintain a consistent Book at 99%power factor:
voltage within ANSI tolerance of f5%
throughout the length of the circuit. The low ♦ #6 Duplex—R=0.6740Q,X=0.0282Q
power consumption of LED luminaires makes it ♦ #2 Triplex—R=0.2660n,X=0.0273n
so the voltage drop is generally not a problem
for most applications. Where:
With a string of lights on a circuit,use a series VDROP= I x (R cose+X sine)
voltage drop calculation. The voltage drop to the
first light on the string is calculated using the Another way to estimate series voltage drop on a
full load for all the lights on the circuit. The string of lights is to calculate the full load of the
voltage drop to the second light is calculated circuit to the halfway point of the string. By
using the load for all but the first light on the assuming a unity power factor and omitting the
circuit. This process is repeated until the voltage reactive portion of the circuit,the above
drop to the last light is calculated for just the equation can be further simplified to:
load of one light. VDROP= I X R.
This process is tedious, so the following table
gives the maximum number of lights that can be Example: Estimate the voltage drop for 12
installed on a 1-0, 120V circuit for various lights at 85W each spaced 75-feet apart using#6
luminaire wattages and span lengths: duplex conductor and 120V.
Maximum Number of Luminaires on a Cricut 1. Calculate current at 120V
I= 85W x 12— 120V= 8.5A
Span Luminaire Wattage
Length 40 85 150 190 300 2. Calculate total circuit length
#6 Duplex 12 x 75-ft x 2= 1800-ft
100-ft 14 10 7 6 5
150-ft 15 10 7 6 5 3. Calculate resistance to the halfway point
200-ft 11 7 5 4 3 R=0.6740- 1000 x 900=0.607n
250-ft 9 6 4 4 3
300-ft 8 5 4 3 3 4. Calculate the voltage drop
350-ft 8 5 4 3 2
VDROP= I x R
#2 Triplex* VDROP=8.5A x 0.6070
100-ft 25 17 12 11 8
150-ft 24 16 12 10 8 VDROP=5.2V
200-ft 17 11 8 7 6
250-ft 15 10 7 6 5 The maximum allowed voltage drop is 5%of
300-ft 14 9 7 6 4 120V or 6V. This design passes voltage drop
350-ft 13 8 6 5 4 requirements.
*Quantities are for all luminaires on one hot leg of the
triplex conductor. Staggering lights between hot legs
or connecting lights at 240V will double the
quantities shown.
Design Information '`per RR.

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-03-01
Installation Details
General Mounting Heights
Proper installation of luminaires will help Mounting height is the vertical distance between
provide comfortable illumination at appropriate the lighted surface and the bottom edge of the
points along the roadway system and safe, light source or luminaire. Streetlights should be
convenient lighting for off-street spaces. mounted(as close as practical)to the heights in
the table below so that the light distribution is as
Luminaire Installation intended.
Voltage Requirements Street Light Recommended Mounting Heights
Light ANSI Recommended Maximum
Mercury vapor lamps were operated at 240V, Output Wattage Mounting Suggested
while high pressure sodium and metal halide (Lm) Label Height(ft) Overhang(ft)
lamps use 120V. The new LED luminaires have 4,000 30 LED 25 6
an auto-ranging, electronic driver that will 7,200 60 LED 30 8
operate anywhere from 120-277V. The will not 18,000 9 LED 35 9
P Yam' Y 18,000 190 LED 35 9
operate on 480V.
Electrical Connections When installing streetlighting,the overhang of
the luminaire above the roadway should not
Luminaire mast arms are to be bonded to the exceed 25%of the mounting height. The above
pole ground. Grounding lugs are provided on the table gives the recommended maximum
mast arms. overhangs.
Luminaire
LED luminaires are connected to the overhead bottom edge i
secondary wiring using two,#8 AWG, copper,
THWN-insulated conductors furnished with the
luminaire using PG connectors. Insulation
piercing connectors are not approved for use on Mounting
lighting connections at this time. Connection height
details listed below:
♦ Black wire for 120V, 277V or one leg of
a 240V circuit. Overhang
♦ White wire for neutral or second leg of a
240V circuit. Transverse width
of pavement
♦ Green wire for connection to pole
ground and/or mast arm. The mounting heights for fixed(non-flood)area
lighting should also follow these mounting
When the service is supplied from an heights unless the design calls for a specific
underground source, #6 USE wiring may be mounting height.
wired directly to the luminaire terminal block.
Where triplex conductor has been installed,the
hot legs can either be paralleled, or the unused
leg should be bent back and covered with
insulating pads, Cat. ID 50541.
`POMR. Installation Details

22-03-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Mast Arms
There are four types of galvanized steel mast Mast Arm Clearances
arms available
♦ short 24-to 30-inch trunnion-mount arm Street and area lighting mast arms must,meet
for floodlights, appropriate NESC clearances. Clearance
requirements for mast arms installed on
♦ short 24-to 30-inch cantilever arm for distribution,joint-use poles are illustrated on
barnyard luminaires, pages 22-02-03 and 04.
♦ 6-foot cantilever arm for cobra head Mast arms are not to be installed below open
luminaires, and a wire communication circuits; the mounting
♦ 12-foot double guy arm for cobra head height of the luminaire is too low to provide the
intended lighting.NESC clearances shown on
luminaires. pages 22-02-03 &04, apply to installations on
Install mast arms using one through-bolt and two Idaho Power's distribution poles. If this situation
lag bolts. occurs,bonding between power and
communication equipment or relocation of the
There is no standard dimension between telephone equipment is necessary.
manufacturers on the standard dimensions,pole
drilling requirements, or the maximum luminaire NOTE: Cover service wires, except in the
size rating of street light brackets. See Materials drip loop,with insulating plastic hose or
Manual 17-051-01 for specific details about molding when they are within 40-inches
individual mast arms. of communication conductors or if they
are attached to the pole surface.
Grounding and Bonding
Bond all street light brackets to the pole ground
and system neutral so that they are effectively
grounded. If a system neutral is not present,
bond the mast arm and green wire to the neutral
conductor supplied in the duplex wiring.
Installation Details "` R,,

Overhead Revised 12122 22-03-03
A0
o 10 o
To whichever is closer,
——————L_ the conductor or an
Connect white wire ungrounded metal pin
to system neutral
(or second phase for 30"min
208V or 240V) 40"recommended
Connect black wire 60"if the light is maintained
Install hose to whichever
----to(120V)phase by other than Idaho Power
is lower,the conductor conductor
or the ungrounded
bracket
Hose
Connect green wire
to pole ground
40"
Bond mast arm
to pole ground
12" Tuck hose into
Telephone mast arm
Drop Notch to drain water
® Communication cable
Cable terminal
Mast Arm Clearances on Joint-use Distribution Pole
Installation Details
An IOFCORP Company

22-03-04 Revised 12/22 Overhead
—Connect white wire
to system neutral
(or second phase for
208V or240V)
Connect black wire
to(120V)phase
conductor
I Connect green wire
40" to pole ground
2"
Telephone
Drop
------Communication cable
Cable terminal
Bond mast arm
to pole ground _--
���Do not locate a mast arm below an
Hose---, open wire communication circuit.
Tuck hose into
to
arm
Notch to drain water
Mast Arm Clearances Near Communication Cables
Installation Details W@ R,,

Overhead Revised 12122 22-03-05
#6 AWG duplex
conductor
Bond mast arm
to pole ground
Connect white wire #8 AWG THWN
to system neutral insulated conductors
Connect black wire Connect green wire
to(120V)phase to pole ground
conductor
Luminaire at the End of a Duplex Circuit
Bond mast arm to pole ground
Connect green wire
to pole ground
--#8 AWG THWN
#6 AWG duplex insulated conductors
conductor
Connect white wire
Connect black wire to system neutral
to(120V)phase
conductor
Luminaire in the Middle of a Duplex Circuit
E—: ppR Installation Details

22-03-06 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Service neutral conductor
Z connected to pole ground
Connect white wire
to system neutral /Line voltage
(or second phase for / conductor
208V or 240V) Maintain at least 3"between
Connect black wire - secondary rack and mast arm
to(120V)phase
conductor
--Bond mast arm
to pole ground
Connect green wire
to pole ground
Luminaire Mounted Near a Secondary Source
rBond mast arm
ole ground
AWG THWN
ulated conductors
nnect green wire
ole ground
1"PVC pole riser see
Underground Manual
page 63-03-01
-► To J-box or transformer
Luminaire With an Underground Source
Installation Details OMPOMR,,

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-03-07
Photoelectric Controls Date Coding
LED luminaires are supplied with a long-life The PE control must be date coded at the time of
photoelectric (PE) control that is colored green, installation. Mark the bottom of the PE control
Cat. ID 57936,to distinguish it from other PE as shown in the following diagram with an
controls.These controls are designed especially installation date of December 2022.
for solid state lighting and have a 20-year life
expectancy. They are rated for operation MCI Y&o
between 120-277V. �EnnovF yb
4 11
NOTE: Do not use green PE controls 6 0' ,9
on HID luminaires. e 21
9 0 22`� I 3 X
10 ` , ?
All PE controls utilize a 3-pole,twist-lock w 2s
receptacle.The sensor window on the control LONG LIFE LED CONTROL
1000W/1800VA BALLAST
should be pointed to the north to achieve the 120-277VAC 50/60Hz
proper turn-on and turn-off times.
Photoelectric Control Socket Adjustment
Rotate the photoelectric control socket so the
window on the PE control is facing toward the
north. This helps achieve a uniform turn-on time
for all lights and reduce the damaging effects of
direct sunlight on the PE cell.
A north arrow is embossed on the socket so the
orientation can be adjusted to point north with a
screwdriver; see picture on the next page.
North
ScrewdriverArrow
Slot
Where existing signs or other nighttime light
sources interfere with the proper operation of the
PE control,the receptacle may be rotated
slightly to position the window away from these
obstacles or objectionable sources of light.
EMppMR. Installation Details

22-03-08 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Luminaire Adjustments Pole Labeling
Luminaire Leveling.For a street or area light to Each installed luminaire must be identified with
be most effective, it should be level with the a unique number.
ground. Some luminaires have a leveling bubble Rate 15 area or off-street lighting numbers are
provided by the manufacturer. If a bubble is not composed of six digits. The first two digits
provided,use the PE receptacle as a flat surface
represent the area to which the lights are
for leveling. assigned. The remaining four digits are a
Floodlight Aiming. Floodlights are mounted sequential number which is assigned to each
so that they have 2°of rotation. They may be luminaire.
adjusted from side-to-side and up-and-down. For Rate 41 streetlight luminaires are assigned a
normal area lighting,the aiming point for five-digit, sequential number which is
floodlights should be between 2/3 and 3/4 of the sometimes followed by a letter code indicating
distance across the area to be lighted or twice the the customer category into which the luminaire
mounting height,whichever is the lower value. falls.
The highest light levels for the horizontal and ♦ "A"represents an Idaho Power-owned light.
vertical directions will be achieved when the ♦ `B"represents a customer-owned light that
aiming point forms approximately a 3-4-5 right is maintained by Idaho Power.
triangle.
♦ "C"indicates a customer-owned and
maintained light.
Only 4 1 A and 15 account lights will be
Vertical maintained by Idaho Power after 2023.
Illumination
Mounting Numbers are to be mounted vertically on the
Height 3 s pole, at a height of 6-feet, and below the
luminaires to which they are assigned.
4 Place the sign placard on the pole so that it may
Horizontal� be easily seen from the roadway. The number
Illumination signs are fabricated with stick on labels and an
Floodlights will effectively light an area 45°to aluminum plate, see the Materials Manual.
either side of the aiming line.Therefore, it will
take at least two floodlights to light a pattern
covering a 180' angle.
9L
IDAHO
Installation Details "` R,,
1�11A­—p-Y

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-03-09
Initial Check for Operation The house-side shield is used to eliminate the
glare of the LED source as viewed from the back
After the luminaire has been installed,verify the (pole) side of the luminaire.
following items:
♦ Do all clearances meet or exceed those listed
in this section?
♦ Is the mast arm grounded?
♦ Does the mast arm orientation comply with
the design guidelines in OH 22-03?
s e
♦ Is the luminaire of the correct light
distribution pattern for the application? See
the design guidelines in OH 22 03-01
♦ Was the service connected for 120-277-volt House-side(Glare)Shield
operation? The light trespass shield is used to reduce the
♦ If the luminaire is fixed, is it level or parallel amount of backlight(towards the pole) for a
with the surface to be lighted?If it is a sharper light cut-off pattern.
floodlight, is the aiming point from 2/3 to
3/4 the distance across the area to be
lighted?
♦ Is the PE control facing north?
♦ Was the PE control date marked?
♦ Does the light work? Cover the PE control
window or use a shorting cap. m .
Shielding Options -
Barnyard luminaires come with shields installed Light Trespass Shield
at the factory. Both light trespass and house-side
(glare) shields are available for cobra-head The comfort refactor is used to soften the light
luminaires.A visual comfort refractor is also and provide more vertical illumination but will
available for the 3,600 lumen cobra head reduce the overall light levels and somewhat
luminaires. Only one of the following shields distort the light distribution pattern.
may be used per luminaire.
Cobra Head Shielding Options
Cat. ID Type Fits
58691 HOUSE SIDE 30 LED
58692 LIGHT TRESPASS 30 LED
59444 COMFORT REFRACTOR 30 LED
58693 HOUSE SIDE 60 LED
58694 LIGHT TRESPASS 60 LED
59445 COMFORT REFRACTOR 60 LED
58695 HOUSE SDE 90 LED
58696 LIGHT TRESPASS 90 LED
Comfort Refractor
"�ppR Installation Details

Overhead Revised 12/22 22-04-01
Maintenance
General Cleaning
Maintenance should be completed once during Wipe the exterior of the luminaire with a dry or
the life of an LED luminaire as close to 12-years damp cloth to remove any surface dust or dirt. If
after the initial installation as practical to ensure more thorough cleaning is necessary, follow the
continued effectiveness of the light installation. recommendations below.
LED luminaires do not have field replaceable Housing. The exterior housing can be cleaned
parts or lamps, so maintenance is limited to with a mild soap or cleaner.Rinse with clean
inspection of the luminaire and wiring,cleaning water or wipe with a damp cloth. Do not use
the surface and optical assembly, and strong or abrasive cleaners.
replacement of the photoelectric (PE)control.
➢ Mark the installation month and year on the Glass. Use nonabrasive cleaners on glass
replacement PE control. surfaces and wipe clean. Most detergents work
well under average dirt conditions.
Output Depreciation Plastics. Static electrical charges can develop
on plastic surfaces as they are cleaned. This will
Aging. The light output of the LEDs will attract and hold dust particles. Plastic surfaces
decrease with age,but the LEDs themselves do should not be wiped dry after cleaning. This
not"burn out."Usually,it is one of the other only increases the static build-up.
electronic components in the fixture that fails.
The end-of-life for an LED luminaire is when its Luminaire Failure
light output drops to 70%of the initial amount. Luminaire failures can be caused by faulty
This is projected to be 100,000 hours or
approximately 24.6 years at 4059 burn hours electronic components,voltage surges,
V
annually. mechanical vibration,wind,U degradation,
corrosion,ingress of dirt or moisture,and
Voltage Drop. Since LED luminaries are vandalism. Surge suppression MOVs are
significantly lower in wattage than the HID specified in all LED luminaires to help prevent
sources they replace,voltage drop on the circuit damage from electrical surges.
should not be an issue. However,the voltage The most common failure is with the driver.
along the circuit should be maintained within Component failures usually occur within a very
f5%of the nominal supply voltage. p y
short time of installation and are covered under
Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. A major part the manufacturer's warranty.
of light loss can a result of dirt on the surfaces of Other failure points are manufacturing or wiring
the luminaire that should be cleaned for optimal problems, and shipping damage.Actual LED or
light output. The sealed nature of LED LED circuit board failure is less than 1%of
luminaries should prevent dirt from entering the failures reported to manufacturers.
optical assembly.
Returned failed luminaires to Stores for
reliability counting and possible warranty action.
�POR. Maintenance

22-04-02 Revised 12/22 Overhead
Troubleshooting Light Cycles On-and-Off or Flickers
Troubleshooting begins with an inspection of the This could be the result of either a failing PE
luminaire. Check for the following on the control, or faulty internal wiring or components.
exterior: Check operation with an open and/or shorting
cap. If the light operates normally with the caps
♦ Has the luminaire been visibly damaged? installed in place of the PE control,then replace
♦ Has the luminaire been grounded to the pole the control. If the light continues to cycle or
ground? flicker,then replace the luminaire.
♦ Is the supply voltage between 120-277V?
Customer Concerns
♦ Is the PE control installed and aimed north`?
♦ Is the luminaire excessively dirty? Light is too Bright
Next, check inside the housing for any of the Sometimes this is due to the change in color
following problems: temperature of the LED light compared to old
♦ Are there any loose wires?Especially check high-pressure sodium lighting. Most LED lights
the pre-wired leads from the factory. used by IP are 100W equivalent and the
company does not offer anything with lower
♦ Are there any burned wires or fixture light output. However, if the light is a higher
components such as the driver module or equivalent wattage,a lower wattage luminaire
surge device? may be used in its place. In the future,it may be
possible to dim the LED source using a different
Light Fails to Operate PE control.
A"shorting cap", Cat. ID 46596, can be used In other instances,the problem may be"glare"
during daylight hours to check that the luminaire from the LED source that can be mitigated with
is working. This cap shorts the"line"and"load" a house-side shield or comfort refractor.
terminals on the PE socket and does not require
covering the lens on the PE control to verify Light is not Bright Enough
operation.
This is often a result of a more even light
If the fixture fails to operate with a shorting cab distribution pattern from an LED source with
installed in the PE receptacle,then there is an less direct light directly under the luminaire.A
internal component failure or wiring problem. solution to this problem is to offer a higher
wattage luminaire with similar light distribution
Light Stays On pattern.
All IP owned street and area lights are equipped Light Trespass
with"fail-on"PE control. Generally, a luminaire
which fails to turn off during daylight hours has LED lighting provides more precise optical
a bad PE control. It is also possible,with a new control than other light sources, so light trespass
luminaire, for the wiring to be faulty. is of less concern. However, in some instances a
An"open cap", Cat. ID 60032, can be used in Type 11 distribution pattern might have been
used where a Type IV pattern would have been
place of a PE control to turn the light off. If the better, such as at an intersection. In a case such
light stays on when an open cap is installed,then as this,consider installing a light trespass shield
there is a problem with the internal wiring. or exchanging the luminaire for a different
An open cap should be used to protect the PE distribution type.
socket when it is necessary to turn off a
customer's lighting for non-payment and the
luminaire is not being removed.
Maintenance WOP RR.

Overhead Revised 01/21 23-00-01
Table of Contents
23- Metering
23-01-01 Meter Installation Requirements 23-02-01 Primary Metering
General Information General Information
Location of Meters Scope
23-01-02 Meter Room Requirements Installation Information
Meter Identification at Multiple 23-02-02 1-0 and 3-0 Primary Meter Pole
Meter Installations Overhead Construction
Sequence 23-02-03 1-0 and 3-0 Primary Meter Pole
1-0 Meters Underground Construction
Self-Contained vs. CT Metering 23-02-04 7.2/12.5 kV 1-0 Overhead
23-01-03 Tables Construction
Current Transformer Installations 23-02-05 7.2/12.5 kV 1-0 Underground
23-01-04 Current Transformer Wiring Construction
Diagrams 23-02-06 19.9/34.5 kV 1-0 Overhead
Metering Underground Circuits Construction
Grounding 23-02-07 19.9/34.5 kV 1-0 Underground
Installation of Meters Construction
Installation Procedures References 23-02-08 12.5 kV 3-0 Overhead
Removal of Meters Construction
Disconnection of Service 23-02-09 12.5 kV 3-0 Underground
23-01-05 1-0 CT Wiring Diagrams(color) Construction
120/240V 23-02-10 34.5 kV 3-0 Overhead
240/480V Construction
23-01-06 3-0 CT Wiring Diagram(color) 23-02-11 34.5 kV 3-0 Underground
23-01-07 Meter and CT Reference Tables Construction
Current Transformer(CT) 23-02-12 3-0 Meter Base Wiring Diagram
Selection Tables 23-02-13 3-0 Junction Box Detail
23-02-21 Cogen Primary Metering Package
4 Pole Cogen Example
23-03-01 Meter Bases
Scope
General
Three-Phase Meter Bases Under
250 Volts
Single-Phase and Three-Phase
Meter Bases Over 250 Volts
23-03-02 Test Bypass Meter Bases
Quick Reference -Meter Base
Pre-connection Tests
E''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Table of Contents

Overhead Revised 07/21 23-01-01
Meter Installation Requirements
General Information ♦ Commercial meters shall be installed at an
outside location that is readily accessible to
It is in the best interest of both the customer and Idaho Power employees. Meters shall not be
Idaho Power Company that a suitable and located where they might be damaged or
adequately protected meter location be provided. become inaccessible by the movement or
This will help assure accuracy of meter readings, storage of materials or supplies.
and facilitate installation and maintenance ♦ Instrument transformer metering that is
without undue inconvenience to the customer installed on a structure shall be located
and/or Idaho Power employees. These outside,where it will be readily accessible to
specifications cover only common meter Idaho Power employees at all times.Written
installations.Additional meter information may approval is required from the distribution
be obtained from Meter Support. designer if the customer desires an exception
Location of Meters to this policy.
♦ The centerline of the meter should be 5'-6"
The following requirements apply to the location above the finished grade or walkway. If
of meters. structural details prevent this,the height
♦ Meters shall not be located where they will may not be less than 4'(5'in heavy snow
be subject to shock or vibration. areas)or more than 6'.
♦ Meter sockets must be plumb in all ♦ In multiple meter installations such as
directions and securely fastened to the apartment buildings or shopping centers,
meters may be mounted in horizontal rows
structure. with the allowable maximum and minimum
♦ Meters cannot be covered or enclosed in any height from ground or walkway to the center
manner without prior written approval by of the meter being 6-6" and 4'respectively.
the distribution designer. If prior approval is ♦ In apartment or multiple-use buildings,
not obtained,moving the meter or any meters should not be installed above the
alterations to the installation to obtain access first-story level or in the basement,unless
will be done at the customer's/owner's approval has first been secured from the
expense. distribution designer.
♦ Residential meters shall be installed at an ♦ Meters may be mounted on utility-owned
outside location that is readily accessible to poles only for the convenience of the
Idaho Power employees. The meter should Company.
be located on the side of the structure closest
to utility lines, and as close as possible to the ♦ Conduits for meter circuits on poles must
front of the building. Locations with the clear communication and television cables
likelihood of being fenced-in should be in accordance with the specifications of
avoided. Section 04,Joint Use and Special Circuits.
♦ Recessed meter bases are not allowed.
"`ppR. Meter Installation Requirements

23-01-02 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Meter Room Requirements Sequence
In an effort to make more aesthetically pleasing All meters or instrument transformers must be
construction in residential and commercial ahead of the customer's disconnecting switch.
developments,meter rooms can now be used. Where multiple meter installations are required
Meter rooms may be placed in alternative and a main switch is used,meters may be
locations for banks of meters that are installed. installed behind the main switch and ahead of
the customer's disconnect;no unmetered circuits
The criteria for installing a meter room are: will be connected to the main switch. Entrance
wiring must be so arranged that metered circuits
1. A plan for the meter room must be submitted do not enter conduits,raceways or enclosures
to Idaho Power for approval prior to containing unmetered circuits except on
construction. Company-owned pole meter loops.Any
exceptions must have advance approval from the
2. The meter room must be directly accessible Company.
to Idaho Power through an exterior metal
door without having to pass through another 1-0 Meters
interior space.
All 1-0 non-irrigation customers with a main
3. lock box must be provided on the exterior of switch ampacity up to and including 400-
the building at the exterior door. amperes on a 120/240-volt service will be
metered with a self-contained meter. On all
4. The exterior door must be permanently loads up to and including 200 amperes a meter
labeled with the words"Electrical Room". base of suitable ampacity will be used. On all
loads from 200 to 400 amperes 120/240 volt, a
5. The meter room may only be used for 400-amp meter base will be used.All 200 amp
electrical equipment and communication and above 240/480 volt services will be CT
equipment that does not interfere with the metered.
electrical equipment.No storage of any kind
is allowed. There is an additional charge for CT metering
when the metering has been installed for the
6. Lighting, drainage and health issues are the customer's convenience and does not meet the
responsibility of the Customer specifications of the following Table 1 (see
Schedule 66 in the Rates Schedule Guide for more
Meter Identification at Multiple Meter information).
Installations
Self-Contained vs. CT Metering
Prior to actual meter installation,the customer or
contractor must provide the distribution Use the table on the following page,to
designer,with a plan indicating which meter determine if the service should be metered with
socket serves which unit. The customer shall a self-contained or current transformer meter.
mark the meter sockets with the applicable unit The selection is based on main switch ampacity.
address by some permanent means at a location
directly above the meter socket.Whoever
installs the meter shall ensure that address
notations on meter bases match account
addresses on Service Investigation Order(SIO)
and actual meter addresses and install"Meter
Verification sticker(Cat. ID 44413).
Meter Installation Requirements 9013 RR.

Overhead Revised 07/21 23-01-03
Self-contained vs. CT Metering Tables
1-0 120/240 Volt-Non—irrigation
Main Switch Ampacity Meter Type
0 to 400 amps Self-contained
401 amps&Above CT—Secondary
Polyphase—Non-irrigation
Self-Contained Meter CT Meter
Meter Voltage Maximum kW Minimum kW
120/208 V Network 35 kW 36 kW
120/240 V 75 kW 76 kW
120/208 V 60 kW 61 kW
240/480 V1 125 kW 126 kW
277/480 V1 125 kW 126 kW
1 Idaho Power Company approved single-position self-contained,test-bypass meter bases must be used,
see Overhead Manual 23-03.
1-0—Irrigation
Self-Contained Meter Self-Contained Meter
Meter Voltage Maximum hp Maximum hp(10 to 30 Converter)
120/240 V 25 hp3 25 hp
240/480 V 2 25 hp3 25 hp4
2 Idaho Power Company approved single-position self-contained,test-bypass meter bases must be used,
see Overhead Manual 23-03.
3 Motor requests greater than 7.5 HP must be approved by Reliability Engineering to determine how the motor's
connection will affect the company's system,refer to Rule K.
4 Refer requests for phase converters to Reliability Engineering for approval,see Distribution Manual 07.01-05.
Polyphase—Irrigation
Self-Contained Meter CT Meter
Meter Voltage Maximum hp Minimum hp
120/240 V 50 hp 51 hp
120/208 V 50 hp 51 hp
240/480 V 2 125 hp 126 hp
277/480 V 2 125 hp 126 hp
2 Idaho Power Company approved single-position self-contained,test-bypass meter bases must be used,see Overhead Manual
23-03.
Current Transformer Installations CT Enclosures. CT enclosures may be used for
services up to 800-amps and are furnished and
3-0 meters used with instrument transformers installed by the customer. Enclosures must be
shall all be class 20.1-0 meters used with sealable with hinged covers and a CT mounting
instrument transformers shall all be class 10 or rack per EUSERC standards installed.
20. 1-0 and 3-0 meters shall be socket type. * 1-0 enclosures must be 36"X48" (min.)
On overhead services, current transformers may • 3-0 enclosures must be 48"X48" (min.)
be installed on the drip loop where our service
connects with the customer's wiring. The Idaho Power will provide and install the bus link
contractor will install a 1" metallic conduit with and CTs in the enclosure(1 per phase).
weatherhead from near the current transformers
to a meter socket or enclosure at a suitable CU Code Description Cat.ID
location for the meter. DMCTBB Bus Bar Assembly 35799
�ppMR,: Meter Installation Requirements

23-01-04 Revised 01/21 Overhead
Current Transformer Wiring Installation Procedures References
Diagrams
MQM-2.1-6 New Installation,Large Customer
See the following pages for the CT color wiring Billing System(LCBS)
diagrams. MQM-2.1-7 New Installation,Non-LCBS
Transformer Rated
Metering Underground Circuits MQM-2.1-8 New Installation, Self-Contained
Underground distribution services will be Demand
metered at the customer's building. The same MQM-2.1-9 New Installation, Self-Contained
specifications with regard to meter location, Non-Demand
bases,and types apply as with overhead
services. Removal of Meters
Grounding Only authorized personnel shall be allowed to
remove meters from the customer's premises.
Refer to Section 20-10-01 for typical grounding When socket-type meters are removed,the
configurations. socket must have a cover-plate securely fastened
and sealed in place.
Installation of Meters
Disconnection of Service
Authorized Lines personnel shall install all
meters used with instrument transformers. Self- To disconnect service on socket-type meters,
contained meters may be installed by other plastic boots shall be installed over the load-side
employees who are authorized to do this type of terminals of the meter, and the meter reinstalled
work and who are competent to check the meter and sealed in place.When service is
bases for correct wiring connections. reconnected,the meter base should be inspected
for jumpers or other signs of tampering.
If the meter is an electronic auto ranging meter,
mark the voltage on meter base using the The disconnection of a large service with
appropriate stickers (Cat. ID's: 42353,42354, current transformers requires that individual
42355,42356,42357,42358, or 42359). consideration be given to each installation in
order to determine the most feasible method
to be used.
Meter Installation Requirements 9013 RR.

Overhead Revised 07/21 23-01-05
1-0 CT Wiring Diagrams
NEUTRAL
X1 120V _
LEADING PHASE
120V
X1 240V
LAGGING PHASE
Red#10 Red#12
White#10 Green#8
Blue#12
f
I
1 -0, 3-wire, 120/240V
NEUTRAL
X1 240V
LEADING PHASE -
240v
X1 480V
LAGGING PHASE
Red#10 Red#12
White#10 Green#8
Blue#12
TEST BLOCK
1 -0, 3-wire, 240/480V
R Meter Installation Requirements
�,o�o�amPa,

23-01-06 Revised 01/21 Overhead
3-0 CT Wiring Diagram
DELTA LOAD NEUTRAL WYE LOAD
120V 120V
or X1 or _
120V 240V A_0 277V 120V
or or
208V 240V 240V 208V 277V 120V
or or
416V24o0V X1 B_QJ 480V 208V 277V
240V 480V 208V 480V
480V X1 C_0 480V
HIGH LEG (DELTA ONLY)
White#10 Green#8
Blue#10
Blue#12 TEST BLOCK
Red#10
Red#12
Black#10
Black#12
3-0, 4-wire, Delta or Wye
Meter Installation Requirements MOWER.

Overhead Revised 07/21 23-01-07
Meter and CT Reference Tables
AMI Meter Only
Cat. ID CU Code Description Notes
12036 DMMA01 1PH FM2S,WHR, CL200, 120/240V 1-0 UP TO 200A
12042 DMMA02 1PH, FM2S,WHR/KW, CL200, 120/480V 1-0, 200A,480V ONLY
12038 DMMA03 1PH, FM3S,WHR, CL20, 240V 1-0 CT, 120/240V ONLY
12043 DMMA04 1PH, FM3S,WHR, CL20, 120/480V 1-0 CT, 240/480V ONLY
12046 DMMA05 3PH, FM16S,WHR/KW, CL200, 120/480V 3-0, UP TO 200A
12055 DMMA06 3PH, FM9S,WHR/KW, CL20, 120/480V 3-0 CT, 120-480V Y&A
12054 DMMA07 3PH, FM35/45S,WHR/KW, CL20, 120/480V 3-0 CT, 120/240-240/480 A ONLY'
12040 DMMA08 1PH, FM2S,WHR, CL320, 120/240V 1-0 120/240 400 AMP
12039 DMMA11 1PH FM12S, WHR, CL200, 120/208V 1-0 120/208(NETWORK)
' Used for maintenance only.
CT Meter Packages
Cat. ID CU Code Description Notes
12038 DMAOCT1 OVERHEAD CT 1PH, 240V 1-0 CT 120/240 ONLY
12043 DMAOCT1480 OVERHEAD CT 1PH,480V 1-0 CT 480 VOLT ONLY
12055 DMAOCT3 OVERHEAD CT 3PH, 120-480V 3-0 CT 120/208-277/480Y
12038 DMAUCT1 UNDERGROUND CT 1 PH, 240V 1-0 CT 120/240 ONLY
12403 DMAUCT480 UNDERGROUND CT 1 PH,480V 1-0 CT 240/480 ONLY
12055 DMAUCT3 UNDERGROUND CT 3PH, 120-480V 3-0 CT 120/208-277/480Y
1528 DMCTBA1 P4 CT BUSBAR ASSEMBLY, 1 PH, 120-480V 1-0 CT CABINET 201-400A
1527 DMCTBA1 P8 CT BUSBAR ASSEMBLY, 1 PH, 120-480V 1-0 CT CABINET 401-800A
1527 DMCTBA3P CT BUSBAR ASSEMBLY, 3PH, 120-480V 3-0 CT CABINET 401-800A
Current Transformer (CT) Selection Tables
1-0 CT Meter Information
Window Largest Single No. of Multiple
Cat. ID CU Code CT Size Amp Range Size(in.) Conductor Conductors
1524 DMCT1 100/5 100-200 1 1/8 500 kcmil 2-2/0
1525 DMCT2 200/5 200-400 1 3/8 750 kcmil 2-4/0
1526 DMCT3 400/5 400-800 1 3/8 750 kcmil 2-500 kcmil
1527 DMCT5 200/5 200-400 2 1/2 750 kcmil 3-500 kcmil
1528 DMCT6 400/5 400-800 2 3/4 750 kcmil 4-500 kcmil
1529 DMCT7 2 200/5 200-400 3 1/2 X 4 1/2 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
1530 DMCT8 2 400/5 400-800 3 1/2 X 4 1/2 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
1531 DMCT9 2 800/5 800-1600 3 1/2 X 4 112 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
10991 DMCT10 2 1500/5 1500-3000 3 1/2 x 4 1/2 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
2 These CTs can be installed on padmount transformer bushings or the conductors.
3-0 CT Meter Information
Window Largest Single No. of Multiple
Cat. ID CU Code CT Size Amp Range Size (in.) Conductor Conductors
1524 DMCT1 100/5 50-400 1 1/8 500 kcmil 3-2/0
1525 DMCT2 200/5 100-600 1 3/8 750 kcmil 3-2/0
1526 DMCT3 400/5 100-800 1 3/8 750 kcmil 2-500 kcmil
1527 DMCT5 200/5 100-800 2 1/2 750 kcmil 3-500 kcmil
1528 DMCT6 400/5 200-1600 2 3/4 750 kcmil 4-500 kcmil
1529 DMCT7 2 200/5 100-800 3 1/2 x 4 1/2 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
1530 DMCT8 2 400/5 200-1600 3 1/2 X 4 1/2 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
1531 DMCT9 2 800/5 400-2400 3 1/2 X 4 1/2 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
10991 DMCT1 0 2 1500/5 750-3000 3 1/2 X 4 1/2 750 kcmil 6-750 kcmil
2 These CTs can be installed on padmount transformer bushings or the conductors.
R, Meter Installation Requirements

Overhead Revised 09/01 23-02-01
Primary Metering
General Information
Applicability application on new construction on 12.5-kV and
34.5-kV circuits. It will be necessary in many
The decision to install primary metering should instances to adapt the installation to existing
be made in accordance with the Meter Quality locations; in such cases the local distribution
Manual 2.1-6. The Company should,when engineer and metering personnel should be
economically and physically reasonable, install consulted prior to modifying any primary
the metering equipment at the"Point of metering installation design.
Delivery". The"Point of Delivery"can vary
depending on the applicable rate. The decision For grounding information see Section 20-03
to install primary metering should be made after pages 81 through 90 of the Overhead
review of the"Point of Delivery", applicable Distribution Design and Construction Manual.
rate and future distribution system needs with
Metering and Delivery Service Representatives. Installation Information
Scope For wire sized 350 mcm and 750 mcm
installations a 90' adapter is needed(Cat. ID
This section contains general information on the 41767), as shown below. On 1/0 connections a
design specifications for overhead primary terminal rod shall be used.
metering installations. Designs are for typical
3"
90'
3"
r., cl
350 mcm and 750 mcm 1/0
90'Adapter
E�IDiAHO
EMPOWER. Primary Metering

23-02-02 Revised 09/01 Overhead
Meter Enclosure Meter
O LIF
5'-6" 5'-6"
1-0 Detail
�V
#2 CU
6'to 8'
6'to 8'-6
Use#2 stranded bare CU wire
buried 8"from the grid. Set the
electrodes apart by 6'to 8'.
1-0 and 3-0 Primary Meter Pole
Overhead Construction
Primary Metering '� Ra
Al IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 09/01 23-02-03
Meter Enclosure Meter
O
5'-6" 5'-6„
1-0 Detail
14 V/
J
#2 CU
6'to 8'
6'to 8'
Use#2 stranded bare CU wire
buried 8"from the grid. Set the
electrodes apart by 6'to 8'.
1-0 and 3-0 Primary Meter Pole
Underground Construction
E'er IDiAHO
RNPMER. Primary Metering

23-02-04 Revised 09/01 Overhead
Source Source
Load 36 #4
Load
7
36"
o a
60 �^
Jct Box Detail
See 23-02-13
7.2/12.5 kV 1-f11
Overhead Construction
Primary Metering '� Ra
11 IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 09/01 23-02-05
Source Source
42" #4
0
36"
o c•
0 60" o
Jct Box Detail
Load See 23-02-13 Load
7.2/12.5-kV 1-0
Underground Construction
E'er IDiAHO
RNPMER. Primary Metering

23-02-06 Revised 09/01 Overhead
Source Source
42" #4
Load Load
0
36"
o c
60"
Jct Box Detail
See 23-02-13
0
19.9/34.5 kV 1-0
Overhead Construction
Primary Metering '� Ra
11 IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 09/01 23-02-07
0
Source Source
42"
0
36"
0 60" o
Load Jct Box Detail Load
See 23-02-13
19.9/34.5 kV 1-0
Underground Construction
E'er IDiAHO
RNPMER. Primary Metering

23-02-08 Revised 09/01 Overhead
0 T
X=30" 0 X=42"
1 I (This dimension also
11 applies to the apitong
DE arm)
ALI
ri
1X=30" X=46" 1X=42"
1 � 1
4
X Source Source Source
#4 Load #4 Load Load #4
0
0 0 0
48"
0 0 0
fl V°
Jct Box Detail
See 23-02-13
42"
12.5 kV 3-0
Overhead Construction
Primary Metering HPOI�N Ra
11 IDACORP CI­Y

Overhead Revised 09/01 23-02-09
e a
X=30" 0 X=42"
(This dimension also 0
1I applies to the apitong
DE arm)
X=30" X=46" 1X=42"
1
t
X
#4 #4 #4
- 24"
EE
TI
0 0 0
48"
0 0 0 0 0
Jctn Box Detail
See 23-02-13
42"
6"
12.5 kV 3-0
Underground Construction
HPOWER. Primary Metering

23-02-1 U Revised 09/01 Overhead
0
X=36" 0 X=48"
(This dimension also 0
11 11 applies to the apitong
DE arm)
IX=36" X=52" X=48"
1
X Source Source Source
#4 Load #4 Load Load #4
48"
Jct Box Detail
See 23-02-13
60"
34.5 kV 3-0
Overhead Construction
Primary Metering HPOI�N Ra
AlIDACORPCa ny

Overhead Revised 09/01 23-02-11
IL
T 0
X=36" 0 X=48"
(This dimension also 0
applies to the apitong
DE arm)
X1 =36" X=52" lX=48"'
f
X
#4 #4 #4
24"
EE
EE
48"
0 0 0
Jct Box Detail
See 23-02-13 60"
i
r
34.5 kV 3-0
Underground Construction
IDiAHO
�wPOWER. Primary Metering

23-02-12 Revised 09/01 Overhead
Yellow#10 Green#10
Red#10
r Black#12
I
Blue#12 O
O`r�a�nge#12
0 0 0
LL
iE
t t
I i F- White#12
O O
Red Black Black Red Black Black Red Black Black Red
O I_I I_I I_I I_I I_I I_I O
I_I I_I I_I I_I I_I I_I
Oo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
— Black#12
Black.. .-
— Red#12
Red#10 Green#8
— Blue#12
Blue#10 White#10
Bare CU#10
3-0 Meter Base Wiring Diagram
Primary Metering HPOI�N Ra
11IDACaRPCI­Y

r� x
CD
_ O CL
CD
X
0 O
�I
3 0
td O
CD
d
B Red#10
D Blue#10
F Black#10
CD W Q G White#10
Ln
N
_+ Q
0T
W y
x
0
A Red#12
C Blue#12
E Black#12
H Green#8
K
� N
C N
(Q W

Overhead Revised 10/21 23-02-21
4 Pole Example. Specifics depend on local needs.Refer to Stations"Standard Generation Interconnect Equipment Structural Details"
21 D-61192 AutoCAD drawing.
TO POLE 4 POLE 3 POLE 2 POLE 1
Producer
By
Producer —
i ) Fused ' Disconnects
Disconnect
Y _Disconnect(Solid Lightning CT,sy\11
Blade for Producer)
Overhead or Arrestor -
�`
Underground per 15KVA XFMR 1
Distribution Design 15KVA Transformer AUX Switch Assembly - Coordinate with COEC for US Power
Meter CTs—'o- Lightning
(Synchronizing)-� _ -Apparatus Engineer for !r �.-'� Arrestor
-�- r ordering Relay CTs )
By Producer Meter PT's
J-Box#1=2(Relay Ct's)-i. 4'f J-Box#1(Meter CT/PT)
Pull Box Only
To Producer—�� Recloser
PG
DRVVWE
Neutrel I
Overhead or
Underground
per
Distribution NOTE:
Red highlight shows
what is included in
CU Code DPOLE4
Gint Box
1 r Meter Box AC Load Center
I
_ Relay Test Box
--Lines Crew to install On Control Design
Stub Conduits _ j j per tro hop
Crew
outside Ground Mat .fir*(", Control Crew to
terminate all conductors. 48•' 3"PVC
48"
Finish Grade 30 e' to Gint Box
w
To Producer{ , 2-2"PVC
_ Ground Rod Ground Rod Ground Rod _ Ground Rod
6"PVC - 1 per pole �� 1 per pole 1 per pole -- 1 per pole
25
All Poles
NOTES:1)Refer to Section 11 for framing of all 4 poles. 2)Consult Metering Department for sizing of Cogen Primary Metering PTs and 2 sets of 3,CTs in series. 3)Refer to details online diagram
design of controls.Contact your station's control engineer for control and protection. 4)Can be 19.9kV or 7.2kV primary depending on system voltage.5)Refer to OH page 20-03-67 details on
Recloser grounding 6)Refer to OH pages 23-02-03 and 20-03-83 details on Primary Overhead-Overhead grounding.6)Pole 1 and Pole 4 to have deadend arms.7)Verify syncing Transformer
JDAW Phasing(Control Group). 8)Distribution Line Crew to coordinate Knockout Tool rental.9)Coordinate Primary Phasing with Stations Single Line.
ON_-POWER
",Fr.a�.• Cogeneration Primary Meter Package

Overhead Revised 06/97 23-03-01
Meter Bases
Scope Three-Phase Meter Bases Under 250
Volts
These specifications cover all self-contained
meter bases and 30 transformer-rated meter For"single-position"self-contained meter base
bases. installations on three-phase service under 250
volts, safety-socket meter bases with factory-
General installed test bypass facilities are allowed if they
conform to EUSERC (Electric Utility Service
The customer or contractor must furnish meter Equipment Requirements Committee) guidelines
bases for all installations except single-phase and are supplied with an interlocking device, a
and three-phase current transformer installations. screw-type meter ring, and sealed with a single
Except when installed on company property, all padlock seal.
meter bases or enclosures furnished,either by
the Company or the customer,will be installed For"multi-position"self-contained meter base
by the contractor and incorporated into the installations on three-phase service under 250
customer's wiring. The cost will be borne by the volts, safety-socket meter bases with factory-
customer. installed test bypass facilities are allowed if they
conform to EUSERC guidelines.
Meter bases installed in the area served by the
Idaho Power Company must be UL approved Single-Phase and Three-Phase Meter
and meet Company specifications and all Bases Over 250 Volts
applicable codes. Combination socket and
disconnecting devices are approved provided the For all new"single-position" self-contained
base meets all other specifications and is wired meter base installations on single- and three-
on the line-side of the customer's disconnecting phase service over 250 volts,the customer must
device. Corrosion inhibitor shall be used on all provide a means of de-energizing and isolating
connections to aluminum conductors. the meter base that is acceptable to the Idaho
Bypass bases must be pre-approved by Idaho Power Company.There are two acceptable
Power.No lever type bypass bases will be means of isolation:
approved. 1. Install a safety socket meter base with
Idaho Power will not provide new three-phase factory-installed test bypass facilities that
conforms to EUSERC guidelines, and that is
three-wire self-contained service. supplied with an interlocking device, a
screw-type meter ring, and sealed with a
single padlock seal, or
E''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Meter Bases

23-03-02 Revised 06/97 Overhead
2. Install a non-fused"meter isolation facilities that conforms to EUSERC guidelines,
disconnect"on the line side of the meter or 2)Install a non-fused"meter isolation
base. This disconnect is installed in addition disconnect"on the line side of the meter base.
to, and is not to be used as,the customer's This disconnect is installed in addition to,and is
service disconnect.The meter isolation not to be used as,the customer's service
disconnect must be supplied with sealing disconnect.The meter isolation disconnect must
capabilities. be supplied with sealing capabilities.
For all new"multi-position"self-contained Test Bypass Meter Bases
meter base installations on single-and three-
phase service over 250 volts,the customer must Only bases that appear on the following lists
provide a means of de-energizing and isolating may be installed in the Idaho Power service
the meter base that is acceptable to the Idaho area. Note: All bases must have the interlock
Power Company.There are two acceptable installed prior to meter installation.
means of isolation: 1)Install a safety socket
meter base with factory-installed test bypass
Table 1. Idaho Power Company Approved Single-Position Self-Contained Test Bypass
Meter Bases for Installation on Single-Phase Overhead
Volts Terminals Amps Model Number Interlock
Challenger
480 max 4 100 SSMP10-5 NA
4 100 SS10-5 NA
4 200 SSM20-56 NA
4 200 SS20-5 NA
Circle AW
480 max 4 100 214MTBMS-15 MS20
4 100 214MTBPMS-15 MS20
4 200 224MTBMS-15 MS20
4 200 224MTBPMS-15 MS20
600 max 4 100 114TB MS20
4 200 124TB MS20
Crouse-Hinds
600 max 4 100 BY110GK WBYBC
4 200 BY120GK WBYBC
Milbank
600 max 4 100 1147E-RP NA
480 max 4 100 214MTB-48-RP NA
480 max 4 100 214MTB-P48-RP NA
600 max 4 200 124TB-RP NA
480 max 4 200 224MTB-48-RP NA
480 max 4 200 224MTB-P48-RP NA
Meter Bases WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 06/97 23-03-03
Table 2. Idaho Power Company Approved Single-Position Self-Contained Test Bypass
Meter Bases for Installation on Single-Phase Underground
Volts Terminals Amps Model Number Interlock
Challenger
480 max 4 100 SS10-5 NA
4 100 SSM10-56U NA
4 200 SS20-5 NA
4 200 SSM20-56U NA
Circle AW
480 max 4 100 U214MTBMS-15 MS20
4 100 U214MTBPMS-15 MS20
4 200 U224MTBMS-15 MS20
4 200 U224MTBPMS-15 MS20
600 max 4 100 114TB MS20
4 200 124TB MS20
Crouse-Hinds
600 max 4 100 BY110GK WBYBC
4 200 BY120GK WBYBC
Milbank
600 max 4 100 114TB-RP NA
480 max 4 100 U214MTB-48-RP NA
480 max 4 100 U214MTB-P48-RP NA
600 max 4 200 124TB-RP NA
480 max 4 200 U224MTB-48-RP NA
480 max 4 200 U2241VITB-P48-RP NA
ONPOMR,. Meter Bases

23-03-04 Revised 06/97 Overhead
Table 3. Idaho Power Company Approved Single-Position Self-Contained Test Bypass
Meter Bases for Installation on Three-Phase Four-Wire Overhead
Volts Terminals Amps Model Number Interlock
Circle AW
480 max 7 100 217MTB MS20
7 100 217MTBH MS20
7 100 217MTBP MS20
7 200 227MTB MS20
7 200 227MTBH MS20
7 200 227MTBP MS20
600 max 7 100 117TB MS20
7 200 127TB MS20
Crouse-Hinds
240 max 7 100 BY111JU WBYBC
7 200 BY125JU WBYBC
7 100 BY119JU WBYBC
7 200 BY129JU WBYBC
7 100 BY110JO WBYBC
7 200 BY120JO WBYBC
7 100 BY111JO WBYBC
7 200 BY125JO WBYBC
600 max 7 100 BY110JK WBYBC
7 100 BY120JK WBYBC
Milbank
240 max 7 100 217MTB-RP NA
7 100 217MTB-P-RP NA
7 200 227MTB-RP NA
7 200 227MTB-P-RP NA
480 max 7 100 217MTB-48-RP NA
7 100 217MTB-P48-RP NA
7 200 227MTB-48-RP NA
7 200 227MTB-P48-RP NA
600 max 7 100 117TB-RP NA
7 200 127TB-RP NA
Square D
480 max 7 100 EM71 NRB W/EMB-3C
7 200 EM72NRB W/EMB-3C
Meter Bases ` R

Overhead Revised 06/97 23-03-05
Table 4. Idaho Power Company Approved Single-Position Self-Contained Test Bypass
Meter Bases for Installation on Three-Phase Four-Wire Underground
Volts Terminals Amps Model Number Interlock
Circle AW
480 max 7 100 U217MTB MS20
7 100 U217MTBH MS20
7 100 U217MTBP MS20
7 200 U227MTB MS20
7 200 U227MTBH MS20
7 200 U227MTBP MS20
600 max 7 100 117TB MS20
7 200 127TB MS20
Crouse-Hinds
240 max 7 100 BY111JU WBYBC
7 200 BY125JU WBYBC
7 100 BY110JO WBYBC
7 200 BY120JO WBYBC
7 100 BY111JO WBYBC
7 200 BY125JO WBYBC
600 max 7 100 BY110JK WBYBC
7 200 BY120JK WBYBC
Milbank
600 max 7 100 117TB-RP NA
240 max 7 100 U217-MTB-RP NA
480 max 7 100 U217-MTB-48-RP NA
240 max 7 100 U217-MTB-P-RP NA
480 max 7 100 U217-MTB-P48-RP NA
600 max 7 200 127TB-RP NA
240 max 7 200 U227-MTB-RP NA
480 max 7 200 U227-MTB-48-RP NA
240 max 7 200 U227-MTB-P-RP NA
480 max 7 200 U227-MTB-P48-RP NA
Table 5. Idaho Power Company Approved Multi-Position Self-Contained Test Bypass
Meter Bases for Installation on Three-Phase Four-Wire
Volts Terminals Amps Model Number Interlock
Challenger
480 max 7 200 SCMM NA
General Electric
480 max 7 100 IEMCME731 EP NA
7 200 IEMCME732EP NA
Square D
240 max 7 200 CME722E NA
480 max 7 100 CME731 EP NA
7 200 CME732EB NA
7 200 CME732EP NA
ONPOMR,. Meter Bases

Overhead Revised 06/97 24-00-01
Table of Contents
24- Operation & Safety
24-01-01 Handling of PCBs 24-10-01 Clearance Tags
Scope Scope
What are PCBs? Clearance Tag Hook
Why the Concern? Clearance Tag Card
Exposure to PCBs Clearance Tag Envelop
Rules and Regulations 24-10-02 Clearance Tag Flag
24-01-02 Labeling and Marking Clearance Tag Clamp
24-01-08 PCB Spill Clean-Up Tools and Clearance Tag Clamp Installer
Materials Hot Line Hold Card
24-02-01 Handling and Disposal of Treated
Wood
Scope
Introduction-Wood Preservatives
24-02-02 Proper Precautions for Handling
Preservative Treated Wood
Disposal of Treated Wood
Emergency Treatment for Penta
IDAHO
NPOMR. Table of Contents

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-01-01
Handling of PCBs
Scope available in Company Stores to aid in limiting
exposure to PCBs.
This section provides some very limited
introductory information on PCBs, and on the When working around PCBs,practice good
labeling of equipment or containers filled with hygiene.Wash hands thoroughly before eating,
PCBs or PCB contaminated material. Employees drinking, smoking,or using toilet facilities. In
are directed to the PCB Procedures Manual for case of contact,wash the skin with a waterless
the latest detailed information on this subject. hand cleaner.Dispose of all rags and paper
towels that were used only in PCB containers.
What are PCBs?
If PCB gets in the eyes,follow general first aid
The fire resistant insulating fluids which were practices. Flush the eyes with a large amount of
used in capacitors and some transformers from water for at least 15 minutes and consult a
1930 to 1976 are called PCBs (Polychlorinated physician.
Biphenyls). Askarel is one common name for
these insulating fluids.A whole family of PCB If a PCB compound is ingested,consult a
compounds were produced. The PCB physician immediately.
compounds used in capacitors and transformers The odor of PCB fluids is noticeable well below
are considered the least toxic of the group.
the maximum air concentration considered safe.
Why the Concern? PCB vapors have some degree of toxicity and
should not be inhaled over a prolonged period.
PCBs give rise for concern because of their
continuing accumulation in the food chain. Their Rules and Regulations
long-term genetic and ecological effects are not
yet completely understood. For these reasons, The Environmental Protection Agency
care should be taken to contain PCBs and publishes required procedures for handling,
minimize their entry into the environment. labeling, and disposing of capacitors and
transformers containing PCBs. These strict
Exposure to PCBs guidelines are intended to control the
disposal of PCB contaminants. The rules
It is generally accepted that exposure to a require an affirmative action in cleaning up
capacitor-grade PCB is not hazardous providing spills from broken or ruptured capacitors or
simple precautions are followed. Direct transformers. The PCB Procedures Manual
exposure should be avoided.Plastic gloves, details PCB clean-up and disposal
aprons, and other protective equipment are requirements.
M''_IDiAHO
�wPOWER Handling of PCBs

24-01-02 Revised 01/98 Overhead
Labeling and Marking non-PCB,must be marked with a 6" x 6" yellow
"CAUTION-CONTAINS PCBs"label(also
Three classifications have been established for referred to as a PCB mark).
the identification of PCB concentrations.
PCB (500 ppm and above).PCB equipment,
Non-PCB (Less than 50 ppm). There are no including equipment both in-service and in-
regulations requiring the labeling of equipment inventory at a stores location,must be labeled
having PCB concentrations in this range. An with a yellow"CAUTION- CONTAINS PCBs"
IPCo practice has been established to label mark. A 4" x 4" mark is to be used on individual
equipment that has been identified by the shunt and series capacitor cans not installed in a
manufacturer or by testing verified by a gas rack. The 6" x 6"mark is used for all other PCB
chromatograph to contain a PCB level below 50 applications,including PCB pad-mounted
ppm. This 2" x 4" adhesive backed vinyl"NON- capacitors,PCB distribution and power
PCB"label eliminates unnecessary retesting of transformers,racks containing PCB capacitors,
this oil filled equipment. The label has white and barrels containing PCB leaking capacitors,
letters on a blue background. The label should liquid PCBs,or contaminated spill materials.
be placed on capacitor cans and overhead The mark is also applied to a plate and located
transformers in a location where it can be seen on the fence next to the gate at substations
from the ground.Most capacitor cans are having PCB capacitor banks. The use of these
already so marked by the manufacturer. Pad- labels is summarized in the table appearing on
mounted transformers should be labeled on the the next page,and on the illustrations on the
inside of the secondary compartment in a visible following two pages.Use of a magnetic version
location(usually near the nameplate). of this mark on transporting vehicles is also
described on the next page.
Fi - 031 1 PCB
• CAUTIONI
I CONTAINS
(Polychlorinated Biphenyls) I
Non-PCB Label(8791) I A toxic n enviromental contami
ti
special handling and disposs. a
I U.S.Environmental Protection +i
40 CFR761 NFor Disposal Info
PCB Contaminated(50-499 ppm). In-service the nearest U.S.E.P.A.Offm.
I NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN,
PCB contaminated equipment does not require In case of accident or spill,cal
Coast Guard National Respon Q
the use of a label. I 800:424-8802
Also Contact Idaho Poe'
t�m
Tel
No. 208-383-2826. Ca
Barrels containing oil(tested and found to have L ,,,,� 5
more than 50 ppm),rags, soil,or other material
contaminated by an oil spill or during its clean- 4"x 4" PCB Mark(8784)
up,unless the spilled material is known to be 6"x 6" PCB Mark(8785)
Handling of PCBs Ra
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-01-03
Use of the"CAUTION- CONTAINS PCBs"Label (Mark)
PCB Device Type Location Label Size/Type Label Location 2
a.Individual Shunt or Distribution 4" x 4" Vinyl End of each capacitor
Capacitor Can 1 Series-Shunt (in service) can
b.Capacitor Barrel 6"x 6"Vinyl On side and top
c.Pad-Mounted Distribution 6"x 6"Vinyl Control compartment
Capacitor Bank Substation door
d.Transformers Distribution 6"x 6"Vinyl Below nameplate
(over 500 ppm) Power Plants
e.Substation Capacitor Shunt Substation 6"x 6"Vinyl On internal fence
Bank with Internal or on next to each gate
Fence Series 6"x 6"Metal Plate
f. Substation Capacitor Shunt Substation 6"x 6"Vinyl On one leg of
Bank without or on capacitor bank
Internal Fence Series 6"x 6"Metal Plate structure
g.Transport 6" x 6" Vinyl Each end and
Vehicle 3 each side of truck
NOTES: EPA rules require the use of signs whenever
transporting:
1. Capacitor cans containing PCBs,that are either
not installed or are removed for disposal,shall be a. Transformers classified as PCB (over 500
individually labeled(marked)as indicated in"a" ppm)
above. b. Barrels of untested oil, soil,or other
2. In-service PCB contaminated equipment contaminated material picked up from a spill
(under 500 ppm)need not be marked. and being sent for disposal
3. Apply temporary PCB marks (magnetic c. Dump truck load of contaminated soil or
signs)on both truck doors and on both ends of debris
trucks hauling PCBs. Shipping papers may be d. Ten or more gallons of untested oil or oil
required(refer to Section 8 in the Hazardous over 50 ppm not contained inside electrical
Materials Transportation Manual). Remove the equipment
temporary signs upon removal of the PCB
material.
Magnetic Signs
Magnetic Sign
r_
0 0 0
E-•-IDAHO
�wPOWER Handling of PCBs

24-01-04 Revised 01/98 Overhead
Labeling an Individual Capacitor Can.The
end of each capacitor can must be marked
whenever it is removed from a rack.When the
capacitors are mounted on a rack, several
options are acceptable:
1. Mark the ends of each individual _
capacitor, or I PCB_�I 4"X 4"
2. Mark the rack or one leg of the structure _ PCs Mark
supporting the rack(see next page), or
3. If the bank is inside a separately fenced
area within a substation,mark the fence
on each side of the gate of that
separately fenced area(see next page).
Note: the only remaining PCB capacitors on the
IPCo system are located within substations; all
distribution PCB capacitors have been removed
from service and sent to an approved disposal
facility. "'
.411g14@11 ao
poi
Labeling a Barrel Containing Leaking, ,�-
Capacitor Cans or Contaminated Materials
for Disposal.Place PCB marks on opposite
sides near the top of the barrel.
�•�� 611X611
Labeling a Pad-Mounted or Metal-Clad a PCB Mark
Capacitor Bank.Place a PCB mark on the k;-y,.
control compartment door,adjacent to the door � 1
handle.The individual capacitor cans inside the
compartment do not need to be marked.
cc`
—;_
6"x 6"
PCB Mark
Handling of PCBs R"
a�lo"CORPC­"Y

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-01-05
Labeling a PCB Transformer. Place a PCB Labeling a Substation Capacitor Bank
mark below the transformer nameplate. Without an Internal Fence.Place a PCB label
NOTE:EPA classifies transformers as PCB five feet above the ground on one leg of the
transformers if the PCB concentration is greater structure.As an alternate to marking the
than 500 parts per million(ppm). See page 24- structure, each individual can could be labeled
01-02. with a 4" x 4" mark.
PCB I
I I 5
6"x 6"
PCB Mark NOTE: PCB marks are not placed on the fence
surrounding the substation yard. They are placed
on a fence only when the capacitor bank fence is
separate from and inside the station yard fence.
Labeling a Substation Capacitor Bank Within
an Internal Fence.On a double gate internal
fence,place PCB marks on each side of the gate.
On a single gate fence,place a PCB mark on the
latch side of the gate.
\
5'
6"x 6"
PCB Marks
A'�10RHO
�wPOWER Handling of PCBs

24-01-06 Revised 01/98 Overhead
A PCB Information Label is applied to barrels, A DOT Hazard Class 9 Label, Catalog ID
PCB transformer carcasses,or other containers 8790, is required by the Department of
used for the storage of PCB contaminated Transportation to be attached to all containers
equipment. It is also applied to drums containing holding more than one pound of PCBs being
oil,clean-up materials, soil, etc.,whether PCB shipped. The one-pound weight applies the PCB
contaminated or not.Using an indelible marking in its pure state. Rather than face the
pen(e.g. Sanford Sharpie),the label is checked complication of calculating the pure weight of
and noted to indicate the nature of the contents, diluted PCBs in a container,we recommend that
the level of contamination,pertinent dates, and this label be applied to each non-bulk package
reference to associated reports. The out-of- (drum,pallet,transformer, etc.)that is labeled
service date,in-storage date,type of material, with the PCB Mark or being transported with
serial number,and weight are all required by the shipping papers or a manifest.
EPA.The information label should be placed on
the top and sides of the container.
Important Instructions: The following
requirements must be met in filling out the Out
of Service and In Storage dates:
❑ CAPACITOR
O TRANSFORMER 9
SER. N0. MFG._
O RAGS6
O SOIL PPM
❑ LIQUIDS DOT Hazard Class 9 Label (8790)
❑ OTHER
FROM LOCATION
DATE OUT OF SERVICE
DATE IN STORAGE
OILSPILL REPORT NO.
BY WEIGHT
PCB Information Label (8787)
• Date Out of Service.For drums,this is
the date the first material is placed in the
drum. For transformers being sent to the
M&E Shop, leave this blank.The M&E
Shop will determine if the transformer will
be taken out of service.
• Date in Storage.This is the date the
material is placed in our approved PCB
storage facility at Boise Bench.
orMIDAW
Handling of PCBs WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-01-07
A Waste for Disposal Shipping Label,Catalog
ID 8789,is to be attached to all containers of P 40,
PCB filled or contaminated material and RQ
equipment that is to be shipped to an approved
disposal facility.After the necessary information WASTE FOR DISPOSAL
has been entered on the label,it is attached to FEDERALAW PRoNI6IT5IM-11---
each 55 gallon barrel or other sealed enclosure.
For non-leaking PCB capacitors in pallet boxes,
the label can be attached to each shipping pallet °
box.
HANDLE WITH CARE
A Unique Item Number Label is applied by CONTAINS TOXIC WASTE
stores personnel to PCB transformers, drums,
boxes,etc.,before the items are put into an Waste for Disposal Label (8789)
approved storage facility. The label provides
space for writing a unique number assigned by
the T&D Department to each container. This UNIQUE ITEM NUMBER
number is applied using a permanent marking
pen, such as the Sanford"Sharpie".
Refer to the PCB Procedures Manual, Station
Design & Construction Manual section 6.60
page 3, and Distribution Design & Construction Unique Item Number Label (8786)
Manual page 17-04-03 for additional
information.
A PCB Contaminated Label is used on PCB
contaminated transformers that are being
transported to the M&E Transformer Shop from
division stores.The use of the label will I PCB CONTAMINATED I
eliminate retesting of the transformer when it is I PPM I
received in Boise. It is not to be used to identify
contaminated transformers that are still in
service. Use a Sharpie or equivalent permanent PCB Contaminated Label (8788)
marking pen to enter the parts per million level
of PCB contamination onto the label.
E''Q-IDiAHO
POWER° Handling of PCBs

24-01-08 Revised 01/98 Overhead
PCB Spill Clean-up Tools and Heavy weight plastic bags are used to hold dirt,
Materials rags, snow,absorbent pads, and other items
during hazardous material clean-up. These 38 x
Specialized protective clothing,tools, and 60 inch bags are made of 6 mil plastic. The use
materials have been designated for use when of plastic bags in handling hazardous material is
cleaning up a PCB spill.These items are for field use and temporary storage only.
described in detail in the Tools and the Materials Hazardous material must be put in a proper
Manuals. Items currently evaluated and barrel container(Catalog ID 6361 for solids, or
approved for this purpose may be found on the 6362 for liquids) as soon as possible.
following pages of these referenced manuals:
Note: Leaking transformers that are too large to
Materials fit in a bag can be placed in a white bin available
Item Manual from Stores.
Disposable gloves 602-3000
Disposable protective clothing 602-3000
Hazardous material clean-up bags 602-3050
Oil absorbent pads 602-3040
Oil absorbent socks 602-3030
Diatomaceous earth 620-1051
Parts&equipment cleaning solvent 620-0650 60"
Materials
Item Manual
Yellow plastic barricade tape 119-01-02
Orange plastic fence mesh 119-01-01 — _
f 38.�1
Some of the more commonly used clean-up
materials are briefly identified and
illustrated below. �.
Disposable protective clothing must be worn
whenever a person is working with or around r
hazardous material and when there is a chance
of coming in contact with the contaminated
material. The approved clothing includes light-
weight grey vinyl coveralls, shirts,pants,
seamless vinyl gloves, and plastic boot
protectors.All components of this suit are
disposable, and must be disposed of properly *,
when contaminated. Refer to the Materials
Manual for Catalog IDs, sizes, and approved #'
manufacturers of disposable protective clothing,
including gloves, coveralls, shirts,pants,and
boot protectors.
orMIDAW
Handling of PCBs WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-01-09
Clean-up pads in two different designs are of the flowing oil. Its wicking action is
stocked for oil spills: exceptionally efficient and allows for the
absorption of 1/2 to 3/4 gallon of fluid per sock.
Flame Resistant Pad 6585
Standard Clean-up Pad 6586
0 ff f
1. Flame Resistant Oil Spill Clean-up Pads
(6585).These pads provide, according to the n f
manufacturer,high flame resistance.They cost
more than the standard pads, and should be used
only around shop activities where grinding or
All-Fluids Absorbent Sock
cutting equipment is being used and sparks or 6583
flames may be present.The flame resistance of
these pads applies only to the dry pad.Any oil 2. The Oil-Only,3" x 48" absorbent sock
that has been absorbed by the pads would,of (Catalog ID 6584)is used to control an oil spill
course, still be flammable. which has reached water.The sock will float on
water and absorbs oil from the surface of the
2. Standard Oil Spill Clean-up Pads(6586). water with a skimming action. It does not restrict
These pads are much lower in cost and should be the flow of water. Each sock has the capacity of
used for most oil clean-up applications. absorbing 3/4 gallon of oil.A typical application
would be an oil containment and clean-up
Both kinds of pads will absorb oil spilled on operation at a location where it is raining, or
water or land. They will soak up to 25 times where the oil has reached a body of water.Note:
their weight in petroleum products. For spills on These oil-only socks cost up to 5 times that of
water,they will remain floating both before and the standard absorbent socks;hence they should
after saturation with oil. Each carton of not be used where the standard sock will do the
approximately 100 pads will absorb up to 58 job.
gallons of oil.
Absorbent socks,also referred to as "Pigs", are �----"—�'
stocked in two different designs.Although `
similar in appearance,they have distinctly
different applications. - - - _
1. The standard 3" x 46" absorbent sock .. f
(Catalog ID 6583)is used to control oil spills
where a little water is present.This sock absorbs
all liquids, including water and oil. It should be
placed on the floor or ground so that it surrounds Oil-Only Absorbent Sock
the leaking equipment,or so that it is in the path 6584
E''�ID 0
EMPOWER. Handling of PCBs

24-01-10 Revised 01/98 Overhead
Diatomaceous earth(diatomite, or kieselguhr) The tape is packaged on a reel inside a heavy
is a naturally occurring,highly absorbent cardboard box enabling one to dispense and
material,mostly formed from fossilized retract the tape, and to keep it tangle-free and
skeletons of planktonic algae. Its porous ready for use.The poly tape is coated with an
structure allows it to absorb from 100%to 166% ultraviolet inhibitor to prevent fading.
of its own weight in oil or water.
Orange polyethylene plastic fence mesh is
used with steel fence posts driven into the
ground to provide a secure barrier. It is primarily
�Sp used to barricade trenches and excavation sites
,•� 248 in underground construction areas where
pedestrians or livestock might be in danger of
falling into the hole. It could also be used at an
® _
oil clean-up site. It offers the features of very
high visibility, strength normally associated with
wire netting,no sharp edges,portability, and
Coarse Fine easy set-up.
6733 6734
Although diatomaceous earth is widely used by The fencing may be used in conjunction with
many as a filter material, Idaho Power uses it cones,wood barricades, and barricade sign
primarily for cleanup of oil spills. stands (see Section 119 in the Tools Manual)to
further isolate the construction or clean-up area.
The coarse version has been used as a general
pick-up/floor-sweeping compound in our shops.
The fine version is more absorbent and expected
to be more efficient for use in the field. Each bag t
contains 33-1/3 pounds of absorbent. �f
Yellow barricade tape printed with the message
"CAUTION DO NOT ENTER"is used to mark 4'x 164' 8487
off temporary hazardous or restricted areas. Tx 164' 8488
6'x 100' 8489
6'steel posts 8490
0
CAUTION DO NOT ENTER
The primary application of the tape is to
barricade any area where an oil spill has
occurred. The purpose is to keep all
unauthorized personnel out of the area during
clean-up operations, especially if there might be
PCB contamination. The tape should be included
as part of all PCB Spill Kits.
orMIDAM
Handling of PCBs WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-01-1 1
Parts&Equipment Cleaning Solvent is d. Transfer the oil sample from the pipette
stocked in 55-gallon drums or in 1-pint syringe to a clean glass vial, fill out and
containers for use in wiping down parts and attach an identifying label to the vial, and
equipment contaminated with oil or PCBs.The ship the sample,with a Request for Oil
same solvent is also used as a replacement for Sample Analysis form,to the laboratory at
trichloroethane to clean primary cable during the M&E Shops. Consider the syringe and
preparation for splicing and terminating. tubing to be contaminated and handle and
dispose accordingly.
Transformer Oil Sampling Tools,illustrated on
the next page,are used to obtain an oil sample e. Two options are available for sealing the
hole in the tank:
for PCB testing from an overhead distribution
transformer.All of these tools are described The method preferred by most of the
further on page 121-06-01 in the Tools Manual. operating personnel is to use the longer 1/8 x
THE WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED WITH 3/8" stainless steel self plugging rivet(8709)
THE TRANSFORMER DE-ENERGIZED. The with a neoprene backed washer to seal the
following procedure is prescribed for this task: hole. Before securing the rivet,make sure
that the paint is not cracked or chipped. If
1. If the transformer has a pressure relief valve, either condition exists, scrape the paint
remove the valve and use the disposable syringe down to bare metal and then apply the
and pipette tubing to draw the oil sample washer/rivet assembly.
through the opening where the valve was
located. Replace the pressure relief valve. If the temperature is above 32°F, an alternate
method is the hole can be filled with a rivet
2. If a pressure relief valve is not present,and and sealed using epoxy. Insert a 1/8 x 1/8"
if there is no plug where a valve would normally stainless steel self plugging pop rivet(8699)
be installed,the following technique is used to into the hole and secure using the rivet gun.
draw the oil sample: Thoroughly clean the area around the rivet
using the approved cable and parts cleaning
a. A collet has been manufactured by the solvent(Catalog ID 6699). Seal the opening
M&E shops to hold a#27 drill bit. The drill by applying a coating of epoxy resin using
bit is installed so that 0.075 inch projects the 2-part syringe dispenser.
beyond the face of the collet. Install the
collet in a cordless drill and drill a hole into f. If paint was removed in step e above,
the transformer tank at a location 1 inch repaint the area using the sky gray paint
below the lid. The collet prevents the bit available in an aerosol spray can.
from drilling all of the way through the tank
wall,thus preventing any steel fragments g. If the test indicates that the transformer
from getting inside the transformer tank. is in the non-PCB category,the transformer
The hole location will be above the oil level may be so identified with a NON-PCB label,
in the transformer.When the drill bit as described on page 24-01-02. If, on the
becomes dull,return the collet to the shops other hand,the transformer tests either
to have the bit sharpened and reset to 0.075 contaminated or PCB,mark the transformer
inch. accordingly,and follow the notification
b. Complete the penetration into the instructions specified in the PCB Procedures
transformer tank using the shop-made punch Manual.
that contains a replaceable Hilti point. The
point should be replaced after it has become
bent or dull.
c. Use the disposable pipette syringe and
plastic tubing to draw a sample of the oil
from the transformer.
E''�IDiAHO
�wPOWER Handling of PCBs

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-02-01
Handling and Disposal of Treated Wood
Scope The inorganic arsenicals use arsenic, copper, and
chromium compounds in their formulation for
This section provides information on the preserving wood. They have been used by the
recommended practices for handling and wood preservative industry since the 1930's.
disposal of treated wood products, including Use of this preservative can be readily identified
penta-treated poles,crossarms, and timbers. by the green color of the wood caused by the
copper salts in the compound. This treatment has
Introduction -Wood Preservatives been used on a very limited number of poles
purchased by Idaho Power for evaluation
Wood products exposed to moisture and oxygen purposes.
are subject to decay. Essentially all wood decay
is caused by fungi, a microscopic organism that Wood poles purchased by Idaho Power are
destroys the wood cells through a process of protected from decay by penta preservative.
digestion. Some species of wood, such as Penta has also been used since the 1930's
redwood and cedar are more resistant to decay and is by far the most commonly used
than other species, such as fir or pine. But even preservative for treating wood poles. Most
the naturally durable woods lose this durability cedar poles have only the butt portion
when subjected to the high decay conditions treated because the natural resistance of the
found in contact with moist soil. species protects the pole from most causes
Protection of the wood from decay and from of decay encountered above ground.
insect damage is achieved by impregnating the Douglas-fir and lodgepole pine poles lack
wood with chemicals that are toxic to the fungi this natural resistance to decay and are
organisms and insects. Several different treated their full length. Penta in its pure
chemical preservatives have been used for many state is actually a white, needle like
years by the wood pole manufacturers. These crystalline solid. It is nearly insoluble in
include pentachlorophenol("penta"),creosote, water, so petroleum oil is used as a solvent
and inorganic arsenicals(ACA,ACZA, and and carrier to deliver the preservative to the
CCA). wood fibers. The oil coating on the surface
Creosote is a blend of several of the fractions of poles is mineral oil with small amounts of
produced during the distillation of coal tar. It has penta in solution. The same preservative was
been used as a wood preservative since the used both in the poles that are lightly stained
1800's and has been widely applied for treating and clean to the touch, and the poles that are
railroad ties,bridge timbers, and marine pilings. covered with a thick tar-like coating. The
Poles purchased by Idaho Power have NOT been only difference is in how much sludge was
treated with creosote.However,creosote is one allowed to accumulate in the pressure retort
component in the preservative applied at caused by constant recycling of the oil
groundline by the retreatment contractors. carrier, and how careful the manufacturer
was in cleaning the poles at the end of the
E'er IDAHO
RMIRMER. Handling and Disposal of Treated Wood

24-02-02 Revised 01/98 Overhead
preservative application process. Full length Disposal of Treated Wood
treated poles purchased by Idaho Power will be The EPA directive does allow for disposal of
cleaner in the future because of tighter purchase treated wood by ordinary trash collection or
specification that require that the poles be clean burial. Treated wood should not be burned in
and dry. Bleeders will not be accepted(see open fires or in stoves,fireplaces,or residential
Materials Manual page 410-0012). boilers because toxic chemicals may be
A number of other pole preservative compounds produced as part of the smoke or ashes.
are under development by the wood pole NOTE: Oregon rules are more restrictive than
industry and these will be evaluated by Idaho Idaho and Nevada for the disposal of treated
Power as they become available. wood. Contact Kirk Clarich in the Safety
Department for the latest regulations in Oregon.
Proper Precautions For Handling Additional,more stringent requirements apply to
Preservative Treated Wood poles that have been internally treated with
chloropicrin("Timberfume")or vapam
All three of the preservative substances ("Woodfume"). Presence of this treatment is
discussed in the introduction section are EPA- indicated by a special tag on the pole. These
registered pesticides. The safe handling and poles cannot be released to a customer for at
disposal of materials treated with these least one year after the date of application. See
preservatives requires the use of the following the date nail on the treatment tag. After one year
EPA recommended precautions: the chemical will have dissipated to the point
a. Avoid frequent or prolonged inhalation of that the pole may be disposed of as with any
sawdust from treated wood.A dust mask and other Penta treated pole.
goggles over safety glasses should be worn Treated wood products sold or released to
when using a chain saw to cut a treated pole. parties outside Idaho Power shall have warning
b. Avoid frequent or prolonged skin contact notices issued to each receiver of the wood
with treated wood. It is advisable to wear a product.Warning notices may be obtained from
long sleeve shirt,long pants, and regular the Records Center.A reduced sample of this
lineman's leather or rubber gloves when notice(Idaho Power form SFT 009)is shown on
working on treated poles and crossarms. the next page.
c. Avoid ingesting the treatment by using good Emergency Treatment for Penta
hygiene and wash hands and other exposed If penta gets in your eyes, flush with large
areas thoroughly before eating, drinking, or amounts of water for at least 15 minutes and
using tobacco products. consult a physician as soon as possible.
d. When work clothes show an accumulation of If penta contacts your skin or clothing,remove
the oily preservative,they should be the contaminated clothes and wash your skin and
laundered before reuse. These work clothes clothes with soap and water.Notify your
should be washed separately from other supervisor and seek medical examination if you
household clothing. develop a skin rash or chloroacne.
Handling and Disposal of Treated Wood WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/98 24-02-03
Idaho WAIRN G
Safety
Power Department
Some wood products or parts of wood products have been treated with EPA registered
preservatives,creosote,penta chlorophenol,timberfume or woodfume.Buning or cut-
ting of the treated portions of these wood products is prohibited as it may release toxic
fumes or pesticides. Under no circumstances should the wood be burned indoors or
outdoors or used inside of homes.If these wood products are sold or given to another
party,the third party should be notified of the same warnings described above. If you
have any questions on your intended use of this material, please contact your local
environmental regulatory agency.
SFT 009(5-86)
IQ-IDMID
PMER. Handling and Disposal of Treated Wood

Overhead Revised 04/03 24-10-01
Clearance Tags
Scope Clearance Tag Hook
This section describes the identification system The Salisbury tagging device is molded of an
used by Idaho Power to provide visual indication orange"Salcor"rubber. It consists of a slotted
that a clearance has been taken on the circuit cup section sized to fit over the head of a
beyond the tagged disconnect, cutout, or other standard switch stick.Atop the cup is a
device. The components used for clearance tags reinforced hook. The Hastings tag hook is a
are illustrated below and described on this and bright yellow non-metallic thermoplastic
the following page. The IPCo Catalog IDs of the material. It has two molded hooks to hold cards
components are indicated.For more information with metal grommets.A molded eye at the
on these items,refer to page 111-20-01 in the bottom is for shotgun stick application. Both
Tools Manual. devices are made of dielectric materials. The
devices are used to attach the clearance tag cards
and envelopes(see illustration)to the pulling
ring of a disconnect switch or cutout.
Clearance Tag Card
This vinyl clearance card,measuring 3-1/4" x 6-
1/4",reads"DANGER-CLEARANCE-
CHECK WITH DISPATCHER BEFORE
CLOSING SWITCH". It has a space for the
person to write in his name,the date, and the
time the clearance was issued through the
dispatcher.The clearance card is used to tag a
switch at its point of manual and/or supervisory
CHECK DISPATCHER control. On the distribution system,this is
BEFORE OPERATING
SWITCH normally at the cutout or disconnect switch.
NAME:DATE: TIME: Clearance Tag Envelope
-
CIRCUIT:
REMARKS: This special bright red reinforced vinyl envelope
has been fabricated with a clear plastic pocket
sized to hold the above clearance card. The
envelope has a Velcro fastener on the bottom
end to retain the card.A swivel snap hook
Orange Clearance Tag Card attached to the top secures the envelope to either
Hastings Hook Cat. ID 8188 the rubber hook illustrated to the left, or the
Cat. ID 8192 6"x 12" Envelope spring clamp described on the next page.
Cat. ID 8190
PouveR Clearance Tags

24-10-02 Revised 04/03 Overhead
Clearance Tag Flag will trip only once to lockout and remain locked
out until the lever is reclosed manually.
In applications where the point of supervisory or
manual control is remote from the operating
device opening the circuit,a bright red 12"x 12"
warning flag is installed at the open point. This
signifies that clearance has been taken beyond
Installer
that open point. Adapter Hastings
Cat. ID 8194 Clamp
Clearance Tag Clamp Cat. ID 8193
This spring loaded clamp is designed for easy
attachment of a clearance tag or flag directly to a
conductor or bussing up to 2" in diameter. The
clamp also has a large hook, allowing it to be
used as an alternate to the Salcor rubber hook to
secure the clearance tag to disconnect switches
or cutouts through the eye of the switchblade
pulling ring.The clamp is installed using a
shotgun stick or a universal switch stick fitted 12"x 12" Flag
with the installer tool listed below. It is removed Cat. ID 8191
using a shotgun stick, fuse stick, or the installer
tool.
Clearance Tag Clamp Installer 0
This installer tool has a groove on one end and a DANGER
hook on the other,and is secured to a universal HOT LINE HOLD
fitting. It is designed to simplify the installation
and removal of the clearance tag clamp. CHECK DISPATCHER
BEFORE OPERATING
SWITCH
Hot Line Hold Card NAME
This white,vinyl-covered card measures 3-1/4" DATEfIME
x 6-1/4" and has red lettering that reads CIRCUIT
"DANGER-HOT LINE HOLD-CHECK BY
DISPATCHER BEFORE OPERATING
SWITCH."There is space for the employee to REMARKS:
write his or her name, date, and the time the SFT044
dispatcher issued the Hot Line Hold(HLH).It
attaches to the pole at the recloser location.
Place the recloser HLH lever in the non- Hot Line Hold Card
reclosing position so if a fault occurs,the device Cat. ID 8189
Clearance Tags Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 01/14 25-00-01
Table of Contents
25- Reference Data
25-01-01 Conductor Sag 25-03-01 Loading Considerations
Conductor Sag-Basic Equation Residential Loads—Single Family
Conductor Tension-Basic and Duplexes
Equation Residential Loads—Multi-family
25-01-02 Ruling Span Dwellings
25-01-03 Sag Designations 25-03-02 Other 1-0 Loads
Conditions and Limitations for Irrigation Loads
Sag Specifications Commercial and Industrial Loads
Measurement of Sag 25-03-03 Coincidence Factors
25-03-04 Voltage Drop
25-02-01 Final Sag Tables Voltage Drop Design Criteria
25-02-02 Final Sag Table -#4 ACSR-300' Voltage Drop Calculations
(Urban)Ruling Span 25-03-05 Voltage Drop Factors for
Final Sag Table -#4 ACSR-350' Aluminum Conductor Table
Ruling Span Voltage Drop Factors for Copper
25-02-03 Final Sag Table -#4 ACSR-460' Conductors Table
(Rural)Ruling Span Calculating Voltage Drop Factors
25-02-04 Final Sag Table -2/0 ACSR- 300'
(Urban)Ruling Span 25-04-01 Economic Conductor Sizing
Final Sag Table -2/0 ACSR- 350' Introduction
Ruling Span Economic Conductor Size
25-02-05 Final Sag Table -2/0 ACSR-460' Annual Cost per Mile of
(Rural)Ruling Span Conductor
25-02-06 Final Sag Table -2/0 ACSR- 300' 25-04-02 Graphs
(Urban)Ruling Span w/Neutral
for 336 Al 25-05-01 Conversion Factors
25-02-07 Final Sag Table -2/0 AAAC - kVA To Amperes
300' (Urban)Ruling Span
25-02-08 Final Sag Table -2/0 AAAC - 25-06-01 Forces and Angles
460' (Rural)Ruling Span Method of Determining Line
25-02-09 Final Sag Table -336 Al- 300' Angles By Linear
Ruling Span Measurements
Final Sag- 397 ACSR- 300' Design Tensions For Distribution
Ruling Span Conductors
25-02-10 Final Sag Table -795 Al-300' 25-06-02 Resultant Horizontal Force Per
Ruling Span-Low Tension Conductor Due To Change In
Final Sag Table -795 Al-300' Line Direction
Ruling Span-High Tension 25-06-03 Determining Guy Angles by
25-02-11 Final Sag Table—Copperweld& Lead/Height Ratios
Steel
Continued on next page
M�10PNO
EMPOWER. Table of Contents

25-01-02 Revised 01/14 Overhead
25-07-01 Conductor Data
Bare Conductor Diameter,
Weight, and Strength
25-07-02 Bare Conductor Resistance,
Reactance, and Loading Values
25-07-03 Multiplex Conductor Dimensions
and Weight
Weatherproof Conductor
Dimensions and Weight
25-07-04 Multiplex Conductor OD,
Strength,Resistance, and
Reactance
Weatherproof Conductor OD,
Strength,Resistance, and
Reactance
25-07-05 Conductor Ampacity
Ampacity Per Conductor for Bare
Overhead Conductors
25-07-06 Ampacity Per Conductor for Bare
Overhead Conductors
Continued
25-07-07 Ampacity Per Conductor for
Multiplexed Insulated
Conductors
Ampacity Per Conductor for
Weatherproof Conductors
25-07-08 Notes for the Tables on Pages 25-
07-05, -06, and-07
Table of Contents Ra
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 02/00 25-01-01
Conductor Sag
The purpose of this document is to provide some of Conductor Tension - Basic Equation
the basic equations and concepts,which describe
conductor sag.It is the responsibility of the user to The conductor tension between fixed position
determine that all of the necessary parameters have deadends,is influenced by the conductor weight,
been met when using these equations. the ice and wind loading,the sag, and the
temperature.
The best way to determine conductor sag for
design and clearance purposes is to use the On existing lines, span and sag data may be
computer programs such as SAG10 which are obtained by actual field measurements. The
available in the T&D Design group. Field equation below can be used to calculate the
measurements should not be used for design and conductor tension.Note,however,that this
clearance calculations because the measurement method would not supply the maximum tension
changes as the loading conditions change. at the ice-loaded condition unless you actually
measured the sag on a day when the ice loading
Conductor Sag - Basic Equation was present.
2
The sag or vertical drop of the midpoint of a T = L W
span of conductor below its end supports 8S
depends on the vertical position of its endpoints, Where:
the length of the span,the amount of tension in
the conductor, and the weight of the conductor S = Sag of a level span be feet)
per foot. L = Horizontal distance between supports
= Span Length (in feet)
Assuming that the vertical position of the W =Weight of the conductor(in pounds per foot)
endpoints is equal or level,the sag of a T = Tension on the conductor(in pounds)
conductor at its midpoint may be approximated
by the equation below. Initial(stringing)tensions for selected
conductors are listed as design conditions for the
S _ L2 W initial sag tables in section 10-03. Loaded
8T (design)tensions for selected conductors appear
Where as design conditions for the final sag tables in
S =Sag of a level span (feet) section 25-02.The table values for ACSR and
aluminum conductors were produced using the
L = Horizontal distance between supports SAG10 program.
=Span Length (feet)
W =Weight of the conductor(Ibs/foot) The SAG10 computer program will accurately
T =Tension on the conductor(in pounds) evaluate existing conductor sags and tensions,
especially when clearances are being evaluated.
Temperature changes,wind loading,ice loading Contact the T&D Design group for additional
and elongation of the conductor due to aging and information.
stretching, affect the sag of a conductor and
must be taken into consideration in the design of
a line. For medium loading,the conductor is
assumed to be loaded with 1/4" of ice at 15°F
with a 4-pound wind.
E''� AH IDO
EMPOWER. Conductor Sag

25-01-02 Revised 03/13 Overhead
Ruling Span structures will move slightly to equalize this
unequal tension resulting in greater tensions in
A ruling span is a calculated span length for the longer spans. Steps should be taken to reduce
which the conductor tension,which varies with the unequal tension in long spans so that the
temperature and loading,best represents the design tension is not exceeded. This is usually
average tension in the conductor in the spans remedied by stringing the conductor on a ruling
between the deadends. The ruling span is given span basis.
by the equation shown below.
The sag data contained in the tables in this
_ L,3+ L23+ L33+ section and section 10 are based upon specific
LR Ll + LZ + L3 + ... ruling spans.These ruling spans are specified for
Where each table. The proper sag for the conductors, at
LR = Length of the ruling span (in feet) the ruling span with medium loading and at
ELi =Sum of the lengths of the individual spans various temperatures, is obtained from
manufacturers data.The sags for other spans
L1,2,3,... = Individual span lengths may be calculated using the following equation.
Table values for sags for ACSR and aluminum
NOTE. The individual spans between deadends conductor were determined using the SAG10
should not exceed the ruling span by more than program.
20%.
So )2 X SR
Where ground contour or taller poles permit (LR
larger spans,the conductor should be deadended Where
at each end.
So=Sag of the other span
Because the span length of a section of line SR=Sag of the ruling span
between deadends are not the same length, Lo= Length of the other span
formation of ice combined with a wind load will LR= Length of the ruling span
result in unequal conductor tension in all of the
spans. Because of the tension differences,the
Conductor Sag MWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 02/00 25-01-03
Sag Designations Typical Ruling Spans
460'-AAAC and ACSR Rural
300'-AAAC and ACSR Urban
Initial Sag,Final Sag,Rural Sags, and Urban 300'-All Aluminum Urban
Sags are defined beginning on page 10-02-01. 175'-Copper Urban
275'-Copper Rural
Conditions and Limitations for Sag 500'-Copperweld and Steel Rural
Specifications
2. If the ground profile is such that up-strain
The sags specified in the tables in sections 10-03 may be encountered.
and 25-02 apply only for those parameters upon
which they are based. Because of the dynamic 3. If expected loading conditions are greater
nature of the conductor position, sags are best than medium loading conditions. Medium
determined using computer programs.Although loading conditions are V4" of ice, a 4-pound
some basic formulas for calculating sag and the wind, and a temperature of 15°F.
conductor tension are provided in this section,
unless all of the parameters such as wind, ice 4. If existing circuits,which were not
loading and temperature are considered,the accounted for in the design, are already in
results will be erroneous. place on the poles.
If the following conditions are encountered, Measurement of Sag
contact engineering for assistance.
There are two methods for measuring sag in a
1. If any span exceeds the Ruling Span by line: the transit method and the stopwatch
more than 20%, contact engineering. method. These are described in detail beginning
on page 10-02-03.
E''�ID 0
EMPOWER. Conductor Sag

Overhead Revised 11/13 25-02-01
Final Sag Tables
Final Sag Tables Caution. Since NESC Code clearances
must be met at all times, including after the
Final Sag Tables are provided for the more conductor has stretched,the Final Sag tables
common conductors that are used in the must be used for clearance calculations.
construction of overhead distribution lines.
As the line is subjected to temperatures,wind List of Final Sag Tables
and ice loading,the conductor will slowly Final Sag Table Page
stretch and creep.After approximately 10 years, #4 ACSR(Swanate) 300'(Urban) 02
it reaches a stabilized state where it will not 350' 02
stretch further,unless the design tension is 460'(Rural) 03
exceeded. This state is called the Final Sag. 2/0 ACSR (Quail) 300'(Urban) 04
350' 04
The rate at which the conductor stretches from 460'(Rural) 05
its initial sag to its final sag position may be 300'(Urban)w/Neutral for 336 Al 06
approximated as follows: 2/0 AAAC(Anaheim) 300'(Urban) 07
Rate of Creep from Initial to Final Sag 460'(Rural) 08
Period of Time %of Total Creep 336 AL(Tulip) 300' 09
397 ACSR(Ibis) 300' 09
1 day r °
10%° 795 Al (Arbutus) 300'-Low Tension
1 month 35% Standard Distribution 10
1 year 60% 300'-High Tension
10 years 100% Transmission Underbuild 10
Copper weld &Steel 11
Final sag tables are generally used for design Copper 11
purposes only to make certain that final
minimum clearances will be met after the
conductor reaches its final sag condition. Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag
Final Sag tables are not used for field sagging, Tables when stringing new conductor.
except on the rare occasion when old,used See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
conductor that has already been stretched from
previous loadings, is being installed.
E''�IDiAHO
EMPOIAMR. Final Sag Tables

25-02-02 Revised 11/13 Overhead
Final Sag Table - #4 ACSR (Swanate) - 300' (Urban) Ruling Span*
for lines built prior to 2006
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 831 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp(°F) 10° 30' 50° 70' 90° 110° 125' 145° 212'
Tension (Ibs) 219 187 163 146 132 125 121 116 102
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 7.0 8.0 9.0 9.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 14.0
140 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 17.0 19.0
160 12.0 13.5 15.5 17.5 19.5 20.5 21.0 22.0 25.0
180 15.0 17.5 20.0 22.5 24.5 26.0 27.0 28.0 32.0
200 18.5 21.5 24.5 27.5 30.5 32.0 33.0 34.5 39.5
210 20.0 23.5 27.0 30.5 33.5 35.5 36.5 38.0 43.5
220 22.0 26.0 29.5 33.0 36.5 39.0 40.0 42.0 47.5
240 26.5 31.0 35.5 39.5 43.5 46.0 48.0 50.0 56.5
260 31.0 36.5 41.5 46.5 51.0 54.0 56.0 58.5 66.5
280 36.0 42.0 48.0 54.0 59.5 63.0 65.0 68.0 77.0
300 41.0 48.5 55.5 62.0 68.0 72.0 74.5 78.0 88.5
310 44.0 51.5 59.0 66.0 73.0 77.0 79.5 83.5 94.5
320 47.0 55.0 63.0 70.5 77.5 82.0 85.0 88.5 101.0
340 53.0 62.0 71.0 79.5 87.5 92.5 96.0 100.0 114.0
360 59.5 69.5 79.5 89.0 98.0 104.0 107.5 112.5 127.5
This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
NOTE. If most of the spans are over 200', normally the line would have been sagged using the Rural span (460'
ruling span)tables. Refer to the page 25-02-03.
Final Sag Table #4 ACSR (Swanate) - 350' Ruling Span* for lines built after 2006
Design Conditions: 350'ruling span; 1,000 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10, 301 50, 601 701 90, 100, 110, 1201 1251 1451 2121
Tension(lbs) 353 293 250 229 215 188 182 176 170 168 159 136
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 4 5 6 6 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 11
140 6 7 8 9 9 11 11 11 12 12 12 15
160 7 9 10 11 12 14 14 15 15 15 16 19
180 9 11 13 14 15 17 18 19 19 20 21 24
200 11 14 16 18 19 21 22 23 24 24 25 30
210 13 15 18 19 21 24 24 25 26 27 28 33
230 15 18 22 23 25 29 29 30 32 32 34 39
250 18 21 26 28 30 34 35 36 37 38 40 46
270 21 25 30 32 35 39 40 42 43 44 46 54
290 24 29 34 37 40 45 47 48 50 51 53 62
310 27 33 39 42 46 52 53 55 57 58 61 71
330 31 37 44 48 52 59 60 62 65 66 69 81
350 35 42 50 54 58 66 68 70 73 74 78 91
370 39 47 56 60 65 74 76 78 82 83 87 102
390 43 52 62 67 72 82 84 87 91 92 97 113
410 48 58 69 74 80 91 93 96 100 102 107 125
420 50 60 72 78 84 95 98 101 105 107 112 131
This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
For span lengths that are not included in the table please contact the Methods&Materials Department.
Final Sag Tables �` R,,

Overhead Revised 11/13 25-02-03
Final Sag Table - #4 ACSR (Swanate) - 460' (Rural) Ruling Span*
for lines built prior to 2006
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 460'ruling span; 1,142 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10° 30' 50° 70' 90° 110° 125' 212°
Tension(lbs) 333 290 257 231 214 204 197 166
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.5 7.0 7.0 7.5 8.5
140 6.0 7.0 7.5 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 12.0
160 7.5 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 12.5 13.0 15.5
180 10.0 11.0 12.5 14.0 15.0 16.0 16.5 19.5
200 12.0 13.9 15.5 17.5 18.8 19.5 20.5 24.0
210 13.5 15.5 17.5 19.0 20.5 21.5 22.5 26.5
220 14.5 16.8 18.9 21.0 22.8 23.9 24.5 29.5
240 17.5 19.9 22.5 25.0 27.0 28.5 29.5 34.9
260 20.5 23.5 26.5 29.5 31.8 33.5 34.5 41.0
280 23.5 27.0 30.5 34.0 36.9 38.5 40.0 47.5
300 27.0 31.0 35.0 39.0 42.5 44.5 45.9 54.5
310 29.0 33.5 37.5 41.9 45.0 47.5 49.0 58.5
320 30.9 35.5 40.0 44.5 48.0 50.5 52.0 62.0
330 32.9 37.5 42.5 47.5 51.0 53.5 55.5 66.0
340 34.9 40.0 45.5 50.5 54.5 57.0 58.9 70.0
360 39.0 44.9 50.5 56.5 60.9 63.9 66.0 78.5
380 43.5 50.0 56.5 62.9 67.9 71.0 72.8 87.5
400 48.5 55.5 62.5 69.5 75.0 78.9 80.5 97.0
410 50.8 58.0 65.8 73.0 79.0 82.9 84.8 101.9
420 53.5 61.0 69.0 76.9 82.9 86.9 89.0 106.9
440 58.5 67.0 75.8 84.5 91.0 95.5 97.5 117.5
460 63.9 73.5 82.8 92.0 99.5 104.5 106.5 128.5
480 69.5 79.8 90.0 100.5 108.5 113.5 116.0 139.5
500 75.5 86.5 97.9 108.9 117.5 123.0 126.0 151.5
This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
NOTE. If most of the spans are under 200', normally the line would have been sagged using the Urban span (300'
ruling span)tables. Refer to page 25-02-02.
E'er IDiAHO
MMPOWER,. Final Sag Tables

25-02-04 Revised 11/13 Overhead
Final Sag Table - 2/0 ACSR (Quail) - 300' (Urban) Ruling Span*
for lines built prior to 2006
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 1,449 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10° 30' 50° 70' 90° 100° 110, 125° 212'
Tension(lbs) 650 541 464 409 367 350 335 328 279
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 6.0 7.5 8.5 9.5 10.8 11.5 11.8 12.0 14.0
140 8.5 9.9 11.5 13.0 14.5 15.5 16.0 16.5 19.5
160 11.0 13.0 15.0 17.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 21.5 25.5
180 13.5 16.5 19.0 22.0 24.0 25.5 26.5 27.0 32.0
200 16.9 20.5 23.5 26.9 29.9 31.5 32.5 33.5 39.5
210 18.5 22.5 26.0 29.5 33.0 34.5 36.0 36.9 43.5
220 20.5 24.5 28.5 32.5 36.0 38.0 39.5 40.5 48.0
240 24.5 29.0 34.0 38.5 43.0 45.0 47.0 48.0 57.0
260 28.5 34.5 40.0 45.5 50.5 53.0 55.5 56.5 66.5
280 33.0 40.0 46.5 52.5 58.5 61.5 64.0 65.5 77.5
300 38.0 45.5 53.0 60.5 67.5 70.5 73.5 75.5 89.0
310 40.5 48.5 57.0 64.5 72.0 75.5 78.5 80.5 95.0
320 43.5 51.9 60.5 69.0 76.5 80.0 84.0 85.5 101.0
340 49.0 58.5 68.5 77.5 86.5 90.5 94.5 97.0 114.0
360 54.5 65.5 76.5 87.0 96.9 101.5 106.0 108.5 127.9
* This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
This table may also be used for a#2 ACSR neutral with sag matched to the 2/0 ACSR phase conductor during
stringing conditions. The final sag values for the two conductors at the same temperature are only slightly different.
NOTE. If most of the spans are over 200', normally the line would have been sagged using the Rural span (460'
ruling span)tables. Refer to page 25-02-05.
Final Sag Tables ` R

Overhead Revised 11/13 25-02-05
Final Sag Table - 2/0 ACSR (Quail) - 350' Ruling Span* for lines built after 2006
Design Conditions: 350'ruling span; 1,850 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10, 30' 50, 60' 70' 90, 100, 110, 120' 125' 145' 212'
Tension(lbs) 1092 889 746 674 628 537 508 479 450 445 425 367
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 8 9 9 9 11
140 5 6 7 8 7 10 11 11 12 12 13 15
160 6 8 10 10 11 13 14 15 16 16 17 19
180 8 10 12 13 14 17 18 19 20 20 21 24
200 10 12 15 16 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 30
210 11 14 17 18 19 23 24 26 27 27 29 33
230 13 16 20 22 23 27 29 31 32 33 35 40
250 16 19 23 26 28 32 34 36 38 39 41 47
270 18 23 27 30 32 37 40 42 45 45 48 55
290 21 26 32 34 37 43 46 49 51 52 55 63
310 24 30 36 39 42 49 53 56 59 60 63 72
330 28 34 41 44 48 56 60 63 67 68 71 82
350 31 38 46 50 54 63 67 71 75 76 80 92
370 35 42 51 56 60 70 75 79 84 85 89 103
390 38 47 57 62 67 78 83 88 93 94 99 114
410 43 52 63 69 74 86 92 97 103 104 110 126
420 45 55 66 72 78 91 96 102 108 109 115 132
This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4"ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
For span lengths that are not included in the table please contact the Methods&Materials Department.
ENPOMR,. Final Sag Tables

25-02-06 Revised 11/13 Overhead
Final Sag Table - 2/0 ACSR (Quail) - 460' (Rural) Ruling Span*
for lines built prior to 2006
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 460'ruling span; 2,013 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10° 30' 50° 70' 90° 100° 110, 125° 212'
Tension(lbs) 987 846 737 653 588 560 536 505 433
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 4.0 4.5 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 9.0
140 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.0 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 12.5
160 7.0 8.5 9.5 11.0 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.9 16.0
180 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.0 16.5 17.5 20.5
200 11.0 13.0 14.9 17.0 18.5 19.5 20.5 22.0 25.5
210 12.5 14.5 16.5 18.5 20.5 21.5 22.5 24.0 28.0
220 13.5 15.5 18.0 20.5 22.5 23.5 25.0 26.5 30.5
240 16.0 18.5 21.5 24.0 26.9 28.0 29.5 31.5 36.5
260 19.0 21.9 25.0 28.5 31.5 33.0 34.5 37.0 43.0
280 22.0 25.5 29.0 33.0 36.5 38.5 40.0 42.5 50.0
300 25.0 29.0 33.5 37.8 42.0 44.0 46.0 49.0 57.0
310 26.5 31.0 35.8 40.5 45.0 47.0 49.0 52.5 61.0
320 28.5 33.0 38.0 43.0 47.8 50.0 52.5 55.5 65.0
340 32.0 37.5 43.0 48.5 54.0 56.5 59.0 62.9 73.5
360 36.0 42.0 48.5 54.5 60.5 63.5 66.5 70.5 82.0
380 40.0 46.8 53.8 60.5 67.5 70.5 73.9 78.5 91.5
400 44.5 52.0 59.5 67.5 74.5 78.5 82.0 87.0 101.5
410 46.5 54.5 62.5 70.5 78.5 82.5 86.0 91.5 106.5
420 49.0 57.0 65.5 74.0 82.5 86.5 90.5 96.0 112.0
440 54.0 63.0 72.0 81.5 90.5 95.0 99.0 105.5 123.0
450 56.5 65.5 75.5 85.0 94.5 99.0 103.5 110.0 128.5
460 59.0 68.5 79.0 89.0 99.0 103.5 108.5 115.0 134.5
480 64.0 74.5 86.0 97.0 107.5 113.0 118.0 125.5 146.0
500 69.5 81.0 93.0 105.0 116.8 122.5 128.0 136.0 158.5
This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
This table may also be used for a#2 ACSR neutral with sag matched to the 2/0 ACSR during stringing operations.
NOTE. If most of the spans are under 200', normally the line would have been sagged using the Urban span (300'
ruling span)tables. Refer to page 25-02-04.
Final Sag Tables ` R

Overhead Revised 11/13 25-02-07
Final Sag Table - 2/0 ACSR (Quail) - 300' (Urban) Ruling Span -
w/Neutral for 336 Al*
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 460'ruling span; 1,893 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10° 30' 50° 70' 90° 100° 110, 125° 145'
Tension(lbs) 697 575 488 426 381 362 346 334 320
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 5.5 6.9 8.0 9.5 10.5 10.9 11.5 11.8 12.5
140 7.5 9.5 11.0 12.5 14.0 14.9 15.5 16.0 16.8
160 10.0 12.0 14.5 16.5 18.5 19.5 20.5 21.0 22.0
180 12.8 15.5 18.0 20.9 23.5 24.5 25.5 26.5 27.8
200 15.8 19.0 22.5 25.8 28.9 30.5 31.8 32.9 34.5
210 17.5 21.0 24.8 28.5 31.8 33.5 35.0 36.5 37.9
220 19.0 23.0 27.0 31.0 34.9 36.5 38.5 39.8 41.5
240 22.5 27.5 32.5 37.0 41.5 43.5 45.8 47.5 49.5
260 26.5 32.5 38.0 43.5 48.8 51.5 53.5 55.5 58.0
280 30.9 37.5 44.0 50.5 56.5 59.5 62.5 64.5 67.5
300 35.5 43.0 50.5 58.0 64.9 68.5 71.5 74.0 77.5
310 37.9 45.9 54.0 61.9 69.5 72.9 76.5 79.0 82.5
320 40.5 48.9 57.5 65.9 73.9 77.5 81.5 84.0 87.9
340 45.5 55.0 65.0 74.5 83.5 87.5 91.9 95.0 99.5
360 51.0 61.9 72.9 83.5 93.5 98.5 103.0 106.5 111.5
This sag table is based upon the assumption that the 2/0 ACSR conductor is sagged to match the sag of 336 Al
during stringing conditions (1 hour initial)at an ambient temperature of 60°F.
ONPOMR,. Final Sag Tables

25-02-08 Revised 11/13 Overhead
Final Sag Table - 2/0 AAAC (Anaheim) - 300' (Urban) Ruling Span*
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 1,344 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp CF) 10° 30° 50' 70° 90* 100* 110° 125* 212°
Tension(lbs) 580 457 376 322 284 269 256 241 182
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 5.5 7.0 8.5 10.0 11.0 11.5 12.5 13.0 17.5
140 7.5 9.5 11.5 13.5 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 23.5
160 9.5 12.0 15.0 17.5 19.5 21.0 22.0 23.0 31.0
180 12.0 15.5 18.8 22.0 25.0 26.5 27.5 29.5 39.0
200 15.0 19.0 23.5 27.0 31.0 32.5 34.0 36.5 48.0
210 16.5 21.0 25.5 30.0 34.0 36.0 37.5 40.0 53.0
220 18.0 23.0 28.0 33.0 37.5 39.5 41.5 44.0 58.5
240 21.5 27.5 33.5 39.0 44.5 46.8 49.0 52.0 69.5
260 25.5 32.5 39.5 46.0 52.0 55.0 57.8 61.5 81.5
280 29.5 37.5 45.5 53.5 60.5 63.8 67.0 71.0 94.5
300 33.9 43.0 52.5 61.0 69.5 73.0 76.9 81.5 108.5
310 36.0 46.0 55.9 65.5 74.0 78.0 82.0 87.0 115.5
320 38.5 49.0 59.5 69.5 78.9 83.5 87.5 93.0 123.5
340 43.5 55.5 67.0 78.5 89.0 94.0 99.0 104.8 139.0
360 49.0 62.0 75.5 88.0 100.0 105.5 110.8 117.5 156.0
* This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
This table may also be used for a#2 AAAC neutral with sag matched to the 2/0 AAAC phase conductor during
stringing conditions. The final sag values for the two conductors at the same temperature are only slightly different.
NOTE. If most of the spans are over 200', normally the line would have been sagged using the Rural span (460'
ruling span)tables. Refer to page 25-02-08.
Final Sag Tables ` R

Overhead Revised 11/13 25-02-09
Final Sag Table - 2/0 AAAC (Anaheim) - 460' (Rural) Ruling Span*
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 460'ruling span; 1,893 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp CF) 10, 30° 50° 70° 90° 100° 110° 125° 212°
Tension(lbs) 860 708 96 514 454 429 408 389 289
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.0 7.0 10.0 10.5 11.0 15.0
140 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.5 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 15.0
160 6.5 8.0 9.5 11.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.5 19.5
180 8.0 10.0 11.9 14.0 15.5 16.5 17.5 18.0 24.5
200 10.0 12.5 14.5 17.0 19.5 20.5 21.5 22.5 30.5
210 11.0 13.5 16.0 19.0 21.5 22.5 23.5 25.0 33.5
220 12.5 15.0 18.0 20.5 23.5 24.5 26.0 27.0 36.5
240 14.5 18.0 21.0 24.5 28.0 29.5 31.0 32.5 43.5
260 17.0 21.0 25.0 29.0 32.5 34.5 36.0 38.0 51.5
280 20.0 24.0 29.0 33.5 38.0 40.0 42.0 44.0 59.5
300 22.9 27.8 33.0 38.5 43.5 45.8 48.0 50.5 68.5
310 24.5 29.5 35.5 41.0 46.5 49.0 51.5 54.0 73.0
320 26.0 31.5 37.5 43.5 49.5 52.0 54.8 57.5 77.5
340 29.5 35.5 42.5 49.0 55.5 59.0 62.0 65.0 87.5
360 33.0 40.0 47.5 55.0 62.5 66.0 69.5 73.0 98.5
380 36.5 44.5 53.0 61.5 69.5 73.5 77.5 81.0 109.5
400 40.5 49.5 58.5 68.0 77.0 81.5 85.5 90.0 121.5
410 42.8 51.9 61.5 71.5 81.0 85.5 90.0 94.5 127.5
420 45.0 54.5 64.5 75.0 85.0 90.0 94.5 99.0 134.0
440 49.5 60.0 71.0 82.5 93.5 98.5 103.5 109.0 147.0
460 54.0 65.5 77.5 90.0 102.0 107.5 113.5 119.0 160.5
480 58.5 71.0 84.5 98.0 111.0 117.5 123.5 129.5 175.0
500 63.5 77.0 91.5 106.5 120.5 127.5 134.0 140.5 189.5
This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
This table may also be used for a#2 AAAC neutral with sag matched to the 2/0 AAAC during stringing operations.
NOTE. If most of the spans are under 200', normally the line would have been sagged using the Urban span (300'
ruling span)tables. Refer to page 25-02-07.
"IDAHO
11L pOti►►ER. Final Sag Tables

25-02-10 Revised 11/13 Overhead
Final Sag Table - 336 Al (Tulip) - 300' Ruling Span*
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 2,233 pounds tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp CF) 100 30' 50' 60' 701 90, 100, 110, 1200 1250 1450 2120
Tension(lbs) 1115 882 755 691 654 579 554 530 505 497 465 381
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 6 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 18
140 8 10 12 14 14 16 17 18 19 19 20 24
160 11 14 16 18 19 21 22 23 24 24 26 32
180 14 17 21 22 24 27 28 29 31 31 33 40
200 17 21 25 28 29 33 34 36 38 38 41 50
220 21 26 31 33 35 40 41 44 46 46 50 60
240 25 31 36 40 42 47 49 52 54 55 60 72
260 29 36 43 47 50 56 58 61 64 65 70 84
280 34 42 50 54 57 64 67 71 74 75 81 98
300 39 48 57 62 66 74 77 81 85 86 93 112
320 44 55 65 71 75 84 88 92 97 98 106 127
340 50 62 73 80 85 95 99 104 109 110 119 144
360 56 69 82 89 95 107 ill 117 122 124 134 161
* This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
NOTE. DO NOT use this table for a 2/0 ACSR neutral sagged to match the 336 Al during stringing operations. The
final sags of the two conductors at elevated temperatures are significantly different. See page 25-02-04.
Final Sag Table - 397 ACSR (Ibis) - 300' Ruling Span
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 5,000 lbs tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp CF) 100 30' 50' 60' 70' 90, 1000 1100 1200 1250 1450 2120
Tension(lbs) 4048 3339 2659 2449 2239 1818 1712 1606 1500 1479 1395 1153
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 7 8 8 8 100
140 4 5 6 7 7 9 10 10 11 11 12 14
160 5 6 8 9 10 12 13 13 14 14 15 18
180 7 8 10 11 12 15 16 17 18 18 19 23
200 8 10 12 13 15 18 20 20 22 22 24 28
220 10 12 15 16 18 22 24 25 26 27 29 34
240 12 14 17 19 22 26 28 29 31 32 34 41
260 14 17 20 23 26 31 33 35 37 38 40 48
280 17 19 24 26 30 36 38 40 43 44 46 56
300 19 22 27 30 34 41 44 46 49 50 53 64
320 22 25 31 34 39 47 50 52 56 57 60 73
340 24 28 35 39 44 53 57 59 63 64 68 82
360 27 32 39 43 49 59 63 66 71 72 76 92
* This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
For span lengths that are not included in the table please contact the Methods&Materials Department.
Final Sag Tables WW.—POWER,

Overhead Revised 11/13 25-02-11
Final Sag Table - 795 Al (Arbutus) - 300' Ruling Span - Low Tension* -
Standard Distribution
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 2,240 lbs tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp ff) 10° 30' 50° 70' 90° 100° 110, 125° 212'
Tension(lbs) 1183 1098 1029 970 921 898 878 852 726
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 13.5 14.5 15.5 16.5 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 22.0
140 18.5 20.0 21.5 22.5 24.0 24.5 25.0 26.0 30.5
160 24.0 26.0 28.0 29.5 31.0 32.0 32.5 33.5 39.5
180 30.5 33.0 35.0 37.5 39.5 40.5 41.5 42.5 50.0
200 38.0 41.0 43.5 46.0 48.5 50.0 51.0 52.5 62.0
210 41.5 45.0 48.0 51.0 53.5 55.0 56.0 58.0 68.0
220 46.0 49.5 52.5 56.0 56.0 60.5 61.5 63.5 74.5
240 54.5 58.5 62.5 66.5 70.0 72.0 73.5 75.5 89.0
260 64.0 69.0 73.5 78.0 82.0 84.0 86.0 89.0 104.5
280 74.0 79.9 85.5 90.5 95.5 97.5 100.0 103.0 121.0
300 85.0 91.5 98.0 104.0 109.5 112.0 115.0 118.5 139.0
310 91.0 98.0 104.5 111.0 117.0 119.5 122.5 126.5 148.5
320 97.0 104.5 111.5 118.0 124.5 127.5 130.5 134.5 158.0
340 109.5 118.0 126.0 133.5 140.5 144.0 147.5 152.0 178.5
360 122.5 132.0 141.0 149.5 157.5 161.5 165.5 170.5 200.0
* This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
This table may also be used for a 336 Al neutral with sag matched to the 795 Al during stringing operations.
Final Sag Table - 795 Al (Arbutus) - 300' Ruling Span - High Tension* -
Transmission Underbuild
Design Conditions: 300'ruling span; 4,073 lbs tension at NESC medium loading.
Temp CF) 100 30' 50' 60' 70' 90, 1000 1100 1200 1250 145' 2120
Tension(lbs) 2570 2051 1763 1619 1532 1359 1302 1245 1188 1169 1094 898
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
120 6 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 18
140 9 11 13 14 14 16 17 18 19 19 20 25
160 11 14 16 18 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 32
180 14 18 21 22 24 27 28 29 31 31 33 41
200 18 22 26 28 29 33 35 36 38 39 41 50
220 22 26 31 33 35 40 42 44 46 47 50 61
240 26 31 37 40 42 47 50 52 54 56 60 72
260 30 37 44 47 50 56 59 61 64 65 70 85
280 35 43 51 54 57 64 68 71 74 76 81 98
300 40 49 58 62 66 74 78 81 85 87 93 113
320 46 56 66 71 75 84 89 92 97 99 106 129
340 51 63 79 80 85 95 100 104 109 112 119 145
360 58 71 84 89 95 107 112 117 122 125 134 163
* This value is based on initial design conditions of 15°F, 1/4" ice and a 4 lb per square foot wind.
For span lengths that are not included in the table please contact the Methods&Materials Department.
This table may also be used for a 336 Al neutral with sag matched to the 795 Al during stringing operations.
ENPOMR,. Final Sag Tables

25-02-12 Revised 11/13 Overhead
Final Sag Table - Copperweld & Steel*
Caution. DO NOT use the Final Sag Tables when stringing new conductor.
See Initial Sag Tables in Section 10-03.
Temp ff) 0° 32° 60° 90° 120' Temp ff) 0° 32° 60° 90° 120'
Span(ft) Final Sag(inches) Span(ft) Final Sag(inches)
100 3 3 4 5 5 680 139 157 181 211 233
120 4 5 6 7 7 700 147 167 192 223 247
140 6 7 8 9 10 720 156 176 203 236 261
160 8 9 10 12 13 740 164 186 215 250 276
180 10 11 13 15 16 760 173 196 226 263 291
200 12 14 16 18 20 780 183 207 238 277 307
220 15 16 19 22 24 800 192 218 251 292 323
240 17 20 23 26 29 820 202 229 264 307 339
260 20 23 26 31 34 840 212 240 277 322 356
280 24 27 31 36 40 860 222 251 290 337 373
300 27 31 35 41 45 880 232 263 304 353 390
320 31 35 40 47 52 900 243 275 318 369 408
340 35 39 45 53 58 920 254 288 332 386 427
360 39 44 51 59 65 940 265 300 346 403 445
380 43 49 57 66 73 960 276 313 361 420 464
400 48 54 63 73 81 980 288 327 376 438 484
420 53 60 69 80 89 1000 300 340 392 456 504
440 58 66 76 88 98 1020 312 354 408 474 524
460 63 72 83 96 107 1040 324 368 424 493 545
480 69 78 90 105 116 1060 337 382 440 512 566
500 75 85 98 114 126 1080 350 397 457 532 588
520 81 92 106 123 136 1100 363 411 474 552 610
540 87 99 114 133 147 1120 376 426 492 572 632
560 94 107 123 143 158 1140 390 442 509 593 655
580 101 114 132 153 170 1160 404 458 527 614 678
600 108 122 141 164 181 1180 418 473 546 635 702
620 115 131 151 175 194 1200 432 490 564 657 726
640 123 139 161 187 206
660 131 148 171 199 220
Do not use these values for stringing except where used (stretched)conductor is being installed.
For short,lightly loaded spans,the 120°F values can be used for clearance calculations. For longer
spans or elevated operating temperatures, contact engineering. Ice loading and high temperature
operation will need to be evaluated.
Conductor Max Span length (ft)
6-3SS 750
8A 860
6A 920
4A 1,200
This value is based on initial design
conditions of 60% ultimate strength at NESC
medium loading.
Final Sags for Copper
Contact Methods&Materials for copper
final sag values to use in clearance
calculations.
Final Sag Tables WW.—POMR,

Overhead Revised 02/00 25-03-01
Loading Considerations
Residential Loads — Residential Loads —
Single-family and Duplexes Multi-family Dwellings
The demand for single-family and duplex Multi-family dwellings share interior walls
residential loads can be estimated by the square which reduce the energy required to heat and
footage of the home.The demand per square cool when compared to single-family homes of
foot(Watts/Sq.ft.)tends to be greater for smaller the same size. Multi-level buildings also share
homes than larger homes. The electrical service floors and ceilings which further reduces the
for all new homes should be designed to allow required energy.
for air conditioning.
♦ The ratio for electric heat homes varies from This table shows the demands to use for multi-
family designs.
16 W/Sq.ft. for small homes to 6.5 W/Sq.ft.
for large homes. Unit Size Electric Heat Gas Heat
Single-level Buildings
♦ The ratio for gas heat homes varies from Up to 800 sq.ft. 7 kW 4 kW
10 W/Sq.ft. for small homes to 4 W/Sq.ft. 801 to 1500 sq.ft. 10 kW 6 kW
for large homes. 1501 to 2000 sq.ft. 15 kW 8 kW
Multi-level Buildings
This table shows the demands to use for single- Up to 800 sq.ft. 5 kW 4 kW
family homes and duplex designs. 801 to 1500 sq.ft. 8 kW 6 kW
1501 to 2000 sq.ft. 13 kW 8 kW
Single-Family NOTE. Consult your Field Engineer for units larger
and Duplexes Electric Heat Gas Heat than 2000 sq.ft.
Under 1200 sq.ft. 15 kW 9 kW
1201 to 2500 sq.ft. 20 kW 13 kW NOTE. Most residential loads have a
2501 to 4000 sq.ft. 25 kW 18 kW power factor of 0.95 to 1.0 which means
Over 4000 sq.ft. 6.5 W/sq.ft. 4.7 W/sq.ft. the real power(kW)and the capacity
NOTE. These load values assume that each unit will required to serve the load(kVA)are
have air conditioning. approximately equal.
E''� AH IDO
�wPOWER Loading Considerations

25-03-02 Revised 02/00 Overhead
Other 1-0 Loads Commercial and Industrial Loads
The 1-0 demand for non-residential loads The WA demand to use for the design of 3-0
usually can be determined by the total connected commercial and industrial loads relies heavily
horsepower(for irrigation loads)or the size of on the information supplied by the customer.
the main breaker. The better the information supplied,the more
♦ Convert 1-0 horsepower motor ratings into efficient your design will be. Many factors can
WA with the following equation. Motors are affect the design, including:
assumed to be 94%efficient and have a 0.85 ♦ The total connected load,motor load and the
power factor. size of the largest motor.
0.746 ♦ The amount of 1-0 and lighting load.
1-0 kVA= 0.94 x 0.85 x 1-0 HIP
♦ The amount of any electric heating,
ventilation and air conditioning
♦ Since breakers are typically rated in amps, (HVAC) load.
convert the value into WA and multiply by
60%to obtain the estimated demand. Unless ♦ How long will the load be running each day?
otherwise known,assume 0.88 power factor Occasionally? 8 hours? 16 hours?
for non-residential,non-irrigation loads. Continuously?Will it be seasonal?
1-0 kVA= ♦ What is the load's overall power factor?
Breaker NOTE. It is important to investigate
0.6 x Breaker Rating x Operating actual demand readings at existing
0,88 (amps per line) Voltage (kV) customer
g
customer facilities or similar types of
where: Breaker Operating Voltage (kV)is the loads. It is also important to note that
line-to-line voltage in kV at the actual demand is generally much different
customer's breaker. then connected load.
If the 3-0 WA demand and power factor is not
Irrigation Loads known, it can be estimated based on the size of
the customer's main breaker keeping the
Convert 3-0 horsepower motor ratings into WA factors mentioned above in mind.
with the following equation. Motors are assumed
to be 94%efficient and have a 0.85 power Convert the breaker ampere rating into WA and
factor. multiply by 60%to obtain the estimated
demand.Assume the power factor to be 0.88.
3-0 kVA= 0.746 0.94 x 0.85 x 3-� HP 3-0 kVA=
0.6 x 1.732 3-0 Breaker Breaker
0 88 x Rating x Operating
(amps per 0) Voltage(W)
where: Breaker Operating Voltage(kV)is the
line-to-line voltage in kV at the
customer's breaker.
Loading Considerations WWOMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 02/00 25-03-03
Coincidence Factors Coincidence Factors
When a transformer or cable serves more than #of #of
one customer,the total demand for the combined Cust Factor Cust Factor
customers is less than the sum of the individual 1 1.00 11 0.60
customer demands. 2 0.86 12 0.59
3 0.78 13 0.59
The demand is lower because the chance that 4 0.73 14 0.58
each customer's equipment is running at the 5 0.69 15 0.58
same time is very low.Thermostats and timers 6 0.67 16 0.57
create different load cycles,the customers can 7 0.65 17 0.57
randomly turn loads on and off, and some of the 8 0.63 18 0.56
customers may not even be home. 9 0.62 19 0.56
10 0.61 20 0.56
For residential loads, coincidence factors are
used to account for this reduced demand. The coincidence factor for any number of
Multiply the total load by the coincidence factor customers per cluster is:
to obtain the diversified load. Coincidence 5
= 0.5 x �1+
Diversified Load Coincidence Factor 2N+3
Load - Per Lot x Factor
where: "N"is the number of customers.
9'Q IDO
EMAHPOWER. Loading Considerations

25-03-04 Revised 02/00 Overhead
Voltage Drop
Voltage drop design criteria. The maximum Example 1. Determine the %voltage drop for
total voltage drop from the primary side of the a 2300 sq.ft. all-electric home with a service
transformer to the meter is 5.0% which includes 120/240V 1-0 as shown.
a 1.5%voltage drop through the transformer.
For design projects where the actual length and
size of the service is unknown, limit the voltage 0
drop for the secondary to 2.3%. This will allow 100'
1.2%for the future service. #2 Triplex
Transformer Using the tables on page 25-03-01, -03 and-05
we find:
Primary Secondary Service
%Voltage Drop=(0.1155)x 20x 100
100
Transformer: 1.5% =2.31
Secondary: 2.3%
Service: 1.2% Example 2. Calculate the total voltage drop
Total: 5.0% for the new service.
Existing New
20 kw 18 kW
When calculating the voltage drop, assume the
voltage at the primary of the transformer is at its '
----------\- #2 Tx
nominal value(i.e. 120 volts on a 120 volt base). 210 Tx
If the primary voltage is substantial) different so' service
p n' g Y 110'Secondary
than this, consult your Field Engineer.Avoid
over sizing the transformer or conductor to Secondary Voltage Drop
compensate for a feeder voltage problem. Estimated Demand =38 kW
Coincidence Factor = .86
Voltage drop calculations. Use the following VDF= .0597
equation to calculate the percent voltage drop for Diversified Load = (20 +18)x 0.86
the sec/serv. cable run. =32.7kW
VDFx kW x length %Voltage Drop— 0.0597x 32.7x 110'
Voltage Drop= 100 2= 15 100
where: VDF is the voltage drop factor from the Service Voltage Drop
table on 25-03-05. Estimated Demand = 18 kW
kW is the total diversified load served by Coincidence Factor= 1.0
the cable (with the appropriate VDF=0.1155
coincidence factor. See page 25- Diversified Load = 18 x 1.0
03-03) = 18kW
length is the circuit length of the Conductor
in feet. 0.1155 x 18 x 60'
%Voltage Drop=
NOTE: Use 1-0 kW for 1-0 circuits and 100
3-0 kW for 3-0 circuits = 1.25
Total Voltage Drop
Total % Voltage Drop= 1.5+2.15 + 1.25=4.9%
`IDAHQ Loading ConsiderationsR

Overhead Revised 02/00 25-03-05
Voltage Drop Factors for Aluminum Conductor Calculating Voltage Drop Factors
1-0 3-0
Size 240V 208V 240V 480V Voltage drop factors for other voltages or power
Tx& Qx factors can be calculated using the following
#6 .2855
#4 .1811 .1212 .0910 .0227 equations:
#2 .1155 .0775 .0538 .0145
2/0 .0597 .0405 .0305 .0076 1-0 circuits
4/0 .0389 .0266 .0200 .0050
Open Wire Construction(WP) 2x104(Rcos9+Xsin9)
2/0 .0713 .0475 .0357 .0089 VDF 1-f� = 2
V cos0
4/0 .0504 .0334 .0251 .0063
500 .0290 .0193 .0145 .0036
2-500 .0199 .0133 .0100 .0025 3-0 circuits
NOTE. Loads are assumed to have a 0.9 PF
VDF 3-0 = 104(Rcos9+Xsino)
V2 cos9
Voltage Drop Factors for Copper Conductor
1-0 3-0 Where:
Size 240V 208V 240V 480V V= Line-to-line voltage in volts
Open Wire Construction(Bare) R= Resistance per 1000'at conductor
#8 .3022 .2011 .1511 .0378 operating temperature
#6 .1964 .1307 .0982 .0245 X= Reactance per 1000'based on the
#4 .1293 .0861 .0647 .0162 conductor spacing
#2 .0869 .0579 .0435 .0109 cos 0= Load power factor
#1 .0756 .0503 .0378 .0095 VDF 1-D= 1-0 Voltage Drop Factor
1/0 .0596 .0397 .0298 .0074 VDF 3-0= 3-0 Voltage Drop Factor
2/0 .0500 .0333 .0250 .0062 (Requires 3-0 kW)
4/0 .0362 .0240 .0181 .0045
Open Wire Construction(WP)
350 .0126 .0095 .0024
500 .0097 .0073 .0018
NOTE. Loads are assumed to have a 0.9 PF
ONPOMR,. Loading Considerations

Overhead Revised 02/00 25-04-01
Economic Conductor Sizing
Introduction Calculating the Annual Cost per Mile
of a Conductor
This section provides information about the cost
of losses (I2R) on Idaho Power's overhead The annual cost per mile of a conductor is
distribution system as they relate to conductor calculated by adding the values for the
sizing. The most economical operating range for Annualized Construction Cost(CA) and the
each conductor size and type of load is listed. Annualized Cost of Losses (LA).
Sometimes, engineering judgement determines Annual cost per mile = CA+LA
that it is better for Idaho Power to push a
conductor to its maximum ampacity rather than where:
increasing its size. Other times,the cost of losses CA=Annualized Cost of Construction
are too great and reconductoring is the best = (Construction Cost)
alternative. x(Annual Carrying Charge)
LA =Annualized Cost of Losses
Economic conductor combines the cost of = (Annual Cost per kW peak loss)
construction, carrying costs, and conductor x(Resistivity)x(3 x 5.28/1000)
losses to determine the most economical x(Peak Load in Amps)2
conductor size for a particular ampacity Construction Cost:
requirement. =$20,852.00 for 4 ACSR
=$25,929.00 for 2/0 ACSR
Economic Conductor Size =$34,588.00 for 336 AL
=$52,901.00 for 795 AL
Use the following table to determine the proper Annual Carrying Charge:
conductor size. = 13.6%
Economic Conductor Ampacity Annual Cost per kW peak loss:
= $118.25 for residential and commercial
Conductor Rated Residential or feeders
Size Ampacity Commercial Irrigation =$ 60.77 for irrigation feeders
4 ACSR 152* Up to 34 Up to 48
2/0 ACSR 312* 35 to 76 49 to 106 Resistivity(in ohms/1000'):
336 AL 536* 77 to 218 107 to 305 =0.4778 for 4 ACSR
795 AL 932* Over 219 Over 306 =0.1616 for 2/0 ACSR
* Maximum continuous rating at 40°C(1041F) =0.0580 for 336 AL
See pages 10-01-07 and—08 for other values. =0.0249 for 795 AL
"`�R,. Economic Conductor Sizing

25-04-02 Revised 02/00 Overhead
$30,000
$25,000
w �o
U
$20,000
U $15,000
c $10,000
c
Q
$5,000
$0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Annual Peak Load (in amperes)
Economic Conductor Sizes for Residential and Commercial Circuits
$20,000
G g3
a $15,000
0
G�
Cj $10,000
iu-
$5,000
Q
$0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Annual Peak Load (in amperes)
Economic Conductor Sizes for Irrigation Circuits
IDAHO
Economic Conductor Sizing W Ra
A�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 03/00 25-05-01
Conversion Factors
kVA To Amperes
1-0 Circuits
Amps=kVA x 1000-Volts
kVA (120 V) (208 V) (240 V) (277 V) (480 V) (2400 V) (7200 V) (14400 V) (19920 V)
1 8.3 4.8 4.2 3.6 2.1 0.4 0.1 0.1 0.1
3 25.0 14.4 12.5 10.8 6.3 1.3 0.4 0.2 0.2
5 41.7 24.0 20.8 18.1 10.4 2.1 0.7 0.3 0.3
7.5 62.5 36.1 31.3 27.1 15.6 3.1 1.0 0.5 0.4
10 83.3 48.1 41.7 36.1 20.8 4.2 1.4 0.7 0.5
15 125.0 72.1 62.5 54.2 31.3 6.3 2.1 1.0 0.8
25 208.3 120.2 104.2 90.3 52.1 10.4 3.5 1.7 1.3
37.5 312.5 180.3 156.3 135.4 78.1 15.6 5.2 2.6 1.9
50 416.7 240.4 208.3 180.5 104.2 20.8 6.9 3.5 2.5
75 625.0 360.6 312.5 270.8 156.3 31.3 10.4 5.2 3.8
100 833.3 480.8 416.7 361.0 208.3 41.7 13.9 6.9 5.0
150 1250.0 721.2 625.0 541.5 312.5 62.5 20.8 10.4 7.5
167 1391 802.0 696.0 603.0 348.0 70.0 23.0 12.0 8.0
200 1666.7 961.5 833.3 722.0 416.7 83.3 27.8 13.9 10.0
250 2083.3 1201.9 1041.7 902.5 520.8 104.2 34.7 17.4 12.6
333 2775.0 1601.0 1387.5 1202.2 693.8 138.8 46.3 23.1 16.7
500 4166.7 2403.8 2083.3 1805.1 1041.7 208.3 69.4 34.7 25.1
3-0 Circuits (Voltage: Phase-to-Phase)
Amps per Phase=(3-0 kVA)x 1000=(Volts x 1.7321)
kVA (208 V) (240 V) (480 V) (2400 V) (4160 V) (12470 V) (24940 V) (34500 V)
1 2.8 2.4 1.2 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.02
9 25.0 21.7 10.8 2.2 1.2 0.4 0.2 0.2
10 27.8 24.1 12.0 2.4 1.4 0.5 0.2 0.2
15 41.6 36.1 18.0 3.6 2.1 0.7 0.3 0.3
25 69.4 60.1 30.1 6.0 3.5 1.2 0.6 0.4
30 83.3 72.2 36.1 7.2 4.2 1.4 0.7 0.5
45 124.9 108.3 54.1 10.8 6.2 2.1 1.0 0.8
50 138.8 120.3 60.1 12.0 6.9 2.3 1.2 0.8
75 208.2 180.4 90.2 18.0 10.4 3.5 1.7 1.3
100 277.6 240.6 120.3 24.1 13.9 4.6 2.3 1.7
112.5 312.3 270.6 135.3 27.1 15.6 5.2 2.6 1.9
150 416.4 360.8 180.4 36.1 20.8 6.9 3.5 2.5
200 555.1 481.1 240.6 48.1 27.8 9.3 4.6 3.3
225 624.5 541.3 270.6 54.1 31.2 10.4 5.2 3.8
300 832.7 721.7 360.8 72.2 41.6 13.9 6.9 5.0
450 1249.1 1082.5 541.3 108.3 62.5 20.8 10.4 7.5
500 1390.0 1204.0 602.0 120.0 69.5 23.0 11.5 8.4
600 1665.4 1443.4 721.7 144.3 83.3 27.8 13.9 10.0
750 2081.8 1804.2 902.1 180.4 104.1 34.7 17.4 12.6
1000 2775.7 2405.6 1202.8 240.6 138.8 46.3 23.1 16.7
1500 4163.6 3608.4 1804.2 360.8 208.2 69.4 34.7 25.1
2000 5551.4 4811.3 2405.6 481.1 277.6 92.6 46.3 33.5
2500 6939.3 6014.1 3007.0 601.4 347.0 115.7 57.9 41.8
`ppR,. Conversion Factors

Overhead Revised 03/07 25-06-01
Forces and Angles
This section contains a method for determining Design Tensions For Distribution
line angles by linear measurement. It also Conductors
contains design tension lists for distribution
conductors, and provides a table of resultant Ultimate Design Percent of
horizontal forces on conductors due to changes Conductor Strength Tension Ultimate
in line direction.
#4 ACSR 2,360 1,000 48%
#2 AAAC 2,800 1,248* 45%
Method of Determining Line Angles #2 ACSR 2,850 1,472* 52%
By Linear Measurements 2/0 AAAC 5,390 1,893 35%
2/0 ACSR 5,310 1,850 38%
2/0 AAAC 5,390 1,349* 25%
B 2/0 ACSR 5,310 1,473* 28%
1(8 Line 336.4 AL 6,150 2,233 36%
h� AB Angle 336.4 AL 6,150 1,332* 22%
1 336.4 AL 6,150 2,133*t 35%
57'6" A 795 AL 13,900 2,240 16%
A close approximation of a line angle may be 795 AL 13,900 4,073 t 29%
obtained by measuring 576" out along both the #8A CW 2,233 1,340 60%
imaginary line extension A and the line B. The #6A CW 2,585 1,551 60%
distance AB in feet will be approximately equal #4A CW 3,938 2,363 60%
to the line angle in degrees. #2A CW 5,876 3,526 60%
#6 3SS 2,604 1,562 60%
#6 BC 1,280 768 60%
Line Line Line #4 BC 1,970 1,182 60%
Angle In Angle In Angle In
Degrees AB Degrees AB Degrees AB #2 BC 3,045 1,827 60%
1 1' 0" 34 33' 8" 48 47' 0" 1/0 BC 4,750 2,850 60%
10 10, 0" 35 34' 8" 49 47' 11" 2/0 BC 5,927 3,556 60%
20 20' 0" 36 35' 7" 50 48' 10" 4/0 BC 9,154 5,492 60%
23 23' 0" 37 36' 7" 51 49' 9" Reduced Tension Urban Spans-200'or Less
24 23' 11" 38 37' 7" 52 50' 8" #4 ACSR 2,360 831 35%
25 24' 11" 39 38' 6" 53 51' 7" #2 AAAC 2,800 906* 32%
26 25' 11" 40 39' 6" 54 52' 6" #2 ACSR 2,850 1,085* 38%
27 26' 10" 41 40' 5" 55 53' 5" 2/0 AAAC 5,390 1,344 25%
28 27' 10" 42 41' 5" 56 54' 3" 2/0 ACSR 5,310 1,449 27%
29 28' 10" 43 42' 4" 57 55' 1" #6 BC 1,280 510 40%
30 29' 9" 44 43' 4" 58 55' 11"
31 30' 9" 45 44' 3" 59 56' 9" #4 BC 1,970 690 35%
32 31' 9" 46 45' 2" 60 57' 6" #2 BC 3,045 915 30%
33 32' 8" 47 46' 1" 1/0 BC 4,750 1,190 25%
2/0 BC 5,927 1,480 25%
4/0 BC 9,154 2,290 25%
* Acting as a neutral conductor,sagged the same as the
next size larger phase conductor.
t Higher tension for transmission underbuild and new
construction.
ENPOMR,. Forces and Angles

25-06-02 Revised 03/07 Overhead
Resultant Horizontal Force Per Conductor Due To Change in Line Direction
XI
Deflection
a Angle
T 1 T
90,
R R
T = Conductor Design Tension 6
R = Resultant Horizontal Force
a =Deflection Angle Guy angle = 6 or 90' + 2
9 = Outside Angle
Resultant Horizontal Force Per Conductor(R)
Deflection Design*
Angle Tension #4 ACSR 2/0 ACSR 336.4 AL 795 AL 795 AL
(degrees) Multiplier 1142lbs 2013lbs 2233lbs 2240lbs 4073lbs
0.5 .009 10 18 19 20 36
1 .017 20 35 39 39 71
1.5 .026 30 53 58 59 107
2 .035 40 70 78 78 143
2.5 .044 50 88 97 98 178
3 .052 60 105 117 117 213
3.5 .061 70 123 136 137 249
4 .070 80 141 156 156 285
5 .087 99 175 194 194 354
6 .105 120 211 234 234 428
7 .122 139 246 272 272 497
8 .140 160 282 313 313 570
9 .157 179 316 351 351 639
10 .174 199 350 389 390 709
15 .261 298 525 583 585 1063
20 .347 396 698 775 777 1413
25 .433 494 872 967 970 1764
30 .518 592 1043 1157 1160 2110
35 .601 686 1210 1342 1346 2448
40 .684 781 1377 1527 1532 2786
45 .765 874 1540 1708 1714 3116
50 .845 965 1701 1887 1893 3442
55 .924 1055 1860 2063 2070 3763
60 1.000 1142 2013 2233 2240 4073
Design Tension Multiplier = 2 sin(a)
2
Refer to page 25-06-01 for additional conductor design tensions.
Forces and Angles ` R

Overhead Revised 03/07 25-06-03
Determining Guy Angles By Lead/Height Ratios
Guy Angle(A)=tan-(Lead/Height)
HO
LO
Guy Angle L/H Guy Angle L/H Guy Angle L/H
10, 0.1763 37' 0.7536 64' 2.0503
ill 0.1944 38' 0.7813 65' 2.1445
12' 0.2126 39' 0.8098 66' 2.2460
13° 0.2309 40° 0.8391 67° 2.3559
14' 0.2493 41° 0.8693 68' 2.4751
15' 0.2679 42' 0.9004 69' 2.6051
16° 0.2867 43° 0.9325 70° 2.7475
17' 0.3057 44° 0.9657 71° 2.9042
18' 0.3249 45' 1.0000 72' 3.0777
19° 0.3443 46° 1.0355 73° 3.2709
20° 0.3640 47° 1.0724 74° 3.4874
21° 0.3839 48° 1.1106 75° 3.7321
22' 0.4040 49° 1.1504 76° 4.0108
23' 0.4245 50° 1.1918 77° 4.3315
24' 0.4452 51° 1.2349 78° 4.7046
25' 0.4663 52' 1.2799 79' 5.1446
26° 0.4877 53° 1.3270 80° 5.6713
27° 0.5095 54° 1.3764 81° 6.3138
28' 0.5317 55' 1.4281 82' 7.1154
29' 0.5543 56' 1.4826 83' 8.1443
30° 0.5774 57° 1.5399 84' 9.5144
31' 0.6009 58' 1.6003 85' 11.4301
32' 0.6249 59' 1.6643 86' 14.3007
33' 0.6494 60' 1.7321 87' 19.0811
34' 0.6745 61' 1.8040 88' 28.6363
35' 0.7002 62' 1.8807 89' 57.2900
36' 0.7265 63' 1.9626 90, 00
�PO�R,. Forces and Angles

Overhead Revised 03/10 25-07-01
Conductor Data
Bare Conductor Diameter, Weight, and Strength
Conductor Conductor Ultimate
CU Code Diameter Weight Length Strength
Cat. ID Code Name Size Type (Inches) (Ibs/ft) (ft/Ibs) (Pounds)
AI Alloy
3449 DA2 Ames #2 AAAC 7 .316 .0727 13.755 2800
3452 DA20 Anaheim 2/0 AAAC 7 .447 .1459 6.854 5390
3453 DA40 Alliance 4/0 AAAC 7 .563 .2318 4.314 8560
Aluminum
28470 DA336 Tulip 336 Al 19 .666 .3160 3.165 6150
28475 DA795 Arbutus 795 Al37 1.026 .7464 1.340 13900
ACSR
28457 DR4 Swanate #4 7/1 .257 .0670 14.925 2360
3450 DR2 Sparate #2 7/1 .325 .1067 9.372 3640
DR10 Raven 1/0 6/1 .398 .1452 6.887 4380
28469 DR20 Quail 2/0 6/1 .447 .1831 5.461 5310
3455 DR40 Penguin 4/0 6/1 .563 .2911 3.435 8350
3457 DR397 Ibis 397 26/7 .783 .5469 1.828 16300
3460 - Starling 715 26/7 1.051 .9850 1.015 28400
Copper
3500 DC8 - #8 Cu Sld .1285 .0500 20.000 826
3501 DC6 - #6 Cu Sld .1620 .0794 12.594 1280
3502 DC4 - #4 Cu Sld .2043 .1263 7.918 1970
DC3 - #3 Cu Sld .2294 .1593 6.277 2439
28816 DC2 - #2 Cu 7 .2920 .2049 4.880 3045
3506 DC1 - #1 Cu 7 .328 .2584 3.870 3804
3507 DCO - 1/0 Cu 7 .368 .3258 3.069 4752
3508 DC20 - 2/0 Cu 7 .414 .4109 2.434 5926
3509 DC40 - 4/0 Cu 7 .522 .6533 1.531 9154
3510 DC250 - 250 Cu 19 .574 .7719 1.296 11360
3520 500 Cu 19 .811 1.5440 0.648 21590
Copperweld
3656 - - 3#10 - .220 .0871 11.481 3509
3658 - - 3#8 - .277 .1385 7.220 5174
9-1/2D - .174 .0565 17.699 1743
3659 DCW8A - 8A - .199 .0743 13.459 2233
3660 DCW6A - 6A - .230 .1016 9.843 2585
3661 DCW4A 4A - .290 .1615 6.192 3938
3662 DCW2A - 2A - .366 .2568 3.894 5876
Steel
3664 D3SS - 6-3SS-80 - .252 .112 8.929 2604
Iron
#9 Fe Sld .148 .06 16.667 785
#6 Fe Sld .203 .112 8.929 1475
M''- DiA IHO
�wPOWER Conductor Data

25-07-02 Revised 03/10 Overhead
Bare Conductor Resistance, Reactance, and Loading Values
Reactance Med. Loading (Ibs/ft)
Conductor AC Resistance* at 4 foot Vertical Horizontal
Conductor CU Code (Ohms/1000 ft) Equivalent (Wt+ (4 Ibs per
Type Code Name Size Type @ 50°C @ 80*C Spacing 1/4" Ice) sq foot)
AI Alloy
3449 DA2 Ames #2 AAAC 7 .2872 .3143 .1324 .2487 .2720
3452 DA20 Anaheim 2/0 AAAC 7 .1432 .1567 .1250 .3626 .3157
3453 DA40 Alliance 4/0 AAAC 7 .0902 .0987 .1200 .4846 .3543
Aluminum
28470 DA336 Tulip 336 Al 19 .0580 .0642 .1206 .6008 .3887
28475 DA795 Arbutus 795 Al37 .0249 .0275 .1104 1.1431 .5087
ACSR
28457 DR4 Swanate #4 7/1 .4778 .5291 .1559 .2246 .2523
3450 DR2 Sparate #2 7/1 .3097 .3429 .1539 .2855 .2750
DR10 Raven 1/0 6/1 .1992 .2206 .1559 .3467 .2993
28469 DR20 Quail 2/0 6/1 .1616 .1789 .1529 .3998 .3157
3455 DR40 Penguin 4/0 6/1 .1078 .1194 .1419 .5439 .3543
Merlin 336 18/1 .0575 .0637 .1173 .6557 .3947
3457 DR397 Ibis 397 26/7 .0483 .0535 .1154 .8680 .4277
3460 - Starling 715 26/7 .0269 .0298 .1086 1.3895 .5170
Copper
3500 DC8 - #8 Cu Sld .7342 .8099 .1578 .1677 .2095
3501 DC6 - #6 Cu Sld .4618 .5094 .1528 .2075 .2207
3502 DC4 - #4 Cu Sld .2904 .3204 .1472 .2675 .2348
DC3 - #3 Cu Sld .2258 .2490 .1445 .3083 .2431
28816 DC2 - #2 Cu 7 .1827 .2015 .1406 .3714 .2640
3506 DC1 - #1 Cu 7 .1449 .1598 .1379 .4381 .2760
3507 DCO - 1/0 Cu 7 .1148 .1267 .1353 .5179 .2893
3508 DC20 - 2/0 Cu 7 .0912 .1006 .1326 .6173 .3047
3509 DC40 - 4/0 Cu 7 .0575 .0634 .1271 .8933 .3407
3510 DC250 - 250 Cu 19 .0487 .0537 .1230 1.0281 .3580
3520 - - 500 Cu 19 .0247 .0272 .1161 1.8739 .4370
Copperweld
3656 - - 3#10 - 1.3226 1.4596 .1690 .2332 .2400
3658 - - 3#8 - .8318 .9179 .1637 .3023 .2590
- - 91/21D - 1.1166 1.2322 .1667 .1883 .2247
3659 DCWBA - 8A - .7527 .8307 .1591 .2139 .2330
3660 DCW6A - 6A - .4736 .5227 .1546 .2508 .2433
3661 DCW4A - 4A - .2978 .3286 .1493 .3294 .2633
3662 DCW2A - 2A - .1873 .2067 .1440 .4483 .2887
Steel
3664 D3SS - 6-3SS-80 - 2.1870 2.4522 .3728 .2681 .2507
Iron
- #9 Fe Sid 4.1287 4.7673 1.1266 .1837 .2160
- #6 Fe Sld 2.3471 2.7101 .9864 .2528 .2343
* Use 50°C resistances for voltage drop,fault current,and economic conductor sizing calculations;the 80°C resistances to
calculate conductor thermal ampacities.
Conductor Data ` R,,

Overhead Revised 03/10 25-07-03
Multiplex Conductor Dimensions and Weight
Code Diameter(Inches) Insulation Weight Length
Cat. ID CU Code Name Size Type Phase Neutral Thickness (in) (Ibs/ft) (ft/lbs)
Quadruplex Aluminum
28804 D(S)4P4 Hackney #4 Al 7 Str .232 .250 .045 .236 4.237
28476 D(S)4P2 Mustang #2 Al 7 Str .292 .292 .045 .326 3.067
28478 D(S)4P20 Grullo 2/0 Al 7 Str .414 .447 .060 .685 1.456
28805 D(S)4P40 Appaloosa 4/0 Al 19 Str .522 .563 .060 1.045 .957
Triplex Aluminum
3474 D(S)3P6 Voluta 96 Al 7 Str .184 .198 .045 .118 8.475
29010 D(S)3P2 Clam 92 Al Str .292 .292 .045 .238 4.202
28477 D(S)3P20 Runcina 2/0 Al 7 Str .414 .447 .060 .528 1.894
3479 D(S)3P40 Zuzara 4/0 Al 19 Str .522 .563 .060 .794 1.259
Duplex Aluminum
28803 DS2P6 Shepherd #6 Al 7 Str .184 .198 .045 .077 12.987
Weatherproof Conductor Dimensions and Weight
Bare Strand Insulation Weight Length
Cat. ID CU Code Size Type Dia. (Inches) Thickness (in) (Ibs/ft) (ft/lb)
Copper
3521 DWC6 #6 Cu Wp Sld .162 .030 .087 11.494
3522 DWC4 #4 Cu Wp Sld .204 .030 .135 7.407
28812 DWC2 #2 Cu Wp 7 Str .292 .045 .2289 4.369
3524 2/0 Cu Wp 7 Str .414 .060 .464 2.154
28813 4/0 Cu Wp 7 Str .522 .060 .723 1.383
28814 350 Cu Wp 19 Str .678 .060 1.1509 0.869
28815 500 Cu Wp 37 Str .813 .075 1.6454 0.608
ONPOMR,. Conductor Data

25-07-04 Revised 03/10 Overhead
Multiplex Conductor OD, Strength, Resistance, and Reactance
Complete AC
Cable Ultimate Resistance Inductive
OD* Breaking (Ohms/Kft) Reactance
Cat. ID CU Code Size Type (inches) Strength @ 50*C @ 75*C (Ohms/Kft)
Quadruplex Aluminum
28804 D(S)4P4 #4 Al 7 Str .74 1860 .4643 .5062 .0348
28476 D(S)4P2 #2 Al 7 Str .87 1350 .2920 .3183 .0335
28478 D(S)4P20 2/0 Al 7 Str 1.24 5300 .1457 .1588 .0322
28805 D(S)4P40 4/0 Al 7 Str 1.50 8350 .0917 .0999 .0311
Triplex Aluminum
3474 D(S)3P6 #6 Al 7 Str .550 1190 .7383 .8048 .0304
29010 D(S)3P2 #2 Al 7 Str .770 1350 .2920 .3183 .0277
28477 D(S)3P20 2/0 Al 7 Str 1.080 5300 .1457 .1588 .0264
3479 D(S)3P40 4/0 Al 19 Str 1.320 8350 .0917 .0999 .0257
Duplex Aluminum
28803 DS2P6 #6 Al 7 Str .47 1190 .7383 .8048 .0294
Weatherproof Conductor OD, Strength, Resistance, and Reactance
Complete AC
Cable Ultimatet Resistance$ Inductive
OD* Breaking (Ohms/Kft) Reactance
Cat. ID CU Code Size Type (inches) Strength @ 50°C @ 75*C (Ohms/Kft)
Copper
3521 DWC6 #6 Cu Wp Sld .222 1280 .4527 .4899 .1206
3522 DWC4 #4 Cu Wp Sld .264 1970 .2841 .3081 .1153
28812 DWC2 #2 Cu Wp 7 Str .386 3045 .1832 .1993 .1057
3524 2/0 Cu Wp 7 Str .534 5926 .0912 .1006 .0965
28813 4/0 Cu Wp 7 Str .642 9154 .0575 .0634 .0912
28814 350 Cu Wp 19 Str .803 15140 .0350 .0381 .0841
28815 500 Cu Wp 37 Str .967 21590 .0248 .0269 .0797
* OD=Outside Diameter
j Use the 50°C resistances for voltage drop,fault current,and economic conductor sizing calculations;the 80°C resistances
to calculate conductor thermal ampacities.
$ Ultimate breaking strength values listed for multiplex conductors are for the neutral messenger,acting alone.
Conductor Data W` W

Overhead Revised 03/10 25-07-05
Conductor Ampacity
The following tables list thermal limits which are maximum values beyond which permanent damage is
likely to occur to the conductor,the insulation, or both.
Emergency ampacity ratings are for situations where these limits will not generally last for more than 24
hours. Caution must be used when applying these emergency ratings to be sure that maximum continuous
ampacity for underground feeders or substation risers is not exceeded.
Ampacity Per Conductor for Bare Overhead Conductors
Summer 40°C(104°F) Winter 5°C(41°F)
Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
CU Code Continuous Emergency Continuous Emergency
Cat. ID Code Name Size Type Ampacityl Ampacity2 Ampacity3 Ampacity4
Bare Aluminum
Iris #2 Al 7 Str 197 239 275 302
Aster 2/0 Al 7 Str 305 371 426 469
Oxlip 4/0 Al 7 Str 407 497 557 630
28470 DA336 Tulip 336 Al 19 Str 536 656 757 835
Canna 397 Al 19 Str 597 731 844 931
Cosmos 477 Al 37 Str 672 824 950 1050
28475 DA795 Arbutus 795 Al 37 Str 932 1147 1321 1463
Aluminum Alloy
3449 DA2 Ames #2 AAAC 7 Str 204 249 285 315
3452 DA20 Anaheim 2/0 AAAC 7 Str 316 386 442 489
3453 DA40 Alliance 4/0 AAAC 7 Str 411 517 579 641
Bare Copper
3500 DC8 — #8 Cu Sld 101 122 140 154
3501 DC6 — #6 Cu Sld 135 163 188 206
3502 DC4 — #4 Cu Sld 181 219 251 276
— #4 Cu 7 Str 187 226 260 286
— #2 Cu Sld 242 293 336 370
28816 DC2 — #2 Cu 7 Str 250 303 348 383
3506 DC1 — #1 Cu 7 Str 289 350 402 443
3507 DCO — 1/0 Cu 7 Str 334 405 466 513
3508 DC20 — 2/0 Cu 7 Str 386 469 539 594
3509 DC40 — 4/0 Cu 7 Str 515 629 705 797
3510 DC250 — 250 Cu 19 Str 560 701 788 870
3520 — 500 Cu 19 Str 873 1071 1233 1364
— 1000 Cu 37 Str 1342 1658 1904 2115
All notes are located on page 25-07-08.
A'�10RHO
EMPOWER. Conductor Data

25-07-06 Revised 03/10 Overhead
Ampacity Per Conductor for Bare Overhead Conductors Continued
Summer 40°C(104°F) Winter PC(41°F)
Conductor Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
Cu Code Continuous Emergency Continuous Emergency
Cat. ID Code Name Size Type Ampacityl Ampacity2 Ampacity3 Ampacity4
Steel and Guy Wires
3667 7#10 Alumoweld 120 146 167 184
3669 3/8 EHS Guy Strand 115 140 160 178
3671 1/2 EHS Guy Strand 165 202 231 256
3664 D3SS 6-3SS — 69 83 96 105
Copperweld
3656 — — 3#10 — 87 105 120 132
3658 — — 3#8 — 116 140 161 177
— — 91/21) — 89 107 123 136
3659 DCW8A — 8A — 112 135 155 171
3660 DCW6A — 6A — 146 177 203 224
3661 DCW4A — 4A — 196 237 272 300
3662 DCW2A — 2A — 261 318 365 402
A CSR
28457 DR4 Swanate #4 7/1 Str 152 184 211 232
Sparrow #2 6/1 Str 202 219 281 277
3450 DR2 Sparate #2 7/1 Str 203 221 283 280
Robin #1 6/1 Str 233 283 325 358
DRO Raven 1/0 6/1 Str 270 328 376 415
28469 DR20 Quail 2/0 6/1 Str 312 379 435 480
3455 DR40 Penguin 4/0 6/1 Str 406 508 572 630
— Merlin 336 18/1 Str 541 662 763 843
— Linnet 336 26/7 Str 549 671 775 855
— Oriole 336 30/7 Str 553 676 781 862
— Chickadee 397 18/1 Str 604 738 852 940
3457 DR397 Ibis 397 26/7 Str 611 749 864 954
— Lark 397 30/7 Str 616 754 871 961
3460 — Starling 715 26/7 Str 891 1099 1268 1402
— Crow 715 54/7 Str 891 1095 1262 1395
— Redwing 715 30/19 Str 902 1109 1279 1414
— Drake 795 26/7 Str 959 1180 1360 1504
— Condor 795 54/7 Str 955 1175 1355 1498
— Mallard 795 30/19 Str 965 1190 1370 1515
All notes are located on page 25-07-08.
Conductor Data WWMRa
1�IDACORPCa 1Y

Overhead Revised 03/10 25-07-07
Ampacity Per Conductor for Multiplexed Insulated Conductors
Max Continuous Ampacity
TC=75°C(167°F):Wind=3 MPH
Cat. ID CU Code Size Type Summer 40°C(104°F) Winter 5°C(41°F)
Quadruplex Aluminum
28804 D(S)4P4 #4 Al 7 Str 97 147
28476 D(S)4P2 #2 Al 7 Str 129 196
28478 D(S)4P20 2/0 Al 7 Str 195 300
28805 D(S)4P40 4/0 Al 7 Str 260 402
Triplex Aluminum
3474 D(S)3P6 #6 Al 7 Str 83 124
29010 D(S)3P2 #2 Al 7 Str 142 215
28477 D(S)3P20 2/0 Al 7 Str 215 327
3479 D(S)3P40 4/0 Al 19 Str 292 449
Duplex Aluminum
28803 DS2P6 #6 Al 7 Str 83 124
Ampacity Per Conductor for Weatherproof Conductors
Max Continuous Ampacity
TC=75°C(167°F):Wind=3 MPH
Cat. ID CU Code Size Type Summer 40°C(104°F) Winter 5°C(41°F)
All Aluminum
32928 — 2/0 Al Wp 258 393
3628 — 4/0 Al Wp 349 528
3634 — 500 Al Wp 596 913
Copper
— #4 Cu Wp Sld 166 244
— #2 Cu Wp Sld 217 322
28812 — #2 Cu Wp 7 Str 223 331
— 1/0 Cu Wp 7 Str 293 429
3524 — 2/0 Cu Wp 7 Str 330 497
28813 — 4/0 Cu Wp 7 Str 441 668
— 250 Cu Wp 19 Str 492 746
28814 — 350 Cu Wp 19 Str 607 925
28815 — 500 Cu Wp 37 Str 750 1149
750 Cu Wp 61 Str 952 1467
1000 Cu Wp 61 Str 1130 1748
Verify compatible unit codes as needed.
All notes are located on page 25-07-08.
E�10RHO
�wPOWER Conductor Data

25-07-08 Revised 03/10 Overhead
Notes for the Tables on Pages 25-07-05, -06, and -07
Ampacity is the amount of current required to raise a conductor at a given ambient temperature to a given
conductor temperature. Steady state conditions for all overhead conductors include:
Wind speed=3 mph
Elevation=2,500'
Weather=full sunshine
Conductor emissivity=0.5 for bare conductors
=0.9 for weatherproof conductors
The following conditions apply to the bare overhead conductors:
Note Condition Ambient Temp. Conductor Temp.
1 Summer Continuous 40°C(104°F) 80°C(176°F)
2 Summer Emergency 40°C(104°F) 100°C(212°F)
3 Winter Continuous 5°C(41°F) 80°C(176°F)
4 Winter Emergency 5°C(41°F) 100°C(212°F)
All overhead ampacity calculations were made using a computer program written by Anaconda Wire and
Cable Company and modified by IPCo.
Conductor Data MWMRa
1�IDACORP CI­Y